: neat - . iv a oy Pay PN aati Sik! Mii on ak fe he oe "Sink tS
COP RLITGY EN ‘ =, y : : ¢ M22 te Nn NO a YM ag! ‘

OY AOR ee sc: ¥ se

POR tHpePEORDE
FOR EDVCATION ||
FOR SCIENCE =

LIBRARY
OF
THE AMERICAN MUSEUM

OF

NATURAL HISTORY

J 0, U8 iN Ay b

OF THE

ASIATIC SOCIETY OF BENGAL,

EDITED BY

THE SECRETARIES.

VOL. XXXIT.

Nos. I. to IV. and a Supplementary No.—1868.

ee,

1% will flourish, if naturalists, chemists, antiquaries, philologers, and men
of science in different parts of Asia, will commit their observations to writing,
and send them tothe Asiatic Society at Calcutta. It will languish if such
communications shall be long intermitted: and it will die away, if they shall
entirely cease.”

Siz Wm. Jonzs.

eee

CALCUTTA :

PRINTED BY C. B. LEWIS, BAPTIST MISSION PRESS.
1364,

aA

RM oe
he

y

CONTENTS.

No. 289.

On the Antiquities of the Peshawur District. Me) the Rev.
I. LonwENTHAL, Ke

Literary Intelligence, Correspondence, ‘ke. ys

Proceedings of the Asiatic Society for the months of J anuary
and February, USK) ohe

Abstract of the Results of the Hourly Meteor ological Observa-
tions, taken at the Surveyor General’s Office, Calcutta, for
the months of July, August and September, 1862,

pee

No. 290.

Bhoja Raja of Dhér and his Homonyms.—By Bébu RAsEn-
DRALALA Mirra,

Progress of the Trigonometrical Survey, being extracts from a
report from Major J. T. Waker, Engineers, Officiating
Superintendent, Great Trigonometrical Survey, to the Secre-
tury to Government of India, Military Department, BB)

On Dr. Gerard’s collection of fossils from the Spiti Valley, in
the Asiatic Society's Museum.—By Henry F. Buanrorp,
IDS Uke ae th hes iN (Crain

Remarks on the Bactro-Pali Inscription from Taxila. —By Ma-
jor-General A. CUNNINGHAM, a

Note on Major-General A. Cunningham’ s remarks on the Bac-
tro-Pali Taxila Inscription. uhh Babu RAsENDRALALA M1-
TRA, eae ee

On Ancient Sanskrit Numerals. _By Dr. BHav Dasr of
Bombay, ne

Literary Intelligence, Correspondence, &e. us

Postseript from Major-Ger eral Cunningham, =

Proceedings of the Asiatic Society for the months of March
and April, 1863,

Abstract of the Results of the Hourly Meteorological Observa-
tions taken at the Surveyor General’s Office, Calcutta, for
the months of October, November and December, 1862,

91.

111

124
139

15]

Wo (ile!)

167
172

173

XXY

1v Contents.

No. 291.

On the Flora of Behar and the mountain Parasnath, with a
list of the species collected by Messrs. Hooker, EpGEwortH,
THomson and AnDERSON.—By THomas ANDERSON, Esq.
M. D., Officiating Superintendent of the Botanic Gardens,
Calcutta,

Meracsmela on the Peshaw ur Valley, ce ‘regarding its
Flora.— By J. L. Stewart, Esq. M. D., ie

Remarks on a stone inscription from the ruins of Pu- -gin 0 on
the Irrawady river.—By Lieut.-Col. A. P. Puaynzg, C. B.
Bengal Statf Corps,

Memorandum on some medals and coins in the Museum of the
Asiatic Society, found near Mergui on the Tenasserim Coast.
——By Lieut.-Col. A. P. PHayrn, C. B. Bengal Staff Corps, ..

Two ancient Sanskrita Inscriptions from Central India; texts,
translations and comments.—By Babu RAsenDRALALA Mr-
TRA, ae ae soe ef oe

Proceedings of the Asiatic Society of Bengal for the months of
May, June and July, 1863,

Abstract of the Results of the Hourly Meteorological Observa-
tions taken at the Surveyor General’s Office, Calcutta, for the
months of January, February and March, 1863,

No. 292.

Contributions to Indian Malacology, No. IV. Descriptions of
new land shells from Ava, and other parts of Burma.—By
Wittr1am T. Buanrorp, Associate of the Royal School of
Mines, F. G.S.,

A Memoir on the Rats and Mice of India. —By Epwarp
IB TVEE

Notes on the distribution of Indian terrestrial ‘Gasteropoda
considered with reference to its bearing on the origin of
species.—By W. Turopaxp, Jr., ...

Account of a visit to the hot springs of Pai in the Tavoy dis-
trict.—By Capt. J. F. Stevenson, Deputy Commissioner, ...

A Visit to Xiengmai, the principal City of the Laos or Shan
States—By Sir Ropert H. Scoompurer, Kt., F. B.S.,
Her Majesty’s Consul at Siam, __...

Notes on the tribes of the Eastern Frontier, No. L —By joEe
O’DoneEt, Esq., Revenue Surveyor of Arracan,

Notes on the Tribes of the Hastern Frontier, No. I1.—By J. H.
O’DonEt, Esq., Revenue Surveyor of Arracan, ...

Notes onthe Tribes of the Eastern ae NOs WUE —By
H. J. Reynoxps, Esq.,

Aornos.—By Lieut.-Colonel J. Apporn,

Letter on the Taxila Inscription Grate Professor Vo ewee
Sandhurst College,

Page

189
219

267

271

273
288

xlix

319
327

354
383

387
400
404

407
4,09

421

Contents. Vv

Page
Proceedings of the Asiatic Society of Bengal for the months of
August, September and October, 1863, 431
Abstract of the Hourly Meteorological Observations taken at
the Surveyor General’s Office, Calcutta, for the months of
April, May, June and July, 1863, Ve . lxxii

Supplementary No.

Colonel Cunningham’s Archeological Survey ala for 1861-
62, communicated by the Government of India,.. i

N,
BM

¥

Contents.

LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS, &c.

/Sculptures from Naogram, Plates I. and II., ...... To face pase,
2 The Thaneswar or Pehewa Inscription, ~...
~Aossil Shells from the Spiti Valley, Plates I. to IV.,
Inscription from Pu-gan, ©
-Medals and Coins found near Me reui, Plate XI.
» Ditto ditto, Plates XII. to XVII.,

Vil

272

Jour: of the Asiatic Society Plate 1,

Calentta 1862.

.L.Frazer L
SCULPTURES FROM NAOGRAM.
(lustrate the kha # I) Loowernthals paper )

‘ (odod spPypuan207] [pIPJ VY) 20-4879) A} ) 3
WVHXGQVN WOHS SAYNLdAIINIS

Vy lezen TH

“AOST VHLD

Os

: TL Q id

JOURNAL

OF THE

wOPATIG SOG] EA Y.

No. I. 1863.

LLL I OOOO

away

On the Antiquities of the Peshawur District.—By the Rev. I.
LOEWENTHAL.

Saint-Martin, in his Mémoire Analytique sur la Carte de l’ Asie,
in endeavouring to identify Hiouen-Thsang’s Ou-to-kia-han-t’cha, not
with Atok, but with Hund, mistaking the pronunciation of the lat-
ter name, complains in reference to Yusufzai and the region about
Peshawur that Malhewreusement nous sommes ici sur un terrain dont
Peaploration archéologique est a peine entamée. And it is too true.
Whilst the Mahomedans of Northern Africa and of Western Asia
not only do not prevent the enterprising Englishman from digging
up their graves, but lend even a helping hand in the work, the most
interesting localities in the immediate neighbourhood of British
territory are utterly forbidden ground to any adventurous archeolo-
gist, on account of the unmanageable nature of the independent
frontier tribes. And yet, few regions, out of the realm of soil made
memorable by either classical or religious associations, would yield
a richer harvest of the materials with which to eke out the records
of history, than the plains and the hills now almost or altogether
within sight of British cantonments. Few even of the scores of
mounds* which cover the plain of Yusufzai, have as yet been in any

* Since writing the above I have received an interesting communication from
Major Burroughs, H. M. 93rd Highlanders, in reference to the mounds which
are such a feature of the Yusufzai plain,—an extract from which may perhaps
not be unacceptable. In speaking of the Broughs or Paecht’s Houses in Orkney,
he says:

**'Vhese ‘ Broughs’ are to all outward appearance mere mounds of earth like

the tumuli scattered over the plains of the Panjab and throughout the valley of
Peshawur, excepting that in the valley of Peshawur they appear always to be

B

2 On the Antiquities of the Peshawur District. [No. 1,

way investigated, much less opened; and still fewer have been the
attempts to search the hills which abut on this plain, although every
attempt in this direction has been abundantly rewarded. Some of
these latter, indeed, require description even more than search, as the
remains of buildings on them alone are most remarkable. A late
visit to three of these localities, induces me to say a few words, by
no means by way of description in the least degree exhaustive, but
rather by way of direction for any one with more leisure, and with
more previous acquaintance with Indian, Buddhist, and Bactrian
antiquities, than I have, to do these interesting subjects justice.

The hill of Takhti Bai, or Bahat, as it is called by the natives,
has been frequently mentioned, and must have been described before
this. It is an isolated, barren hill of no great height, about eight
miles west of Fort Hoti Mardan in Yusufzai. It forms, irregularly,
three sides of a square, with the open side towards the North-west.
The inner slopes of this hill are covered with the still standing shells
of lofty buildings, constructed of hewn stones; most of them are of
at least two stories, the openings for the beams of the upper floor

covered with bits of broken pottery, which I have not noticed elsewhere.” [This
opinion that a// the mounds are covered with broken pottery, though very gene-
ral, is not correct : many are.| ‘‘I have come across these same tumuli in the
Orkney Islands (in the north of Scotland), about Stonehenge on Salisbury
Plain in England, on and about the battle-field of the Alma, on the Plateau of
Sebastopol and about Kertch and Yenikale in the Crimea; and here again on the
plains of the Punjab and in the valley of Peshawur. To all outward appearance,
they are alike. On the Plateau north of the Alma, these tumuli were generally
in great circles with intervals between each tumulus of about halfa mile. At
nearly every point along the ridge of the Plateau of Sebastopol overlooking the
Tchernaya, where the French, Turks and British had thrown up batteries, was a
tumulus to be found. The white telegraph tower on the battle field of the Alma,
captured by the Zouaves was built on an old tumulus. The tumuli on the plain
between Peshawur and Hoti Mardan are also dotted in cireles. At Stennis in
Orkney and at Stonehenge in England a druidical circle of standing stones is to
be seen in the centre of the great circle of tumuli.” [There is such a circle of
standing stones also at Shewa in Yusufzai, to which the people there attach very
superstitious notions. The Khan of the place told me that he had frequently
placed men to count the stones, but the stones kept increasing aud decreasing in
number the whole time that they were being counted, and the same number
would not come cut twice. There is a single stone of the same nature, with a
broken one at a little distance from it, some miles to the south of Shewa, in the
ynidst of the Mera (or desert) near a mound,| “I was at the opening of a tumu-
Jus, on my own property in the Island of Ronsay in Orkney, which was in shape
like a bee-hive under ground. A large stone covered tle opening and over the
stone was some two or three feet of earth. It was about twelve feet hich from
the floor inside to the aperture. There was an aperture below leading to some
underground passages. It was close to the seashore and was called by the peo-
ple a ‘ Paecht’s House.’”

1863. ] On the Antiquities of the Peshawur District. 3

and the windows remaining to attest the fact. They were construct-
ed with much care, the walls being smooth and straight, showing
signs also of having been stuccoed or at least plastered. The build-
ings are of various sizes; the steps leading to the upper story being
either outside the building, or attached inside closely to the outer
wall, the vacant space under the staircase being generally fitted up
as a cell. The stone of which these buildings were constructed is
found on the spot; the blocks are well hewn and carefully fitted.
The centre of all these structures is formed by a quadrangle consist-
ing of cells closely resembling in structure the altar in figure No. 10;
that is, they consist of a square base, open in front, of little more
than a man’s height; this surmounted by a coping, which in shape
is the lower part of a paraboloidal vault; and a short cylinder con-
nects this coping with a hemispherical cupola which is open at the
top. (Single cells, or perhaps altars, of this kind, though much
larger in size, are found in various spots all over the hill.) One side
of the quadrangle has an opening as a doorway to which steps led from
an enclosure round the quadrangle. Its centre is occupied by the ruins
of a raised platform, whose sides were adorned with figures in stucco
or stone. Close to this quadrangle there is what may readily be con-
sidered a vaulted subterranean passage, though from the fact that
the debris everywhere conceal the original level, there is great un-
certainty as to its real depth below the original level of the ground.
It may have been a bauli. ‘There is no water on the hill now any
where; the Pushto word Bahai means a bauli; yet there is a possi-
bility that Baha, the name of this hill, may be connected with the
old Vihara.

Another most interesting hill showing many remains of Buddhist
tines, which I ascended, is on the Buner frontier, the nearest British
village being that of Babuzai. It is very much higher than the hill
of Bahai. The ascent from the Hast, from the Sudum valley, is said
to be easy and readily performed by mules; that from the other side
I must call toilsome and steep, for the most part, differing in this
respect very much from the ascent of Bahai, which is easy, along a
well-trodden path which exhibits in several places very distinet traces
of steps cut in the rock, for great distances. A portion of the way
up, however, led along the channel of a mountain stream, then dry
(April 25th,) whose banks—if banks can be spoken of where rocks

B 2

L On the Antiquities of the Peshawur District. [ No. 1,

and large boulders conceal both the banks and the torrent’s bed—
were covered with an impermeable thicket of a magnificent flora;
trees blazing with an indescribable profusion of gorgeous blossoms ;
shrubbery bending under the weight of fragrant flowers of the most
pleasing colours; palm trees waving over head; with sequestered
eave-like nooks, partly artificial, constructed over cool springs, traces
of terraces, remains of tanks and water-courses,—all spoke of men of
taste as well as enterprise, who had chosen and beautified this spot as
their abode. There are a few caves scattered over the side of the moun-
tain, but the most remarkable of all is a large cave near the summit,
which was pointed out by General Court, many years ago, in the
eighth volume of the Journal, when on p. 312 he wrote as follows:
“The cave Cashmeer Ghar, situated in the territory of the Baboo-
zeis, on a mountain which cannot be ascended but by a steep passage,
hewn in a great measure out of the rock. This place is also called
Pelley, and is sixteen koss from the town of Soukhor. The cave is
said to be of an immeasurable depth, and to have so large an aper-
ture that it is impossible to discern the direction by casting in a
stone. As both sides of the entrance are of solid masonry, and the
front is encumbered with enormous cut stones, one would imagine that
it is one of the subterraneous temples attributed to the Pandoovans, or
to the Caffres. At present it is a place of shelter for myriads of
wood-pigeons. Quite close to it are visible the traces of a town or
castle whence idols are sometimes dug up; a basin also is observable
there, continually supplied with water. I had been assured that an
inscription was discoverable, but my men could trace none whatever.”
I transfer the passage in order to correct a few of the statements,
as General Court was entirely dependant on information derived from
natives. The cave is not hewn out of the rock, but is almost alto-
gether natural. The place is not called Pelley. He must have con-
founded it with a place of that name, some miles to the north of
Baébiizai, not within British territory, which I was told by the Af-
ghans is remarkable for extensive ruins and mounds. What General
Court calls Soulkhor, is undoubtedly an error of type or a mistake of
the pen for Lund-Khor ; but this town is hardly more than fen miles
to the west of Babiizai. How the name Kashmirt Ghar or Kashmirté
Smuss (both ghar and smuss being Pushto for cave) originated, is
perhaps hard to tell. The idea of the natives is, that the extent of

1863. | On the Antiquities of the Peshawur District. 5

the cave cannot be measured, but that the opening at the other end
of itisin Kashmir. The last portion of the ascent to the mouth of
the cave itself is extremely difficult. The cave consists of several
chambers of unequal size; the outer one, which is very lofty, is dis-
tinguished only by a very few stalactites. The interior contains
flights of almost uncountable steps, and buildings, whose nature can-
not, however, be fully ascertained without some excavation. But
such a work presents here unusual difficulty, not only on account of
the comparative inaccessibility of the place, and its distance from the
nearest village at which labourers could be obtained, but also because
pigeons’ and bats’ excrements have accumulated in the cave for cen-
turies. ‘Two inscriptions were spoken of by the natives as existing
somewhere in the cave, but I did not see them. Indeed, the only
inseription which I have seen anywhere during this tour, is on an
unshapen piece of rock lying at the entrance of the village of Zeda,
in the south-eastern corner of the Yusufzai plain. The character is
Bactrian, as well as I was able to see, the stone lying under a great
heap of manure, upside down, and with the inseribed surface to-
wards a wall. I was not able, during the day that I was at Zeda, to
obtain a facsimile or even a copy of it. On various terraces and
natural plateaus below the Kashmiri Smuss there are numerous re-
mains of buildings very much like those at Bahai as well as like
those on a hill near Waogram, between the British frontier and the
Indus.

One of the most marked features among the remains on this latter
hill Gt is about 1000 feet high) are very large rocks and boulders
scattered about, which have been carefully excavated for cells; many
of these are quite plain inside, whilst others have the simple orna-
ment of a niche or two. The summit of the hill offers a flat plateau
of some size, which had been very strongly fortified by buildings all
round the brow. ‘These buildings are constructed of large blocks of
stone (conglomerate, found on the spot) neatly hewn and carefully
fitted, disposed with very great.regularity and laid in a cement of
extraordinary excellence ; unavoidable interstices between the large
blocks are filled up by layers of thin small stone tablets; this latter
practice being an invariable feature in all the so-called Kafir build-
ings which I have seen in the Trans-Indus country. To judge from
the smooth turf and the vegetation in the middle of the plateau, it

6 On the Antiquities of the Peshawur District. [No. 1,

is highly probable that the space in the middle was not built upon
except one spot very nearly in the centre, where there seems to have
been a shrine cr an altar.

One of the best preserved buildings at a corner of this plateau still
exhibits some chambers which convey a good idea of the internal
structure of these ancient remains. A gateway with a pointed arch
leads into a long chamber whose ceiling is formed by a prolongation
of the arch of the gateway. ‘The arch would be pointed, but the
centre line is taken up by a narrow rectangular groove. This cir-
cumstance leads to the supposition, that the arch is not a true arch,
but is formed by the stones being disposed on one another in the
form of steps, whose lower corners were eventually cut away. There
is another chamber, accessible from the long passage through a low
opening, but it is quite dark, and to a great extent filled with rub-
bish ; whether it was left dark intentionally, or whether superincum-
bent ruins are closing up what may have been an opening, I could
not ascertain without digging. A similar passage and chamber (or
rather two chambers opposite each other) are also found on Bahai.
On the plateau are found multitudes of figures in fragments, many
of them, perhaps most, being the figure of Buddh (Sakya Muni)
with his smooth, placid face, in his simple robe with ample pic-
turesque drapery, elongated ear-lappets, and a halo round his head.
The figures are either standing, or sitting cross-legged, with the bare
soles of the feet turned upwards; the hands are frequently crossed
over the breast, so however that the tips of the fingers of the left
hand enter the hollow of the right; sometimes the hands rest in the
lap ; sometimes the right hand is lifted up as if in the act of blessing.

These figures are of dark blue or greenish slate of great brittleness,
though not friable; they are of all sizes up to colossal. Then there
are multitudes of haut-reliefs, but few of any good degree of pre-
servation. ‘lhe vegetation on the hill is principally olive and myrtle,
At the foot of this hill to the north there begins a series of low
mounds extending far into the interior. A very few of these in the
immediate vicinity of the frontier have been partly excavated through
Captain Shortt, Assistant Commissioner, and sculptured remains
from these mounds are now in Hoti Mardan, and in the museum at
Peshawur. A few of these have been photographed by two officers,
and I enclose copies of them.

1863. | On the Antiquities of the Peshawur District. 7

No. 1. A slab 13°14 inches in width, and 83 inches high, consi-
derably abraded, representing a domestic scene. The execution is
unusually coarse. The first and third figures from the right are
evidently females ; they have shoes on their feet, whilst the figure
between them with the right hand lifted up, has the feet bare. The
first, second, and third figures on the right have ali earrings; the
sitting female has a chadar over her head. The first and second
figures on the right are seated on a bolstered couch, each having a
footstool. The seated male figure has an ornamented head-dress, a
necklace, and another ornament going over the left and under the
right shoulder. The standing female figure has what appears to be
a towel in her hands, which may be connected with the nude child on
the knees of the next sitting bearded figure, the upper part of whose
body is also nude: he appears seated on a mora. The next is also a
male figure, but much mutilated. The ornamental architecture form-
ing the ceiling of the room, cannot fail to strike the beholder.

No. 2. The figure of a king—four feet five inches in height.

Hindu dress ; tilak on the forehead, smooth chin, neat moustache,
elaborate earrings. The head is covered with strings of pearls and
precious stones, presenting in front the shape of a diadem or crown,
whilst the two ends of a fillet appear on the circular plane behind
the head. Four different strings of ornaments, such as are still worn
by Hindus, are suspended from his neck. A very rich necklace,
encircling the neck, is of precisely the shape and workmanship which
belongs to those one sees now worn by the higher officers at the
Court of the Maharajah of Kashmir. <A longer string lies over the
necklace, and is fastened, over the breast-bone, by a richly worked
clasp consisting of two open-mouthed animal’s heads. Two other
strings with amulets come from under the necklace, the one thrown
over, the other under the right shoulder. The figure has also amu-
lets on both arms, and two bangles on the wrist of the left hand,
The right hand is broken off at a place where most of the figures
found have the hand, which is made of another piece, joined to the
arm ; usually where there is a joint of this kind, it is very skilfully
and artistically managed. The dhoti and chadar fall in rich and
graceful folds, the latter ending in an elaborate tassel. There are
sandals on the feet held by a string. The pedestal presents an altar
or large urn in the centre, with two human figures on each side,

8 On the Antiquities of the Peshawur District. | Wiese

those on the right and one on the left in the attitude of supplication,
whilst the remaining one on the left appears to bring an offering.
Squat square pilasters form the two ends of the representation.

There are many other figures of this kind, of greatly varying sizes
which have been found near Naogram as well as near Tahkal.

No. 3. A slab 20 inches in width, 13 inches high.

The execution is better than that of No. 1, and only the figures
at the ends are slightly mutilated. The centre figure is_a colossal
Buddh in the usual unadorned dress, his waving hair gathered ina
top knot, the lobes of the ears much elongated, a halo round the
head, and feet bare. The left hand, as is usual, holds a part of the
robe in a knot; the right hand appears to be taking a snake out of a
bush of gigantic flowers growing out of a piece of water. Facing
the Buddh is a figure whose dress is very similar to that of the
statue No. 2, his hands folded, in the attitude of supplication. The
figure between these two, under a tree, has the right hand raised
very much in the manner of a modern military salute. The figure
close to the left hand of the centre figure is one which occurs fre-
quently in the Naogram haut-reliefs: an aged bearded soldier, nude
to the waist, hair aw naturel, a short broad sword by his side, his
right holding an axe; the handle of the latter is gone, as about half
of the pedestal of the slab is broken off.

No. 4. A slab 19 inches in width, 12 high.

A Buddh sitting cross-legged on a bolstered pedestal, his right
hand lifted up as if in the act of blessing or teaching, a heavy fes-
toon of flowers surrounding the halo. Seven male figures on his
right, and six female figures on his left fill up the rest of the slab.
Of the male figures three have their hands folded, as in the attitude
of supplication ; two others of the. lower line appear to bring pre-
sents. The long waving hair of the two figures nearest to the right
hand of Buddh is noteworthy. Of the male figures two have mous-
taches, the farthest in the lower line, and the nearest in the upper.
Of the female figures two have anklets, all have bracelets ; the near-
est figure in the lower line appears to bring a present, whose nature
it is difficult to determine. ‘The execution is not neat, and the hands
and feet appear disproportionately large.

No. 5. A slab 14 inches wide, 9 high.

In the centre is a bearded figure, nude as far as visible, a Brah-

1863. | On the Antiquities of the Peshawur District. 9

minical string (apparently) over the left shoulder. The figure
appears standing behind a table with carved legs, the carving on the
two legs which are visible not being precisely alike ; in front appears
the drapery of a table cloth ; on the table are five round objects, the
bearded figure seeming to hold a sixth of the same description. In
front of the table there is a small object on a pedestal, which closely
resembles what appears from other sculptures to be a fire-altar; the
upper portion of the top forms a cover, which hangs by a hinge from
the side of the vase-like lower portion of the top, from which a flame
seems to issue. The figure on the right hand of the central figure
ig dressed in an ample-sleeved shirt, which is confined round the loins
by a girdle with a clasp in front; trousers, shoes, and a turban with
pendant end complete the dress of this figure, a dress, moreover,
which may be seen, at the present day, worn by the hillmen one
meets with in Kashmir. A palm tree is visible behind this figure.
The figure on the opposite side is dressed in the usual ample Asiatic
robe and sheet, the feet bare: the left hand bears an undistinguish-
able object. The two figures in the background have lost their faces.
The figure in the frame stands on a vase-like pedestal and has the
hands folded. This slab, taken in connection with other sculptures,
belonging to the same building doubtless, offers a curious combina-
tion of the elements of various religions: the tilak, the brahminical
thread, and the fire-altar, together with that ubiquitous Buddh !

No. 6. A panel filling up a pointed arch; width at the base 26
inches, greatest height 25 inches.

Three subjects divided by ornamental lines, the outer one bordered
by a palm trunk.

The lowest represents Buddh sitting on a bolstered pedestal, which
latter is ornamented by a wheel; palm leaves over his head. Four
male figures on each side in the attitude of eager listeners ; three of
these on the one side, and two on the other have their heads and
faces shaven smooth ; their ears are natural, that is, the lappet is not
extended by any ornament; the figure nearest to Buddh’s uplifted
right hand, represents an old man with a long beard.

The scene above this, shows Buddh standing in the centre; what
appears to be a king kneeling before him on his right knee, with
hands joined in the position of a suppliant. Five figures behind the
king, dressed in a similar way, also appear as suppliants, the last

c

10 On the Antiquities of the Peshawur District. [No. 1,

reclining on one knee. The other side shows six figures; of the first
the head alone comes out distinctly and bears a close resemblance to
that of Buddh; an armed man lightly clad is the next figure; a
shaven figure in simple dress the next; this is followed by three
figures with ample hair and locks, dressed like the figures on the
opposite side, the last again reclining on one leg.

The centre of the scene at the top is filled by a large urn on an
ornamental pedestal and under a canopy. ‘This appears to be wor-
shipped by the figures on both sides, the last of which, on each side,
surpasses Horace’s imagination, since the upper part is a nude human
figure, and the lower what may be called the coils of a dragon with
dragon’s wing and horse’s foot, ending in a gigantic leaf by way
of tail!

There are two more figures with hands joined near the bottom of
the slab, supported by Corinthian capitals: these figures, much alike
in dress, ornament, and attitude, as they are, differ as to their head-
dress, the one on the right having flowing hair and a halo, and the
other what appears to be a carefully twisted turban, and no halo.

No.7. Aslab being a piece of one side of a square pillar; it is
30 inches long; width 13 inches at the base, J1 at the top. Five
compartments, three with Buddh sitting, two with Buddh standing ;
the halo is distinct in all but the topmost one. Of the four figures
beside Buddh in the lowest, two appear in the attitude of suppli-
eants; whilst the other two are bringing presents apparently. In
the next above, one of the shaven figures reappears ; the figure next
to this is too much mutilated to be recognized, and so is the object
held in the right hand of the figure facing Buddh. In the third
compartment the figures approaching Buddh appear to bring presents
as in slab No.4. In the second compartment from the top the
figures are much mutilated ; so they are in the topmost one, but it
can easily be distinguished that the two figures nearest Buddh offer
presents which are carried by their followers.

The two ends of each of these five compartments are formed by
pilasters with nude children in different postures. The sides of the
slab itself (the slab being about two inches thick) continue the same
pilaster-ornament.

No. 8. A figure of Buddh, 19 inches in height what there is of it,
as the feet are wanting. The right hand having been joined on to

1863. ] On the Antiquities of the Peshawur District. 11

the arm, has been lost. Multitudes of these figures, in sizes varying
from the neatest miniature of a few inches, to colossal figures 9 or
10 feet in height, are found everywhere.

No. 9, is the slab roughly described in my previous communica-
tion. It is 22 inches long, and 114 in width.

No. 10. A slab representing a sacrifice, apparently. It is 11
inches high, and 10 wide. The slab is broken in two in the centre.
A carefully executed scene of much interest. The building on the
left is precisely like a good number of well preserved ones at Bahai.
It is represented (as those in reality are) as built of hewn stones,
with a low entrance in front. In Bahai this lowest part of the build-
ing is usually square, as Rémusat describes the sthupa from the Fa
houa wen kiu; but in this haut-relief it appears with rounded cor-
ners. The rest of the representation does not differ from the rest of
the same kind of building in the ruins. A narrow, slightly sloping,
rounded half-dome surmounts the base, itself surmounted by a short
cylinder; on the top of this is a cupola with a small knob for its
apex. In the buildings of this sort on Bahai the knob is wanting,
and an opening appears in its place. In this representation a fire is
perceived to be burning inside the building, as flames issue at every
opening, and the figures about it, six im number, appear all engaged
in pouring oil on the fire. The lowest figure on the left, with its
back to the spectator, and a curly head of hair, is dressed only in a
dhoti and is lifting a jar from the ground. Half the jar is broken
off. To the left above is a similar figure on a ladder with a jar in-
verted in his hands, as if in the act of pouring out the contents on
the roof. On the opposite side, an old, bearded, faqir-like looking
man, his hair dressed precisely as the Sikhs dress theirs at the pre-
sent day, clothed in a shirt, and carrying a crooked pole in his left
hand, is pouring, with his right, the contents of a bottle on the lower
roof. Next to this figure is a man of smaller stature, otherwise very
like the last, with a smaller bottle in his left hand. Behind the latter
faqir is a stout, curly-headed figure, dressed in a dhoti, standing on a
ladder, in the act of taking a large jar from another figure, who is
carrying it on his left shoulder, and holding it with his right hand
passed over his head.

No. 1, the figure of a king sitting was excavated by Lieut. John-
stone from a mound near Lower Tahkal, a village between the Pesha-

c 2

12 On the Antiquities of the Peshawur District. [ No, 1,

wur cantonment and the Khyber Pass. The statue, as it may be
called, is 44 inches high, and 23 wide across the knees.

The figure is considerably mutilated, the entire right side above
the knee of the principal figure, and the heads of three of the small
ones being wanting; but what makes the figure remarkable is the
suggestion, which one is struck with on looking at it, of its being
probably a portrait. Many other figures with precisely similar dress
and ornaments have been found in most of the places where figures
have been found at all; but all the others present a smooth hand-
some face of great regularity of features, without much expression,
as if the artists had only intended to produce some ideal or conven-
tional head. The face of this figure, however, is far from being hand-
some or regular; there is a sternness in its mouth and chin, and a
certain fierceness in its prominent eyes ; the natural fall of the heavy
moustache also contrasts strongly with the waxed little ornament of
the upper lip found in the other figures of this kind. The whole
head is covered by a richly wrought combination of | strings of pearls
with variously shaped and sized representations of precious stones ;
a lion’s head over a heavy pearl garland surmounts the left temple.
The lobes of the ears are much elongated by heavy pearl earrings.
One lock of hair is visible behind the right ear. A necklace, and
another ornament falling over the left shoulder relieve the nude
thorax. A thick festoon of flowers seems, from its large curve, to
be hanging over both shoulders and down in front. The legs are
covered by a dhoti, and an izdrband is visible in the middle. The
bangled left hand (rudely worked) holds a heavy javelin to which a
bell is tied. The left foot rests upon a footstool.

The four small figures are enigmatical from being so much muti-
lated. The figure sitting on the same couch with the king near his
left knee is very coarse. It is quite nude, but has a fillet, a necklace
and anklets: it leans forward, with its hands upon its breast. ‘The
standing figure below is headless; its breast and shoulders are cover-
ed with scale-armour: a short petticoat goes from the loins to the
knees, and greaves cover the unmutilated legs; as there are no toes
visible, the feet, in the intention of the artist, are represented as
covered by shoes. The right hand bears a bunch of the same flowers
of which the thick festoon is composed. The left hand carries some-
thing indistinguishable. The upper figure on the right of the king
is also nude; the lower covered by a dhoti kneels on its right knee.

1863. | On the Antiquities of the Peshawur District. 18

No. 12. A slab found near Jamriud, the dismantled fort at the
mouth of the Khyber. It is 24 inches in height, and 18 wide.

Harem scenes. In the lower compartment, a male figure in the
usual dress of Buddh and with a halo round his head is seen sitting
on a couch, his left foot supported by a footstool Behind him lies
a female sleeping. Behind the sleeping figure another female figure
is visible. ‘The central figure seems to be about taking something
from the hand of the figure on his right. Below are two women
reclining on what appear to be drums. A lattice forms the upper
ornament of the chamber, and above the lattice appear four human
heads and the head of an ox; two of the human heads have halos,
and the other two have the same kind of cap or turban with which
the female figures below appear to be covered. Pillars separate the
centre apartment from two arched passages or gateways at the sides ;
over each arch appear two birds. In each of the gateways there are
two women, possibly as sentries, one of them holding a spear.

The upper compartment has suffered much from mutilation. The
principal figure, apparently the same as the central figure in the
_ lower compartment, is seen reclining on a couch, his face directed to-
wards a woman sitting on the same couch, her feet supported by a
footstool. The woman sitting on the ground appears to be beating
two drums with her hands. The female figure behind is holding
aloft a round object in her right hand, which may also be a musical
instrument. Outside the pillars supporting the arch of the centre
apartment appear three women on each side. One on the left is
entirely peeled off; another, standing, appears to be playing a wind-
instrument ; the action of the sitting one is indistinguishable. The
sitting female on the right appears playing a stringed instrument ;
the action of the other two cannot well be made out.

Before concluding this communication, I shall venture, though
with much diffidence, to say a word on one of the most vexed ques-
tions among all the perplexing ones referring to the ancient history
of the regions near the Indus, and that is, the identification of
Aornos, the height which it cost Alexander so much trouble to take.
It may seem presumption to renew the discussion of this subject
after the full treatment it has received in this Journal (Vol. XXIII.
Gradus ad Aornon) in Colonel Abbott’s able and elaborate article.
And yet, few attentive readers of that article can be satisfied with

14 On the Antiquities of the Peshawur District. [ Nowy

the conclusion ; indeed, there is sufficient evidence that the writer
himself was not satisfied with the conclusion, and that he gets rather
out of patience, and that justly, with his authorities, Arrian and
Curtius. Without absolute violence, it is quite impossible to reconcile
their discrepant statements; and not only are their statements
utterly discordant as to the locality, but the most discordant points
are found in one and the same writer.

As to the general locality in which Aornos is to be sought, most
investigators, as indeed Col. Abbott himself, have found Arrian so
vague here, that they have held to the more graphic representations
of the imaginative Curtius. Yet no writer can be more inaccurate.
His best friends have never been able to defend him from the charge
of romancing. His own ideas, too, in reference to geography and
topography seem so confused, that what little value may be accorded
to his narratives, the want of proper and true localization deprives
them of all value as portions of history. Only a few paragraphs before
this chapter about Aornos, he speaks of Alexander’s taking J/ara-
canda, which, from all attending circumstances, must be Samarkand,
and in the very next breath he speaks of the Scythians of the Tanais
(the Don) as in the same neighbourhood. In this very narrative
about Aornos, which he places on the Indus, he makes Alexander
fight for the place as only a very important place such as commanded
a ford or passage, could induce him to fight, and then, he makes
Alexander march sixteen more marches in order to cross the Indus.

The topographical indications, therefore, of the ancient writers, it
must be confessed, have hitherto led to no satisfactory result in the
search after the famous Aornos. May not another method of iden-
tification prove more successful ? The mame Aornos can hardly be an
invention of the Greeks. If the difficulties of Chinese transcription
of Indian names have been so successfully overcome, may not a simi-
lar linguistic method have equally happy results, if applied to those
names in Alexander’s march, which have not been satisfactorily iden-
tified yet P

What appears most probable in reference to the disputed locality,
is this: that the place was on or near the Indus, that it was a height
near plains, that the people of the plains considered it an impreg-
nable place of refuge, that Alexander thought it of sufficient impor-
tance to make a very signal effort for its capture, and that its name
was Aornos. ‘To begin with the name.

1863. | On the Antiquities of the Peshawur District. 15

Aornos must be the Greek transcription of a Sanserit name, for all
the other names which have been identified, have been identified
through the Sanscrit, which therefore, whether the people then spoke
it or not, was certainly the language of their names, and not only
then, but for some centuries subsequent yet. In course of time the
Sanscrit was worn down into Hindi, Panjabi, Pushto, ete. Hence if
we wish to see how any place bearing a certain Hindi, Panjabi,
Pushto or other name at the present day, came to be called so-and-so
by the Greeks, we can only find it by referring the modern name
back to its most probable Sanserit predecessor or progenitor. Thus,
the modern Behat was called Bidaspes or Hydaspes by the Greeks,
because Behat is the modern short for the ancient Vitasta.

Now we find in the Tubagate Akbari, in the Tartkhe Murassa,* in
other native works, and even from the mouth of Hindus at the pre-
sent day, that the place now called Atok was formerly called Atok
Benares (properly Banaras). The union of two names in this way
may be explained in one of two ways. Hither we believe, on the
analogy of Kasi Benares as explained by Dr. Hall in No. 1 of last
year’s Journal, p. 5, that Benares was the name of the “ cireum-
jacent territory” of Atok; or else, we adopt an analogy more in
accordance with the custom along and near the Indus. We find, in
this region, that when a locality is designated by two names men-
tioned together, it is either because there are two places bearing
these names respectively close to each other, as Hoti Mardan, Tart
Jabba; or else, where there is a river, because they are on the oppo-
site banks of the river, as Rori Bakar, Thit Naka, Daghi Banda, ete.
ete. The latter analogy is evidently the aptest in the present in-
stance ; hence we conclude that in former days, theré was a locality
opposite Atok, that is, on the right bank of the river Indus, named
Benares. he old form of Benares is, as is well known, Varanas (or
Varanasi). How would a Greek of Alexander’s age pronounce this
name? He would, in the first place, prefix a vowel. Why ? we can
hardly tell without a discussion much too long for the present object.
Jt will suffice to know that he was in the habit of doing so. The
Sanscrit danta he pronounced ddovra ; nakha—évrya; nama (n)—
évopa. ; bhri—ésdpv-; nri—avnp ; s‘atam—éxardv ; mih—ébuxéo, and
a hundred like instances which will readily occur to the reader. We

* A History of the Afghans, by Afzul Khan Khatak,

16 On the Antiquities of the Peshawur District. [No. J,

should then have the form avaranas. One of the commonest modes
in which the Sanscrit syllable va reappears in other languages, is in
the form of the vowel o. Thus

Sanscrit dvdr = English door, German thor.

53 vakshas = ,, ox.

a svan— = Latin son—.
3 svasar = 5, soror:
5 Suati— OOK

a svarna = Hindi sona.

In Greek some such change is doubly necessary on account of the
absence of the sound v from the language (from the kxowy, at any
rate) ; hence svas corresponds to és, s being replaced by the breath-
ing; vék, becomes oz-, etc. Then there is that immense class of
perfect participles, which in Sanserit are formed with the suffix vdt,*
corresponding to the Greek form in or-, and many other instances.
On this principle avaranas becomes copvos, losing one vowel neces-
sarily by the recession of the accent.

We should therefore have to look for Aornos opposite Atok. With
reference to this locality General Court has observed “ that a rock
exists opposite Atok, with all the peculiarities described by Q. Cur-
tius, on a mountain that is topped by a castle, attributed to Rajah
Hody. It cannot be ascended but on the side of the Indus, by a steep
passage hewn through the rock, and enclosed by two walls of defence,
running up zigzag according to the protuberances of the mount. The
space inclosed by these walls is filled with ruins of habitations gradu-
ally rising from the brink of the river up to the castle. Those works
are all entire, and have the appearance of great antiquity.”

Much of this is true even now, though it is highly probable that
many of the “ habitations,” of which General Court speaks, as well
as the “ castle” itself, have been removed to build Sikh Forts in the
same locality, since he saw the place, if he saw it at all himself.
There are ruins of buildings, but they are few. However, the outer
wall of the whole Fort is distinctly traceable. It runs down to the
river on two sides ; the space enclosed is at least three times as large
as the Fort Atok, and the wall to the west, north, and south evident-
ly overhung steep places. The walls are smooth and even, and in
general appearance allied to the Buddhist remains in Yusufzai.

[* As in dadri’svdt—and tetvpor.—EDS. |

1863. | On the Antiquities of the Peshawur District. 17

I may add the opinion of one of the highest military authorities
that Mahabun, which Col. Abbott proposed as Aornos, commands
nothing ; it is so much out of the way that it would hardly ever
have been a place of refuge for the people of the plains; and if it
had been, a general like Alexander would not have wasted his time
and his men on the reduction of an isolated hill which was by no
means impeding his passage of the Indus. On the other hand he
says that the hill above Khairabad is not only a most conspicuous
point for friend and foe, but also one that must be taken before a
passage of the Indus at Atok would be attempted by an invading
force.

T have only one item to add in reference to the tradition about
Rajah Hody. This tradition still exists on the spot, and in other
localities of Afghanistan. ‘The topes and altars, for instance, in the
neighbourhood of Amerakhel near the Surkhab, are attributed by the
natives to Rajah Hody or Udi. Now Saint-Martin in the treatise
cited above, finds three regions conterminous with one another,
which, in Hiouen-Thsang’s time, were called Oudyana, according to
his French spelling: the first as the capital of Ningrahar (p. 52) ;
the second, the kingdom of Oudyana, (p. 63), which he identifies as
the plains and hills of Ashnaghar (Hashtnagar, though inveterate and
official, is incorrect) and Yusufzai; and the third time he finds the
name, it is applied to the region about Hasan Abdal, (p. 69). In
each of these instances he says, the locality was called so, that is
“a garden,” on account of its fertility. It does not strike him as
strange that precisely the same name should have been given to three
adjoining regions, and these names should be entirely independent of
one another. Moreover, Ningrahar is by no means a garden at all
times. It is a locality which suffers famine frequently, and one of
the derivations of its name as given by indigenous Mullahs, is based
on the meaning “half-hungry,”—a derivation however little worth
in etymology it may be, gives evidence at least of the native esti-
mation of the fertility of the place. The plain of Yusufzai is a
garden about once in three or four years ; the rest of the time it is a
desert.

It appears to me far more likely that these regions together were
called by the one name Udiana, as being the kingdom of this “ Rajah
Udi.” Namies of this form and thus derived are frequent in the

c

18 Literary Intelligence, Sc. [No. 1,

Panjab, for instance, Lodiana, Luliana, Duliana, Gurjiana, Hariana,
Phubiana. Whether Udi, or Hody was an individual as Guru ji (of
Gurjiana) or some Hari Singh (of Hariana) may have been, or a
dynasty or family, as that of the Lodi (of Lodiana), I am unable to
say. What I propose, I do not presume to dogmatize on. And I do
not think that the name Udiana itself has entirely disappeared, as
Saint-Martin supposes, but that it has probably been preserved in
Adina, the name of a large village situated almost in the centre of

the Yusufzais.

NN a ee ea a

Literary INTELLIGENCE, CORRESPONDENCE, &C.

Professor Whitney writes from New Haven, U.S. A., December
380th, 1862.

“ Our own labours are going on much as usual, at a moderate rate,
owing to the absence of an abundance of resources, whether material
or literary. I trust that you have not. failed duly to receive all that
we have forwarded to you, viz., the numbers of the Journal and
extra copies of those of its articles of which separate editions have
been issued. The forthcoming half volume is mainly occupied with
my Atharva-Veda Pratis’akhya, which fills nearly 300 pages. Unfor-
tunately the MS. material furnished for it was of the scantiest: it
may be hoped that a second copy of the work will turn up some time
in India. It may be that I shall go on to publish in a somewhat
similar style the Téittiriya Pratis’akhya, for which Professor Hall
some time ago furnished me a fair supply of material. Our friend
just mentioned, has written me that you informed him when he saw
you on his return to India that you had access to a couple of copies
of the Gopatha Brahmana, and that you offered to procure to be
made for mea transcript of the work from them. It would indeed
be a great kindness to me if you would doso. I should also like
much to know which of the more ancient Siddhantas (besides those
already in print) you have in manuscript at Calcutta: I mean to
resume by and by my studies in the Hindu astronomy, begun in
connection with the translation, &c., of the Stirya-Siddkanta given in

volume VI. of our Journal.”

1863. | Literary Intelligence, &c. 19

Colonel Cunningham writes to E. C. Bayley, Esq., in a letter
dated Camp Gonda, 20th February, 1863.

“T have been most fortunate this season in my identifications of
the ancient sites. The fact is, that I have had time to read and
compare the authorities beforehand, and so I was able to make up
my mind as to where to look for most of the places. I marked them
down like quail, and then marched up and bagged them. Ahichha-
tra is a valuable discovery, as the place was of great consequence in
the early days of Indian history. It is the Adscadpa of Ptolemy, and
was the capital of northern Panchala. I intend to finish the excava-
tion of its large Tope during next month.

In the Khalsi inscription of Piyadasi the letter “r’ is not used,
hence the name of Alexander is written as <dAlikyasadale—at least
so I read the name, for it contains a curious compound letter
+ which I take to be ky. The inscription in this portion is
certainly different from those of Dhauli and Kapurdigiri and Gujrat,
The names of the subject countries follow immediately after those
of the Greek Kings—commencing with Choda Pandiya (not Pida
ag hitherto given). On the opposite side of the rock, there is an
elephant boldly cut in outline, and between his legs the short inscrip-
tion Gajatame, which may perhaps be “'The Black Elephant,” in
coutradistinction to the Sweta hasti of the Gujrat inscription.

At Kosam there is an immense ancient fortress with a stone pillar
of the same dimensions as those of Delhi and Allahabad, but it bears
no ancient inscription that I could find, although I dug to a depth
of upwards of seven feet all round it. There is however a record of
Akbar’s time, in which a pilgrim calls the place Kosdmbi-pura. That
Kosambi was on the Jumna see the legend of Bakkula who was
dropped by his mother into the Juwmna at Kosambi, and was floated
down the stream to Benares.

Hwen Thsang’s Kia-she-pu-lo is Sultanpur of which the old Hindu
name was Kusabhavanapura, or simply Kusapura.

Hwen Thsang’s Pi-so-kia or Visdkha is the same as Fa Hian’s
Sha-chi, and also the same as the Séket of the Pali annals. It was
no doubt called Visakha, after the celebrated lady Visékhd who was
a native of Sdéket ; and I presume that her name was held in esti-
mation for centuries afterwards, as I refer the coins of Visékha Deva
and Dhana Deva to princes of Ajudhia who were named after the

c 2

20, Literary Intelligence, &c. [Nor

original Buddhist lady Visékha and her father Dhananja. Saket
was Ajudhia, I have already come upon sprigs of the toothpick tree
which Buddha planted at Saket. Both are called Datton.

Srdvasti, or Sdwatthi, or Sdwet or Sewet I expect to find at Sahét-
Mahet, where I shall arrive on the 23rd. According to the Puranas
Sravasti was in Gaura—and this is Gaura where I am now writing!
Our military spelling is only equalled by our military pronunciation.
There is no such place as Gonda—all the people of the country call
it Gaura—and the old name of Balrdmpur was Rémgarh Gauri.
These identifications render the whole of Hwen Thsang’s route clear
and satisfactory—and in F'a Hian’s route we have only to read twen-
ty yojans, instead of ten yojans, from the Holi forest near Kanoj to
Sha-chi to make his account tally with the other. The Singhalese
annals give twenty yojans from Kanoj to Sewet. Nothing can be
more complete.”

ELIANA AAAI OL LP ISLIP LPP LLP PLL ILI IOP PPL

PROCEEDINGS

OF THE

ASIATIC SOCIETY OF BENGAL,

For January, 1863.

OOOO ONTO Oe

The Annual General Meeting of the Asiatic Society was held on
the 15th instant.
A. Grote, Hsq., President, in the chair.
The Secretary read the following Annual Report for 1862 :—
ANNUAL REPORT.

The Council of the Asiatic Society, in submitting their annual

report for the past year, have the satisfaction of again congratulat-
ing the Society on its increasing prosperity both in respect to the
increase of members and the improvement of its finances,
_ During the year 1862, there has been an accession to the Society
of 44 members, while the loss by death and retirement, amounts to
12. The number of ordinary members at the close of the year was
311 against 281 of the preceding year. Of the ordinary members on
the roll, 82, or more than one-fourth are absent from India, leaving
115 Resident and 114 Non-Resident members on the paying list.

Annexed is a tabular statement shewing the fluctuation in the
number of the ordinary members during

B

H ao ey

a a & the last ten years.

ey em pa

6 a x Of the deceased members, Babu. Rama-

1853 146-198 93 prasid Roy had been for some time a

ee ne ae a member of the Council, and a Vice-Presi-
aan 167. «131 3¢ dent, and was distinguished for the interest
iso¢ 147 109 88 ~which he took in the prosperity of the

1858 133 193 38 ,
1859 180 135 45 Society. Dr. Crozier had been for three

wet aa ee a years a member of the Council. The

aN : oo ee ce other names in the obituary are the
11s numper, one has . a °

compounded for his sub- Hon’ble W. Ritchie, Rajah Prosunno

scription. Nath Roy, E. A. Blundell, Esq., Babi
Jogindra Narain Roy, and T. E. B. Judge, Esq.

22 Proceedings of the Asiatic Society. [ No.1,

FINANCES.

The Gross Receipts of the Society during the year amounted to
Rupees 15,631-5-6, and its Expenses to

TIES} onpoooucuda Ope 1b ee 5

1853 ........... 7,778 9 3 Rupees 15,979-13-5. The receipts on
ie Letrgatces ec) ee 8 , account of Contributions from members

oo ees reevce ccs 5) g

1856 ......... 98,096 0 0 were Rs. 8,822-9, of which Rupees 1,600
S57 7068 0) 10 eae zeae

isoB i. Gos 8. ov CTS for Admission fees and the suleiee,
1859 w.s.ees0000, 6,750 0 O Rupees, 7,222-9 for quarterly subscriptions.
are aaa S80 ; e The latter sum is considerably in excess

of what was collected during the last year,
Total Rs. 70,490 2 6

as well as of the average collections of the

The average of which is

Reis O4gi0's gery cae previous ten years, as will be apparent
- (,049-0-3 f 5

from the table annexed in the margin.

The Liabilities of the Society amount to Rs. 4,274-0-2 chiefly due
to printing charges, while the Assets amount to Rupees 7,113-1-9
exclusive of outstanding balances to the extent of Rupees 5,719-11-2,
the greater portion of which is for unrealized subscriptions in course
of collection. A large sum under this head, Rupees 1,381-2-7 has
been written off to profit and loss as un-realizable.

The income of the Society has received a permanent addition since
April last of Rupees 200 per mensem granted by Government for
the support of the Natural History museum.

The probable income and expenditure of the Society for the next
year may be set down as follows :—-

Income.
Contributions, 500 600 Rs. 8,000 0 O
Admission fees, es tink seo 1800530780
Journal ees AG ae ta M28 OaaO,
MD TAT Ve oe aes 400 elas wos) . O00) ORO
Museum, ... 500 509 .. 6,000 O O
Secretary’s Office, dn 500 550 1 TORO
Vested Fund, a; 509 ts) 24D ORO
Coin Fund, .., a 450 ay 45 0 0

Rs.,,, 16,829 0 0O

1863. | Proceedings of the Asiatic Society. 23
Expenses.
Journal ee: ae sé see) 2,500) OF 0
Dibrary; cs. no ae ws) ROACH O50
Museum, ... Bie Ny, SSL 208 OO
Secretary’s Office, BS oe A Soon OMe
Building, ... 506 sine beth BOO) OL O
Vested Fund, net ch ae FacOe nO
Coin Fund, ... ate wi mu © S07 2 OO
Miscellaneous, eae ib ae HAST Ort O
Rs.... 14,761 0 O
LIBRARY.

Important additions have been made to the library during the
past year, amounting to 550 vols., more than half of which were
presentations from various British and Continental Societies, and
from distinguished individuals with whom the Society is in cor-
respondence.

Several interesting scientific books were likewise purchased at the
sale of the late Dr. Walker’s valuable library, among which may be
noticed a splendid set of the Description de V Egypte published by
order of the Imperial Government of France.

A catalogue of the inscriptions published in the Researches as well
as in the vols. of the Journal subsequent to Vol. XXIII. has been pre-
pared by the Librarian. To this has been annexed, by way of appendix,
a short catalogue of inscriptions presented by the late Major Markham
Kittoe, but not yet published.

Corns.

The Numismatic cabinet has received some valuable additions
chiefly through the kind exertions of Captain F. W. Stubbs. Mr.
Bayley was for some time engaged in effecting a systematic arrange-
ment of the coins, but the press of official duties, the Council regret
to observe, has prevented his making any great progress in the
undertaking.

MusEum.

The Museum has been enriched by a number of valuable contribu-
tions, during the year under review.

The Archeological department of the Society has received several

24 Proceedings of the Asiatic Society. [No. 1,

figures and plinths of pillars in red sandstone exhumed from a tope
in the neighbourhood of Muttra, some of them containing inscriptions
bearing the name of Huvishka, under whose auspices it is believed the
vihar or monastery of which they are but fragments, was raised.
They attest to a period when Buddhism prevailed throughout India.

The Council, acting upon a proposal by the President for pushing
forward Ethnological researches have commenced a collection of crania
of the races inhabiting India, and the neighbouring countries. A
series of photographs prepared under the orders of the Bengal
Government has also been received, which, together with the facial
casts now in the Museum, will yield most useful materials for future
reference by ethnologists.

At the suggestion of the Committee of Meteorological and Phy-
sical science, the Council have addressed a letter to Government
recommending that a Meteorological Committee should be constituted
by Government on the plan of the Meteorological Committee of the
Board of Trade in London, for the advancement of Meteorological
science, by which means, it is hoped, that much practical benefit
would be conferred upon the mercantile world. No answer to this
letter has yet been received.

They regret to notice that the Right Hon’ble the Secretary of
State has declined to comply with their recommendation that the
Zoological catalogues of the India House Museum which were in
course of preparation should not be discontinued.

The catalogue of mammalia in the Society’s collections, the Coun-
eil are glad to report, has at length been completed and is now in
the press.

The subject of the foundation of a Public museum in Calcutta
which the Society first proposed in 1857, the Council are glad to
report, was taken up by Government in May last with a view to
its practical realization. _In the letter received from Government,
an outline of the measures which it was proposed should be adopted,
was submitted for the consideration of the Society.

The Council in reply to this important communication have
forwarded a scheme which in its essential features is in consonance
with the views propounded by Government, but at the same time
they have distinctly reserved to the Society full power of dealing
with the details of the scheme before they are finally settled.

1863. | Proceedings of the Asiatic Society. 25

Public interest is still increasingly attracted by the museum as
Natives. will be manifest from the annexed memo-
Malowen ae. SA:885 e
Female, ......... 5,754 Yandum which shows an average of 258
EUROPEANS. visitors per diem.
Melee 2rde :
iHemialenmesheciesiects 1,003

94,388

Average being 258 per day.

OFFICERS.

The Council have learnt with extreme regret that the Society’s
solicitation for a reconsideration of the decision by which their
curator, Mr. Blyth’s application for pension was held by the Home
Authorities to be inadmissible, though warmly supported by the
Governor General in Council, has not met with the success they had
anticipated. The pension solicited has been again refused by the
Right Hon’ble the Secretary of State for India.

The continued indisposition of Mr. Blyth, which indicated a con-
stitution broken down by protracted residence in this country, has
obliged the Council to grant him leave of absence for a year, on full
pay, in order to enable him to proceed to Hurope for the benefit of
his health.

In Mr. Blyth’s absence, the selection of a competent man to replace
the late Babi Rajkisto Banerjea, who had been for some months
employed as an Honorary Assistant Curator, and who had in that
capacity proved himself extremely useful, is a task of much import-
ance and considerable difficulty.

The Assistant Secretary and Librarian continues to discharge his
duties to the entire satisfaction of the Council.

JOURNAL.

Four Numbers of the Journal have been published this year and a
fifth is in the press. They contain several very important papers
relating to the history, the antiquities and the natural history of this
country.

BrpuiorHeca Inprca.

The Bibliotheca Indica has been continued during the past year
with the same vigour on the part of its different editors as in the
previous year. Thirteen numbers have appeared of the old series
and seventeen of the new.

In the new series, Dr, Hall has published the second part of the

E

26 Proceedings of the Asiatie Society. [No. 1,

Das’a Ripa, a third will complete the work, which will be accom-
panied by an appendix containing those parts of Bharata’s Natya
S/dstra which go over the same ground. Pandit Prem Chandra Tarka-
bagish has published two fasciculi of his edition of the Kavyddars’a
of S‘ri Dandin; the Rev. K. M. Banerjea two fasciculi of the
Narada Pancha Ratra, and Mr. Cowell the first part of the Maitri
Upanishad. There have also appeared two fasciculi of translations,—
the second part (concluding the work,) of that of the Siddhanta
S’iromani, by the late Lancelot Wilkinson, Hsq., revised by Pandit
Bapu Deva, and the first part of Dr. Ballantyne’s translation of the
Sankhya Aphorisms.

In the series of Muhammadan historians of India, we have to
announce the completion of the Térikh-i Ferozshdéhi of Zid-i Barni,
and the Tarfkh-i Masaudi of Baihaki.

In Arabic, Captain Lees has published the Nokhbat al Fikr wa
Nozhat al Nazr, complete in one fasciculus.

In the old series, we have to announce the completion of three
of our old publications, viz., the Dictionary of Technical Terms used
in the science of the Musulmans, and the Pseudo-Wakidy’s Conquest
of Syria, both edited by Captain Lees, and the Markandeya Purana,
edited by the Rev. K. M. Banerjea. The Council refer with pleasure
to the remark in the last report of the Asiatic Society of Paris, rela-
tive to the first of these works,—ce dictionnaire sera une des pub-
lications les plus utiles de la Societe.

Babi Rajendralal Mitra has issued five numbers of the Taittirfya
Brdhmana, of which the third volume is now commenced.

Mr. Cowell has published two parts of the Taittiriya Sanhitaé and
Pandit Ram Narayan Vidyaratna three of the Vedanta Aphorisms.

The titles of the fasciculi of the old series published during the
year are,—

1. The Dictionary of Technical Terms used in the Sciences of the
Musulmans, P. Il. edited by Mawlavies Abdul Haqq and Gholdm
Kadir, under the supervision of Captain Lees, LL. D., No. 182,
Fase. XX.

2. Markandeya Purana, edited by the Rev. K. M. Banerjea, No.
183, Fase. VII.

3. Aphorisms of the Vedanta, edited by Pandit Ram Naréyan
Vidyaratna, Nos. 184, 186 and 194, Fase. VI. VII. and VIII.

1863. ] _ Proceedings of the Asiatic Society. 27

4. Taittiriya Sanhita, edited by E. B. Cowell, M. A., Nos. 185
and 198, Fase. XVI. and XVII.

5. Taittiriya Brahmana, edited by Babi Rajendralal Mitra,
Nos. 188, 189, 190, 191, 192, Fase. XII. XIII. XIV. XV. XVI.

6. The Conquest of Syria commonly ascribed to Aboo Abdallah
Muhammad bin Omar al Wagqidi, edited by Captain W. N. Lees,
LL. D., No. 187, Fasc. IX.

The titles of the Fasciculi of the new series are,—

1. Tarikh i Baihaki, edited by the late W. H. Morley, Esquire,
published under the superintendence of Captain W. N. Lees, LU. D.,
Nos. 21, 22, 26, 27, 29, 31, 36, Fase. III. LV. V. VI. VII. VIII. IX.

2. Tarikhi Ferozshahi of Zia-i Barni, edited by Saiyid Ahmed
Khan, under the superintendence of Capt. W. N. Lees, LL. D.,,
No. 23. Fase. VII.

3. Das’a Ripa, by Dhananjaya, edited by Dr. F. E. Hall, No. 24,
Fase. IT.

4 Narada Pancha Ratra, edited by the Rev. K. M. Banerjea, Nos.
25, 34, Fase. II, III.

5. Hindu Astronomy, II. The Siddhanta S’iromani, translated
by the late Lancelot Wilkinson, Esq., C. S. and revised by Pandit
Bapu Deva Sastri, under the superintendence of the Ven’ble Archdea-
con Pratt, No. 28, Fase. II.

6. Kavyddars’a of S’ri Dandin, edited by Pandit Prem Chandra
Tarkabagish, Nos. 30, 33, Fasc. I. II.

7. The Sankhya Aphorisms of Kapila, translated by Dr. J. R.
Ballantyne, No. 32, Fase. I.

8. The Maitri Upanishad, edited by H. B. Cowell, M. A. No. 35,
Fase. I.

9. The Nokhbat al Fikr wa Nozhat al Nazr, edited by Capt.
Lees, and Mawlavies Abdul Haqq and Gholam Kadir, No. 37 com-
plete in one Fasciculus.

The President then read the following address :—
The report which you have just heard, and which will I hope be
adopted as satisfactory for the present state of the Society’s affairs
and as hopeful for the future, touches on one or two points which
seem to me to claim special attention. With the meeting’s permis-
E 2

28 Proceedings of the Asiatic Society. [No. 1,

sion I will, as I did at our last annual meeting, remark briefly on these
while reviewing the record of our proceedings during the past year.

Two, perhaps, of the most interesting papers which have been
contributed were those read by Major Walker and Major Montgomerie
at our February and April meetings. Both supplied valuable geo-
eraphical information on countries within and across our frontier,—
information which was likely to fall within the reach only of officers
employed, as they were, on the survey of our Indian Empire. Those
of us who attended the April meeting and saw the photographie
sketch of the large Baltaro and neighbouring glaciers that Captain
Montgomerie then exhibited, must all feel equally eager for further
communications from the officers engaged on the Kashmir series of
that great survey.

One suggestion which on that occasion fell from Captain Mont-
gomerie and which Major Walker is, I am aware, now discussing with
the Government, I especially commend to the consideration and warm
support of our Society. The field of Captain Montgomerie’s duties
brings him in contract with traders and travellers who pass without
question beyond our frontier and who visit without risk those cities
of Turkistan to which an European cannot safely penetrate. Why
should we not, asks Captain Montgomerie, do our best to turn the
services of such men to account? Some few among them he already
knows to be partially competent and to admit of being made more so,
and by cautious training on our part the ranks of such men may be
increased. I have lately heard further from Captain Montgomerie
on this important subject, and have laid his letter before the Council,
which will deal with it at their next meeting.

Later in the year another communication was read by Major
Walker, who, on that occasion, acknowledged the obligations of the
Trigonometrical Survey to the investigations of Archdeacon Pratt.
The result of those investigations, which have extended over some
years, and the value of which has been more fully recognised in
Europe than in this country, has been condensed by the Archdeacon
in a memo. which was published in the 2nd No. of our Journal, and
was concisely announced by him in the remarks which he made at
our meeting on Major Walker’s paper. It was to the effect that
“the distances between places determined by the Survey are free

7

from the effects of errors caused by local attraction ;” a result which

1863. ] Proceedings of the Asiatic Society. 29

leaves the survey maps as reliable as they were before the lability to
error was first pointed out, and in fact as reliable as in the present
state of science maps admit of being made.

Major Walker has also commenced the publication in our Journal
of a series of papers bearing on the great work of which he now stands
at the head, and I must again express my hope that every year may
see our Society more closely connected with the officers of this and
of the Geological Survey. To Mr. W. Blanford of the latter of these
surveys we owe our first knowledge of the character and probable age
of the voleanic peak of Puppa Doung beyond our Pegu frontier.
Mr. Blanford’s paper on this volcano, Major Sherwill’s account of
his and Dr. Simpson’s attempt to reach Kinchinjinga, Captain
Raverty’s account of the upper and lower Swat, and the report by
Captain Fraser and Captain Forlong of their expedition across the
Isthmus of Krau, have given what I may call a geographical colour
to the contents of our Journal for the past year which has doubtless
made the issues acceptable to many.

To those of us too who took an interest in the projected expedition
of Captain Smyth into Chinese Tartary, and who felt for him in the
disappointment which he and his intended companions experienced
when Government was obliged for the time to abandon it, it must
have been gratifying to hear the assurance of H. M.’s minister at
Pekin, which was announced at our August meeting, that he was
alive to the importance of the objeets of that expedition, and would
lose no opportunity which might offer of promoting them. Those of
us, moreover, who joined the deputation to Lord Elgin on his arrival
in India, are aware that he is as anxious as ourselves and as the en-
terprising men who were to have crossed the snows, to see all barriers
removed to a free intercourse between this country and China. One
of these barriers, and a most important one will, it is hoped, disap-
pear under the late treaty with Burmah, and other difficulties may
be removed by the joint British and Burman expedition, which it
has been proposed to send vz7d Bhamo to the Yunan frontier.

I may take this opportunity of announcing that I lately handed in
to Government an application from Captain Smyth and Dr. Stewart
for a year’s leave to admit of their attempting to reach Lhassa on
their own resources, and I am in hopes that should the difficulty in
obtaining passports from Pekin not be obviated, their application

30 Proceedings of the Asiatie Society. [No. 1,

may hereafter be complied with. The state of the border countries
is at present somewhat disturbed, and I understand that the Gover-
nor-General thinks that it would be better, at all events, to defer
giving the leave till a more favorable opportunity offers.

At our March meeting was read the correspondence which had
been sent to us by the Government of India regarding the appoint-
ment of Colonel Cunningham as Archeological Surveyor, and which
enclosed a memorable Minute by the late Governor-General. It
must have been cheering indeed to the few among us who have per-
severed, in spite of every difficulty, in the study of mouldy coins and
in the decipherment of imperfect inscriptions, to find the head of the
Government acknowledging its past neglect of the services which
they have rendered to the ‘ early history of Hngland’s great depen-
dency,’ and declaring its intention to neglect this duty no more.
As bearing on those pursuits of our Society in which it was so deeply
occupied a quarter of a century ago, and which earned for it the high
compliment which was paid to it by Professor Lassen in the dedication
of his great work on Indian archeology, I regard this declaration as
the most important communication which has been made to us since
my connexion with the Society. One of its results we may expect
every day tosee in Colonel Cunningham’s first yearly report, and the
grant which has recently been made by the North-Western Govern-
ment towards pushing the excavations at Muttra, is probably another.

More than one paper which has appeared in ovr Journal during
the last year will be read with interest by European scholars who
have not, like ourselves, access to those remains of which we are the
custodians. But more especially will they hail the proofs of continued
_ activity on the part of their learned co-labourers in this country which
are given in the long list of additions made during the year to both
series, old and new, of our Bibliotheca Indica.

With no pretensions myself to being a scholar, I can well appre-
ciate the importance attached at home to the labours of the Philologi-
eal Committee of our Council, and the heartiness of the welcome with
which European Orientalists must receive each printed text of a
MS. rescued from possible oblivion. The thirty-two Fasciculi of
different works, which the report mentions as having been published
during the year at the charge of the Oriental Fund represent
portions of works, which have hitherto been accessible in MS.

1863. | Proceedings of the Asiatic Society. 31

only in three or four public libraries—but which our publications
enable students to carry to their own homes for the extraction and
elaboration of such materials as are useful to them each in his own
branch of study.

The series of Persian historians is one, in the progress of which I
take a special interest, an interest borrowed from others, but not the
less genuine for not being original. The late Sir H. Elliot and Mr.
John Colvile, were the first movers, as is generally known, on behalf
of the publication in question, which the active co-operation of Mr. EH.
Thomas had just pressed into a project when the troubles of 1857
caused all idea of it to be dropped. It was resumed some three years
ago by the Philological Committee at the suggestion, I believe, of
myself, since I, as your Secretary, had been all along in close com-
munication with those friends whom I have just named. The first
work, Tarikh-i Ferozshahi of Zia-i Barni, which the Committee un-
dertook to recommend to the Council, was that which was to have
opened the series under the auspices of the North-Western Govern-
ment. I indulge in-the hope that much may yet be done towards
carrying out not only thus partially, but in its entirety, the task to
which Sir H. Elhot had devoted himself, and which was occupying
him when he died. The mass of valuable materials which he had
collected, ought not to be allowed to remain longer inaccessible to the
many who desire to consult and profit by them.

In the department of the natural sciences, the principal contribu-
tion to the pages of our Journal is Mr. Blyth’s paper on the Asiatic
species of Rhinoceros. Whether the views enunciated in this paper
will find acquiescence from other naturalists, remains to be seen, but
he has quite satisfied himself that the Soonderbun Rhinoceros is
identical with the species of Java and Borneo.

The Messrs. Blanford still continue their contributions to Indian
malacology. Several interesting letters and reports on zoological
subjects have been published in the intelligence department and
proceedings of each issue of our Journal. In the latter too will be
found the Council’s correspondence with the Government—so far as
it has gone—on the proposed transfer of the Society’s Museum.

In connexion with the Museum, I must express a regret which will
be shared by many, at the causes which have deprived us for the time
of the services of our zealous Curator. The Council, as you will be pre-

32 Proceedings of the Asiatic Society. [ No. ],

sently informed, took upon itself the responsibility of anticipating the
assent of a general meeting to Mr. Blyth’s departure to England.
None hope more earnestly than myself that the voyage and con-
sequent change may completely restore his health, and none can have
read perhaps with greater disappointment than I have the unfavour-
able reply lately received to the despatch of the Supreme Govern-
ment which was read to us at our July meeting and in which Mr.
Blyth’s claims, “as a man of science,” were strongly and ably advo-
cated. This reply has yet to be considered by the Council and
communicated to the meeting, and I bespeak for the whole subject
when it is laid before you, an especial consideration.

I have nothing more to add, but shall at once ask the meeting to
adopt formally the Council’s report.

Mr. Lewis Jackson seconded the motion.

Mr. Oldham moved as an amendment that the Report be adopted
with the exception of the paragraph reporting the leave of absence
granted by the Council to Mr. Blyth.

Mr. Oldham argued that the Council had contravened the rules by
the course it had pursued in this matter.

After some discussion a shew of hands was taken when the amend-
ment was rejected and the Report of the Council was adopted.

Mr. Oldham then handed in the following protest :—

“T protest formally against the illegality and informality of the
adoption of that portion of the report of the Council which refers to
the absence of Mr. Blyth, inasmuch as in direct contravention of the
rules of the Society this resolution of Council which was passed prior
to the December meeting of the Society was not reported to that
meeting.”

The meeting then proceeded to ballot for the Council and officers
for the ensuing year.

Mr. E. C. Bayley, and Captain H. Hyde, were appointed scruti-
neers, and at the close of the ballot, the chairman announced the
following result :—

CouNcIL.
Lieutenant-Colonel H. L. Thuillier, President.
A. Grote, Esq, )
Lieutenant-Colonel R. Strachey, 7 Vice- Presidents.
Babi Rajendra Lal Mitra, J

1863. | Proceedings of the Asiatie Society. 35

Hon’ble C. J. Eyskine.

Dr. J. Fayrer.

Captain W. N. Lees.

HE. C. Bayley, Esq.

Dr. T. Anderson.

Babi Ramdanath Tagore.

J. Obbard, Esq.

Dr. T. C. Jerdon.

T. Oldham, Esq.

W.S. Atkinson, Hsq.

HK. B. Cowell, Esq.
Lieutenant-Colonel Thuillier, on assuming the President’s chair

} Joint Secretaries.

said he felt deeply the great honor that had been done him by the
vote of the meeting, for which he expressed his warmest acknowledg-
ments. Of the honorable members present none could have been
taken more by surprise than he himself was, when he was first
nominated by the Council, at which time he felt it his duty to urge
as forcibly as he was able, the various good reasons against his being
selected to fill such a post, for which he feared he possessed but very
few qualifications. There were, he knew, other members of the
Society who could and would render far better service than he ever
could hope to do, and it was a matter of regret, therefore, that some
one of greater influence and ability had not been selected on the
present occasion.

It was to be borne in mind that the cause of the vacancy in the
Presidentship of the Society was the retirement of their respected and
excellent friend Mr. Grote in consequence of a desire having been
expressed by some members for a periodical change in the tenure of the
office in accordance with the practice of learned Societies in Europe.
In the desirability of introducing this principle into the Asiatic Society
he fully concurred, and he would have been glad to see it carried out
during the present year under ordinary circumstances, but when he
reflected on the great difficulty there appeared to be in securing the
services of a suitable person to fill the office, and when no better man
than himself had been elected by the votes of the meeting, he sub-
mitted that at such a moment it was not good to introduce the
change, and he heartily wished that their late President could have been
prevailed on under such circumstances to forego his determination to

E

3h Proceedings of the Asiatic Society. [No, },

retire, and to consent to serve for another year, but as such had not
unfortunately been the case, he (Lieutenant-Colonel Thuillier) had
reluctantly yielded to the wish of those who had so kindly proposed,
and voted for him.

For himself he would beg to assure the Society that, deeply
sensible as he was of his own short-comings and unfitness for such a
post, he could only endeavour by every means in his power to make
up by perseverance and zeal, what he lacked in other respects, and he
trusted with the co-operation and support of the Council, that when
he laid down the tenure of his office at the end of the year, it might
be found that the interests of the Society had not materially suffered.
The meeting might depend on his using every exertion to maintain
the prosperity and name of the Society.

It was now his duty to remind the meeting of the valuable services
they had lost by the retirement of their late President, and to pro-
pose for their acceptance a resolution expressive of their regret at his
secession and hearty thanks for the constant attention and devotion
to the interests and business of the Society which Mr. Grote had,
for the past four years rendered with so much advantage and, he
believed, credit to the Society. Mr. Grote’s services both in and out
of that chair were well known to them all, but more particularly to
the Council who had better opportunities of becoming acquainted
with all he did here, as well as in his correspondence with scientific
men and Societies in Europe, in the furtherance of the objects and
interests of the Society. He was sure they all appreciated the good
services of their late President, and he therefore had great pleasure
in proposing a resolution embodying this feeling for record in their
proceedings. It was a matter of congratulation that they were still
to retain Mr. Grote as a Vice-President of the Society.

Colonel Thuillier then proposed the following resolution :—

That this meeting desire to record their deep sense of the valuable .
and unwearied services of Mr. Grote during the four years that he
has served the office of President, and their great regret at his retire-
ment from a post which he had occupied with so much advantage to
the Society.

Babi Rajendra L4l Mitra seconded the motion, which was then
put and unanimously adopted.

The meeting then resolved itself into an ordinary general meeting,

1863. | Proceedings of the Asiatic Society. 35

The following presentations were announced :—

1. From Dr. Brockhaus, a complete set of Die Lieder des Hajis,
Persisch mit dem commentare des Sudi.

2. From Lieutenant EH. F.T. Fergusson, Superintendent Govern-
ment Observatory, Bombay, a copy of the Magnetical and Meteorolo-
gical Observations in the year 1861.

_ 38. From Mr. John Allan Broun, Director of the Observatories
of His Highness, the Rajah of Travancore, copies of his papers on
the “ Horizontal force of the Harth’s Magnetism,” “ the Bifilar Magne-
tometer” and “ the connecticn between meteorological phenomena and
the variations of terrestrial Magnetism.”

4. From the Royal Astronomical Society at Edinburgh, vols. 28,
29 and 30 of the Memoirs of the Society.

5. From the Superintendent of the Geological Survey of India,
a copy of the Memoirs of the Geological Survey of India, Paleonto-
logia Indica, Part LV. 2nd series.

6. From Babu Joygopal Bysack, four copies of a collection of
Persian odes written by him under the name of 6,

7. From Lieutenant-Colonel R. C. Tytler, an Andamanese earthen
bowl.

8. From Mr. A. L. Agabeg, a box of shells.

9. From Mr. H. Cope, Umritsur, a silver coin from Ladakh.

10. From Babi Shib Chunder Mullick, a trove of silver coins
(of which two were exhibited at the September meeting) found in
“ Badi Kashee” Grant No. 211, Soonderbuns.

The following is a list of the coins by Mr. Bayley :—

Dated coins of Altumsh, 3
Ditto Behram, 2
Ditto Reziah, aoe ee 2
Ditto Ghias-uddin, aes wen A
Ditto Nasir-uddin, 3
Local Bengal coins, 4

Total, Heoai dts)

The Council reported that they had given Mr. Blyth leave of
absence for 12 months on full pay to enable him to proceed to Europe
for the recovery of his health, and that they had paid him Rs. 1,000
in advance of his salary to provide for the expenses of his passage.

36 Proceedings of the Asiatic Society. , [Woz a;

Mr. Oldham moved that this report be adopted.—Agreed to.

The Council also reported that they had appointed Babi Poorno
Chunder Bysack to officiate as curator of the zoological collections
on probation on a salary of Rs. 100 per mensem.— Adopted.

The following gentlemen proposed at the last meeting were ballot-
ed for and duly elected ordinary members :—

F. Fedden, Esq., Geological Survey ; Hon’ble J. P. Norman, Hon’ble
H. S. Maine, M. 8S. Howell, Hsq., R. A. Sterndale, Esq., and J.
Squire, Hsq.

Dr. T. Goldstiicker, Professor of Sanscrit, London University,
proposed by the Council at the last meeting was balloted for and
elected a Corresponding Member.

The following gentlemen were named for ballot ag ordinary mem-
bers at the next meeting :-—

E. T. Trevor, Esq., C. S. proposed by Mr. Grote, seconded by
Mr. Atkinson.

The Hon’ble Rajah Deo Narain Singh, proposed by Captain W. N.
Lees, seconded by Mr. Grote.

Communications were received—

1. From Bab Gopinath Sein, abstracts of the results of the
Hourly Meteorological Observations taken at the Surveyor General’s
Office in October last.

2. From Mr. W. T. Blanford, a paper entitled “ Contributions to
Indian Malacology, No. IV., Descriptions of new Land Shells from
Ava and other parts of Burmah.”

3. From Mr. W. Theobald, Jr., a paper entitled “ Notes on the
distribution of Indian Terrestrial Gasteropoda, considered with refer-
ence to its bearing on the origin of species.”

1863. | Proceedings of the Asiatie Society.

ABSTRACT STATEMENT

RECEIPTS AND DISBURSEMENTS
ASIATIC SOCIETY,

FOR

THH YHAR 1862.

37

38 Proceedings of the Asiatic Society. [No. 1,
STATEMENT
Abstract of the Cash Accounts

— ee

NN a

RECEIPTS.
1862. 1861.
ADMISSION FEEs.
Received from New Members, ... 1,600 0 O
IO Oy O 1472 © ©
ConTRIBUTIONS.
Received from Members, noo ieee DO
—_——_———. 7,222 9 0 6,812 0 0O
JOURNAL.

Sale proceeds of, and Subscriptions
to, the Journal of the Asiatic

Society, 532 2 O
Refund of Postage Stamps, Bs ay ED
——§——-. 537 3 0 553 15 0
LIBRARY.
Sale proceeds of Books, feo A890) 0 ,
Refund of Freight, ... 56 32 0 0
oat 0" 0 =385o ono
MusEvmM.
Received from the General Trea-
SUA cee Tes os OO MONO
Savings of wages, ... Boe TE 3
——_——_ 5,211 2 3 3,629 5 O

SECRETARY'S OFFICE.

Sale of Postage Stamps, a Zio a6
Discount on ditto, ... ah 210 6
Refund of Postage, ... tae pea O)
—- ja} © 1132510

VESTED Funp.
Interest on Government Securi-
ties, received from the Bank of
Bengal, 6010 xo ZH OW

Co1n Funp.
Sale proceeds of some gems taken
by Mr. Theobald from Chandra
Mull’s batch of Coins, on account
of Capt. Stubbs, ... Ae 1620516
a 1G) (05 70 Saaluiseaten
EstatE oF MacxkintosH & Co.
Received from the Assignee office,
the 7th, 8th & 9th Dividends on a
claim of Sicca Rupees 11,964-6-6, BQ It 9)

co

HO 1 Y
Deposit.
K. C. Bayley, Esq. ... ae 13 0° 0
W. Theobald, Esq. ... a ley OY
M. Kempson, Esq. ... 0 ZOO

015,409 13 0

ies)

Carried over, 43

1863. | Proceedings of the Asiatie Society.

No. 1
of the Asiatic Society for 1862.

DISBURSEMENTS.

1862.

CONTRIBUTIONS.
Returned to M. P. Edgeworth, Esq.
for the year 1856 as he had been

charged in error, Ee 64 0 O
—_——_—_——_- 64 0 O
JOURNAL.

Printing Charges, including paper, 1,963 6 0
Freight, . coupe) VS ale O.
Pur chasing Postage Stamps, a, 46 3 0
Ditto Dawn. whe aaa 9° O ©
Packing Charges, .. ae SO
Engraving 4, Copper Plates, ‘ee 96 0 O
Ditto apDiaoramy yi. Lee 0) @
Ditto 24 Small Woodcuts, 6 0 0
Drawing and Lithographing ASA,

Copies of a Facsimile of an In-

scription from Wardak, 30)
Ditto ditto Map of Burmah and

Sketches of Buddhist Images,, 260 0 O
Ditto ditto on Stone 4 Plates of

Skulls of Rhinoceros, 80 0 O
Drawing 7 Plates of Tenasserim

Coins, 40 0 O
Ditto on Stone and Printing two

plates of Celts in J ournal No. III.

of 1862, : 58 8 O
Ditto a map shewing advantages,

obtainable by establishing com-

munication across Krau, Be 1s, -@.
Ditto Route Survey from the Bay

of Bengal to the Gulf of Sie

via the Isthmus of Krau, ... 10 0 0
Ditto on Stone and Lithographing

500 Copies of a Sanskrit Inscrip-

tion from Central India, coo «= LOH ©
Lithographing on Transfer Paper

facsimile of an Inscription from

a Temple in Fort Gwalior, ... 25 0 0
Ditto and Printing 4 Plates of

Naogram Sculptures, 168 8 O
Photogr aphing Rubbing of an

Inscription from Pagan, : 30 0 0
Printing 1900 Copies of Plates of

Rhinoceros’ Skulls, : ay 1) O
Commission on Sale of Books; -.. 13 10 6

Carried over, 3,121 15 6 64 6 O

Oe

39

40 Proceedings of the Asiatie Society.

RECEIPTS.
Brought over, 43 O
D. F. Macleod, Esgq.... nia 18 0
Major J. T. Walker,... 388 24 O
J.J. Grey, Esq. 0 8
The Right Rev. the Lord Bishop
of Cale sutta, ace 36 (O
C. B. Saunders, Esq. 500 1S 0
Capt. M. Lloyd, 500 sae 12 0
E. G. Glazier, Esq. ... a 12 0
Baboo Nobin Chunder Roy, 6c 4 O
Lieut.-Col. J. Abbott, 56 1 7
Naranjee Tricumjee, Esq. 60 1 14
Baboo Brojendra Gopal Chowdry, 0 2
C. A. Elliott, Esq. ... 8)
W. T. Dodsworth, Esq. “A 30 ~O

Batance oF 1861.
Bank of Bengal, 2,212 10 11
Cash im hand, 65 15 9

2,278 10
Inefficient Balance, ... aaa) dlspie U5

015,409 13 O

0)
9)

io)

SAQqoooo°ococoe

o@

9,461 9 8

Carried over, 18,092 15 2

[No. ],

1863. | Proceedings of the Asiatic Society.
DISBURSEMENTS.

Brought over, 3,121 15 6
Duty on a parcel of Lithographic

Plates, i a 0). O
Insufficient Postage,... ise 2 An 0
Petty Charges, sa si Tk 6

LIBRARY.
Salary of the Librarian for 12

months at Rs. 70 per month,... 840 0 O
Establishment, Fi Be 84 0 O
Purchase of Books, ide .. 1,063 4 O
Book Binding, ui ES Sis CeO
Books Cleaning, * aie 27 0 O
Commission on sale of Books, ... 45 7 6
Printing 96 pages of 200 Copies of

Catalogue of Mammalia, sei [9 Dee OW O

Paid Mr. E. Blyth, in part pay-
ment as a remuneration for
preparing the Mammalia Cata-

logue of the Museum, ree coun Ole O.
Landing Charges, ... bod LOR TO
Petty Charges, sae Boe Si)

MusEvm.
Salary of the Curator, E. Blyth,

Esq. at Rs. 250 per month, for

12 months, Aaa soo BHO 0) 1)
His House-rent at Rs. 80 vs

month, for 12 months, 960 O O
Paid Income Tax on Mr. Blyth’s S

Salary from Dec. 1861 to Nov.

1862, en L2ONs ONO
Establishment, rn O42) OO
Extra ieadermists: ‘Salary, ag GRR 1s. ©
Contingent Charges, sve | BOM 4G
Freight,.. a 161 O 0
Bearing Banghee Charges, as 612 0
Ticca Carpenter’ S wages, : 52 5 6
Paid Passage money for a Taxi-

dermist accompanying Mr. E.

Blyth to Moulmein, 8111 0
Ditto Carriage hire on 3 Packages

of Skins, 1a} 4)
Drawing on Transfer Paper Sketch

to illustrate the Positions of

places where the Goruckpore

Aerolites fell, ae Be i @ @

SECRETARY'S OFFICE.
General Establishment, He OO
Secretary’s Office Establishment,... 873 0 O
Purchase of Postage Stamps, ... 60 9 O
A Sheet Almanac for 1862, ae I 8 @
Three Blank Books,,., Me 4 0
Carried over, 1,720 5 O

Al

64 0 O

2,698 1 3 2,108 7 3
GC? © 0 E883 6 &
12,083 0 3

Proceedings of the Asiatic Society. [No. J,

RECEIPTS.
Brought over, 18,092 15 2

Carried over, 18,092 15 2

oa,

1863. ] Proceedings of the Asiatic Society.
DISBURSEMENTS.
Brought over, 1,720 5 012,083 0 3
Printing Charges, wee DZON Se O
Advertising Charges, de Bea (0)
Engraving : a Seal for the Lever-
embossing Press, ... Y © oO
Bearing Postage, 5 6 O
Stationery, ee 105 11 O
Petty Charges, Rie Ge 9s
EST Gi orn tee
Vestep Funp.
Paid Commission upon Interest on
the Government Securities, 0 9 2
Ditto Income Tax on ditto, 413 0
— Di Gn
Coin Funp.
Purchase of Coins, ... ap 68 0 O
Ditto of 9 Assorted Gold Mohurs, 396 0 0
Ditto of an Akbar ditto, 55 0 O
A Teakwood Coin Cabinet, 35 4 O
Fitting Pigeon holes in the wooden
Coin Cabinet, 4 0 0
Banghee Postage, ... os {3 ©
Bearing ditto, 312 0
2 Packets of Large Cards for labell-
ing Coins, 1282 0
10 Paper Boxes for Coins, chee 010 0
12 Bags for ditto, ... nee 010 0
Petty Charges, aa iat OF FG
572 13 6
BUILDING.
Assessment, 506 ee OW
Ditto for Lighting, ... Sco iz 0
Repairing, LS OF 6
Metalling the Society’s s Compound, 25 0 0
380 0 &
MIscELLANEOUS.
Advertising Charges, $50 22 14 O
Meeting Charges, ... ee LOG oe
Wages of a Ticca Mally, 54 6 6
A Bracket for the Clock, 6 2 0
Purchase of Receipt Stamps, Fae) Ke)
A Tin box for keeping the
Kittoe Inscriptions, 5 4 O
A Blank Book, Zee One
Paid fee to the Bank of Bengal
for Stamping Cheques, : 3 2 0
Petty Charges, wa 33 10 9
302 5 9
Carried over, 15,822 13 6

G@ 2

43

1,840 11 9

10 3) 6

191 8 0

521 15 0

44

Proceedings of the Asiatic Society. [No. },

RECHIPTS.

3rought over, Co.’s Rs. 18,092 15 2

Co.'s Rupees,... 18,092 15 2
Examined.
Lataoran Dutt,
Assistant Secretary.
Asiatic Society's Rooms,
Lhe 31st December, 1862.

1863. | Proceedings of the Asiatic Society.

DISBURSEMENTS.
Brought over, 15,322 13 5
Depostt.
KE. Blyth, Esq. sli BOO) OF O
Baboo Nobinchunder Roy, ee 014 0
E. C. Bayley, Esq. ... bo Is 07 0
Capt. H. G. Raverty, Sid 26 12 O
Capt. E. Li. Harle, ... Bae 20 0 O
Mion J.T. Walker, 24 0 O
Baboo Shumbhoo Chunder Roy,... 12 0 0
R. H. M. Warrand, Esq. ba LORS OeEO
C. J. Campbell, Esq. So 12 0 0
W. A. D. Anley, Esq. 600 tS On 0
M. Kempson, Esq. ... sae 12750520
W. Theobald, Esq. ... ae SOs 0
De Macleod, Ksq... ues its} (0) a@)
W. T. Dodsworth, Esq. See One G
The Right Rev. The Lord Bishop
of Calcutta,.. cc 36 0 O
Cc. B: Senile, Esq. He 3) 0) 0
Capt. M. Lloyd, ... aes 125 OO
E. G. Glazier, Esq. ... Hoo IO. ©
Lieut.-Col. J. Abbott, ta 12)
Rev. 8. Hislop, ove S00 4 6 0
———_— 657 0 0 305
BaAuance.
Bank of Bengal, ... 757 8 9
Cash in hand, Sea eh ay 8)
ee 835 14 3
Inefficient Balance, .., w56 LB BG
—_——_——. 2,118 1 9

Co.’s Rs.... 18,092 15 2

NANG

——

S. ATKINSON,

Secretary, Asiatic Society.

46 Proceedings of the Asiatic Society. [No. 1,

STATEMENT
Abstract of the Oriental

a

NN a a a ee a oN eo a a om ee a a oe a a

RECEIPTS.

1862. 1861.
ORIENTAL PUBLICATIONS.

Received by sale of Bibliotheca

Indica, &e., es bon NB}
Ditto by Subscription to ditto, .... 139 5 O
Ditto by sale of White Yajur Veda, 98700
Refund of Postage Stamps, Bs, ar ©
Discount on ditto, ... Aes 0 3 9
1 193. O70 SS ifesl2ueg
GOVERNMENT ALLOWANCE.
Received from the General Trea-
sury at 500 Rs. per month, 12
months, ke 500 LOCO) 01 O
| 6,000,410) 101467000 an aeO

VESTED FunD.

Received Interest on Government
Securities from the Bank of
Bengal, ie sao LOO
——_—_—_—. 440 0 0 440 0 O

CusToDY OF ORIENTAL WorKS.

Savings and Establishment, nee WA: O. 9)
WOO) ¥ 6.6) 3

Batance oF 1861.
Bank of Bengal, ... 915 7 5

Cash in hand, soo aia
959 9 10
Inefficient Balance, ... ae 2d, 28 6
pens 3414 2 4

oe

Carried over, 11,064 12 1

1863. | Proceedings of the Asiatic Society. 47

No. 2.
Fund for the year 1862.

OO

DISBURSEMENTS.
1862.

ORIENTAL PUBLICATIONS.
Commission on Sale of Books, . 107 5 9
Freight, ... ane ein GE) 8) @
Packing Charges, ... 400 Pall $8) (0)
Purchase of Postage Stamps, ... 3) db) 0)
Petty Charges, ae A o 2 @
Vistep Funp.
Commission upon Interest on Go-

vernment Securities, sa Alea kya)
Income Tax on ditto, Ne SIZE TO

CusToDY OF ORIENTAL WoRKS.
Salary of Librariap at Rs. 30 per

month, 360 0 0
Establishment at Bs. 14 ay month, IGS 0
Book Binding, “3 153 8 O
Books Cleaning, sb he 63 0 O
Extra Writer’s Salar y, 4 0 O
Banghee Expenses, de ©
Bearing Postage, .. Ay OY O
Stamp fee paid to the Bank of

Bengal, a i 2) ©
Packing Char oes, : OF 40
Repairing the Libr ary Cases, 4 4 O
Printing Charges, a) 0 -@
Petty Charges, wae J © ©
LIprary.

Purchase of Books and MSS., ... 114 9 9

DEPposiIt.
Paid Dasia Santgram Swakaram, Al 13 0

Pees ere

DICTIONARY oF ‘TECHNICAL

TERMS.
Printing and Editing Charges, ... 484 0 0
TARIKH I FrRozsHAnI.
Printing Charges, ... rae LOO ORO
Copying and Examining, a 012 0

Parl) 1S) 89) Ne) 1G)

Hdl Obs SGAnsiina

ih 9 © 94 8) 0

41 13 0

484 0 0 1,844 0 O

100 12) 0 1,344, 2 ©

Carried over, 1,745 1 3

48

Proceedings of the Asiatic Society.

RECEIPTS.
Brought over, 11,064 12 1

ae

Carried over, 11,064 12 1

[No. 1,

1863. ] Proceedings of the Asiatic Society.
DISBURSEMENTS.

Brought over,
Marcanprya PuRANA.

Printing Charges, : Zit Se
Charges for assistance in Editing, 100 0 O
SrIpDHANTA SrROMANI TRANSLA-

TION.
Printing Charges, 194 8 O
Drawing and Engraving 6 Dia-

grams, Aue ny, 200) One 0
Wuitrt Yasur VEDA,
Subscription to 20 Copies of Nos.

6 and 7 of vol. 3rd of ditto

£21 @ 1-11 per rupee, Son: 2 Ale fn G
CHHanpocya UPANISsHAD TRANS-

LATION.
Printing Charges, ... fret ater) m0)
Translating ditto, 183 8 O
Brack Yasur VEDA.
Editing Charges, 534 0 O
KCAMANDAKI.
Editing Charges, 140 0 O
Narada PANCHARATRA.
Printing Charges, 462 12 0O
Charges for assistance in Editing, 80. 0 0
VEDANTA SUTRAS.
Kditing Charges, ... ee 400 ORO:
Printing ditto, ae Be alia) rh 50)
Sa NKHYA Sa/RA.
Copying Charges, ss. ee 20 0 O
DASARUPA.
Printing Charges, ... Prana la One O
Sankara Dravisaya (Prose and Poetry.)
Printing Charges, .. ee LO San. 0.
Purchase of Paper for ECO; a sae S Ole Ol ©
SANHITA OF THE Buiack YasurR

VEDA.
Printing Charges, ... Son, coe OFy 0

ConQueEST OF SYRIA.
Printing Charges, 384 0 0

——

1,745

377

214

214)

505

534

20

224

290

224.

384

Bis

$0
8 0
7.6
8 0
0 O
0 O

4 O
©. ©
0 0
fs) 0)
0 0
0 0

——

Carried over, 6,091 8 9

49

Silfen Sa 0
401 O O
272 8 O
450 O O
245 14 0
452 6 0

EL

50

Proceedings of the Asiatic Society, [No. 1,

RECEIPTS.
Brought over, 11,064 12 1

——

Co.’s Rs.,... 11,064 12 1

Examined.
Lateorat Dott,
Assistant Secretary.
Asiatic Society's Rooms,
The 31st December, 1862.

1863. | Proceedings of the Asiatic Society. 51

DISBURSEMENTS.
Brought over, 6,091 8 9
KAUSsHITAKI BRAHMANA.

Printing Charges, ... ee 402, 14
—_————._ 482 14 0
NakHBAT UL Frere.
Editing and Printing Charges, ... 269 0 0
269 0 O

TaRikH I BAarHaxkt.
Printing and Editing Charges, ... 2,067 0 O
——___—____——. 2.067° 0 0 9584 0 0O

8,910 6 9

BALaNnce.
Bank of Bengal, .,. 537 4 2
Cash in hand, eae ON ete
a 539 12 10
Inefficient Balance, ... GIA, S) 1G) 2 hoAg oi 4

Co.’s Rs.... 11,064 12 1

_—

W.S. ATKINSON,
Secretary, Asiatic Society.

tes
fo)

q

i}

Proceedings of the Asiatic Society.

*hjavwog ows Shangasag
‘NOSNIMLY "S “AA

’ GS 60¢P
0 0 0
0 PF BY
0 0 OI
00 0
0 8 9TZ'T
0 0 002
0 0 9g¢
0 OL 68P
* 2 8p
0 8 912
“1981

G

0

wc x

(=)

0 PL2‘P

0 0&6

i=)
S
S
ive)

OoarFenana
@
re
~—

i)
|
a
re

———=

‘Kus ‘ssorg Ul onsoleyep eipemMepy jo

sordog 00g Aardmog Surjutag yesuog
seeeeeereereeee ((SUIPUTT) SonSoTeyVO palg
tereeeeneeeeseees seneeeens osor rede Spun

UOTL[SUBAT, [VIUMOLIC O11} 0} UoTydiaosqug
‘qnoqge ‘potapued uoeq yoX sey yuUnoD0R

OU YOM 1OF “A W “AT “SON OFC
JO “III ¥ “IT I “SON [eumop suyumg
terreseceees Kos Sraqmma0a(y Of sosteyQ

quasu1ju0g pues quomysttqeysa ‘Lavpeg
sreeeeees SOV GION PUL SULVIT[TAA “SASSOTT
spdiaabnm HanoncocoodboronsecHosGaDeS Ripe CYGT
Bee 900 008 coe ven bot oOe “Dea ‘Keyprery “MM. pf
‘SH FT “OTTATOD “AA “Ef AIS 919. WOH

‘hyanoog onmsp ‘hivjauag qunysissy ‘ZOST “IaT STS ONT
‘LLOQ Tvaoytvy ‘SMOOY S,ALGI00g OLLVISY
pourmexdy

9 81 9299 3% TT 6IL's

ees

0 0 00g 0 0 00g “ZO8T “ooq s0¥ <oURMOTTY yuatMUA0EACD
0 fF FZ € ZL 29 Oeics reso lorag toate
& & 60S Soe CPC 3 ane LOL CORG IIS [euinop
0 8 G0E O 8 L6G errs ‘syoog jo ereg ‘Aavaqry
0 O 8 OF OCC ee soo qmuorserun ag,
€ PL IPOS 8 OT 9cIP BAY yee ereseereseerensees Corrorangraymog

‘SONIGNVISIO0

oe

Oo 8 1h G Wt Bey,

eg ee ee,

0 0 000° 0 0 000'G MT 8 SsorTMOAg yuatTUIEAOD
O SI Z8T ) 9 AYUfB TE PPPS om2-IPVEVOLININD CATTTAEE, qualomeuy
6 cL fefo) 9 G 8L OO FOR Oe oe Oe Bee oes Poe Boe vee ‘puey ur yseg
TL Oe Cal ts BG) Hal epg eo nocoracenceonncte Gorey jo yusg

“T98T “698L ‘ASVO

SS

"GOST fo asoja ay7 yo hynoog oymsy oyg fo souyrquuy pun szassy ayy bumayg
'€ ON SINGNELLVLS

53

Proceedings of the Asiatic Society.

1863.]

‘hgawoy ayvisy ‘hipjasoay

‘NOSNIMGLY ‘“S “AA

0 FL 66F'9

0 F 196°

0 0 0008

0 0 OS

O OL 88I

“T98T

“6981 fo ISO]) IY} JO PUNT W9YQDIY] QUE 19}UWOVLE)

0 ¢ 6119 r -2 LE8 er
0 O &2P
fe weniscieieensvess to’ Kug‘socivus) ad UEd
0 O O00F 1 | 9. 0 008
Ard ¢ wor eer eee ses cet sat wesees 4no R ‘aya duto09
0 8 GET i: I 9 8 FFs
yok you syOM AO oNp sasaveyO SuryIpA
G & WV

0 0 o¢ 900 906 00s 000 cor DOH OOe FO OCs OSR *Z98T “oa,
IO} SoloMOSUTJUODH puUe qUoTUYSIIquisH| | G 2 CTE

0 eL OTL OIF POUL One OGIO ODEO OOO ‘sqisodeqy 0 (6) 00c‘6

“C98T “SHLLITIAVIT “T98T

‘7 ON “ING WHLVLS

“hyna0g ounisp ‘hspjasoagy 2ungSess pr

‘LLOq TVdO9 IVT

‘poulmexq

LT &L POLL

6 -010— =

*ZOST “09 ISTE OUT,
SMLoo{y s

: ALGIOON OILVISY

6

Tordriosqng pue avg vorpuy vooqyorqrg,

0 0 00S ‘Z98T “0eq OF cOURMOTLY yUeTIUIOAOH

9 8 FI9'T
88 Z
< bp Leg

0c aot coerce eee DOG 208 ee ‘souvpeg quolorgeuy

Doe cer coe cce soe oes sas os en ace ‘puey Ul isle)

pec eet ees es seceee Tesueq jo yueg oy9 Uy

0 0 o0s’6é ‘sy Ssaryandeg yUeTIUIEAOD

ayy fo sayyIquuT pun sjassp ayy buamayg

“‘SLUSSV

Proceedings of the Asiatie Society. [No. 1,

LIST OF ORDINARY MEMBERS

OF THE

ASTATIC SOCIETY OF BENGAL

ON THE 3lst DECEMBER, 1862.

The * distinguishes Non-Subscribing and the + Non-Resident Members.

Date of Election.

PLP DNOL I DIINO INIA IA SOAP AD

June 2, 1847
Dec. 5, 1860
July 4, 1860
April 2, 1862

» 4, 1862
Feb. 2, 1859
July 7, 1852
Oct. 3, 1860
Sept. 4, 1843
May 1, 1861
Nov. 7, 1860
Oct. 8, 1862

al2aslsog

Sept. 4, 1861
July 3, 1861

» 4, 1855
March 7, 1860
Feb. 6, 1861

Sept. 6, 1826
Oct. 7, 1835
Nov. 7, 1860
March 6, 1861
Augt. 6, 1862
Jan. 3, 1838
July 4, 1860
May 4, 1859
Feb. 6, 1861
June 6, 1849
April 7, 1841
Sept. 4, 1847
Augt. 4, 1861

f+Abbott, Lieut.-Col. J., Artillery, Delhi.

Abdool Luteef, Khan Bahadur, Maulavi, Calcutta.

yAhmed, Saiéd, Khan Bahadur, Ghazipore.

Aitchison, C. U., Esquire, B. C. S., Calcutta.

* Aitchison, J. EH. 'T., Esquire, M. D., Europe.

*Alabaster, C., Hsquire, China.

*Allen, C., Esquire, B. C. 8., Europe.

Amir Ali, Khan, Munshi, Calcutta.

*Anderson, Lieut.-Col. W., Bengal Artillery, Europe.

Anderson, T., Esquire, M. D., F. L. S8., Royal Bota-
nie Garden, Calcutta.

| +Anley, W. A. D., Esquire, Allahabad.

Apurva Krishna, Rajah Bahadur, Calcutta.

Archer, Dr. C., Calcutta.

Asghur Ali, Khan Bahadur, Nawab, Calcutta.

*Asphar, J. J. T, H., Esquire, Europe.

Atkinson, W. 8., Esquire, M. A., F. L. 8., Calcutta.

Atkinson, Lieut.-Col. F. D., Calcutta.

+Austen, Capt. H. G., H. M.’s 24th Foot, Surv. Gene-
ral’s Dept., Dehra Dhoon.

Avdall, J., Esquire, Calcutta.

*Baker, Col. W. E., Bengal Engineers, Europe.

Banerjea, Rev. K. M., Calcutta.

Barnes, C. H., Esquire, Bhagalpore.

+ Basevi, Capt. J. P., Bengal Engineers, Vizagapatam.

+Batten, J. H., Esquire, B. C. 8., Myniporee.

+Batten, G..H. M., Esquire, B. C. 8., Allahabad.

Bayley, E. C., Esquire, B. C. 8., Calcutta.

Bayley, 8. C., Esquire, B. C. S., Calcutta.

Beadon, Hon’ble C., B. C.S., Calcutta.

Beaufort, F. L., Esquire, B. C. 8., Calcutta.

*Beavan, Lieut. R.C., late 62nd B. N. I., Europe.

*Beckwith, J., Esquire, Europe.

1863. ]

Date of Election.

OL
CA

Proceedings of the Asiatie Society.

Sept, 1, 1880
Dec. 8, 1862
Aut. 6, 1862
June 4, 1862
July. 2, 1862

» 15, 1840
March 4, 1846

Sept. 7, 1859
March 4, 1857
Augt. 3, 1859

a2) NO

rola
March 6, 1861
Oct. 12, 1859
Nov. J, 1854
April 4, 1860
March 7, 1860
Oct. 3, 1860
Jan. 15, 1862
June 2, 1847
Feb. 6, 1861
Nov. 7, 1860
March 7, 1860
July 4, F860
April 3, 1861
Sept. 38, 1856
July 4, 1860
April 6, 1859
Sept. 7, 1859
June 6, 1860
Jan. 4, 1860
Sept. 38, 1856
Oct. 3, 1860
Sept. 4, 1861
April 2, 1862
March 5, 1851
Dec. 5, 1860
March 4, 1857
July 3, 1861
April 2, 1862
June 2, 1847

Nov. 6, 186
Sept. 4, 18
March 6, 1861
June 4, 1856

*Benson, Lieut.-Col. R., Europe.

Bernard, C. E., Esquire, Calcutta.

+Beverley, H., Esquire, B. C. 8., Monghyr.

*Bhau Daji, iors Bombay.

Bhola Nath Mullick, Babu, Calcutta.

*Birch, Major General Sir R. wy ER, Ke ©.

*Blagrave, Major T. C., 26th Regt,
Europe.

Blane, Lieut.-Col. 8. J., Caleutta.

Blanford, H. F., Esquire, Calcutta.

+Blanford, W. T., Esquire, Geological Survey,
Bombay.

*Bogle, Lieut.-Col. Sir A., Europe.

Bolie Chand Singh, Babu, Calcutta.

*Boulnots, C., Hsquire, B. A., Europe.

TBowring, L. B., Esquire, B. C. S., Mysore.

*Boycott, Dr. T. B., M. 8., Europe,

Braddon, H., Esquire, Calcutta.

+Brandis, Dr. D., Rangoon.

+Brandreth, J. KE. L., Esquire, Rawal Pindee.

+Briggs, Major D., Assam.

*Brodie, Capt. T., 5th Regt. B. N. I., Europe.

Brown, ie Esquire, M. D., B. M.S., Calcutta.

*Browne, Horace A., Capt., Rangoon.

Browne, Rev. J. Cave, M. A., Calcutta.

+Bunsput Sinha, Rajah, Allahabad.

Burn, Rev. T. H., M. A., Calcutta.

Busheerooddeen, Sultan Mohammad, Chinsurah.

+Byrne, L. F., Esquire, C. H., Lahore.

Calcutta, Right Rev. Lord Bishop of, Caleutta.

*Campbell, Dr. A., Europe.

*Campbell, C. J., Esquire, C. E., Europe.

Carnac, J. H. Rivett, Hsquire, B. C. S., Nagpur.

“Chapman, R. B. , Esquire, B.C.S. , Hurope.

*Christian, J. , Esquire, Monghyyr.

+Cockburn, J. F., Esquire, C. E., Kurhurbari Colliery.

+*Colles, J. A. P., Hsquire, M. D., Umritsur.

*Colvin, J. H. B., Esquire, B. C. S., Kurope.

+Cooper, F. H., Esquire, B. C. 8., Delhi.

Cowell, EH. B., Esquire, M. A., Calcutta.

*Crockett, Oliver R., Esquire, China.

*Dalrymple, F. A. E., Esquire, C. 8., Dacca.

*Dalton, Major EH. T,, 9th Regt. B. N. L.,
Nagpur.

+Davies, R. H., Esquire, B. C. §., Punjab.

Davidson, Capt. E., Bengal Hngineers, Calcutta.

+Davey, N. T., Esquire, Revenue Survey, Sylhet.

YDeBourbel, Major R., Bengal Engineers, Allahabad.

B., Europe.
BN

Chota

OG

Date of Election.

Proceedings of the Astatic Society. [No. 1,

Nov. 7, 1860
June 5, 1861

March 6, 1861

May 8, 1862
Sept. 7, 1853
Jan. 9, 1861
Sept. 7, 1859
July 5, 1854
Feb. 6, 1861
Jan. 4, 1860
May 1, 1861

5 6, 1857
Oct. 7, 1840
May 4, 1859
Jan. 7, 1846
Nov. 2, 1859
March 5, 1856
Nov. 1, 1854
Jan. 9, 1861
Augt. 6, 1856

a (By Ie,
May 7, 1851
Oct. 12, 1859

Aust. 1, 1860
Oct. 12, 1859
March 7, 1860
Oct. 12, 1859

Feb. 6, 1861
Jan. 4, 1860
March 7, 1860
Sept. 4, 1861
Dee. 7, 1859
Sept. 5, 1849

re Ue SE)
Augt. 3, 1859
Sept. 7, 1859

5 ©, 1842
April 2, 1862
Sept. 7, 1859
Dee. 5, 1860
Sept. 5, 1860

Digumber Mitra, Babu, Calcutta.

*Denison, His Excellency Sir William, K. C. B.,
Madras.

*Devereux, Hon’ble H. B., B. C. 8., Europe.

+Dhunpati Smgh Dooghur, Babu, Moorshedabad.

*Dickens, Lieut.-Col. C. H., Europe.

+Dodsworth, W. T., Esquire, Meerut.

Douglas, Lieut.-Col. C., Caleutta.

Drummond, Hon’ble E., B. C. S., Calcutta.

*Duhan, H., Esquire, G. T. Survey, Dehra Dhoon.

+Duka, Dr. T., Monghyr.

+EHarle, Capt. E. L., Bengal Artillery, Kurnal.

*Hatwell, Dr. W. C. B., Europe.

*Hdgeworth, M. P., Esquire, B. C. S., Europe.

+Edmonstone, Hon’ble G. F., B. C. S., Allahabad.

*Hlhiott, Hon’ble Walter, M. C. 8., Europe.

Elliott, C. A., Esquire, B. C. S., Agra.

*Hllis, Lieut.-Col. R. R. W., 23rd Regt. B. N. L,
Europe.

tElphinstone, Capt. N. W., 4th Regt. B. N. I., Jul-
lunder.

Erskine, Hon’ble C. J., Bombay C. S., Calcutta.

*Hrskine, Major W. C., C. B., Europe.

Hyre, Col. Vincent, C. B., Calcutta.

Fayrer, Dr. J., B. M.8., Calcutta.

Fisher, A., Esquire, Calcutta.

Fitzgerald, Major C. M., Umballah.

Fitzpatrick, D., Esquire, C. S., Umritsur.

Fitz William, Hon’ble W. S., Calcutta.

Furlong, Capt. J. G. R., Calcutta.

+Forrest, R., Esquire, Civil Engineers, Dehra Dhoon.

Fraser, Capt. A., Alouada Reef.

7Frere, His Excellency Sir H. Bartle, K. C. B.,
B. C. 8., Bombay.

Fuller, Capt. A. R., Lahore.

Futteh Ali, Maulavi, Calcutta.

+Fytche, Lieut.-Col. A., 70th Regt. B. N. I., Maul-
mein.

+Gardener, D. M., Esquire, B. C. 8., Furruckabad.

Gastrell, Lt.-Col. J. H., 13th Regt. N. L., Revenue
Survey, Calcutta.

Geoghegan, J., Esquire, B. C. 8., Calcutta.

*Gladstone, W., Hsquire, Kurope.

Glazier, E. G., Esquire, C. 8., Dacca.

Goodeve, H., Esquire, M. D., Calcutta.

¥Guru Churn Doss, Babu, Berhampore.

~Goss, W. Forbes, Esquire, Nya Doomkah, Beer-

bhoom,

1863.1

Date of Election.

July 2, 1862
Feb. 5, 1862
Sept. 6, 1840
Dec. 7, 1859
July 4, 1860
Jan. 4, 1860
Auegt. 2, 1854
March 6, 1861
July 4, 1860
Sept. 4, 1861
Noy. 7, 1860
Augt. 1, 1849
Feb. 6, 186]

» 9, 1862
June 2, 1847
May 2, 1860

March 7, 1855
Nov. 12, 1828

May 5, 1847
Oct. 12, 1859
_ & ieee
un 811860

Feb. 6, 1861
Oct. 12, 1859
May 3, 1848
Augt. 6, 1862

By JSD)
July 6, 1853
March J, 1854
May 2, 1860
Oct. 8, 1862
Sept. 7, 1859
March 7, 1860

July 2, 1862
Jan. 4, 1860
Oct. 8, 1862
Dec. 7, 1853
Jan. 9, 1861
April 7, 1841

ay, 2 Lor!
Jan. 4, 1860
July, 5, 1854
Dec. 4, 1861

» 8, 1845
July 2, 1862
June 2, 1847

Proceedings of the Asiatic Society. 57

Gordon, J. D., Esquire, B. C. S., Calcutta.

+Gourdoss Bysack, Babu, Berhampore.

Govin Chunder Sen, Babu, Calcutta.

*Grant, Sir J. P., K. C. B., Europe.

Grant, J. P., Esquire, Jr., B. C.S., Calcutta.

Grant, T. R., Esquire, Calcutta.

Grapel, W., Esquire, M. A., Calcutta.

+Grey, J. J., Esquire, Maldah.

Grey, Hon’ble W., B. C. S., Calcutta.

TGriffin, L., Esquire, B, C. 8., Lahore.

*Griffith, R. T. H., Esquire, Benares.

Grote, A. Esquire, B. C.S., F. L. S., Calcutta.

*Growse, F. S., Hsquire, B. C. 8., Hurope.

+Guthrie, Col. C.S., Bengal Engineers, Ootakamond.

*Hall, F. E., Esquire, M. A., D. C. L., Europe.

Halleur, Dr. H., Calcutta.

*Hamilton, R., Esquire, China.

*Hamilton, Sir R. N. E., Bart., B. C.S., Europe.

*Hannyngton, Col. J. C., 63rd Regt. N. I., Europe.

*Hardie, Dr. G. K., Kurope.

Harington, Hon’ble H. B., Caleutta.

+Harris, E. B., Esquire, Civil Surgeon, Monghyr.

+Harrison, A. 8., Esquire, B. A., Mussouri.

+Haughton, Major J. C., Assam.

*Hearsay, Major General Sir J. B., K. C. B., Europe.

+Heeley, W. L., Esquire, B. C. S., Nuddea.

+Henessey, J. B. N., Esquire, Dehra Dhoon.

Herschel, W. J., Esquire, B. C.S , Calcutta.

*Hichens, Lieut. W., Bengal Engineers, Europe.

Hobhouse, C. P., Esquire, B. C. 8., Calcutta.

Hogg, C.S., Esquire, Calcutta.

*Hopkinson, Major H., Europe.

tHovenden, Major J. J., Bengal Engineers, Alla-
habad.

Hyde, Lieut.-Col. H., Royal Bengal Engineers,
Caleutta.

Innes, Major J. J. M., Lahore.

tIrwin, Valentine, Esquire, B. C.S., Dinajpore.

y¥Ishureeprasad Singh, Bahadur, Rajah, Benares.

Jackson, Hon’ble L.8., B. C. S., Calcutta.

*Jackson, W. B., Esquire, B. C. 8., Europe.

Jadava Krishna Singh, Babu, Calcutta.

Jallaluddin, Mohammad, Prince, Calcutta.

James, Major H. C., 32nd Regt. B. N. I., Calcutta.

* James, Major H. k., C. B., Hurope.

Jerdon, T. C., Esquire, M. M. S., Calcutta.

Johnson, Major A. B., Bengal Staff Corps, Calcutta.

*Johnstone, J., Esquire, Hurope.

I

38
Date of Election.

March 5, 1862
Sept. 7, 1859
April 1, 1857
May 4, 1853
Feb. 3, 1858
March 2, 1859
April 3, 1850

Dec. 4, 1861
Jan. 15, 1862
March 6, 1839

ye ay Justa |
Dec. 38, 1851
April 7, 1852
Dee. 7, 1859
Feb. 6, 1856
Jan. 4, 1860
Nov. 6, 1861
Dee. 3, 1862
Oct. 7, 1835
July 2, 1828
April 3, 1861
Nov. 1, 1854
Dec. 5, 1860
April 5, 1848
March 5, 1862
April 6, 1853
Jan. 4, 1860
Sept. 3, 1862
Nov. 3, 1852
June 5,186]
July 4, 1860
Jain, WA, Waso
Sept. 3, 1862
July 3, 1862
Oct. 4, 1837

April 6, 1853-

March 7, 1860

Feb. - 6, 1861
Nov. 7, 1855
April 38, 1850

ae of, LOA,

5 4, 1860
Feb. 6, 1856
July 2, 1862
Feb. 1, 1860
Dec. 6, 1854

Proceedings of the Asiatic Society. [ No. 1,

Johnstone, Lieut. J., Asst. Commissioner, Shahpore.

*Jones, R., Esquire, Europe.

Joygopal Bysack, Babu, Calcutta.

+Kabeerooddeen Ahmed, Huzrut Shah, Sasseram.

Kaliprosonno Singh, Babu, Calcutta,

Kasinath Roy Choudhury, Babu, Casipur, Calcutta.

Kay, Rev. W., D. D., Calcutta.

+Kempson, M., Esquire, M. A., Bareilly.

King, W., Esquire, Jr., Geological Survey, Madras.

*Laidlay, J. W., Esquire, Kurope.

*Laing, Rt. Hon’ble S., Europe.

*Layard, Major F. P., Europe.

Lees, Capt. W. N., LL. D., Calcutta.

Leonard, H., Esquire, C. E., Caleutta.

*Liebig, Dr. G. Von, B. M. 8., Europe.

Lindsay, E. J., Esquire, Calcutta.

*Lloyd, Capt. M., Tounghoo.

Lobb, 8., Esquire, M. A., Calcutta.

*Loch, G., Esquire, B. C. 8., Europe.

*Low, Hon’ble Major General J., Hurope.

yLumsden, Major P. S., Murree.

*Lushington, F. A., Esquire, B. C. S., Europe.

Macfarlane, D. H., Esquire, Calcutta.

+Maclagan, Lieut.-Col. R., Lahore.

Macnamara, Dr. I. N., Calcutta.

Macrae, Dr. A. C., B. M.S. , Calcutta.

Mair, 10), , Esquire, M. AS Calcutta.

Mallet, 106 Re Ksquire, Caleutta,

Manickjee Rustomjee, Esquire, Calcutta.

+Man Singh, Bahadur, Maharajah, Oude.

*Man, EH. ‘G. , Esquire, "Europe.

*Mar shman, TF C., Esquire, Kurope.

+ Martin, Ry L., Esquire, B. A., Dacca.

McCrindle, J. W., Esquire, M. A., Calcutta.

+McLeod, D. F., Esquire, C. B., B. C. 8., Lahore.

Medlicott, J. G., Esquire, B. A., Calcutta.

Medlicott, H. B., Esquire, F. G. 8., Calcutta.

+Melville, Capt. A. B., late 67th N. I., Surveyor

General’s Dept., Dehra Dhoon.

*Middleton, J., Esquire, Hurope.

*Mills, A. J. M., Esquire, B. C. S., Europe.

*Money, D. I., Esquire, B. C. S., Europe.

+Money, A., Esquire, B. C. 8., Bhagalpore.

Money, J. W. B., Hsquire, Calcutta.

Monteath, A. M., Esquire, B. C. 8., Calcutta.

+Montgomerie, Capt. T. G., B. E., F. R. G. S.,
Trigonometrical Survey, Dehra Dhoon.

*Morris, G. G., Eqsuire, B. C. 8., Hurope.

1863.]

Date of Election.

Oct. 11, 1854

July 5, 1837
Augt. 3, 1859
July 2, 1862
Augt. 3, 1859
Nov. 7, 1860
Sept. 1, 1852
April 2, 1862
Aug. 3, 1859
Jan. 4, 1860
June 4, 185]

lel ASIII
Feb. 10, 1847
May 7, 1862
Feb. 1, 1860
June 5, 1861
July 1, 18385
Oct. 8, 1862
Sept. 5, 1849
March 6, 18389
Jan. 4, 1860
March 9, 1825
Feb. 1, 1837
April 2, 1862

ee DELS 62

spe) (0; Hes}

Sept. 6, 1849
March 5, 1856
Feb. 1, 1887
Augt. 5, 1840
March 7, 1860
June 7, 1854
Nov.
Augt. 6, 1856
March 5, 1862

Augt. 3, 1853
Dec. 1, 1847
Sept. 7, 1859
Feb. 6, 1856
July 4, 1860
Nov. 2, 1859
Dec, 4, 1861
MG Weel
May 2, 1854
Feb. 1, 1860.
Augt. 3, 1859

7, 1860 |

Proceedings of the Asiatic Society. 59

*Muir, W., Esquire, B. C. S., Europe.
*Muir, J., Esquire, Hurope.
+Murray, Lieut. W. G., 68th N. I., Rewah.
Napier, Hon’ble Major General Sir R., K. CxBs
Calcutta.
+Narendra Narain Bhupa, Maharajah, Coch Behar.
+Newmarch, Major C. D., Pegu.
*Nicholls, Capt. W. T., 24th Regt. M. N. I., Europe.
Norman, Lieut.-Col. H. W., C. B., Calcutta.
Obbard, J., Esquire, Caleutta.
+Oldham, C., Esquire, Geological Survey, Madras.
Oldham, T., Esquire, LL. D., F.R.8., F.G.8.,Calcutta.
*O’Shaughnessy, Sir W. B., Europe.»
*Ouseley, Major W. R., Europe.
Partridge, 8. B., Hsquire, M. D., Calcutta.
+Pearse, Major G. G., Madras.
+Pelly, Capt. L., Bombay Army, Zanzibar.
+Phayre, Lieut.-Col. A., Rangoon.
+Poolin Behary Sein, Babu, Berhampore.
Pratap Chandra Sinha, Rajah, Bahadur, Calcutta.
Pratt, Ven’ble Archdeacon J. H., M. A., Calcutta.
Preonath Sett, Babu, Calcutta.
*Prinsep, C. R., Esquire, Kurope.
Prosonno Coomar Tagore, Babu, Calcutta.
+Raban, Major H., Chera Poonjee.
+Rajkissen Roy, Babu, Berhampore.
Radha Nath Sikdar, Babu, Chandernagore.
Rajendra Dutt, Babu, Calcutta.
Rajendralala Mitra, Babu, Calcutta.
Raminath Tagore, Babu, Calcutta.
Ramgopal Ghose, Babu, Calcutta.
*Reid, H. S., Esquire, Europe.
*Riddell, H. B., Esquire, B. C. S., Europe.
tRiley, H. O., Esquire, F. G. S., Bassein.
Roberts, Hon’ble A., B. C. 8., Calcutta.
+Robinson, Capt. D. G., Bengal Engineers, Dehra
Dhoon.
*Roer, Dr. E., Europe.
*Rogers, Capt. T, E., Hurope.
Russell, A. H., Esquire, B. C. 8., Berhampore.
Russell, R. H., Esquire, B. C. 8., Midnapore.
*Sampson, A. B., Esquire, B. A., Europe.
+Sanders, J., Esquire, Calcutta.
tSanders, C. B., Esquire, B. C. S., Mysore.
*Saxton, Capt. J. H., 88th M. N. I., Cuttack.
*Schiller, F., Esquire, Europe.
*Scott, Col. HE. W.S., Europe.
Scott, W. H., Esquire, Dehra Dhoon,
i 2

60

Date of Election.

July 4, 1860
Jan. 14, 1845

Sept. 7, 1859
2 a 1G
July 4, 1860

Feb. 6, 1856
March 2, 1859
Feb. 5, 1862

Sept. 6, 1854
March 2, 1859

May 2, 1860
Sept. 4, 1848
Oct. 8, 1862
Sept. 4, 1861
Feb. 6, 1861
June 7, 1848
May 3, 1843

March 2, 1859

Oct. 2, 1861
July 7, 1858
Feb. 2, 1859
Augt. 6, 1856
May 2, 1860
March 2, 1859

June 6, 1860

» 6, 1855
Jan. 4, 1860
Noy. 21, 1853
June 2, 1847
July 2, 1862
Nov. 2, 1859
Feb. 5, 1862
June 5, 1861
Feb. 3, 1841
March 7, 1860
Sept. 4, 1861

May 2, 1860

Oct. 2, 1861
May 1, 1861
Jan, 15, 1862

Proceedings of the Asiatic Society. [No. 1,

+Shelverton, G., Esquire, Dehra Dhoon. -

*Sherwill, Lieut.-Col. W. S., 66th Regt. B. N. L.,
F,G.S8., F. R. G. S., Europe.

*Sherwill, Major J. L., Manbhoom.

*Shumbhoo Chunder Roy, Babu, Rungpur.

Simpson, Dr. B., Calcutta.

*Smith, Col. J. F., Europe.

*Smith, H. Scott, Esquire, B. A., Europe.

*Smyth, Capt. E., Almorah.

*Spankie, R., Esquire, B. C. §., Meerut.

Stainforth, H., Esquire, Calcutta.

Stanton, Major F. §., Bengal Engineers, Europe.

*Stephen, Major J. G., 8th N. I., Europe.

Stevens, C. C., Esquire, B. C. S., Dum Dum.

Stewart, Major P., Bengal Engineers, Europe.

Stewart, Lieut. W. J., Bengal Artillery R. Survey,
Burrisal.

Strachey, J., Esquire, B. C. S., Calcutta.

Strachey, Lieut.-Col. BR. F. B.S. F. L.8., F.G.S.,
Calcutta.

Stubbs, Capt.
Meer.

+Sudderooddeen, Moonshi, Pundooah.

+Sutherland, H. C., Esquire, B. C. 8., Rajshahye.

+Suttischunder Roy, Maharajah, Krishnagar.

Satyasharana Ghosal, Rajah, Bhookylas, Calcutta.

+Temple, R., Esquire, B. C. 8., Nagpur.

+Theobald, W., Esquire, Jr., Geological Survey, Ran-
goon.

Thompson, J. G., Esquire, Calcutta.

*Thomson, Dr. T., M. D., F. R.S., F..8., F.8.G8.,
Europe.

Thompson, Rev. J. C., Calcutta.

+Thornhill, C. B., Esquire, B. C. 8., Allahabad.

Thuillier, Lieut.-Col. H. L., F. R. G. S., Bengal
Artillery, Calcutta.

Thurlow, Hon’ble T. J. H., Calcutta.

*Tickell, Major S. R., Moulmein.

+Torrens, Col. H. D., Simlah.

+Tremlett, J. D., Esquire, B. C. 8., Jullunder.

Trevor, Hon’ble C. B., B. C. 8., Calcutta.

Turnbull, Lieut.-Col. A. D., Roorkee.

Tween, A., Esquire, Geological Survey, Calcutta.

+Vanrenen, Capt. A. D., late 71st B. N.I., R. Sur-
vey, Landour.

Walagohur, Mohammad Saheb-zadah, Calcutta.

+Walker, Major J. T., Bombay Engineers, Madras.

Ward, G. E., Hsquire, Calcutta.

F. W., Bengal Artillery, Mean

1863. |
Date of Election.

July 7, 1852
a ES SSS)
» 95, 1854

March 7, 1860

Nov. 3, 1847

April 6, 1859
Oct. 8, 1862
Sept. 4, 1861
Angt. 3, 1859

Oct. 8, 1862
Sept. 7, 1859
May 7, 1851

March 2, 1859
Augt. 6, 1862
April 4, 1855
July 2, 1856

March 9, 1825

ao di, eS
July 1, 1829
Sept. 7, 1831
eB
Nov. 5, 1834
BB. 1S
May 6, 1835

yy
March 4, 1840

Feb. 4, 1842
» 4, 1842
March30, 1843

May 5, 1847
Sept. 1, 1847
Nov. 3, 1847
Feb. 2. 1848

March 8, 1848
April 6, 1853

Aust. 2, 1854
March 7, 1855
July 6, 1858
) G.I
March 2, 1859
BATE AESGIO)

Proceedings of the Asiatic Society. 61

*Ward, J. J., Esquire, B. C. 8., Europe.

+ Warrand, R. H. M., Esquire, B. C. S., Muttra.

*Watson, J., Esquire, B. C. S., Europe.

Wauchope, 8., Esquire, C. B., B. C. S., Calcutta.

*Waugh, Major-Gen. Sir A.S.,C. B. F.R.S., F. R.
G.S., Europe.

Wells, Hon’ble Sir Mordaunt, Kt., Calcutta.

Wheeler, J. T., Esquire, Calcutta.

+Wilhams, Dr. C., H. M.’s 68th Regt., Thayet Myo.

+ Wilmot, C. W., Esquire, Nya Doomka.

Wilson, R. H., Esquire, Dum Dum.

+ Wilson, W. L., Esquire, Beerbhoom.

Woodrow, H., Esquire, M. A., Calcutta.

*Wortley, Major A. H. P., Europe.

Wyllie, J. W.8., Esquire, Bombay C. §., Calcutta.

*Young, Lieut.-Col. C. B., Europe.

*Yule, Lieut.-Col. H., Europe.

List oF Honorary Mrmpers.

M. Garcin de Tassy, Membre de |’ Instit., Paris.

Sir John Phillippart, London.

Count De Noe, Paris.

Prof. Francis Bopp, Memb. de ? Academie de Berlin.

Prof. C. Lassen, Bonn.

Sir J. KF. W. Herschel, F. R.S., London.

Col. W. H. Sykes, F. R. 8., London.

Prof. Lea, Philadelphia.

M. Reinaud, Memb. de I’ Instit., Prof.de l’ Arabe,
Paris.

Dr. Ewald, Gottingen.

Right Hon’ble Sir Edward Ryan, Kt., London.

Prof. Jules Mohl, Memb. de l’ Instit., Paris.

His Highness Hekekyan Bey, Egypt.

Col. W. Munro, London.

His Highness the Nawab Nazim of Bengal, Moor-
shedabad.

Dr. J. D. Hooker, R. N., F. R.S., London.

Prof. Henry, Princeton, United States.

Major-Gen. Sir H. C. Rawlinson, K. C. B., F. B.S.,
D.C. L., London.

Col. Sir Proby T. Cautley, K. C. B., F. R.S., London.

Raja Radhakanta Deva, Bahddur, Calcutta.

B. H. Hodgson, Esquire, Europe.

Dr. H. Falconer, F. R. 8., B. M.S., Hurope.

Hon’ble Sir J. W. Colvile, Kt., Europe.

Prof. Max Muller, Oxford.

Date of Election.

Nov.

7, 1860
7, 1860
7, 1860
7, 1860
7, 1860
7, 1860

2, 1844
4, 1856
4, 1856
4, 1856
4, 1856
4, 1856
4, 1856

March 4, 1857

Nov.
May
Feb,

“April
July

3, 1858
9, 1859
4, 1859
1, 1860
1, 1860
4, 1860
3, 1861

March 5, 1862

Oct.
Feb.
Dee.
Jan.

7, 1835
7, 1838
6, 1843
14, 1845

Proceedings of the Asiatic Society. [No.

Mons. Stanislas Julien, Paris.

Col. Sir George Everest, Kt., F. R. S., London.
Dr. Robert Wight, London.

Edward Thomas, Esquire, London.

Dr. Aloys Sprenger, Germany.

Dr. Albrecht Weber, Berlin.

List oF CORRESPONDING MrmpBerrs.

MacGowan, Dr. J., Europe.

Kremer, Mons. A. Von, Alexandria.
Porter, Rev. J., Damascus.
Schlagintweit, Herr H., Berlin.

Smith, Dr. E., Beyrout.

Tailor, J., Esquire, Bussorah.

Wilson, Dr., Bombay.

Nietner, J., Esquire, Colombo, Ceylon.
Schlagintweit, Herr R., Berlin.
Frederick, Dr. H., Batavia.

Bleeker, Dr. P., Batavia.

Baker, Rev. H., Alipi, Hast Malabar.
Swinhoe, R., Esquire, Consulate, Amoy.
Haug, Dr. M., Poonah.

Gosche, Dr. R., Berlin.

Murray, A., Esquire, London.

—$— — , —————————_—___—__

List oF ASSOCIATE MEMBERS.

Stephenson, J., Esquire, Hurope.
Keramut Ali, Saiéd, Hooghly.
Long, Rev. J., Europe.

Blyth, E., Esquire, Hurope.

1863. ] Proceedings of the Asiatic Society. 63

ELECTIONS IN 1862.
Ordinary Members.

Major D. Briggs, Assam.

W. King, Esquire, Jr., Geological Survey, Calcutta.

G. HE. Ward, Esquire, Calcutta.

Col. C. S. Guthrie, Bengal Engineers, Otakamond.

Col. H. D. Torrens, Simla.

Babu Gour Doss Bysack, Calcutta.

Capt E. Smyth, Almorah.

Lieut. J. Johnstone, Assistant Commissioner, Shahpore.
Capt. D. G. Robinson, Bengal Engineers, Dehra Dhoon.
Dr. F. N. Macnamara, Calcutta.

C. U. Aitchison, Esquire, B. C. 8., Calcutta.
-Lieut.-Col. H. W. Norman, C. B., Calcutta.

KF. A. H. Dalrymple, Esquire, Dacca.

HK. G. Glazier, Esquire, B. C. S., Dacca.

J. A. P. Colles, Esquire, M. D., Umritsur.

Major H. Raban, Patna.

Babu Rajkissen Roy, Berhampore.

Babu Dhunpat Singh Dooghur, Berhampore.

S. B. Partridge, Esquire, M. D., Calcutta.

Dr. Bhau Daji, Bombay.

How’ble T. J. H. Thurlow, Calcutta.

J. D. Gordon, Esquire, B. C. 8., Calcutta.

A. M. Monteath, Esquire, B. C. S., Calcutta.

Major A. B. Johnson, Bengal Staff Corps, Calcutta.
Howble, Major General Sir R. Napier, K. C. B., Calcutta,
Babu Bhola Nauth Mullick, Caleutta.

Lieut.-Col. H. Hyde, Royal Bengal Engineers, Caleutta.
Capt. J. P. Basevi, Vizagapatam.

H. Beverley, Esquire, B. C. S., Monghyr.

Col. Vincent Eyre, C. B., Calcutta.

W. L. Heeley, Esquire, B. C. 8., Nuddea.

J. W.S. Wyllie, Esquire, B. C. 8., Calcutta.

F. R. Mallet, Esquire, Calcutta.

R. L. Martin, Esquire, B. A., Dacca.

Rajah Apurva Krishna, Calcutta.

C. E. Bernard, Esquire, Calcutta.

64 Proceedings of the Asiatic Society. [No. 1,

C.S. Hogg, Esquire, Calcutta.
Hon’ble H. B. Harington, B. C. 8. Calcutta.
Valentine Irwin, Esquire, B. C. 8. Dinajpur.
Babu Poolin Behary Sen, Berhampore.

C. C. Stevens, Esquire, B. C. S., Dum Dum.
R. H. Wilson, Esquire, Dum Dum.

J.T. Wheeler, Esquire, Calcutta.

S. Lobb, Esquire, M. A., Presidency College, Calcutta.

Corresponding Member.
A. Murray, Esquire, London.

Loss oF MEMBERS DURING THE YEAR 1862.

By retirement.
Babu Nundolal Bose, Calcutta.
Capt. W. A. Ross, Cawnpore.
H. Bell, Esquire, B. C. 8., Jessore.
Rey. F. F. Mazuchelli, D.D., Calcutta.
Capt. De la Chaumette, Calcutta.

By death.
Hon’ble W. Ritchie, Calcutta.
Rajah Prasanno Nath Roy Bahadur, Degaputti, Rajshahye.
E. A. Blundell, Esquire, Singapore.
Babu Jogindra Narain Roy, Rajshahye.
Babu Ramaprasad Roy, Calcutta.
T. E. B. Judge, Esquire, Calcutta.
Dr. W. Crozier, Calcutta.

OOOO Oe eee

1863. | Proceedings of the Asiatic Society. 65

For Frprvary, 1863.

The monthly General Meeting of the Asiatic Society was held on.
the 4th instant.

Lieutenant-Colonel H. lL. Thuillier, President, in the chair.

Presentations were received —

1. Form the Government of India, Foreign Department, two copies
of a series of twenty-eight Photographs illustrating the tribes of the
Nagpore province, taken by Lieut. W. W. Hooper, of the seventh
Madras Light Cavalry.

2, From Dr. Bhau Daji, a copy of the Ramayana, printed by
Ganopoti Krishna, Bombay.

38. From Babi Rajendra Mullick, two Ostrich eges and a
couple of Emu eggs and a specimen of the red-headed Crane.

4. From A. Grote, Esq., a young Kangaroo in spirit.

Read a letter from J. T. Wheeler, Esq., Asst. Secy. to the Govern-
ment of India, Foreign Department, forwarding the following com-
munication from the Political Agent at Nimar, reporting the parti-
eulars of an earthquake in that province and the Burwani territory,
on the night of the 18th November last.

From Captain J. C. Woon, Political Agent in Nimar.
To Mason R. J. Muapvz, Agent, Govr.-Genl. for Central India.
Dated, Camp Boorhanpoor, 26th, Dec., 1862.

Srr,—I have the honor to inform you, that on the night of the
18th ultimo at about 73 o’clock, a shock of an earthquake was felt
almost throughout Nimar and throughout the Burwani territory,
accompanied with a very loud noise resembling the tramping of a
multitude of horses.

2. he direction was from North-west to the South-east.

3. The shock was more severe in the Burwani country than
elsewhere. Portions of walls fell down in some cases, and tiles were
knocked off in other instances.

4. The shock was felt simultaneously from Burwani West to
Poonassa Kast, South of the Nerbudda; and from Manupoor West
to Burwani Hast, North of the Nerbudda.

5. ‘These phenomena were not noticeable South of the Satpoora

' K

66 Proceedings of the Asiatic Society. [No. 1,

range at Boorhanpoor, nor in the Zainabad Purgunnah South of the
Taptee.

6. The weather was very sultry at the time, and rain fell every
where in Nimar a day or two after the shock of the earthquake was
felt.

7. Shocks of earthquakes are very rarely felt in Nimar.

I have, &c.,
(Sd.) J. C. Woop,
Political Agent.

Letters from W. Grapel, Esq., and Babi Rajkissen Roy, express-
ing their desire to withdraw from the Society were recorded.

The following gentlemen duly proposed at the last meeting were
balloted for and elected ordinary members :—

E. T. Trevor, Esq., C. S., and the Hon’ble Raja Deo Narain Singh.

The following gentlemen were named for ballot as ordinary mem-
bers at the next meeting :—

The Rt. Hon’ble Sir Charles Trevelyan, K. C. B., proposed by
Lieutenant-Colonel R. Strachey and seconded by Mr. Atkinson.

The Hon’ble A. Eden, proposed by Mr. Medlicott and seconded by
Mr. T. Oldham.

Babu Hari Doss Dutt, proposed by Babi Rajendralal Mitra and
seconded by Mr. Grote.

Captain G. Hunter Thompson, Bengal Staff Corps, Revenue Sur-
vey Department, proposed by the President and seconded by Major
J. EH. Gastrell.

H. M. Rogers, Esq., C. 8., proposed by Captain W. N. Lees and
seconded by the President.

The Council reported that they had appointed the following Sub-
Committees for 1863 :—

Finance.—Dr. J. Fayrer ; Babi Rajendralal Mitra.

Philology —Captain W. N. Lees; Babi Réjendralal Mitra; E.
C. Bayley, Esq.; Hon’ble C. J. Erskine ; R. T. H. Griffith, Esq. ; and
A. Grote, Esq.

Library.--Babi Rajendralal Mitra; Captain W. N. Lees; Dr.
J. Fayrer; Dr. T. Anderson; and T. Oldham, Esq.

Natural History.—T. Oldham, Esq.; Dr. T. Anderson; Dr. A. C.
Macrae; Dr. J. Fayrer; A, Grote, Esq.; H. F. Blanford, Esq. ; and
Dr. T. C. Jerdon.

“«

1863. ] Proceedings of the Asiatic Society. 67

Meteorology and Physical Science.—The Ven’ble J. H. Pratt; T.
Oldham, Hsq.; Lieutenant-Colonel R. Strachey ; Major J. T. Walk-
er; Captain T. G. Montgomerie; J. Obbard, Esq.; and Major
J. H. Gastrell. ;

Coin Committee—Captain W. N. Lees; E. C. Bayley, Esq ;
Baba Rajendralal Mitra; and A. Grote, Hsq.

Committee of Papers.—H. C. Bayley, Esq., and A. Grote, Esq.

In submitting the above list of the Committees for the approval of
the meeting, the President stated that it was the object of the Coun-
cil to make each department as complete and efficient as possible by
the addition of the names of members of the Society not in the
Council, whether resident in Calcutta or otherwise, for the advice and
assistance of gentlemen at a distance could be obtained at all times,
and might prove especially useful. He therefore begged that if any
member could suggest the names of any other gentlemen likely to
take an interest in and further the important objects of the various
sections, they would be good enough to do so, in order that the
Council might have the benefit of their services.

No other names being proposed the lists were declared closed and
accepted,

The President brought to the notice of the meeting that the
Council had resolved to establish suitable albums for the collection
of photographs of the Archeological remains with which the country
abounds, as well as for ethnological subjects, including the series
which had been presented to the Society by the Government, and
which were now being taken in various parts of India. A record of
these valuable representations which photography was now so active-
ly employed in perpetuating, he thought would be peculiarly appro-
priate and useful to the Society, and when once a start was made, it
might be hoped, that many members would be able and willing to
aid the collection, so as eventually to produce a most valuable and.
interesting work of reference. He therefore trusted members would
be kind enough to bear the subject in remembrance, and favour the
Society with their contributions from time to time. It was likewise
proposed to have a portrait album of Members of the Society.

Communications were received—

1. From EH. O. Riley, Esq., a paper entitled Remarks on the
Lake of clear water in the District of Bassein, British Burmah.

K 2

6S Proceedings of the Asiatie Society. [No. ],

2. From Captain E. C. 8. Willams, Under-Secretary to the
Government of India, Public Works Department, copy of a report by
Major General Cunningham, Archzological Surveyor, on his research-
es up to March last, and a statement of his operations during last
November.

3. From Babi Gopinath Sein, abstracts of the results of the
Hourly Meteorological observations taken at the Surveyor General’s
Office in November last.

The President then called on Mr. H. F. Blanford to read a paper
on the Distribution of the land Gasteropoda of India and Burmah,
by Mr. W. Theobald, Junior, of the Geological Survey, who was
absent on duty.

The author commenced by expressing his dissent from Mr. Dar-
win’s theory, and from certain views communicated in a paper by the
Messrs. Blanford as to the mode of distribution of the Mollusca
faunas of the isolated hill groups of Southern India. The observed
fact having been that there is a remarkable similarity and in many
eases identity between the land shells of the Nilgerries, Puchaniallies,
Shevaroys, &c. while those of the intervening plains are very differ-
ent ; it had been suggested that at a former period, when (as indicated
by geological investigation) a large part of India was submerged
beneath the sea, an interchange of species had taken place between
the hill groups in question by floating timber, &c., or else that these
species had emigrated across the plains when partially up-heaved and
covered with adamp forest such as is requisite for the existence of
these Mollusca. Mr. Theobald demurred to these views, on the ground
that the transport of shells on floating timber must be so rare an
eceurrence as to be inapplicable to the case, and that there is no
migratory instinct in snails similar to that of birds to impel them to
extend their area of habitat as suggested. On the contrary, Mr.
Theobald held that species were of sporadic origin, instancing in sup-
port of this view, the acknowledged ethnic centres of the human race.
Moreover, he held, in opposition to Mr. Darwin, that species were
incapable of variation to an unlimited extent. He pointed out that
the land Mollusea of India were, as a rule, confined to definite pro-
vinces and at the conclusion of his paper gave a list of those pro-
vinees and of the land Mollusca peculiar to each.

Mr. H. F. Blanford in reply to Mr, Theobald’s remarks, pointed out

1863. | Proceedings of the Asiatie Society. 69

to the meeting that the theory of specific centres, or in other words, the
restriction of species as a rule to definite areas was the only assumption
made by Messrs. Blanford in their paper, and so far from being dis-
proved by Mr. Theobald it had been actually strengthened by his
division of India into provinces, each of which had its peculiar Mollusca,
That species were thus restricted as a rule was admitted by naturalists,
almost without exception, and it was on this ground that the Messrs,
Blanford had sought to explain the observed exception in the case of
the hill faunas of Southern India. Carriage of Mollusca on floating
wood was admitted to be exceptional and rare, but cases of the kind
had been observed and experiments made which proved its possibility.
It is true that no migratory instinct is known in snails, but, given
increase of numbers and power of locomotion, and an extension of
species over an increased area would necessarily follow until re-
strained by adverse conditions. As to the ethnic centres of the
human race, it was observed that because, as argued, the sub-divisions
of a species had sprung from definite centres, there was no reason to
infer that the progenitors of these sub-divisions had not likewise
sprung from a common centre. ‘The sporadic origin of species is not
held by any eminent naturalists of the present day, and Mr. Theo-
bald had advanced no instance in its favour. Mr. Blanford further
denied that there was any evidence of the limitation of variability in
species, and pointing out that Mr. Theobald had advanced no argu-
ments in support of his own view, gave instances to prove, that
variation is known to such an extent that the variety is no longer
eapable of interbreeding with the parent stock : moreover, that many
of our domestic varieties of animals and plants have become so much
altered that the parent stock is either unknown or can only be indi-
cated with doubt.

Mr. Blanford concurred generally with Mr. Theobald’s division of
India into sub-provinces, but would make some alterations therein.

The President proposed that the thanks of the meeting should be
given to Mr. Theobald for his interesting paper, which would appear
in the Journal in the usual course. The Society were especially
indebted to the gentlemen of the Geological Survey of India, who,
in the course of their travels and researches over the length and
breadth ofthis country found so many opportunities of sending papers
to the Society.

70 Proceedings of the Asiatic Society. [No. 1,

The President said he had much pleasure in introducing to the meet-
ing a member from the Sister Presidency, Dr. Bhau Daji, of Bombay,
of whom they had doubtless heard, as an eminent philologist. He
was glad to find that the Doctor was prepared to make some remarks
to the meeting, which no doubt would prove acceptable.

Dr. Bhau Daji then read an abstract of a paper which he had pre-
viously read before the Bombay Branch of the Royal Asiatic Society
on the value of the numerical symbols in ancient Hindoo inscriptions.
He had been enabled to ascertain their correct value from finding
certain inscriptions, especially those at Nassick, where the symbols
occurred with their value at the same time given in words. Dr.
Bhau Daji also added some remarks on the era of Salivahan, which
he would identify with the era of Kshaharata or Phrahates, one of
the Arsacide. In the same way it seemed to him not improbable
that the era of Vikramaditya was introduced by the Buddhists or
Jains, and that it corresponds to the victory obtained by the Parthi-
ans over Crassus, B. C. 53, He concluded with presenting to the
Society copies of his transcripts and translations of the Junagur and
Adjunta inscriptions.

The thanks of the meeting were voted to Dr. Bhau Daji for his
valuable communication, and the transcripts presented by him.

The President offered to produce fac-similes of the inscriptions on
a reduced scale by the photo-lithographiec process, which, although in
its infancy here, was peculiarly adapted for such purposes. He ex-
pressed a hope also that Dr. Bhau Daji in the course of his travels
in the N. W. Provinces and Kashmir, whither he was now going,
would be able to transmit to the Society some of the fruits of his
researches, which it would give the Council great pleasure to receive.

The Librarian then submitted his report.

LIBRARY.
The following are the accessions to the Library since the meeting held in
November last.
Presented.
Brockhaus’ die Lieder des Hafis Persisch mit dem commentare des Sudi
Vols. I. to 1J1.—By tur AvTHor.
Bombay Magnetical and Meteorological Observations for 1861,—By THE
BomBay GOVERNMENT,

1863. ] Proceedings of the Asiatic Society. 71

On the Horizontal Force of the Earth’s Magnetism. By J. A. Broun, Esq.
—By THE AUTHOR.

The Bifilar Magnetometer.—By THE sAME.

De la connexion entre les phenomenes meteorologiques et les variations du
Magnetisme Terrestre.-—By THE SAME.

Memoirs of the Royal Astronomical Society, Vols. XXVIII. to XXX.
—By THE Royat AsTRoNoMICcAL SOCIETY.

Memoirs of the Geological Survey of India, Palzeontologia Indica, Vol. 2.,
Part [V.—By THE SUPERINTENDENT GEOLOGICAL SURVEY OF INDIA.

Ditto ditto.— By THE GOVERNMENT oF Inpra,

Ditto ditto.—By THE BENGAL GOVERNMENT.

Diwan-i Nigar, 4 copies. By Babu Joygopal Bysack.—By THE AvTHOoR.’

Garcin de Tassy’s Cours d’ Hindoustani—Discours D’ouverture, du yer
Decembre 1862.—By THE AUTHOR.

Journal of the Royal Asiatic Society, Vol. XX. Part I—By THE Roya

_ Astatic Socrety oF Lonpon.

Notices of the Proceedings of the meeting.—By THE SAME.

Oriental Baptist for October, 1862.—By THE Epitor.

Oriental Christian Spectator for September, October and November, 1862.
—By tHe Epriror.

The Calcutta Christian Spectator for January, 1863.—By tur Epirtor.

Selections from the Records of the Bombay Government, Nos. LXVI. &
LXVII.—By tur GovernmMEntT or BomsBay.

Selections from the Records of the Government, North-Western Provinces,

~ Part XXX VIII.—By THE Government N. W. Provinces.

Narrative of the course of Legislation, during the official year 1861-62.—
By THE BENGAL GOVERNMENT.

Annual Report on the Administration of the Punjab Territories for the
year 1861-62.—By THE SAME.

Annual Report on the operations of the Post Office of India, for the year
1861-62.—By THE SAME.

Annual Report on the Administration of the Central Provinces, for the
year 1861-62.—By THE SAME.

Annual Report on the Administration of the Electric Telegraph, for the
year 1861-62.—By THE SAME.

Lieut.-Col. Hamilton’s Report on the Shevaroy Hills—By tar Mapras
GOVERNMENT.

Ditto ditto on the Pulni Mountains.—By THE saME.

Murdoch’s Indian Year-Book for 1861, a review of Social, Intellectual and
Religious Progress in India and Ceylon.—By THE CoMPILER.

Proceedings of the Royal Geographical Society of London Vol. VI. No. 5.
— By THE Socrery,

72 Proceedings of the Asiatie Society. [No. J,

The Quarterly Journal of the Geological Society, Vol. XVIIL, No. 72.—
By THE Soctgry.

List of the Geological Society of London, Nov. 1862.—By tur Same.

Charter and Bye- Law of the Geological Society of London.—By TH SAME.

Returns shewing the operations of the Income Tax Act in the N. W. Prov-
inces, for 1860-61.—By THE GovERNMENT N. W. PRovVINCEs.

Photographs and Notes descriptive of the tribes of Berar.—By THE Go-
VERNMENT OF INDIA.

A complete set of Photographs of Indian tribes prepared under the orders
of the Bengal Government for the London Exhibition—By tor Brnear
GOVERNMENT.

Jahrbuch der Geologischen Reichsanstalt, Vol. XII. No. 3.—By tux
Vienna GronocicaL Musrum.

Dr. Weber’s Uber der Vedakalendar, Namens Jyotisham.—By THE
AUTHOR.

Exchanged.

The Athenzeum for October and November, 1862.
The London and Edinburgh Philosophical Magazine, Vol. XXIV. Nos.
162 and 163.

Purchased.

Mahabharata translated by Ph. Ed. Foucaux.

Revue des deux Mondes for October, November and December, 1862.
Journal des Savants for October and November, 1862.

Tornberg’s Ibn-El-Athiri.

Revue de Zoologie, Nos. 9 and 10, 1862.

The Annals and Magazine of Natural History for November and Dec., 1862.
The American Journal, Vol. XXXIV. No. 101.

The Parthenon, Vol. I. Nos. 25 to 33.

Grimm/’s Deutsches Worterbuch Dritter Band.

Brugsch’s Reise der K. P. Gesandtschaft Nach Persien, Vol. I.

Dr. T. C. Jerdon’s Birds of India, Vol. I. Two copies.

Annales des Sciences Naturelles—Botanique. Vol. XVII. Nos. 1, 2 and 3.

1863. | Proceedings of the Asiatic Society. 73

Report of the Curator, Zoological Department.
(Continued from Vol. XXXTI. p. 345.)

Ill. W. T. Blanford, Esq., of the Indian Geological Survey.

A collection of sundries from different parts of Burma.
MAMMALIA.

Presspytis PHayretr, nobis; from Arakan; Nycticrsus TEmM-
MINCKIL and SCOTOPHILUS COROMANDELIANUS, from Thayet Myo, on
the Irawadi (being two of the commonest Bats throughout India,
Burma, and the Malayan peninsula). Also Rurzomys BaDIvs,
Hodgson, from Arakan.

TUPAIA FERRUGINEA (var. peguana, Lesson). Also a very common
species in the Burmese countries, ascending northward to the Khasya
hills, and likewise inhabiting the vicinity of Dorjiling. Specimen
from “ Arakan mountains.”

*ScIuRUS BLANFORDII, nobis, 2. s. (described Vol. XXXI, J. 4.8.
p- 333.) From the neighbourhood of Ava—“ common on the Shan
hills, less so in the neighbourhood of the river near Ava.”

Mus conconor, nobis, young described, J. A. S. XXVITL, 295
and adult (unnamed, noticed in preceding page). “ House Rats,
from Thayet Myo.” This is rather a great Mouse than a Rat, if
the distinction can be understood ; very like M. muscunvs, except
in being much larger, with a proportionally longer tail. Length of
adult male, taken out of spirit and the fur dried—head and body

4 in., and tail 53 in.; ear-conch (posteriorly) 5% in. ; hind-foot 1 in.
Its close similitude to M. muscuuus renders further description un-
necessary ; except that the paler colour of the lower-parts has a -
peculiar reddish-sandy or faint vinaceous tinge (a sort of ésabelline
hue), and the fur of the back is distinctly spinous to the sense of
touch. In the thatched roofs of the Burmese up the Salwin river,
I several times observed a small long-tailed Rat, which I very
strongly suspect, indeed feel quite sure, was of the present kind,
but I was unable to obtain a specimen.f An old stuffed example in
the Society’s collection, from Malacca, seems also, perhaps, to be

* J find that I have referred to this in J. 4. S. XXXJ, 391.
¥ Since writing the above, I have been assured, positively, that CORVUS SPLEN-
DENS, of either race, does not occur, either at Pinang, Malacca, or Singapore.

L

*

74 Proceedings of the Asiatic Society. [No. 1,

identical: though I have my doubts, and I have found several
specimens, obtained by the late Major Berdmore at Schwe Gyen.

AVES.

Terax EvTOLMOs, Hodgson. From Shan hills E. of Ava. “Said
to live on beetles. In the Southern Tenasserim Provinces, the I.
FRINGILLARIUS, (Drapiez), begins to appear, andis the only species
which I have seen from the Malayan peninsula. In fine specimens
of this, the whole abdominal region is deep ferruginous, contrasting
with a white breast (in general tinged a little with ferruginous) ; but
the flanks and tibial plumes are always deep black. I. EUTOLMOS is
the species which approaches nearest to Edwards’s figure and deserip-
tion of I. BENGALENSIS, (L.) ; but is conspicuously distinguished by
its broad white band across the nape, continuous with the broad
white supercilia, also by its deep ferruginous throat and tzdzal plumes ;
but what appear to be the young have rufous forehead and supercilia,
and a white throat. I. BENGALENSIS is a race which still remains
to be verified. I. MELANOLEUCOS, nobis, has no ferruginous colour-
ing whatever, and pure white tibial plumes; being also rather larger
than the others. The Society’s only specimen was received alive
from Asam ; and another is noted in the Catalogue of the India-house
Museum, the habitat of which is unknown.

_ Bucrros cavatus, L. Head from Ava.

B. atgrrostris, Shaw. “ From Shan hills. The same species is
common along the base of the Arakan hills in Pegu. I have not
met with it on the alluvium.” It seems to be common throughout
Burma, and in the forests of Upper Martaban, together with the
preceding. It is not generally known that the Hornbills are capital
eating, as I can testify from experience.

CeRYLE RuDIS, (L.) “ More common above Ava than in Pegu.”

ALEEDO MENINGTING, Horsf. (A. asiatiea, Swainson) “ Replaces
on the sea-coast the A. BENGALENSIS of the interior.”

Haucyon tevcocupHatus, (L.) The Burmese race seems always
to have a somewhat albescent cap.

Msrors quinticonor, Vieillot. (Obtained also by myself near
Maulmein, and in Upper Martaban; likewise M. puinrprrnensrs
at Rangoon; and M. viripis everywhere, mostly with a redder
head than in India. I observed numbers of this last species bur-

1863.] Proceedings of the Asiatic Society. 75

rowing into the hill-side (soft laterite), along deep road-cuttings near
Maulmein.)

Me@anarMa Inpica, (Latham). Common here and there; but
in general less so than M. tryeara, (Vieillot), the voice of which is
quite similar to that of M. caniceps, (Franklin).

MULLERIPICUS PULVERULENTUS, (Tem.). ‘Shan hills E. of Ava.
Very noisy. Only met with once, in a small flock of five or six, at a
height of about 2,000 ft., in the Shan hills, east of Ava.”

Muitmriricus Frpprnt, Blanford. (M. savensts of Burma,
auctorum.) Differs from M. savunsis, (Horsf. v. lewcogaster, Tem.,)
of the Malay countries, by its white rump; in which it resembles
M. Hopasont, Jerdon, of Malabar: while the extent of slightly
buffy-white colouring on the inside of the wing is greatly increased
occupying the basal half of the remiges. In M. Hopeut, nobis, of the
Andaman islands, the plumage is wholly black, with the exception of
the usual crimson marks on the head. In other respects, these
four races bear a near resemblance to each other.

Picus Buanrorpr, nobis, 2. s. Very like P. MAWRATTENSIS of
India ; but the white markings generally more developed, as especially
shewn on the wings and tail. It is just barely separable as a race.

GECINUS VIRIDANUS, nobis. “ From banks of Irawadi.” I observed
if numerously in Martaban, as also G. OCCIPITALIS, (Vigors).

G. Cutoropus, (Vieillot). ‘ From the same place as the PuUL-
VERULENTUS.”

TIGA INTERMEDIA, nobis. “ From Thayet Myo, where notvery rare.”
I obtained both this and the preceding species on the Salwin, and
also in the forests of Upper Martaban. In the same habitat, the dimi-
nutive Prous MOLUCCENSIS (var. canicapillus, nobis) abounded ; and
I obtained Hmmticircus CANENTE, (Lesson), at the base of lime-
stone hills along the Salwin.

CUCULUS TENUIROSTRIS, Gray. “Near Ava.” Likewise obtained
by myself: as also C. canornus at Moulmein, in immature plumage ;
C. HIMALAYANUS in Upper Martaban; C. striatus, Drapiez, plenti-
fully in the rainy season, when very musical, on the hills near Maul-
mein; ©. varius at Maulmein; and Crrsococerx (Trogon macu-
latus of Brown’s Illustrations) once at Maulmein.

HARPACTES ERYTHROCEPHALUS, Gould. A particularly fine
pair.

L 2

76 Proceedings of the Asiatic Society. [No. 1.

CoRVUS SPLENDENS, Vieillot. ‘The common Crows in Mandell
have the grey mark on their necks as distinctly as the Crows of
Calcutta.” In Akyab the Crows are also of the common Indian
yace ; which appeared for the first time in Khyouk Phao on the 7th
December, 1856, on which day (as I am informed by Major Ripley)
a party of seven individuals arrived there, which have since stocked
the neighbourhood. South of Khyouk Phao, this Crow has still no
representative in Arakan; but across the mountains which divide
that province from Pegu, in the valley of the Irawadi, again at
Maulmein, Tavoy, and as far south as Mergui, it is replaced by a
wholly black race, quite similar both in form and habit, but having
a much shriller voice (a sort of shrieking caw, if possible still more
inharmonious than that of the other). There is just a very faint
tinge of ashy on the neck and breast, where the common Indian
Crow is pure cinereous ; but this must be specially looked for to be
remarked. In the Ceylon race, the grey of the neck and breast is
much darker than in that common (I believe) to all India; but very
far from black as inthe Crows of Burma. Whether this race extends
to the Malayan peninsula, I am unaware; but we know little of the
ornithology of that peninsula northward of the latitude of Pinang.
The large black Crow of all India (C. cuLMrNaTUs,) extends through-
out Burma and the Malayan peninsula, and is doubtless the Sumatran
C, corax apud Rafiles ; but, in the southern portion of the Malayan
peninsula, there is another large black Crow with remarkably long
bill (C, MacrorHyncnos, Vieillot), which again is distinct from the
C. enca, Horsf., of Java and other islands further east. In Burma,
as in India, the C. cunMINatus is diffused in pairs over the country,
and is found even in the depths of the forest, remote from human
habitations ; whereas the black race of C. spLunDENS, like the grey-
necked race, is only observed near towns or populous villages.
The difference of these two races corresponding to that of the
Carrion and Hooded Crows of Hurope, which are currently regarded
as different species.*

* The Jackal has only recently occurred about Akyab ; though, for years past,
it has frequented the country through which the Koladyne river flows into
Akyab harbour. It also occurs, rarely, about Prome, and thence northward to
Ava; but nowhere in the maritime provinces of British Burma, south of Akyab,
where (as before remarked) it has only lately made its first appearance.

The common House Maina (ACRIDOTHERUS TRISTIS), and the representative
of the Pied Starling (STURNOPaSTOR SUPERCILIaxIS), L observed abundantly so

1863. ] Proceedings of the Asiatic Society, 77

ORYPSIRINA cucuLLATA, Jerdon (J. A. S. XXXI, p. 841).
“ Thayet Myo.”

TEMENUCHUS BURMANENSIS, Jerdon (p. 342.) “ Common through-
out Burma.” I did not meet with it.

STURNOPASTOR SUPERCILIARIS, nobis. Differs from the Indian
race in having a distinct white supercilium, in addition to the white
ear-coverts, with streaks of white also tipping the feathers of the
forehead. One specimen has a white-necked collar; but this I take
to be abnormal. Just a distinctly recognisable race; and as well
distinguished as others which are accepted as such.

EUSPIZA AUREOLA, (Pallas). ‘Twenty miles above Ava.”

Eusriza Rnutiza; Emberiza rutila, Pallas. A very pretty Bunt-
ing; the male uniformly reddish-ferruginous or rufous-bay, with the
lower parts, from the breast, bright (though not deep) yellow; the
primaries and rectrices dusky; and the wings underneath white
anteriorly. Closed wing 3 in. From 8S. Arakan. One specimen
only. Akin to Ev. avrEoua and others.

MrIRraFrra AFFINIS, Jerdon. Upper Pegu.

GARRULAX MONILIGER, (Hodgson.) “ Puppa hill, near Pagan, where
not very common. Since shot near Thayet Myo.”

CHATARRHM®A GULARIS, nobis, J. A.S. XXIV, 478. “ This bird is
extremely abundant among the low thorn bushes which cover the
dry country about Yenankhyoung and Pagan. It is just as common.
near Ava.”

Mrcaturus paLusTris, Horsfield. “ Found in much the same
places as the CHATARRH#A Harwer; viz. in long elephant-grass ; but
far south as Mergui; but am unaware that either has been recorded from the
Malayan peninsula. As in Ceylon, the House Maina of the Tenasserim Pro-
vinces is darker-coloured than in India.

When first at Akyab, during the rainy season, I remarked the British Tree
Sparrow (PassER MONTANUS) to be the common species about the streets ; consi-
derably out-numbering the Indian House Sparrow (P. Domxsticus, Ind. var.) :
whereas, in the cold season, the latter is the prevalent species about Akyab.
Southward, however, 1 only on two occasions saw the common Indian Sparrow ;
once at Maulmein, and once in a Burmese village higher up the Salwin; whereas
the Tree Sparrow is everywhere in extreme abundance, extending southward to
Singapore (J. A. 8S. 1859, p. 443), and likewise inhabiting Java; having precisely
the same habits as the other. I observed it, numerously. as far south as J’avoy
and Mergui. At Thayet Myo, on the Irawadi, Dr. Jerdon informs me that not
only are P. DOMESTICUS and P. MoNnTANUS common, but also a third species my
a little P. FLavEoLuS. When at Pahpoon, in Upper Martaban, in November

ast, three or four pairs of P. MonrANDS appeared for one day only, entering the

few human abodes in the most familiar manner, and apparently seeking conyent-
ent nooks for nesting-places ; but I saw no others in that wild forest region.

78 Proceedings of the Asiatic Society. [Niobals

its song is finer and its flight much stronger than that of the Mana-
cocercus group. It generally towers when it rises from the grass,
and takes long flights. I have only met with this bird above Ava,—
near Thayet Myo, where Cu. Harner and CH. GULARIS are common.
Cu. Earurt I shot thirty miles above Ava.” M. panusrris I ob-
served in considerable abundance in low brushwood about Akyab
harbour. Cu. Earuet I have not yet seen from the Burmese region ;
but Col. Phayre obtained Cu. caupara in addition to CH. GULARIS.

LAaNIUS HYPOLEUCOS, nobis. “ Ava.” Hxtremely common during
the cold season near Maulmein ; where it takes the place of L. pHm-
NIcuURUS, Pall., so abundant in lower Bengat and also about Akyab.
L. HyPoLEvcoS has been received from Bankok.*

PETROCINCLA CYANEA, (L.) “ Common from Kenankhyoung as far
as I went, viz. to Mali, nearly 100 miles above Ava.” I found this
species everywhere plentiful in Burma, and very tame and familiar,
z. e. during the cold season. Some individuals were undistinguish-
able from the 8. Indian race (A. pandoo, Sykes), others from the EH.
Himalayan race (4. affinis, nobis), and the Chinese and Philippine
race (A. manillensis) is again equivalent, and all (with the Kashmi-
rian (A. longirostris) cannot be satisfactorily distinguished from
P. cyanra of 8. Europe and N. Africa.

CYORNIS RUBECULOIDES, (Vigors). ‘ Fifty miles above Ava. Occurs
I think only in forest. I shot 16 also at 2000 ft. in height upon the
Shan hills.” Not uncommon in Burma during the cold season.

Gravucatus Macet, Cuv.

PYcNONOTUS NIGROPILEUS, Blyth. ‘Ava. Common throughout
Burma.” In Arakan, replaced by P. HmMoRRHOUS, as in Bengal by
P. carer. The habits and notes of all three are as similar as can
well be.

PRATINCOLA LEUCURA, Blyth. A specimen of this bird was pro-
cured by Sir A. Burnes in Scindh; I have never seen it from the
vicinity of Calcutta, but Dr. Jerdon lately observed it plentifully in
the country about Colgong and Caragola, on the main stream of the
Ganges, and also at Thayet Myo on the Irawadi. Mr. Blanford

* There are four distinguishable races of Shrikes, which are very nearly akin.
1. L. supErcitiosus, L. From the Malayan peninsula.
2. Li. pHmNicurRvs, Pallas. India generally ; Arakan.
3. Li, ARENARIUS, nobis. Desert region of N. W. India.
4, I, Lucionensis, L. China; Philippines, Ceylon; Andamans (!)

1863. ] Proceedings of the Asiatic Society. 79

writes—“ It abounds in long grass on the river-banks in Lower Pegu,
and I found it equally common sixty miles above Ava.” It has
doubtless often been confounded with Pr. 1npica; from which it is
readily distinguished by the large quantity of white on the inner
webs of the tail-feathers.

RHODOPHILA MELANOLEUCA, Jerdon, n. g. e¢ sp. This curious
little bird was discovered, not long ago, by Dr. Jerdon, in plenty
about Caragola, on the main stream of the Ganges, where it haunted
the interior of the wild rose-bushes (fosa involucrata), there consti-
tuting much of the ordinary low jungle; and never perching on the
topmost sprays, like the Stonechats and other vawicoline. Mr. Blan-
ford has since obtained in Arakan. ‘The form appears to me to ap-
proximate Curruca most nearly ; but the tarsi and toes are more
slender, and the claws more gracile and elongated. The wings and
tail are also more graduated; and the general plumage softer.
Colours remarkable ; plain glossy black above (inclusive of the ear-
coverts), and plain white below. Bill and feet black. Length of
closed wing 22 inch; of tail 2; inch. I shall leave Dr. Jerdon to
describe it more in detail.

- PHYLLORNIS AURIFRONS, (J. and§.) “ Near Thingadau, seventy
miles above Ava; also Thayet Myo.” I obtained it at Maulmein ;
and PH. COCHINCHINENSIS in the forests of Upper Martaban.

LEUCOCERCA ALBOFRONTATA, (? Franklin.) Here, again, the race
isa little different from the Indian one; being just distinguishable
by having the white of the forehead and supercilia not so broad, nor
meeting round behind at the occiput. There is also not so much
white on the tail-feathers. Upper Pegu.

Tora typHia, (4.) “ Common throughout Burma.”

ORIOLUS MELANOCEPHALUS, Gm. “ Seventy miles above Ava. I
have shot this aud three other species near Thayet Myo.” O. mMELA-
NOCEPHALUS seems to be common throughout Burma, and extends
down the Malayan peninsula; being quite similar to the Bengal
race, and constantly distinguishable from that of Malabar and Ceylon
(O. cEYLonENSIS, Bonap.) O.1INDICUS (v. chinensis) is also com-
mon in the Burmese region, and O. TENUIROSTRIS, nobis, is less so.
I obtained a mature female of the latter at Maulmein, and doubt if
the mature male is yet known. Specimens of O. rnprtcus from China
are undistinguishable from Indian examples, and appear to be the O.

80 Proceedings of the Asiatic Society. — [No. 1,

chinensis, L., et O. cochinchinensis, Brisson,—but not O. ACROCHYN-
cHos, Vigors, of the Philippines. O. Tratzuirt inhabits the higher
mountains of Burma ; but is not likely to have been obtained by Mr.
Blanford at Thayet Myo.*

NECTARINIA astatica, (L.) “ Yenankhyoung.” The most widely
diffused of the Asiatic species. At Maulmein I obtained N. riam-
MAXILLARIS, nobis (there common), and N. HasseLTu, Tem. (appar-
ently rare). The last ranges from Arakan to Singapore; but N
FLAMMAXILLARIS is replaced in the Malayan peninsula by N. PEctTO-
RALIS, Horsfield.

DicHUM CHRYSORREUM, Tem. “ River banks, seventy miles above
Ava.” Arakan, Tenasserim Provinces, Malayan peninsula.

D. crurentTatTuM, (L.) “ Thayet Myo.” The most widely ditrus-
ed of Asiatic species of this genus. I observed it in particular abun-
dance in the vicinity of Mergui; and it is not rare near Calcutta.

D. minimum (Tickell) : young, Certhia erythrorhyncha, Latham.
“River banks seventy miles above Ava.” India generally ; Ceylon ;
Burma ; particularly common in the jungle-clad hills about Maul-
main.

CROCOPUS VIRIDIFRONS, nobis. ‘ Ava.’’ I never obtained this
green pigeon ; but OSMATRERON PHaAyRrit (p. antea) abounded in the
forests of upper Martaban, and O, BIcINCTA is common near Maul-
main, with probably O. PHayRrit also.

Turnix BLANFORDII, nobis, x. s. Like T. DussumteErfi of India,
but much larger; holding the same relationship to that species
which the T. Syxust of India does to the T. anpatusica of S.
Europe and N. Africa. Col. Phayre had long previously sent a spe-
cimen of this race from Arakan. Length of closed wing 4 inches.

TURNIX OCELLATA (Scopoli.) Bengal race. ‘Common in the
grass on the top of Pappa hill.” The three Indian species of this
genus were obtained in the vicinity of Thayet-myo by Dr. Jerdon.

REPTILIA.

Two “shells” of Tortoises. One from Ava is decidedly Emys
TRIJUGA, Schweigger, as described and figured in Gray’s Catalogue of
Shield Reptiles (1855) p. 20 and pl. IV. ‘This species is new to the
Society’s museum, though stated to inhabit “ ponds at Calcutta.” I

* The Andaman Oriole agrees best with O. Horsrienp1, Bonap., Consp.
Avinu,

1863. ] Proceedings of the Asiatic Society. Sl

have hitherto vainly sought for it, however, among the many hun-
dreds of Emypes from this neighbourhood which I have seen in the
course of more than twenty years of collecting.* Length of the
Ava specimen, which I consider to be full grown 9$ in. The young
of this species is figured as H. Belangeri, Lesson, in the Atlas to
Belanger’s Voyage aux Indies Orientalis ; and in the Society’s copy
of that work, purchased at the sale of the late Dr. H. Walker’s
library, #. Belanger is identified by that naturalist (in a pencil-
note) with Geomyda tricarinata, nobis (J. A. 8S. XXIV, 714), from
Chaibasa, central India; but this is a mistake. I doubt if Emys
TRICARINATA, nobis, attains to nearly so large a size as HE. TRIUUGA,
and it is readily distinguished by the uniform yellowish-white colour
of the plastron, the second, third, fourth and fifth pairs of plates upon
which are of about equal size, constituting a strongly marked dis-
tinction from E. trijuga. The carapace of our only specimen is 5}
in. long. Another (forwarded many years ago to the India-house
museum) was quite similar. The palms and soles of this species
are much dilated (or roundly heeled, it might be termed), indicating
terrene habits (whence I formerly placed itin Gromypa). Another
species which has been confounded with H. TrisuG@a, is the Gro-
CLEMYS S1Ba, Gray, from Ceylon, of which we possess two speci-
mens presented by Dr. Kelaart.

Mr. Blanford’s other Tortoise from ‘ Arakan hills,” is the adult
of CYCLEMYS DENTATA, Gray, ibid, p. 42 and pl. XIX.; but with
age this species elongates and loses the dentate appearance of the
posterior margin, so as to be hardly,if at all, recognisable from Gray’s
plate. Length of adult 83 by 53 in.; of another less elongated and
retaining the posterior denticulation 8 by 6 in.

In the same collection is also a large skull of Baragar BAsKar,
Gray (v. Tetronyx Lessoni, D. and B., &c. &c.).

A common Emys of the southern Tenasserim provinces is the E.
CRASSICOLLIS, Bell, as figured in Hardwicke’s ZU. Ind. Zool. This
species I designated #. nigra in J. A. S. XXIV, 713, having mis-

* The commonest Calcutta species is EK. rectum; next E. Haminroni and
H. Toursit; EH. ocrnpata, D. and B., is much more rare; E. tenrorta (closely
akin to TECTUM) belongs to the Indus river-shed, and is very doubtfully Gange-
tic; BaraguR BaskaR, Gray (TETRonyx LussoniI, D. and B.,) is brought
abundantly to Calcutta to be eaten by certain classes of natives; Hmypa punc

TATA and TRIONYX GANGETICUS are common, and of Carrra rnpica I have obtain
ed one specimen only,

M

82 Proceedings of the Asiatie Society. [ No. 1,

taken, at that time, another species for the true CRASSTCOLLIS, re-
ceived from the Batavian Society in 1844. This error is indicated
by Dr. Gray in the Ann. Mag. A. H. XIX, (1857), p. 348; but he
nevertheless enumerates EH. nr@RA as a distinct race.* The Javanese
species does not appear to be described, and may be named

E nvucHatts, nobis, 2. s. from the unusual size of its medial
nuchal plate, which is of a triangular shape. The next four medial
dorsal plates are elongate, quadrangular, sub-hexagonal, the sixth
being triangular with apex to the front. Three dorsal ridges con-
spicuous in the young animal; the lateral placed very high upon the
costal plates, almost submarginally. Posterior border very slightly
dentate in the young animal ; whereas, in the young of CRASSICOLLIS,
it is strongly dentate. Plastron flat, and laterally angulate; the
four principal pairs of sternal plates mostly about equal and nearly
quadrate, though in some the second pair are much shorter than
broad, and the third pair are correspondingly enlarged. Colour, olive
brown, obscurely mottled with darker brown, the lateral angles of
carapace and plastron yellowish ; the latter is reddish-brown, more or
less deeply clouded with black. Head blackish, with yellow line on
the eye, meeting its opposite above the nostrils, another yellow line
under the eye, a third behind the eye, a fourth bordering the upper
jaw, and other yellow markings on the lower jaw: rest of naked parts
yellowish infuscated above. Shell of largest specimen 62 by 4¢ in.
Hab. Java P

Tn the southern Tenasserim provinces is also found abundantly the
Emys Brrpmortt, nobis, J. A. S. XXVII, 281 v. H. ocellata apud
nos, J. d. 8S. XXII, 645, XXIV, 481, and Batagur ocellata apud
Gray, Ann. Mag. N. H. XIX, (1857), p. 348; but not B. ocellata,
apud Gray, Catalogue of Shield Reptiles (1855), p. 86, which refers
to the true EK. oceniata, Dumeril and Bibron, a species which I have
only seen from the neighbourhood of Calcutta. The two are very
conspicuously distinct, and are not even nearly akin, as members of
the same genus. They will, therefore, henceforth stand as BaTaaur
Berpmoril, nobis, from Martaban and southern Burma; and B.
OcELLATA, (D. and B.), from Lower Bengal.

* Dr. Gray in his catalogue of Shield Reptiles, notices specimens of BW. CRAS-
sICOLLIs from “ India” and “Ceylon.” I doubt these habitats exceedingly. An
American C, NIGRA is also given by Dr. Gray.

1863. ] Proceedings of the Asiatic Society. 83
In J, A. S. XXII, 640, I described a land Tortoise, by the name

Testudo megalopus, which I now consider to be merely an enormous
specimen of T. stpLLatA, Schweigger ; the species inhabiting penin-
sular India and Ceylon.* In XXIII, 301, it was recorded that the
Rev. Dr. Mason recognised the supposed megalopus as the species
with which he was most familiar in Burma; but there is a nearly
similar land Tortoise, which would appear to be very common in
Lower Pegu, and which I cannot doubt is the species referred to by
Dr. Mason. I name it—

TESTUDO PLATYNOTUS, nobis, 2. s. Very similar to T. STELLATA 3
but averaging a larger size, and conspicuously distinguished by being
quite flat upon the back ; the plates not rising in the centre, and the
bosses presenting the appearance of having been ground flat by attri-
tion in all the specimens observed. The radiating marks are also
broader and less numerous, in general numbering six only on each
vertebral plate, three on each side of the centre, as compared with
T. steLnata and T. Gkomurrica (from S. Africa), the carapace is
conspicuously broader but not so high ; and the species is much more
obviously distinct from the two latter, than these are from each
other.f Length of largest specimen 11 by 7} in.. and height of
carapace 4¢ in. I have not seen the plastron. The carapaces are
used abundantly in the Rangoon bazar for baling out oil from
earthen vessels. In each oil dealer’s shop there are three or fowr of
them in constant use ; but the entire animal is difficult to be obtain-
ed, as the Burmans are so fond of eating them. I was promised
specimens of the animal, as a common inhabitant of the province ;
but did not succeed in procuring one. Three good illustrative cara-
paces were, however, obtained, showing about the extent of variation ;
and I had to pay a tolerable price for them.f

* Homopus Burnesii, nobis, J. A. S. XXII, 642,—Trstupo HorsFintpi Gray,
Catalogue of Shield Reptiles, (1855) p. 7 and pl. I, Hab. Afghanistan (Nipal ?

PR. Z. 8. 1861, p. 219).

+ In two or three 8. African specimens of T. @zomETRIca (J. A. 8. XIX, 88)
the usual small nuchal plateis wanting. ‘This appears never to exist in T. steq-
LATA and I, PLATYNOTUS.

{ It will be convenient here to enumerate the Yestudinata of the Burmese
provinces, so far as hitherto ascertained.

1. Tesrupo Puayril, nobis, J. 4d. 8. XVIT, 560, XXII, 639. Hab. Avakan ;
Tenasserim provinces.

2. . nnon@ava, nobis, J. A. S. XXII, 639, XXIV, 712, XXV, 448; Gray,
Ann. Mag. N. H. X1X, (1857) p. 242. Brom Arakan to Mergui. This species
has bred in my garden, and the young do uot, possess the lengthened form of the

M 2

(6)

4 Proceedings of the Asiatic Society. [No 1

Five Snakes sent are CYLINDROPHIS RUFA, (Schn.), Lycopon
AuLIcUS, Dipsas CYNODON, ‘l'ROPIDONOTUS UMBRATUS, and TrR-

adult (as in CyCLEMYS DENTATA and sundry others). It would appear to exhibit
a near resemblance, at first sight, to the American T, Tapunata. (Vide Gray,
loc. cit.

Of fet this is the species referred to as T. ELonGaTA, Gray (!) from Cam-
boja, in P. Z. S. 1861, p.139, (as well, however, may Dr. J. E. Gray refer to
Homo sapiens, Gray, or Kquus caBaLuus, Gray! I claim the honour—such as
it is of having named the three fine Indo-Chinese species of TEsTUDO, as yet
discovered. Palmam qui meruwit ferat).

8. T. PLarynotus, nobis, ut supra. Valley of the Irawadi.

4. Emys Trigu@a, Schweigger; young, H. BrnanGeri, Lesson. Ava; Ben-
gal (rare) ; Coromaudel coast.

5. H. CRAssICoLLis, Bell; Z. nigra, nobis, J. A.S. XXIV, 713. Tenasserim
provinces; Malayan peninsula; Sumatra; Java; Camboja, (P. Z. S. 1861,

. 140).
6. rene BERDMOREI, Hmys Berdmorei, nobis, J. A. S. XXVII, 281:
Syn. ut supra. Sitang and Tenasserim rivers,

7. B. Baska, Gray; Yetraonyx Lessonii, D. and B., Gray, Ann. Mag. N. A.
XIX, (1857), p. 343, common in Lower Bengal; and a large skull now sent from
the Irawadi by Mr. W. 7. Blanford.

8. B.pHonGoKa; Emys dhongoka, Gray, Hardw. Ill. Ind. Zool.; young, #.
trioittarta, D. and B. An estuary species chiefly, according to my experience ;
common along the eastern side of the Bay of Bengal and also in the Nerbudda.
It is now unfrequently brought to the Maulmein fish-bazar.

9. CUORA AMBOINENSIs, Gray; TYestudo amboinensis, Dandin; Cistudo am-
boinensis, D. and B. Tenasserim provinces; Camboja; Malayan peninsula and
Archipelago; Philippine islands.

10. CycLemys penvata ; Cistudo dentata, Gray ; Cycl. orbiculata, Bell; very
young, Zetraonyx affinis, Cantor. Arakan; Pegu; Martaban; Tenasserim pro-
vinces; Malayan peninsula; Java; Borneo.

11. C. puarynota, Gray, (Catal. 1855); Hinys platynota, Gray, Hardw.
Ili. Ind. Zool. ; Cantor, J. A. S. XVI, 609; Blyth, J. A. S. XXIV, 714. Te-
nasserim provinces ; Malayan peninsula; Sumatra.

12. PLATYSTERNON MEGACEPALUM, Gray, P. Z. S. 1831, p. 106; Hardw.
Lil. Ind. Zool.; J. A. 8S. XXIV, 481. Sitang river; China. The adult of this
animal is still a desideratum in our collection.

13. Emypa PuNc?Tata, Gray ; Cryptopus granodus, D. and B. Very com:
mon throughout India; and received trom the Sitang valley.

14. TRIonyx GaNGeETICcUS, Cuv. India and Malay countries ; also received
from the Sitang river.

The marine species of the Bay, including Cuirra InpiIcA, Gray, (Gymnopus
lineatus, D. and B.), are sufficiently well known, and are given in the late Dr.
Cantor’s Catalogue of Malayan reptiles, J. A. S. XVI, pp. 616 to 620. To the
list of them, however, Major Tickell has just added SpHaNdJIs CoRIACEA, (L.)

All of the fourteen species enumerated are illustrated by one or more speci-
mens in the Society’s museum; and most of them by a series of successive ages,
from youth to maturity.

It is worthy of remark that of three species extremely common in Lower
Bengal, viz. GrocheMys Hamittronit, Emys THourusit, and Baragtur TECTUM,
and a fourth which has not hitherto been observed elsewhere, viz. B. ocELLATUS,
(D. and B.), not one appears to inhabit the Burmese countries, so far as hitherto
ascertained. ‘They appear rather to be peculiar to the gangetic river-shed, with
perhaps also the Brahmaputran ; but even the latter is doubtful so far as I nave
been able to learn.

In the Proceedings of the Zoological Society for 1861, p. 139-40, Dr. Gray
gives a list of some reptiles received from Camboja; in which the following

1863. | Proceedings of the Asiatic Society. 85

STOLATUS ; all from Thayet Myo; and four species of BATRACHIA
from near the mouth of the Irawddi are LYMNODYTES ERYTHRZUS,
RANA VITTIGERA, R. RuGULOSA (vide J. A. S. XXIV, 722), and
BUFO MELANOSTICTUS.

A number of fishes and Crustacea are likewise forwarded from
different localities ; but these I have not the time to examine pro-
perly at present. The class of fishes is that to which I devoted
especial attention during my late excursion ; and I have more to place
on record regarding the fishes of Burma than can be convent-
ently compressed into an ordinary Report. I will only remark that
Mr. Blanford’s ‘ Bream-like fish’ from Ava is the Cyprinus cotis,
B. H., OsTEoBRAMA coTis apud nos, J. A. S. Vol. XXIX. p. 158,
which is more emphatically bream-shaped than the Ost. MICROLEPIS,
nobis, 2b¢d. I obtained both species in abundance, and they acquire a
considerable size, as I anticipated, the coris being the larger of the
two, so far as I have seen.

IV. The Rev. C.S. P. Parish, Chaplain, Maulmein. A jar of
sundries from Port Blair. When I was at Maulmein towards the
close of September last, Mr. Parish was about to visit the Anda-
mans; and I supplied him with a small jar of spirit, in which he
obligingly promised to preserve any small animals that he might be
able to procure. He has contributed a few additions to our scanty
list of the Andamanese fawna, which I distinguish by prefixing an
asterisk to their names.

Of mammalia, one ferruginous Bat* CyNopTERUS MARGINATUS;
abundant in all the neighbouring countries.

species are noted —GEOCLAMYs ‘MACROCEPHALA, Gray, P. Z S. 1859, p. 478, ¢.
XXI, and GroMyDa spinosa, Gray; thereis, also, a TRIonyxX oRNATUS, Gray,
from Camboja, described in P. Z. 8. 1861, p. 40. G. MacRocEPHana has like-
wise been received from Siam; also HMys sIAMENsIs, Gray, Gunther, P. Z. 8.
1869, p. 114.

I observe that my highly esteemed old friend, Prof. Thos. Bell, in his * History
of British Reptiles,’ (Introduction, p. xviil, remarks that—‘ The eggs of the
land Tortoises, as well as those of the marine Turtles, are generally round; but
those of the fresh-water genera are usually more or less oval or elliptical.” Those
of TrsTUDO sTELLATA are exceedingly elongated. The eggs of the TRionyx
series are quite globular or spherical, as of the marine Turtles; but those of the
Himys group, as likewise of the land Tortoises (so far as I have seen), are very
much elongated and elliptical.

+ On the Barren Island volcano, Mr. Parish found the half-devoured remains
of a Rat, probably Mus ANDAMENsIs, nobis: the head was wanting, and Mr.
Parish did not think the fragment worth preserving; but the Andamanese
species is easily recognised from its size, combined with the peculiar character of

86 Proceedings of the Asiatic Society. [No. 1,

Of birds, *ConnocaLia NipIFICcA, (Latham), and Hinvunpo rRvs-
mTICA, L., juv. CH. gutturalis, Scopoli.)

Of reptiles, “Gecko venus Merrem; TRIMESURUS VIRIDIS (var.
Cantori), *LEPTOPHIS ORNATA; *Dipsas—P?P (very young, but of a
species unknown to me); Lycopon auLicus (prettily mottled var.,
young) ; and *Buro MELANOosTictTUS. ‘The last is the first instance
of a batrachian having been received from the Andamans; but it is a
very likely species to have been introduced from on board vessels. I
have lately had occasion to remark from personal observation how
much the small Geckos (HEMIDACTYLUS) are conveyed about in
boats.

Of fishes, none worthy of remark.

Of crustaceans, GRAPSUS STRIGOSUS, (Herbst.) ; the fine land Crab
noticed in J, A. 8S. XX VII, 272 ; and the common SQuILLA RAPHIDEA.

Of mollusks, CuiroaA CUNNINGHAMII; PaTELLA TESTUDINARIA ;
and a small Lima.

(Here it will be convenient to interpolate a brief notice of some
novelties from Port Blair, which have lately been received from
Lieut.-Col. Tytler, the present Superintendent.)

Col. Tytler has seen a small wild Fenris on the main island, which,
from his description, would seem to approximate the F. cuaus of the
neighbouring countries: Dr. Mouat also tells me that he picked up
the skull of a small Frnts, on the occasion of his visit to the islands
which led to the formation of the penal settlement of Port Blair .
but that the specimen had been unaccountably lost. Col. Tytler
writes—“ On the 4th July at ‘ Aberdeen’ I distinctly saw a Frnine
animal, the size of the Huropean wild cat, This creature walked
across the road about 150 yards before me. Its colour was of an
uniform light yellow-brown, not unlike the yellow of a Leopard,
perhaps lighter, but I could see no marks or spots. On Ross Island

its fur. I may remark that on bare lava, upon Barren Island, Mr. Parish
observed a beautiful plant in bloom, which proved to be the ordinarily epiphytic
orchid, DENDROBIUM FoRMosUM, which is very common in the southern Tenas-
serim provinces. I observed it plentifully oer trees on the alluvial islands in
the Tavoy river.

The naturalists attached to the Austrian eNorare expedition describe two
species of Mus from the Nicobars, as M. NrcoBARicus and I. PaLMARUM: the
former of these may prove to be identical with M. anDAMENENsIs. ‘They also
describe PTEROPUS NICOBARICUS (which is doubtless Pr. melanotus of my Mam-
mal Catalogue).

1863. ] Proceedings of the Asiatic Society. 87

there are several yellow-coloured domestic Cats belonging to the
Huropean Naval Brigade here, but these are small, besides which no
Cat from Ross Island could swim over to ‘ Aberdeen;’ and where [
saw the animal none of the convicts’ houses were within half a mile
of the place. From the rapid casual view I had of it, I am persuad-
ed that it was a wild animal, and not a stray domestic Cat.” This
would make a second species of carnivora on the Andamans, the other
being the Parapoxurus of which we possess the skull of an exceed-
ingly aged individual. Col. Tytler further writes—-“ There is a
great abundance of small Bats on the islands,” which remain to be
identified.

Of birds, Col. Tytler has sent a fine new Hawk—HaMartornis
Event, Tytler, 2. s. Like H. cnnEena, (Latham) wndulatus, Vigors),
but of smaller size and much darker colouring, with the occipital
feathers less elongated ; being further strongly distinguished by the
markings of its great alar and caudal feathers. Instead of the broad
pale band crossing the tail-feathers of H. cumnua, the new species has
a series of three narrow caudal bands, the last subterminal, only } in,
broad, and followed by ¢ in. of the black tip (perhaps in the newly
moulted plumage there may be slight albescent extreme tips to the
tail-feathers). In lieu of the broad whitish bands which predomi-
nate on the under surface of the wing in H. CHEELA, our present
species has very slight and narrow pale cross-bands, the dark colour
much predominating ; and the white spots on the anterior portion of
the inner surface of the wing are a good deal smaller. ‘ Irides yel-
low. Bill slate-colour, tarsus yellow; claws black. Extreme length
21 in. by 33 ft. in extent of wings.” Closed wing 14 in.; tail 9 in.;

tarse 3in. “ This species,”

remarks Col. Tytler, “is not uncommon
ou the main island, where it is seen sitting on the tops of trees. It
is more abundant than the H. cHEELA.”’

Kuryzona Canninat, Tytler, 2. s. Most like the Indian bird re-
ferred to Hu. cryLonica, (@me?) but very much larger and finer
coloured, with tail proportionally more developed. Entire upper parts
and breast, also the lower tail-coverts rich dark ferruginous, nearly
approaching to marone; a slight olivaceous tinge about the rump :
throat less deep-coloured: the abdominal region, flanks, and tibial
plumes, black, with from two to four narrow white bands crossing

each feather; under-surface of the wing much the same, but the

88 Proceedings of the Asiatic Society. [ No. 1,

great alars are barred with rufous. “ Bill yellow, with slight tinge
of green: eyes reddish-orange: feet slate green. Length of adult
female 13 in. by 21 in. in expanse of wings.” Bill to gape 13 in.:
tarse 21 in.: middle toe and claw 12 in.: wing 63 in.: tail 33 in.
The only specimen as yet obtained. The name Euryzona does not
so well apply to this species as to its congeners.

The Indian bird hitherto referred to Hu. cEYLONICA is a recognisably
distinct race from the true Ceyntonica of Ceylon. The ferruginous
colour of the nape does not descend so low on the back, and there is
no trace of ferruginous on the wing and tail-feathers. I distinguish
it as Eu. AMAUROPTERA, nobis.* The distinction is about equiva-
lent to that of Patumpus Expurystontii of 8. India and P. Torrine-
montt of Ceylon; or that of SarcocRamMMa GoENSIS of all India and
Ceylon, and S. arronucuatts, nobis, of Indo-China and Malasia.
This last bird is common at Akyab.

A Denprocirra, of small size, Col. Tytler describes (but has not
yet sent} as—

“ D. Bavueyt, Tytler, m.s. A new species, not uncommon on the
main island. I name it after Mr. Bayley, the Home Secretary to Go-
vernment. This beautiful little Pie measures 13} in. in extreme length
with closed wing 43 in.; bill to gape 1 in.; and tarsus lin. Wings
and tail nearly black, with broad white patch on wing; head, neck,
and throat, dark brown; back more rufous; belly and vent very
rufous or chesnut. Tail with 12 feathers (therefore not a Crypsi-
vina). Bill and feet dark slate-coloured.”

A new Snake forwarded by Col. Tytler I designate as—

TRIPIDONOTUS, TYTLERI, nobis, 2. s. Species typical ; the head sub-
conical, flattened above, with the inter-orbital plate twice as long as
broad at middle, and projecting backward so as to form an equilate-
ral triangle between the fronts ef the parietals and beyond the orbi-
tals. Colour a bistre-brown above, yellowish-white below, with three
to five more or less conspicuous whitish lines on the fore-part of the
body, becoming obsolete at about the middle of the length ; a trans-
verse dark streak below the eye, and another and broader dark streak

* The late Prince of Canino referred the Gallinula rubiginosa, Tem, (Rullus
fuscus, L.?) to this division; but it does not belong to it, haying much longer
toes, and exhibiting other distinctions.

+ Since receive. +7, C. J.

1863.] Proceedings of the Asiatic Society. 89

passing obliquely backward so as to cross the angle of the gape.
Scute 138; scutelle 86 pairs; row of scales 19. (Length of adult
2 ft. 103 in., of which tail 10} in.)

V. W. Theobald, Hsq., Jun., of the Indian Geological Survey. A
small tin of specimens, containing—

Of mammalia, askin of Lacomys Rovutt, Ogilby, from the Bala
Pass, “inhabiting also other passes in Tibet,’”—and a small Arvico-
line quadruped, for which I find it necessary to establish a new genus.

PHAtomys, nobis, ”. g. Similar to Avvicola, but more robust, with
a well developed thumb and nail to the fore-foot ; tail shortish, and
densely clad with short adpressed hairs. Upper rodent tusks incon-
spicuously grooved.

PH. LEUCURUS, nobis, 2. s. Length of a female containing six fetus,
64 in. of which tail 4 in. of a smaller specimen sent, 44 in., of which
tail 1; in., of hind-foot claws % in. Fur dense, very soft and
fine, the surface hue greyish-brown on the upper parts; on the lower
parts, feet and tail, white, a little sullied: basal two-thirds or more
of the upper fur dark slaty. “ Hars rounded, of medium size, rather
appressed.”

“These Rats,” remarks Mr. Theobald, “are very numerous near
Lake Chomoriri; but can only be shot, as it is next to impossible to
dig them ont, their holes ramifying over acres of ground. They
must migrate, as the whole ground is sheeted in snow for five months.
The pregnant female was obtained on the 4th August.

(in Afghanistan, there is an animal of nearly similar habits which
was known to our people as the ‘ Quetta Mole,’ MYospaLax FUSCOCA-
PILLUS, nobis, J. A. . XV, 141; but that is more nearly akin to the
true Lemmings.)

From the same locality, Mr. Theobald has sent two males and a
female of “a Viviparous Lizard,” with also an example of the young.
It is a PHRYNOCEPHALUS with non-prehensile tail, and would seem
to be nearly affined to Por. ocrLnatuUs (Licht), and Por. MELANv-
Rus, Hichwild, briefly noticed by M. M. Dumeril and Bibron (Hist.
Rept. 1V, 516. It is perhaps PH Tickenui, Gunther (?) noticed
in P. Z. §. 1860, pp. 167, 173, as inhabiting from 15,200 to 15,309
ft. elevation on the Himalaya. The sexes differ so much that they
might well be mistaken for separate species ; the female being smaller,
and coloured very much like Uromastyx Harpwicxktt, but the tail

90 ' Proceedings of the Asiatic Society.

is variegated with numerous irregular slaty bands, passing to black-
ish towards and at the tip; lower-parts uniform yellowish-white,
except the dusky tail-tip: length 38} in., of which tail 2in. Male
4 in. long, of which tail 24 in ; extended fore-limb 1 in., and hind-
limb 13 in.: in both sexes a transverse double fold of skin at the
throat. Colour of the male dark olive above, with an obscure dark
band along the spine, broken into a series of spots, and a nearly
similar row of largish dark spots on either side; these spots are set
off each with a circlet of pale specks: limbs and tail banded above,
the latter with imperfectly alternating lateral half bands, of a dusky
grey colour, passing to blackish on the terminal fourth of the tail
underneath; there is a great black abdominal patch, and another on
the throat. The lower jaw protrudes distinctly beyond the upper
one. Longest toe of the hind-foot conspicuously serrated along its
inner edge. ‘These Lizards associate in pairs, and form shallow bur-
rows along lake Chomoriri. As the species is probably undescribed,
I shall designate it Pur. THEoBALDI, nobis, 2. s.

From Tibet is also sent Mocoa Srximensts, nobis, J. A, 8.
XXII, 652 (previously received from Sikkim and Kashmir); and a
small specimen of Laupaxkia (?) MELANURA, nobis, (J. 4, S.
XXIII, 788) ;* also from Simla a Snake there common, T'RoPpIDONOTUS
PLATYCEPS, nobis, J. 4. S. XXIII, 297, which species we have
only previously received from Darjiling.

VI. Messrs. Edwards and Water, of Penang. A fine pair of
Draco FIMBRIATUS, Kuhl; from the west coast of Sumatra. Also
a small CRocODILUS POROSUS in spirit; an imperfect example of
SQUILLA MACULATA ; and a fine sea mouse, akin to APHRODITA, Which
we have also received from Port Blair and from the Tenasserim
coast.

* This Lizard, as I am assured by Mr. Theobald, grows to 18 in. long. It is
common.

JOURNAL

OF THE

ons Tes: 1s Oe 0 Gea Ie ire haf

a

IN@s JUS Alelos%

res OSES

Bhoja Raji of Dhar and his Homonyms.—By Basu
RAJENDRALALA Mitra.

The name of Bhoja Pramara is the most celebrated in the annals
of India. It stands pre-eminent as the emblem of a glorious sove-
reign, a distinguished author, and a noble patron of learning ; and
our poetry, our romances and our nursery tales have alike selected it
as the theme of their laudations. It is remarkable, however, that
little seems to be known of the identity of the individual who gave it
such greatness. ‘ While Hindu literature survives,” said Col. Tod,
“the name of Bhoja Pramara and the ‘ nine gems’ of his court cannot
perish,” and: yet at the time the learned historian of the Rajputs had
three claimants before him, every one of whom asserted his right to the
glories of the Bhoja Pramara, and he was obliged to admit “that it is
difficult to say which of the three princes was the greatest, as they all
appear to have been distinguished patrons of science and literature.”
‘Since his time the researches of Indian antiquarians have brought to
light more than a dozen princes who have, at different times, borne
that illustrious name, but whose history is shrouded in mystery
which legendary tales, in the absence of authentic evidence, cannot
solve. It may not be uninteresting, therefore, to ascertain and bring
together the sum of our knowledge regarding the several monarchs
of the name of Bhoja that have been from time to time met with.
It might, to some extent, help to remove a prolific source of error
to many hasty antiquarians who frequently jump into conclusions
regarding the age of undated—and not rarely of dated—ainsceriptions
from the mere circumstance of the word Bhoja occurring in them.

N

92 Bhoja Raja of Dhar and his Homonyms. [No. 2,

The derivation of the word may be traced to the root bhuj ‘ to enjoy,’
and in that sense it has been used by the Brahmans from the remotest
antiquity. In the third book of the Rig Veda Safhita (Chap. III.
Varga 20, verse 7) it occurs for the first time as a generic term* to
indicate the sacrifice-loving Kshetria sons of Sudasa, which fact argues
the likelihood of some one of them having borne that word as his
specific name. Subsequently we find it in the Mahdabharata,; many
centuries before the commencement of the Christian era, as the title
of a king who was the foster father of Kunti, the mother of the
renowned Pandavas. He was a cousin (father’s sister’s son) of S/ura
and generally known by the name of Kunti Bhoja. Sura, was the
father of Vasudeva and Pritha ; and the latter when made over to her
cousin-german assumed the name of Kunti.

Immediately after him we meet with a Bhoja in Col. Wilford’s
““Hssay on the sacred Isles in the West,”{ who was a vassal of
Jarasandha. He invited the Magas to his dominion on the banks
of the Ganges, and gave his daughter to one of them from whom
descended the eighteen families of the Bhojakas. I cannot, however,
find any mention of this prince in the Samba Purdna to which the
Colonel refers his readers, and feel disposed, therefore, to attribute
his origin to the imagination of the Colonel’s Panditas. His con-
temporaneity to Jarésandha would make him a contemporary of
Vasudeva and Pandu, and consequently of Kunti Bhoja, with whom
he was most probably identical. His country is called Karae desa.

The Colonel has a second prince of this name§ who was a relative
and friend of Krishna and chief of the town of Bhojapura. This
must have been either Kunti Bhoja himself, who was a cousin of
Krishna’s father, or a descendant of his who assumed the patro-
nymic of Bhoja. I feel disposed to take the latter alternative, as in
the Mahabharata,|| a Bhoja of Bhojapura in Behar, not Kunti Bhoja,
appears in the company of Aswatthamaé as a rival of the Pandava
brothers for the hand of Draupadi, which would scarcely be probable

* The words are Jme Bhojd digiraso virtipd, which Sayana explains by Ime
jdgam kurvdndh Bhojah saudasah kshatriyah tesham ydjakah virdpa nana rupa
Medhatithe prithitayo angirasascha. Max Miller, Vol. II. p. 928,

+ Adi Parva, chapter III. Vol. I. p. 161, Calcutta edition.

{ Asiatic Researches, Vol. XI. p. 82.

§ Loe. cit.
|| Adi Parva, Vol. II. p. 253, v. 6986.
s

BAMA FY WAY VawMwTaAsat |

1863. | Bhoja Raja of Dhar and his Homonyms. 93

in the case of Kunti Bhoja himself, the maternal grandfather of
those Pandavas. The dominions of all the three are placed on the
banks of the Ganges in Magadha or its neighbourhood. The capital
of the last, Mrittikavati, was situated on the river Karmanasa which
Wilson supposed to be near the modern Bhojpur.

Next to these we come to a Bhoja Raja who is made to reign 127
years from about B. C. 180 to B. C. 538. He was, according to the
Orissan chronicles, “a brave, liberal, just and merciful prince. His
court was adorned by the presence of 750 eminent poets, the chief of
whom was Kalidasa, author of the 752 slokas called the Chédnak or
Chataka and Maha Nataka. This Raja Bhoja invented boats, the
weaver’s loom, and wheeled carriages, or at least in his time the use
of them first became common. In this reign the Yavans from Sindhu
Des invaded the country in great force, but Bhoja discomfited and de-
stroyed them, and afterwards captured many of their possessions and
cities. He was followed by Vikramaditya who was either a brother
or a son of his.”* ‘The bungling here of a Bhoja before Vikramaditya
of the Samvat era, of Vikramaditya himself, and of the Bhoja of the
10th century, is self-evident and needs no comment. A Bengali
romance named Bhanumati makes a Bhoja the father-in-law of
Vikrama.

No monumental evidence exists of any of these five princes, and
they are interesting only as affording a strong proof in favour of the
antiquity of their name. The last two, namely, those of the Orissan
chronicles and of Bhanumati, appear to be entirely mythical. I may
say the same of three sovereigns of Bengal whose names occur in
Pere Teiffenthaler’s history of Orissa.t Two of them, viz. Raja
Bhoja with a reign of 75 years, and Samat Bhoja with a reign of 48,
are said to have belonged to the family of Gor, and the last, Raja
Bhoja, of a Kayastha family, who reigned 70 years, was the third in
descent from Prataparudra.f{ Their names are so mixed up with
those of the kings of Orissa, and so overcast by a misty atmosphere
of fable, that they can claim no attention from the sober historian.
Most of the reigns given by the Reverend Missionary, range from
70*to 108 years.

* Sterling’s History of Cuttack, Asiatic Researches, Vol. XV. p. 259.

+ Description Historique et Geographique de l’Inde, Vol. I. p. 472.

{ Sterling’s list has (1) Pertapa rudra (1502 A. C.), 2, Govinda Rao (1524), 3,
Narasinha Janna, (1539), 4, Mukunda Deo, (1550).

Nn 2

94 Bhoja Rija of Dhar and his Homonyms. [No. 2,

Passing them over we came to the first Bhoja whose era may be
ascertained with some certainty. Col. Tod, following a Jain manu-
seript,* says that he flourished about the end of the sixth century,
S. 6381 = A. C. 575. He was a sovereign of the Pramara race and
had Malava for his dominion. Abbe Bertrand,t following Mir Ali
Afsos, makes a Bhoja ascend the throne of Malava 542 years after
Vikramaditya, whieh would give us a Bhoja a century before this
sovereign; and Teiffenthaler gives another 426} years after Vikrama,
both of whom are probably the same with the first prince of Tod,
misplaced by blundering chroniclers. Prinsep,§ following the Ayin
Akbary, places Bhoja the successor of Munja at the end of the 5th
century (485) whom he identified with the first Bhoja of Tod.

The next Bhoja of the Colonel’s hst lived in Samvat 721 = A. C,
665. According to the Aitpur inscription,|| a Bhoja was the son of
Gohaditya and the seventh ancestor in a direct line from a sovereign
of the name of Kala Bhoja “a hero resplendent as the sun,” whe
was followed after eight successive generations by a Sakti Kumara
who flourished in the Samvat year 1084 (16th of Bysakha) = A. C.
978. Col. Tod assumes the first of these two to be identical with
his second Bhoja. Now ascending from Sakti Kumara if we allow
eighteen years to each reign,§] Kala Bhoja would be placed in the
middle of the 9th century (A. C. 834) and Bhoja in the early part
of the 8th century (A. C. 708) instead of the middle of the seventh
agreeably to the Jain date, This discrepancy, however, may be re-
conciled if we allow the first Bhoja a reign of a little more than forty-
three years from A. C. 665 to 708, or a little longer than an ordinary
reign to one of his successors. It is probably this prince who
is described as the elder or VrippHa Buosa at whose instance
Bana the poet propitiated the sun by a poem of great merit, the
Suryas' ataka, and rid himself of leprosy ; and it is possibly to him
we owe the treatise on rhetoric entitled Saraswati-kanthdbharana

* Tod’s Rajasthan, Vol. I. p. 800.

+ Journal Asiatique, Mai 1844, p. 354.

{ Description Historique et Geographique de l’Inde, Vol. I. p. 1.

§ Thomas’s Prinsep, Vol. II. p. 250.

|| Tod’s History of Rajasthan, Vol. I. p. 802.

*| The genealogy of the fifteen princes of this line runs as follows: 1, Goha-
ditya; 2, Bhoja ; 3, Mahendra; 4, Naga; 5, Syeela, (Sailya?) 6, Aparajita ; 7,
Mahendra ; 8, Kala Bhoja; 9, Khoman; 10, Bhirtripada ; 11, Singji; 12, Sri

Ullut (whose daughter’s son) 13, Nirvahana; 14, Salivahana; 15, Sakti Ku-
mara,

1863. | Bhoja Rajé of Dhar and his Homonyms. 95

and one or two other works which pass in the name of a Bhoja
Raja.* He was the contemporary of Manatungas/uri and of Maura
the poet. If he be admitted to have been the patron of Bana, it
would require little proof to shew that he was a great patron of
learned men and was surrounded by a number of poets and literati,
and that without pledging our faith to the apocryphal five hundred
scholars of his court. Our information, however, regarding Vriddha
Bhoja is yet so meagre and unsatisfactory that it would be unwar-
rantable to assume, farther than as a mere conjecture, his identity
with the second Bhoja of Col. Tod. The expression Vriddha (old)
would suit the first Bhoja best, but the date of Bana would not
justify the assignment. The Bhojaand Kéla Bhoja of the Aitpura
record have their counterparts in an inscription from Mount Abu
noticed by Professor Wilson, but instead of being nine generations
removed from each other, there they appear as father and son. Judg-
‘ing from this circumstance and the fact of the names of their
ancestors for two generations and of their successors for twenty
generations being different throughout, we have no hesitation in
taking them to be quite distinct. They were Jains and belonged
to the solar race of Mewar. The last of the roll lived in A. C. 1286,
which with the usual allowance of eighteen years to each reign would
place Bhoja in the beginning of the tenth century (A. C. 908).
Kshiraswamin of Kashmir (A. C. 772) cites a Bhoja as the au-
thor of a vocabulary and a grammar ;{ but the editor of the Vasa-
vadatta “does not feel it necessary to believe that in every instance
Bhoja is the name of a king,” and I am disposed to side with him.
The third Bhoja of Col. Tod’s list is the hero of the Bhoja-prae
bandha and sovereign of Dhara. Before I notice him it is necessary,
for the sake of chronological order, to record the names of two
sovereigns of Kanouj and one of Pehewa. ‘The first two occur in a
copper plate inscription§ found by the late Col. Stacy, a counterpart

* Colebrooke’s Miscellaneous Essays, Vol. I. p. 22.

+ Asiatic Researches, XVI. p. 291 et seq. The names are—1 Bappaka, 2 Gohila,
3 Bhoja, 4 Kala Bhoja, 5 Bhartribhatta, 6 Samahayika, 7 Khummana, 8 Allata, 9
Naravahana, 10 Sakti——? 11 Suchivarma, 12 Naravarma, 13 Kirtivarma, 14
Vairi Sifha, 15 Vijaya Sifha, 16 Ari Sifha, 17 Vikrama Sifiha, 18 Samat Sifha,
19 Kumara Sifha, 20 Mathana Sifiha, 21 Padma Sifha, 22 Jaita Sifiha, 23 Teja
Sinha, 24 Samara Sifha. :

{ Colebrooke’s Miscellaneous Hssay, Vol. II. p. 290.

§ Vide my translation of this record, ante, Vol. XVII. p. 71.

96 Bhoja Réja of Dhar and his Homonyms. [No. 2,

of which has lately been found by Mr. Cosserat at Sarun.* Col. Stacy’s
inscription bears date the 65 (?) of Vaishakha of a local era and
records the grant of a village named Tikkarika which was situated on
the left bank of the Ganges opposite Benares. The donor’s name is
Vinayakapala. His ancestors, who begin their genealogical tree with a
Devas‘akti, include a Bhoja son of Ramabhadra, and another son (?)
of Mahendra Pala. In a paper entitled “ Vestiges of three Royal
Lines of Kanyakubja or Kanouj,”’+ allusion has been made to a huge
inscription at Gwalior which has the name of a Mahendra Pala with
the date 960 close by it, then a Bhoja, and then again a Mahendra
Pala with the date 964 after it; but as the transcript from which
this information has been gleaned is described to be “full of breaks,
the very perfection of all that is unintelligible, and the result of
laborious infidelity in which the copyist had-in patches by the dozen
altered as many as eight or ten consecutive letters,’ I do not feel
that it would. at all subserve the purposes of history to attach any
importance to these dates, until an authentic transcript of the record
is available for reference. Colonel Cunningham probably refers to this
monument in his letter of the 30th September, 1860 (Ante XXIX.
p- 395), in which he makes mention of a Maharaja Bhoja Deva in
Gwalior. If my reading of the date of the Sarun plate, which I offer
as a mere conjecture, be correct, the dates of Devas/akti’s descendants

at eighteen years per reign would be

il Devesialatis #38 st vqdevcectinincecee, WASICAyag9
DeNViatsarayar} Louies. weckea teste nes Ce oN
SeNdeabhiabtas th ake. fo ale eet) TA Cpe
An [Rene OE NCbE Asoc conede ect 6 A. C. 832
5 Bhoja,\/. ....1-- A. C. 850
6 Mahendra Pala, j A. C. 868
fy (BOY ange ss Bes Racthiiae eee castooneaes | PARSE ASS85
8 Vinayaka Pala, ............+ A. C. 900

Should the data upon which my dates are founded be not deemed
satisfactory, and the dates therefore not acceptable, still the Bhojas
of Devas’akti’s dynasty will not be confounded with the great sove-
reign of Dhara. When Professor Wilson wrote his paper on the
_ history of Kashmir, he knew of only one Bhoja between the tenth

* My note on this record was read before a meeting of the Asiatic Society held
on the 2nd of July, 1862. It is likely to be published in the volume for this year.
+ Ante, Vol. XXXI, p. 6.

i

8

1863. | Bhoja Raja of Dhar and his Homonyms. o7

and the eleventh centuries, and he accordingly made Sankaravarma of
Kashmir in the beginning of the tenth century (904 to 920) subvert
the extensive empire of the sovereign of Dhara, and solved the
anachronism which this involved by stating that “we need not
expect, however, extreme accuracy in this matter, and may rest satis-
fied with considering it as an approximation to the truth and gener-
ally as an additional testimony of Bhoja’s having flourished early in
the tenth century.” Had he the Stacy record before him he would
have found two names of an era which would have completely obvi-
ated his anachronism.

The second of these princes I assume to have been identical with the
sovereign named in an inscription ona Vaishnavite temple at Gwalior.
He is described as a “ Lord paramount” who flourished in A. C. 876.
His genealogy is not given, but the date of his reign and the fact
that the sovereigns of Kanouj about that time did exercise para-
mount power over Gwalior, justify the assumption.*

The Bhoja of Pehewa occurs in an inscription recorded on the side
of a temple in a village on the banks of the Saraswati fifteen miles
west of Thaneswar.t The record is very imperfect, having many
lacune and large breaks at the beginning and end of every line, but
from what remains a list of ten names have been made out as follows :

I. Mahendra Pala.

II. Jatula.

III. P (illegible).
IV. Vajrata.

V. Yajnika.

VI. Sogga.

VII. Purna.

VIII. Devaraja.

IX. Ramachandra.

X. Bhoja.

The date of the last on the inscription is unmistakeably Samvat
279. The facsimile where it is given, happens to be perfectly clear,
and the letters are so well formed that there cannot be the possibility
of a mistake in the reading. But the circumstance of a Bhoja at so
early a date misled meas to his identity, and those who have since
attempted to correct me have been equally misled. Col. Alexander

* Veatiges of the Kings of Gwalior, ante Vol, XXXI. p. 397.
+ Vide my note on an inscription from Thaneshwar, ante, Vol. XXII. p. 673.

98. Bhoja Rijé of Dhar and his Homonyms. | No. 2,

Cunningham, an authority of great eminence in all matters connected
with Indian antiquities, was the first who noticed my mistake, but
by taking a misprint in my paper in which 179 is, in one place, put
for 279, he was led to suppose that a small cypher after the first
figure had escaped me and the date was really 1079. The actual
date being 279 a cypher after the first figure would give us Samvat
2079, which would carry us nearly a hundred and sixty years into
futurity. The Colonel, however, subsequently changed his opinion
as regards the cypher and said “the inscription is beyond all
doubt, a middle age one, that is, the forms of the letters are those
of the eleventh and twelfth centuries; I read the date 1190 S.
or 1133 A. D.’* Mr. KH. Thomas entirely concurred in this reading
and the learned Professor Weber, in the Zeitschrift of the German
Oriental Society,f in commenting upon my paper, supposed with
Col. Cunningham that either I must have overlooked a cypher after
the first figure which he imagined existed and that the date was 1079,
or the era used was other than that of the Samvat of Vikramaditya.
None of my critics thought it worth his while to look to the genea-
logy of the prince named. It may appear strange that such distin-

* Ante, Vol. XXIV. p. 243.

+ Vol. IX. p. 629. I translate the Professor’s remarks for easy reference. “ A
very fragmentary inscription, bearing date ....._ Babu Rajendra Lal, in the face
of the doubts hitherto entertained on this subject, draws hence the bold cone
clusion, that Bhoja lived A. C. 122 (he reads here Samvat 179; but the
text, p. 676 has 279). As unfortunately no facsimile has been added (a great
mistake, the writing alone furnishing the safest starting poiat) we think our-
selves justified to doubt the correctness of the reading, which, even as it
stands, fluctuates between 179 and 279. The time of Bhoja, however, by Las-
sen’s excellent examination (Zeitschrift der Kunde des M. VII. 345) of the
Nagpore inscription (J. Bombay B. of the R. A. S. 1,254) has been clearly defin-
ed, viz. the close of the eleventh and the commencement of the twelfth Samvat
century. The special supposition of Lassen, that the 553 years of his reign, as
given by tradition, fall between Samvat 1093-1149 (A. D. 1037-1093) is chiefly
based on the year of the death of one of his successors, viz. of Naravarmadeva,
which Colebrooke (Misc. Hss. II, 298-303) fixed at Samvat 1390, as according to
one inscription the anniversary of his funeral rites took place Samvat 1191,
(maharajas’rinatavarmadeva samvatsarike), From these words, however, only this
follows, that he must necessarily have died at the latest Samvat 1190, but this does
not exclude the possibility of his having died several years before. With reference
to our inscription there is only one alternative, either the reading is 1079 (the
small circle of the zero could easily escape observation), or, however improbable,
the Samvat calculation differ here from the common one. In the first case,
which I would approve of, Bhoja would have reigned already 1079 (A. D. 1023),
aud this being correct, Tod’s conjecture, that the temporary expulsion of Bhoja,
mentioned by tradition, was perhaps connected with the inroad of Mahmud of
Ghuzni, who conquered Guzerat in the year 1024-26,—a conjecture which was
attacked by Lassen,—would have been corroborated.”

1865. | Bhoa Rija of Dhar and his Homonyms. 99

guished antiquarians as Col. Cunningham and the Professor Weber,
to whom oriental scholars are so deeply indebted for their varied and
most interesting researches into the past history of India, should, from
a mere identity of names, infer the identity of persons, and yet the
extracts quoted above shew that both of them found the name of a
Bhoja in the monument under notice and per saltum came to the
conclusion that it was that of Dhara, overlooking altogether that the
last prince was the son of Sindhula and grandson of Sindhu,* whereaS
the potentate named in the record before them was the son of Rama-
chandra and grandson of Devaraja. One of the Kanauj Bhojas was
the son of a Ramabhadra,} but there is nothing to shew that Rama-
bhadra was an alias of Ramachandra, and their ancestors are quite
different. Leaving aside, therefore, the question of date, the reading
of which has been doubted, the bare fact of the two princes being
descended from separate parents ought to leave no doubt of their
having been different individuals, born, all but positively, at different
periods.

As to the date of the potentate named in the Thaneswar record,
the facsimile now published will shew as clearly as possible that it is
279 Samvat. If I assume with my eritics that a cypher after the
first figure has been overlooked or accidentally omitted by the
engraver, a circumstance not very likely and yet not quite impossible,
for engravers are liable to err, though not quite so often as copyists,
the date will be 2079 which will carry the era of the prince, as afore-
said, nearly a hundred and sixty years into futurity. To assume a 1
before the first figure, would be a guess at random which can claim
no confidence. The writer in the Zeitschrift quoted above, -suggests
the possibility of the Samvat alluded to in the record, being other
than that of Vikramaditya ; but we know of no Samvat which can
be adopted with perfect propriety. Next to the era of Vikrama, the
Samvat of Ballabhi was the best known in Malwa, and its zero being
318 A. C.f our date would be 318 + 279 = A. C. 597, which would
be too early for the style of the characters im which the record is
incised. The Samvat of the Sena Rajas of Bengal§ commenced in

* Madhukarghar inscription, Transact. Royal Asiatic Society, London, Vol.
I. p.
+ Ante, Vol. xvii. pt. I. p. 72.

{ Thomas’s Prinsep, Vol. II. p. 158.
§ Ditto do. p, 272.

i00 Bhoja Raja of Dhar and his Homonyms. [No. 2,

the year 1063 A. C. which, if assumed to be the era of the inserip-
tion, would place our Bhoja at the end of the thirteenth century
when Thaneswar and its neighbourhood were entirely in the hands of
the Mahomedans. The same may be said of the Sivasifha Samvat* of
the Gohils of Deo the zero of which corresponds with 1112 A.C. No
other Samvat era is known to have been current, unless it be purely a
local or a family era, which is very likely, but in that case there is no
easy prospect of our coming to a solution of the difficulty. A Bhoja
Deva was king of Lodorvay in 1160 A. C. who would have nearly
corresponded with the prince of Pehewa by assuming the first figure
of our date to be 1 and the reading the second figure to be also 1 and
not 2, thereby making the whole 1179 Samvat as supposed by Col.
Cunningham, but unfortunately he was the son of Berjrae and not of
Ramachandra. The same genealogical difficulty prevents our iden-
tifying him with the Rao Bhoja of Harouti, who was the son of
Soorjun, and a contemporary of Akbart (A. C. 1575).

The style of writing is generally appealed to as a chronological guide
in cases where the reading of the date is doubtful. This undoubtedly
is a good test to some extent; but Dr. Weber carries it too far when
he assumes that in a case where the date fluctuates between 179 and
279 the style of writing may be allowed to settle the difference. This
can scarcely be the case, except in very modern writings and at certain
turning points; and even then it takes a much ionger time than a
century for one peculiar style of writing to pass so markedly into
another as to afford a conclusive evidence of age; and this without
adverting to local and individual peculiarities which so materially
affect its uniformity. Nothing is more common than a single style of
writing spreading over two or three centuries, or predominating in
certain regions while it is dying out in others. The history of the
Roman character in different parts of Europe during the last century
affords a singular instance in point. James Prinsep, who was the first
to deyise a system of palewographic chronology for India§ in which the
style of writing was taken as an index to the age of the document
in which it was found, was fully sensible of the fact, and he accord-
ingly assigned a range of three centuries to his No. I. or Lat cha-

* Thomas’s Prinsep, Vol. II. p. 158.
+ Tod’s Rajasthan, Vol. IL. p. 242.

{ Tod’s Rajasthan, Vol. II. p 475.

§ Ante, Vol, VII. p. 276, plate XIII.

1853. | Bhoja Raj of Dhér and his Homonyms. 101

racters, and of four centuries to No. IV. of the Guzerat plates. He
could not intend his table to be other than tentative and open to
considerable corrections and modifications, for it is impossible to
believe that with the limited data before him in regard to a subject
which had never, before his time, had the benefit of any scientific
enquiry, he could be so far satisfied as authoritatively to lay down
each particular set of characters to one well defined period which
would not admit of either extension or contraction, The so-called
kutila or the “ crooked” characters which, according to Col. Cunning-
ham, owes its name to a mislection of the word kumuda or the “lotus
like,” was marked by Mr. Prinsep against the tenth century ; but he
did not by any means intend that it should be confined to that cen-
tury alone, for he had himself translated several records of the
eleventh century in that character. I have since noticed an inscrip-
tion from Buddha Gaya* in which the Kutila is associated with the
Samvat date 781 = A.C.726. This would give a range of four
centuries, but as it is not to be supposed that the Kutila had just
been formed when it was used in the Buddha Gya monument, we
may fairly give it an additional fifty, eighty or even a hundred years.
No doubt there are peculiarities of certain forms and archaisms
which to a practised eye distinguish the earlier from the later Kutila,
but they are of no value whatever in cases where the difference is
not greater than a century. ‘The character of the Thaneswar monu-
ment is the Kutila without any marked archaisms or tendency to
merge into the modern Devanagari, and judging from it, one may be
fully justified in placing it in the ninth, tenth or eleventh century
according to his choice. ‘The archaic character of some of the names
Jatula, Vajrata, &c., would carry us to the earliest period of the
Kutila range, but under no circumstance to the third century of the
Vikramaditya era, to which the date would bring us.

The discrepancy between the date and the style of writing, there-
fore, can be solved only by supposing, as I have already said, the
Samvat of the date to be a local or family era utterly unconnected
with Vikramaditya ; and if this be admitted, our prince will be left to
occupy a place in the Kutila period which, until future research set-
tles it more definitely, must enjoy a range of near three centuries.

* Ante, Vol. XXVII. p. 74.

102 Bhoja Raja of Dhar and his Homonyms. [No. 2,

The last sovereign on our list is the great Bhoja of Dhaéra.* Ac-
cording to the legendary accounts of the Bhoja-Provandha, the Bhoja-
Champu and the Bhoja-Charita, he was the son of Sindhula, the
grandson of Sindhu and the immediate successor of Munja. His country,
Malava, was an ancient and renowned seat of learning, and his people
were noted for their refined manners and high civilization. Hiouen-
Thsang, who visited the place in the seventh century, says “les
habitants des province sont d’un caractére douz et poli, et ils aiment et
estiment la culture des lettres. Dans les cing parties de ’Inde, * * *
ce pays et celui de Magadha, sont les deux seuls royaumes dont les
habitants se fassent remarquer par amour de I’étude, V’estime pour la
vertu, la facilité de ’élocution et l’harmonie du langage.”} Kalidasa,
on a much earlier date, sang of its glories in more than one of his
immortal works.

Munja, according to Ballalat the author of the Bhoja-Pravandha,
was the younger brother of Sindhula who bestowed the kingdom
upon him in supercession of his son who was then only five years
old, and utterly incompetent to assume the cares of state. The
Bhoja-Charita contradicts this statement and makes Munja a found-
ling who was brought home by Sindhu to be nursed by his wife
Padmavati. Sindhu, says the fabler, was out on a hunting expedition,
and when alone on the bank of a river found on a tuft of Munja
grass, (Saccharum munja, Rox.) a new-born babe, which he brought
home and reared up under the name of Munja. The two biographers
agree in giving Bhoja a long and prosperous reign of fifty-five years,
seven months and three days, interrupted only fora short period when
a jog or mendicant, under pretence of teaching him the art of trans-
ferring one’s soul from one body to another, sent the king’s soul to
animate the body of a parrot and himself entered the king’s body
and reigned in his stead. An accident enabled Bhoja, through the
intervention of Chandrasena of Chandravati, to regain his mortal coil
from the usurper, and he died a natural death, leaving his kingdom
to his adopted son Gajananda.§ The latter was childless, and with

zm

* The Raja-martanda gives Ranaravgamalla as an alias of this Bhoja-

; Histoire de la vie et des voyages de Hiouen-Thsang, p, 204.

{ Vallabha Pundit according to same MSS. His time has been supposed to
have been A. C, 1340. Mons. M. Pavie has published a translation of this work
in the Journal Asiatique for March, April, 1844, p. 184, ef seq.

§ The name has been differently given in different places.

1863. Bhoja Raj a of Dhér and his Homonyms. 108

him, therefore, ended the glory of the Pramara race at Dhara. Chaitan
Pala, a great zemindar of the Tuar lineage, was elected the successor
of Gajananda, and his descendants reigned in Dhara for 214 years.

With the exception of the period of Bhoja’s reign the whole of
these statements have been questioned. The story of Munja’s birth
is purely mythical, designed more to account for the origin of his
uncommon name than to narrate sober facts. Professor Lassen* is
of opinion that Munja was really the uncle of Bhoja, and that he
came to the throne by usurpation when his brother Sindhula, or
whatever else was his name, was away from his capital on an expe-
dition to the South. This may be to some extent inferred from the
story which says that once when an astrologer foretold that Munja
would take the kingdom from his brother, Sindhula ordered Munja
to be beheaded and subsequently, repenting of his rash command,
made his sceptre over to him, and retired to the South to found a
kingdom of his own. The story of the jog and his metempsy-
chosis may likewise be set down to pure invention, or a poetical
euphyism for either a revolt at home or an invasion from the north
which compelled Bhoja to fly from his kingdom for a time; and the
accounts of his death and successors have been controverted by the
testimony of authentic inscriptions recorded by his descendants.

The parentage of Bhoja, as given by his biographers, has the sup-
port of an inscription found by Col. Tod at Madhukarghar in
Harouti,¢ but it differs from the biographers in giving the succes-
sion of Bhoja to a relative, Udayaditya, whose descendants occupied
the throne of Dhara for several generations.

A second inscription from a temple on the west bank of the Weyne
Ganga near Nagpur, decyphered by Pandit Ball Gungadhur Shastri
of Bombay,t gives a different genealogy. According to it, the founder
of Bhoja’s family was a Vairisiiha of the Pramara race, who was fol-
lowed by his son Bhimaka, Bhimaka was succeeded by Raja Raja
or Bhoja Raja, and he by his younger brother Bhadra Raja. Bhadra
was the father of Bhoja Raja, and Bhoja left the kingdom to his son
Udayaditya, whose son Naravarmadeva recorded the inscription. To

* Zeitschrift fur die Kunde des Morgenlandes, Vol. VII. p. 345.

+ Transact. RI. As. Soc. Vol. I. p. 226. It records the names of Sindhu, Sin-
dhula, Bhoja, Udayaditya and Naravarma.

{ Journal Bombay B. RK. A, Society, No, VI. p. 259.

104 Bhoja Ria of Dhir and his Homonyms. [No. 2,

reconcile this statement with that of the Madhukarghar monument
was found impracticable, and it was accordingly suggested that the
latter may be cast overboard as well as the Bhoja-Pravandha and the
Bhoja-Charita, inasmuch as we possess but a very imperfect para-
phrase of it, and that prepared by an untrustworthy interpreter.
The interpretation of the Nagpur record, however, has since been
found to be even more untrustworthy than the paraphrase of Col.
Tod’s pandits, and its roll of names to be in more than one instance
quite illusory. This was pointed out by Professor Christianus Lassen
in his notice of a copper-plate inscription brought from Sattara and
decyphered by him.*

The legend of the copper plate is, allowance being made for the
Shastri’s errors, an exact counterpart of the stone tablet at Nagpur,
and hence it has been supposed that the plate had been originally
deposited in the same temple upon the portico of which the stone is
affixed, and that it was subsequently removed to Sattara, most pro-
bably, by the Marhattas, though the when and the why cannot now
be satisfactorily ascertained. No facsimile of the document has yet
been published, but from the satisfactory state of preservation of the
original and the scrupulous care with which the Professor has examined
it letter by letter, there can be no question as to its authenticity or
of the general accuracy of its interpretation.

Tt opens with a salutation to Saraswati, and after recounting the
origin of the Pramavra race, states that in it was born a king of the
name of Vairisifiha, “ who ruled the earth, shaming Indra in heaven
by his prosperity.” His son and successor Siyaka had two children,
Munja and Sifharaja, of whom Munja the eldest succeeded his
father. How Munja died, the record explains not, but after describ-
ing the might and heroism of his brother Sifharaja, makes his son
Bhoja Raja assume the sovereignty. This Bhojat is no doubt the
great king of the Bhoja-Prabandha, but his panegyrist has nothing
to record of him besides a few unmeaning platitudes about great
victories, unrivalled heroism, and so forth. No mention whatever is
made of his “nine gems,” nor of the encouragement he offered to

* Zeitserift fur die Kunde des Morgenlandes, Vol. VII. p. 194.

+ The Bediyas or Gypsies of India hold a Bhoja to be the founder of necro-
mancy and jugglery, and the Bengali romance, Bhanumati, supports the idea.
Phe common name of conjuration in Bengali is Bhojabaji or the feats of Bhoja,
but no mention of it has been met with in any Sanskrit work.

1863. ] Bhoja Rijd of Dhir and his Homonyms. 105

learning and learned men, although the Bhoja-Prabandha devotes
three-fourths of its space to recounting the names of the several
poets who graced his court and to choice selections from their com-
positions, and it is all but certain that the 2Rdjamdrtanda and the
commentary on the Yoga aphorisms which pass in the name of a
Bhoja, owe their origin to his patronage. On the death of Bhoja,
the country, says the inscription, was overrun by enemies, and anar-
chy everywhere reigned supreme, until at last a kinsman (Bandhu)*
of the name of Udayaditya assumed the sovereignty and brought
‘peace and prosperity in his train. Laksmadeva the son of Udayaditya
was a mighty prince. He stretched his arms over all India, and
his conquests, says the chronicler, extended from Gour in the east to
Balkh beyond Affghanistan, and from Mainak on the Himalaya, to
Ceylon in the south; the countries especially named being Gour,
Afiga, Kalinga, Tripura, Chola, Pandya, Ceylon, Mainak, and Balkh
on the Oxus. Much of this no doubt is attributable to poetical
hyperbole, for it is not at all likely that Lakshmadhara, a mere duke
as he was, did wage war against Madhava Sena, the Vaidya king of
Bengal, who erected pillars of victory even in Central India, or pro-
ceed so far as Cabul to give battle to the Gaznavides in their own
country. ‘The centre of northern India was at his time held by the
Palas of Kanauj and they were not likely to fall a prey to the rapa-
city of a vassal. His conquests in Chola, Pandya and Tripura may
be facts, but they must have been of an ephemeral character.

The Ujjayini plates decyphered by Colebrooke,f makes no mention
of Lakshmadeva, but carries the succession from Udayaditya succes-
sively to Naravarmadeva, Yasovarmadeva and the two sons of the last,
namely, Jayavarmadeva and Lakshmivarmadeva. The Sattara plates
call Lakshmadeva, the brother of Naravarma, and assign to the
latter sufficient power to commute a grant of two villages made by

* By a mistaken estimate of the first word in the following extract a writer
in the Journal of the American Oriental Society has heen led to call Udayaditya
the son of Bhoja.

wasecateai faarareaargant |

Sara Ua aI CNSgracaTe |

J. A. O. 8. Vol. II. p. 29—35, Vol. I. p. 517.
The Nagpur inscription has the word Bandhu though the decypherer read it
dtmaya. Probably the same cause led the interpreter of the Madhukarghar
inscription to call him the son of Bhoja.
+ Miscellaneous Essays, Vol. II. p. 297.

106 Bhoja Raji of Dhar and his Homonyms. [ No. 2,

the former into one of one village, and make Lakshmadeva acknow-
ledge it as a matter of course. It may hence be inferred that Nara-
varma was the immediate heir and successor of Udaydditya in Mal-
wa, and that his brother held an appanage to the south of the
Vindhya, having Nagpur for its capital. Probably he was a gover-
nor of the southern provinces during his father’s lifetime and subse-
quently retained them for himself, in vassalage to his brother.* Pro-
fessor Lassen supposes that he must have revolted against his brother,
by whom he was overcome and expelled the country, and hence it is
that he names Naravarma in the inscription without any praise.
We think, however, that had such been the case, he would have
scarcely thought it necessary to advert to the revocation of his grant
by his brother in a document intended only to record the glories of
his family, and his dedication of a temple to his god-elect.

But however that be, certain it is that he was a son of Bhoja’s
successor Udayaditya, and lived at the beginning of the twelfth cen-
tury, and this being the case, the question arises, is the Bhoja of the
Sattara inscription identical with the sovereign of that name
noticed in the Madhukargarh record and the Bhoja-Prabandha ? or
is he different ? The two last authorities concur in giving the same
genealogy and evidently intend to describe the same prince. It is
true the Bhoja-Prabandha names Munja, who does not appear on the
Madhukargarh tablet, but as the object of the latter was only to
give the lineal ancestors of Bhoja Raja, the omission is not a matter
of any consequence, inasmuch as Munja was only an uncle of Bhoja,
and could not therefore be included among his direct ancestors. The
Sattara and the Nagpur inscriptions name Munja as the immediate
predecessor of Bhoja, and therefore may be supposed to allude to the
hero of the Bhoja-Prabandha, but it makes Munja the son of Siyaka
and Bhoja that of Sitharaja. This discrepancy is farther confound-
ed by an inscription from Ujjayini decyphered by me in 1850,+ and
another found at Indore and published in the last volume of the
Journal,t both of which make a Krishnardja to be the first of a line

* Zeitschrift fur die Kunde des Morgenlandes, Vol. II. p. 340.

+ Ante XIX. p. 475. The conjecture thrown out there regarding the suc-
cession of Vakpati is untenable.

{ Ante XXX. p.195. Mr. Hall, with his wonted predilection for microscopic
criticism, complains in this paper, as elsewhere, of Colebrooke’s imperfect trans-
lations of the imprecatory verses in the record, and supplies new versions of
some under the apology of more than one of their number haying been “ repeat-

1863. | Bhoja Raji of Dhar and his Homonyms. 107

of kings of Malwa, the second of which was a Vairisifiha, the third
a Siyaka, and the fourth Vakpatirdja alias Amoghavarsa, alias Valla-
bhanarendra. The last made a grant of land at Ujjayini in the year
of Samvat 1031 == A. C. 974, and subsequently another in Samvat
1036 = A. C. 980, just when, according to the Sattara record, the
capital of Malwa must have been in the hands of Munja or his
immediate predecessor. Here, it is true, we have the Vairisifha of
the Sattara plate, but his son Siyaka is followed not by Munja but
Vakpatiraja whose alternative names were Amoghavarsha and Valla-
bhanarendra. ‘To solve this difficulty, it has been suggested that the
Siyaka of the Sattara, Ujjayani and Indore plates is but an alias
of the Sindhu of the Madhukargarh monument and the Bhoja Pra-
bandha, and that Munja is but a nickname of Vakpati alias Amogha-
varsha; Sindhula being the alter ego of Sifharaja. It must readily
be admitted that there is little to justify these assumptions, and it is
hard to conceive that grave monumental records and title. deeds of real
property should so name the same individuals as not be recognisable
without assuming far-fetched aliases, and yet the identity of time
and place mentioned, leaves us no alternative. The Krishnardaja of
the Indore and Ujjayini plates could not reign at the last named
place simultaneously with the descendants of the Vairisifiha of the
Sattara plates, and we must therefore either admit that they were
identical, or assume one of the two lines of kings to be mythical.
The last is impossible, as we have to deal with donative records of
undoubted authenticity.

That those records allude to the same time it is not diffi-
cult to shew. The Sattara inscription of Lakshmadeva bears
date 1161 Samvat = A.C. 1104. His brother Naravarma was
succeeded in Malwa by his son Yasovarma who celebrated the
anniversary of his father’s death on the 8th of the waxing moon
in the month of Kartika S. 1191 (A. C. 1135) by the donation
of two villages to a Brahman of some sanctity. This grant was
subsequently ratified by his son Jayavarma on the 15th of the wax-
ing moon in the month of Sravana 8. 1200 = i6th July, A. C.
edly misinterpreted ;” but unfortunately for his predecessors he frequently
misinterprets where they were correct. One notable instance of this occurs
at page 210 where “ unsteady as a drop of water on a lotus leat” of Colebrooke
having been converted into “ uncertain as a bead of water on the petal of a lotus,”

the idea of unsteadiness has been entirely lost ; since it is only on the leaf of the
lotus that water is tremulous and not on its petals.

1p

108 Bhoji Raja of Dhar and his Homonyms. [No. 2,

1144.* Colebrooke supposed that Naravarma must have died in
Samvat 1190, or otherwise his son could not celebrate the anniver
sary of his funeral in the year following. This, however, is not neces-
sarily the case; for the sdémvatsarika or anniversary shrdddha is
an observance which recurs every year, and therefore allusion to
it implies any time beyond eleven lunisolar months and twenty-nine
days; no matter whether it be one or many years.f Allowing for
this uncertainty a range of only ten years, this much may be taken
‘for granted that Naravarma died between 1180 and 1190 Samvat-
Now if we allow him a reign of twenty-five years and a short one of
fifteen to his father Udaydditya, the close of Bhoja’s reign will be
placed between 1140 and 1150S. = A. C. 1083 to 1098, and the
commencement of it at about the beginning of the eleventh century.
It has been already assumed on the strength of Vakpati’s making
grants of land in the neighbourhood of Ujjayini that he held sovereign
power in that capital and the province in which it was situated, in
the year of Vikrama 1086 = A. C. 980, and if we may attach any
importanee to their ultra-regal titles, his predecessors for three
generations were anointed kings, who most probably, though not
necessarily, did reign at the same place immediately before him.
Consequently it must follow that either Vairisiiha and his successors
of the Sattara plate, including Siyaka, Munja and Bhoja, flourished
after Vakpati and within 980 to 1083 A. C., or the latter was iden-
tical with Munja. The first alternative would give a century for four
reigns and that on the supposition that Vakpati died immediately
after the grant named above, while we have the authority of the
Kumarapdéla Charita to shew that Munja was alive in 1079 Samvat
= A, C. 1020, when Durlabha visited him on his pilgrimage,t and
that of tradition, the Bhoja Charita and the Bhoja Pravandha to
assign to Bhoja a reign of fifty-five years, seven months and three
days, which leaves only six years unaccounted for, and to be disposed
of either by assignment to Munja or Udaydditya. Professor Lassen
has accepted the traditionary reign of Bhoja, and I feel fully dis-

* Colebrooke’s Misc. Essays, II. p. 299.

+ Wilson, Lassen and others have adopted the interpretation of Colebrooke, but
the practice of the sémvatsarikdsrdéddha is so strictly observed in the present day,
that 1 make no hesitation in rejecting it, and in so doing I am glad to find I
have the support of Professor Weber.

{ Lassen’s Zeitschrift, Vol. VIL. p. 220,

1863. | Bhoja Rijé of Dhar and his Homonyms. 109

posed to acquiesce in it inasmuch as it would be impossible to account
for his wide-spread fame over all India without allowing him a long
and prosperous rule.

It is possible that some persons may be disposed to divide Malwa
into two principalities, assigning one with Ujjayini for its capital to
the line of Vakpati, and the other with Dhara for its metropolis, to
the house of Munja. But this would not be in keeping with the
known fact of the successors of Bhoja having owned the whole of
Malwa and a good deal beyond it for their dominion, and they were
avowedly sovereigns of much less renown and acquisitive tendency
than their ancestors ; not to advert to the rather improbable fact of
Dhara and Ujjayini, having each a Siyaka and a Vairisiiha at the
same time.

A not very weighty objection to this identification of the two
Vairisinhas and Siyakas arises from the tenor of one of the land
grants of Vakpati which was ratified by a Rudraditya and which
consequently implies his vassalage or subordination to him. A second
grant of his, however, which is four years earlier, was issued without
any ratification and under the authoritative declaration, “by my
own order” @y BIwtiataa:. Besides the princes of Central India
and indeed of India generally, held their power under such uncertain
tenure and within such circumscribed areas that their independence
and vassalage were matters of frequent recurrence and they cannot be
used as arguments against their consecutive reigns in their own
dominions. At any rate should the reign of Vakpati and his pre-
decessors in Malwa be on this account doubted, still the relationship
of Bhoja cannot for that reason suffer, while the dates of his
suecessors leave no doubt as to his era.

Those dates have been verified; first, by the inscriptions from
Sattara and Nagpur which place Lakshmadeva and Naravarma in
1161 S. = 1104; second, by three inscriptions from Ujjayini, one of
which gives the dates of Yasovarma (HUG Se == AO 1137), and
the other of his son Lakshmivarma (1200 8. = A. C. 1148) ; and
third, by an inseription from Piplianagar* which places Arjunavar-
ma the great grandson of Yasovrma in 8. 1272 = A.C. 1211—1215,
and the statement of which has since been verified by a copper-plate

* Ante, Vol. VII. p. 726.

110 Bhoji Raja of Dhar and his Homonyms. [No. 2

from Sehore bearing the same date.* These leave no doubt as to
Bhoja’s reign having closed between 1083 to 1093 of the Christian
era, and taking the traditionary period of his reign to be correct, his
accession to the throne of Dhara would be placed in the year 1026.
This would give a reign of near fifty years to Vakpati alias Munja,
which under ordinary circumstances cannot but raise our suspicion,
but with the date before us we must accept it as a fact until otherwise
settled by future enquiry.

A stone inscription from Bhera Ghat on the Nurbudday calls
Alhanddevi, the queen of Gaydkarnadeva of Chedi, the grand-
daughter through her mother, of Udayaditya, and makes one of her
sons, Narasiiha, reign in the year A. C. 907, another, Jayasifiha, in
928, and her great grandson, Ajayasifiha, a minor, in 932. This car-
ries Udayaditya a century before Bhoja. The anachronism, however,
may be explained if we assume the Samvat of the inscription to be
other than that of Vikrama, probably of Vallabhi, though it is doubt-
ful if that era ever extended so far as Chedi.

Commenting on an inseription from Oodeypur near Sagore, Mr.
Torrens{ was led to assign Udayaditya to the seventh century, and
Lassen adopting that assignment made it correspond with the
date given in the Ayin Akbery. But the transcript of the document
as decyphered by Kamalakanta is so full of lacunz and so imperfect
with all, that it has no claims whatever to any consideration. The
Udayaditya era supposed to be mentioned in it is simply the result
of an illusion. f

Bentley places the close of Bhoja’s reign in the year of Christ 1082,§
which differs from our assignment by only a single year. —Lassen’s
date is wider by ten years, owing to his having assumed the death
of Naravarma to have taken place in 1190 and not a few years
before it, as we assume to have been the case. The differences, how-
ever, are so slight that they cannot affect the general conclusion that
Bhoja Pramara lived in the middle of the eleventh century, his reign
spreading to within a few years of 1026 to 1083 of the Christian era.

* Journal American Oriental Society, Vol. VII. p. 24.

+ Idem, Vol. VI. p. 499.

t Ante, Vol. IX. p. 545.
§ Asiatic Researches, Vol. VIII. p. 243.

LI DIOLS IVI II IE IV LP PPLE IED OL LA

1863. | Progress of the Trigonometrical Survey. lil

Histracts from a report from Maor J. T. Wanxer, Engineers,
Officiating Superintendent, Great Trigonometrical Survey, to the
Secretary to Government of India, Military Department.

Dated Dehra Dhoon, 25th August, 1862.

Srr,—I have the honor to narrate the progress made in the course
of the operations of the Trigonometrical Survey, since its late Super-
intendent, Sir Andrew Waugh, submitted his last Tabular Progress
Report, with his No. 13,115, dated 3Jst January, 1861, to your
office.

% * * * * *

3. The operations in Kashmir under the superintendence of Cap-
tain Montgomerie have made good progress, notwithstanding the
increasing difficulties which have had to be encountered as the work
progressed, and entered higher and more inhospitable ground. In
the year 1861 the triangulation was extended over an area of more
than 12,000 square miles, including some very elevated and difficult
country in Zanskar, Rukshu, the Upper Indus, and in Khagan and Nu-
bra. At several points it was carried up to the Chinese boundary, and
stations were visited in the neighbourhood of the Parang and Barala-
cha passes, where a junction of secondary points was formed with the
North West Himalaya series, the basis of the degree sheets recently
published in Calcutta by the Surveyor General. The stations in
Ladak and on the Upper Indus were very high, generally over 17,000
feet. Mr. Johnson took observations at one station more than
20,600 feet high, the greatest altitude yet attained as a station of
observation. Several remarkable peaks Trans Indus, probably form-
ing the watershed between the Chitral and Swat valleys, were fixed
from the stations West of Khagan.

4. ‘The topography embraces an area of about 14,500 square
miles, executed on the seale of 4 miles to the inch, leaving but a very
small portion of Little Thibet unfinished, and completing the greater
portion of Nubra, Ladak, Rupshu, (or Rukshu) and Zanskar. Sever-
al of the Salt Lakes on the table-land of Rukshu have been survey-
ed. Some exceedingly difficult ground was sketched by Captain
Austen in Little Thibet, varying in altitude from 7000 to 28,300 feet
above the sea. ‘The glaciers he has discovered and surveyed are

112 Progress of the Trigonometrical Survey. [No. 2,

probably the largest in the world out of the Arctic regions, the
Baltoro Glacier, in the Braldo branch of the Shigar valley, being no
less than 36 miles long. The Biafoganse is nearly as long, and
forms, with the glacier on the Nuggair side, a continuous mass of ice
nearly 64 miles in length. To delineate them properly a great
amount of roughing and exertion, and not a little danger, had to be
undergone by Captain Austen, as it was necessary for him to encamp
on them for days, and to ascend to great heights on either side.

5. ‘The carrying out of these interesting operations has involved
vast labour and exposure. The country was found to be barren and
desolate in the extreme, and the weather very unfavorable, in conse-
quence of the extraordinarily heavy rains, for which the year will
probably be long remembered. Contrary to their wont the clouds
crossed over the south of the Himalayas to the northern side, bring-
ing heavy falls of snow in August, and generally hindering the work.
Supplies and firewood had to be carried great distances, argols of yak
dung being often the only fuel available. Under these cireumstanc-
es, the outturn of work is most creditable to the officer in charge
and his assistants. Captain Montgomerie testifies to the zeal and
cheerfulness with which all under his orders have executed the diffi-
cult tasks assigned to them. He also acknowledges the cordial as-
sistance which the members of the Survey have invariably received
from the Maharajah of Kashmir and his higher officials. :

6. The Kashmir party being employed in mountains which are
only accessible during the summer months, its field season is the
period of recess of the Trigonometrical parties employed in ordinary
districts. 'The usual survey year commences in October, by which
month the computations and maps of the preceding field season are
generally brought up, and the party is ready to take the field again.
The Kashmir survey year is exceptional and commences in March.
The officers in charge of the various parties submit their respective
annual reports on the termination of the field operations, which are
the real test of the advance made during the year. Thus the Super-
intendent of the department cannot prepare progress reports for
strictly synchronous periods. Sir Andrew Waugh’s last report em-
braced the summer of 1860, and the preceding winter. The present
narrative embraces the summer of 1861, and the winters of 1860-61
and 1861-62, and consequently gives the progress which has been

1863. ] Progress of the Trigonometrical Survey. 113

made in two successive field seasons of ordinary triangulation and -
one season of the Kashmir operations.
# # * # * a

“QLieutenant Melville, commencing in the north of Zanskar (or
Zaskar) surveyed a large portion of it, including all the large glaciers,
to the west, as well as those, at the head of the Butnai river. Some
of these glaciers were 15 to 7 miles in length. Total progress very
good, and with the trigonometrical points now available he will be
able to complete the sketch of Zanskar during the ensuing season.
Whilst surveying, Lieutenant Melville made some very successful and
characteristic photographs of glaciers, and of the country generally.”

7. The Coast Szrtzes,* between Calcutta and Madras was placed
under the superintendence of Captain Basevi, Bengal Engineers, in
the autumn of 1860, the exigencies of the department having requir-
ed his transfer from the Trans-Indus frontier all the way to the
Madras Coast.—His operations commenced in the vicinity of Vizaga-
patam, and were proceeding towards Rajahmundry, when on approach-
ing the hill of Kapa in the Rampa estate, he found that his signallers
had been driven away from the hill with threats of violence, and that
the inhabitants of the district were assembling to prevent him from
ascending. The estate is rent free, and the people are a lawless set,
though under the control of the Godaveri Magistracy. Captain
Basevi, having obtained an extra Military Guard and a body of Po-
lice, made his way to the summit of the hill without molestation,
and took the necessary observations. One day, the people set fire to
the grass on the hill, which was about 8 feet high, and a Rajah
brought intelligence that they were collecting to attack the Survey-
ors; but the fire was extinguished, and the attack was not attempted.
Captain Basevi’s chief apprehensions were for the signallers, whom he
had to leave behind at the station, but a guard was left with them,
and they were unmolested. 'The only serious inconvenience occasion-
ed was in having to construct the station on a block of laterite sever-
al feet below the hill, for the summit was covered with dense jungle

* On the Coast Series, the principal operations consist of 42 triangles, arrang-
ed so as to comprise one double and five single polygons, and one quadrilateral.
Twenty-one triangles were measured during the first season with a 2-foot Theo-
dolite by Barrow, giving a mean triangular error of 0”.65, and an equal number
measured the next season, with a similar instrument by Troughton and Simms,
gave a mean error of 0”,37,—Azimuthal observations on Circumpolar Stars were
taken at three stations.

114 Progress of the Trigonometrical Survey. [No. 2,

which there was no means of clearing away without the assistance
of the villagers, all of whom had absconded.

8. Fortunately, such interruptions are of rare occurrence, only
happening in the unusually lawless districts around Hyderabad.
The operations proceeded without further opposition or hindrance,
excepting from the physical difficulties of the ground passed over.—
The district between the Godavery and Kishna rivers was crossed,
with considerable trouble, owing to the absence of high hills, and the
undulating nature of the ground, which was all the more difficult
because covered with dense jungle. ‘Thus the selection of stations in
such a manner as to form an unbroken chain of quadrilaterals and
polygons, became a very tedious and laborious undertaking, involving
the repeated rejection of positions which at first promised the requi-
site visibility in all directions, but were afterwards found to be defi-
cient in some essential relation. Nevertheless, in the two field seasons
the principal triangulation was carried a distance of upwards of 180
miles. It has now reached a point in the Guntoor district near the
meridian of Madras, whence it will merge into the meridional are
which is intended te connect Jubbulpore and Madras, and to be ex-
tended southwards into Ceylon.

9. After completing his triangles thus far, Captain Basevi return-
ed to Vizagapatam, to select a site for the base line of verification,
which it is proposed to measure in this neighbourhood. He succeed-
ed in obtaining a suitable site, but not until his field operations had
been so leng protracted that it was the middle of June before he
could break up his camp and return to quarters. In the event of
Captain Smyth’s expedition into Central India taking place, Captain
Basevi has been nominated to accompany it in the capacity of Astro-
nomer and Topographer.

10. The Indus SERr=s, running parallel to the western frontier of
British India, was completed by the close of the field season 1859-60,
when the late Surveyor General decided on carrying an oblique series
along the south east bank of the Sutlej, from Mitunkote to Firozpore,
to tie up the Punjab meridional series, and form a basis for future trian-
gulation into the deserts of Sind and Rajpootana. Certain small por-
tions of the Indus triangulation which had been executed with a two-
foot theodolite gave unusually large re-entering errors. Lieutenants
Herschel and Thuillier, both of the Bengal Engineers, and first As-

1863. | Progress of the Trigonometrical Survey. 115

sistants of the Great Trigonometrical Survey, were consequently sent
to revise them with the great theodolite, while Mr. Armstrong was
selecting stations and building towers on the line of the Sutlej.
Twenty-one principal triangles were ably and rapidly revised, after
which Lieutenant Thuillier proceeded to join the Kashmir party
while Lieutenant Herschel took in hand the Sutlej triangulation.*
This consists of a series of single triangles, of which one flank rests
on the sand hills fringing the Bahawulpore desert, and the other in
the lowlands which are periodically inundated by the Sutlej. Thus
the greater portion of the rays traverse moist jungles of tamarisk
and long grass, -alternating with ridges of sand, forming a combina-

tion which is peculiarly troublesome in disturbing the atmosphere,

* Lieutenant Herschel took astronomical observations for the direct determin-
ation of azimuth at 3 stations at an averave distance of 72 wiles apart. His
mean triangular error is 0.53. In 85 angles his mean probability of error is 0.25
between extremes of 0.10 and 0.38. He has given the following interesting table
as a test of the accuracy of his work.

f {

(A) Maximum difference between observations.
(B) 0” 1 | 977 | 97 | 4” BY | 6” 7 8” cs
(Saebes of measures in aj to | to | to | to | to | to} to} to] to} &
set. 1” Oe 3// 4!’ 5 Gr’ az 8” QO”
2 EO OOP OM OO Ose Ol a4
3 223 |251 3 (6) 0 0) (0) 0) O | 567
4 810135) 65) 22 1 O Oh @ QO | 104
5 (0) 5) 4} 29) 18 1 O 8) O 5Z
6 0) 0 0 5] 11 5 3 0 O} 24
vi 0 O 0) 0) 0) (0) 0) 0) 10) 0)
8 0] O 8) 0 0) 0 0) 1 1 1
9 (0) 0) 0) 0 1 0) O 0 0) 1
Total. 227 1269 |162/) 56] 26 6 3 1 1 | 750

Total 0” to 3’ 658. Total greater than 3” == 92.

In this Table the unit is a set of measures of an angle on a single Zero, the
arguments being A, the maximum difference between the respective measures
forming a set, and B the number of measures.

Lieutenant Herschel has introduced an improvement in the referring marks at
present used in the survey. Instead of having two apertures one for a lamp,
the other for a heliotrope, he made both lamp and heliotrope illuminate the same
piece of ground glaas, the aperture of which was limited by a circular diaphragm
of diameter suitable to the distance. Thus one object is intersected instead of
two, and there is no flickering or unsteadiness of signal from wind or imperfect
direction of heliotrope; there is no dazzle from too bright a sun, nor total dis-
appearance in its absence, for the mere reflection of the sky suffices to illuminate
the glass in tolerably clear weather. Ono mile is considered the best distance
for such a mark.

Q

116 Progress of the Trigonometrical Survey. [No. 2,

and causing lateral refraction to perplex and weary the observer, and
impair his measures. The principal operations consist of 38 triangles,
extending over a distance of 132 miles from a side of the Indus series
below Mitunkote to the vicinity of Pak Puttun. Being entirely in
the plains they cover an area of only 1,960 miles.

11. Lieutenant Herschel reports that “all the principal towns
and villages along the line of the series have been fixed where practi-
cable. They are necessarily few in number, as the country is more
and more thinly populated from Ahmedpur eastwards as far as the
British boundary. From Bahawulpore to Fazilka, the towns become
fewer and of less importance, reaching a climax of insignificance in
Bahawulgurh, the capital of nearly half the whole state, which is
nothing but a hamlet without a single pucka house in it, and deriv-
ing its importance apparently from nothing but the prestige of an
old ruined fort, and the residence in it of the temporary holder of the
largest (but by no means the richest) Kardari in the states. The
country is singularly poor in mosques, temples, tombs, or indeed pro-
minent buildings of any kind.”

12. The Ranoon Merripionat Serres,* under the charge of H.
Keelan, Esq., first Assistant Great Trigonometrical Survey, has ad-
vanced a distance of 176 miles, by 33 principal triangles, arranged in
quadrilaterals and hexagons, covering an area of 4,130 square miles.
It has laid down the positions of Jeypoor, Ulwar, Deoli, Boondi and
numerous other places of importance. In one more field season, it
should reach the Longitudinal Series between Calcutta and Karachi,
where it will terminate. The published Charts of the Kotah and
Boondi territories indicate a succession of hills over which it was
supposed that the triangulation might have been carried and com-
pleted last season. But the ground was found to be the very reverse
of what had been expected, and to require the construction of towers,
thereby protracting the operations into another season.

13. The Goornacure MeEripionar SERIES,f under the charge of

ic Mr. Keelan employed Colonel Waugh’s 2-feet Theodolite No. 1, in his
triangulation. The average error of his 33 triangles is 0.36. The mean proba-
bility af angular error is 0.80, between extremes of 0.12, and 0.55. Azimuth
observations were taken at 3 stations. The secondary triangulation covers an
area of 7,040 square miles,

+ Mr. Shelverton employed Colonel Waugh’s 2-feet Theodolite No. 2 in his
triangulation. The average error of his 50 triangles is 0’’.54, The mean proba-
bility of angular error is 0.46 between extremes of 0,19 and 0.87. Azimuth

1863. ] Progress of the Trigonometrical Survey. 117

George Shelverton, Esq., Civil second Assistant Great Trigonometri-
eal Survey, traverses a meridian close to that of Umritsur, and was
brought to a termination last season by joining the Arumlia Series,
which had some years previously been carried, by Captain Rivers of
the Bombay Engineers, up an adjacent meridian, as far as Ajmeer,
from the Great Longitudinal triangulation. From Sirsa to Ajmeer
it crosses a desert tract, of which Mr. Shelverton reports that “the
main difficulties encountered were scarcity of water, of building ma-
terial, of laborers and of provisions. The country traversed had suffer-
ed for three years from extreme drought; large villages, originally
containing upwards of 500 families, had been deserted by all except
first class farmers who were too proud to work. Wholesome water
was scarcely procurable, and water even for building purposes had
frequently to be conveyed from distances of 4: and 5 miles. The
largest reservoirs of water upon which the inhabitants depended for
their supply during the greater part of the year had invariably been
exhausted, and the expensive kucha wells of the country barely suffic-
ed for local wants. It was therefore under very adverse circumstanc-
es that the Goorhagurh Meridional Series was conducted during the
field season of 1860-61.”

14. During the following season the deserts of Bikaneer, Shekha-
wati and Marwar were extensively traversed, and a very large area
of both principal and secondary triangulation was executed, reflecting
much credit on Mr. Shelverton and his assistants, who skilfully and
energetically availed themselves of the facilities offered by mounds
and hills, commanding extensive prospects, to fix a large number of
positions of importance. In the two seasons the triangulation was
earried a direct distance of 342 miles by 50 consecutive triangles,
covering an area of 4,454 square miles.

15. The Assam Party,* in charge of C. Lane, Esq., Chief Civil

observations were taken at only one station. The secondary triangulation covers
an area of 10,954 square miles. Owing to the paucity of good natural or artifi-
cial objects, 152 secondary station marks were built for future reference.

* The area of Secondary Triangulation executed during both seasons is 10,250
square miles, fixing the positions of Silchar, Sylhet, Jyntiapoor and numerous
other places of importance. One azimuth only was determined by astronomical
observation.

Mr. Rossenrode reports as follows of the tribes who inhabit Independent
Tipperah: “The Court of the Rajah at Agratolla is composed entirely of Ben-
galis, A Brahmin of Bengal has the sole management, and conducts the affairs
of the state. Being a Brahmin he is also the spiritual adviser of the Rajah, who

Q 2

118 Progress of the Trigonometrical Survey. [No. 2,

Assistant, was employed in 1860-61, in triangulating along the Eastern
Frontier, from the south of Gowhatty to Cherra Poonjee. Recent
prohibitions regarding the impressment of coolies occasioned much
embarrasment, notwithstanding that the majority of the Cossyahs
are porters by trade; delay was thus caused in taking the field, and

pays him the greatest reverence and respect, and remains standing during any
interview which may take place between them, The Praboo, as this Brahmin is
called, is not very popular from having cut down the expenses of the Rajah, re-
duced his retinue, discharged many of his retainers, and sold the superfluous
elephants and horses. He has done much good since the country has been under
his management. A younger brother of the Rajah, Barchand Thakoor, resides
at Agratolla, He has received the rudiments of an English education, and has
been taught Chemistry, Medicine and Photography, and amuses himself with
taking likenesses. He takes no part in business, and seems to have no influence
whatever.

“The court being composed of Bengalis, none of these men were willing, or
would volunteer their services when an agent was required, to accompany Mr,
Ellison, and their reluctance to do so may be attributable to the difficulties they
would have to encounter in an unexplored, uninhabited portion of the country
through which Mr, Ellison pointed out to them on the map that the work would
have to be conducted.

On enquiry, Mr. Ellison learned that the country was uninhabited owing to
the inroads of the Kachak Kookies, an independent tribe, who leave their hills
and fastuesses in the interior, and make frequent forays, plundering and murder-
ing the Tipperah Rajah’s people. The great dread of this savage and inhuman
tribe causes such a panic throughout this portion of the country, that all the
inhabitants deserted their villages and settled on the Frontier, or in the Cachar,
Sylhet and Comillah districts, and no persuasion will induce them to accompany
a small detachment such as Mr. Hllison’s was. With a large armed force able
to repel any attaek, these very people, formerly subjects of the Rajah of Tipperah,
are ready to render every assistance, and to guide the force, in order that the
Kachak Kookies may be severely punished, nay exterminated from the country.

“There are several tribes in Independent Tipperah. The Kookies, Nagas and
Tipperahs inhabit the hills and jungles. They select a locality for their village,
clear it and the surrounding hills and valleys, and cultivate the rich virgin soil
for two, three, or at the utmost, four years, and then remove to some other
equally favorable locality. They chiefly cultivate cotton, a fourth of which is
given to the Rajah annually; a portion is spun and manufactured into coarse
cloth for household use, and some pieces of cloth of better texture, as well as
the surplus cotton, are taken to the nearest hat, or market, and exchanged for
goats, pigs, dogs, fowls or ornaments, hey also cultivate rice, yams, and a
gram termed chena, (which grows only on these hills,) for their own consump-
tion. The Kookies and Nagas have no caste, they eat dogs and cats; in fact
every animal and every bird is eaten. The Kookies of Assam, Cachar, Manipur
and Tipperah have different dialects, and the same may be said of the language
of the Nagas of the above-named places. The Tipperahs, in dress, appearance
and habits, resemble the inhabitants of Assam. ‘They have their own language
and are a low caste of Hindus; from constant intercourse with the people of
the plains they are more civilized, and understand Bengali. The Tipperahs are
candid, straight-forward, cheerful, and of all the hill tribes met with on this side
are most trustworthy and intelligent. The Kookies and Nagas area sullen,
morose, treacherous set, and cannot be conciliated or depended upon, They do
not mix with their neighbours, and consequently retain their barbarism. The
Kachar Kookies are an independent tribe, and nothing is known of them exc ept
that they make frequent incursions, rob, plunder and murder, the inhabitants: ”

1863. | Progress of the Trigonometrical Survey. 119

often afterwards. Mr. Lane reports that it frequently proved of as-
sistance, as a turning point to the arguments employed to persuade
these loyal people to act as porters, to tell them they were required
“on Her Majesty’s Service,” interpreted “ Maharanee ka kam.”. The
operations were further impeded by clouds and mists, and latterly by
storms of such severity that on one occasion the whole of the Bunder
Bazar, on the bank of the Soorma, was utterly destroyed and no ves-
tige left. Final observations were taken for 19 principal triangles
arranged in a double series, extending over a direct distance of 62
miles, and covering an area of 1,207 square miles. Hight important
Snowy Peaks of the Bhotan Himalayas were fixed.

16. During 1861-62, Mr. Lane was absent on leave on medical
certificate, when his place was ably filled by Mr. W. C. Rossenrode,
who extended the triangulation a direct distance of 89 miles -east-
ward through Cachar towards Munipoor, and 25 miles southward
towards Independent Tipperah, in all 114 miles, by 30 triangles ar-
ranged in a double series covering an area of 2,024 square miles.
Some of the stations were situated in the Jynteeapore district, but
the observations at them were fortunately completed before the present
rebellion broke out. Reciprocal observations had still to be taken to
them from other stations around, necessitating the employment of
Hindustani clashis to work the signals on them; the men though
robbed and threatened, maintained their posts during the rebellion,
and only came away when signalled to do so at the termination of
the observations.

17. Ihave already reported that on learning that the Bengal
Government had ordered a survey of Independent Tipperah to be
made, I arranged with Mr. Buckland, the Commissioner of Chitta-
gong, for our triangulation to be carried across Tipperah, on the di-
rect line from Cherra Poonjee to Chittagong, instead of taking an
extensive circuit westwards, as was originally contemplated, in order
to keep within British Territory, and away from a frontier believed
to be insecure. Mr. Hllison was deputed to enter Tipperah to re-
connoitre the country, and select sites for the stations. He was
considerably delayed by having to wait for the Rajah’s Agents, but
he made some progress, and is reported by Mr. Buckland to have
“ behaved with much tact and patience, although he had to encoun-
ter the usual obstructiveness of the Rajah and his people.” Mr. Elli. *

120 Progress of the Trigonometrical Survey. [No. 2,

son has supplied some interesting information regarding the hill
tribes inhabiting Independent Tipperah, which I have extracted from
Mr. Rossenrode’s report and given in the foot notes.

18. The BompBay Pparty,* under the superintendence of Lieutenant
now Captain C. T. Haig, Bombay Engineers, Ist Assistant, was
engaged in 1860-61, in completing the triangulation necessary to
connect the Guzerat longitudinal series, on the parallel of 23°, with
the Singi meridional series, which had been brought up from Bom-
bay as far as Surat, by Captain Rivers, some years previously. The
connexion was satisfactorily accomplished, notwithstanding that the
section of the party employed in selecting stations, got entangled in
some malarious jungles, where both Europeans and Natives were at-
tacked with jungle fever, and had to retire to Broach until the sickly
season was over. In 1861-62, the Guzerat longitudinal series was
extended eastwards to the Khanpisura series on the meridian of 75°,
and a series of triangles on the meridian of Oodipoor was carried
between it and the Karachi longitudinal, thus completing the trian-
gulation of the northern portion of the Bombay Presidency. The
principal operations involve 125 miles of triangles arranged in a
double series, and about 190 miles arranged singly, the total number
of triangles being 42, covering an area of 7,450 square miles.

19. The LEVELLING OPERATIONS,f under Captain Branfill, of the

* Astronomical observations for azimuth were taken at two stations.

Of the Meridional Series, south of Oodipoor, Captain Haig reports as follows.
“The country through which this series runs is inhabited by the wildest set of
savages that 1 have as yet ever had to do with. ‘The thieves (who form a por-
tion of the inhabitants of every village) for the sake of the clothes a man has on
his back, assault him; if he attempts to escape, they bring him down with a
shower of arrows, utterly regardless of his life. On this account, communication
by messengers was attended with great risk, and consequently Messrs. Dacosta
and McGill were each unacquainted with the other’s progress until they actually
met, otherwise I had intended them to be in frequent communication. It is
partly due to this that the Series has a bend in the centre, and partly because
the Rajah of Saloomber, a very refractory chief, would not permit a Station to
be built on his hills, although directed to do so by the Political Agent.”’

Mr. Dacosta was employed in carrying a Secondary Series of triangles along
the west coast of the Gulf of Bombay, from the mouth of the Saburmuthee
river to Gogo, over a flat tract of country, which for a great portion of the year
is entirely under water. Also in selecting principal stations for the Mangalore
and Oodipoor Series, over a meridional distance of upwards of 180 miles. He
laid out a Secondary Series down the east coast of the Gulf of Cambay as far as
Surat, and carried other triangles to fix the position of Baroda.

y+ During the course of the levelling operations, it has often been noticed that
though the independent results obtained at each station by the respective ob-
servers differ if at all by almost imperceptibly minute quantities, the differences
have a tendency to go all one way, and have occasionally accumulated to large

1863. | Progress of the Trigonometrical Survey. 121

late 5th Bengal European Cavalry, second Assistant, have made good
progress, having in the two field seasons been carried from a point
near Mitunkote, on the Indus line of levels, to the Dehra Dhoon
Base Line, vid Bahawulpoor, Ferozpoor, Loodiana, Umballa and
Saharunpoor, and thence on to the Seronge Base line in Central In-
dia, via Meerut, Allygurh and Gwalior, over a distance of 999 miles.
In the course of these operations, stone bench marks were fixed at
distances of 12 to 15 miles, and the most substantial milestones met
with by the road side were also determined, for future reference by
Canal or other Engineers engaged in levelling operations. A satis-
factory connexion has been made with the Ganges, and the eastern
Jumna Canal levels, and with those of the Allahabad and Agra Rail-
way, which are now capable of being reduced to the mean sea level
as a common datum.

20. The ComeutTineé Orrice in Calcutta, under the superinten-
dence of Baboo Radanath, chief computer, was engaged in completing
the triplicate manuscript volumes of the General reports of the Paris-
nath, Hurilong and Chendwar Meridional Series, and in furnishing
elements for the various Topographical and Revenue Survey Parties
requiring them. In March last, Baboo Radanath retired on a pen-
sion, after 80 years’ service, during which he had repeatedly earned
the approbation of the successive Surveyors General under whom he
had served. On his resignation it was deemed advisable to remove
the computing office from Calcutta to the Head quarters of the Tri-
gonometrical Survey at Dehra Dhoon, to bring it into more direct

amounts. On this curious and perplexing subject, Captain Branfill reports as
follows :

“ T think we can all subscribe to the following facts—The state of the weather
and the season of the year havea very considerable effect on our results, as
shown by the difference between observers. We have found that the apparent
law of our differences is least developed some time in the middle of the cold sea-
son. Inarun of bad weather (@. e. bad for the work) the apparent law of our
difference is for the most part marked when the atmosphere is clearest, and when
we have supposed our observations to be freest from error ; and conversely in a
run of good weather, when the air is hazy from smoke or dust, or greatly agitated
by wind, and, in short, when we have found most difficulty in reading the staves,
our results have most coincided with each other. Our differences do not appear
to vary with the distances of the staves, On the contrary the differences are per-
haps even more marked as the day grows older, and the distances of the staves
from the instrument are reduced. The general direction in azimuth of the line
of our work has some connection with the cumulative differences, and we have
noticed that the tendency to differ is more marked when proceeding towards a
certain point of the compass, than when proceeding from that point towards its
opposite.”

j22 Progress of the Trigonometrical Survey. [No. 2,

connexion with the Superintendent of the department, and also with
the field parties whose computations it has to revise and collate.

21. The distant location of the computing office had entailed the
formation of a small office at Head Quarters under the superintend-
ence of J. B. N. Hennessey, Hsq., first Assistant Great Trigonome-
trical Survey, composed of native Surveyors, and newly joined Sub-
Assistants, who thus had an opportunity of being rigorously trained
in the theoretical portion of their new duties. ‘This little office has
lately completed the triplicate manuscript copies of the General
report of the north-eastern longitudinal triangulation, between
Dehra Dhoon and Purneah, in two thick imperial volumes; it has
also been employed in revising the computations of the mountain
triangulation of the north-west Himalaya Series, computing 3
volumes of the report of the Levelling operations, and preparing the
triplicate general report of the Trans-Indus Frontier Survey ; also
in supplying elements, examining candidates, instructing new assist-
ants, and other current work.

22. The Drawing Office, under superintendence of W. H. Scott,
Esq., Civil Assistant Great Trigonometrical Survey, has been chiefly
employed in compiling maps of Kashmir and Ladak, from the plane
table sheets sent in by Captain Montgomerie. The first of these
large maps has already been transmitted to the Home Government,
the second is well advanced. ‘Ten original preliminary charts of the
triangulation in different parts of India have been forwarded for the
use of the Surveyor General’s Office, and duplicates have been pre-
pared for the Geographer to the Secretary of State for India. Tri-
plicate charts have also been constructed for the manuscript volumes
of the General Report.

23. Between the completion of a Survey, in this country, and its
publication, a long interval invariably elapses, during which even
the Supreme and Local Governments are without access to valuable
information, acquired but unimpartible, because of the costliness of
manuscript maps and the time occupied in their construction. I
have therefore been induced to attempt to employ photography for
making rapid copies of our maps and charts, as a temporary substi-
tute for the final engravings. This process has of late years been
extensively adopted in the Ordnance Survey of Great Britain for
reducing maps, as a substitute for the pentagraph. Two complete

1863. | Progress of the Trigonometrical Survey, 123

sets of photographic apparatus were sent out to this country by the
Secretary of State for India, for similar employment, and it is with
one of these that I am endeavouring to have our maps copied. The
operation is by no means easy, for the apparatus has had to be speci-
ally adapted to make full scale copies, and not reductions merely, for
which it was originally intended, and the maps require to be drawn
with special reference to future copying or reducing by photography.
An ordinary finished map cannot be reduced without a large portion
of the names becoming too microscopic to be easily legible. In the
first Kashmir map the rivers were coloured in blue, and the broken
land and low hills in red, the higher ranges being in Indian ink.
Consequently a photograph of it would shew neo rivers, and would
invert the depth of shading of the high and low hills, bringing the
latter into excessive prominence.*

24. Captain Melville, who has already been mentioned in con-
nexion with the Topographical Survey of Kashmir, has attained
considerable skill as a photographer, and succeeded in making an
excellent reduction to half scale of the second Kashmir map, before
any names were printed on it. The reduction will have the names
inserted by hand, and will then be ready for being copied to full
scale, and afterwards printed, for as extensive circulation as the limit-
ed means at my disposal will permit. Ihave every reason to hope
that, with Captain Melville’s assistance, I may be able to supply a
want which has often been seriously felt.

25. In concluding this report of the operations of the Trigono-
metrical Survey, I am happy to be able to express my opinion that
the progress made on all sides, both in the field, and during the re-
cess, by the Survey parties, and by the offices at Head Quarters,
has been most satisfactory.

* A Map of Asia between the parallels of 20° and 60° on the scale of 100
geographical miles to the inch, has been recently compiled under my superin-
tendence, partly in this office, and partly in the Surveyor General’s of which I
had temporary charge from 10th January to 24th March last. It gives the most
recent information available from our own and other sources of the countries
. between St. Petersburg and Pekin, Tobolsk and Calcutta. The boundaries of
the territories respectively under British and Russian protection are shown, and
the caravan routes from India to all parts of Asia. ‘he map is now available in
the office of the Surveyor General, Calcutta.

124 On Dr. Gerard’s collection of Spiti fossils. [No. 2

On Dr. Gerard’s collection of fossils from the Spiti vailey, im the
Asiatic Society's Museum.—-By Henry F. BuanForp, Esq. A. &.
iS Ay Tas) GRAS

The paper, of which the following is a revised copy was read before
a meeting of the Asiatic Society about eighteen months since, but
its publication was fortunately deferred for a time, in order that the
illustrations which now accompany it might be completed. In this
interval, my friend, Mr. Theobald, returned from a visit to the Spiti
valley, and on looking through the fossils which I had described, he
communicated to me his conviction that certain of the specimens
which | had identified as European Liassiec species,* were not from
the Spiti valley at all, but, in all probability, Whitby fossils which
had been accidentally mixed up with Dr. Gerard’s collection. These
specimens had been admitted on the same authority as the majority
of the others, viz., the Rev. Mr. Everest’s figures in the 18th. Vo-
lume of the Asiatic Researches, and owing to the neglected state of
the collection, and the absence of labels on the majority of the
specimens, there had been no means of detecting his error.

The examination of undoubted Whitby fossils, of Col. Strachey’s
Niti collection and also of M. Jaquemont’s collection in the Musée @’
Histoire Naturelle at Paris, led me to the same convicticn as Mr.
Theobald, viz., that the Liassic species were in reality English speci-
mens, and I accordingly wrote a postscript to that effect to be pub-
lished together with the original paper. Shortly afterwards, how-
ever, I returaed to India and as the paper had not then been put
into type, I considered it better to withdraw and modify it in accord-
ance with the above correction.

A very considerable alteration had indeed become necessary The
eollection as originally examined consisted of a fauna in part Triassic,
in part Liassic, and partly also Upper Oolitic, some of the species
being either identical with species from the Oxford clay or closely
allied to forms of that age. The ‘Triassic specimens were not
sufficiently numerous to lead me to infer the existence of a distinct -
formation of that age, and I contemplated the possibility of there being

* Ammonites heterophylius, Sow. Ammonites bifrons, Brug. Ammonites conca-
vus, >ow. Ammonites Lhouarsensis, D’Orb. Ammonites communis, Sow. and Pec-
ten equivalvis, Sow. Five of these were figured by Mr. Everest in the 18¢h
Volume of the Asiatic Researches, as forming part of Dr. Gerard’s collection.

1863. | On Dr. Gerard’s collection of Spiti fossils. 125

a Liassic formation in the Spiti valley, in which, as in the beds of St,
Cassian, certain Triassic forms were intermingled. The Upper Oolitic
forms, I regarded (with doubt.) as indicating a distinct formation.
The fossils I had examined comprised a majority of Cephalopoda,
with a few species of Gasteropoda and Conchifera. The Brachiopoda
which formed part of the original collection I had not been able te
discover in the Society’s Museum.

Mr. Theobald’s investigations have now established the existence
of Triassic beds as well as those of Silurian and Upper Oolitic age,
in the Spiti valley while the now proved spuriousness of the Liassic
fossils described, eliminates this fauna from consideration. Further
research in the Society’s Museum, has yielded me the Brachiopoda
of Dr. Gerard’s collection and a number of other fossils, which, however,
(with the exception of one or two ammonites) want of leisure at pre-
sent compels me to defer for future examination. The former consist
of Producta, Spirifer, Terebratula and Rhynchonella, some of them of
Carboniferous age, but further than this I am not able to pronounce’
at present. This paper, therefore, confines itself to a description of
the genuine portion of those species included in my original memoir,

I have mentioned that while in England I had the opportunity of
examining the valuable collection of Oolitic fossils made by Colonel
Strachey at the Niti Pass in Kumaon, as well as those from northern
Nepal collected by General Hardwicke, and M. Jaquemont’s collec-
tion from Spiti. This has rendered an alteration necessary in the
names of those species which also occur in the above collections and
had already been named by authors or discoverers. ‘This has been
effected in the present paper.

Class. CEPHALOPODA.
Order. DIBRANCHIATA.

1. Brtemnires Suncatus, Miller. Plate I. figs. 1, 2a-e.

This Belemnite is apparently identical with that occuring in the
Oolitic rocks of Cutch, which has been described and figured by Mr.
Sowerby, (Geol. Trans. 2nd Ser, Vol. V.) as B. canaliculatus, Schlot-
heim.

The Spiti specimens differ from those figured by Miller and
D’Orbigny, in the guard being more compressed in form, so that the

R 2

126 On Dr. Gerard’s collection of Spiti fossils. [No. 2,

dorso-ventral diameter is rather the longer. The angle of the
phragmacone is about 17°, while that given by M. D’Orbigny
is 18° to 182°. These differences, however, do not appear to me to
warrant specific distinction.

There are several phragmacones of this species in Dr. Gerard’s
collection. The largest is 2 inches in diameter. The largest guard
measures as follows :—

3 in 10 lines long.
—— 103 ,, lat. diam.
—-— 10} ,, ant. post. diam.

Order. TETRABRANCHIATA.
2. AMMONITES ACUCINCTUS, Strachey, Plate I. figs. 3, 3a.

A. testa discoidea, percompressa, complanata, subleevigata, obsolete
flexuoso-costata. Anfractibus complanatis, amplexantibus. Ventre
sub-acuto; juniori dentato. Umbilico parvo; marginibus rotundatis.
Apertura angusté hastata. Lobo superiori septorum longiori.

Diameter of shell linch 8 lines
if piioutecanionl Tee A fragment wanting the
Thickness ae body whorl.
With of outer whorl = ,55, of the diameter of the shell.

Nearly allied to several Liassic species, viz., 4. oxynotus, Quensted,
A. lynx, D’Orbigny, and A. Coynarti, D’Orbigny, this Ammonite is
readily distinguished by the peculiar palmate form of the saddles, and
the length of the superior lateral lobe as compared with the ventral
[ quasi dorsal] lobe. The denticulation of the keel is, as in A. lyna, only
apparent on the young shell, and becomes obsolete with age. The
sides are faintly marked with ribs curved like those of A. concavus.
Dr. Gerard’s collection contains two specimens of this species.

3. AMMONITES STRIGILIS,* n. s. Pl. III. figs. 1, 1a.

A. testa discoidea, costata, compressé tuberculaté. Anfractibus
amplexantibus, quadratis. Costis simplicibus, compressis, promi-
nentibus, anticé inclinatis; apud venter, valdé angulatis. Ventre

* There is some doubt whether this specimen be really from Spiti, though
thers is I think but little question that it comes from the north Himalayan for-
mation. It is one-half of a cut specimen, Another half specimen, (possibly the
fellow of the above,) is in the British Museum, its locality being also unknown.

1863. | On Dr. Gerard’s collection of Spiti fossils. 127

planato, costato. Umbilico angusto; lateribus leniter inclinatis, ro-
tundatis.
Diameter of shell 2 inches 1 line.
wr omouver whorl Lio’ jy. 22s,
Thickness Play
Width of outer whorl = ;°5 of the diameter of the shell.

A peculiar form, combining the characters of the Globosi and
Amalthet groups. The young shell is smooth, (in the single speci-
men described, to beyond the commencement of the body chamber,)
and the last half whorl ornamented with strong, simple compressed
ribs, inclined forwards from the umbilicus, and becoming more ele-
vated as they approach the ventral region, on the sides of which,
they rise almost into tubercles; then becoming less prominent as
they bend forward on each side of the median line, they form an an-
gle in the centre, being again elevated at the bend into a series of
flattened tubercles. The whorls are rounded in the young, squared
in the old shell. The sutures are very imperfectly seen: the saddles
appear to be squared in form, and symmetrically divided, and the
superior lateral lobe is probably longer than the ventral as in the
Globosi.

4, AMMONITES WaLuicut, Gray, Plate I. figs. 4, 4a, Plate III,
figs. 2, 3.

A. testa discoidea, compressa, transversim costata. Anfractibus
subcompressis, complanatis. Ventre angusto, excavato, levigato. Cos-
tis acutis, bifurcatis, haud tuberculatis. Umbilico lato, profundo.
Apertura oblongo-quadrata. Septis, lateraliter 5-lobatis.

Diameter of shell 1 inch 9 lines.
» of outer whorl 73 ,,
Thickness TPs
Width of outer whorl = 23, of the diameter of the shell.

This ammonite, of which there are two specimens in the collection,
is allied to A. Parkinsoni, Sowerby. The chief points of departure
from the latter species are;—the absence of tubercles; the greater
width of its whorls (33, instead of 2,4, of the diameter) ; and some
differences in the sutural lobes, the superior lateral being barely so
long as the ventral lobe, and having fewer ramifications than that

of A. Parkinsont. The two specimens before me differ somewhat

128 On Dr. Gerard’s collection of Spiti fossils. [No. 2

in the characters of the ribbing of the outer whorl, those of the inner
whorls being exactly similar: the specimens are of the same diameter,
but while that figured at Plate I. fig. 4, appears to be full grown,*
that figured at Plate III. fig. 2, is only a fragment, wanting the body
chamber, and the body-whorl of the former specimen, as is the case
with many Ammonites and Nautili, is thicker than the inner whorls
in proportion to their diameter, and exhibits a coarser and wider rib-
bing, the ribs being rather inclined backwards. A. fissus. Sow, from
the Oolites of Cutch, bears a general resemblance to the present
species, but it appears from the description to have the ribs conti-
nuous across the back.
5. AMMONITES OCTAGONUS, Strachey, Plate I. figs. 5a—e.

A. testa discoidea, compressa. Anfr. parum amplexantibus, rotun-
datis, lateraliter seriebus 3 tuberculis magnis ornatis, irregulariter
costatis. Apertura elliptica. Septis lateraliter 3-lobatis.

Allied to Ammonites Hugeni of Raspail, to which species I referred
it in the first instance. It is ornamented with three rows of promi-
nent tubercles connected by depressed and somewhat irregular ribs.

Only one fragment of this Ammonite is in Dr. Gerard’s collection,
viz., that figured. It does not allow cf my determining the spiral
proportions.

6. Ammonites NepaLensis, Gray, Plate I. figs. 6, 6a.

A. Nepalensis. Gray, Hardwicke’s Illustrations.

A. testa discoideaé, compressa, complanata, costata ; anfractibus per-
latis. Costis filiformibus bi-vel tri-furcatis. Ventre rotundato. Um-
bilico angusto. Apertura compressé elliptica. Septis ?

Diameter of shell 1 inch 5 lines.
» of outer whorl Shai
Thickness 63,,

2

Width of outer whorl = ,33, of the diameter of the shell.

An Ammonite of the Macrocephali type, but more compressed, orna-
mented with distinct filiform ribs, bifurcating or trifurcating about the
middle of the whorl, and arched forwards in the ventral region. The
sutures are not visible. A single specimen occurs in Dr. Gerard’s
collection. It is much smaller than Dr. Gray’s type, and has a
somewhat narrower umbilicus. Some large specimens were, however,

collected by Mr. Theobald.

* If so, however, the specimen is a small one, as one in Col. Strachey’s collec:
tion is nearly 4 inches in diameter and one in the British Museum not less than
6 inches.

1863. ] On Dr. Gerard’s collection of Spiti fossils. 129

7. AMMONITES TENUISTRIATUS, Gray.

A. tenuistriatus, Gray, Hardwicke’s illustrations.

A single cast containing a portion of the body whorl in which is
a beautiful cast of an Aptychus, is to be referred doubtfully to the
above species. The curvature of the ribs is similar to that of the
type, but the whorls are narrower and rather thicker. Judging from
the few specimens I have seen, A. tenwistriatus appears, however, to
be very variable in this respect, and I refer the Spiti specimen there-
fore provisionlly to this species.

8. AMMONITES BIPLEX, Sowerby, Plate II. fig. 5, Plate III. figs,

4, 4a—e, 5.
Ammonites. Everest. As. Res. Vol. XVIII. Pt. II. p. 114, Pl. 1.
figs 2, 3.

A. annulatus. Sowerby. Op. et. vol. cit. p. 278.

Several specimens of an Ammonite, which I cannot distinguish
from the well known Oolitic species above quoted, occur in the col-
lection, in black siliceous nodules. One large specimen measures 5
inches and 2 lines in diameter. Others less perfect, from 8 to 3%
inches. The width of the outer whorl varies from ;33, to ;3% in the
more typical specimens, and the aperture is almost orbicular, slightly
flattened at the sides. The ribs are sharp and numerous, and bifur-
eate very regularly at about 2 across the whorl. Most of them
have an occasional deep suleation, indicating the position of a pre-
vious mouth. The sutures correspond closely to that figured by M.
D’Orbigny in the Pal. Franeaise.

In addition to the above, two specimens, which at first I hesitated
to regard as the same species, have the ribs much more numerous,
and the whorls wider ; the outer whorl being 3.8, and ,4,', respective-
ly, of the diameter. That with the latter measurement is moreover
more compressed than the typical specimens, the thickness being
15 only. On consideration, however, I can see no good reason for
regarding these specimens as specifically distinct from the more typi-
eal. Their sutures are very similar, and as regards form, the narrow-
er whorled of the two differs but little from the type, while the
peculiar close set ribbing distinctly indicates the specific identity of
the two. One of these is figured at Plate IIT. figs. 4, 4a.

An important point to be noticed in comparing full grown speci-

130 On Dr. Gerard's collection of Spiti fossils. [No. 2,

mens of this species, and indeed of many of the Planulatz and some
other Ammonites, is that the last two or three sutures are frequently
closer than the preceding, and are more or less shortened and dis-
torted. In order, therefore, to establish a reliable comparison, and to
avoid erroneous specific distinctions, one of the older sutures should
be regarded as the standard. I give an illustration of this in figs.
4b and 4c of Plate III. the first of which represents the last suture
of the whorl, (that terminating the body chamber,) the second, the
sixth suture of the same specimen, counted backwards. I have ob-
served similar irregularities in A. inflatus, and many Nautili (e. g.
NV. Bouchardianus,) have the last one or two chambers considerably
narrower than those formed during earlier growth.

Fig. 5, Plate III. is the last suture of a specimen of the normal
variety of A. beplex, which I give as it is the only one visible on any
of my specimens.

9. AMMONITES TRIPLICATUS, Sowerby.

Two specimens differ from the preceding in having the ribs, es-
pecially those of the last whorl, trifureate. I have seen specimens
both from Niti and Spiti with fasciate ribs, but otherwise undistin-
guishable from A. biplex. I am inclined to doubt whether they be
other than varieties of that species.

10. AMMONITES TORQUATUS, Sow.? PI. III. figs. 6, 6a, 7, 7a, 8.

A. testa, discoidea, compressa, costata, laté umbilicaté. Anfracti-
bus rotundatis, depressis, convolutis. Costis filiformibus, rectis, anticé
inclinatis, apud 2 anfractuum diametris bifurcatis. Ventre laté ro-
tundato, costato. Apertura reniformi. Septorum lobis lateralibus 4.

a b
Diameter of shell, 1 inch 6 lines.
m of outer whorl, Dias 9 lines.
Thickness 7%, ineh 12

9?

Width of outer whorl = ,28, to 32, of the diameter of the shell.

This shell is distinguished from A. beplex chiefly by its depressed
whorls, and also by the greater width and comparative shortness of
the saddles and lobes. ‘The ornamentation of the shell is precisely
that of A, biplew, and it is indeed possible that A. torguatus may be
merely a variety of that species, but until specimens of intermediate
form, &c., have been discovered, the distinctions I have indicated are
too considerable to be disregarded.

1863. | On Dr. Gerard’s collection of Spiti fossils. 131

11. AMMONITHS SPITIENSIS, N. 8., Plate II. figs. 4, 4a, 40.
Diameter of shell, 2 inches 38 lines.
1. of outer whorl, 9
Thickness, Lbous
Width of outer whorl = 33, of the diameter of the shell.
This Ammonite bears some resemblance to the 4. planula of

29

D’Orbigny, but is distinguished by the following characters -—the
whorls of the Spiti species are somewhat narrower, the ribs more
flexuous, and arcuated towards the front instead of towards the rear
in the ventral area, and the shell is crossed at intervals of rather
more than half a whorl, by deep oblique sulcations bounded poste-
riorly by strong ribs. The sutures are identical with those of the
A. planula, except that the ventral and superior lateral lobes of the
Spiti fossil are equal in length, and it has but two minute accessory
lobes, instead of 3, as figured by M. D’Orbigny.

12. AMMONITES GUTTATUS, Strachey, Plate IV. figs. 1, la, 16.

A testa discoidea, compressa. Anfractibus rotundatis, apud umbi-
licum crassioribus, tuberculato-costatis, 3 sulcis obliquis notatis.
Costis numerosis, tenuibus, apud umbilicum 3, 4-fasciatis, apud ven-
ter, leniter anticé arcuatis. Ventre rotundato. Umbilico profundo,
lato, tuberculis 20 coronato. Apertura semilunari? Septorum lobis
lateralibus 6.

Diameter of shell, 2 inches 1 line.
» of outer whorl, 91,
Thickness, Jac

Width of outer whorl = 33, of the diameter of the shell.

Very closely allied to the preceding species, from which it is
distinguished chiefly by the characters of its sutures; the lobes
and saddles being 4 longer, and the saddles narrower than in
A. Spitiensis; while there are 4 conspicuous and 2 minute lateral
lobes instead of 3 of the former, as in the above species. There
are also some differences in the ornamentation, but how far
these are constant Iam unable to say. Thus, in 4. Spitiensis, the
ribs and tubercles are less numerous than in A. guttatus, and the sul-
ei of growth are three to each whorl, and continuous in the former
species, while in the latter there are barely 2 to the whorl. These
latter differences I consider, however, to be unimportant, and should
further specimens shew the sutures to be more variable than is usual

8

132 On Dr. Gerard’s collection of Spiti fossils. [No. 2,

in Ammonites of the same group, there would remain no good reason
for distinguishing the two forms in question.
13. Ammonires Hypnasis, n.s. Plate IV. figs. 2, 2a, 26.

A. testa discoidea, compressa, costaté. Anfractibus subquadratis,
parum amplexantibus. Costis valdis, rectis; nonnulis (plerumque
alternantibus) bifurcatis; medio ventre parum incisis, haud inter-
ruptis. Ventre planato. Umbilico magno: suturis impressis. Aper-
tura reniformi. Septorum lobis lateralibus 4.

Diameter of shell, 1 inch 10 lines.
* of outer whorl, Uae
Thickness, 84,5

Width of outer whorl = ,3), of the diameter of the shell.

Intermediate in form between A. communis, and A. Parkinsoni, this
shell is distinguished from the first by the mesial notching of the ribs
which indicates an approach to the Dentati, (Ornati of Von Buch) ;
and from the second by its continuous ribs, as well as by the inferior
number of its lobes and their greater equality in size. Some of the
ribs carry a small tubercle at the bifurcation, which occurs alternately
on the opposite sides of the whorl. The collection contains two small
specimens of this Ammonite, which are precisely similar to each
other, and a fragment of a larger specimen 12 inches in thickness.

14, Ammonites GERARDI, n.s. Plate II. figs. 6, 6a, 60.

A. testé subglobosa, levigata, angusté umbilicataé. Anfractibus
ventraliter subcompressis, amplexantibus ; senioribus, radiatim laté
undulatis. Ventre rotundato. Umbilico parvo, profundo. Apertu-
ra trigona, apud dorsum valde excavata.

a b
Diameter of shell 2 inches. 3+ inches.
Fe of outer whorl 1 inch. ee
Thickness es 2 lines. 14
Width of outer whorl = 55°, of the diameter of the aie

This Ammonite belongs to a group largely represented in the
Triassic beds of St. Cassian, and of which one species only, A. ster-
nalis, Von Buch, is described by M. D’Orbigny, Quensted and others
from the Upper Lias of France and Germany.* ‘To this species, A.
Gerardi bears much external resemblance, but the sutural ramifica-
tions of the Spiti fossil prove it to be without doubt a distinct spe-

* Several species occur in the Cretaceous rocks of S. India.

1863. ] On Dr. Gerard’s collection of Spiti fossils. 133

cies. Moreover, from such fragments of shell as remain on one of
our specimens, it appears that this was smooth in A. Gerardi as in
the Triassic forms, whereas that of A. sternalis is ornamented ex-
ternally with fine ribs.

The ventral lobe of the septa of A. Gerardi is extremely short,
barely half as long as the superior lateral lobe, and is divided almost
its entire length. The lateral lobes are nearly equal and fan-shaped
at the extremity, and the saddles simple and compressed in form.

Four specimens are in the Gerard collection; one of the smaller, a
distorted specimen, was figured in the Asiatic Researches; another
is here represented. These are both young and do not shew the
radiate undulations which characterize the adult shell.*

15. CrratiresP Himatayanos, n. s. Plate II. figs. 7, 7a.

C. testa discoidea, compressa, carinata, tuberculato-costata. An-
fractibus amplexantibus, complanatis. ‘Tuberculis internis apud 4
anfractuum 10: externis apud peripheriam 20. Costis haud promi-
nentibus, incequalibus, plerumque bi vel tri-furcatis. Ventre anguste
earinato, haud suleato. Umbilico parvo; marginibus rotundatis,
Apertura angulateé ovata, anticé complanata.

Diameter of shell, Jinch 6 lines.
4 of outer whorl 9
Thickness, Ces
Width of outer whorl = ,°° of the diameter of the shell.

100

9?

The specimen of this shell in the Spiti collection, although in a
very fair state of preservation, does not present so clean a surface on
that part on which alone the sutures are visible, as could be desired
for the satisfactory determination of the genus. There is, however,
no trace of any foliation on the saddles, so far as they can be seen,
while the lobes of one part are distinctly dentated like those of the
typical Ceratites. It is clearly distinct from C. Jaquemonti, Von
Buch, the only known Himalayan species of the genus, which accord-
ing to its discoverer, whose name it bears, was found associated with
Ammonites biplex, and a number of other Oolitic forms of Ammonites.

In form and ornamentation, C. Himalayanus, is closely allied to C.
Wodosus, the type of the genus, but differs in its narrower ventral
region and keeled periphery.

* The largest specimens were only discovered after the plates had been finished.

s 2

134 On Dr. Gerard’s collection of Spiti fossils. [No. 2,

Class. GASTEROPODA.

16. TURRITELLA MONTIUM, n. s. Plate I. fig. 7.
Turritella? As. Res. Vol. XVIII. Part 2, p. 114, Pl. I. fig. 12.
S. testa crass4, conica, turrita. Spira brevi, angulo 28°. Anfracti-

bus angulatis, medio valde bicarinatis, superne obliquis, planatis:
ultimo ad basin depressé rotundato. Suturis valdé excavatis. Aper-
tura circulari.

Length of fragment, linch 9 lines.
Total length of spire restored, 2 inches 9 ,,
Width of last whorl, 1 inch.

» of peristome, Sih:

An obtuse thick-shelled species, with the upper and lower surface
of the whorls bevelled towards the suture, ornamented with two
spiral keels, the lower of which is the most prominent.

The collection contains three fragments of this species, the largest
of which is figured in the Asiatic Researches, loc. cit. and also in
the accompanying Plate I.

Judging from its appearance (mineral character) it is from the same
beds as the Ceratite and Ammonites Gerardi.

17. Pxievrotomarta, sp.? Plate IV. figs. 3, 3a.

Some fragments of casts of a small turretted species with sub-
angulated whorls, evidently belong to this genus. The upper surface
of the whorls is flattened and oblique, the base convex, and marked
on the cast with 4 equidistant ridges, the interval between the pos-
terior ridge, and the keel being twice as great as that between the
ridges. Aperture sub-pentangular, rounded in front.

18. PLEUROTOMARIA, sp. ?

A flat Solarium shaped cast, much distorted by pressure, and water-
worn, evidently distinct from the above.

Class. CONCHIFERA.
19. ASTARTE MAJOR, Sowerby.

Unio? and Trigonia? Herbert and Everest, Gleanings in Science,
Vol. III. p. 272, Plate XVII. figs, 4a, b.

1863. | On Dr. Gerard's collection of Spiti fossils. 135

Unio? Everest, As. Res. Vol. XVIII. Part 2, p. 114, Plate II.
figs. 26, a, 6, c.

Astarte planata, Sowerby, Op. cit. p. 278.

Astarte major, Sowerby, Geol. Trans. 2nd series, Vol. V. Plate
LXI. fig. 1.

This species, three specimens of which oceur in Dr. Gerard’s col-
lection, is undoubtedly identical with the Cutch species named as
above by Mr. Sowerby. The specimens are smaller than those from
Cutch, but in form, only differ in that the anterior end is less trun-
cated, and the length of the shell is somewhat less proportionally,
than in the specimen figured in the Geological Transactions, which is
stated to be somewhat wider (7. e. in the present terminology, long-
er) than the average. The measurements of our largest specimen
are as follows :—

Length 2 inches 3 lines.
Height; Lanch)i%on),
Thickness 1

9

20. CYPRINA? TRIGONALIS, n. s. Plate IV. figs. 4, 5.

C, testa trigono-cordiformi, crassa, sub-inflata, striata, anticé ro-
tundata, posticé angulata, obtusé carinataé. Area posteriori levigata.
Umbonibus prominentibus.

Length J inch.
Height 10 lines.

A small trigonal shell, chiefly occurring as casts, and of somewhat
doubtful genus. It is associated with Avicula echinata in sandstone.

21. NuvucULA CUNEIFORMIS, Sowerby.

Modiola. Herbert, Glean. in Science, Vol. I1I. p. 272, Pl. XVIT.
figs. 5a, 5, ec.

Modiola. Everest, As. Res. Vol. XVIII. Part 2, p. 114, Pl. II.
figs. 28, a, b, e.

Nucula. Sowerby, As. Res. Vol. cit. p. 275.

Nucula cuneiformis, Sowerby, Geol. Trans. 2nd Series, Vol. V.
Plate XXII. fig. 4.

Most of the specimens of this shell are much crushed, and the
valves being united, do not admit of examination of the hinge. A
small cast, however, apparently identical, but probably from a differ-
ent bed, shews that the shell is, as surmised by Mr. Sowerby, a Ww-

136 On Dr. Grard’s collection of Spiti fossils. [No. 2,

cula. Allowing for the distortion of the specimens, the form so
closely resembles that of WV. cwneiformis from the Cutch Oolites that
I cannot hesitate to regard them as specifically identical.

Length 1linch 1] line.

Height 7 lines.

Thickness 7 ,, approximately.

22. CucuULLmA virGaTA, Sowerby.

Arca. T“erbert, Glean. in Se. Vol. III. p. 272, Pl. XVII. fig. 6.

Arca. Everest, As. Res. Vol. XVIII. Part 2, p. 114, Plate II.
fig. 27.

Cucullea virgata. Sowerby, Geol. Trans. 2nd Series, Vol. V. Pl.
XXII. fig. 1.

The specimens of this shell are much crushed, so that their form
is not accurately determinable, but it appears to be identical with
the Cutch species, and is characterised by similar sharp radiating
ribs, with lines of growth strongly marked towards the margins.

23. InocERAMUS?

A large concentrically-undulated shell, in bad preservation, ap-
pears to belong to this genus. Also a smaller fragment, marked
with deep broad concentric furrows distinct from the above. The
specimens are insufficient to admit of specific description.

24. MonoriIs CONCENTRICUS, n. s. Plate LV. figs. 6, 6a, 7.

M. test&é obliquo-pyriformi, inzquivalvi, anticé excavata, posticé
rotundata. Valva sinistra inflata, concentricé undulata; umbone
prominenti incurvataé. Valva dextra convexa, obliqué orbiculari;
margine cardinali recta ; concentricé striata, superné angusté incisa.

Length about 1 inch 3 lines.
Width Beas
Thickness ues

In form, and in the sculpturing of the left valve, much resembling
Inoceramus concentricus of the Gault. The right valve resembling
that of an Anomia in form, with a deep linear notch just under the
hinge line. The specimens are not very perfect. They are embed-
ded in a black siliceous stone, similar to that of the nodules in which

the Ammonites are enclosed, They are associated with Belemnites
Sulcatus.

1863. | On Dr. Gerard’s collection of Spiti fossils. 137

25. AVICULA ECHINATA ? Sowerby.

Some specimens of sandstone are full of the valves of an Avicuwla,
which appears to be identical with this widely ranging Oolitic species.
None of them are sufficiently perfect to enable me to identify them
with certainty, but the form of the ornamented valve, and the sculp-
turing, so closely resemble those of the type specimens, that there is
at least great probability of their identity. If any thing, the Spiti
specimens are somewhat more orbicular than those of Hurope, but
they vary somewhat in form, unless I have confounded two distinct
species ; a question, which the state of the specimens does not enable
me to decide satisfactorily.

26. MytTiILus MyTILOIDEA, n.s. Pl. IV. fig. 8.
M. testa semiovata, elongata; anticé truncata, angulate planata,
recta ; posticé rotundata ; concentricé striata, haud costata.
Length 2 inches.
Height 1 ,,
This shell has precisely the form of the common Mytilus edulis.
The umbo of the only specimen in the collection, is wanting.

Sub-kingdom. ANNULOSA.
Class). HECHINODERMATA.

27. Saumnta? PI. IV. fig. 9.

An internal cast of a depressed spheroidal Hehinid with narrow
ambulacra, pores in simple pairs, broad interambulacra with five or
six plates in each row, and a very large circular disc, the plates of
which are not however distinguishable. As regards form it might be
either a Cidaris or one of the Salenide, but the size of the disc is
such that it can only be referred to the latter family. It seems
improbable from its association with Oolitic forms that it should
belong to the genus to which I have referred it provisionally (all the
known Salenias being cretaceous), but the dise is much larger than
any known species of the oolitic Acrosalenta.

LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS.
Plate I.

Figs. 1, 2 a—c, Phragmacone and guard of Belemnites sulcatus,
Miller.
» 9, 38@ Ammonites acucinctus, Strachey.

On Dr. Gerard’s collection of Spiti fossils. [No. 2,

4 Ammonites Wallichii, Gray ; a, suture.

5, a—b, Ammonites octagonus, Strachey ; c. suture.
6, 6a, Ammonites Nepalensis, Gray.

7, Turritella ? montium, Blanford.

Plate Il.

. 1, la—é, 2, 8, Ammonites communis, Sow. See note, p. 124.

4, 4a, Ammonites Spitiensis, Blanford ; 6. suture.
5, Suture of Ammonites biplex, Sow.

6, 6a, Ammonites Gerardi, Blanf. Sep. 6. suture.
7, 7a, Ceratites Himalayanus, Blanf.

‘Plate IT.

. 1, la, Ammonites Strigilis, Blanford.

2,3, Ammonites Wallichii, Gray.
4, 4a, Ammonites biplex, Sowerby ; 6, ¢ first and sixth sutures
of the same Ammonite.

5, Suture of another specimen.

6, 6a, 7, 7a.—Ammonites torquatus, Sowerby.
8, Suture of the above.

Plate IV.

. 1, la, Ammonites guttatus, Strachey ; 0. suture.

2, 2a, Ammonites Hyphasis, Blanford ; 6. suture.
3, 3a, Pleurotomaria.

4, 5, Cyprina ? trigonalis, Blanford.

6, 6a, 7, Monotis concentricus, Blanford.

8, Mytilus mytiloidea, Blanford.

9, Salenia ?P

————$— Lees

SEUSS

=

ts

H.F. Blanford, de}

LITH: BY H.M. SMITH, SURV: GENL'S OFFICE, CALCUTTA, 1861

PLM

H.F Blanford, del.

LITH: BY HM. SMITH,SURV: GENL'S OFFICE , CALCUTTA,1861

tea

i
¢

we

FU Lif

PLAV.

1863. | Remarks on the Taxila Bactro-Pali Inseription. 133°

temarks on the Baotro-Paut Inscription from Taxtia.—By
Major-General A. CUNNINGHAM.

Thirty years have elapsed since the first Bactro-Pali inscriptions
were discovered by Ventura, Court, and Masson,—and during that
long period but little progress has been made in their decipherment
Certain titles such as Maharaja and Chhatrapa, or “ King” and
“ Satrap,” and particular terms, such as Bhagavata S’arira, or “ relics
of Buddha,” mdéa-pita, or “mother and father,” puwéra, “son,” and
vthdra, “a monastery,’ have long been known; but the greater
portion of these records still continued to baffle all attempts at any
satisfactory rendering of their contents. Several of these inscriptions
are dated, and so far back as January 1848 I was the first to make
out the Hindu months of Srdvana and Chaitra, and during last year
I succeeded in reading the names of the Macedonian months, Arte-
misios and Apellaios. ‘The figured dates, however, still remained a
riddle ; but the recent discovery of Mr. Roberts’s Taxila inscription,
with its date written as well as figured, in characters much better
defined than is usual in these cursive records has enabled Professor
Dowson to unravel the mystery of the Bactrian numerical figures. I
am indebted to the kindness of Mr. Grote for the copy of this
inscription, which has been sent out to India by Mr. Thomas, with
the avowed object of obtaining independent translations in anticipa-
tion of the receipt of Professor Dowson’s rendering of the text.* The
following is a version of such parts of this important record as I
have been able to make out during the short period that I have had
it before me. Although this rendering is imperfect, yet I would fain
hope that it may still be of some service towards the object which
Mr. Thomas had in view, when he forwarded the inscription to
India. My discovery of the Bactro-Pali symbol used for the pre-
fixed r,in such important words as purvva, sarvva, and dchdryya,
and in the names of the Macedonian month Artemisios, and the
_ Hindu month Kartika, seems to me to be of sufficient value to war-
rant the publication of this translation, as it may assist more com-
petent scholars hereafter in rendering versions of other inscriptions.

* Vide vol. xxxi. p. 532.

140 Remarks on the Taxila Bactro-Pals Inscription. |No. 2, —

Transliteration.

Line 1. Samvats'araye athasatatimae, 20, 20, 20, 10, 4, 4, (== 78)
mahardyasa mahatasa MOGASA, Panemasa mdsasa, divase pan-
chame, 4, 1, (= 5) etdye purvvdye, Chhaharasa (line 2) Chukhsasa
cha, Chhatrapasa LIAKO, KUSULUKO nédma, atasa patropati (?)
** Takhas'ildye nagara utarena pacham des'o Chhema ndma atra (line
3) s/apatiko aprativadita BHAGAVATA S/aKA-Muntsa 8 ariram patidha-
rati (7) Sangha Rachite (na) sarvva Budhinam puyae, mata-pitaram
puya, yuta (line 4) Chhatrapasa saputraddrasa AYU-BAULA-VARDHIKA
bhrdtara sarvva cha, satiga ** dharasa cha, puya, mahatana (7) pati-
patikasa *** —(line 5) Rohini gatrena ya imati Sanghdrdma Kamika.
On the back, Patipasa Chhatrapa Liaka.

TRANSLATION.

In the seventy-eighth year, 78, (in the reign) of the king, the
great MOGA, in the month of Panemos, on the fifth day, 5, on this
aforesaid date, (in the time) of LIAKA, Satrap of Chhahdra and
Chukhsa (? Hazara and Chach, or Chach-Hazara of the present day)

in the north-western district of Zakhasilanagara, in (the
village) named Chhema, (this monument) was made to hoid relies of
the matchless teacher, Bhagavata Sakya Muni, by Buddha Rakshita,
for the benefit of all Buddhists, for the benefit of his mother and
father, also for the benefit of the Satrap, together with the wife of
his son AYU-BALA-VARDDHAKA, and all her brothers, and * * *
dhara ; also for the benefit of-—(not made out down to the last two
words) the monastery of Nava Kamika.

Notes on the inscription.

I. On the date. The number of the year is written thus, atha-
satatimae, which is evidently the Sanskrit ashta-saptatitama, or eight
and seventy. The unit number also occurs, both written and figured,
in the year 28, in Masson’s Hidda inscription, and again in my
Yusufzai inscription from Ohind, in the day of the month. In figures
the date of the year is made up of six cyphers, namely 3 twenties,
plus 1 ten, plus 2 fours, which together amount to 78. The number
of the day of the month is formed in a similar manner, thus, 4 plus
1 =5, which being preceded by the word panchame, or “ fifth,”
leaves no doubt of the correctness of the value assigned to the sym-
bol x. The name of the month is Panemos, which was the ninth of
the Macedonian calendar. This is preceded by the words Mahdrdya-

1863. | Remarks on the Taxila Bactro-Pali Inscription. 141

sa mahatasa Moaasa, which would appear to give the name and
titles of the reigning king. The first word I take to be the same as
Maharaja, as both terms are used indifferently in the Kapurdigiri
inscription. The second word, mahata, or “great,” is well known
from the coins as the title of all the later kings both Greek and
Scythian. The third word therefore can only be a proper name,
which I take to be that of the reigning king. We have a similar
mode of expression in my Yusufzai inscription from Panjtar. In this
record the month is the Hindu Sravana, during the reign of the king
of the Gushan tribe (Mahdrdyasa Gushdnasa). The name of the
king most probably followed the title, but has been lost by the break-
ing of the stone. I think it probable that the great MOGA of this
inscription is the same as the great MOA, or MAUA, of the coins.
If the real name was MAWA, it might have been written indifferent-
ly either as Joa, or Moga, as we find in the parallel case of the name
of Gondophara, which is written both Undopherras and Gondophares
on the coins.

Now the coins of Moas prove, by their superior execution, that he
must have been one of the principal leaders of the Indo-Scythian
tribes who overthrew the Greek power in India. Indeed the priority
of Moas to all other Indo-Scythian Princes, whose coins we possess,
is so clear, that it has been admitted at once by all who have examin-
ed the subject; but the precise date of his accession to power is still
doubtful, although the period may be fixed with some certainty with-
in the narrow limit of about thirty years. For this event the year
100 B. C. has been assigned by H. H. Wilson, and 120 B. C. by
Professor Lassen, while my own chronological table, which was
framed some twenty years ago, places it in 130 B.C. The mean of
these three periods is 116 B.C. which is very close to the date of
126 B. C. assigned by the Chinese for the conquest of Kipin, or Ko-
phene, by the great horde of the Su, or Sakas. Now if we suppose
that Moas, or Moga, was the leader ofa branch of the Sw which set-
tled in the Panjab, we may fix his date at a few years later than 126
B. C. or in about 116 B. C. as just suggested. According to this
supposition the era in which the Taxila inscription is dated will be
somewhere about 60 years earlier than 116 B. C. or B. C. 176; and
the date of the inscription will be 176—78=98 B.C. Now as the
occupation of Transoxiana by the Sw is stated by the Chinese to have

in 4

142 Remarks on the Tartla Bactro-Pali Inscription. [ No. 2,

taken place in the first half of the second century before Christ, it
seems to me not improbable that the era in which the Taxila plate
is dated, may refer to this particular event. As the year 163 B. C.
is quoted by Lassen from the Chinese authorities as the actual date of
this conquest, I think that it may be accepted for the present as the
most probable approximation to the era used by the Indo-Scythian
Sakas. By adopting this starting point, the date of the Taxila in-
scription will be 163—78=85 B. C.

In a recent number of this Journal, 1862, p. 425, mention is made
of two small silver coins belonging to my cabinet, which are close
imitations of the Oboli of Eukratides. The legend is in two lines
* * OKO KOZOYAO; and as there is just sufficient room for two
letters before OKO, I think it highly probable that the full name will
turn out hereafter, when more perfect specimens are obtained, to be
ALOKO, which is almost the same as that of the Satrap mentioned in
the present inscription. These coins were found near Rawal Pindi,
in company with a number of different types of Hyrkodes, and of a
few of the barbarous imitations of the coins of Alexander and Seleu-
kos. They appear to me to be about the same age as the coins of
Kozola Kadaphes, or about 90 B. C.

But there is another name in the Taxila inscription, if I have read
it rightly, which will also serve to fix the date of the record in the
early part of the century immediately preceding the Christian era.
According to my reading the name of the Satrap’s son is Ayu-Bala-
Varddhaka, “the strengthener of life,’ which possibly may have
been the full name of Azas, or Aya, as he is called in the native
legends of his coins. As Liaka was the Satrap of king Moas, there
is no improbability in making the Satrap’s son Ayu the successor of
Moas on the throne of Taxila.

It now remains to fix the date which should be assigned to the
Gushén eva. The leader of this tribe, which is called also Kushan,
Khushan, and Koran, was certainly Kozola Kadaphes, as in the in-
scriptions of all his coins he calls himself king of the Kushan, or
Khushan, whilst on some of them his name is associated with that
of Hermeus, who is allowed by all numismatists to have been the
last of the Greek Princes. Kozola Kadphises was therefore beyond
all doubt the subverter of the Greek power in Kabul. The date of
this event is assigned to 85 B. C. by Professor Lassen, and also by

1863. | Remarks on the Paxila Bactro-Pali Inscription. 143

H. H. Wilson, while my own chronological table places it somewhat
earlier in about 105 B.C. ‘The mean of these dates would be about
90 B. C. which may be accepted as the approximate date of this
event. There is, however, another date connected with the history
of the Gushan tribe which has perhaps even a stronger claim to be
considered as the starting point of their national era. This is the
date on which the king of the Gushan tribe subjected the other four
tribes of the Yuchi, an event which, according to the Chinese, took
place about 100 years after their first settlement in Bactria, or about
26 B.C. The king of the Gushdn tribe is then said to have con-
quered Kabul, Gandhara and Arachosia, to which India was after-
wards added by his successor. Now according to our present know-
ledge, the conquest of India can be assigned only to Kanishka, and
his brother Hushka, or Huvishka,* whose coins are still found in
great numbers on the banks of the Ganges and Jumna. The father
of these two Princes would therefore have been the consolidator of
the Yuchi power by the subjection of the other four tribes. But
who was their father? In settling this point we have little, or no-
thing to guide us, except the inferences derivable from the coins.
On these, however, all the authorities are unanimous in making Hima
Kadphises the immediate predecessor of Kanishka and his brothers.
It is probable therefore that he was also the father of these princes.
The main objection to this assumption is the fact that Hima Kadphi-
ses does not inscribe the name of the Gushdn tribe on his coins, as
was done by his predecessor Kozola Kadphises, as well as by his suc-
cessors, Kanerki, Hoverke, and Bazwano. But as Hima Kadphises
does not inscribe the name of any tribe on his coins, there is a strong
probability that he belonged to the same tribe as his immediate suc-
cessors. By Professor Lassen, Hima Kadphises is assigned to 24
B. C.; by H. H. Wilson to the beginning of the Christian era, and
by my own chronological table to 60 B. C. In fixing this date, I was
influenced by the opinion that the consolidation of the Yuehi power
under the king of the Gushdn tribe, and the subsequent overthrow of
the power of the Sw, or Sakas, were not improbably connected with
the defeat of the Sakas by Vikramaditya in B. C.57. I think still

* Mr. Thomas has ascribed to Babu Rajendralal Mitra the suggestion that
Huvishka of the Mathura and Wardak inscriptions is the same as the Hushka of

Kashmir history. The suggestion was mine, and was published by me in the
note which first made known the name of Huvishka,

144. Remarks on the Taxila Bactro-Palt Inscription. |No. 2,

that this conjecture is a plausible one, and I am therefore inclined to
assign the easily remembered date of 57 B. C. as the approximate
period of the consolidation of the Yuchi power under the Gushdn
tribe. This important event is also noticed by Trogus Pompeius,
who says that the Asiant gave kings to the Tochari.* The Asiani I
take to be the same as Strabo’s Pasiani, and both the same as the
Gushan, Kushan, and Khushan of the coins, and the Kuei-shwang of
the Chinese authors.

I will now apply these eras to the other dated inscriptions which
are accessible to me.

No. 1.—Manikyala inscription of General Court ; see Thomas’ Prin-
sep’s Hssays, Vol. I. Plate IX. The second line opens with the date
as follows: San, 10, 4, 4 (== 18), etaye purvvaye, Maharajasa Gu-
shina * * * and the last line gives the month and day, thus: Karti-
kasa mdse divase 20. “ In the 18th year, on this aforesaid date, (in
the reign) of king Kanishka of the Gushan tribe,—in the month of
Kartika, on the 20th day.” Accepting B.C. 57 as the approximate
period of the aggrandizement of the Gushan power, the date of this
inscription of the reign of Kanishka will be 89 B. C. The local
Satrap’s name which occurs certainly twice and perhaps three times
in this record, I read doubtfully as -Hovedarta, of which the third
letter is purely conjectural.

No. 2.—Hidda inscription, No. 13, Tope, Masson :—See Ariana An-
tiqua, Plate of Alphabet, p. 262—Samvatsaraye athavis' atihi 20,4,4 (=
28) mdse Apilaesa ekavisatihi Di. 20.1 (= 21). “ In the twenty-eighth
year, 28, in the month of Apellaios, on the twenty-first day, 21.”
There is nothing in this inscription to show in which of the two eras
it is dated ; but as the earlier era of 163 B. C. would refer this record to
B. C. 185 while the forms of the letters, even allowing for the cur-
sive nature of the writing, seem to me to be of later date than the
characters on the coins of the first Saka kings Moas and Azas, I con-
clude that the Gushdn era is that which has been employed. The
date of this inscription will therefore be 57—28 = 29 B.C. The
word s’arira (relics) occurs shortly after the date, and I observe the
word dharma twice in the lower line, which ends with puyae, the lo-
cal form of the well known word punya.

No, 3.—The Wardak inscription, of which a translation has been

* Reges Thocharorum Asiani.

1863. | Remarks on the Taxila Bactro-Pali Inscription. 145

given in this Journal by Babu Rajendralal Mitra. No doubt the
general scope of the record has been determined by this first attempt
at a complete translation ; but I must demur to the Babu’s reading
of nearly every proper name, except those of Bhagavata and Huvish-
ka, which had been previously deciphered by myself. I have other
objections to make to the values assigned to several of the letters,
but I will here notice only the words read as pushae and asanthdnam,
which should be puyae (for punya) and achdrydnam. Both of these
words will be referred to hereafter. This inscription opens with the
date as follows :—San 20, 20, 10, 1, (== 51) mdsa Artamisiyasa* hi,
10, 4,1, (=15). “In the year 5], in the month of Artemisios, on
the 15th ”. One letter only is doubtful, although according
to the form given to it in the copy, it should be ste, or perhaps vrz. A

similar character occurs again between the words Vihdra and Bhaga-
vata. The true form of the syllable wri occurs on my beautiful little
bilingual silver coin of Vrishni Raja, and I at first thought that the
word might be wrzhi, or vridi, for vriddht, and that it might refer to the
fortnight of the increasing moon. Butif I have read the date of the
Hidda inscription correctly, the days of the Macedonian months must
have been numbered up to 30, as was done by the Macedonians them-
selves. If we might read dwitt, or batz, or some word meaning “ second,”
then the month would be Artemisios the second, which was the name
given to Daisios by Alexander the Great shortly before his death.

No. 4.— Yusufzai inscription from Ohind, Cunningham—See Jour.
As. Soc. Bengal, 1854, and Thomas’s Prinsep, Plate X. fig. 2. This
inscription opens with the date—San, 20, 20, 20, 1(==61) Chetrasa
Mahasa Divasa athamiti, 4, 4 (== 8), “In the 61st year, in the
month of Chaitra, on the 8th day” (=A. D. 4).

No. 5.— Yusufzai inscription from Panjtar, Cunningham—See both
plates just quoted. This inscription also opens with the date. San
100 (?) 20, 1, 1 (= 122), Sravanasa masa sudi prathame, 1, Mahara-

jasa Gushinasa Ra (or Ta) ————- “Inthe year 122 (?) on the
first of the waxing moon of Sravana (in the reign) of the king of
the Gushdn .’ The value of the figure for hundreds is doubt-

ful; but as the power of the Awet-shwang is said by the Chinese not
to have lasted beyond the third century, this figure is most probably
the symbol for 100. I confess, however, that in a Bactro Pali in-
scription dated after the beginning of the Christian era I should have

146 Remarks on the Taxila Bactro-Paii Inscription. {No. 2,

expected to have found the Bactrian letter 4, the initial of hat, or
“hundred,” used as the symbol for 100, as we find in the western
cave inscriptions, and on the Gupta coins.

In the Taxila inscription the words etaye purvvaye, “ on this afore-
said” (date), follow immediately after the date ; and I think that the
same words follow the date in Court’s Manikyala inscription. But
in the Mathura inscriptions the form of expression is always asya
purvvaye, as well as in the two copperplate inscriptions of king Has-
tina, published by Professor Hall. In another inscription, however,
which I have lately discovered in the ruins of the ancient Srdvastz,
the form of etaye purvvaye is used. Unfortunately the date of this
inscription is lost, with the exception of the cypher for 10, followed
by another cypher which could only have been a 4 or a 5, and which
together no doubt formed the day of the month. The date of this
inscription, however, is the only part that is lost. It is a short re-
cord on the pedestal of a colossal statue of Buddha the teacher form-
ed of the red sandstone of Fatehpur-Sikri, and therefore most proba-
bly executed at Mathura. The name of Sdvasti is mentioned in this
inscription, as well as the significant Buddhist terms, Zrepitaka, Bo-
dhi-Satwa and Bhagavata. The concluding words are

Kosambakutiya adchdryydndm Sarvastidinam parigrahe,

that is “the accepted gift of the Sarvastidina teachers of the Kosam-
bakuti,” or upper storied hall named Kosambakuti. I found the ruins
of Sravasti, as I had already anticipated in a letter to Mr. Bayley
written before I visited the place, in the ruined city now called Sé-
het-Mdahet,—Sthet being the city, and Mdhet the great Jetavana
monastery adjoining it. In Sdhet I recognize the most corrupt form
of Sdwet, for the Pali Sdwatthz, which was the spoken form of the
Sanskrit Srdvasti or Sdvasti. Iam happy to say that, on my recom-
mendation the Governor-General has been pleased to direct that this
important inscription shall be forwarded to the Society’s Museum in
Calcutta, and, if possible, the statue also.

T have noticed this Sravasti inscription for the purpose of illus-
trating the Wardak inscription, of which the last line has been read
by Babu Rajendralal Mitra as

esha vihdra asanthdnam mahdsanghigana patigaha.
By my discovery of the true form of the prefixed r, 1 am able to
yead the third word as dchdrydnam, by which simple change this pas-

1863.| Remarks on the Bactro-Pali Taxila Inscription. 147

sage of the record becomes quite clear and satisfactory, and in accord-
ance with the concluding passage of the Sravasti inscription just
noticed, The translation of this passage is as follows, “ This monastery
is the accepted gift of the Mlahdsanghika teachers.” The Mahd-
sanghikas were one of the principal Buddhist sects, the followers of
Kasyapa; and the Sarvdstidinas (or Sarvdstivddas) were another
numerous sect, the followers of Adhula, the son of Sakya Sinha.

I may notice here that the oft-recurring word read pushae by Ba-
bu Rajendralal Mitra is properly puyae, for punya, the y being formed
with a rounded head instead of the usual pointed one.

Il.—On the place. I rvead the words Chhaharasa Chukhsasa cha
as giving the name of the district of which Liaka was the Satrap,
and in which the monument was situated. Chhahara, or rather
Tshahara as it would be pronounced on the Indus, is very probably
the original name of the modern Hazara, and Chukhsa of the modern
Chach. These two names are always joined together in speaking as
Chach-Hazdra, and it is certain that the inscription was found in the
district which is called by this joint name. With regard to the situ-
ation of the village J think that there must be some mistake in the
copy of the inscription which reads utarena prachu, “in the North
Hast,’ whereas Hasan Abdal, the place of discovery, is to the North
West of Manikyala, or Taxila. By dropping the tail of the py, which
forms the letter 7, the word prachu will become pacham, or West, and
the description of the place will thus accord with the actual position of
the site of discovery.

III.—On the Satrap’s name. I have ventured to translate the
term Kusuluka, as ‘‘ Red,” because I find that there are no less than
three kings of the name of Kadphises, who are severally distinguish-
ed as Kozola, Kara, and Hoemo (or Hima). Where there were so
many princes of the same name, it became a matter of absolute
necessity to distinguish the one from the other by some characteris-
tic epithets. In these names therefore I read the simple distinctive
epithets of Kazal, J33, Red,—Kara, %,3, Black—and Handw or
Handdl, 355® White. The last term is of course connected with
the Sanskrit Hima, and Tibetan Hyun, both of which mean snow.
In Greek the name is written OOHMO, but in the native character it
is simply Hima, which I translate as the “ White,” or the “ Fair.”
Now as all three of these epithets are pure Turki words, the princes

U

148 Remarks on the Bactro-Pali Taxila Inscription. |No. 2,

who made use of them must have been of Turki race. This is of
importance in the case of Hima Kadphises as we have no other di-
rect proof as to whether he belonged to the Su or Sakas, or to the
Yuchi, or TLochdri. I will now describe the coins of these three
kings.

Ist. Kozola Kadphizes. The coins of this Prince are of three
kinds, of which those bearing the name of Hermeus in the Greek
legend are most probably the earliest. This Greek legend is as fol-
lows BASIAEOS STHPOS SY EPMAIOY, which I look upon as being a
blundered copy of BASIAEQS, SOTHPOS EPMAIOY by a native artist
who was ignorant of the Greek characters. This legend will therefore
refer to king Hermeus himself. The native legend on the reverse
has the name of Awula Kapsa, with the title of Kushdna Yatugasa,
or king of the Kushan tribe. This coin I look upon as having been
struck by Kadphizes during the lifetime of Hermeus, a practice
which we know to have been customary in these provinces. On
another coin of the same size and types we read the same native le-
gend, but with the Greek inscription altered to KOZOYAO KAA®IZOY
KOPCE A—that is struck in the name of Kadphises alone. The third
kind of this Prince’s money is a small copper coin, of stiff but neat
execution, bearing the Greek legend of KOZOAA KAAA®EC XOPAN
CY ZA@OY, and on the reverse the native legend of Awjula Kaphsasa
Sacha Dharmapidasa Khushdnasa Yatuvasa.

The coins of Kara-Kadphises are of the well known Bull and Ca-
mel types, which are always of rude execution and in bad preserva-
tion. The Greek legends I can make nothing of, but the native le-
gends appear to be always the same, although the words are disposed
in two different ways. The whole of the native legend I have not
yet succeeded in making out satisfactorily, but I have deciphered the
beginning and the ending beyond all doubt.

Maharajasa Rajatirajasa Deva-putrasa —Kara Kapsasa
* (coin) of the king, the king of the kings, the God descended
Kara Kadphises.” 'The undeciphered portion of the legend consists

of three letters, and may possibly be Aushdna.

The coins of Hima Kadphises are the well known gold and copper
pieces which bear the same unvarying legends in Greek and Bactro
Pali characters. On the gold coins the Greek legend is simply
BACIAEYC OOHMO KAA®ICHC, which on the copper coins is

1863.] Remarks on the Bactro-Pali Taxila Inscription. 149

expanded into BACIAEYC BACIAEoN CoTHP METAC OOHMO
KAA®ICHC. The native legend, which is the same on both coins, is
as follows—

Maharajasa Rajatirajasa Sarvva-logai-s'urasa Mahi-surasa Hime
Kadphisasa tradata, “ (Coin) of the king, the king of kings, the lord of
the Universe, the supreme lord, Hima Kadphises, the Preserver.”” The
compound term Sarvvalogais'ura I take to be the same as Sarvva-
lokes'wara, the lord of all worlds, the letters & and g being used in-
differently in Gushdn and Kushdn. Mahisura may be either Mahi +
as'wara = Mahis'wara the lord of the earth, or Mahd+its'wara = Ma-
hes wara, the great lord, but the meaning is much the same.

The only objection that strikes me to my rendering of the terms
Kozola, Kara, and Hima, as distinctive epithets signifying Red,
Black and White, is the fact that they are not translated in the Greel
versions, but simply transcribed. I do not think, however, that this
objection has much weight, as we know that the very same epithets
when attached to the names of Gaelic chiefs, whether Scotch or Irish,
are generally used in the original, as Roderick Dhu, Rob Roy.

IV.—On the name of the donor. The name of Sangha Rakshita
was a very common one amongst the Buddhists, meaning “ preserved,
or cherished, by Sangha,” the third person of the Buddhist Triad.

‘It occurs frequently in the Bhilsa and Mathura inscriptions. The
name is followed by the words Sarvva Budhdnam puyae, mata pitaram
puya, “for the benefit of all Buddhists, for the benefit of his mother
and father,” a form of expression which is common to all these dona-
tive records. It occurs in Major Pearse’s Hazara inscription as mdta-
pitu puyae; and also in Masson’s very perfect inscription on the
brass casket found in No. 2 Tope at Bimaran. In this I read the
donor’s name as Stva Rachita, but his father’s name is doubtful.
The gift consisted of Bhagavata sariraht, or “relics of Buddha,’
sarvva Budhdnam puyae, “ for the benefit of all Buddhists. See Ari-
ana Antiqua, Plate 2 of Tope discoveries, for this inscription, in
which the final letter of Budhdnam is omitted, but which is found in
Prinsep’s copy,—see Vol. I. Plate VI. of Thomas’s edition. The
peculiar form of the y in puyae induces me to read the four letters
immediately preceding Bhagavata as deya dharma, a “religious gift,”
a form of expression which is common to most Buddhist donative
records, whether found at Benares, at Mathura, or in the Western
Caves, uv 2

150 Remarks on the Bactro-Pali Taxila Inscription. (No. 2,

Additional Note, 23rd April.

In the remarks on my Eusufzai inscription from Panjtar I have
read the date as the year 122; the only doubtful figure being that
for hundreds, which I have taken as 100 on the ground that the
power of the Yuchi kings did not, aceording to the Chinese, last be-
yond the beginning of the 3rd century. Since writing these remarks
I have referred to Gesenius, Monuwmenta Phenic., pp. 88, 89, where
I find the fullest confirmation of the value which I have assigned to
the centenary figure. The contracted word San, or “ year,” is
followed by an upright stroke which in Pheenician as well as in
Bactro Pali represents the unit 1. This is followed by a symbol,
which in Pheenician, Aramzo-Mgyptian, and Palmyrenian is the in-
dex for hundreds, the two symbols together signifying simply one
hundred, as 1 £ signifies 1 pound.

In the Pheenician scheme the units up to nine are represented by
an equivalent number of upright strokes. That this was also the
ease in the original Bactro Pali scheme is rendered highly probable
by the fact that the numbers 4 and 5 in the Kapurdigiri inscription
are represented exactly in the same manner. But in the inscriptions
under review an independent symbol has been adopted for the figure
4, and I would refer to India as the source from whence this figure
was obtained, because in the Khalsi inscription the number 4, as I
have already noticed, is represented by a St. George’s eross, +, where
the Kapurdigiri inscription has four upright strokes.

The Bactro Pali cypher for 10 is also derived from the Pheenician,
and the cypher for 20 is merely a duplication of that for 10, one
eypher being placed over the other, as in the Aramzo-Mgyptian and
Palmyrenian numbers. A reference to Gesenius, pp. 88 and 89, will
prove at once that the Bactro Pali scheme of numbers was originally
the very same as that of the Pheenicians, and that it was afterwards
slightly modified by the adoption of an independent symbol for the
number 4, which was introduced from India.

Whether the Indians had a separate and original scheme of their
own I am not prepared to say ; but the symbols of the dates in the
Mathura inscriptions, and on the Gujrat and Gupta coins, are quite
distinct from those of the Bactro Pali inscriptions, even although
most of them are simple Bactro Pali letters; as for instance the &
which is the initial letter of the word hat, or “ hundred,”

1853. | Note on the Taxila Inscription. 151

I have re-examined my two small silver coins which I have attri-
buted doubtingly to the Satrap Lzaka. There are only three letters
of the name remaining, which I have read as OKO; but a more care-
ful scrutiny shows that there is a decided difference in the shapes of
the first and third of these letters. The first letter is not only larger
but it is also differently formed below, while the last letter, as well
as the three omikrons in KOZOYAO, is simply a small plain circle.
The first letter remaining on both coins can, I think, only be
intended for an A. This difference in the shapes of the first and
third letters seems to render my attribution of the coins to Liaka
Kusulaka almost certain.

—

The Peshawar Vase inscription, of which two copies have kindly
been sent tome by Mr. Bayley and Babu Rajendra Mitra, I read as
follows.

Sthilena Siha-Rachhitena cha bharatehi Pakhasilaé As’a-thuva
pratithavito sarva Budhanam puyac.

“The Asa Stupa was erected in Taxila by Sinhila and Sinha-
Rakshita, brothers, for the benefit of all Buddhists.”

The characters appear to be rather loosely engraved—I have
therefore read thupa for thuva, and pratithapito for pratithavito.

The peculiar form of the chh in Rachhitena induces me to read the
somewhat similar character in the Wardak inscription as ch, and
to suggest that the words towards the end of the first line may
be read thus:

Agramatigra Vihara cha Thuva cha Bhagavata Sakya-muni Sari-
ram patidharett.

“ Both the Agramatigra Vihara and the Stupa were erected for the
relics of Bhagavata Sakya Muni.”

—— eee e—eeee—ee=eeeeEeeeeeEeEeEeEeeSOSOO

Note on Major General A. Cunningham’s Remarks on the Bactro-Pali
Taxila Inscription.—By Babu RAJENDRALALA Mirra,

It is with some diffidence that I venture to offer a few remarks on the
subject of the preceding paper. Entertaining the highest sentiment
of respect for its author as one of the earliest and most successful
antiquarians of India, I would never have, under ordinary circum-

152 Note on the Taxila Inscription. [No. 2,

stances, presumed to give expression to opinions opposed, even though
but slightly, to his views. But the subject of Bactro-Pali inscrip-
tions is involved in so much difficulty, and has as yet derived so little
benefit from the researches of oriental scholars that I feel convinced
that the following contribution towards its elucidation, insignificant
as it 1s, will not be altogether useless to future enquirers.

To the general scope and purport of the Taxila inscription as inter-
preted by General Cunningham, I have no objection to offer. They
accord pretty closely with a version that I had prepared on the
receipt of the last number of the Journal, but which I could not, owing
to want of leisure, complete, for presentation to the Society. I think,
however, that some of the explanations and inferences of the General are
evidently inadmissible. In the first line of the record he reads, after
the name of the King Mogasa, the name of the Greek month Pane-
mos, but as the only letters visible are p, m ands, with a blank
between the p, and the m, the deduction is by no means such as can
claim immediate confidence. In all the Ariano-Pali inscriptions that
have hitherto been decyphered the words for month, year and day
have all been taken from the Sanskrita. The system of naming days
according to the moon’s age is peculiarly Sanskritic, and the division
of the month into the light and the dark halves of the moon, is of
Indian or Sanskritic origin. A priori, therefore, one would expect that
the Taxila tablet should have the name of an Indian and not a Greek
month, and this expectation is strengthened by the fact that in the
Manikyala inscription, the General has himself read the name of the
seventh Hindu month Kdrtika; and we have his authority for the
last Hindu month Chaitra in the Yusafzai inscription from Ohind,
and for the fourth month S‘rdvana in the Punjtar record from the
same locality.

It is to be admitted that in the Hidda inscription he has read the
name of apellaios, and in the Wardak vase, the word artamiseyasa,
but those readings are yet open to question and cannot, therefore, be
cited as authorities.

The Hidda record, according to the General, opens with the words,*
Samvatsaraye Athavisatihi 20, 4, 4, Mise apilesa ekavisatihi, bat
on referring to the facsimile in the Ariana Antiqua (p. 262,) I find
the only letters visible are 4, 4, dZdse apeusa chidasa, the variants
being w for o in the first word, and J, ¢ or v for uw in the second. The

* Ante, p. 144.

1863. ] Note on the Taxila Inscription. 153

letters from “ Samvat’” to “20” do not exist in the original. The
word Masa is doubtful, as the m has a mark at the bottom which is
equivalent to an o or a w, and not an d, which is generally indicated by
a horizontal or oblique line on the top and never by a stroke at foot,
and it is impossible, therefore to read the first syllable as mda without
assuming an error either in the original or the facsimile. For apilesa
we have a word which cannot by any possibility have an Z in it, and
- for ekavisatihi I can find no equivalent syllables, regard being had
to the known powers of the Arian alphabet.

In the Wardak record I followed Mr. H. C. Bayley in reading the
letter* after the era atha chitriyasa vrehi. General Cunningham, in
his correspondence with Mr. B. published in the last volume of the
Journal (p. 303), found in those letters the words artamistyasa divasa
vrehi which, in the paper under notice, he has changed to artamisiya-
sa hi, dropping altogether the wre before hi and the divasa of his cor-
respondence for which, however there was no equivalent whatever in
the original.

I do not presume to deny the possibility of Greek months being
named in a Bactrian inscription, for in India it is a common practice
in the present day to use the months of one language in the writing
of another, such as the English months in Bengali records both official
and private, and such might have been the case in the days of the
Bactrians in India, but finding that out of the five dated Bactrian in-
scriptions which have been hitherto discovered, three unquestionably
have Hindu months, and the other two are only doubtful, Iam dis-
posed to think that it is unwarrantable to assume from a few disjoint-
ed syllables a Greek word in an Indian document, when an Indian
term may be as easily supplied. Assuming the language of the record
to be purely Sanskritic as I shall presently shew it to be, the missing
syllable between the p and the m may be more reasonably supposed
to have been an neha than an 7 and in that case the word would be
panchamasa or the fifth month and not Panemos. |

The General has noticed the Greek word Xanthicos in an inscription
discovered by Captain Robinson of the Engineers, but as it has not yet
been published, I cannot venture to say anything in regard to it.

In the second line I take the word efasa to be the Pali form of
etasya “of his” or “ thereof,’ and Patropati to be a corruption of

* Ante, Vol. XXX. p. 346,

154 Note on the Tawxila Inscription. [ No. 2,

patra a car and pati “lord ;” but owing to a lacuna after the last
word its connexion with the subsequent word is not apparent.

In the third line General Cunningham has translated the
words, Sapatika aprativddita “the matchless Teacher ;” but upon
what authority I cannot make out. Sa in Sanskrita means “hap-
piness” or “felicity,” and patika “lord,” and the two together
would make a very appropriate epithet for the founder of Buddhism
whose great mission was to rid mankind of the threefold pain of
disease, decrepitude and death, and clear the way to final beatitude.
The second word is formed of the privative particle @ and prativdda
“an opposing argument,” with the personal affix itach, which would
make the whole phrase mean that ‘‘none could oppose him in
argument.” This is a very becoming predicate for S’akya who has
been repeatedly described in the Lalita Vistara and elsewhere as the
most distinguished controversialist, from whom the Brahmanic phi-
losuphers fled like jackals from a lion.

About the end of the third line occurs the remarkable word Puyae,
written often and more correctly with an additional y as puyaye. In

Sanskrita puyaas a root means “to putrify,”

and as a noun puya
indicates “ pus,’ but in neither of these senses can it be used in the
inscription. Apparently the word is the dative singular of puya, and
the position it occupies requires it to imply some good or blessing for
the parties named. Hence it is that General Cunningham takes it to
be acorruption of punya or “ religious merit” which he translates into
“benefit.” In the Wardak inscription the word occurs as pus/a but
that has been attributed to a mislection on my part of the word puya.
This, however, I am not willing to admit. The cerebral s in the
Bactrian alphabet is formed of three lines making the three sides of
a parallelogram leaving the bottom open, the y being formed of two
lines shaped like a cone. Now inthe Wardak record the last syllable
of puya or pus’a is made of three lines shaped like a parallelogram,
and this more than half a dozen times. General Cunningham, being
well aware of it, says that “there they are formed with a rounded
head instead of the usual pointed one.” It must follow, therefore, that
if the word there be puya and not pus'a, the error is due to the
engraver of the original record, and not to the decipherer; and
if an error of the kind be admitted, it is just as possible that it
should be in the Taxila as in the Wardak monument, the only circum-

1863.] Note on the Tuxila Inscription. 155

stance remarkable being that the word occurs several times in each
document and always with perfect uniformity, puya in the one and
pus'a in the other, with the most vexatious constancy. In an un-
published inscription on a steatite vase in the Peshawar museum,* the
word appears as puya, not pus'a, and if this be permitted to incline
the balance of probability in favour of that reading, I feel disposed to
trace its origin to the Sanskrita root pej “to worship ;” the 7 of the
word being, by local or dialectic peculiarity, changed to y. In the
present day they in Uriah is invariably pronounced as 7, and in Bengali
it assumes the two forms of & and @, the former being pronounced as 7
and the latter as y, though in the alphabet there is a separate symbol
for j, and the 4 whether with or without the dot at the bottom, holds an
only place at about the end of the series. The panditas of Bengal
observe this distinction even in reading Sanskrita, and frequently
quote an ancient verse in support of their practice.y The Nipalese
_ follow the Uriah and pronounce their y, whether initial, medial or final,
asj. According to Yajur Vedic scholars, the initial y should invariably
be pronounced as 7, hence the name of their Veda, though written with

ay,is pronounced as Jajur. In the Kapur di Giri inscriptions the y has
- often been used in the place of j and the word Rajé changed to Rayo
offers a notable instance of the convertibility of the y andy. These
analogies would go a great way to support my assumption of puye
being a corruption of pwa, and if this be admitted the meaning
of puyaye, would be “ for the purpose of worship.” The supposition
that itis a corruption of punya has not the support of analogy,
for we know of no rule of orthoepy Sanskrita, Pali or Prakrita, which
alone can govern the phonology of the Bactro- Pali, by which the sonant
n can be elided for the benefit of the liquid y. The rvle in the Pré-
krita is invariably to drop the semi-vowel and double the surd or
the sonant with which it may be associated.

General Cunningham reads the four last sylables at the end of the
third line puya yuta. I wish to alter them to puyaye cha to preserve
the syntactic connexion of the clause in which they occur with that
which precedes it. The last letter of the line is partially obliterated,
and taking it therefore, for the sake of concord as ch and not as ¢

[* Vide ante, p. 151.—Kps. J
t Weal qeiea amie qa ae !
qietel q Wael aq AaRICIAA AT It

156 Jote on the Laxila Inscription. [No. 2,

which it somewhat resembles, will not, I trust, be represented into a
violence against the original.

The phrase Saputra darasa Ayubalavarddhika in the fourth line has
been explained by General Cunningham as the “ wife of his son Ayu-
balavarddhika,” but the derivation of the first word of the clause being

p) 39

sa “with,” putra “a son,” and dara “ wife,” its meaning should be
“with his son and wife” and the aywbalavarddhika, if a proper noun,
should be the name of the wife and not of the son. It might be made
to correspond with the next word bhratara, but cannot, in consonance
with any rule of Indian Grammar, be made to jump over the wife
(dérd) and correspond with the son (putra). I am disposed to take it
for an invocation for the life (dyw) and health (bala lit. strength) of
the satrap and his family. The only objection to this explanation is
the fact of the phrase having no case-aflfix to indicate its connexion,
but as such an expression in the Sanskrita would have taken the
accusative case, and in the monumental Pali the mark of that case
is often elided, the objection cannot be of any moment.

The last word of the 4th line—pati patikasa, has been left untrans-*
lated on aecount of a blot at its end. I think it may be derived from

and infer there-
from that the concluding word is a declaration in favour of some

patti a “line of infantry,” and patika “ commander,

distinguished general.

Although unconnected with the inscription under notice, I avail
myself of this opportunity to observe that General Cunningham’s
conversion into dcharydndm of my reading of asanthandndm of the
Wardak vase is apparently a very appropriate emendation, being in
perfect keeping with the S/ravastf record lately discovered by him ; but
unfortunately for it, it cannot be adopted without declaring one of the
twos, so distinetly visible at the end of the word, to be a redundancy.

My observations, I feel, are open to the objection that they are based
upon too strict an adherence to the rules of Sanskrita grammar, and
cannot therefore be appropriately applicable to the language of the
Indo-Bactrians who must have used a mixed tongue, partly Indian
and partly Bactrian. But inasmuch as a mixed language implies a
mixture of words from different sources in one language, and not the
formation of a new language by a combination of the formal elements
of different tongues, which is unknown in history, no exception should
be taken on the score of my having availed myself of the standard of

1863. | Note on the Taxila Inscription. 157

the Sanskrita for my guide. As far as I am able to judge from the
meagre evidence at my command, the grammar of the Arian inscrip-
tions is unquestionably of Sanskrita origin. Its declensions correspond
with the Pali of the Cinghalese on the one hand and the Sanskrita on
the other, and closely resemble the Pali of the As/oka records, of which
most probably itis a dialectic variety. Like the Pali of As/oka, it
has no case-aflix for the nominative. The accusative in either is
formed by an m or the omission of all case-mark just as we find it in
thelater Prakrita. In the modern Indian yernaculars of Sanskrita
origin it is frequently omitted. The instrumental has ena both in the
As‘oka Pali and the Arian. In the Prakrita it changes into hinto.
For the dative we have in both the dialects the same affix e or ye.
The ablative has not yet been met with in the Arian. The genitive
sa for the Sanskrita sya is common to the Arian, the Pali, and the
Prakrita, while the e of the Sanskrita locative is almost universal in
the Arian vernaculars of India both ancient and modern. In As’‘oka’s
Kapur di Giri monument it is represented by sz, and in the Pali and
the Prakrita by mhz.

Only a limited number of conjugational affixes have as yet been
discovered in the Bactrian inscriptions, but they all assimilate to the
Sanskrita more closely than to the Pali of the Cinghalese. The ¢2 in
paridharatt and viharati of the Taxila and the Rawal Pindi records
and the fw in bhavatu of the Wardak vase, are so identically Sanskrita,
that if we had no other evidence to ascertain the relationship of the
Bactro-Pali to the ancient classics of India, they would have sutfticed
to settle it with unquestionable certainty. Dr. Max Miller, talking
of the English, says, “The single s, used as the exponent of the third
person singular of the indicative present, is irrefragable evidence
that in a scientific classification of languages, English, though it did
not retain a single word of Saxon origin, would have to be classed
as Saxon, and as a branch of the great Teutonic stem of the Arian
family of speech.” And if this argument in favour of grammar being
the only criterion of the relationship and classification of languages
be true, how strongly must it apply to the Bactro-Pali which, besides
its grammar, has nearly the whole stock ofits vocables taken from the
Sanskrita? I say “nearly” to provide against the possibility of an
erratic foreign element occasionally turning up, but as far as my
knowledge of those records which have been already translated, is

x 2

158 Note on the Taxila Inseription. [No. 2,

concerned, I may with perfect safety use. the more positive wholly
All the words of common life such as father, mother, brother, sister,
husband and wife are identically the same in Sanskrita and the
Bactro-Pali. The terms for superior, king, governor, master, servant,
town, country, mountain and river, in the latter are all taken
from the former; and the adjectives, pronouns and verbs, though
occasionally altered and rounded by the attrition of use or the laws
of phonetic decay, still retain enough of their pristine form to indicate
most unmistakably thei affiliation to the Sanskrita. Mr. EB. C.
Bayley, in his remarks on my note on the Rawal Pindi inscription, has
taken exception to the word A/ahi Saehya which I assumed to be de-
rived from the Sanskrita Mahé Sachiva “the great minister,’ and to
two other words. But, admitting for the sake of argument, that they
are unSanskritic, the fact will amount to this that there are three
foreign nouns in a Sanskritic composition, which can no more affect
its character than the scores of Bengah or the thousands of Latin
in the English, affect its Teutonie origm. The same may be said
of proper names, a great many of which could not but be foreign in
a record put up by foreigners in India. The grammar is unquestion-
ably Sanskritie, and that being the blood and soul of the language, it
is but reasonable and fair that, in deeyphering records in that lan-
guage, half effaced on mouldering monuments, and written in characters
whose powers are not yet fully known, and several of which may be
mistaken for half a dozen different letters, the enquirer should seek
in the Sanskrita for a key.

Tt isno doubt remarkable that the language of the Bactrian inscrip-
tions, put up by conquerors in a foreign land, should retain the purity
of the native dialect, and be altogether free from the admixture of
vocables imported from the speech of the dominant race. Itis, indeed,
but natural to suppose that those who introduced their alphabet
amongst their subject nation should likewise introduce their lan-
guage ; and the contrary is a matter of surprise. But the difficulty
vanishes when it is borne in mind that the inscriptions under notice
were monumental records,and care was therefore taken to compose them
in the purest of vernaculars, and that the Bactrians at the time had
not had sufficient opportunity to infuse their language into the current
speech of the country.

Mr. Bayley is of opinion “that a foreign element was strong in
the trans-Jhelum districts” between the 3rd century before,and the 2nd

1863. | Note on the Taxila Inscription. 159

century after, Christ; that this “may be guessed from the familiar
names of men and places which are certainly for the most part any
thing but Pali or Hindee ;” and “ that the language of their common
use must be primd facie.expected to partake of a similar character.”
This argument has led him to the inference that the language of
As/oka’s edicts is a “quasi religious” or “sacred dialect” and not the
current vernacular of his dominions. The first of these two positions
may be readily admitted as possible or even probable, but the latter
does not seem to be at all connected or dependent upon the other.
What we have to deal with is the dialect as we have it before us,
and not what it should be. Now a careful examination of the
-language of the As/oka edicts, clearly shews that it is a stage
in the progress or growth of the Sanskrita in its onward course
from the Vedic period to the vernaculars of our day, produced
by a natural process of phonetic decay and dialectic regeneration,
which can never be possible except in the case of a spoken dialect.
Professor Max Miiller, adverting to these changes, justly says, they
“take place gradually but surely, and what is more important,
they are completely beyond the reach or controul of the free will
of man.” No more could As/oka and his monks devise them for
religious purposes, than change the direction of the monsoons or
retard the progress of the tides. It is said that Marcellus, the
grammarian, once addressed the emperor Tiberius when he had made
a mistake, saying, “ Cesar, thou canst give the Roman citizenship to
man, but not to words ;’* and mutatis mutandis the remark applies
with just as much force to As/oka as to Tiberius. There can be no
doubt that As’oka was one of the mightiest sovereigns of India. His
sway extended from Dhauli on the sea board of Orissa to Kapur di
Giri in Afghanistan, and from Bakra in the north-east to Junagar
in Guzerat. His clergy and missionaries numbered by millions ; they
had penetrated the farthest limits of Hindustan proper, and had
most probably gone as far as Bamian on the borders of the Persian
empire. Religious enthusiasm was at its height in his days, and he
was the greatest enthusiast in the cause of the religion of his adop-
tion. He devised his edicts to promote that religion, had them written
in the same words for all parts of his kingdom, and used exactly the
same form every where; but with all his imperial power and influence
he could not touch a single syllable of the grammar which prevailed

* Apud Max Miiller, Science of Langnage, p. 37. _

160 On Ancient Sanskrit Numerals. [No. 2,

in the different parts of his dominions. In the North West the three
sibilants, the 7 above and below compound consonants, the neglect
of the long and short vowels, and other dialectic peculiarities, rode
rough-shod over the original as devised by him and his ministers and
apostles in his palace, and recorded in Allahabad and Delhi; while at
Dhauli nothing has been able to prevent the letter 7 entirely super-
seding the letter 7 of the edicts. Had the language under notice been, as
supposed by Mr. Bayley, a “ quasi religious” or a “sacred dialect,” it
would have been found identically the same in all parts of India, for the
characters used in the Delhi, Allahabad, Dhauli and Junagar records
are the same, and if uniformity had been sought, it could have been
most easily secured. But popularity was evidently what was most -
desiderated, and therefore concessions were freely made in favour of the
vernaculars of the different provinces at the expense of uniformity.
Unless this be admitted, it would be impossible to explain why the word
RLajdé of Delhi, written in the same characters, should in Cuttack change
into Ldjd. Had the language been a sacred one intended for the
clergy only, no such concession would ever have been required. The
Sanskrita of the Brahmanic priesthood is alike everywhere, and
so is the Latin of the Roman Catholic clergy. It is the people
whom As/oka wished to address, and accordingly adapted his lan-
guage to the capacity and the idiom of his hearers. The differences
which have resulted from this concession to the genius loci of lan-
guage have been pointed out at some length by Prinsep ;* and they have
confirmed the opinion of Wilson,t Thomas,t Lassen§ and others that
the Pali of the edicts was the vernacular of India at the time of As’oka,
and that the peculiarities under notice are the dialectic differences of
the different provinces where they occur. By that vernacular it is
of course meant to be the language of writing and of the higher or-
ders of the gentry, and in the same sense in which the language of
the Parliamentary speeches and of the leaders of the Times news-
paper would be called the vernacular of England. The common
people no doubt spoke dialects of very different degrees of purity in
much the same way as we notice dialectic differences in almost the
different streets of London from the back slums of St. Giles to
Belgravia. All who could read and write could understand the

* Ante VII. p. 220 et 279.

+ Journal, Royal Asiatic Society, XII. p. 236.

{ Thomas’s Prinsep, II. p. 44.

§ Essai sur le Pali, p. 15, et Institutiones Lingus Prakritice, p. 60,

1863. | On Ancient Sanskrit Numerals. 161

language of the edicts, and those who heard it read out could likewise
understand it, and that is all that is intended to be said in regard to
its vernacularity.

Philologically considered the language of the edicts is intermediate
between the Sanskrita on the one side and the Prakrita on the other.
lassen says, “que le Prakrit altére plus le Sanskrit que ne le fait le
Pali, et qu’il offre en quelque sorte, le second dégré d’alteration, comme
le Palien est le premier et le plus immédiat.” And inasmuch as
the Bactro-Pali bears the closest resemblance to it with a leaning to-
wards the Sanskrita, we cannot but assign to it a Sanskritic affiliation,
and in decyphering it therefore the safest guide appears to us to be
the Sanskrita. Hence it is that the more we assimilate it with
Sanskrita, the more readily does it become intelligible, while all
attempts to decypher it on the hypothesis of its being a mixed
language, have hitherto proved completely fruitless.

—~

On Ancient Sanskrit Numerals—By Dr. Buav Dast, of Bombay.

Some time ago I read before the Bombay Branch of the Royal
Asiatic Society a paper on ancient Sanskrit numerals, which will, I
believe, appear in that Society’s Journal in a year or two. As I
think the discovery of the correct value of the numerical symbols is
important, perhaps this brief abstract will be deemed worthy of publi-
cation in the Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal.

In deciphering the inscriptions in the caves of western India, espe-
cially those at Nassick, I found many numerical symbols the value
of which was at the same time given in words. And as many of
them are repeated sometimes in the same series of inscriptions, some-
times in others, without presenting any difference, there cannot possi-
bly be a doubt of the correctness of the following results. The sym-

bol for one hundred is 4 that for two hundred is represented by one

side spur stroke added to the former > that for three hundred is re-

presented by two side spur strokes a . The symbol for four hund-

red has not been found. Strange to say the symbol for 500 is not
4 placed after the symbol for 100, but the number 5 itself joined,

162 On Ancient Sanskrit Numerals. [No. 2,

The symbol for 1,000 resembles the Marathi figure for one ; the addi-
tion of one side spur stroke doubles its value, and of two side spur
strokes trebles it as in the case of the hundreds. Four thousand are
represented by the figure 4 being joined to the symbol for one thou-
sand ; and the figure 8 is joined to represent eight thousand. There
is a symbol apparently for 5,000, the spelling of which is indistinct.
The following are most of the numerical symbols with their spelling
in words.

Nassick cave No. 23 of Mr. Brett's plan.*

Line 3rd ‘T Walfad 22 two hundred (200.)

39 99 j

» 6th. ox 9 PARC G in the 18th year.

Oth ") Ba Yee one hundred.
¥ ‘Uith Bt} Hagr ey in the 24th year.

» 12th «© fea Xe on the 10th day.

” 9 F wagrtg v in the 4th year.

e

3 op i" faqs gaa ¥ on the 5th day.

Ps) | TS? in the (?) demilunation.

Cave No. 16.
In a newly discovered inscription regarding the Abhir dynasty.

97 99

Line 10th 4 = %» two (2.)

43 » W227 MITWETE! (?) thousands of Karshapanas (?).

‘guendeban ah Watia Te Be five hundred (500.)

Cave No. 8.
Inscription by the wife of the Commander-in-Chief Yudnashri

Sdtakarni.
* Journal, Bombay Br. As. Soc., Vol. V.

1863.]

Line Ist
9) 7
9) 99
a ana.
9 bP)
“5 GIR!
99 bP)
» 4th
te 99
9) bP}
» oth

On Ancient Sanskrit Numerais. 163

‘ WaRt Baa in the year seven (7.)

=> qaaqaly 2 in the demilunation three.

Cave No. 16.
a) = 4H 8k or € in the year forty-two (42) or ninety-
two (92.)
if Vali Fi f@Roeoe three thousand (3000.)

F ee? 2000 (no spelling in words.)

NE azar faq eee Karshapanas two thousand (2000.)

4 Yee 1000 (no spelling in words.)

4 gual fa qe ceo Nandigur currency, eight thousand
(8000).
U, aq 8° or ¢2 in the year forty (40) ? or ninety (90).

oe fh aa gy forty-five (45.)

4 - five (?) thousand (?) Karshapanas.

Last line which has been extended under another inscription for
want of space * * * * Karshapanas four thousand (4000).

Line Ist :

Line 2nd

” 2?

Cave No. 23.

In another inscription of Gotamiputra.

JE FaRtAFaAAG in the nineteenth year (19).
x= wafaaia in the second demilunation.

v( = f<98 FTTH AR on the thirteenth (13) day.
In another inscription below.
4 3 a4 te Suva (Sumvatsun) or year nineteen (19).
= faq 2 Gi. Pa. two (2) Ge. Gimha Pakheh) in the

second demilunation in the summer season.
YX

164 On Ancient Sanskrit Numerals. [No. 2,

pu = fea ve diva thirteen (18) (@. e. on the thirteenth
day.)

Line 3rd [fee diva seven (7) z. e. on the seventh day.

9? 2

Cave No. 24.

Line Ist 3aRt ez ¢ in the sixth (6) year.

Karlen Cave.
Tn an inscription of the mendicant Harapharan the son of Sata-

pharan.
Line Ist BD aatat xu in the year twenty-four.

,» in the 8rd demilunation.
», on the second day.
In Somadeva’s inscription.
Line 1st in the 7th year.
in the 6th demilunation.
In Padamavi’s inscription.
Line Ist in the 5th demilunation.
2nd on the Ist day.
In a Chaitya cave at Junner on the Bhima Shunker hill, at its mid-
dle, the following numbers are to be found.
Line 2nd, 15 (no spelling.)
4th, 1: 410 (?) [the symbol Zo resembles somewhat the let-
ter & in the Vallabhi copper plates. ]
In cave No. 1 in the inscription of an officer of Ushavaddt.

Line 4th Ag in the year 46 (?)

Kanheri cave, No. 30.
Line 9th, two hundred (200.)

Cave No.
Line Ist, in the year seven hundred and ninety-nine (799).
In the Junnagur inscription of Rudradama.

Ling 4th, in the year of Rudradama, seventy-two (72).

In the Vallabhi plates.

OF & sf =s01 J: ‘V & =375. a 6 —=845 (395).

3)

99

99 23

3)

9)

— 1863.] On Ancient Sanskrit Numerals. 165

“F CA. =s80, & fi UL _310, nm |. —349,
J Eval] ss 5 6 tee G@a9)

Bhilsa inscription, No. 7.*
i) = BI

Inscription 2nd.

j Ca)
f Sus Rg

A very old inscription in the cave character at the top of the Na-
nah ghat near Junnara contains a great number of numerals, but
their value is not given in words. It records gifts of cows (or per-
haps their value in coins) horses, elephants, carts, sapakas (a parti-
cular coin) and perhaps clothes. There is one numerical symbol in
it which I cannot at present exactly make out. The gifts were made
at a great variety of Yadngas or Vedic sacrifices and a study of these
will, I trust, enable me to discover their true value.

A correct decipherment of the inscriptions having enabled me to
ascertain the true value of the various numerical symbols, it struck
me that there would now be no difficulty in reading the exact dates
on the Sah coins of Surdshtra; on looking at these, it appeared that
both Mr. Prinsep and Mr. Thomas had read the first numerical sym-
bol in the place of hundreds as if it did not vary in any of the coins;
but it was clear to me that in some, the symbol was the plain one
for 100, and in others for 200, accordingly a correct reading of those
dates would, I thought, enable a Numismatist to arrange the Sah
dynasty in chronological order; I therefore repaired to our learned
Vice-President, the Honorable Mr. Newton, whose acquaintance with
the Sah coins is minute and accurate, and would not be surpassed.
In going over the large and beautiful collection of coins in his cabi-
net, the arrangement according to the dates as I now read them,
agreed in a most remarkable manner with that which Mr. Newton
had already drawn up from a most careful study of the coins for
several years. I therefore left the subject of the Sah coins, their

* Journal, Asiatic Society, Bengal, Vol. VI. p. 454.
Wee

166 On Ancient Sanskrit Numerals. [No. 2,

date and arrangement in the able hands of Mr. Newton who will no
doubt furnish a luminous paper on the subject. I have placed about
three hundred Séh coins of my own collection at his service and
have now only to offer a few remarks on the era in which I think the
Sah coins are dated.

In former papers read before the Bombay Branch of the
Royal Asiatic Society, I have attempted to identify the Padamavi
of the inscriptions with the Siripulomdyi of Ptolemy; and Swami
Chastana, the grandfather of Rudradama, with Tiastenes, king of
Ujjayini, noticed by the same geographer. I placed Rudradamaé
at the end of the second century of the Christian era, and as

we have got a coin of his son bearing date, apparently 104 a, a

and some of his grandson’s bearing date 1077) the only era
which would place Rudradéma’s son at the end of the second century is
that of Salivahana or Sakanripakéla, which commences 78 years after
Christ. The Nasick inscriptions in particular, show that the Satrap
Nahaptna who preceded Padamavi, and Ushavadata, who is called a
Saka, adopted an era, which counted in their time under 100 (either 42
or 92). Iam therefore inclined to look upon it as the era of Kshaha-
rata or Phrahates, one of the Arsacide, whose satraps they were.
The Sahs are also Satraps; the type of their coins is that of the
Arsacide and not that of the Bactrian Greek kings. The very ex-
pressions S’akanripa or Saka-king which all the old copper-plates
and manuscripts have, indicates a S’aka or Scythian king. The S’a-
kanripakala is observed over a great part of India, in Burmah, Java
and Bali; in fact in those countries to which Buddhism was carried
from India at the commencement of the Christian era; and corre-
sponding to the spread of the Sakas or Scythians over this peninsula.
It is not likely, therefore, that the era prevalent over so large a por-
tion of the globe was derived from the exploits of a humble prince
Salivahana, whose capital was Paithan on the Godaveri, as is com-
monly supposed. Indeed the word Salivahana does not occur in any
ancient records or manuscripts. A Salavahana dynasty appears to
have reigned at Paithan about the time that the Scythian Satraps
ruled over Guzerat, a portion of the Dekhan and the Konkan; and
the utmost that can be granted is, that the Hindus of modern times
have preferred calling the era of the great Saka-king by the name of

1863. ] Literary Intelligence, Se. 167

a contemporary Hindu prince at Paithan. I now begin to entertain
serious doubts about the Vikramaditya era also. I believe that era
too was introduced by the Buddhists or rather the Jainas, and that
it corresponds to the victory obtained by Mithridates over the Ro-
man general Crassus, 53 years before Christ. When we remember
that there is a difference of four years between the Christian era and
the birth of Christ, we can easily understand the Vikramaditya era
being dated 57 years before Christ; but I hope to return to this
subject at length on another occasion.

ee ees

Livernary INTELLIGENCE, CORRESPONDENCE, &e.

Dr. Sprenger writes to Mr. Grote from Paris, March 24th.

“T frequently had heard complaints that there was little doing at
Paris in oriental literature. As far as the study of Arabic and
Persian is concerned [I would not say that they are just. On the
contrary I find that the pursuits of the new generation of orientalists
have taken a new and better turn. Instead of dwelling on grammati-
eal subtleties and illustrating notes by notes, they enter into the
subject. Without underrating the merits of oriental authors, they are
not blind to their faults and endeavour to give us an idea of the con-
dition of the east in bye-gone ages, considering language as a means
to attain this object. To this school belongs the grandson of a man
who was of a very different turn of mind—de Sacy. It is impossible
to overrate the beneficial influence of M. Mohl, he is au fait on every
topic, indefatigable, frank and ready to assist each and every one in
his studies. To his endeavours the ‘ Collection d’ouvrages orientaux’ is
due, the plan and execution of which leaves nothing to desire. M.
Schafer who has spent the greater part of his life in diplomatic service
at Constantinople and Teheran, and who has visited Yaman, has col-
lected a number of MSS. of the existence of which I had not an idea,
as the 3,¢= of Ibn Kelby the leading work on the genealogy of Arabic
tribes, the w,#J|3,35 42 the best book on the geography of Arabia,
the Gly®J| Gl! of Baladzory which treats on the history of the
noble families of the empire of the Khalifs from Mohammad to his
time, including a biography of the prophet which I have found quoted
no where except in the Icaba—so rare it was in the east ;—and three
works on the ¢l;* or system of revenue, of which only one had been

168 Literary Intelligence, &e. [No. 2,

known previous to his discoveries. In fact every book in his col-
lection is a gem. It appears that Constantinople is after all the
place where the best MSS. are to be found, and we must allow that
Schafer was the man to select what is valuable. He is an excellent
linguist and I hope he will find time to publish some of the materials
which he has brought to Europe bearing on the history of eastern
civilization, for this seems to have been the main object which he had
in view in making his collection. You know Barbier de Maynard’s
dictionaire Geogr., it is made on the sound plan on which Sir
H. Rawlinson intended to translate Yaqut. He intends to give us
an edition of Ibn Khordadba, having discovered a MS. at Constan-
tinople. It is the basis of oriental geography and every word which
Ibn Kh. says is drawn from official records and therefore valuable.
Reinaud has shown me the first proof sheets of a work which will
interest you—on the knowledge which the Romans had of the far
Kast, particularly India and China. Wopke is advancing in his im-
portant labour, and will besides soon present us an essay on the his-
tory of the Arabic cyphers, which will exhaust the subject. Garcin
de Tassy’s correct edition and elegant translation of the ‘ Mantic at
Tair’ you have of course seen. He is the only and the fittest man
to explain to us the system of the Qufies, and it is to be hoped he
will continue in this useful career.

You ask whether I am going on with Mogaddasy. I shall soon
surprise you with a small treatise on geography containing the iti-
neraries of oriental authors, illustrated with maps founded upon
Byriny and the Atwal. It is intended to supply the place of good
maps and enable travellers to find out the spot of ancient cities which
exist no more. I believe I mentioned to you that the indefatigable
Wiistenfeld is going to publish the large geographical dictionary of
Yaqit. Though Yaqut was no more a geographer than Abulfeda, the
book will be useful on account of the excellent extracts which it con-
tains. I forgot to mention that Slane has nearly completed the se-
cond volume of Ibn Khaldin. This book can only be compared with
Montesquieu’s ‘ Esprit des lois,’ but it is more philosophical and better
founded on facts, Slane was the only man able to translate so diffi-
cult a work. M. Schafer read to me yesterday at breakfast the ad-
vertisements of new books published in Constantinople. Among
them is the Itq4n, I wonder whether they have reprinted our edition.

1863. | Literary Intelligence, &e. 169

I told Wopke that the advice of Babu Rajendralala Mitra would
in many instances be of great use to him in identifying Sanskrit
terms, and I hope he will apply to him, if he should need it.

If you should not succeed in finding a sufficiently good copy of the
Tabakati Nasiry, you might publish Cywly99 wrel. It is a poem
which has been translated from the Pehlewy by Nitzamy ’Aridhy.
There is a copy, I believe an unicum, in your Library. It was com-
plete, but the book-binder finding it troublesome to mend the leaves
has thrown away some. I should not mind this defect but publish it as
itis. As far as I can judge, it is, after the Shahnama, the most im-
portant work in Persian literature. As it contains a very great num-
ber of obsolete words, care must be taken that it is not modernized
by a native editor. The labour of editing is not great, there is only
one copy, and consequently no MSS. have to be collated, and the
original is beautifully written. All that is necessary is to compare
earefully the proof-sheets with the original, you would therefore
have little expense on this account.

I talked to Mohl regarding the publication of Ramyn and Ways, and
he agrees with me in recommending it as one of the most useful works.”

Dr. Weber writes to Mr. Cowell, dated Berlin, April 9th.

“T have to thank you for your edition of the Kaushitaki-Upanishad,
and the Society for the continuation of the splendid series of the
Bibliotheca Indica (Nos. 175—185, new series 14—80) and of its
Journal (Nos. 1—4 of 1861 and of 1862).

The difference of the texts of the Kaushitaki-Upanishad, and the
curious state of its wording in several places, is a very interesting
fact. Vindyaka in his commentary to Sankhay. (= Kaushitaki)
br4hmana V. 5 quotes the first two chapters of the Aranyaka (which
are closely followed in our MS., Chambers 6770 Ey the Upanishad) as
the 31st and 82nd Ange aya of a brahmana : agqutet qafeanalsue-
SISA BAG UAH Canaateteasiad weretafeta :
the adas of the text certainly refers to the Somasya mahdvratam
as a later part of the work. On the other hand Varadattasuta
Anartiya in his commentary to the S/ankhay-S/rauta Stitra 18,15, 1
quotes them by the title Aranyaka: awmawaaae qaxcuwala
aarecin Hata afau:. Both commentators quote several times a
Mahd Kaushitaki brahmana. Anartiya tells us (at 14, 2, 8) that the

170 Literary Intelligence, Sc. -[No. 2,

adhyayas 14—16 of the sutra, which bear the appearance more of a
bréhmana than of a sutra, are an Anubrdhmanam, extracted by the
Kalpakdra from the Mahékaushttaka, C4 TEAM AAAS RT AT-
Zea AMARUBAAY. And Vinayaka adduces the same at sever-
al passages as varying from the text which he comments. The deep-
er looks we get into the literature of the brahmanas and the sitras,
the clearer we see, that the apparent fixedness of their texts is but a
secondary one, that we have in-them only the last stage of a long
and multiform development.

I am now in possession of a copy of two very good MSS. of the
Taittirfya Sanhita (formerly in the possession of Hug. Burnouf)
pada and sanhitdé, and I have in mind to give a transliteration of it
in Latin type in the Indische Stud., in the same manner as Aufrecht’s
Rik, but joint with the various readings from the Kathaka and the
White-Yajurveda.—Vol. 8 of the Indische Stud., which is now in
print already, is to contain two metric treatises of my pen, 1, die
Vedischen Nachrichten tiber Metrik, 2, Pingala’s chhandah sutra with
copious introduction and with additions from the Vrittaratnakara,
&c. Professor Whitney has given in the Journal of the American
Oriental Society, an edition of the Atharva Pratis’akhya, with notes
(I have not yet seen it, but presume the best) and one of the next
numbers will contain the Taittiriya Pratis’4khya, Professor Kern is
about to set off for Benares: he takes with him his long and elabo-
rate studies and collections for an edition of Varahamihira’s brihat-
sanhita: he will no doubt find new materials in Benares, and your
Bibliotheca Indica would be the right place for this most important
publication. Professor Bihler (Elphinstone College, Bombay) has
finished his essay on the As‘vins and is busy with an edition of Go-
bhila’s grihya stitra with Narayana’s commentary.

Mr. F. E. Hallis reprinting Wilson’s Vishnupurana with notes. The
3rd volume of the selected works of Professor Wilson, edited by Rost,
and containing Wilson’s smaller essays on the Puranas, is to appear
in the course of the summer. We have now got here through Trubner
and Comp. London, good and comparatively cheap prints from Bombay,

Mr. M. Bréalon, Paris, has given a very clear and Incid essay on

’ which is full of inter-

comparative mythology, “ Hercule et Cacus,’
esting detail. The Petersburg Worterbuch goes on steadily; the

last proof sheet reached to qatfe. Of Bohtlingk’s collection of.

1863. | Literary Intelligence, §¢. IVE

“Spriche” the first volume (¥4-a@) is now ready. Dr. Friederich
has left with us before he resailed for Batavia, a decipherment and
translation of a curious inscription on a Manjus’ri statue.”

Dr. Weber also writes to Babu Rajendra Lala Mitra.

“ Your translation of the Chhandogya Upanishad and the introduc-
tion to it deserve all praise: in the latter, however, there are some
points in which I cannot quite agree with you. The four new
Brahmanas of which you speak at pp. 15, 16, are nothing but the
VIL. VI. I. and II. Kandas of the S‘atapatha Brahmana, as you will
easily verify from my edition of it: the names hasti, usha, havyan
and ekvai are corruptions for hastishat (or hastighata,) ukhdsambha-
rana, haviryajno and ekapadiké. It is a pity, that you have not
joined the text of the first two chapters of the Chhandogya Brah-
mana, (pp. 17, 18,) to this your translation of the eight following
adhydyas. Their context refers to the grihya ritual and its knowledge
would be I guess of value for the understanding of the corresponding
part of the gobhilagrihyasttra (see Indische Studien, V. 368 ff.).
Professor Buhler (Elphinstone College, Bombay) is now busy with
an edition of this sutra, and he would no doubt be very thankful to
you for a communication of the text in question. We long very
much for the conclusion of your valuable edition of the Lalita-Vis-
tara and for the continuation of the fext of the Taittiriya Braéhmana,
the third kanda being of much interest on account of its containing
the enumeration of the victims at the as’wamedha and the purusha-
medha sacrifices (compare Vaj. Samh. 24—30.) The only copy of
it, which J knew till lately in Europe, is very corrupt: but they have
in Paris, as I learned some time ago, a very excellent copy, formerly
in the possession of Hug. Burnouf.

Aufrecht’s edition of the Riksanhita in Latin type is now finish-
ed, and will be hailed by all engaged in our studies with much fer-
vour. He has also composed a complete Index of all the words con-
tained in it, together with an indication of all the passages, where
they occur. But as yet he is not decided when and where he will
publish it. His catalogue of the Sanskrit MSS. of the Bodleian
is finished in print, excepting the indexes: and these will be com-
pleted he hopes in the course of this year. We shall have then
before us a most excellent work, a real mine of literary intelligence

not to be found any where else.”
Z

172 Literary Intelligence, Sc. [ No. 2,

Dr. Max Miller has been delivering a second course of Lectures
on the Science of Language at the Royal Institution ; the following
is the programme.

Lecture I.—Saturday, February 21st.
Introductory Lecture—On the Method of the Science of Language.
Lucture I].—Saturday, February 28th.
On Sound and Meaning.
Lecture. I11.—Saturday, March 7th.
On the Physiology of Articulate Sounds.
Lecture 1V.—Saturday, March 14th.
On the Causes of Phonetic Variation,

Lecture V.—Saturday, March 2ist.
On Grimm’s Law.

Lecture VI.—Saturday, March 28th.
The Principles of Etymology.
Lucture VII.—Saturday, April 18th.
The Principles of Etymology.
Lecture VIII.—Saturday, April 25th.
On the Powers of Roots.
Lecture 1X.—Saturday, May 2nd.
On Metaphors.

Lucture X.—Saturday, May 9th.
On Ancient Religion.

Lucture XI.—Saturday, May 16th.
On Ancient Mythology.
Lecture XII.—Saturday, May 23rd.
On Modern Mythology.

POSTSCRIPT.

We have just received the following emendation from General
Cunningham of his reading of the inscription on the Peshawur vase,
(vide supra).

Nynee Tal, 4th June, 1863.

This morning I have received a copy of the inscription from Mr.
Lowenthal through the kindness of Colonel Maclagan. This copy
shows an important difference in the reading of one letter, namely
y for s, which gives at once a simple and intelligible meaning to the
record. Instead of Asa thuva, the “ Asa Stupa,” the new reading
gives aya thuva, “this Stupa.”—On a closer examination perhaps a
dot will be found after the y, thus making the word ayam.

PROCEEDINGS

OF THE

ASIATIC SOCIETY OF BENGAL,

For Marcu, 1868.

.

OO

The monthly General Meeting of the Asiatic Society of Bengal
was held on the 4th instant.

Lieutenant-Colonel H. L. Thuillier, President, in the chair.

The Proceedings of the last meeting were read and confirmed.

Presentations were received—

From Captain A. K. Comber, Debrooghur, a fine specimen of the
head and horns of the Takin (Budorcas Taxicolor).

2. From Captain E. Smyth, Futtehgur, the skins of the follow-
ing animals :—

2 Thibet Ravens.

ce Owe
Large Ovis Ammon (female).
Young Ovis Ammon (male).
Snow Leopard (the Ounce).
Thibet Wolf.

>» Hares.

3, From Mr. F. K. Dunbar, a specimen of the Red-tailed Tropic
Bird (young) (Phaeton Gtherus).

4. From Babu Rajendra Mallika, a specimen of the Singapore

DH eS ee fe

Fruit Pigeon.

5. From Mons. Garcin de Tassy, a copy of his translation into
French of a Persian work entitled Mantie Uttair of Farid Uddin Attar,

6. From Major J. Stevenson, Deputy Commissioner of Tavoy,
the skull of a Dolphin, found at the mouth of the Tavoy river, and
the skin of a Hog-fish.

7. From the Secretary Imperial Society of Cherbourg, through
the French Consul at Calcutta, a copy of Vol. VIII. of the Memoirs
of the Society.

174 Proceedings of the Asiatic Society. [No. 2,

8. From Colonel C. 8. Guthrie, a bag prepared from the bark of
the Jack-tree.

The following gentlemen duly proposed at the last meeting were
balloted for and elected ordinary members :—

The Right Hon’ble Sir Charles Trevelyan, K. C. B.; the Hon’ble
A. Eden, C. 8.; Babu Hurry Doss Dutt ; Captain G. Hunter Thomp-
son, Staff Corps; and H. M. Rogers, Esq., C. 8.

The following gentlemen were named for ballot as ordinary mem-
bers at the next meeting :—

Major C. L. Showers, proposed by Mr. Grote and seconded by the
President.

Dr. H. Cleghorn, Conservator of Forests, Madras, proposed by Dr.
Anderson, and seconded by Dr. Fayrer.

Captain D. MacDonald, Revenue Survey Department, proposed by
Major J. L. Sherwill, and seconded by the President.

R.S. Hllis, Esq, C.8., C. B., proposed by Captain W. N. Lees, and
seconded by the President.

C. Robertson, Hsq., C. S., Banda, proposed by Mr. Bayley, and se-
conded by Mr. Atkinson.

John Stephenson, Esq. B. A., Educational Department, proposed
by Mr. H. Woodrow, and seconded by the President.

Dr. Gordon, C. B., Inspector General of H. M.’s Hospitals, propos-
ed by Captain Lees, and seconded by the President.

The Council reported that they had appointed Mr. E. C. Bayley a
Vice-President and Mr. H. F. Blanford a member of their body vice
Colonel Strachey, who had left Calcutta for the North-Western Pro-
vinces.

Communications were received—

1. From Mons. R. de Schlagintweit, a paper entitled Alphabetical
list of the Hot Springs of India and High Asia.

2. From the Assistant Secretary to the Government of India, Fo-
reign Department, extracts from a Report on the Dependency of Bus-
tar, by Captain Glasfurd, Deputy Commissioner of the Upper Goda-
very District, in the Central Provinces, containing an account of the
architectural remains in that region, accompanied by copies of certain
inscriptions referred to therein.

3. From the Under-Secretary to the Government of India, Home
Department, copy of a communication from the Superintendent of

1863. | Proceedings of the Asiatic Society. 175

Port Blair, giving an account of further intercourse with the natives.
Mr. Bayley mentioned that intelligence had since been received,
that the friendly intercourse here reported had been suddenly inter-
rupted, and an unfortunate conflict had occurred in which a European
sailor and a number of the Aborigines had been killed.
_ 4, From Captain Montgomerie a letter on the subject of employ-
ing properly trained natives to explore countries beyond the British
frontier.

The letter was read by Major Walker as follows :—

Camp Ladak, July 28th, 1862.
To THE SECRETARY OF THE Asiatic Socipty, CaLcuTta.

Sir,—lI have now the honor to address you with reference to my
proposal, for employing natives in the exploration of countries which
are not as yet accessible to Huropeans.

I think that for Central Asia, the Mahomedans from our North
Western frontier are most likely to supply the best recruits. For
Great Thibet and other countries, it may, from time to time, be found
expedient to train a different class.

The observations, &c. to be made by such natives should be as sim-
ple as possible. The instrumental equipment should be compact and
not include anything of a complex character. I should propose the
following as the primary objects of their explorations.

1st. —The latitudes of important points.

2nd.—The heights of ditto.

3rd.—A rough route survey from point to point.

4th.—An aceount of each march and of each remarkable place vi-
sited.

For the above I think the following instruments would be sufficient,
ve. >—

Ist.—A sextant and artificial horizon or some instrument adapted
for taking the altitude of the Polar Star, Sun, &c.

2nd.—A small boiling thermometer to determine the lreights of
places.

8rd.—A pocket compass with clinometer.

4th.—A good chronometer watch.

The above skilfully used, and the results honestly recorded, would at
any rate give us an intelligible idea as to the whole of Eastern Tur-
kistan.

176 Proceedings of the Asiatic Society. [No. 2,

Mahomedans of our North-Western frontier are constantly in the
habit of crossing from Ladak into Yarkand, going from thence wid
Kashgar, Kokan, Bokhara, and back by Kabul. The advent of such a
party from Ladak would be taken as a matter of course and would
excite no suspicion.

If we only got the latitude and approximate height of Yarkand and
the other cities of Eastern Turkistan, the result would be very valu-
able as we are in doubt as to the latitude and height of that portion
of Central Asia. As yet the height has been deduced solely from
speculations derived from the products of the country, but the great
difference between the climate of places in the same parallels of lati-
tude in India and China renders the resulting heights vague.

From the conjoint observations of the compass and watch checked
by the latitudes &c., for the direction and time occupied on each
march, I should hope that we would also gain a very fair idea as to the
longitude of the various places. ‘The natives, moreover, could give us
a general account of the country and of the nature of each march.
The compass might also be provided with a clinometer so as to give a
general idea of the slope of the roads.

The great difficulty of the above scheme is of course, to obtain
reliable natives capable of undertaking such journeys and with suffi-
cient nerve to venture into such regions, and who can at the same
time be taught to use the instrument efficiently and to record the
results accurately.

At present I know of but one man* fitted for such work and who
would require a little training, but I do not think it would be very
difficult to get one or two more from Peshawar or elsewhere, who
might be trained to the work ina few months. After being trained,
the party should first make some experiments in a country which we
already know accurately, and as soon as the results prove equal to our
expectations, arrangements should be made for an expedition into an
unknown territory, and I should propose Kastern Turkistan for the
first expedition.

The Nakshabandi Fakir Kwajah Ahmed Shah, who lives in Kash-
mir, is constantly in the habit of travelling in Hastern and Western
Turkistan. He is, at the present moment, I understand, in Yarkand.

* Mirza Sujjad, who was employed by Major Walker on the Peshawar Fron<
tier Survey.

1863.] Proceedings of the Asiatic Society. 177

His son, Gafur Khan, who accompanied him in 1852-53 from Kash-
mir vid Ladak to Yarkand, Kashgar, Kokan and back by Kabul, is
now in Kashmir; both father and son have, in their clerical character,
considerable facilities in moving about Turkistan, where the mass of
the population is Mahomedan, and where the Shah (the son) tells
me they have a good many followers (mureed) of their own, and
would consequently not be likely to be interrupted in their travels.

I should propose that either the father or son should be asked to
undertake the guidance of two trained native explorers, and I under-
stand from the son that they would be willing to undertake such a
charge. He said that he thought that there would be no danger to
natives, who accompanied him into Turkistan.

In order to carry out the above it would be necessary to be provided
with funds for training the explorers. Say, first man on Rs. 80 and two
apprentices on Rs. 20 each per mensem, to be increased when employ-
ed in actual exploration to Rs. 100 and Rs. 30 respectively with tra
velling allowance of say Rs. 10 and Rs. 5 besides, or in all Rs. 110
and Rs. 85 when exploring. The Syud in charge might be given an-
other Rs. 100 per mensem or a present at the end according to the way
in which the exploration was effected, guaranteeing him a minimum
of Rs. 50 per mensem.

Instruments might be provided in duplicate as far as the watch,
thermometer and compass are concerned. It would take, say eight
months to train the natives. The exploring party might leave Kash-
mir on Ist May next. They would reach Yarkand early in July and
might spend July, August, and part of September in exploring Eas-
tern Turkistan and return to Kashmir by the beginning of November.
They would be out for eight months in the expedition, the expense
would hardly exceed Rs. 300 per mensem, even if the head explorer
was accompanied by both the apprentices. Their work could be tested
by Trigonometrical values right up to the Karakoram pass.

The pay of the Syud and of the explorers would of course have to
be separately arranged. I mention the sums above, simply in order
to give the best idea I can as to the cost.

The men should be trained at the Head Quarters of the Grand
Trigonometrical Survey, or at the Head Quarters of one of the Great
Trigonometrical Survey parties.

Ifthe apprentice who accompanied the first explorer turned out

178 Proceedings of the Asiatic Society. [No. 2,

well, he might eventually be put at the head of a second party, and a
third apprentice might be trained and explorations made in various
other directions as required. After Turkistan, I should recommend
exploration to the eastward of the Paukong Lake District, a third in
the Lassa direction and so on, but in each case I should recommend
that explorers be accompanied by some reliable man* who has been
in the habit of visiting the countries in question. For instance I
should think if an expedition is ever sent to Kokan, the Moola
Abdul Majeed, who took the Governor-General’s letter last year,
might be able to take care of the explorers. ‘

The exploration of all the country from Peshawar vid Kabul and
the Sirikol Lake to Kokan would have been a capital commencement,
as for more than half the distance we could have tested the explorers’
work by Lieutenant Wood’s route to Sirikol.

With a small number of trained explorers available, the Asiatic
Society would be justified in asking the Government of India to
allow them always to send one or more native explorers with such
expeditions as the last to Kokan whenever it was considered safe and
expedient to do so.

Recommending the subject to the consideration of the Council of
the Society,

I have, &c.,
(Sd.) T. G. Monrcomeniz, Capt. Engrs.
1st Asst. G. T. Survey of India, in
charge, Kashmir Series.

Major Walker expressed a strong opinion in favour of the plan
suggested, and entered into various details as to the best mode of pro-
ceeding in case the scheme met the approval of Government, as well
as to the time necessary for training natives for such duties. He re-
marked that the positions of certain places not far from our northern
frontier, were uncertain to a very considerable amount of longitude,
and that it would be easy to check the large differences now existing
in the values of some places of note, as recorded by different autho-
rities, if Captain Montgomerie’s plan was carried out, and the native
explorers were trained and instructed and their observations and
routes checked properly, as he would take care they should be.

* Mahomed Amin who accompained Herr Adolphe Schlagintweit and his
brothers, would be an excellent man for ail parts of Turkistan. He knows the
country thoroughly and moves through it at his pleasure,

1863.] Proceedings of the Asiatic Society. 179

The President remarked that the question was one of considerable
interest and importance to the Society ; it had been submitted for the
approval of the Government with the warm support of the Survey
Department, but no orders had yet been received. He trusted that
the Society would co-operate and add the weight of their influence in
inducing the Government to contribute the small means necessary to
carry out the measure. When they referred to the new map of Cen-
tral Asia lately constructed under the direction of Major Walker, and
published in the Surveyor General’s office here, and observed the
comparatively short distance between the British and the Russian
frontier, the growing importance of a better geographical knowledge
of the intervening countries would be apparent. It was a most re-
markable fact that up to the present time, our geographical explora-
tions beyond the British Frontier in almost every direction round
Hindustan, were lamentably limited; this was specially the case on
the North-East frontier round Assam, and the valley of the Brahma-
pootra river, owing to the persevering hostility of the hill tribes against
all Europeans. The employment of qualified natives of India, there-
fore, appeared to present almost the only means, at present likely to
be of any avail, and he, therefore, looked hopefully for much good to
arise from the present movement.

5. From Baboo Gopinauth Sein, abstracts of the results of the
Hourly Meteorological Observations taken at the Surveyor General’s
Office in December last.

6. From the Under-Secretary to the Government of India, in the
Public Works Department, a copy of Major General Cunningham’s
diary as Archxological Surveyor to the Government of India, for the
month of December, 1862.

Extracts from Major General Cunningham’s abstract printed report
of his proceedings as Archeological Surveyor to Government of 1861-
62 were read and commented upon by Mr. Bayley.

The President stated that the proceedings of the Archeological
Surveyor to Government were of the first importance to the Society,
and looking to the interesting contents of the two printed abstract
reports which were only intended as mere diaries to satisfy the
Government as to the progress made, the ultimate value of Major
General Cunningham’s researches might be inferred. Doubtless when
his work was matured and published, it would prove a most valuable

2A

180 Proceedings of the Asiatic Society. [No. 2

?

record of their Society. It was obvious that the history of the ancient
remains scattered over this Presidency could not be in better hands.
He proposed that the special thanks of the meeting be conveyed to
the Government for communicating these reports, accompanied by an
intimation of the very high value which the Society places on Major
General Cunningham’s researches.

The President announced that on the application of the Director of
Public Instruction, the Council had granted the use of the meeting-
room for a course of geological lectures to be delivered by Mr. H. F.
Blanford, and had also permitted the use of such rock specimens and
fossils from the Society’s collections as might be required to illustrate
the lectures.

For Aprin, 1863.

The monthly General Meeting of the Asiatic Society of Bengal
was held on the 1st instant.

Lieutenant-Colonel H. L. Thuillier, President, in the chair.

The proceedings of the last meeting were read and confirmed.

Presentations were received—

1. From Major J. T. Walker, a set of photographs of views in
Kashmir, prepared by Captain Melville.

2. From Captain Melville, a set of photographs, illustrating the
hill tribes on the Peshawur frontier.

3. From the Assistant General Superintendent, North-Western
Provinces and Oudh, a parcel containing Dhatoora Stramonium in its
different forms, as used by the poisoners of Upper India.

4, From A. Grote, Esq., a copy of the first annual report of the
Acclimatisation Society of Victoria.

5. From the same, a centipede (Scolopendra morsitans).

6. From the Assistant Secretary, Government of India, a copy of
the Surveyor General’s Report for 1858-59, 1859-60, 1860-61.

7. From Major C. L. Showers, a copy of his letter to Thomas
Bazley, Esq., M. P., on the cotton question.

8. From Mr. N. S, Maskelyne, a copy of his paper on the fall
of Indian Aerolites, published in the JERE No. of the London
and Edinburgh Philosophical Magazine.

9. From the Vienna Museum, through Mr, Oldham, a box of
meteorites.

1863. ] Proceedings of the Asiatic Society. 181

10. From the British Museum, through Mr. N. 8. Maskelyne,
a small collection of meteoric stones and irons, and a fine series of
models of aerolites which have fallen in India.

Mr. Oldham thought the fact of these beautiful casts of Indian
aerolites being on the table, rendered this a desirable opportunity for
the Society to take cognizance of the hearty co-operation and aid
they had received from Mr. Maskelyne, the chief of the Mineral
Department of the British Museum. He presumed that a formal
acknowledgement would as a matter of course be sent to the Trustees
of the British Museum for the specimens sent in acknowledgement
of the valuable series which the Society had sent to London. But
he thought the Society would fail in its duty, if it did not also
acknowledge the obligations it was under to Mr. Maskelyne for the
zealous and hearty care he had devoted to the examination and
preparation of the specimens.

It would be in the recollection of the Society that some time back,
they had sent to the Vienna Imperial Mineral Cabinet some speci-
mens of aerolites, duplicates of their collection, and that subsequently
they had sent to the British Museum all their meteorites to be cute
and portions retained in the National collection. They were now in
possession of the specimens sent by both those Institutions, in return
for the Indian series.

The first collection forwarded from Vienna was unfortunately lost
by the wreck of the ship in which it had been despatched. To replace
this a second had been made, which, although necessarily not quite so
valuable as that first sent, was still an excellent series. It contained
eight varieties of meteoric stones, and ten of meteoric irons.

The series selected by Mr. Maskelyne of the British Museum
eontained fifteen varieties of stone meteorites, and nine of irons.
The two together made a total of 23 varieties of stones and 19 of
irons. But in these two series there were duplicates of eight falls,
so that deducting those, the Society now possessed in addition to its
own original series of the Indian meteorites, and to the very beauti-
ful casts of other Indian stones now on the table, good typical
specimens of twenty meteoric stones and 14 of meteoric irons.

He might add that the Geological Museum possessed about 45
different varieties of meteorites, so that the Caleutta collections, if
aggregated, contained about 95 good specimens of meteorites. This

2a 2

182 Proceedings of the Asiatic Society. [No. 2,

1

would place the series among the best of second class collections of
such objects.

He had the pleasure of more than once going over all these speci-
mens with Mr. Maskelyne last year, during a brief visit to London,
and he could testify to the zeal with which their wishes had been
carried out. He therefore proposed that the thanks of the Society
be tendered to Mr. N.S. Maskelyne for the care and skill he had
devoted to the examination and preparation of the specimens of
meteorites for the Society’s Cabinet.

The motion was seconded and carried unanimously.

11. From Col. C. S. Guthrie, four MSS. in Persian.

Mr. Cowell remarked that these MSS. were a valuable acquisition
to the Society.

They were—

1.—A _ well-written copy of the Kashful-Mahjib, a work on Sufi
philosophy.

2.——The Diwdn-i- Haider, a very rare MS., but unhappily damaged
by the corrosive character of the ink employed by the copier. There
was no copy of the work in the Society’s library, but in Dr. Sprenger’s
catalogue, mention is made of a Diwdn by Haider of Herat, which
corresponds to the present volume.

3.—Diwdn-i-Sdib.

4.—Ruk at-i-’ Alamgirt, a volume of the letters of the Emperor
Aurangzib. There were three collections of the Kmperor's letters,
of which one had been printed (Kalamdt-i-Taibat). This was a
different collection, and did not seem to be in the Society’s collection.

On the motion of the President, the thanks of the meeting were
voted to Colonel Guthrie, who was present.

A letter from Mr. H. Braddon, intimating his desire to withdraw
from the Society, was recorded.

The nominations of Mr. HE. C. Bayley to be a Vice-President, and
of Mr. H. F. Blanford to be a member of the Council, vice
Colonel R. Strachey, were confirmed.

The Council reported that they had appointed the Hon’ble H. S,
Maine, a member of their body in the place of the Hon’ble C. J-
Erskine, who had left Calcutta.

The following gentlemen, duly proposed at the last meeting, were
balloted for and elected ordinary members :—

1863. ] Proceedings of the Asiatic Society. 183

Major C. L. Showers; Dr. H. Cleghorn; Capt. D. MacDonald ;
How’ble R. S. Ellis, c. s., c. B.; C. Robertson, Hsq., c. 8.; John
Stephenson, Hsq., B. a., and Dr. G. Gordon, c. B.

The following gentlemen were named for ballot as ordinary members
at the next meeting :—

Lieut. H. R. Thuillier, Royal Engineers, first assistant G. T.
Survey, proposed by the President and seconded by Lieut.-Col.
Gastrell.

H. D. Robertson, Esq., c. s., Saharunpore, proposed by Mr. Grote
and seconded by Mr. Atkiuson.

P. W. Wall, Hsq., c. E., F. G.8., proposed by Mr. Schiller and
seconded by Mr. H. FI. Blanford.

W. H. Stevens, Esq., proposed by Lieut.-Col. Gastrell and seconded
by Mr. Leonard.

Dr. J. Tyler, proposed by Dr. Fayrer and seconded by Mr.
Atkinson.

Hon’ble EH. P. Levinge, proposed by Mr. Grote and seconded by
the President.

W. Edgar, Esq. B. ©. 8., proposed by Mr. Blanford and seconded
by the President.

The Secretary announced that the Catalogue of Mammalia was
now ready for issue, price Rs. 2.

Communications were received—

1. From the Secretary to the Government of India, Public Works
Department, forwarding a memorandum by Major General Cunning-
ham containing proposals for carrying on excavations at certain
localities examined by him during the last year, and informing the
Society that His Excellency the Governor-General in Council had
authorized the Governments of Bengal and the North-Western Pro-
vinees to carry these proposals into effect.

Mr. Bayley read extracts from Major General Cunningham’s ©
memorandum, and made some remarks on the subject of his proposals.

2. From Babu Gopinath Sein, an abstract of the result of the
hourly meteorological observations taken at the Surveyor General’s
office, in January last.

Dr. Anderson read extracts from a paper by Dr. Stewart on the
Peshawar valley, having special reference to its flora.

Mr, Oldham moved that the paper be referred to the Committee

184 Proceedings of the Asiatic Society. [No. 2,

of papers, to be considered with a view to publication; Dr. Fayrer
seconded the motion.

The motion was opposed as an unnecessary interference with the
discretion of the Council. It was explained that the paper had
already been dealt with by the Council in the usual way and that it
would be published in due course. The motion had reference to a
difference of opinion that had arisen in the Council as to the mode in
which supervision should be exercised over the Journal, a minority
being of opinion that no paper should be published without a distinct
vote of the Council on a report from the Committee of papers. The
Council having agreed that their present practice fulfilled all the
requirements of the rules and insured all the necessary supervision
over the editorial management of the Journal, it was contended that
their decision should be accepted until it was formally overruled
upon a motion regularly made after due notice given. After a length-
ened discussion, the following amendment was finally carried on the
motion of Mr. Grote :— i

That the present practice of editing the Journal is in harmony with
the Society’s rules, as explained in the following note, and that it is
expedient to adhere to it.

Nory.—Editing our Journal is one of the specific duties imposed
on our Secretaries by Rule 88, and Rule 99, which declares the
Journal to be ‘ under the superintendence of the Council,’ does not, as
I read it, claim for the latter any greater power of interference than
Rule 74 which entrusts to it the ‘direction, management and execu-
tion of the Society’s concerns.’

The Secretary Editor does not contend for an authority above that
of his colleagues in Council, all have the same access to the papers
laid before the Society and the voice of one member of the Council
has no more weight than that of another.

But for greater convenience the Council have, under Rule 77,
appointed a Sub-Committee of papers to assist and advise with
the Secretaries in their duty of editing the Journal. This Sub-
Committee under Rules 79 and 81, is entirely under control of the
Council, whose general power of superintendence under Rule 99 is
thus effectually guarded.

The Librarian submitted his monthly report.

1863.] Proceedings of the Asiatic Society. 185

LIBRARY.

The following are the accessions to the Library since the meeting held in
February last.

Presented.

Annals of Indian Administration Vol. VI. Part 4.—By tur Brnean
GOVERNMENT.

Bijdragen tot de Taal-Land-en Volkenkunde, Zesde Deel, Nos. 1 and 2.
—By THE Batavian AcADEMY.

The Calcutta Christian Observer for Feb. and March.—By THE Ep1itor.

The Principles of Historical Evidence being a Lecture delivered at a meeting
of the Bethune Society by Mr. E. B. Cowell—By tHE AuTHor.

Essai Statistique Generale de la Belgique-—By tur Rev. J. Lone.

Foullke’s Elements of the Saiva Philosophy translated from the Tamil.—
By THE TRANSLATOR.

Garcin de Tassy’s Mantic Uttair ou Le Langage des Oiseaux—Traduit du
Persan De Farid Uddin Attar.—By THE TRANSLATOR.

The General Report on Public Instruction in the Lower Provinces of the
Bengal Presidency for 1861-62 with appendixes.—By tHE DirEcTOR oF
Pustic Instruction.

Educational Map of Bengal 1861-62 with Index.—By THE Samp,

Heera or the Hindoo Widow, a didactic poem by P. C. L. M. Duplessis.
—By tHE AvuTHor.

Journal of the Statistical Society of London, Vol. XXV. Part 4, for De-
cember 1862.—By THE Society.

Journal of the Bombay Branch of the Royal Asiatic Society, Vol. I. Nos.
1 to 3, and Vol. II. No. 10.—By tHE BomBay Soctgry.

Journal Asiatique, Vol. XX. No. 78.—By THE Paris SocirEty.

The Journal of the Chemical Society, Vol. XV. Nos. 10 to 12.—By tHE
Society.

Journal of Sacred Literature and Biblical record No. 4, New Series.—By
THE HDITORS.

Kavyanirnaya or a treatise on Rhetorical composition in Bengali by Lal
Mohun Bhattacharjea.—By Mr. HE. B. Cow2tt.

Muir’s Sanskrit Texts, Part 1—By tux Dirzctor oF Pusiic InstRvc-
TION.

Mineralogical notes and the fall of Indian erolites, by Professor N. 8.
‘Maskelyne and Dr. Viktor Von Lang of the British Museum.—By Mr. N.
S. MaskELYNE.

Map of Central Asia compiled by Major J. T. Walker—By tay Sur-
VEYOR GENERAL or Inpra.

Map of the countries of the Mahsood Wuzeeries.—By THE Same.

186 Proceedings of the Asiatic Society. [No. 2,

Memoires de la Sociéte Impériale des Sciences Naturelles de Cherbourg
Vol. VIII.—By THE Society.

The Oriental Baptist Vol. XVI. Nos. 191, 192, and Vol. XVII. Nos. 193
and 194.—By THe Eprtor.

The Oriental Christian Spectator for December 1862.—By THE EpiTor.

Report of the British Indian Association for December 1862 and January
1863.—By THE AssocraTION.

Report on the Land Revenue Administration of the Lower Provinces for
1861-62.—By THE BrncaL GOVERNMENT.

The Twenty-Second Report of the Proceedings of the Calcutta School

- Book Society, with an appendix.—By Basu Rasenpra Lat Mirra.

Vyakarana Pravesh qieaq Atqt, by Babu Rajendra Lal Mitra.—By
THE AUTHOR.

Report on the Trade and resources of the countries on the North Western
boundary of British India, with maps and a minute on the same by Sir Ro-
bert Montgomery.—By THE PanyaB GOVERNMENT.

General Report on the Revenue Survey Operations of the Bengal Presi-
dency for 1858 and 1861.—By THE GOVERNMENT oF INDIA.

First Annual Report of the Acclimatisation Society of Victoria.n—By Mr,
A. GRoOTE.

Selections from the Records of the Government of India, Public Works
Department, Nos. 35, 36 and 37.—By THE GOVERNMENT oF INDIA.

A letter to T. Bazley, Esq. M. P. on the Cotton question by Major C. L,
Showers, Pamphlet.—By THe AvutTHor.

Diwan Saib.—By Cot. C. 8. GuruRiz.

Diwan Hyder.—By THE Same.

Rookayeat ’Alamgiri—By THE Same.

Kashful Mahjtib.—By THE Samm.

Exchanged.
The Athenzum for December, 1862.
The Calcutta Review for January, 1863.
The London and Edinburgh Philosophical Magazine and Journal, Vol.
XXIV. Nos. 164 and 165.
Purchased.
The Annals and Magazine of Natural History, Vol. XI. No. 61.
The American Journal of Sciences and Arts for November, 1862.

Annuaire des Deux Mondes Histoire Generale des Divers Etats, Vol. XI.
for 1861.

Annals des Sciences Naturelles, Zoologie, Vol. XVIII. Nos. 5 and 6.
Bleeker’s Atlas Ichthyologique, Part 6.
Bopadeva’s Mugdha Bodha Vyékarana with a commentary, 2 copies.

1863. ] Proceedings of the Asiatie Society. 187

Comptes Rendus, Vol. LV. Nos. 25 to 26, and Vol, LVI. No. 1.

The Edinburgh Review for January, 1863.

The Discoveries of the world by Antonio Galvano,- Edited by Vice-Admi-
ral Bethune, C. B.

Hewitson’s Exotic Butterflies, Part 45.

The Natural History Review for January, 1863,

Noldeke’s Hebraische Sprache, Pamphlet.

Nidana Parisishta Myta Ataftrs~ by Haérédhana Kabirdj, 2 copies.

The Parthenon, Vol. I. Nos. 34 to 37.

The Quarterly Review for January, 1863.

Scheref Nameh, Vol. I.

Revue et Magasin de Zoologie, No. 11 of 1862.

Dr. Weber’s. Indische Studien, Vol. Vii. Parts } and 2.

The Westminster Review for January, 1863.

Revue des Deux Mondes for Ist January, 1863.
Latcopar Dutt.

ee
1

JOURNAL

OF THE

moa ES OO LE ye

No En Soa:

eee lee ees

On the Flora of Behar and the mountain Parasnath, with a list of the
species collected by Messrs. Hooxrr, EpGewortu, Tomson and
Anprerson.—-5y Tuomas Anprerson, Esq., M. D. Officiating
Superintendent of the Botanic Gardens, Calcutta.

The Botany of Behar, and especially of Parasnath, the highest
mountain in the province, has been carefully investigated within the
last few years. Dr. Hooker, in 1848, ascended the mountain and
made large collections of plants on it as well as along the Grand
Trunk Road to the river Soane, and in the Kymore hills. Mr. Edge-
worth has also botanized on Parasnath. More recently, Dr. Thom.
son spent a few days on the hill in September, 1858, and added many
species to the number found by Dr. Hooker and Mr. Edgeworth at
another season of the year. In November 1858, Dr. Thomson and
myself visited Parasnath, remaining eight days at the Jain temple
at an elevation of 4000 feet.

We were accompanied by several plant collectors from the Cal-
cutta Botanic Garden, and were thus enabled to make most extensive
collections. We also travelled slowly along the Grand Trunk Road,
both while going to and when returning from Parasnath, and we
thus succeeded in obtaining many plants that had escaped Dr. Thom-
son’s notice at the less favourable season when his previous excursion
was made, The following meagre sketch of the Flora of Behar and

Parasnath, and the list of species collected in the Province are founded

on the results of these botanical investigations. Dr. Hooker has
kindly given me a catalogue of all the plants collected by himself
2B

190 On the Flora of Behar and the mountain Parasnath. | No.8,

and Mr. Edgeworth on the occasions I have alluded to. This cata-
logue contains several important identifications of little known and
difficult species which it would have been impossible to make without
a reference to the Royal Herbarium at Kew.

The dry and hot region of Behar is covered in many parts with
rather a thick forest which always acquires more luxuriance in the
vicinity of the hills with which the country is studded. In some
parts, the vegetation loses its arborescent character and near the
Grand Trunk Road, in many places, patches of land of considerable
extent are covered with numerous species of grasses. In other parts,
especially where the hills are low and less numerous, the trees are
scattered over the face of the country giving a park-like appearance
to the scenery. ‘These trees belong principally to umbrageous, full
foliaged species, among which the commonest are Bassia latifolia,
Semecarpus Anacardium, Terminalia and two species of Urostigma.

The botanical features of the country from Raneegunge to Paras-
nath are deserving of a more detailed description.

On the dry sandstone rocks, common near Raneegunge, the dwarf
palm, Pheniax acaulis, is frequently seen. Along the roadsides, a dusty
avenue of stunted trees of Acacia Furnesiana, with Parkinsonia aculeata
extends for some miles. Phenix syvlestris is almost the only tree
growing spontaneously in the level uninteresting country about
Raneegunge. Tanks, banked up by high bunds of earth covered with
thickly planted trees of Borassus flabelliformis, (the Palmyra palm)
occur near every group of huts. These tanks during many months
of the year are nearly dry, but they all contain a large number of
interesting aquatic plants, the commonest among which are Ipomea
reptans, Pow. Hydrilla dentata, Casp. Vallisneria spiralis, Linn.
Otielia alismoides, DC. and several species of Potamageton, all cos-
mopolitan. Sopubia delphinifolia, G. Don, Adenosma triflora, N. ab
E. Hygrophila salicifolia, N. ab H. and A. spinosa, T. Anders. and
the aquatic fern Cerafopteris thalictroides are seldom absent from
the muddy margins of these tanks. Near the bungalow at Asinsole,
we observed in November several fields covered with the orange-
coloured flowers of Guizotia oleifera, cultivated for its oil-yielding
seeds. Between Raneegunge and the Barakur, no spontaneous ar-
borescent vegetation occurs, at least near the Grand Trunk Road,
but bushes of Zizyphus, Combretum nanum, Ham. and a subscandent

1863.] On the Flora of Behar and the mountain Parasnath. 191

or prostrate Zragia are mingled with stunted semi-spontaneous
plants of Borassus flabelliformis and Phenia« sylvestris.

A short distance beyond the Barakur river, the Grand Trunk
Road enters the low jungle which covers a great portion of Behar.
Grislea tomentosa, Roxb. Butea frondosa, Roxb. Diospyros tomentosa,
Roxb. Carissa Carandas, Linn. Sponia orientalis, Baliospermum poly-
andrum, Wight. and Breidelia spinosa, Willd. are the most preva-
lent species in the lower jungle. Where the hills approach the road,
as at Gyra, trees of Vatica robusta W. and A. Cochlospermum Grossy-
pum D. C. Soymida febrifuga, Juss. Terminalia, Bassia and Symplo-
cos give a more arborescent character to the vegetation, In the
cold season, about November, the slopes of the low hills near Gyra
and Topechancee are whitened by the pale floral leaves of Jchnocar-
pus frutescens, R. Br. a climbing plant belonging to the natural or-
der Apocynacee. During the cold season, the partially dried-up rice-
fields yield a rich harvest of rare and peculiar plants among which
may be mentioned as most characteristic, five species of Ammannia,
Ameletia Indica, three species of Utricularia, and Burmannia.

Parasnath rises somewhat abruptly from the plain of Behar to the
height of 4,500 feet above the sea. The mass of the mountain is
not extensive, but judging from the character of the vegetation on
its slopes, the mountain must exert a considerable influence on the
amount of moisture in the atmosphere. Accordingly, many species
of plants are confined to the mountain and its immediate vicinity
probably from their inability to withstand the hot dry climate of the
plains and lower hills. The influence of the mountain is shown
around the base by the disappearance of the low jungle, its place
being taken by large trees of Dillenia speciosa and D. pentagyna,
Saccopetalwm tomentosum, Sterculia wrens, Terminalia, 2 Myrtaceae,
Vatica robusta, Rubiacee among which, the most conspicuous are
Nauclea parviflora and N. cordifolia.

A few species of Ampelidee, Convolvulacee, especially Porana
paniculata and Erycibe paniculata, with Ichnocarpus frutescens among
Apocynacee, represent the gigantic climbers of the moist forests of
other parts of India. As the sides of the mountain are approached,
the forest becomes denser, the trees larger, and the number of species
more abundant than around the base, TZerebinthacee and Legumi-
noseé are by far the commonest orders, and of the latter the genera

2B 2

192 On the Flora of Behar and the mountain Parasnath. [No. 3,

Dalbergia and Bauhinia occur more frequently than any other. Large
climbers of Leguminose, such as Pueraria tuberosa, Mucuna, Cana-
valia, Otosema macrophylla and Bauhinia Vahli, are most abundant
above 2,000 feet elevation. ‘The undergrowth of these forests con-
sists principally of Leguminous shrubs ; Rubiacee ; Composite of the
genera Vernonia and LBlumea; Acanthacee represented principally
by Strobilanthes auriculatus, Dedalacanthus purpurascens, and Bar-
leria cristata; Scrophularinee and Labiate occur chiefly as incon-
spicuous herbs. Among Serophularinee, two species of Alectra
deserve to be noticed; one of them, a new species, nearly allied
to the African one A. orobanchoides, Benth. occurs in one locality
as a lurid, leafless plant, parasitic on the roots of Strobilanthes
auriculatus.

About 4,000 feet, three species of Aralia appear, but they are con-
fined to the cool, dark ravines. From 4,000 feet to the summit, the
few species representatives of the subtropical vegetation of the moun-
tain ranges of India are found. These species are Clematis Gouriana,
and C. nutans, Lhalictrum glyphocarpum, Berberis Asiatica, Gerani-
um Nepalense, Pygeum lucidum, mihi, Rubia cordifolia, Buchnera
hispida, Habenaria plantaginea and H. commelinifolia, Disporum sp.
None of these species are numerous enough in individuals to give
any character to the vegetation of the summit. Clematis nutans, the
most tropical of them, is most frequently met with. Of Pygewm
lucidum only a solitary tree was found on the mountain, on the
northern side of the central peak.

The distribution of a few of these species is worthy of notice. Cle-
matis nutans is found on the Khasia hills distant, 400 miles from.
Parasnath, and in Kumaon and Gharwal at a distance of 600 miles.

Thalictrwm glyphocarpum is widely distributed over the mountain
ranges of India, viz., the Himalaya, Khasia hills, mountains of south-
ern India and Ceylon. In all these ranges, it never occurs below an
elevation of 6,000 feet whereas in Parasnath it is met with at 4,000
feet.

The nearest point to Parasnath where Berberis Asiatica occurs is
the outer ranges of Kumaon and Gharwal, Parasnath being the
southern limit of this species.

Geranium Nepalense occurs only on a few grassy spots near the
highest peaks of Parasnath and flowers in the cold season, after the 15th

1863.| On the Flora of Behar and the mountain Parasnath. 193

November. This species is found in the Himalayas, the Nilgherries
and the mountains of Ceylon. In the Himalayas it flowers in the
summer months, and its lower limit is 2,000 feet higher than the
summit of Parasnath.

The general resemblance of the Flora of Parasnath to that of the
dry less elevated mountain ranges of central and southern India is
undoubted. To prove this, the following features of that Flora and
of Parasnath are sufficient. The most prominent negative characters
of both these Floras are the absence of Anonacee, Ternstramiacee,
Pittospereacee, Rhamnacee (except Zizyphus), Rosacea, especially
tropical Rubt, Araliacee, Myrsinacee, Cornace, Apocynacee, Laura-
cee, Amentacee, Aroideea, Orchidee and Ferns.

The following orders preponderate in both these Floras, but none
of them give a definite aspect to the vegetation of these districts.

Sterculiacee, Buettneriacee and Tiliacee are proportionally nu-
merous both on Parasnath and in central India. To these may be add-
ed as quite as prominent in the vegetation, Olacinee ; Terebinthacee
especially in number of genera; Leguminose ; Combretacee, Lythra-
cee, Rubiacee, Composite, especially the genera Vernonia, and Blu
mea; Convolvulacee ; Cordiacee and Graminee.

The fact of a few peculiar genera and species being common to
both these Floras is of more importance as a proof of the affinity of
the vegetation of the two regions than deductions drawn from the
excess of certain orders. I enumerate the most important of these
genera or species which are either identical in species or have repre-
sentative and allied species in each Flora.

Kydia calycina fovb., in both.
Cochlospermum Gossypium, DC. ditto.
Eriolena Hookeriana, W. and A. ditto.

Olax scandens, Rowb., ditto.

Ougeina dalbergioides, Benth., ditto.
Hardwickia binata, Rowé., ditto.
Dedalacanthus purpurascens, 7. Anders. ditto.

The following genera are common to both Floras having closely

allied species in each.
Pygeum,
EHlzodendron,
Zizyphus,

194 On the Flora of Behar and the mountain Parasnath. | No.3,

Sophora,
Terminalia,
Cordia,
Ehretia.

Both these lists might be much increased, especially if the geogra-
phical distribution in India of the species of Graminez was better
known.

The following table of the number of species in a few of the
larger natural orders will shew how much Leguminose and Graminez
exceed the others. The materials of the entire Flora of Behar are
the basis of the tables. ;

Natural orders. Genera. Species.
Leguminose, 44, 89
Graminez, 47 84
Composite, 28 47
Rubiacez, 16 27
Scrophularinee, 18 26
Labiateze, 16 24
Acanthacez, 15 23
Euphorbiace, 15 23
Cyperace, 13 20
Convolvulacee, 9 16
Malvacee, 6 13
Lythrace, 6 13
Urticacer, Te 11
Orchidacez, 8 J
Tiliacez, 3 10

The remainder of the Natural Orders have under ten species each.

The total number of species included in this Catalogue is 738
belonging to 473 genera and 110 Natural orders.

These are distributed in the three classés in the following numbers.

Genera. Species.
Dicotyledones, 059 560
Monocotyledones, 96 157
Cry ptogamee, 18 21
APPENDIX.

During eight days that Dr. Thomson and I remained at the Jain
temple on Parasnath, at an elevation of 4,000 feet a few observations

1863.] On the Flora of Behar and the mountain Parasnath, 195

on the height of the barometer and on the temperature of the air
were recorded. I am not aware of any other observations taken
during November having been published, I have therefore inserted
them at length as they may be useful in comparing the climate of
the cold season of Parasnath with that of other periods of the year.
The instruments used were a mountain barometer by Newman, a
delicate thermometer by the same maker, and a good minimum
thermometer.

Record of Barometric and Thermometric Olservations.

Detached
Date. | Hour. | Barome-| Thermo-| Thermo-
ter. meter. | meter.
Noy.
13th | 9 P.M. Bh 300 57° =| Air still, sky cloudless.
Min.
WAth | Ther. 500 ake ae »)
.M. \ 26.222 3 57.
ss "22m. | 26149 | 60° | 59° | Gentle northerly breeze all
i 4p. mM. | 26.143 | 60° 60:5 || ye
“p 6 P.M. | 26.155 58° Ome ty)
i 8 P.M. | 26.208 | 58° 52°
15th Min ane 000 47°
S 8 a.m. | 26.222 | 58° 50°
» {104.m. | 26.241 | 60° 56.5
pe 3 P.M. | 26.167 61° 61.5 |Light clouds & northerly breeze.
a 4p. M. | 25.158 61° 59.5 |Light clouds & southerly breeze.
i 6 P.M. | 26.188 | 60° 57° -|Ditto ditto.
is 8 P. M. | 26,224 | 59° 56° =| Ditto ditto.
16th Min ate 000 52°
im 8 a.m. | 26.238 | 58° 54°
- 10 a. M. | 26.265 60.5 60.5 |Southerly winds, light clouds

over the Peak.

» 2P.M. | 26.203 62° 62°
e 4 P.M. | 26.182 61.5 62° =| Light clouds.
i 6 P.M. | 26.201 | 60° 57°
a 8 P.M. | 26.256 60° 56° |Wind variable.
17th Min, ie cee 55° Slight mist on the summit
during night.
45 6 A. M. toe tae 56°
i 8 a. M. | 26.282 59° 57° ‘|Strong northerly breeze blow-
ing, while a marked upper
southerly current of air pass-
ed close to the summits of
the mountain.
oa 22. M. | 26.209 65.5 63.5
‘g 4pm. | 26.200 | 62° 63°
c 6 P.M. | 26.217 62° 60.5
‘A 8 P.M. | 26.253 | 62° 60°

196 On the Flora of Behar and the mountain Parasnath. {|No.8,

Catalogue of the plants collected in Behar and on Parasnath.—By
J. M. P. Enaeworrn, Esg., Des. Hooker, Tuomson, and T.
ANDERSON.

DICOTYLEDONES.
I.—RANUNCULACE.
Naravelia Zeylania, DC., base of Parasnath.
Clematis Gouriana, Zoxvb., upper portion of Parasnath.
nutans, Hoyle, ditto ditto ditto.
Thalictrum glyphocarpum, W. and JA., near the temple on Paras-
nath.
Ranunculus sceleratus, L.
IT.—DILLENIACEz.
Dillenia speciosa, Thunb.
pentagyna, Roxb., base of Parasnath.
ITE.—ANonacea.
Polyalthia suberosa, Hf. f. e¢ Benth.
Saccopetalum tomentosum, H. f. et. T., base of Parasnath.
IV.—MENISPERMACER,

Tiliacora acuminata, AWers.
Cocculus villosus, DC,
Stephania hernandifolia, Walp.
Cissampelos Pareira, L.
V.—BERBERIDACEE.
Berberis Asiatica, owvb., summit of Parasnath.
VI.—NyMpPu maces.
Nymphea Lotus, LZ.
———— stellata, Willd.
VII.—-NELUMBIACE.
Nelumbium speciosum, Willd.
VIIT.— PAPAVERACES.
Papaver somniferum, L.
‘Argemone Mexicana, L.
IX.—FUMARIACER.
Fumaria parviflora, Lam.
X.—CRUCIFERA,
Nasturtium Indicum, LZ.
—— — Penghalense, DC.

1863.] On the Flora of Behar and the mountain Parasnath. 197

Cochlearia flava, Ham., banks of the Soane.

Thlaspi arvense, L.

Lepidium sativum, JZ.

Sinapis juncea, L.

Brassica campestris, L.
XI.—CappaRrIDACED.

Cleome monophylla, L.

pentaphylla, Z.
Polanisia viseosa, DC.
Capparis horrida, L.
XIL.—FLAcoURTIACE®.
Flacourtia sepiaria, Fovd.
sapida, Roxb.
cataphracta, Roxb.
Casearia Hamiltonu, Wall.
— tomentosa, Loxb.

Cochlospermum Gossypium, DC., Grand Trunk Road and base of
Parasnath.
XITI.—Potye@aLacra.

Salomonia oblongifolia, DC.
Polygala glaucescens, Wall., summit of Parasnath.

oligophylla, DC.
———- arvensis, Willd.

XIV.—VIoLacex

Tonidium suffruticosum, Ging.

XV.—DROSERACES.
Drosera indica, Z., summit of Parasnath.

XVI.—TaMaRIcaces.
Trichaurus ericoides, W. & A.
XVIJ.—CaRYOPHYLLACER.

Vaccaria parviflora, Aoench.
Mollugo Cerviana, Ser.

striata, L.

triphylla, Lam.
Polycarpxa corymbosa, Lam.
Hapalosia Loeflingie, Wall,
Drymaria cordata,

198 On the Flora of Behar and the mountain Parasnath. [No. 3,

XVIII.—Linacez.
Linum usitatissimum, LZ.
Reinwardtia trigyna, Planch., base of Parasnath.
XIX,.—Matvacen.
Abutilon Indicum, Don.
Sida cordifolia, Z.
humilis, Willd.
—— rhombifolia, Z.

acuta, L.

Abelmoschus moschatus, Aloench.

— cancellatus, Roxb.
Hibiscus Lampas, Cav.

rigidus, L.
Urena lobata, Z.
repanda, Sm., Grand Trunk Road.
— sinuata, Z., ditto ditto ditto.
Lagunea lobata, Willd., ditto ditto ditto.

XX.—STERCULIACER.

Salmalia malabarica, Schott & Endl.
Helicteres Isora, Z., base of Parasnath.

Sterculia foetida, Z., lower forests of Parasnath.
urens, Roxb., ditto ditto ditto.
Firmiana colorata, #. Br., ditto ditto ditto.
Melochia corchorifolia, Z., Grand Trunk Road.
Waltheria Indica, Z.
Kydia calycina, Rowb., Parasnath to 4,000 feet.
X XI.—ByTrNeRIAcez.
Byttneria herbacea, Rowb., Gyra.
Eriolena Hookeriana, W. & A., summit of Parasnath.
spectabilis, Planeh.
XXII.—Tiniaces.
Corchorus capsularis, L.

acutangulus, Lam.

olitorius, Z.
Triumfetta pilosa, Roth. ?

angulata, Lam.
Grewia pilosa, Lam., summit of Parasnath.
levigata, Vahl., Grand Trunk Road.

1863.] On the Flora of Behar and the mountain Parasnath. 199

Grewia helicterifolia, Wall.
Asiatica, Z., Grand Trunk Road and Parasnath. _
vestita, Wail. ? summit of Parasnath.

XXIII.—DrpreRocarPen.
Vatica robusta, W. gf A., Grand Trunk Road.

XXIV.—OLACINES.
Olax scandens, Roxb., base of Parasnath.
Balanites Roxburghi, RB. & S.
XXV.—AURANTIACED.

Glycosmis pentaphylla, DC., Parasnath.
Murraya exotica, L.
Feronia elephantum, Corr.
fKigle marmelos, Corr.

XXVI.—Ma.LPicHiacez.
Hiptage madablota, Gertz.

XXVII.—SapPiInpacEez.

Cardiospermum Halicacabum, L.
Nephelium duriocarpus, Lows.
Schleichera trijuga, Willd., lower forests of Parasnath.

XXVITI.—Metiaces.
Melia Azedarach, Z.
Azadirachta Indica, Adr. Juss., base of Parasnath.
Mallea Rothii, ddr. Juss, summit of Parasnath.
XXIX.—CEDRELACER,
Chickrassia tabularis, 4dr. Juss., Parasnath, from base to summit.
Soymida febrifuga, Juss.
XXX.—AMPELIDER.
Leea staphylea, Roxb. )
Vitis adnata, Wall. ? |
—- carnosa, Wall. ¢ Base and lower forests of Parasnath.
—— latifolia, Roxb. i
— tomentosa, Heyne.
XXXIJI.—GERANIACER,
Geranium Nepalense, Sweeé., summit of Parasnath.

XXXII.—OxaLIDEs.
Oxalis corniculata, L.
Biophytum sensitivum, DC., base of Parasnath.

200 On the Flora of Behar ond the mountain Parasnath. [No. 3,

XXXIII.—Batsaminen.
Impatiens Balsamina, Z., upper forests of Parasnath.
XXXIV.—ZyYGoOPHYLLACER.
Tribulus terrestris, Z.
XXXV.-—CELASTRINEA.
Celastrus paniculata, Willd.
emarginata, Willd.
Elzodendron Roxburghii, W. & A.
XXXVI.—RHAMNACER.
Zizyphus rugosa, Lam., upper forests of Parasnatl:.
Xylopyra, Willd.? ? base of Parasnath.
Lotus, Lam.
Jujuba, Lam. ? Grand Trunk Road.
(Enopila, Adi7/.
Ventilago maderaspatana, Gaertn.
Catha edulis, Férsk.? ? Grand Trunk Road.
XXXVII.—'PEREBINTHACER.
Mangifera Indica, Z., below the temple on Parasnath.
Semecarpus Anacardium, Z.
Buchanania tatifolta, Rowb., base of Parasnath and Trunk Road.
Icica Indica, W. & A.
Garuga pinnata, Roxb. ? base of Parasnath.
Odina Wodier, Roxb.
Boswellia thurifera, Colebr.
XXXVIIT.—Morineaces.
Moringa pterygosperma, Gaertn.
XXXIX.—LEGUMINOS”.
Crotalaria prostrata, Roxb.
acicularis, Ham., near Topechance.
alata, Roxb.
sericea, Retz.
verrucosa, L.

——_——_ juncea, L.
albida, Heyne.
Indigofera linifoha, Retz.
pentaphylla, Z- } orn Trunk Road.
hirsuta, Z.
pulchella, Rowb., from 2,000 feet elevation to summit

of Parasnath.

1863.] On the Flora of Behar and the mountain Parasnath. 201

Indigofera trita, D.
Psoralia corylifolia, L.
Sesbania egyptiaca, L.
Tephrosia purpurea, Pers.
Lathyrus sativa, D.
Smithia sensitiva, A7t.

ciliata, Zoyle., summit of Parasnath.
conferta, Sm.

Zornia angustifolia, Sm.

Aischynomene Indica, L.

Ougenia dalbergioides, Benth., summit of Parasnath.
Alysicarpus vaginalis, DC.

—_— —-— nummularifolius, DC.

———_—— bupleurifolius, DC.

scariosus, Girah.
Uraria lagopoides, DC. 7
hamosa, Wall.

? styracifolia, W. f A.
Dendrolobium cephalotis, Benth. )

Desmodium triflorum, DC., Grand Trunk Road.

— polycarpum, DC., from the base to summit of Paras-
nath.

|
' Along the Grand Trunk Road.

——— — gyrans, DC.
— latifolium, DC., from the base to 2,000 feet on Paras-
nath,
—— —— diffusum, DC., lower forests of Parasnath.
gangeticum, DC., on Parasnath.
retroflexum, DC., Var.
Phyllodium pulchellum, Devs., base of Parasnath.
’ Dumasia congesta, Girah.
Pueraria tuberosa, DC.
Alhagi maurorum, Z., Grand Trunk Road.
Glycine labialis, W. dg A., base of Parasnath.
Canavalia gladiata, DC.
Mucuna pruriens, Wail.
Erythrina Indica, Lam.
sublobata, Road.
Butea frondosa, Roxb,

202 On the Flora of Behar and the mountain Parasnath. [No. 3,

Butea parviflora, Roxb.
Lablab vulgaris, Save.
Phaseolus sublobatus, Roxb.
sp. proxima P. alato, Roxb., Parasnath.
Atylosia scarabeoides, Benth., Grand Trunk Road.
Rhynchosia minima, DC.
Flemingia strobilifera, R. Br., Parasnath.
— semialata, Roxb.

angustifolia, Roxvb., Parasnath.
cordifolia, Wall.

Abrus precatorius, LZ. —

Otosema macrophylla, Benth.

Pongamia glabra, Vent.

Dalbergia latifolia, Roxb.
Sissoo, Roxb.

———— frondosa, Roxb.

-———— paniculata, Roxb.

— confertiflora,
Sophora heptaphylla, Z.? ?
Guilandina bonducella, Z.
Mezoneuron cucculatum.
Cassia occidentalis, LZ.
tora, L.
mimosoides, L.
Tamarindus Indica, Z.

Phanera purpurea, Benth.
variegata, Benth.
retusa, Benth.
Vahliu, Benth.

Piliostigma malabaricum, Benth.

— racemosum, Benth.
Hardwickia binata, Hoxb., upper Soane valley.
Adenanthera Pavonina, L.
Mimosa rubicaulis, Lam.
Acacia Farnesiana, Willd.
Catechu, Willd.
cesia, W. & A.

—— pennata, Willd.

1863.] On the Flora of Behar and the mountain Parasnath. 208

Albizzia odoratissima, Benth.

amara, Bois.
-———-— procera, Benth.

XL.—RoOSsAcEz.

Potentilla supina, L. banks of the Soane.
Pygeum lucidum, T. Anders., MSS., summit of Parasnath at
4,300 feet elevation.

XLI.—CoMBRETACES.

Conocarpus latifolia, Roxb.
Terminalia belerica, Zoxb.
chebula, Roxb.
Catappa.

— eee

citrina, Rowb.
Pentaptera tomentosa.
Arjuna, Roxb. ?
Poivrea Roxburghu, DC.
Combretum nanum, Ham., Grand Trunk Road.

XLII.-—MELASTOMACER.

Osbeckia angustifolia, Don., summit of Parasnath.
——— muralis Naud, ditto ditto.

XLITI.—ALANGIACER.

Alangium decapetalum, Zam., Grand Trunk Road.

XLIV.—Myrracez.

Eugenia Jambolana, Lam., Parasnath from the base to the summit,
sp. summit of Parasnath.
Barringtonia acutangula, Roxb.

XLV.—LYTHRACER.

Jussiaea repens, LD.

Caine ore | From the base of Parasnath to an
ngs r elevation of 4,000 feet in net places

— angustifolia, Lam. | near the Grand Trunk Road.

Ludwigia parviflora, Rovb. )

Grislea tomentosa, Roxb., Grand Trunk Road & base of Parasnath,

Lagerstromia parviflora, Rovb., base of Parasnath.

204 On the Flora of Behar and the mountain Parasnath. { No. 3,

Ameletia Indica, DC. )
tenuis, We.
Ammanunia glauca, Wall.

In rice fields near the Grand
vesicatoria, Roxb. | Trunk Road at Topechancee.

multiflora, Roxb. |

— pentandra, Roxb.
rotundifolia, Ham. J
XLVI.—CucurBItaces.
Trichosanthes dioica, Roxb.

—

cucumerina, Z., base of Parasnath.
Bryonia scabrella, Z.

——- umbellata, Koen., summit of Parasnath.

— laciniosa, Z., on the Grand Trunk Road.
Coccinia Indica, W. & A.
XLVII.—CrassuLacrs.

Kalanche floribunda, W. & A., summit of Parasnath.
Bryophyllum calycinum, Salisb.

XLVIII.—UMBELLIFER S.
Umbellifera (undeterminable,) summit of Parasnath.

XLIX.—ARALIACER.

Aralia digitata, Roxb., summit of Parasnath.
sp., on Parasnath at 4,000 feet elevation.

==Isps on Parasnath at 2,000 feet elevation.
‘L.—LoRANTHACES.
Viscum orientale, Willd.
— attenuatum, DC.
Loranthus buddleoides, W. & A., from the base to the summit

at the base of Parasnath.

of Parasnath.
— bicolor, Rowxb., base of Parasnath.
LI.—RvsBiacez.

Nauclea parviflora, Rowb.,

forest the bas Ana cuehe
— cordifolia, Rowb., ; orests on the base of Parasnath

Hymenodyction excelsum, Wall., on Parasnath at 2,000 feet eleva-
tion.
Gardenia latifolia, A7t. ”
See ae: ‘ base of Parasnath.
turgida, Roxb.
montana, ford. _)

See

ho

1863.| On the Flora of Behar and the mountain Parasnath. 05

Randia longispina, DC.

uliginosa, DC.

Wendlandia tinctoria, DC.

exserta, DC.

Dentella repens, Forst., moist places on the Grand Trunk Road.
Hedyotis scandens, Rowb.

ee

cealycina, Wall.
— pinifolia, Wail.
Oldenlandia racemosa, Lam.

Burmanniana, R. Br.

Vanqueria spinosa, Roexb., base of Parasnath.

Hamiltonia suaveolens, Rovb., summit of Parasnath.

Ixora undulata, Rowb., forests at the base of Parasnath.
parviflora, Vahl., near Gya on the Grand Trunk Road.

Pavetta tomentosa, Sim., at the base of Parasnath.

Bigelowia lasiocarpa, W. § A., from the base to the summit of
Parasnath.

Spermacoce articularis, Z.

‘Knoxia cosymbosa, Willd.

n. sp.
Rubia cordifolia, Z., on Parasnath.
LII.—ComeosirT”.
Vernonia saligna, DC.,on Parasnath (found only by Dr. Hooker.)
———— rigiophylla, DC., at the base of Parasnath.
divergens, H. f. et. 7., near the summit of Parasnath.

————- aspera, DC.

cinerea, Less.
— anthelmintica, Willd.
Elephantopus scaber, LZ.

Adenostemma latifolium, DC., summit of Parasnath.
Spheranthus hirtus, Willd.

Grangea Madraspatana, Poir.

Cyathocline lyrata, Cass.

Conyza viscidula, Wail.

veronicefolia, DO,
Blumea amplectans, DC.
Wightiana, DC,
lacera, DC.

206 On the Flora of Behar and the mountain Parasnath. [No.8,

Blumea runcinata, DC.
virens, DC.
——— flava, DC.

—- aurita, DC.

—— oxyodonta, DC.
—— glomerata, DC.

— alata, DC.

Vicoa Indica, Wt.
Francceuria crispa, Cass.
Cesulia axillaris, Roxb.
EKclipta alba, Hassk.
Blainvillea latifolia, DC.
Glossocardia Boswellii, DC.
Bidens pilosa, L.

— bipinnata, L.
Glossogyne pinnatifida, DC.
Wedelia urticzfolia, DC.
Siegesbeckia orientalis, L.
Myricgyne minuta, DC.
Artemisia parviflora, Roxb.
Senecio sp. not determinable, summit of Parasnath.
Gnaphalium luteo-album, L.
erispatulum, Del.

— indicum, Z.
Emelia sonchifolia, DC.
Sonchus arvensis, L.
Youngia runcinata, DC.
Kchinops echinatus, Roxb.
Tricholepis Candolleana, W¢.
Microrhynchus ruderalis, Less.
asplenifolius, DC.
LITI.—CampanvuLiaces.

—_

Cephalostigma hirsutum, 4. DC.
paniculatum, A. DC.

Campanula canescens, Wall.

Wahlenbergia agrestis, 4. DC.

Lobelia trigona, Roxb.

Micropyxis pumila, Duby., summit of Parasnath.

1863.] On the Flora of Behar and the mountain Parasnath. 207

LIV.—MYyRrsInacen.
Embelia robusta, Roxb., lower forests to the summit of Parasnath.
Ardisia humilis, Vahl., ditto ditto ditto.
LV.—EBENACER.
Diospyros tomentosa, Roxb.
cordifolia, Rowd.
exculpta, Haim.
LVI.—Savoraces.
Bassia butyracea, Roxb.
LVII.—JasMinacn.
Nyctanthes arbor-tristis, L., lower forests of Parasnath.

LVITI.—Oxraces.
Olea Roxburgh, &. g¢ S., summit of Parasnath.

LIX.—StyRacacez.
Symplocos Hamiltonianus, Herb. Sérach. et Winter, Gyra.

LX.—APOCYNACER.
Carissa Carandas, D.
Vallaris dichotoma, Vahl.
Wrightia tomentosa, DC., at the base of Parasnath.
Holarrhena antidysenterica, Wall.
Ichnocarpus frutescens, &. Br.
Vinea pusilla, Murr. Gyra on the Grand Trunk Road.

LXI.—ASCLEPIADACER.
Hemidesmus Indicus, &. Br.
Cryptolepis Buchananii, #. e¢ 8.
Cynoctonum Callialata, Dene., at the summit of Parasnath.
Calotropis gigantea, &. Br.
Asclepias curassavica, L.
Gymnema hirsutum, W. 5 A.
Hoya pendula, W. & A., from the base to 3,500 feet on Parasnath.
Ceropegia sp. undeterminable, summit of Parasnath.

LXII.—Loe@antacen.

Strychnos potatorum, L. il.

LXIIJI.— GEntianacen.
Exacum pedunculatum, L.
———-~ petiolare Grieseb, summit of Parasnath.
Pladera pusilla, Roxb.

2D 2

208 On the Flora of Behar and the mountain Parasnath. |No.3,

Canscora diffusa, R. Br.
—— decussata, RP. et S.
LXIV.—Bienontacez.

Heterophragma Roxburgliui, DC.? Forest at the base of Paras-
nath.

Stereospermum chelonioides, DC.? Forest at the base of Paras-
nath.

Schrebera Swietenioides, Roxb.

LXV.—PrEDALIACES.

Sesamum Indicum, Z.
Martynia diandra, Glow.

LXVI.—CyRtanDRAcen.
/Aschynanthus, sp., summit of Parasnath.
Rhynchoglossum obliquum, DC., summit of Parasnath.

LXVIIl.—Hypropuyvipiacenm.

Hydrolea Zeylanica, Vahl., along the Grand Trunk Road.
Sphenoclea Zeylanica, L.

LXVIII.—ConvonvuLaces.
Rivea hypocrateriformis, Chois.
Bona Nox, Choris.
Argyreia setosa, Chois.
Pharbitis Nil, Chovs, summit of Parasnath.
Tpomeea reptans, Pozr.

reniformis, Chovs.
——— tridentata, Roth. Gyra.
——— pestigridis, L.

—— sessiliflora, Roth.

obscura, Kerr.

sepiaria, Ken., Topechancee.

Convolvulus pluricaulis, Chovs.

Porana paniculata, Rowxb., on Parasnath to an elevation of 2,000
feet.

Evolvulus alsinoides, Z.

Erycibe paniculata, Roxb,

Cuscuta reflexa, Roxb.

LX1IX.—Corpiace#.
Cordia polygama, Roxb. ?
o—— sp. (an C. Macleodii H. f. et T.) Gyra.

1863.| On the Flora of Behar and the mountain Parasnath. 209

Ehretia levis, Roxb. .
ovalifolia, Wight.
——— viminea, Wall.

LXX.—BorRRAGINER.
Coldenia procumbens, L.
Bothriospermum tenellum, Fisch et Mey.
Cynoglossum micranthum, Desf, from 2,000 feet to the summit
of Parasnath.
Trichodesma Indicum, &. Br.
——— Zeylanicum, R. Br.
LXXI.—SonanacEs.
Solanum Xanthocarpum, Schrad.
torvum, Swartz.
LXXII.—ScroPHvuLaRInes.
Celsia coromandeliana, Vahl.
Linaria ramosissima, Wall.
Alectra Indica, Bth., towards the summit of Parasnath.
squamosa, 7. Anders. MSS., from 1—38,000 feet elevation
on Parasnath. Parasitic on roots of Strobilanthes auriculatus.
Mazus rugosus, Louwr.

Lindenbergia urticeefolia, Lehm., Parasnath to 4,000 feet elevation,
Limnophila gratioloides, #. Br.
Herpestes Hamiltoniana, Benth., Topechancee.
Monniera, H. B. K.
Torenia cordifolia, Roxb. | Grassy places on the summit of Paras-

sp. (an nova.) nath.
Vandellia crustacea, Bth.
-——— erecta, Bth.

nummularifolia, Don.
Ilysanthes parviflora, Bth.
Bonnaya brachiata, Link., et Otto.
-— veronicefolia, Spreng.

verbeneefolia, Spreng.
Glossostigma spathulatum, Arn.
Scoparia dulcis, L.
Buddleia asiatica, Lowr.
Buchnera hispida, Ham., above 4,000 feet on Parasnath.
Striga euphrasioides, Bth.

210 On the Flora of Behar and the mountain Parasnath. | No. 8,

Sopubia delphinifélia, G. Don., in pools of water along the Grand
Trunk Road.

Centranthera hispida, R. Br.

———-- humifusa, Wall.

LXXIII.—OroBancuacen.
Phelipza Indica, G. Don.
AAginetia Indica, Roxb.
LXXIV.— LEntipuLaRiacenm.

Utricularia stellaris, Z.

— sp. In a marshy place near Gyra.

— sp.
LXXV.—ACANTHACER.
Nelsonia tomentosa, Willd.
Adenosma triflora, VV. ab H.
Hygrophila salicifola, WV. ab LE.
-— spinosa 7. Anders.
Ruellia cernua, Roxb., lower forests of Parasnath.
Petalidium barlerioides, WV. ab L., base of Parasnath.
Hemiagraphis elegans, VV. ab ZH.
Strobilanthes auriculatus, WV. ab LH.
Dedalacanthus purpurascens, 7. Anders. from the base to the
summit of Parasnath.
Barleria coerulea, Hoxb.

cristata, LD.

Lepidagathis hyalina, 1. ab E.

— cristata, Wilid., along the Grand Trunk Road.
— striata, WV. ab LH.

Andrographis paniculata, VV. ab LH.

—————- echioides, WV. ab H.

Justicia Adhatoda, Z.

—-— Betonica, L.

Ce eememmnioaeed

procumbens, L.
Peristrophe bicalyculata, WV. ab H.
Rungia parviflora, WV. ab H.
Dicliptera bupleuroides, WV. ab H. ?
micrantha, WV. ab E., 'Topechancee.
LXXVI.—VERBENACER.
Callicarpa arborea, Lowb., lower forests of Parasnath.

1863.] On the Flora of Behar and the mountain Parasnath. 211

Clerodendron serratum, Spreng., at the base of Parasnath.

——-—— infortunatum, JZ.

Vitex Negundo, L., Gya.

peduncularis, W#all., at the base of Parasnath.
LXXVII.—Lapiara.

Ocimum Basilicum, ZL.

Acrocephalus capitatus, Benth.

Orthosiphon rubicundus, Benth., Topechancee.
Plectranthus ternifolius, Don.

cordifolius, Don.

Coleus barbatus, Benth.

Anisochilus carnosus, Wall.

eriocephalus, Benth., Kymore hills J. D. Hooker.
Pogostemon plectranthoides, Desf.

Dysophylla verticellata, Benth.

Colebrookia oppositifolia, Smith.

Calamintha umbrosa, Benth. ?

Nepeta ruderalis, Hamilt.

Anisomeles ovata, #&. Br., summit of Parasnath.

Leueas lanata, Benth.

mollissima, Wall.

—

pilosa, Benth.

— aspera, Spreng.

nutans, Spreng.

cephalotes, Spreng.

hinifolia Spreng,.
Leonotis nepetfolia, &. Br.
Teucrium decumbens.
Ajuga macrosperma, Wall. ? summit of Parasnath.
LXXVIII.—Prumpacinacesn.
Plumbago Zeylanica, L.
LXXIX.—Lavracea.
Cassytha filiformis, Z. along the Grand Trunk Road.
Tetranthera (an T. apetala.)
LXXX.—Ponyeonacea,
Rumex dentatus, Campd.

vesicarius, L.
Polygonum herniarioides, Delile.

212 On the Flora of Behar and the mountain Parasnath. [No. 8,

Polygonum glabrum, Willd.

-—— chinense, Z., from the base to the summit of Parasnath.
Roxburghiu, Weisn.

———— flaccidum, Rowb., on Parasnath at elevation 4000 feet.

—

barbatum, Z., Gyra and Topechancee.

——————

oot

Nepalense, Meisn., towards the summit of Parasnath.
LXXXI.— CHENOPODIACER.
Chenopodium album, L.
LXXXIT.—AMARANTACER.
Derringia celosioides, A. Br.
Celosia argentea, L.
Amarantus spinosus, L.
frva scandens, Wall., on Parasnath at 4000 feet elevation.
— lanata, Juss.

Achyranthes aspera, LD.
—-— bidentata, Bluwme., from the base to the summit of
Parasnath,
Pupalia lappacea, Moq.
Alternanthera sessilis, R. Br.
LXXXIIT.—Nyrcraginen.
Boerhaavia diffusa, L.
LXXXIV.—PIPERAces.
Peperomia reflexa, A. Dietr. on trees at 4000 feet elevation on
Parasnath.

LXXXV.—STILAGINACES.
Antidesma diandrum, Spreng.
paniculatum, Spreng.
LXXXVI.—ScEPAcEa.
Lepidostachys Roxburghi, Wall.
LXXXVII.—Unrticacez.
Trophis aspera, Willd.
Urtica heterophylla, Roxb.
Bheemeria, sp., on Parasnath.
Urostigma religiosum, Guss.
— bengalense, Guss.
— tomentosa, Guss.

—— comosum, at 2,500 feet elevation on the Northern slope
of Parasnath.

1863.] On the Flora of Behar anid the mountain Parasnath. 213

Ficus parasitica, Koen.
— scandens, Roxb.

Covellia cunea, Wq.
Artocarpus Lacucha, Roxb.
LXXXVIII.—UtMacern.
Sponia orientalis, Hndl.
Ulmus integrifolia, Roxb.
LUXXXIX.— HupHoRBIACES.

Kuphorbia chamesyce, Willd.

— Indica, Lam.
——- Nivulia, Ham.

— uniflora, Roxb.
Microstachys chamelea, Juss.
Tragia, along the Grand ‘Trunk Road.
Acalypha Indica, Willd., (fid. Edgew.)
Baliospermum polyandrum, Wight.
Rottlera tinctoria, Roxb.
Trewia nudiflora, Linn.
Croton oblongifolia, Roxb.
Crozophora Rottleri, Juss.
Emblica officinalis, Gert.
Phyllanthus urinarius, Willd.
simplex, Willd.
—- Niruri, Lina.

polyphyllus, Wight.

=

a ee

Anisonema multiflorum, Wight.
Bradleia (52 herb. Hook. et cat.)
Briedelia montana, Willd.
— spinosa, Wiild.
No. 16 herb Hook. et cat.
Melanthesa Vitis ida, Koen.
MONOCOTYLEDONKS.
XC.—PALME.
Pheenix sylvestris, Rowb.

acaulis, Roxb.

Borassus flabelliformis, Zinn.
XCI.—AROIDER.
Remusatia vivipara, Schott.

ho
fi

214 On the Flora of Behar and the mountain Parasnath. | No.3,

XCII.—Natavem.
Najas minor, All.
Zanichellia palustris, Linn.
XCIII.— JuNcAGINEA.
Potamogeton natans, Linn.
hybridus, Mx.

-——_———- crispus, Linn.

—— pectinatus, Linn.
XCIV.—HYDROCHARIDEZ.

Hydrilla dentata, Casp.

Vallisneria spiralis, Linn.

Ottelia alismoides, DC.

XCV.—SCITAMINESR.
Globba bulbifera.
Zingiber capitatum, Hoxb. ?

roseum, Lowb. ?

cassumunar, Loxb. ?
Alpinia, sp.
Curcuma, sp. :
XCVI.—ORCHIDES.
Oberonia, sp., on rocks near the summit of Parasnath, J. D. Hooker;
Malaxis Walkeriana, Girah. ?
Dendrobium ramosissimum, Wight., near the summit of Parasnath.
sp., undetermined.
Vanda Roxburghi, #. Br.
Eulophia graminea, Lindl,

—

Calanthe, sp.

towards the upper part of

Habenaria plantaginea, Lind1.
-— commelinifolia, Wall.

~ sp. Parasnath,
Zeuxine suleata, Lindl.
. XCVIT.—BuRMANNIACEz.

Burmannia, sp., near Gyra on the Grand Trunk Road,

XCOVIII.—HyroxipEz.
Curciligo reeurvata, Don.

orchidoides, Gaertn.

Hypoxis minor, Don.

XCIX.—Di0scorIDEa.
Dioscorea glabra, Rowb,

1863.] On the Flora of Behar and the mountain Parasnath. 215

C.—LIniacea.

Smilax ovalifolia, Rowd.
Iphigenia indica, Kunth.
Asphodelus fistulosus, Linn.
Chlorophytum attenuatum, Wight.
Asparagus racemosus, Roxb.

CI.—MELANTHACER.
Disporum Leschenaultianum, Don.

CII.— CoMMELYNACEH.
Commelyna salicifolia, Rowb.

— communis, Linn.

— benghalensis, Linn.

Aneilema nudiflorum, #. Br.-

nana, Kunth

latifolia, Wight.

vaginata, Wall.

Cyanotis cristata, R. g S.
CIII.—Juncacea.

Juncus Leschenaultii, J. Gay.
CIV.—REstIacEeZ,

Kriocaulon trilobum, Ham.
CV.—CYPERACE,

Papyrus Pangorei, Rottd.

Cyperus flavescens, Linn.
umbellatus, Benth.
pygmaeus, Vahl.
difformis, Linn.
Lipocarpha levigata, WV. ab H.
Hermicarpha Isolepis, V. ab LE.
Fimbristylis pallescens, WV. ab HE.
Trichelostylis scabra, NV. ab. EL.
junciformis, WV. ab LH.

Isolepis squarrosa, Vahl
supina, R. Br.
prolongata, VV. ab L.
trifida, WV. ab L.
Scirpus affinis, Loftd.
capitatus, Willd.
Fuirena glomerata, Lam.

216 On the Flora of Behar and the mountain Parasnath. [No. 8;

Scléria lithosperma, Willd., on Parasnath.
Carex speciosus, Kunth.
CVI.—GRAMINES.
Oryza sativa, Linn.
granulata, WV. ab E.
Zea majus, Linn., (culta.)
Coix lachryma, Linn. near the temple on Parasnath.

Paspalum scrobiculatum, Linn.
brevifolium, Fligqge.
pedicellatum, VV. ab LF.
Milium sanguinale, Roxb.
filiforme, Roxb.

Lappago racemosa, Willd.
Eriochloa annulata, Kunth.
Coridochloa fimbriata, VV. ab E.
Digitaria sanguinalis.

Pennisetum cenchroides, Rich.
Panicum colonum, Linn.

compositum, Linn.
glaucum, Linn.
sarmentosum, Roxb.
————- montanum, Rozb.
plicatum, Zam.
humile, WV. ab E.
—— costatum, Roz).
fluitans, Roxb.
uliginosum, Roxb.

setigerum, Roxb.
Tsachne australis, R. Br. ?
Thysanolna acarifera, WV. ab L.
Arundinella Wallichii, WV. ab EZ.
— setosa, Lrin.

— nepalensis, Trin.
Menisthea levis.

Rottbeellia, sp.

Manisuris granularis, Linn.
Perotis latifolia, A7é.
Dimeria tenera, Trin. 7

Imperata arundinacea, Cyr.

1863.| On the Flora of Behar and the mountain Parasnath, 217

Saccharum spontaneum, Linn.
— procerum, owb.

——- - Sara, Roxb.

Pollinia villosa, Munro Mss.

sp. an P. tenuis, Trin.
Pogonatherum, sp.
Anthistiria scandens, Roxb.
——- Wight, WV. ab EL.
Androscepia gigantea, Brongn.
Apluda aristata, Linn.

communis, WV. ab LE.

filiformis.

Anatherum muricatum, Pal. de Beauv.
Schizachrysum brevifolium, WV. ab H.
Cymbopogon pachnodes, Trin.

Sorghum muticum, var. tropicum, VV. ab LH.
Andropogon annulatus, Forsk !

————— ischemum.

— pertusus, Willd.
—_——— strictus, Roxb.

ee)

halapensis.
— lancifolius, Trin.

lanceolatus, Roxb.

Heteropogon hirtus, Pers.
Chrysopogon villosulus, WV. ab H.

~ montanus, Roxb.

Sporobolus Wallichii, Munro Mss., (Wall. Cat. 3769.)
——— pulchellus, &. Br, (Wall. Cat. 8883.)
Polypogon littoralis, Si.

Aristida ceerulescens, Desf.

Arundo Madagascariensis, Awnth.

Roxburghu, Kunth. |

Scheenefeldia pallida, Hdgew.

Cynodon Dactylon, Pers.

Dactyloctenium egyptiacum, Willd.
Chloris barbata, Sw.

Leptochloa cynosuroides, R. & S.
Avena fatua, Zinn.

Eragrostis bifaria, W. A.

218 On the Flora of Behar and the mountamm Parasnath. [No. 3,

Hragrostis cynosuroides, Retz.
multiflora, WV. ab #.
unioloides, WV. ab H.
— Brownei, WV. ab EH.

verticellata, Pal. de Beauv.

——

——— nutans, Roxb.
—— cylindrica, WV. ab EL.

plumosa, Link.
Tripogon bromoides, R. & S.
Elytrophorus articularis, Pal. de Beauv.
Dendrocalamus strictus, VV. ab EL.
Bambusa, sp.
CRYPTOGAM &.
CVII.—Marsinuacem.
Marsilea quadrifolia, Z.
Azolla pinnata, &. Br.
CVIII.—PoLypopiacex.
Goniopteris.
Pleopeltis.
Niphobolus.
Cheilanthes farinosa, Kaulf.
tenuifolia, Sw.

Adiantum lunulatum, Burm.
Pteris Wightiana, Wall.
Asplenium furcatum, Zinn.
Nephrodium.

Lastraea, sp.

Sp.

Sagenia, sp.

Leucostegia, sp.

Ceratopteris thalictroides, Brongn.

Lygodium scandens, Sw.
CIX.— OPHtoGLossaces.
Ophioglossum vulgatum, Linn.
CX.—LyYcoroDiacesm.
Lycopodium, sp.

terraced tl OF
Selaginella, sp.

LLL LD OOO Oa

1863. ] Memoranda on the Peshawur Valley. 219

Memoranda on the Peshawur Valley, chiefly regarding its Flora.—
By J. L. Stewart, Hsq., M. D.

The Peshawur valley, from its position between two great botani-
eal regions, the Oriental and the Indian, possesses greater interest in
the eyes of botanists than its meagre Flora would otherwise entitle
it to, and as no account of its botany has been published, I have been
induced to arrange for publication all that I was able to collect on
this and some allied subjects during several years’ residence there.

So far as I am aware, but little had been done in botanizing in the
district previous to 1856. Griffith had at various times spent a few
days at Peshawur, during our occupation of Affghanistan in 1839-40.
Dr. T. Thomson also had visited it about the same time, and some
ten years later a collection of Peshawur plants, with the extent of
which I am unacquainted, had been made by Major Vicary of the
Bengal Army.

Under these circumstances, I am fortunate in having had it in
my power to botanize pretty extensively in the valley, in which and
its neighbourhood, I resided from July 1856 to February 1861, (with
the exception of eight months in 1857, when I was absent on service
at Delhi). During that period I was able to avail myself of several
opportunities for visiting places that are not readily accessible to the
European traveller, who, in that district, if he stray beyond canton-
ments, runs a chance of being shot by some fanatic Mussalman,
wishing to gain a cheap entrance to Paradise by murdering a
Faringi. Near the cantonment of Peshawur, this risk is greatest
towards the Khaiber pass, and towards Fort Bara, and the police have
strict orders to watch over any European going to even a short dis-
tance in either of these directions.

During the greater part of the time I have mentioned, I resided at
Peshawur itself, but I was also stationed for shorter periods at Murdan,
Nowshera, Attock and Campbellpore, (and although the last is a few
miles Cis-Indus, its Flora is almost identical with that of the Peshawur
valley, and may well be included in it.) Opportunities also occurred of
traversing part of the Chinglai hills to the North Hast of the valley,
with the Expedition under General Cotton in April and May, 1858,
when we reached about 5,000 feet above the sea; of herborizing on

220 Memoranda on the Peshawur Valley. [No. 3,

Mount Mitt near Attock, 2,500 feet, the hill at the Cher4at Pass in the
Khattak country, 4,700 feet, and various lower spurs near Murdan,
Abazéi and Michni. I had occasion to traverse the Kohat Pass
repeatedly ; so that I have had fair opportunities of becoming ac-
quainted with the Flora of the district.

The city and cantonment of Peshawur, which lie towards the
Western extremity of the valley of that name, are situated in Long.
71°33! BE. and Lat. 34° N. at an elevation of nearly 1,200 feet above
the sea, and no part of the valley is much above or below this height,
although there is a slight rise on all sides towards its edges, and
although the level of the Indus at Attock, near which the drainage of
the district issues in the Cabul river, is only about 1,000 feet above
the sea. All the inequalities of the flat part of the valley will probably
be included in from 1,000 to 1,500 feet above the sea.

The valley itself, which constitutes the most Northern part of the
long strip of territory comprised in our Trans-Indus possessions and
may be described as a broad oval, lying in a north-east and south-west
direction, is about 60 miles long and nearly 40 broad. Its chief
divisions, which however are more political than geographical, may
be enumerated as follows :—Husofzdi ; the most North-eastern part
of the district situated to the North of the junction of the Indus and
Cabul rivers,—Ashnagar, to the West of Eusofzai, and between it and
the Swat river,—the Doaba between the latter and the Cabul river,
—the Daoodzdi and the Khalil to the North and West of the city of
Peshawur, and the southern strip of the district, inhabited chiefly by
the lower Momands and part of the Khattaks.

There are no lakes in the district, but in many places there are
large marshes (for instance an extensive one close to Peshawur,) and
large tracts, particularly in the Doaba, become marshes after much
rain. A curious phenomenon is noted on the maps at a place near
Topi in the eastern Eusofzai, where it is stated that a lake of several
miles in extent is formed after every eight or ten years. In 1858, I
passed over the locality with the force under General Cotton, and
found that such a tradition is held by the inhabitants. The part,
where the lake is said to be formed, is low, and was then (in May)
verdant and almost marshy, water being abundant in pits at 6 and 8
feet from the surface. A small, sluggish stream runs through. the
tract, and from all I can learn, the so-called “lake” is merely a

1863. | Memoranda on the Peshawur Valiey. 221

marsh formed on this low ground, in seasons of excessive rain, the
water, however, never being so deep as to quite conceal the tall grass
and reeds.

The principal streams of the valley are three, of which the chief is
the Cabul river, the largest affluent of the Indus during its whole
course above its junction with the Panjnad at Mittun Kote. This
river, which, as well as the next, is called Liuindi, debouches from the
Khaiber range a little above the village and fort of Michni, and
follows an easterly course for about fifty miles till it falls into the
Indus close to Attock. It is joined about fifteen miles from Peshawur
by the Swat river, which after draining the valley of that name,
issues from the mountains near Abazai, below which its course is
south-east for twenty-five miles to join the last. 'The Bara stream
which is much smaller than either of these, rises in T'eera, enters the
valley ten miles to the south-west of Peshawur, and flows in an
easterly direction to join the Cabul river above its junction with that
of Swat. Much of its water, however, is absorbed in an early stage of
its course, by various canals for the irrigation of the tracts on either
side, one of the largest of these being for the supply of the city and
cantonment of Peshawur. The Bodni is quite a small stream, which
passes near Peshawur, to the northward, and joins a branch of the
Cabul river.

Besides these, there are no permanent large streams, but in the
Husufzai country and other parts of the valley, there are many “ nullas”
where water flows for a longer or shorter time after rain, and in one or
two cases for the greater part of the year ; and in and near the beds
of these, water is at most seasons found in wells from 12 to 30 feet
deep. Indeed were it not for these, great part of the valley would
be dependent for moisture on the scanty and precarious rain-fall, and
much of it would be totally unfruitful. At many places, e. g. the
Peshawur cantonment, and near Chumkunnie to the south, water
is not found within seventy feet of the surface (at the former with
a temperature of 68° to 70° F. in July) ; and the well which the Sikhs
were obliged to dig for the supply of thew fort of Futtehgurh,
Jumrood, (commanding the exit of the Khaiber,) 1s said to be no less
than 180 feet in depth.

In the ordinary shallow wells, the Persian wheel is almost univer-
sal for irrigation purposes, propelled by a pair of bullocks or a buf-
falo, one advantage of the latter being that he will go on indefinitely

25

222 Memoranda on the Peshawur Valley. [No. 3,

without a driver, when each of his eyes is covered by a conical
leathern blinker.

In the valley generally the soil is a strong retentive clay, which
is strikingly fertile wherever there is a full supply of water. There
are in some places sandy tracts, but the extent of these is limited,
and almost the only absolutely unfertile parts are those situated
near the circumference of the valley, towards which, nearly every
where so far as I have examined, (and the circumstance has been
noted by several previous observers,) there exists a wide talus of
shingle. This, which slopes towards the middle of the valley, is often
several miles in breadth and in many places (e. g. near Abazai,) more
than 40 feet thick, as seen at cuttings. These shingly tracts are
unproductive, but not universally so, as in some places the shingle
is covered over by deep layers of a bluish, marly soil, the existence of
the former at such places being only discovered at sections natural
or artificial. This shingle is in general composed of fragments,
more or less rolled, of the harder rocks of the surrounding hills;
being mostly of limestone, and hard carbonaceous slate, and more
rarely a red clayey rock.

The north-eastern part of the valley is much broken up by spurs
and outlying low hills from the mountain mass bounding it in that
direction. The latter, at least that part which General Cotton’s
Expedition passed through, is, in many places, plentifully strewn
with blocks and shingle of a syenitic porphyry, which is occasion-
ally seen im situ, as at Mungaltana on the flanks of Mahdbun, and at
Kubbul on the Indus. Even fragments of this rock, however, are
very rare throughout the rest of the valley.

Many of the spurs along this, the north edge of the valley, are
composed of a very hard, dark coloured slate similar to that of
Attock, generally dipping strongly towards the north or west; on
this side, also, micaceous schist frequently occurs, as in the ridge
parallel to the Indus at Kubbul, and in the Takht-i-Bai spur in
EKusofzai; and a micaceous schistose earthy limestone, near Michni,
Shubkuddur and Abazai; in the lower ridges and isolated hills the
rocks generally dip towards the north-west and north. Near Michni
there is an outburst of trap, under micaceous and quartzose schists.

On the east and south side of the valley as at mount Mitt near
Attock,—the ridges south of Nowshera—the range on which, (the pro-

1863. | Memoranda on the Peshawur Valley. 223

posed sanatarium of) Cheraat is situated,—also on the hills traversed
by the Kohat pass, I have never observed granitic rocks or micaceous
schists. The greater part of these hills, in which the dip is, generally,
westerly at a high angle, and the strike approaches north and
south, appears to be composed of various limestones often much
contorted, ranging from a dark-coloured very much indurated silici-
ous variety, toa calcareous flagstone containing concretionary ferrugi-
nous nodules, which has been used for flooring and roofing pur-
poses.

The spurs which extend furthest from the edge towards the centre of
the valley, are :—one which terminates at Takht-i-Bai, near which it
reaches a height of 700 or 800 feet above the plain, and which is main-
ly composed of micaceous, quartzose and calcareous earthy schists ;
and the Bara spur, (not far from the western extremity of the valley,)
which stretches from the southern edge of the Khaiber hills to near
Fort Bard, and the strata of which appear to dip towards the north-
west at an angle of about 45°: this | was unable to visit, as it
is in an “unsafe” country, and I think beyond our border. Towards
the middle of the valley, rock-masses are but seldom found in sitt..
There is, however, a low rocky ridge parallel to the Cabul river oppo-
site Nowshera which is composed of calcareous shale, and on which I
have found worn pieces of limestone, with obscure fossil shells.
Similar limestone fragments, with impressions of Brachiopods (?) are
abundant in the shingle of the Jumrood plain (near which Griffith
records fossil Pterocles* as found in arenaceous limestone,) but I
have nowhere found any fossil zw s¢w in this district, although in
a ridge near Campbellpore (16 miles from Attock, cis-Indus) there
are extensive beds of limestone abounding in shells.

There are also at various parts of the valley, horizontal beds of
varying extent, of soft recent sandstone and conglomerate, and in
such situations (as well as in very numerous places trans-Indus, to
the south of the Peshawur district,) I have frequently found specimens
of two species of shells (apparently Planorbis and Limnea).

No kunkur occurs in the Peshawur valley. nor am I aware of its
being found to the west of Jhelum (170 miles to the south-east),

Most of the lime used in Peshawur appears to be brought from the
range to the south towards Shamshatti, and besides it, the only

* Sic. Griffith. Journals of Travels, p. 428.—Ep.
2F 2

224 Memoranda on the Peshawur Valley. [No. 3,

valuable or curious mineral products of the district or its neighbour-
hood that I am acquainted with are :—iron, which is brought, roughly
smelted, in considerable quantity from Bajour, where it is found in the
form of iron-sand ; naphtha, (mumidz or gunduk ka tel) which is pro-
cured between Kalabagh and Attock, and used as an application to
sores; asbestos, said to be brought from a locality near the Khaiber
pass; and mica (sang-t-jarahat, or sim-gil) which is used in powder
and mixed with plaster for giving a silvery appearance to cor-
nices, &c.

A tradition exists among the inhabitants of the district, apparently
originating in a desire to account for the elevated sites chosen for
many of the numerous ancient cities, whose ruins are found in various
parts, that the whole of the bed of the valley was at one time under
water. It appears very doubtful, however, if any such body of water
has existed since long anterior to the erection of these buildings ;
although, that there has been at least partial submergence is evidenced
by the fact that in several places, (e. g. close to the fort of Abazai,
and near Ashnagar,) the remains of numerous buildings are found
covered by the usual clayey soil, and whose foundations are several
feet below the present level of the ground. These have generally
been brought to light by accidental excavations or abrasion by water
and are often accompanied by fragments of reliefs, apparently of
Tndo-Bactrian origin. But little has hitherto been done to throw
light on the various ruins and reliefs that have been discovered in the
Peshawur district, and the proper examination of the materials al-
ready available, with a systematic search for others, would amply repay
the labours of any one practised in such researches. It is gratifying
to know that part of the local funds have recently been made avail-
able for investigations in this direction, under the direction of the
Rev. I. Loewenthal of the American Mission, who is admirably qua-
lified for the task, and to whom I am much indebted for aid as to
various subjects referred to in this paper.

Considerable tracts of the lower parts of the valley contain much
saline matter, which effloresces abundantly on the surface, and the
presence of which induces a copious growth of Salsolacez with other
plants (such as Lamarix dioica and Berthelotia lanceolata) which
flonrish in saline soil.

The uncultivated parts of the Peshawur district, are barren in

1863. | Memoranda on the Peshawur Valley. 225

the extreme, there being no such thing as forest, and it is only to-
wards the base of the surrounding hills, where small streams frequent-
ly occur (whose waters are, however, rapidly dissipated by irrigation
and evaporation) that any considerable amount of shrubby vegeta-
tion is seen. This consists mostly of Acacia Modesta, Olea Euro-
pea, Dodonea Burmanniana and Reptonia buxifolia, which con-
tinue abundant as one ascends the hills (here, as elsewhere, the fact
being noticeable that the southern aspect of the heights is less ver-
dant than the northern;) while on the dry and barren low ground,
the most conspicuous shrubs are scattered plants of Zizyphus Jujuba,
Adhatoda vasica, Capparis Aphylla, Salvadora, Vitex Negundo (in
dampish spots,) and Tecoma undulata.

Under these circumstances, all timber too large to be supplied by
the plants above noted, is afforded either by the cultivated trees of
the valley such as the mulberry, and sissoo, or by the timber rafts
brought down the Swat and Cabul rivers, which consist chiefly of
deodar, with perhaps other pines. The large fire-wood supply for
the cantonment is furnished by the above named shrubs, and large
quantities mostly of oak (Quercus Ilex) are brought from the Khaiber.
From all I can learn, it appears not unlikely that, ere many years
elapse, the supply of fire-wood for Peshawur at reasonable rates, will
be difficult or impossible.

The climate of Peshawur may be shortly described as the extreme
of that of the Panjab generally ; 7. e. there are great annual variations
of temperature, great daily variation, especially in the cold season,
a very dry atmosphere throughout most of the year, and a very
limited rain-fall; the last occurring, not at the period of the usual
“rainy season” of India, but in winter. J am sorry that I have not
at my command any very lengthened series of observations on the
meteorology of the district, but I have made use of the best series
procurable, viz. observations on the temperature, humidity of the
atmosphere, rain-fall, and barometrical variations made with the in-
struments supplied by Government, and extending over most of
1859-60 and the whole of 1861. For these I am chiefly indebted
to Dr. Hugh Clark, Bengal Artillery.

Temperature. 'The observations on temperature were made nine
times daily during part of the above period, and four times daily,
during the remainder, and may be considered reliable.

226
TABLE 1.

Bl a ep

io) 4g, (e) 3 (fo)

40 | 4a a

e= | e=| 8

= = =
January, ...... 60.67 | 37.25] 48.96
February, 66.76 | 41.5 | 54.13
Wigngelals) Gash5s 73.88 | 49.47 | 61.67
AoA, 4 yonagqo05 87.96 | 638.07 | 75.51
MBN ados0 000 101.11 | 70.95] 86.03
Tune te 105.92 | 78.31] 92.11
Tilly, basuowoee 103.95 | 80.37 | 92.16
August, ...... 99.9 | 79.77) 89.83
September, ...} 97.2 | 72.65 | 84.92
October, ...... 87.35 | 55.28 | 71.31
November, ...| 76.67] 42.45 | 59.56
December, ...| 66.7 | 39.80) 53.25
Annl. means, | 85.67] 59.23 | 72.45
\

Memoranda on the Peshawur Valley.

[ No. 3,

It thus appears that the three
coldest months at Peshawur are
December, January and February,
during which the average temper-
ature is 52.119 F., the highest
single observation being 77° F., in
February, and the lowest 32° F.
in January; the three hottest
months are June, July, and August,
the average temperature of which
is 91.36° F., the highest single
observation noted, being 113.5° F.,
in June, and the lowest 70.5° F.;
the hottest single month being
July, with an average temperature
of 92.16° F., and the coldest, Ja-

nuary, averaging 48,96° F. The average temperature of the three
spring months calculated for these three years is about 80° F., and
that of the three months of autumn nearly the same.

As it may be interesting to compare the temperature of Peshawur
with that of Sahdarunpore and Umballa, the nearest places to the
south east, with regard to which I possess authentic series of
observations, I here give some results for these stations, from the
data given by Royle and Edgeworth, with the corresponding Pesha-
wur figures. These shew that although the summers are hotter,
and the winters colder at Peshawur than at these two places, yet its
mean temperature is rather lower, which corroborates a remark made

by Hooker and Thomson in the introduction to the Flora Indica.

TABLE 2.

see ge ce cs a ae

SSS ej ey ye sagt eS :

oo om ab = ey : = >

ea |salag tal alte

bes ase) Bie Ir csr cares =a [ses

BM 8 S| am o) o)

= = 5 fa) a A
Means of Maxima, ...s..ce0:-2-0+--- 102 2 1103.25) 71.7 ? 64.71
Means of Minima, 72.16 ? 79.48 | 42.5 P 39.51
Means of these,.........../.........02)|) 87.08 || 86.81 || 91°36

1863. ] Memoranda on the Peshawur Valley. 227.
NS|ns |~m = 3 3, Sx SF
og os eas (ag lac laa
ae ose re eet ede er | ee
sel oe | as} es | ea | Ss
aS | RD Bes | SS) |] eS | see
ae mH sy (Sas oO o
qn |} < <q On | oO e)

| Means of Maxima, 0.01... NS Aas 97.58| ? 99.34 | 79.75 ? 72

Means of Minima, .............00.0. 70.25 ? 74.18 | 46.25 Pp 44,29
Means of these,................000000 83.91 | 84.15} 86.76! 63.00 62.07 | 58.14
0) : Co) ae o :
x 5 3 .u aes c I q 3 =
2 i SS) | SC eH I eee) ee
Be Ge ere We als ele | eet Ble lel alte
Fa pe ities |) 5) ple) lly Sica esl ah lente
ND N 79)
Means of
Maxima, ...! 95.5 P {103.95} 64.5 ? 60.67 |
Means of
Minima, ...| 76.0 ? 80.37 | 38.5 ? 37.25 |
Means of
these, ...... 85.75 | 84.41} 92.16] 51.5 | 53.03] 48.96 |

Several circumstances combine with the much diminished rainfall

. of summer te increase the heat at that season; viz., the valley being

walled in on all sides by hills, these being very bare of vegetation,

so that they absorb heat freely during the day, which is as freely

radiated in the night, and the generally clear summer nights which

also favour radiation.

I am sorry that under the head of daily range of temperature, I can

only give the following figures for three months of 1861. These how-

ever I can certify as reliable, the observations having been made by Dr.

J. J.T. Lawrence, who has devoted much attention to the study

of meteorology in various par

ts of the Punjab.

TABLE 3.

1861.

January,
February,
March,

See ke a a 0 Ya

Mean daily range of
temperature.

|

Extreme range of tem-
perature in each
month,

228 Memoranda on the Peshawur Valley. [| No. 3,

I have noted upwards of 40° F. of range in one day (March, 1857,)
near Peshawur. For Umballa, in January, Edgeworth gives the
diurnal mean variation as 24° 29 FE’. and the extreme diurnal range
as 35° F.

At Peshawur, spring commences early in February, when the
willow begins to bud, and in March most of the trees are again in
full leaf. After this the temperature rises rapidly, and the summer
heat, especially in July, is most oppressive and sultry, though tew-
pered in that month by frequent dust-storms, often followed by
showers. Mirage is in the hot season, a not uncommon phenomenon,
and I have repeatedly seen it simulate lakes, trees and houses, where
in reality there only existed a parched, baked soil, with here and there
a straggling bush, and a bit of mud wall, or a few stones.

In August, autumn fairly sets in, the leaves of the trees getting
brown and beginning to fall; in that month most of the willows, &c.
become bare; and during September, when the marsh at Peshawur
is probably at ebb, many of the aquatic plants common in it
(Nelumbium, Typha, Sagittaria, Alisma, and many Cyperacez) have
fruited and dried up.

After September the temperature rapidly diminishes for three
months, and slight earthquakes are occasionally felt up to April.
Although I have never seen snow fall im the valley during a residence
there of the greater part of five winters, yet I think that slight falls
of snow on the plain, are authenticated on at least two different occa-
sions within the last few years, when, however, it remained unmelted
for only a very short time. In each winter there are generally
repeated falls of snow on those hills surrounding the valley, which
reach to more than 3000 feet above the sea; and on the higher hills
towards the north-west (Tartarra, over the Khaiber Pass, within 25
miles of Peshawur, is 7000 feet) snow is frequently seen for many
days together ; while on the still loftier inner ranges visible, it lies for
many weeks at various times from the middle of November till the
middle of May.

Barometer.—The following table shews the average barometrical
variations calculated from four daily observations for most of the
months of 1859-60, and the whole of 1861.

1865. | Memoranda on the Peshawur Valley. 229

TABLE 4.

Means of | Means of | Means of

Maxima, | Minima. these.
in. in. in.

January, 00 500 500 ...| 28.926 28.704 28.815
February, cy mee vee vee] 28.841 28.696 28.768
March, ee ade cod ...| 28.806 28.655 28.730
Avo ral tia, Ris Ba nod. -oool| | PAS Aw 28.552 28.639
May, au wis Sis ...| 28.554 28.442 28.498
June, ... 686 500 vee eee] ©6283. 91 28.312 28.401
July, Ae hie G00 neal PAS EIAEL 28.310 28.343
Aucust, ... ay whe sa0. | Goel) sees 28.389 28.457
September, ... ‘ap noc ...| 28.599 28.523 28.561
October,... Bee vais Gee. bool ASLey ar 28.635 28.696
November, ... As Sete ...| 28.858 28.770 28.814
December, odo 300 noe | Aoal|. | tektetsie) 28.836 28.862
Annual Means, a, Bee ...| 28.695 28.568 28.632

Amount of Rain. The rain-fall, calculated from observations for
the period from November 1859, to October 1860, and the whole of
1861, is as follows.

TABLE 5.
| iene nee Mcoeaae

Oct. 1860.| "hese.
inches. inches, inches.
January, 500 se 006 795 3. 1.897
February, ... ave Bone ice 155 3.5 1.827
March, Hse is aa 725 1.5 1.112
April, ig A Oe All PAB 0. 240
May, ... soe 900 ote 185 4.5 2.342
June, p00 tee eee ets 1.680 0. .840
July, ... 300 vay Ho3 7.799 2. 4.899
August, ... x Peel Wee GAs 0. 0.424
September, aa ie Bs 287 a) 143
October, sale ie ya An 002 0. -026

November, AGH aba oe 0. 1.5 75
December, ... as Rerun: 1.322 1.011 1.166
Total Annual, Sse Ho »-| 14.328 17.011 15.669

The annual amount of rain of Saharunpore and Meerut averages
about 30 inches.
Humidity. The following table gives the mean temperature for
each of the months of 1861 (calculated from the means of the
26

230 Memoranda on the Peshawur Valley. [ No. 3,

maxima and minima) with the means of the (four) daily observations
of the Wet-bulb Thermometer, and the Dewpoint computed from
these by Glaisher’s formula.

TARLE 6.
© ea (oe
5 a.8 S ra a
@ O:A uno
sea | EBs
1861. ag “3 0 |Dew Point.
16 5 we eS
Bel Of
bees OoS
eicsl ney Sone
Sas $0 2
= ee =|
to) oO fo)
January, ihe she 308 ...| 49.05 Fj; 46.468.) 43.87 F.
February, ae fe aie teats 55.2 48.53 41.20
March, ne the Be ee 61.05 50.75 42.51
April, oG0 ooo coe eco Soo 76.6 61.3 50.59
| May, 560 $00 360 sop. tetsk 69.35 58.16
ome ee = i SOE Opts 70.55 57.35
July, ooo vee tee eer 87.95 79.15 73.87
August, oce 60 eco eee ee 87.05 79.4 7A81
September, ... aes ate a 82.1 BAT 67.98
October,... 000 900 eck 68.45 57.85 50.43
November, ... 000 cee AE 58. 46 AZ 36.
December, aes a0 RO anGl ie 52.25 47.17 42.09
Annual Means, wes oO an 71.52 60.85 53.39

This at once shews the remarkable deficiency of atmospheric
moisture at Peshawur during the year (and that in a season with
more than the average amount of nae) especialy in the months of
April, May, and June.

Wind. Four daily observations of the direction of the wind were
made during 1861, but not regularly; however I assume that the
irregularities were so irregular as in great measure to counterbalance
each other, and the results are as follows.

It appears that throughout 1861, northerly and easterly winds
were to southerly and westerly nearly as 9 to 53, but from October
to March southerly and westerly winds prevailed ; and judging, from
partial observations, which, however, ranged over the year, the night-
breeze was generally from the southerly and westerly directions.

I shall now proceed to discuss the more immediate subject of the
present paper, viz. the vegetation of the Peshawur valley, beginning
with a survey of the cultivated plants.

1863. | Memoranda on the Peshawur Valley. 231

It being well known that cold accompanied by moisture is much
more apt to impede and destroy the vital functions of plants, than
is dry cold, it can readily be conceived how the low temperature at
Peshawur during the three coldest months, (averaging only 52° 11 F.
and occasionally sinking below the freezing point) coupled with the
4.890 inches of rain that then fall, must effectually prevent the
growth and culture of many trees, &c., that are found to thrive in
the North-West Provinces, and render ineffectual the efforts to
ripen fruit by others that are rather more hardy. Thus at Peshawur
we look in vain for Orateva religiosa (which grows at Jhelum, 170
miles to south east,) Bombax, Grewia <Asiatica, Aegle, Bergera,
Feronia, Shorea, Sapindus, Cedrela, Acacia Arabica (common in the
lower Punjab,) Zamarindus, Brythrina, Terminalia, Psidium, Nauclea,
Morinda, Bassia, Mimusops, Millingtona hortensis, Cordia (which
grows freely as far up as Lahore, 270 miles to the south-east,)
Gmelina, Hmblica officinalis, Latropha, Artocarpus, Bambusa, (which.
has been repeatedly tried at Peshawur, and grows but does not thrive
at Jhelum,) and others which are commonly cultivated (many also
occurring wild) in the N. W. Provinces: and if, of some of these rare
specimens occur in gardens at Peshawur, they are reared and preserved
with difficulty ; it is hopeless to search for such plants as the follow-
ing; Anona Nephelium, Hriobotrya, Carica Papaya, Santalum album,
Piper Betel, Pandanus, Ananas, Caryota, Borassus, Cocos, and the
eultivated Marantacee and Zingiberacee which are only raised with
difficulty in certain favourable situations in the N. W. Provinces.

Even Opuntia and Agave I have not seen in the valley, nor the
various columnar and other Huphorbie ; all of which are common as
hedges, Cis-Sutlej.

Again, some tropical plants continue to exist at Peshawur, being
favoured by exceptional circumstances of structure ; e. g., the plan-
tain, whose vitals (so to speak) are protected by its closely sheathing
leaves during the cold spring months, and which thrives tolerably as
far as foliage is concerned, though its fruit is never matured.

The mango (which Timitr Shah is said to have made an unsuccess-
ful attempt to introduce at Peshawur) barely lives, and in favourable
seasons and situations ripens a little fruit, and there are a few trees
of Syzygium Jambolanum, but most of them never produce mature
fruit,

2G 2

232 Memoranda on the Peshawur Valley. [ No. 3,

As is generally the case near other cities, Trans-Indus, and as far
up as Jellalabad, there are about Peshawur a good many trees of
Phani« dactylifera, but the fruit, though carefully protected from the

birds by nets, is I believe never good, The abundance of dates which
are consumed by the inhabitants are mostly imported from the west.

The Azadirachta Indica (nim) does not grow here, (it reaches
Lahore) but its congener Melia Azedarach (bakdin Hindi, drek
Punjabi) is easily raised and common,

Dalbergia Sissoo is commonly planted, and grows to a great size,
and of it there are occasionally magnificent old trees in villages, and at
tombs, &c. ; one of these near Akora, being called, I believe, ‘ Gilbert’s
tree,” from an erroneous tradition that under it the “ flying General”
received the submission of the Sikhs! or Affghans! whom he had
here caught up after the battle of Goojrat.

Besides these the ordinary trees planted by groves and by way-
sides, &c. are Acacia Lebbek, Morus levigata, Tamarix Gallica
(on the lower saline parts in large groves by villages,) and Zizyphus
Jujuba. Salia Babylonica (2) is abundant by water-courses, &c., al-
though Royle suggests that Hlphinstone’s “ trees like willows” of the
western Punjab, are Salvadora.

Moringa pterygosperma, Populus alba, Cassia fistula and Bauhinia
variegata are much less frequent than the above; Sesbania Atgyptiaca
is common as hedges, and Parkinsonia grows well; Ficus religiosa and
F. Indica are occasional in villages, and Salix Afgyptiaca is cultivated
to some extent for the fragrant bed mushk distilled from its flowers,
which is a favourite ingredient in the sherbets of the natives and
supposed to be possessed of great virtues. Cupressus sempervivens
flourishes in gardens as does Populus fastigiata, the latter called
by the natives Kashmiri sufedar, so that it may have been introduced
from Kashmir, where it abounds ; very stunted specimens of Platanus
orientalis and of Juglans regia occur in one or two gardens.

Peshawur was, by its early European visitors (from Elphinstone
up to our conquest of the Punjab) much lauded for its fruits, but per-
haps unduly so, as almost the only kinds now cared for by Europeans
are grapes and peaches, both of which are in their season (June, July)
plentiful and excellent. Besides these, Quinces, Pomegranates, Plums,
Figs, and various members of the orange family thrive well, and it is
very pleasant, in-spring, to ride round the extensive “ peach gardens”

1863. | Memoranda on the Peshawur Valley. 233

near cantonment, when the trees are in full blossom, and their scent
is so powerful as to be almost oppressive. Indeed, at that season,
Peshawur, with its widespread and blooming orchards, its abundant
verdure, fine climate, and view of the snowy hills towering in masses
to the north and north-west, is by no means the least pleasant station
in India, so far as physical circumstances are concerned.

In one or two gardens there are some small trees of a Diospyros
(D. Lotus?) which is common in the hills to the west of Kashmir,
and both wild and in gardens, in Affghanistan. Its fruit amilok, is
much esteemed by Affghans, (although I presume most Europeans
would agree with Griffith that as a fruit it is “not worthy of any
notice’) and is procurable in abundance in the bazars, whither it is
brought from Swat, &c. but it does not thrive well in the plains.

In gardens, the ordinary vegetables of the N. W. Provinces suc-
ceed, as do most of those of Europe that have been introduced into
other parts of the plains of India. Potatoes have in some years
thriven, but only exceptionally.

The field cultivation is much the same as that of the North West
Provinces, and may be noted as follows.

Ist. In the cold weather, when the climate and crops (rubbee)
are much more nearly Kuropean than at other seasons, the grain-
erops consist of wheat and barley which are sown in October, Novem-
ber and December, (advantage being generally taken of previous
showers,) and harvested about May. The young crop is in spring
frequently cut and given as fodder to horses, under the name of
Kasil. The rains of the cold season render irrigation unnecessary for
these, as for Lawsonia and Sinapis ; while most of the following, also
sown about the same time, have more or less irrigation; Zrigonella
Fenwn Grecum, Hrowm Lens, Vicia Kaba, Beta Bengalensis, Corian-
drum sativum, Anethum sowa, Carrot, Radish, and Turnip. Several
of these are only grown in gardens.

2nd. Field and garden crops (Khurreef) of the hot and rainy
seasons, mostly sown in March and April (with one or two exceptions,
such as Maize and Sorghum which are sown considerably later,) and
ripening from July, (Cucurbitacee) to November, (Sorghum). The
crops of this season are the following. Rice, of which several
varieties are grown ; by far the most esteemed of which is that of
Bara, produced only at two or three villages near the Béra stream,not

234 Memoranda on the Peshawiir Valley. [ No. 3,

far from the fort of that name, and some of which e. g. the produce of
Shekan village, is said to sell as high as 23 to 1} seers arupee; Maize ;
Sorghum Vulgare; Setaria Italica; Penicillaria spreata ; Panicum
miliacewm ; Phaseolus aconitifolius, Paureus, and P. radiatus ; Doli-
chos, Cajanus flavus, Cicer arietinum; Portulaca ; Solanum melongena ;
Sesamum orientale; onion; six species of Cucurbitacee ; Colocasia
antiquorum; sugar, cotton, indigo, and tobacco. Of these only
Maize, Setaria, Phaseolus aconitifolius, Cicer arietinum and Sesamum
are not regularly irrigated.

As regards irrigation generally, it may be stated that where the
land is wholly, or nearly, dependent on rain for moisture, only one
crop a year is obtained ; a large proportion of the land, especially of
course that near the Cabul, Swat and Bara rivers, yields two crops ;
while some patches near the city of Peshawur are said, with manage-
ment, to give three crops a year.

But little Indigo and Lawsonia are grown, and only a small quan-
tity of Flax is cultivated for its oil-seed; Sesamum, for a similar
purpose, is not common, almost all the “sweet” oil used, being im-
ported from below. Elphinstone erroneously supposes most of the oil
used to be obtained from the Castor-oil plant (dudaijeer) which,
however, nowhere in the valley grows in sufficient quantity to
furnish a tithe of the oil consumed. Sinapis is largely cultivated for
its bitter (Aarwd) oil.

There is no cultivation of Carthamus, nor I think of Hleusine or
Paspalum, and the Poppy is very uncommon. There is no Crotalaria
juncea, and Hibiscus cannabinus is but rarely grown along the edges
of fields for its fibre. Ricinus and Cannabis are never cultivated,
though both are common in waste ground.

In low rich ground near villages, &c., where water is plentiful and
manure easily got, a good deal of sugarcane is grown, though
producing only a very small proportion of the sugar consumed in
the valley. A great deal of Cotton is raised, being sown about April
and picked in September. Tobacco is a common crop, and immense
quantities of the dried leaf are also imported from Affghanistan, the
Kandahari being reckoned the best.

It is interesting to observe that among the Pushtu speaking inha-
tants of the valley, the names of most of the common crops are the
same as in Hindustani, A few, however, are apparently derived from

1863. | Memoranda on the Peshawur Valley. 235

the Persian, ghanwm, wheat, kanzhale, Sesamum, and wasma, Indigo,
while some others that differ much or entirely from Hindustani are
urbushe barley (connected by Mr, Loewenthal with the words opofos
and erbse in Greek and German,) karizah or nakrizah, Lawsonia ;
malkhozt, Trigonella; ttpar, turnip; shole, vice; ghokht, Setaria
Ltalica ; kalol, Panicum Miliaceum (2); mat, Phaseolus Mungo ;
wurkharee, Portulaca ; aozhah, garlic ; and khatake, melon.

The only crop manured on the large scale is sugarcane and
occasionally Maize, and cultivation and irrigation are carried on
much in the same way as in the N. W. Provinces, except that where
the latter is performed by wells, the water is almost universally
raised by means of the Persian wheel (arhat) instead of the leathern
bag, (charsa). The water for irrigation is often brought from great
distances in canals, and some of these must have cost immense labour.
The more important of these are traditionally ascribed to “ Akbar-
badshah,” but the traditions of the valley on this and other points
are perhaps not always quite trustworthy.

Horses are not extensively reared in the valley, the great supply
being obtained from the westward, whence come many kajfilas each
cold season. Wheel carriages are quite unknown among the inhabi-
tants of the country parts of the valley, and all internal traffic in
merchandise, grain, &c. is conducted by means of pack-bullocks, many
of which are of a fine strong breed, very much superior to the ordi-
nary kind generally used in ploughing, &c. here as elsewhere in India.
Very large flocks of sheep and goats are reared, and the extensive
thorny enclosures, formed (generally of dry Zizyphus bushes) for their
protection from the night attacks of wild animals may be seen
studded over even the driest parts of the plain at certain seasons.

Among the more uncommon or characteristic fauna of the Pesha-
wur district may be mentioned the following. The Mdrkhor (Capra
megaceros) is frequent in the hills to the north-east and said to be
found in the Khattak range. The Oortal or Kohidoomba (Ovis Vigne)
is found in the hills to the east of the valley, (and is common in
some of the low hills near Hussan Abdal, and southward toward
the Salt Range.) Porcupines, in Pushti Shkinr (Hystrix cristata ?)
occur in various parts of the district; I have found quills at 4,700
feet above the sea (at Cheraat) but it appears very doubtful if the
animal lives in such places, A Pangolin (Aishawr,) is by no means

236 Memoranda on the Peshawur Valley. [ No. 3,

uncommon in various localities, attaining a length of 4 feet and up-
wards ; its scales are much valued as a medicine by some classes of
Hindoos. The “ grave digger” gorkakh, gorkash (bij Hindi) is occa-
sional. A fresh-water tortoise, shamshate, inhabits the rivers, and
attains a length of upwards of two feet. In the drier and more sandy
parts, the soil is burrowed by thousands of a kind of lizard, char-
mukhke or charmushke, about a foot long, and I have repeatedly
found live specimens of an allied, but amphibious animal, of consi-
derably larger size, in water contained in hollows, on the hills around
the valley.

A characteristic bird is the obdra (otis) which is common in the
drier, uncultivated parts and is interesting to the sportsman as it
affords good hawking; as well as to the gastronome from a different
point of view.

Several species of serpents occur in the district, but almost all—
of scores—that I have examined, had no poison-fang, and I have
never actually known of a case of death from a serpent bite near
Peshawur.

In entering upon a detailed view of the Flora of Peshawur, I shall
first give a list of all the plants I collected in the district with their
periods of flowering, so far as this was noted by me, their fre-
quency, and the native names of the more important species.
Almost all the identifications are those of Dr. T. Thomson, my
obligations to whom in this and other respects, it is impossible for
me to overrate.

Some remarks are added as to the geographical distribution of the
Peshawur plants, followed by a few observations on the more note-
worthy species.

In this list, the plant is understood to grow in the plain of
Peshawur, 2. e. about 1000 to 1500 feet above the sea, unless where a
height is added, and all the native names are those in use by the
Pushtu speaking inhabitants unless when otherwise stated. I have
been careful to exclude all Pushtu names that I do not know to be
in use in the Peshawur district.

237

Memoranda on the Peshawur Valley.

1863.]

myninnny s
“ypboyond

“DNV

‘oureu nIYSN

“qInIy IO IOMOF JO powwog

‘ouTp “OF "0991
‘y puady ‘qore yy *MOULULO()
Bw “AA oT
PB pady ‘yore yy ‘yoepung Vy
‘OIG -esnyjorg
“B yore yy MOULUIOD
*B dy “yore yy out
“Boar yy jqaepung vy
‘B qorey “qoyy “TOULULOL)
E98 “OVE
‘oP OIG ‘oy
BR POC “QW “OTE
"B [ady ‘qore py aepung y
‘BH qoreyy -qo,y ‘osnyjorg
‘B yore “MOULULOX)
“Edy OLE

“y Ane jo Surmutseg *poonporyur

Ajqeqord ‘soysaeur owlos ur wourut0|
“IJ pues "B “AON 400Q| ‘syueq snoyzdroead Arp uo yuepungy;
402} 000'F eAoqy|

Pp dy -juo eovyd ouo ye squeyd Moz v|

°F fady ‘yore py ‘qaepungy

‘yeo] ut pumoy ATuo pue oaer A10 A

H Woeyl qo,7 OW

EB Wt OF

"p Aap 09 dn Moy @ “0,7 “900 "0}1
“yg Aseniqoy ‘Avenue ep “‘quepung Vy

ees

‘fouonboa,y

7 fermdog umrirqurdstg

3-7 ‘umurodyeg umnesh{y
"Od ‘umoriadg vaniplpngy
ds ‘se100046NT

‘ds “erusjoo[e

‘Od Smnyoyry wmete}dery
‘Og “eyestaxy erpoeqploy
“tg Ay “BUBOLIPY VIULLOOTe TAL
377 ‘oyeropns wmrpidery

"TT “eqeacy wmtprdory

‘Od “ory umrrqudstg

TT ‘s110svg vsnig vijesdey
“7 ‘suoqumooad wooed {Fy
"BIOPIAIC IVA STPLULOUFO VITEUM iF
TUNILSIUAGyT Ff A waMIqnp *g
"399079 “UMJESTUI0) IeABdeg

‘tnso1oeds TUIMIq UENO NY

*ysSlog “Vqacory SNTRODOD

6 T ‘Stfeqyaer10 STFeUIITD

youapyl suyeopes snyeydesoze.10g
277 ‘Syeuunjne sropy

g SN4ea] “AT

uT ‘SISUOAIV “AY

Ty ‘SugeolmMUd “yy

“7 ‘sugede[eos “yy

“7 ‘sttyenbe snjnommuey

“‘quepd Jo oure Ny

SS eee

‘hayjoa unnnysag ay2 wwau pun un pajoapjoa syunjd fo jsvy

2H

[No. 3,

Memoranda on the Peshawur Valley.

‘Wg ‘AON ‘Aue
‘F Yoreyl “AON

‘p ounp

‘HB yore yy

“B Wore “ew
BOW
‘Foley “a7
"oyatp “O74
"BOO “Yony
‘B98 “AON

‘BE pSny

‘ay AON “Ef Avy

"B30 “438nV
“B ydog

|

‘B AON ‘Aqng

bdo] ‘O9 PB AON “490
“DLd09 M ‘Bf Aon ‘Alue
*"g awod Jo ASOT

“B Yore yy

"p ady

‘oT

0FFt

Foe

“003 000'S IV
“OLB Y

‘durep ocr wouru0()
“MOULUMOD 4O NT

Ore

‘MOULULOD JON
*MOUUOOUN JO NT
“‘quepungy

‘OV.

"OVC

*TOULULO()

“quepung 7

*MOULULOD 40 NT
“MOTUULOL)

*‘puno.s OUl[VS UL MOULMORD
“ou

‘odV Ay

*seoT ur ‘omer Ato A
‘oud

‘OFE

“OIVY

*MOULULOY)

‘syueq snoydrioerd Arp wo uowUL0D
‘quepung y

*MOULULOD 40 NT

eR Gehe |

‘OFT

ON

Oley

*OULUOD 40 NT

‘quo Sumudsry wu
‘py pwn ‘44 “BSOAIISe2 “gp
‘SOPIOIUUVUIMAB BLOLOg
490

¢ voor Aqdodreg

‘ds ‘a

‘ds ‘snyjueig.

‘ssvog ‘soproressAéoT “g
‘ds “g

“T “Baplouod 9MeTLG

“7 ‘eyo Adios elreuery
"YUM “BTpour BLIBT[OIS
“Wad “BURTAIOD “TT

"T ‘st[MeVOIpNU Oon]LOW
“7 SequeTMAoATnd vruoeyUed yy
‘Od ‘euerye, epecdjog
‘ds . A

Cee cE IOUIN

“‘SLIVOUT] *O

“@T[OFIIOSO.IP *“O

‘hoor eqn euLo0s[O
‘ym ‘eAyde streddeg
“T ‘esourds streddeg
*BIPUBSOOL VISTUB[OT
*‘SUOOSOONVLS SLIOULOST[OQ
*“10FIONAD

‘ds ‘erodst10y9

‘asag “eyejnotaed erpson
¢ BSOUOIe SIQVIy

dds ‘umr1angse

238

eee eee

‘£ouonbor,y “que JO owe Ny

“awUUeU NIYSUg

“‘qMIJ IO LOMO JO poroeg

239

Memoranda on the Peshawur Valley.

1863. ]

“VIDUAL
‘fang ‘yng f mzybomg
aumjady

DPW

“wmzy by

"OYNMDLT,

‘fang ‘opanwog £ oyspunyD
“DY IMY SM

“aU MDASD

"Yolo

*nUpdn.L0,T,

‘agng wpwoy

¢ ‘dj pue ‘B ‘AON “49ny
“IJ pus ‘F4OO “pony
‘f ouny

‘ay pue “Ff “yOO “dy
IZ pue “f 490O “ose
Up pue "B porey_ 300
‘Bre “490

“B yore yy

‘Bimdy qor

‘B dy “gore yy
‘(MOHBATITNO UL) “qo
‘FMF “OQ “Yony
‘quay “y.o0'V

‘If “AON “9.00V

“ay pure “f -400 “dy
‘Ip puve “400 “gony
“Af pure “pf “ony

‘BP Aon ‘Ame

‘Bp ysny

"p Ane

BWW “98

"p AON “ony

BPO

‘B yeny ‘Aine

‘B oun 490

‘Ty pus "EE Worepy 4900
“BPO

“B qoreyy *"qay
BPO

‘BPO ‘ady

*p “AON ‘oun

‘yInay 10 ‘Bf avod Jo 4sopT

"mOUTUIODUN 407
‘OWI

“WOULULOD)

"oaed AIO A

“OSNJOLT

Rona

“quepung y

‘op ‘SoyoqIp JO Sespe wo quepunqy
“OLB VY,

‘ou

‘quepundg Vy

“MOULUODUN 40 NV

‘STI AAO[ Mo TouUOoUN 4ON

“F22F OOSS OF 000E FV)
"490F 0008 07 0002 $V
‘quepunqy

“MOULULO()

‘OIE

“Sp[oy. “uourmoouN JON
"q00F 00G*S TV

‘Sp[oy UL MOUMUOD
HES DELO

“OIVY,

“ont

“MOULUIOD JON
‘spunowu Arp wo TouUOD
“MOULULOD)

‘ated ATO A

‘OIC Y

“quepunqy

‘oat A190 A

‘oI

‘OIG

Aue pone

‘oaea ATO A

~erpoyiyisoddo *g
‘ds “erjoaaseg

‘d sn4seloQ 10 ys.10,7 ‘sttape VyyeO

‘ds ‘umn Aqdojdey

7 “epeuie py WMNUeSOg

T ‘SI1qsot109 SNTUQIL],

“T “eorjodg vIuose,y

"TT “eyeMOIULOD ST[eXO

¢ ds

“TT “UMALe OID “HL

‘AT SUMUIyLreur UMTpoApy

‘Od “euvrmueuLmg eaenopog
“TMM “eroses[(D4}0R “1D

"Od “THOU VIMOTD

“uvor “erpoprytsoddo ermety)

“TT ‘Suts0F[0 “OD

“TT ‘SlIVTMOO[L sSutoyo10—

‘WYOLM ‘Soprloyynge eraey[o TL

¢ ‘ds “A

“T ‘sugary SHOSTOT AT

‘VY pwo "44 ‘snoujnoy snyosomyjeq y
"7 “eloptAared VATe Ty

‘wod * “wnorIpuy TOTYNG Wy

‘ds ‘umuniodsoreg

erodse “W

TT ‘soptorydeye7 ouloripuy

“T ‘SIUNUTULOD SNULOTY
"ESOILA VO.SSN] iT

¢ snjdog "

Ty “erdoosorey “i

¢ WT ‘Soprojnounoerp “Hy
7 “eyoyrormod Ay “oy

“geo “erpoyrumAyy viq.ctoydug
‘ssnp “etzojour e1oydozo1g
ANOLE

[No. 3,

Memoranda on the Peshawur Valley.

240

en eee

“OYS ST
“plawnmy)
‘fom “punl £ wynzyby

“yyy Cw

"yoqzoys “n9foug
“UpZ0Z ‘Z07

“bo

*aU0yY ST

“DSSDY

‘tung ‘upg f nmayg
‘tung “apynyg £ vsopog
“peWO ET

‘tung “doyy
"(aauyog) auyg
OURS Lau

“DWOY.M0 IT
“pldag

‘oureu nyysn

"p oune

‘ony

“AON
"ay AON “Ef Ayn
“oUt

"B dy

‘B sny ‘oune
"B Indy “qoueyy

BE ady

‘BH Wore yy

‘EB Woreyy ‘90q
“opp ‘O99TC

"B Woameyy “eq
BH

“It 490
"BPO

“ay “390

"p Avy “pady
‘p “AON,

“*B “AON “990

“IJ pUv "FF “AON, “SNW

B90
OTP [etUs

IVA OSAVLT “IF PUR “PF “AON -39O

‘JIMAj IO AOMOF JO polsog

“OIC

"J20F 0NG"E FV
“MOUUTOOTN 40 Ny
“09

‘F9OF OO0'S

*poyunys ‘MouruooUN JON
“spy Ur Juepunqy
‘[BUOISvO00)
“MOULUTODTIN 40 NT
quepund Vy
*MOULULOOUN 40 NT
*[BWOISvDDG)
“TOULULOK)
“MOULUOOU 40 NT
‘oT

077

‘Juepungy
“MOUWLOD)

‘oad AIO A.

‘ore yy

‘op ‘surveays Aq wouTUTOD

‘quepunqgy

"MOULULOD JON
area ATO A
“WOULULOD
adver ALO A

‘J90F 0OS‘S 0} ‘WOD 7 ureyd [euOIsvDDO

area ATO A

“OSNJOIG

-Aouonbo.a,y

¢ esourmm.sory

‘swag “esounl ezopodsery

‘Od “eururm evisoomsyyy
“OM “eueIpreter) VIOTOSIPUT
‘aphoy ‘st]jour vIspareMpo

udg ‘euevrmeydayg stdosorg
‘slag “eyeornoe eraeqseg

“7 ‘SNUIISSIISH.SUL SnyO'T

“7 ‘suodoa varntpojr4y,

“T TuNLOMNTY Lovypy

¢-ds -y

‘ds ‘Vv

‘joqd ‘Seplopndra} snpeseaysy
7 “eurndwy “Py

“PYM “eyejnovut oSsvoIpeyy
‘PIAL “eyeMorUEp OSvorpepy
fsoq “eroptared snjopopt

“TT SBATJES BIOL A

‘Od ‘surpoyimeydnq sudzeoissApy

‘ds ‘e1o1at90 Av 7,

*quoy ‘OOSSIS VISAIOQTeEG

“TOM “eISepoy “W
‘TWuotMONbovp wrovow

‘WoT ‘BOULSvoTpPoUT VLIR[LIOID
“UMTyT “ern VIIVTEIO.ID

"eqVUTUIMO’ (ILSUIS VIzVYy) SNP
(¢ soroods 0444) snqeSara snumeyy

6 WHT ‘SlIesN A °7

“unt equine snydziz

‘queyd Jo owe

241

Memoranda on the Peshawur Valley.

1863.]

“abunnn'T

pungwoy yy Souny bow py
fang “ytd
“pNYy) “ony

“wpqysoy buoys

OMDNMOS,

"Bp 990 ‘Aue
"B yore]

"Bye0y
‘Bp dy “gore
“EB Youre PL

"p Ayae

“p Ajo “addy
¢ "young

é“B Ajug
"orp ‘079
"B yore

"B Idy ‘yore
“o99tp ‘0791
"B Wore “qoyy
"BySny
“B900 ‘Ayne
"BPO “Yony
"Bp AON “ony
qmmay [Lid y

"p Ane

“Bp dy

“IJ “AON
"Bc AON ‘AE

“ay pus “B90
“dj "ff “AON ‘oun

"Brey “AON
“af *B 300 ‘oung
"p Aue

‘yuepunqy

‘surerd Arp uo ‘mouru0p
OFFI

“ore yy]

*[BMOISVOO()
“‘quepundy
*[CMOTSVO0(C)
‘moUUTODUN JON
*[BUOISv00G
‘TOULULOD JON
*soysIvUL “WOUTUIOD
*[BUOISvO0()

OLB Y

*MOULULOD JON
“MOULULOD)

“ost

*mOTAUIOD

"OIC YT

*MOUIULO/)

"OI I]

*[BUMOISvd0¢—)

“OTe

‘surveys Aq juepunqy
“MOTO

“OTe

‘oR ‘sploy poyestut ur guepungd y

“MOULULOD
"IOJEA UL OSHJOIg
*[BUOISVID(C)

“1OVeM Je JUBpUNdy
¢ 1923 000°S 3V
‘900 “Feo, ur ATUO
“mOUULO/)
“UOULULOOUN 40 NT
Oley

*quoy ‘suesoto VISTULEy.TY
“MOLATIO BSOIGBOS

¢ Booviquy

37 “eoroueudo vnsodsy
¢ OULODTI “4)

T ‘outrede wni[ex)

¢ VAOFTOQUL)

"quoy “eloyTMO[OIS eyyUeUT
3 ‘sstog eqrurto eyjeurdurrg
“(saq “vantMojoyorp tanteuArGy
‘T “WMITOFIASH.sue WNT

‘PY pwo 4 ‘sepromeyyuersy ersA1Q,

¢ Boovpnsser—y

*@SOOSNUL VEIL],

“T “eqns CLIVE FL

‘slag “erpeul *g

"slag “erqnd eiiepnsiedg

"T “epytapenb gq

“TT “ede1e[O-VORTNIA0g
“eur{[eysAIo “yy

T ‘expuejued vULEy{UeLLy,
¢ SIyjuAdojoo ship
"quo “eotorp *\L

*ySATT ‘SITCFUOLIO XLIVULR J,
"ESOUMOULOJ VOTSTID

“Qvory “eILOIVOISOA “VW

"PIIUM “eyelnoLne eriuemMUTy
¢ wnsiomep umyAydoies99
*quoy “esoutdsig edery,
‘qua,q UINSoJMSMTOY uMIQoT dE
“eoIsiog snjepsAury
“‘sndaiedoisey snqnay

"7 “eurdns ey[yw8}0g

TT ‘snsoonniy snqniy

¢ eSOurUnLsery

[No. 3,

Memoranda on the Peshawur Valley.

242

209g)

*YZOMDY SY

RM
“wmybzy “mzyby
“nbLa7,

“vaynpndy vYyZru0 J,
‘tpury ‘ounqvog § ynbragng

“ayTUDy

J ULL,

‘ouVNT NAYSNg

a ee

"B “290 “ydog

‘B AON ‘Aqne

B qoueyy “Aon
"AON

‘B pony Ajo

“B “099rp ‘0991,
é°B [ady ‘yore py
"B Aqme ‘tedy

“"B oune ‘qradyz

"B yorwey

B Indy

‘young ‘prrdyz

“E Yyorepy rad
"B90 “Youre
“0997p ©099tp “0741
“0}4Tp “0V4Tp *0I9TG
“B Tady ‘qoreyy
‘B CAON “Wore yy
“Bore TL “490
"Eady ‘qoreyy
B GOre Tl “qT
BL

"BO “dy
dB “ydog -qay
Ba “pony

“Bp ‘avad Jo 4soT

"B AON *ydog

*JIUIF IO LOMOT JO porsog

09} 00S'S IV]

“‘quepung Vy

“TOYO Ye TOULULODUN 40 Ny
‘[eMOIsvD00

‘Arp pUe OUTTVS o1OYAA yUepUNGy
"OLY

*TOULULOD)
*MOUTMOOUN 40
*[BUOISvI0GQ
*quepunqy
*[RUOISBI9(¢)
“MOUTUIOD
“‘quepungqy
“MOUUOOUN. 40 NT
“Sploy Ur yuepundy
“MOTULOD,

*MOULULOD
“‘Juepund Vy
“MOULULOD)

“oft

‘OIG

‘OVI

“Ot

“‘quepunqy
“uOTAULOD
‘quepUNg y

“THUVM Ye JUepUNgy
OLY,

*"MOULULO LD)

OLY

-Aouonbo.ty

‘Od ‘seprorroyedugy ‘7
‘SUO[OOAVLO BINUT

‘ds vurutejsouopy

vedst10 VLMeouRL

"Od “eyefoooury eMopoqyaog
T UMIRUMy uMITQUe YK
“T “eorueuioy) Ose

6 Od “etooey, eowunyg

"T ‘snqAjuy wmTToyotg

‘qag “eqquvoedxo snueyyIeg
dds 'g

dds "a varomoz.t00g

"T “edeajoyeg veameyuedg
‘Od Sunueneyy uma ATs

"TT “OSUOATR TANISALD

od ‘streoury erard,ao yy
“11MM “eyemonme vongoery

“T ‘st[BuLoyyo epupueyley

é ‘1M ‘sdeoytnia wniyeydemsy
*ssaT ‘sljuvorpnu snyoudyAtoxo1yy
‘Od ‘xoowrg "TT

‘Od ‘SIULIOFIOSIp BIIvOLye yy
“bby Sopeuroyyo wamoexele J,
‘Od ‘snouruta sndoueyg

"TT “SnedeBIe[O *¢

“TT ‘SISUOAIe SNYDUOG

“T “eqoore eqdipoop

eh DEN VY

¢ (Od “eqeraoel “Ww

TPAL SBPSOA “VW

“qUeT JO oure yy

| SO ES

243

Memoranda on the Peshawur Valley.

1863. ]

ag wsvbunluod fang
“alunya « awoavod ‘awunung

‘fung “yawnquy
DANO.

“yauyndy

3 DNOTT

‘fung ‘nua, f avapwoy
“TpULyy Sawn £ D.LQVUD!H)

“va hip N

‘fon g ‘nny f wonyy
‘purty ‘bunsgeg f ppysmnyy
pinbiny

‘fang ‘VT

pw duny,
‘fong 9.ypy

‘fang ‘og §207y40T

*[BUOISvIOO
‘yy AON ‘oun “MOWLULOD)
a ‘O9Ft
¢ G ysny OLB
“EB paddy ‘[BUOISDDG)
“B yony “J90F O00S 97 OOST IV
OLY
“B ady *ST[EY JO Joo} ye Juepungy
OIC
‘AON “yore yy “‘quepundg Vy
OLB
“EB Yoae yy “qo, “quepung y
dB AON ‘Avy ‘surver3s Aq mouUtOG
"422F 000'S
¢ JmMaz “AON, “ony *190F OOS'F 0} UleTG
sO "490F OO00'E

“qa “AON "003
000° 0} PUB STIFY FO Joos ye woUTULO |)
oy nace Ce) fl “MOTUULOL)
“HCAON “qoue yy *[BUOISVO0Q
“p Aine “qore yy odey
*099t
‘young *[VMOISvO0G,
“B yore “OTB

*MOULULOD JON

*o9gtp ‘0991 *TOULUIODUM. JO NT

“B youv yy *[eUoIsvo0¢,

“qM.If ‘AON OWI
*qMaAy “AON 300 ‘Oley
‘TB [dy ‘yore *[RUOISVODQG)
‘ou7Tp ‘OIG *mOULULOD)

“B yoreyy ‘Oley

*g Avy ‘rady *MOULUOOUN JON
‘Pp AON *[BUOISVIDGQ,

‘dg ‘1

‘Swag “UMIMequED eeearyy Arpy
"Ty “eoryeise Bloyppug

¢ BJuaTMOse vlUjoIsAXG

‘ds ‘eiso1son0g

ug “Ay “esttoyxo ermleeqy

ey Sydoxoren stdoryey0e g
-auq ‘eyAyde vooj,di1eg
“epryed erlrepns10g

ug ‘ay “erooord stdoro0pen
‘qybuy “BOUIUIIA BIoyguUeYyyIC
‘Od “ejouys ehzzeyy

“"T “UINLOPO UANTLO hy
‘TUMIOSIQnd g sug TWNyN{OAeL WMULUISE LS
7 ‘eceedommy BIO

"7 “eweotpy oursahyy

‘Od “V¥ “eroyesng vrmoydoy
"eoTNINO _F SISUOAIL ST[RSoRUW
“7 ‘TIpuereye A Snpoureg

dds ‘erreno1y

dds moxostigg

¢ ‘ds ‘snqouojororpy

¢ ‘ds ‘oreueg

ads ‘sdouryorp

¢ ds ‘ersneypyarg

¢ ‘ds ‘eneorgeyy
‘TUnyVjNoUep uopemory

“7 “enuied susplg

*suvoIpuo stxejo;dy
“elopTneo oudcoyorty,

dds “9

‘Od ‘sturoyeedvaqyeo vruisnody
¢ SMVs[NA BLOT

[ No. 3,

Memoranda on the Peshawur Valley.

244

PLASM
auny bouow ‘qu A
“vafps{pswony,

‘fang “ob | Q

-bos “Spnysumnys § vuwogoy sy} §

“HUSIUS,

“nyd vwoquioy bog

“DYN fwYyswouUng 1agnguo7g

“puayoy fwnmppbes*woopqay

‘omen NIYSNg

‘B ounp ‘AON
‘BJO yony
‘dy PU "PF “AON

‘Ij PUB ‘PE “AON “ony

"B Indy ‘yore yy
‘B oune “our py
‘B AON “290
B20

‘g Atne ‘oune
‘B Indy

B dy “qoaeyy
‘OUP OFF

“EB YOse TAL

"B AON “4.0ny
“Bp AON ‘Aque
"B30 “yony
"BOR 990

"B90

dB yony
"B990 “qdog

‘B yony “yore
"BPO

B dy

‘PB Tidy aon

“‘qMIz 10 LOMOF JO poLiog

*OULULOL)
*[RLOISBO0Q,
“MOULUIO()

qooy

00¢‘g 12 wouTUNOD { SyI[D UO [eMOISLD0GC,

“MOUTUTODUM 40 NT
‘Sploy Url Juepunqy
‘OU

*[VUOISvd0G,
‘MOULULOOUM. 40 NT
‘oI

“MOTLULOD)
*MOULULOD
*[eUOIsvIdG,
“MOULULOD)
‘quepungy
“WOULULOD,

ee DUO)
“MOULULOL)
*[BUOISe09()

OTe
“MOULULODUN 40 NY

“‘sp]oy Ur yuepungy
“HOWUULOOUn JON

*poqunjs TOMIULOG

“SOUSIVUL UL WOULULOA

-£ouonbea,y

“un “UA.AOFIUULOS BTUeT IT AA
‘PIDM “Tambor -g
“7 Uist vimuelog

"quoy “erodse eryory Ty

dds ‘esnyouy

“7 ‘osueare umnuLiedsoyyiy
‘ds 76)

¢ eyjueszormt umssopsouky

“T ‘sisuoare stsdoo dry

‘yoy “eyVeINIToIs VIOyooy
‘Od ‘VY ‘soptoryoe vrqoury
‘Od TWyIOMeSpy “Ni

‘ds “ecoumo yy

“aq “yf ‘umMoIpUy eutsepoyorty,
“7 ‘umeedoing “Ay

“NPM “UTNTTOFLAS.tq “FY

‘qoug “UMuUIIssisouer tunidoa4or[e FT
“quoy “exeyer BInosny

“TT ‘SOplouIsTe SNTNATOA

's10yO “Tra siqiqarey

“gyoy “RAOPIISSES veoutody

“TT ‘SISUOAIG SNTNATOATOL
“sLoyuy ‘stMeormnyd snpnajoauog

uo “eyepupun eUlOda T,

‘sui “UINYeISIIO UMULEYUVUAT

“‘queTg JO owe Ny

SSS RESTS ESR RRR TTS PS BB ISD I TST I I, DOE IN YESS LT II SI EOE I PE ISD YES ELE OSL TSE EEE ET OY TES ES SEN SS

Memoranda on the Peshawuy Valley.

1863.]

“AWUP]A A

“APWUNULINM APWUDVWY AT

‘fang Sumyyayq ‘ollng v.07,

UDUMoYyY Uads MUMMY y MYST

5 bopunyy

‘80 g “pp g.rund ‘amznunyy
‘humid pys ‘“oling wdy

‘B AON Grady
‘Bp qdog “gore
"B dy “qore yy

"B yorwe yy

"Eh Worley “qo.7

‘fT AON founs

-y-y8ny
‘Gg lady “Aon

‘EF AON “Pore

“*B AON 490
‘AON "990

"B AON “Gorey

“ay pue ‘Bf 900 ‘Ayn
‘B00 *O
"BPO YSny
BPO

‘TF AON “990

099tp 0991

‘B Wore

BOW

“E Gorey “Fe

"B wo jo Isoj

‘B AON ‘TedW
‘o79Ip 0F9Tp OFFI

‘B AON “490
‘yore ‘AON
BPO

‘B yore

“IF pure ‘F400 ‘Aine
"B dy

‘If pure "f “AON “990

FE 99n “AONK

‘IOYEM YO TOULUIO/)
"Sp[Oy. UL JuepuNng Vy
‘quepungy

‘oet A190 A

‘spjoy. UL MouTULOD
‘OyeM 4B JUBpUNqYy
‘OIBY

"4923 000'S'ST OEY
“‘quepung y

‘durep corey. Juepunqy
‘quepund y

‘Sploy. UL MouULO:)
‘quepungy

OY

‘goysnq Ssuoure womULOD
ole yy

*oVt

*[RMOISv00Q,

"422F 000°F
‘MOUULODTIN 40 NT
“Splog Ul Juepunqy
*[BUOISVO0GQ)
‘Juepung y

“I9jVM Je JUepuNng Wy
“MOULULOD ONT
*“SHI[O WO WOULULOD
‘TeyeM Ye JUBpuNqy
‘TOUUOOUN JON
*MOULULO(D)

roared ATO A
*[BUOISBODGQ,

Ore

‘Sp[oy. UI MOMULOD

‘quepungy

“7 ‘sneedoang sndoodry

udg ‘soqoyeydeo seonery

“yqueg “eueo,soy eyueUlel[e'T
vabung “eyerutory, sXyoe soumeay
“7 ‘opweorxe;due wmMrurery
‘PIM “eweour eyyUe TT

‘wg “Wy “2VBAO SOTSULOSTUY

‘Tue “eqye eueqae'y

TT ‘SI[eULoyZo Vtaq.1e A

“7 “exoyrpou eiddry

‘oy ‘opunsett XOqT A

‘ds “errepny[oysoy

"saan “BOISBA SpOYepPY
“BYVISTIO VLIOTIV

j ‘saan Sewerpsamqxoy esojdrporqg
4 eoovroemydor0g

¢ ds ‘ersr1equepury

“7 ‘susdeyy, wmoseqioe A

yquag “exoptsaed sopqeys0ydery
‘umnoIpuy g “7 “WNT}UOIO TMU Uy
“MoT ‘SnsOsnd snzeyy

yn A “CURITPPUBTAOIOD BISTOD
“T ‘sysorse «A

“T ‘SIj[eceue BOTUOIO A

é “Yqueg “eornqe) Ty

‘10 A4 “CUMISSISOMBI VITVULT

“y pue ‘7 “erourmmoyy sysed.io yy
“yqueg ‘eornqeg eemydorg
~youag ‘sTTlOVas SnTNVUI_L

ung “eyyeceead erpodoog

‘soany “eqye Baingeg

“7 ‘suqsnd snurefosoA ty

‘coy ‘eourumrA stpesAy

“Ung ‘SWeTN.SBOd * AA

I

[ No. 3,

Memoranda on the Peshawur Valley,

246

“DUD,
"AWD
‘abps nvr
‘rpury “mye
‘fang ‘woa ‘aunmad ‘wome,q

‘fong ‘bwnzug “quent

Veale
“obfns, ‘fing ‘jomybrdg

"ala bWONY M
“DUD pPLmy ny S|

“2AUDQLOYS
apzyboudy
“7 Cy

“AD UMD ST

‘ouUVN NIYSNG

"py ydag
‘AON “Wore yy
‘900 ‘ounr
‘Ty oun

‘PB AON “C9
B WO

*y AON Soune
‘p Avy Tady
*049T

“A Gore yy

‘Y Yorepy “AON

“y Ajo
"BO

TP AONE XO)

"p Avy

‘yg oun ‘Aepy
‘B Ajo
"B ady “qoweyy

‘AON ‘ATue

‘4Maz IO LOMOF JO porog

‘oqqtp 0491
‘0}IP 0791
“quepundy
“MOULULOOUN 40 NY
‘oun
“‘quepundq Vy
"OIB AY

‘STII JO OSBq SpaxvAro} WOTAULOD
IVY
“MOULULOD)

‘que pung Vy
‘IVY
“‘quepung VW
‘OTB Y
*]BUOISBO0G)
oaV yy
*400} 0OO'S
*[BUOISV00G)
*J09F 000'S
“TOUMUO,
‘sqysroy Arp wo WoMMULOD
*qooy

000‘F 7% wouRtMoD ‘ureyd ut caer A10 A

*[RNOISV50Q

*Sploy Poyestqa Ur Juepungy
ASE) NS TIL
*[BUOISVO0()

“Apsurys Arp ur guepungy

-Souonboxy

‘TW pue iz “esopid erepueg
‘hoy “esoorynay vpeeng

“bop “eLOPyMUr sisvqeay
*sAQ0g *O

"T “umprqay “O

“7 ‘uq]e wantpodouseyD
“UWiYIG “BT[OJLLBOUI] BEYOOSOLY

‘ds ‘eropeayeg

‘cole “ef
¢ VygUBLIo “g

‘mabpm “epaydneq *g

“T “eqejoooury ‘q

‘y pure ‘A, “Bilavuore osequelg
‘op

"eeyerqery

‘ds ‘ummouey,

“‘SNSOSNI snIyUBAQOT

*erpoyytsoddo eryoorqayon

‘ds ‘eqgada ny

‘eloptared vsnly

‘yquag “eyequaly, BIOT]Teg

“‘YqUag “BIOPYIG BLLOULOAOTTY
“BUBIQJOLOLOOTY *G

“ug ap Setaqoyd +g

“TT “esourqnys *g

‘voy “eQBURy, “Ss

yqueg ‘eyrund wrayeg

“qUe_ JO ou Ny

——— enema
LE I a SN

247

Memoranda on the Peshawur Valley.

1863.1

“103/013

‘fang ‘ovombryd ‘mzuy

: DALE)

‘fang “unpos ‘yn“7,
“vaynbDZ

“aynpuvng

‘fong “2897

“OLQNS]
fauzn awunmndeds Sayuady
“2ssDs |

“QUOT
ESO)

‘7 ‘Aon “Arne
TE yore, “390

“IJ “AON

‘OOS LOAOU “AF LO “TT

BP Ww

“I °90O
“y ounp ‘frady

"B Indy “qoreyy
‘BAe “qe
‘HB AON “290

"B Idy “Aon
B390 “OT
‘Beg “AON
"H AON “990
"B “AON

"B AON “990
“oyarp foygtd
“oyatp £091
‘BO “Ame

‘p Aon ‘ATaLe
‘EE “AON

"B AON “390
“HE Gore TL “AO NT
‘Epon y

‘p Ane

"BO

“EB ore yy
“B20

‘p Ane

“OIC

‘dimep ye womUo/

“TOULULO/)

“099t

“OLR Y

“TOULUIO()

é pTLA ATyemorse900 e014 WoutTMOD -V
*901] TMOULULOD VW
qe sseg coq ATX]
Benches

‘Sppey Ut Juepunq Vy
*[BUOISBOD(O,

‘soovyd Arp ur guepungy
‘quepung y

*o9stp OFT

‘ow S10YVAA UE JUepUNG Vy
“quepungy

“MOULUTOOUN 40 Ny

‘duep Ul [VUOISvI0H
‘quepunqy

“Spleg Ur Juwpuanqy
“1eyVa ye guepuNnqy
“spo Nae Ws Griotsy okua ale iy
‘oy

“qurepunq Vy

“TMOUUOOTN JON,
“MOUIULOD

“Os Jorg

*“MOUMULOD 40 NT

“OLB

“MOULULOOTN. 40 NI

‘079

“TOUULOD)

‘MOULULOD 40 NT

“qo0j

“opam Seonopodsy eAssorssa Ny
“ppaM “Sixerplo VIZ[OZN0F,
“TT “BUIISSTOVUO4 BOTY RASIO
‘Tydangxoy “HL
“BILOJOOFUL “if
“ory ‘Seploolwed SNOT
"Ty “eqye sntndog
é voraopAqeg XTeS
“xe[T snozont)
‘ds ‘snuly
“wor ‘sistaane eeepoutdy,T,
“uo ‘snqeqysey, “Y
“TT ‘SUITEOISOA “UY,
‘snynoe XouUInYy,
“usvayy “UIMpPLooey *_.
“7 Tanyeqreq *
“OIV[NOIAG “|
¢ umnrposrpyedey “dL
“7 “enreoisdog wanumosAjog
"Od “esngtp VIAvey oO,
“7 SeoquecIB CISOTO)
“Lg “Wy ST[ISsosowr OTWVULSFT VT
“ySL0p ‘SISUOATG BIOSI(L
“7 ‘suumesdjod “Ww
‘soprouosdAjod snyuvreary
‘od ‘Vy “eoovddey erpedng
“7 “erodse soyjuetkypoy ot
‘ssnp “ROTUBAB EL BOI Hy
"T TBM PLOSTRS ey
7 “eumpieut vurpodousyy
“boyy “wanpryzeey “OD
“hope ‘TmaIIpIAN wojsxoredy
‘boyy “eyerarory xopdiaypy
‘ds ‘stavqoo[e

[ No. 3,

Memoranda on ths Peshawur Valley.

248

"az

“wNYyoupUnb 197A

“wp WwnUy

‘fon g “wyonsp ‘a4
TY NT

‘OUV NT NYYSN

"B00 “38ny

‘Aine

‘qdog “Amp

"0941p “0991,

“ay ATP

‘ay pue yf Ajup ‘oune
"If “AON

“Ap “AON

“J “490
"405 JOAOU [Fy

“TE Porepy
B ndy

‘o74Ep “099EC

Bp dy

‘o¥Tp ‘OV.
‘Eady ‘yore py
“Ee YOLe I,

dB Ame

B Ajue

‘B dy “Aon
"py Ajo

‘aj pues ‘B Aon ‘Apne

‘OUIP plo [dy “maz Ssunod ‘oog

"B 900 “AeWT
“EB YoleyL

‘MOUIULOD JON
“MOULULOLZ)
“‘quepuno Vy

OLB AT

*LOJVM UL OSNJOIT
‘ow “S][IY AOT Quepunqy
*[BUOISVODGC)

OyrG

*TOULULO(/)
‘moumumoouN JON
*MOTIULOK)

“LOYVAA UL WOUMULOOT
“LOYeMA WL JUBpUNEYy
‘Spey Ur Juepunq y
*MOULULOOUN JON
roared Ato A

*099T

*[RMOISBDDGQ)

‘O}FIp Fuepunq Vy
‘O}JIp Osnjorg
‘Sploy Ur guepungy
‘OUT oaey

“‘qMay IO LOMO JO poweg

‘0}}Ip TOMUIOOUN JON

*TOYBAA UL WOULULOL)

“1OVEM UL UOUMUTOOUN JON

“OLE

"MOULULODH

‘AaT[VA JO OPIS YIAOU WO 4ooz QOG‘E IV
‘soovd ojsead Ur WOUTUTOD

“ode yy

oo

-Aouonbo.ay

"7 ‘snyeuryoe snamoue*n
“eOTUSLy *T

*“IOULUL BUULETT

"T “erpoyyey “I,

T “eroyyysnone eyddy,

‘fiey “ewermorny sdorc3eueyg

‘sLaqsnped evrjoyorue,
“7 ‘sueqeu * 7

“T ‘SNOULUURAS * 7

"T ‘sndsi10 * gy

TT ‘sngerpoyzed mojosoue0g

‘sTTeards vriwoUstye A.

"RY [[LONOA we][rapATy
‘ds ‘sty

“puvy “eyeotms ourxnoy,

“7 ‘srunuimo0o tanudjeuuL09

“T ‘snrmomnq *¢
“T ‘snjemMonae snoune
“T ‘snuso[nysy snjopoydsy

6 1M “wnqpAydoydoy wmv

‘YOO, “eqeyjoys edyny,
“uo” ‘euLtoyIUAL “WH

"T ‘Osequelg vusipy

“TT “RIPOFIYALGVS VLIIALSVY
T ‘snyeyjequm snuojng
é voy ‘sngouloova “Ww

‘ds ‘snsvaedsw

‘OY “RILOFLGWOT SUUTT

"TT SVATZVS STIQRUURD

“ds ‘eizjoznog

"qUv[q JO owe

eee a SS

249

“DID

“wayyy widy

‘ yYyyn WY

POs
"09 mM *nhane
LqQuinup “pbhimanys

“oyysng

Memoranda on the Peshawur Valley.

“YSPIDMOY SY “WOYsng.n AA

1863.]

-abanudy

‘Bp AON “g8ny
B90 Tedy

‘HB aeok jo 4sopy

‘HP AON “qore yy
‘B 9ony]

‘BP AON “raidy
‘YP AON ‘oune
‘094tp “0991
‘0941p “0791

‘B mdy “yoreqy

B90 “Jony

‘PB AON ‘Gore yy

‘P AON “Zony
‘H AONT

‘PT AON “ony)
B90 ‘Ane

‘Boog 09 Ajne

‘BO

‘B ‘AON “dag
“gp Aine ‘rady
‘pp adeg ‘oune
‘oFIP “0791
“B AON Youn
“B AON “qrady
p Avy ‘ady
‘B AON

OT

‘B90

y ysny
‘B90 ‘any
‘PF AON “Worepy
‘B20 ‘Ame
'B ysny

“B AON
‘BO Tedy

*[BUWOISRO0GQ,
“MOULULOD
quepungy
“ot
*[BUOISV00(C,
0991

“MOULULOD
“MOUIULOOUN 40 Ny
‘07417

*MOUTULOD
“MOUULOOUN. 40 NT
Ot

Que pung vy
*[RUOIS'800GQ,
“‘quepungy
“MOUIUODUN JON

“MOUWIULOD SSO] LO SLOT

“ot

“OVI
“MOULULOD)
“1OJVM JV TOTULOD
“MOUUOOTMN 40 NT
Oot

‘OWI

“TOMLULOZ)
“‘quepung y
‘[BUOISBO0()
“Oley
*[RUOISe00G,
"OVI

“oF
“qUepULLG W
‘[BWOISseD0GQ
ole yy

“MOULULO/)

‘ds “y

‘soaN “elopT]oOsep ouIsnoey a
T “wojA,0ep uopousy

"ds ‘Vv

"ds ‘Vv

T “eqie susoisy

‘ds ¢

“"T “enue Bog

‘seprooryd “yy

¢ BYCISTIO BLLIOTCOM

‘PIM “unoendksry vanrme00[Ajoeg

‘anwag “eones eireqyag

Be) ‘SI[CUINGURS BIIEITSIG

"7 ‘suede. *g

“TT “WMNMOTOD * |

‘boop “UMNMrxeM wMoTUe F

-ds < IOyIO IMO; “gf

é voy “wnyeIT7exe wUNIeYyDOeY

‘coy “eyrexy Opunry

“Wnyoy “esnouerway trosodoqukg
“Coy “eIQeLS “IT

‘21YMA “eIUSITY VIT[CoqTIOY,
‘anmag ‘Septooeod. "ap

‘g pue -y ‘sopromnsoudsd sysorseag
é ‘Slag “eSO][LA Sstx0Ty >

‘Youve “Seplomyomes +7

‘mebpay ‘wumsoouere * 7

‘od “UMUMOJOYOrp Tanjostuus |

¢ unuejoury wosodoskay9
“puarg “sugnjoautr “Ww

‘sgog TWperg, “We

"T ‘snjjAis uosodorpuy

‘gf pue ay caceaennos wosodo.104077
‘ds “Wy

“oy “B908{O8 VprsLry

[ No. 3,

Memoranda on the Peshawur Valley.

250

‘OWE NT NIYSNG

‘A AON founp
"B AON ‘AIOE
‘Byeny

"p ‘Aon ‘ATne
“Bf “AON ‘oun
"AON

‘EB 290

‘y oune

‘pg oune Avy
“BH Gore yy

‘B Tady “yoaeyy
‘PB oune “Avy
“B AON “490
‘Bp AON ‘oun
"B AON dog
‘Bp yony

‘B AON “dog

‘Bo ySny
‘B Aon ‘Ata
‘BP AON founr

‘Bp AON “dy
‘optp “OFT
‘oqftp “0NT

Bp Indy

‘p Avy Tady

B dy
‘B AON ‘oune

‘WMI IO JOMOF JO porsog

‘ow

“TLOUNTLOL)
“HU PULL

“MOULULOOUN JON
“‘quepung y

‘IoJeM UL FUBpUNG Vy
‘gp[oY, poyRoLlal UL OSNJOLd
OTT

‘[BOOT SMOULULOD JON,
“OWT

OI

‘WOTMULOOUN. 40 NJ

OTB

‘sp[oy UI WOULULOOUN JON
‘OLE YT

‘om ‘SoyJIP UI WOTUULOD
“WOUMULOOUN 40 NT
*[RTLOTSVO0GQ,

“HOTUULODUN 40 NT

“OWN

OLB YY

‘on ‘spley UL MouLULO’
*[BUOISVO0()

“mowmULOOUN 40 NT
Rede] Oren ae IV

“TOULULOZ)

*SplOy UI MoULULOD
‘Sploy UL WOUTUMOOUN JON
‘Sploy Ul WoULUOD
*UOULULOD

‘dumep 210A WOTULOD

‘Souonbo.a,y

“T ‘sroLIogIp *D

‘way ‘staelideo “6
"SNOATE ‘CQ

“qyjoy ‘snyemoronuUr "A
‘gqaxy “BIUYeITVKE *O

7 ‘snpunjoa snaod ig

‘ds “vorpoyy

TUN{VOLIMI UInIETIeUy
‘ds . g

‘ds ‘edyg

‘ds ‘eonqso,y

‘ds ‘ummop.10H
TANYUSTNULS TUMNILOTT
“pIUM “edoyy UanTedseg
“yung ‘SnUIESe{s snueuIsT[dO
‘ds T

‘ds ‘ouovsy

‘co “eyemormos “Ww
“eqeystre vpnidy

“coy “exopiq oseddery
‘osuodeTep, UMTLGI0G

‘ds “umaoydoddeg

¢ VOLS SNpPIV NT

‘TRO y Byeroduy

“TT ‘ST][OUL SnNULOIg

‘TT ‘SISMOTIVUBH SIIVleY
TT “engey BUOAW

“7 ‘stsuoyead snmoodo,y
‘youanypy “eotne VIoIVULeT
“7 ‘sisuosorjodsuoyy, uosodAjog

“quvid Jo owe Ny

——————— ea

251

Memoranda on the Peshawur Valley.

1863. |

‘qdag

rayopung DB AON

"390

az, ONS.

‘Amp

‘qdog

“Aap
‘ATO

"p Ap “qoreyy

"Gg ‘AON foune

2H AON *

youy

sD AON

“AON
"A Gosre yl

‘Ajo
“AON

B OIG

B

“AON

*TLOULULOD)

ong |

‘OFFIC

“quepung vy

‘OIG

‘OLB,

"1oYWM UL OSNFOI
OFFI
*[BUOISBDDGQ)

‘om ‘soyyrp ‘sespe Ur Juepungy
“MOULULOD)

*MOULULODUN 40 NT
"[BUOISvI00
*TOULULOOUM. 40 NT
OO Y
*MOULULOOUN 40 NT
OTE

“Oy

SUB pUnG,

490} 00G‘Z 0} WOUIUIOOUN 4oN7
*[RMOTSVI0G,
‘OUT

‘MOULULOG)

“OTe yy
“MOULULOOUN. JON,

"WOTUULOD SSO] 10 oLoUT [Te ‘saAepac_)
‘N Toy3qnop jo squejd g pue ‘ssow
B “wAroyuoo @ (¢ ¢) Bloque “ereyo yw

‘SURICM “x7

‘SsuURIINE VIoory

“voy ‘oTIqep winjesmmba

‘ds ‘eryueyoae yy

“elOZV

¢ “ds “erurapeg

“'T “erjoyiapenb eorpisaze py

é Sarg ‘sttoydApoyy, eeoaqsery

“BI[OJLSUOT S104 q

“7 ‘sitoue A sniideg umnyueipy
“og

og
‘waovred ig

‘aSatq “eWRIYOTTe AA XoIeD

7 ‘snugiaeu sndiiog

“ug ‘staysnjed steyooopa
"saan “eqeurjoed eqeatoorleyy
‘oy ‘wangou0D vancoy dori
dds

‘ds . a

“1YMA “eULOZOYOIp “Ff

‘saan “ST[RAO STLAQST.Iq UAT

¢ uedsey ‘9

252 Memoranda on the Peshawur Valley. [No. 3,

The number of plants in the foregoing list amounts to 467, of
which 348 are dicotyledonous, 105 monocotyledonous, and 14 aco-
tyledonous, and these are distributed in about 320 genera, and 95
natural orders ; thus the natural orders are to the genera as 1 to 3.45,
and to the species as 1 to 4.91.

377 out of the whole species have been specifically identified,
but of these must be excluded 8 species with regard to the general
distribution of which I have not sufficient data to render them
available for any calculations as to the geographical relations of the
Peshawur Flora.

Of the 369 species thus left to be dealt with in this connexion,
188 belong to the ordinary Indian Flora, while those plants which
are found at various heights in the Himalaya, amount to 128, 39
species being common to both the Himalaya and the plains.

One circumstance which comes out strongly in the examination of
the plants of Peshawur, is that here in the plains a great many
species, (many of them European,) are indigenous, which to the
Eastward cf the Punjab are only found in the Himalaya (or at
similar heights in the Neilgheries, &c.) It has long been familiarly
known that a considerable number of European species of herbaceous
plants inhabit the plains of the N. W. Provinces. These generally
flourish “in the cold season,” to use Dr. Royle’s phrase, but with
regard to many of them, spring is the season of active growth, as I have
been able to verify by observation during the early months of, 1861,
1862 and 1863. All of these extend also into the Punjab, and the
circumstance with which we are now concerned, goes to prove what
otherwise would appear very likely, viz. : that the further North West
we proceed, the greater is the number of (European and) Himalayan
plants found in the plains. I shall here give a list of those plants
which, near Peshawur, I have found below 1500 feet above the sea-
level, but which have not been found in the plains of the North West
Provinces, (to the East of the Sutlej)—many of them, so far as my
information goes, having been found at such low elevations in the
extreme North West Punjab only ;—but my means of obtaining data
regarding the distribution of many of even the Indian species of
plants, have, from my isolated position, and the want of libraries,
&e.,—been so limited, that I have doubtless inserted some plants
which ought to be excluded from this list.

1863.]

Memoranda on the Peshawur Valley. 253

Of the 68 species, those marked B. are British, those marked E.
are found in other parts of Europe, while the rest are Himalayan

plants.

B.

hi w&

Ranunculus arvensis, Z.
R. letus, Wall.

Adonis estivalis, Z,

. Ceratocephalus faleatus, Mench,
. Lepidium ruderale, Z,
. Malcolmia africana, R. Br.

Goldbachia levigata, DC.
Euclidium Syriacum, DC,

. Sisymbrium Sophia, L.
. Neslia paniculata, Desv.
. Arenaria serpyllifolia, Z,

Sageretia oppositifolia, Brongn.
Rhamnus virgatus, Rox.
Rhus Kakrasinghi, Royle (acuminata, DC. ?)

. Medicago maculata, Willd,
. Trifolium repens, L.

. Lotus angustissimus, L,

. Rubus fruticosus, L,

R. lasiocarpus, Sz.
Grislea tomentosa, fox,

. Herniaria hirsuta, Z.

. Sium angustifolium, Z,
. Tillea muscosa, L.

. Galium aparine, L.

G. tricorne, With.

. Asperula cynanchica, L,
. Taraxacum officinale, Wigq.

Gnaphalium multiceps, Wall.
Lactuca auriculata, Wall.
Koelpinia linearis, Pall.

. Centaurea calcitrapa, LZ.

Aplotaxis candicans, DC,

. Bidens cernua, ZL.
. Samolus Valerandi, Z,

Olea Europea, L,

solulse/nes

Memoranda on the Peshawur Valley.

Nerium odorum, L.

Orthanthera viminea, Wight.

. Lithospermum arvense, L.

Lantana alba, Azil.
Eremostachys laciniata, Bunga
Lallemantia Royleana, Benth.

. Lycopus Europeus, L.

Salvia pumila, Benth.

S. lanata, Row.

S. Moorcroftiana, Wall.
Micromeria biflora, Benth.
Ajuga parviflora, Benth.

. Plantago lanceolata, Z.

Gieseckia linearifolia, Schum.

. Chenopodium Botrys, L.
. Atriplex laciniata, Jfoq.

Rumex hastatus, Don.
?

Salix Babylonica, Z.

. Populus alba, Z.

Ficus Roxburgh, dig.

. Alisma Plantago, Z.

A. reniforme, Don.
Tulipa stellata, Hook.
Allium leptophyllum, Wadi.

. Juncus articulatus, Z.
Cymbopogon Iwarancusa, Schult.

. Poa annua, LZ.

. Phalaris Canariensis, Z.

. Bromus mollis, Z.

Eriophorum comosum, Wail.
Carex Wallichiana, Prese.

. Lastrea Thelypteris, Pest.

ticcia fluitans, ZL.

| No. 3,

The number of British species found in the Peshawur valley

amounts to 100, being avery large proportion of the number of
species (Hooker and ‘thomson give 222) common to Britain and

India, and of this number the following twenty species have not,

1863. | Memoranda on the Peshawur Valley. 255

so far as I am aware, been hitherto found in the Himalaya, or in the
plains to the Hast of the Punjab.

Sisymbrium Irio, DC.
Lepidium Draba, L.
Frankenia pulverulenta, L.

ba)

Kuphorbia Helioscopia, L.

KE. Peplus, Z.

Erodium maritimum, Z. Her.

EK. cicutarium, Z.

? Cichorium Intybus, LZ.
Lycopsis arvensis, L.
Plantago major, L.

Suzeda fruticosa, Mog.
Chenopodina maritima, L.

P| Salsola Kali, 2:

? Typha latifolia, Z.

Lemna minor, Z.

Digitaria sanguinalis, Pers.

Keeleria cristata, Pers.

Agrostis alba, LD.

Alopecurus pratensis, J.

Nardus stricta, Z.

The number of Central and Southern European species of plants,
(exclusive of such as are also found in Great Britain) included in
the Peshawur Flora, is 61.

African species, continental and insular, occurring in the Pesh-
awur valley, amount to 146, and it is worthy of note that among
these are 11 out of 14 identified Peshawur Cyperacex, and 30 out
of 44 Grasses.

Of the Peshawur species, 101 have been found in the region com-
prising the Caucasus, Asia Minor, Syria and Persia.

The species of Siberia, Mongolia, and Central Asia (north of
Tibet) are 59, of which 43 are common also to the last section.

The Arabian species amount to 41, of which 18 are found in the
Persian region also.

The species collected at Peshawur, and common to it with Affgha-
nistan, Beluchistan and Sind, are 47, of which the following appear

2K 2

256 Memoranda on the Peshawur Valley. [No. 3,

not to have been as yet found elsewhere than in these three regions,
excepting one or two which are indigenous also in some parts of the
Punjab, Cis-Indus.

Papaver cornigerum, Stocks.

Crotalaria Burhia, Ham.

Reptonia buxifolia, 4A. DC.

Withania coagulans, Dun.

Scrophularia Cabulica, Benth,

Tinaria Cabulica, Benth.

Plantago eriantha, Due.

Anabasis multiflora, Moq.

Caroxylon Griffithu, AZfoq.

Chamerops Ritchiana, Griff.

The following 32 are characteristic Punjab species, many of which
extend to the more arid tracts near Delhi, some even (as Cocculus
LLeeba) to dry parts of the Peninsula, and of which many are also
found in Arabia or Africa, while a few (as Fagonia cretica, Plantago
arenaria, and Forskahlea tenacissima) extend to the South of Europe.

Cocculus Lezeba, Forsk.
Oligomeris glaucescens, Dre.
Cleome Ruta, Jacq.

C. linearis, Stocks.

Mollugo Cerviana, Seringe.
Crozophora tinctoria, Juss.
Fagonia Cretica, Z.
Peganum Harmala, L.
Acacia modesta, Wall.
Carthamus oxyacantha, Bieé.
Filago Germanica, Z,
Berthelotia lanceolata, DC.
Franceeuria crispa, DC.
Pulicaria vulgaris, Gertn. ?
Trichogyne cauliflora, DC.
Rhazzya stricta, Dne.
Periploca aphylla, Due.
Demia extensa, R. Br.
Tecoma undulata, Don.
Heliotropium Huropxum, E.

1863. | Memoranda on the Peshawur Valley. 257

H. brevifolium, Wall.
Nonnea Edgeworth, DC.
Scopolia prealta, Dun.
Ballota limbata, Benth.
Plantago arenaria, W. f K.
P. bauphula, ‘Ldgew.
Forskahlea tenacissima, L.
Cenchrus echinatus, L.
Pennisetum dichotomum, Delile.
P. araneosum, Mdgew.

P. cenchroides, Fzch.
Chloris villosa, Pers. ?

A few of the Peshawur plants, 36, are found also in China or
Japan, but of these many are of very wide distribution throughout
the world, and the same remark applies to 78 species that are corn-
mon to Peshawur and Australia, as well as to 97 species that occur
also in America, continental or insular.

Of the 369 Peshawur species, 1385 are found in at least three out
of the five great divisions of the globe. Of these, however, a consi-
derable proportion do not extend, in Africa and Europe, far from the
Mediterranean, so that although occurring in three continents, they
are not so widely distributed as the mere statement of the latter
fact would appear to indicate.

The results of the above may be thus briefly stated ; Indian species,
188 ; Himalayan, 123: common to the plains of India and the Hima-
laya, 39; Himalayan, which have been found in the plains to the
west of the Sutlej only, 68; British species, 100, of which 20 have
not been found to the east of the Sutle]; of South Hurope, 61 ;
African, 146; of Caucasus, Asia Minor, Syria or Persia, 101; of
Siberia and Central Asia, 59, of which 43 occur also in the preced-
ing section; Arabian, 41, of which 18 are common also to Persia,
&e.; of Affghanistan, Beluchistan and Sind, 47,10 of these being
peculiar ; of Punjab and arid tracts of India, 32; of China and Japan,
86; Australian, 78; American, 97 ; and occurring in at least three of
the five continents, 135.

I shall conclude this already too lengthy paper by some re-
marks on a few of the species individually, noting those circumstances

258 Memoranda on the Peshawur Valley. [ No. 3,

in regard to their frequency, the uses to which they are put, &c.,
which seem to deserve attention.

Ceratocephalus falcatus does not appear to have been previously
found anywhere at the plain level in India, and I only got a very
few plants on one occasion in the Peshawur district, at a place where
I failed altogether to find it in the succeeding season. It occurred
abundantly in central Waziristan, north west from Dehra Ismail
Khan, at about 7,000 feet above the sea.

Delphinium penicillatum is common in the lower hills round the
valley, but as my specimens were lost, it is not included in the list.

Cocculus Leaba is a common plant, but only on dry precipitous
banks, where also (I might almost add where only) Capparis spinosa
and HKhretia aspera are very generally found.
~ Immense quantities of Nelumbium speciosum grow in one part of
the Peshawur marsh, where it has probably been introduced, and
to which myriads of its flowers give a very gay appearance in July.
The right of collecting the seeds and roots (the latter dug in Octo-
ber) is leased out, both being eaten by natives.

The (new ?) species of Malcolmia is in many parts of the valley
an abundant weed, and the widespread masses of its pretty purple-lilae
flowers have attracted the notice of the Huropean residents, by whom
it is frequently called “ heather.” I have seen itas far east as Hussan
Abdal, but it is not contained in an extensive collection of plants, made
by Dr. J. E. T. Aitchison, at and near Jhelum. Specimens of it as well
as of M. Africana, frequently occur with white flowers. The species of
Notoceras is also common and may be new. It is a small, inconspicu-
ous herb.

I cannot find that Euclidium Syriacum, Alyssum calycinum, Sisym-
brium Sophia or Neslia paniculata have previously been collected in
the plains anywhere to the east of the Suliman range. Near Peshawur,
all except the two last, are with Malcolmia Africana, abundant.

Oligomeris glaucescens 1s by no means common, nor are Cleome
Ruta, C. droserifolia, and C. linearis, as I only knew of one or two,
stations where each of these could be found.

Capparis aphylla (Sodada decidua, Forsk.) though not universal, is
in some parts of the district abundant.

Fliiggea virosa was not found in the valley, the only tree I saw in
that neighbourhood being Cis-Indus, but it occurs frequently beyond
the Indus to the South of Peshawur.

1863. | Memoranda on the Peshawur Valley. 259

Grewia oppositifolia is probably the plant (in Pushtu pastawane,
literally “soft tree’) mentioned by Vigne as that from which the
inhabitants of the Suliman range make their bows. It is frequent
Trans-Indus, and is the ddman of the Punjab, where its elastic wood
is used for making buggy-shafts, banghy-sticks, &c.

Dodonza Burmanniana is one of the most characteristic plants of
the dry rocky lower ranges to 4000, feet, Trans-Indus. It is a very
handsome evergreen shrub, and does admirably for hedges. This
plant is often called “ bog-myrtle” by Europeans, why I know not.

Peganum Harmala is probably the most common of the larger
herbaceous plants from Peshawur to Dehra Ismail Khan, and is
doubtless the species “like Devil in the Bush,” alluded to by Elphin-
stone as common near Peshawur, and surmised by Royle (appendix
to Vigne’s Kashmir) to be Nigella—sativa.

The Haplophyllum was only found in one spot, in one season.

Celastrus parviflora is one of the characteristic plants of the dry
tracts near the base of the hills ; it grows to be a largish shrub.

The new (?) species of Sageretia (mtmdnt) is also very common
in similar places to the last, and throughout the Trans-Indus hills
generally to 4,000 feet. Its fruit which is not unlike the bilberry, is
small, but when fresh is pleasant and sweet. Itis the madmunna of Grif-
fiths and is well-known in the bazars of Peshawur and Afighdnistan.

Under Rhamnus virgatus have probably been confounded two
species, one (or both) of which is common on most of the Trans-
Indus hills.

Of Rhus Kakrasinghee (acuminata?) in Pushtu shkne, I have
only seen a very few trees beyond the Indus; Griffith hints at the
shne (schnee) of Affehanistan being a Xanthoxylon. This name
thas at different times been applied by Affghans to each and all of
the species of Rhus and Pistacia that I have ever shewn them. The
present species produces beautifully marked wood—the Auwkkar of the
Himalaya—for furniture, desks, &c.; and is subject to the growth of
large, red, fleshy excrescences upon its leaves (as is also the case
with Pistacia Cabulica or Atlantica in Belichistan, according to
Stocks,) which are employed medicinally by the natives.

Crotalaria Burhia was not met with in the Peshawur ville
although it is common near Campbellpore, a few miles to the east of
Attock, and abundant at many places to the south of Peshawur. The

260 Memoranda on the Peshawur Valley. [No. 3,

fibres of its bark are of great strength, but I am not aware of this
property being taken advantage of for economical purposes.

Acacia modesta is an abundant and characteristic shrub. Its
flowers in spring have a most agreeable and powerful odour, easily
felt at a distance of many yards to leeward of a bush in full blossom;
and it furnishes good but very small timber, suitable for making
ploughs, &e.

Medicago maculata and Trifolium repens do not appear to have
been previously found in the plains of India, but the one is common
and the other occasional near Peshawur and in the Trans-Indus
districts generally.

Acacia catechu and Butea frondosa might have been included in
the list of Peshawur Leguminose, as they were collected (though
both are very rare) in the district. They have, however, been exclud-
ed, as the specimens were lost at Nowshera—with the other results
of my first two seasons botanizing in the valley—ain the flood of the
Cabul river, caused by the great Indus cataclysmof 1858.

On two occasions only were very young plants of Kubus lasiocar-
pus found, in the beds of streams, and they may have been seedlings
accidentally brought down from the hills.

Trapa bispinosa is by no means common and has possibly been
introduced.

Grislea tomentosa was found only close to the Swat river near its
débouchement from the hills.

Tamarix orientalis is one of the trees very commonly planted about
villages, &c., and I am not sure that I have ever seen it wild. It is
a very handsome tree and looks a shady one (indeed, Elphinstone
alludes to its shade as being extremely sombre,) but in reality, its
slender, rod-like branches, with very minute leaves, afford a most in-
adequate defence from the sun, as experience soon teaches the frontier
campaigner. Its wood is of little value.

The only Compositous plant that seems to require special notice is
Carthamus oxyacantha which is abundant throughout the valley.
An oil is extracted from its seeds which is both burned and used in
cookery. Its parched seeds are eaten, and when ground, they are
made into bread which is considered very nutritious. Col. Sykes
gives similar information with regard to the uses of the allied Cartha-
mus (Onobroma) Persicus,

1863. | Memoranda on the Peshawur Valley. 261

I may remark that lere, as elsewhere in the Punjab and in the
N. W. Provinces, Anagallis arvensis is always the variety 6 cerulea,
while every specimen I saw in the valley of Kashmir, had the usual
scarlet corolla of the British plant.

Reptonia buxifolia is a large shrub common towards the skirts of
the hills, and to 3,000 feet, throughout the Trans-Indus districts.
Its wood is small but hard and fine grained, and its fruit is the well-
known gurgura of the Affghans, collected in April for sale, but which
is miserable eating, and by no means deserves their panegyrics.

Olea Europea is very common, Trans-Indus, as well as throughout
the Western Punjab, in similar situations to the last. It is a small
tree, furnishing a good deal of strong hard wood used for making
agricultural implements, and for the kneed timbers of boats, &c. The
supply for the Government boat-yards at Attock is brought chiefly
from the direction of Nilab. Elphinstone mentions that its fruit is
eaten both fresh and dried, by the Sheraunees, but I could discover
no trace of such an usage among the Affghans, and the amount of
fleshy pericarp is very much less than in the European olive.

Rhazzya stricta is here (as further east in the Punjab) a characteris-
tic shrub, being so abundant in some parts of the valley that its dried
branches are commonly used as fuel. It seldom exceeds 2 or 23 feet
in height, and its resemblance to the oleander (noted by Vicary in his
paper on the Sind Flora, J. A.S.) accounts for its Pushttii name
being a modification of the Hindustani name of the latter.

Periploca aphylla, which occurs as far east as the hills north of
Jhelum (and in the Salt range near that place where it was first
found in India by Jacquemont), and which is common in most places
Trans-Indus.(to Sind, see Vicary) is so abundant in some parts of the
valley, as to be in common use as fuel. In one place, Cis-Indus, the
young shoots are eaten as sag.

The species of Boucerosia, not yet determined (I have only been
fortunate enough to get it once in flower and fruit) has a distribution
similar to that of the Periploca, than which it is, however, very much
less abundant. ‘The appearance of its bunches of short tetragonal
stems has suggested its Persian name panj angusht, five fingers, and
one of its Punjabi names chdr angli, four fingers. Its taste is intense-
ly bitter, and as in the case of most plants which have a very decided
flavour, salutary effects are attributed to it by Pathans and Punjabis,

2

262 Memoranda on the Peshawur Valley. LNo. 3,

by both of whom it is eagerly eaten. This is probably Griffiths’
““Stapelioides, eaten as a vegetable” found by him in the Khyber Pass
and appears to be the plant alluded to by Masson (Vol. II. p. 80)
which however he calls “ a lichen.”

Tecoma undulata is not uncommon in the Peshawur valley as
elsewhere, Trans-Indus. It has by far the largest corolla of any wild
plant I collected in the Punjab, and its gorgeous orange-coloured
blossoms present a striking appearance in April and May.

Cuscuta reflexa is by no means rare, and is the only parasitical
plant found in the plain near Peshawur. (Viscum album is, however,
evidently common above a certain height in the hills around, as it
was at once recognized and named, both fresh and dried, by Tira
men, who stated it to be frequent in their country).

A yellow-flowered variety of Heliotropium Europeum (or a differ-
ent species?) was only got in two places, and is probably the “ Helio-
tropium flavum” found by Griffith near Jellalabad.

The unnamed species of Nonnza (flower white, that of N. Edge-
worthii being rose-coloured in all my specimens,) I only found in
successive seasons in one field where it was abundant.

Arnebia echioides is common near Peshawur, as elsewhere beyond
the Indus, and in March and April its pretty yellow flowers enamel
the ground in many places where it occurs in profusion. It has a
pleasant smell, and under the name of the “ Prophet-flower” is held
in much esteem by the Affghans (but not to the south of the Trans-
Indus salt range so far as I could learn) who attribute the five dark
spots upon its corolla to the pressure of Mahomed’s fingers. I do
not know of its having been found to the Hast of Hussan Abdal,
there being some doubt as to specimens collected near Jhelum
by Dr. Aitchison, but its congener A. hispidissima, which occurs in
the Kohat Pass,is common in Rohilkhund, and is enumerated by
Dr. Anderson in the flora of Lucknow.

Lithospermum arvense is an abundant field-weed in spring, and
Lycopsis arvensis occurs sparingly in waste places.

Ehretia aspera is frequently found, Trans-Indus, on dry precipitous
banks, but always much more stunted than in the lower North-West
Himalaya.

Withania coagulans is an abundant small shrubby plant and
extends eastward at least to Jhelum. Its Persian name pani bad

1863. | Memoranda on the Peshawur Valley. 263

implies, and information received from Dr. Bellew regarding the
practice at Candahar, authenticates its occasional use in Affghanistan
as a coagulant, but this does not appear to be the case at Peshawur.
Masson mentions its seeds as being useful in colic, &c., and this
seems probable from the known sedative effects of W. somniferum.

Hyoscyamus pusillus was only found, in successive years, in one
place, where it was pretty common in several fields.

Of Scopolia przalta only one plant was found near Peshawur, but
I have frequently got it at places further to the south.

It is rather singular that although Solanum gracilipes is common
beyond the Indus about Kohat and to the south, (as in the Cis-Indus
salt range when Jacquemont originally collected it) it was nowhere
got in the Peshawur valley.

The species of Dicliptera is abundant in shady spots every where,
Trans-Indus, and Adhatoda vasica is, near Peshawur, as elsewhere in
the Punjab and North West Provinces, a very common plant.

Mentha incana is profuse by canals, &c. In one spot many plants
occurred having each spike contracted into a quasi-capitulum.

Of Eremostachys laciniata, in successive seasons, no more than a
single plant was to be found,

Ballota limbata is common in dry rocky places near the skirts of
the valley. It extends eastward at least to Jhelum.

Of Plantago bauphula there are two tolerably distinct varieties,
both of which are abundant. Both Plantago major and P. lanceolata
are very rare, and only found near water; while P. eriantha (?) is
common in the most arid spots.

Salvadora is frequent towards the base of the hills. In some
places, Trans-Indus, powerful aphrodisiac qualities are attributed to
the fruit of this plant, but it is probable that the circumstances under
which it is collected—where the male and female inhabitants of
whole villages turn out into the “jungle” to gather it,—rather than
any quality of the fruit itself, afford an explanation of the results
attributed to the latter.

No fewer than twelve species of Salsolacez are found, most of them
being very common, near Peshawur, and several additional species
were got beyond the Indus to the south of the valley. We may note
this in connection with the two or three species of this order found
wild in the N. W. Provinces, and the twenty-two species (as given

2 2

264 Memoranda on the Peshawur Valley. [No. 3,

in Decandolle’s Prodromus) contained in Griffiths’ Affghanistan
Herbarium, while in the Siberian Flora, the number is very much
larger still. Of those found in the Peshawur district the most common
are Anabasis multiflora, Sueda fruticosa, Caroxylon Griffithu, and
Panderia pilosa, the last being the tallest and most bushy. So far
as I am aware none of the Salsolacee are here applied to any use, but
J understand that in the arid tracts between Lahore and Miltan,
immense quantities of an impure alkali are extracted from the ashes
of several of them (known by the general name of lane or lana) for
export to other districts.

‘rua Javanica is very abundant, and grows in the driest places,
often to upwards of five feet in height. It varies much in habit and
in the form and size of its leaves.

Rumex vesicarius is common in dry rocky or shingly situations.
R. hastatus is only found at some height ahove the plain.

Thymelea arvensis is an abundant field weed,: with a marked
variety less common than the ordinary form.

The species of Alnus was only met with near the debouchement of
the Swat river from the hills, near which place it is common, but
stunted.

Quercus Ilex, I procured from the Khyber Pass where it must be
abundant, as its wood is one of the commonest brought in for fuel to
the cantonment of Peshawur.

Forskihlea tenacissima is not uncommon on dry rocky spots. It
varies very much in habit, being sometimes short stemmed, low and
scrambling, and at others tall, erect and half-shrubby. Its leaves
also vary much according to age, in texture and “ tenacity.”

Pinus longifolius I have collected at about 4,000 feet above the
sea, in the hills to the North-Hast of the valley, and I procured it
from the hills above Abazéi towards Swat, where it is said to be
abundant. It is notable that there should be none (nor was Quercus
Ilex met with) on the hills to the south of the valley, which rise to
5,000 feet above the sea. Nor did we reach it on the Waziri expedi-
tion into the Suliman range North-West of Dehra Ismail Khan,
when we attained 8,500 feet, and where its lower limit (forests of it
were seen above us, and I picked up its cones in stream-beds)—was
certainly not under 9,000 feet. The comparative drought has doubt-
less much to do with this. The Affghan name of the tree is nakhtar,

1863. | Memoranda on the Peshawur Valley. 265

under which Cedrus Deodara also appears to be included. The word
shdutai (mentioned by Griffith and Irvine) is only applied to its
resinous splinters used for torches and firewood.

An undetermined species of Asparagus is common here, as in many
parts of the Western Punjab ; while A. racemosus is very rare.

Alisma reniforme occurred only in one spring, which fact may possi-
bly be connected with the temperature of the latter, which is very
equable, and always considerably higher than that of the air in winter
and spring.

Allium leptophyllum, Asphodelus fistulosus, Tulipa stellata and a
species of Iris are all abundant in the fields in spring, when the gaudy
flowers of the two last present a very gay appearance.

Of Commelynum communis I only found a single plant. Zeuxine
sulcata is not uncommon in dampish places.

The various species of Fluviales are all abundant in most pools or
slow running streams.

Chamerops Ritchiana (possibly identical with C. humilis, the most
northern and only Huropean Palm) is not got close to Peshawur
itself where the supply has probably been completely used up—but
very large quantities of it are brought in from places a few miles off,
where it is gregarious and covers extensive tracts, for the manufacture
of mats, ropes and sandals, &c. The hillmen make a tobacco pipe
from a single segment of a leaf by twisting it up spirally ; and when
the ends of all the segments of a leaf are tied together, it is used as
a way-side drinking vessel. The mossy looking rete lying inside the
base of the petiole is used as tinder for which it answers admirably.
Though I have not seen this plant to the Hast of the Indus, and
Dr. Fleming in his Report (in J. A. 8.) on the Salt Range, does not
mention it as growing there, yet I am informed on good authority that
it is found on the top of Sarkesar in that range.

Typha angustifolia is abundant in all marshes but it is superseded
as a material for mats, for which it is used in the N. W. Provinces, &c.,
by the Chameerops, from which a much stronger and more lasting
article is made. ‘The seeds of the Typha are used as a binding mate-
rial for wall plaster, and to the South of Peshawur, the leaves are
employed ag thatch.

Of the Peshawur grasses a large number grow in very dry situa-
tions and of these the following are the most prominent; Aristida

266 Memoranda on the Peshawur Valley. [| Nowe:

setacea, Heteropogon contortus, Pennisetum cenchroides, Chloris
villosa (?), Rottbeellia hirsuta, Andropogon Bladhii, Cenchrus
echinatus, Eleusine flagellifera, and the species of Pappophorum.

The proportion of grasses to the whole of the plants collected in
the Peshawur district, about 60 to 460 (more than one-eighth)
seems very large when we consider that the number of grasses in
the Indian Flora to the total number of Phanerogamous species
found in India, including the Himalaya and Ceylon, is given by
Hooker and Thomson as about 400 to 12,000 or one-thirtieth. A
comparatively large number of grasses were also obtained in the
Trans-Indus districts, hill and plain, south from Peshawur to near
Dehra Ismail Khan, the proportion to the number of plants collected
being more than one-tenth (about 65 to 640).

The Cyperacez are also numerous at Peshawur, about 20 to 460
species; I am not aware that any of them is applied to any special
economical purpose.

Of Ferns, Adiantum Capillus Veneris is common on the sides of wells
(as it is in the N. W. Provinces, though Royle does not mention it
as found there,) and in shady places by ditches, &c. ; Pteris longifolia
and Lastrea Thelypteris (?) are both uncommon.

Marsilea quadrifolia and Equisetum debile are both profuse in
damp places, as are Riccia natans, R. fluitans, and Azolla, floating on,
and Chara, immersed in water.

In bringing toa conclusion these notes on the Peshawur Flora,
I have to express my exceeding regret that owing to various unavoid-
able causes, so many of the species should still remain unidentified.
As among these there will probably be a considerable number new to
India, when circumstances permit of their identification, I may beg
for admission into the Journal of the Society of a corrected list with
remarks, so as to furnish a more complete view of the Flora than is
at present possible. Meanwhile I have preferred sending the present
imperfect paper, to incurring the indefinite delay that may occur
before all the species can be thoroughly compared and named with
certainty; knowing as I do from bitter experience, from how much
vexation the possession of even such a catalogue as I have been able
to give here, would save the tyro in Indian botany who commences
his labours in the Upper Punjab.

PII PIIOIIIIIIILILIILIIIIII I

1863. | Inscription from Pu-gan. 267

Remarks on a stone inscription from the ruins of Pu-gin on the
Irrawaddy river.— By Lieut -Col. A. P, Puayre, C. B. Bengal
Staff Corps.

Among the ruins of the city of Pu-gan are numerous ancient
inscriptions, generally on slabs of sandstone, which being soft, and
the slabs having for centuries been exposed to the weather, the
inscriptions have for the most part become much worn, and are now
difficult to be read. Many of these inscribed stones have been re-
moved by order of the king of Burmah to the capital. Those which
remain at Pu-gan are seldom found in their original places, but have
been collected chiefly within the enclosure of one Pagoda called
Baudi-Phra. Some years ago when at Pu-gan I took rubbings of
several of the inscriptions, but from want of leisure, have never set
seriously to work to decipher them. At length I commenced with
one, the date of which was legible, and which had the merit of being
short. With the help of two Burmese literati, Moung Shwé Hlau
and Moung Ta, I have been able to decipher it. The inscription
possesses no historical interest, but may be of use as showing the
form of letters existing among the Burmese at the time it was
engraved, and so be a key to other and more valuable writings. For
this reason the original rubbing is sent, and a copy in modern Bur-
mese character, with an English translation, and notes, are added.

The inscription is unsatisfactory, as it does not give even the name
of the person making the gifts which it records. Very different in
this respect is the conduct of the bestower, to that of the modern
Burmese, who take care to record carefully their names when they
build a religious or charitable fabric. The language of the inscrip-
tion is homely Burmese, with such few Pali words as the nature of
the subject required. In later times a man would have despised the
vernacular, and have recorded his good deeds entirely in flowing
Pali. The language is quite intelligible, though the meaning of a
few words is still doubtful. Considering that the inscription is now,
(in A. D. 1862), six hundred and seventy-three years old, it is won-
derful that so few of the words have become obsolete.

The inscription records that the donor from sincere feelings of
respect to “the three treasures, Budha, his law and his ministers,”

268 Inscription from Pu-gin. [No. 3,

bestows or presents certain land, and agricultural implements, in
order that pure milk, or a preparation of rice-milk, or milk and
honey, may be available; and after blessing those who assist in the
good work, the inscription concludes with dreadful imprecations on
those who destroy it. While the donor is not mentioned, though
ene word implies a royal benefactor, nothing is even said as to whom
the offering is intended for; but perhaps that would have been in-
decorous, as it was probably a gift to a monastery, and Budhist
monks, not only theoretically must be dependent on daily charity
for their food, but must be utterly indifferent to it, except to support
life for the purpose of practising virtue. But milk is not taken as
food by grown up people in Burmah; or at all events is only lately
beginning to be used. Possibly the milk may have been intended
for foreign Budhist monks from Ceylon, who, there is reason to be-
lieve, about the time of the inscription, were not unfrequently at
Pu-gan.

Some explanatory notes have been added to the inscription. The
original consists of eighteen lines, and the copy in modern charac-
ters is written to correspond with it.

Copy of the inscription in modern character.
29096) 5 3 399909,09 §
SoG SRF jqo5slss0053
o€ 50g 2p. c0qp09209,99899012095 R05
D008 EG a5e35gogodqcooaZon$39Qg)9

85a Qn030qClsa00209 eq] HBO eoo0g9
s05Qo06dcy cdg 2000¢(Goro8 Scovdaacq Ros

G299 c209|6 909, 5003 Sgacepad e(g5o2
saesooI Osc scgegocedlarecg6eoooco
059

E OllosAOQo9—5e$EZE9 o11w$(OGoyo1ige yo

5 2 er CO 20 = = 20

a

ee.
boaley>se

Pam SSE eer
Patsy 13) 2 oY AD Lime avaak
i MBA SE ag LE
ree 13 Para of ers
eae Deqei
“us at = SE wf Ss:

a a Genes ig get

4 anes eae tai 3 PSs
se Bays oe are Ne hile of

COPIED FROM A PHOTOGRAPHED REDUCT!ON
AND

LITH? BY H.M SMITH, SURV’ GEN’S OFFICE, CALCUTTA, NOV. /862.

1863. | Inscription from Pu-gan. 269

90 Of69[eq,99 Qo19|EG8o3o .011030YOSe(Gy0n
sede

99 GooIIg}ClGlcoooearaE goQBoEdleoss020001
#229,

DJ aga Beaqeng pSecorodgagog deegoqadaé

D0 S&ca0dq.u70909/00026(8(GYq] Scocovon $2632
Ca

0G GaddIgC og gococooaiI(OJo09e@cO0NIISe (Go
pce

$9) Geto) O$oSqiod cocaoaiIc09539qSos|co
G000I1I8q$c00

9€ wpdeqdoco0o = —_ and dep gad Beoeo00e00

GOe0006,8

OL GOGH —-_ QOH cqodqapey
290 03900 oSeo0a(gesaScooqSeoooeon

Translation of the Inscription.

In the era 551* the Tharawan year, the fifth day of the waning
moon Tabodwai, (bearing in mind) the offering of pure milk curds,t
made sincerely from a well disposed regard to Phra (Budha) (his)
law (and his) ministers, (therefore I in order to provide) milk-curds,

* The existing era of the Burmese, commences with the vernal equinox of the
year A. D. 638. All their astronomical knowledge is derived from the Hindus,
(or Budhists of India) and formerly each year used to be designated in succes-
sion, by one of the lunar mansions of the Hindu system. Thus in the inscrip-
tion, the year 551 is called Tharawan, which answers to Sravanah the 22nd lunar
mansion of the Hindus. The waning moon Tabo-dwai falls in February. The
inscription was executed in the year 1189 A. 1).

+ Offering of pure milk. The composition of this inscription is, like all
ancient, and indeed most modern, Burmese writings, so elliptical, that much of
the meaning has to be guessed at. In this sentence it is possible that the offer-
ing of ga-nha, milk and honey, made to Gautama, after six years of fasting and
mortification by Thoodzata is alluded to,

2M

270 Inscription from Pu-qan. [No. 3,

(and) cows,* to be the property of the three treasures, royally bestowt
pure milk curds (and) rice-producing land;{ * * * * in quantity at
the place (called) Po-oon-tshay-tsyeng until you reach the village
Tsagyo, and from the north to the west until you reach the Nhen-
gyee§ stream, (what is) my own (that I) bestow, rice land (in
extent) 50;|| digging spades 50; broad spades 50; planks 50 ;*
ploughs 50;7 sickle handles divided 110; earth rakes 50; in all
410. This my good work the men who have assisted, may they
remain a hundred years; (but) that my good work, the loose de-
structive men, who would make away with, (it) may the earth swal-
low (them up); may the thunderbolts strike them ; may the clergy
and laity avoid them; may tigers devour them; may crocodiles eat
them, to-day may they be destroyed ; may their blood harden and
become corrupt ;§ may calamity, enmity, and evil overtake them ;||
may all their endeavours come to nought; may they die; with gid-
diness,§] may they have a disgusting stench in the body, with dis-
tressing skin disease ; with shivering,* and may evil follow them day
and night.

* The word in the inscription rendered “cows” reads () FR? or 2 ae if the
last it. may be a Pali word for cow; if the first it is bad spelling for QQ0900

* honey and milk,” or “‘ rice and milk.’

+ Royally bestow. The word here rendered royally, is in the inscription spelt
differently to the present mode of spelling that word; indeed it is an abbrevia-
tion not now in use, yet it is difficult to suppose it to represent any other word.
et the same time no other phrase in the whole inscription indicates a royal
donor,

{ The word connected with “ rice-producing land” left blank in translation as
not understood, may be the name of the place where it is situated.

§ It appears there is a small stream at Pu-gan still called Nhen-gyee.

|| ‘* Rice land fifty.” Probably the mere figures at that time sufficiently indi-
cated the area of the land. If they meant the produce in bushels the land might
be three or four English acres.

{| Some obsolete words not understood precede the word “ spade.”

* Planks are much used in land prepared for irrigation, to preserve the ridges
which retain the water.

+ The word for plough is obsolete, but I am informed is still known in some
parts of upper Burmah,

{£ The spelling of the word for rakes differs from that of the present day.

§ Here the stone begins to be broken, ‘‘ blood become corrupt,” the words of
the original are doubtful.

|| “‘ Overtake tnem.’ The words are inserted from the context where the
stone is broken.

4] After “ giddiness” words broken away.

* After ‘shivering’ words broken away.

é ae

er cee meen fhe

1863. | Memorandum on some medals and coins. 271

Memorandum on some medals and coins in the Museum of the Asiatic
Society, found near Mergui on the Tenasserun Coast.—By Lneut.-
Col. A. P. Puarre, C. B., Bengal Staff Corps.

The coins or medals found near Mergui and presented to the So-
ciety by Professor Oldham, have nothing to indicate the year when
they were cast. Their metal appears to be a mixture of tin and lead.
Tin is found in plenty in that part of the country. Possibly some
of them may have been made for circulation as money, but that is
doubtful. It has never as a general rule been usual to coin money
in the Burmese empire for currency. When Arakan was conquered
in 1784 A. D. the Burmese Governors issued a coin in imitation of
the custom observed by the Kings of Arakan, who again had learnt
the practice from the Mahomedan Kings and Governors of Bengal.*
It is possible that on the Tenasserim coast within the present dis-
tricts of Tavoy and Mergui, where tin is found, coins may have been
made for general use, more especially as those districts have occasion-
ally belonged to the Siamese, who have copper coins and formerly
even stamped glass. It appears to be the opinion of the people of
the coast also, that these coins were formerly used as money and as
weights. As, however, the large medals, numbers one to six of the
plate, contain religious symbols, the fact of their common circulation
is doubted by many inhabitants of the northern portion of Burmah
whom I have consulted regarding them. It is more probable that
they were made for the purpose of being deposited in Pagodas.

There are sixteen large coins in good preservation, which contain
only three different varieties. Of the smaller coins only six are
sufficiently preserved to be described. None of them contain any
date nor any king’s name. ‘They are probably recent, that is coined
within the last hundred years. I shall now proceed to describe those
coins of the collection which are figured on the accompanying plates
the exact size of the originals :—

No. 1.—Obverse.—The figure of a fabulous animal in the Burmese
mythology called 082 T6 or pO0ds naya a compound of flying
horse and deer.

teverse.—An inscription in the Pali language, Burmese character
as follows :

* See Journal of Asiatic Society, Vol. XV. p. 232.
2M 2

272 Memorandum on some medals and coins. [ No. 3,

QU09098 092004
Translation. “ Land of great happiness,” or “great happiness for
people of (the) land.”

The letters all read backwards from the die having been stupidly
prepared without reference to the stamped or cast surface from it,
coming out reversed. The inscription surrounds a wheel or circle,
the symbol of Budha, “ emblematic,” says Col. Cunningham, “ of the
passage of the soul through the circle of the various forms of exist-
ence,” and here typifying as shown by the inscription the attain-
ment of the great object, nirvana, rest in the happy land.

No. 2.—This coin is from a different die to No. 1, but the device
is generally the same. There is no difference in the inscription
which is shown reversed.

No. 3.—In this medal the animal intended to be represented is the
same as in the others; the inscription is also the same; but this
time is written correctly. The wheel here has only six compartments
there being eight in the others. Hach compartment also has a small
circle within it.

No. 4.—No material difference. Underneath the animal on the
obverse, is a six-rayed star; on the reverse, is the same inscription as
before, and the central wheel or circle with eight compartments.

The popular idea among the Burmese regarding these medals is,
that they were cast by order of the king called Bau-dau-phra, who
reigned from 1782 to 1819 A. D.; that he feared losing the remote
maritime province of Tenasserim and trusted to some supernatural
power by means of these medals to preserve his province from foreign
invasion, and thus secure “great happiness for the people of the
country.” This is a very far-fetched and unlikely interpretation. I
think it much more probable that the medals are the work of a
provincial Governor for a local purpose. They appear indeed to be
quite unknown to people of good education from upper Burmah, to
whom I have shown them.

No. 5 is of a different type from the preceding. The obverse is a
bird of no earthly form. The reverse bears what appear to be
Burmese characters, but of which no meaning can be made.

No. 6 is a medal which I am not prepared to explain, but the
reverse with the square symbol in the centre is apparently a rude

Plade XE.

Plate. XML.

ont! LORI LMLAWU NSE ADA,
ie Oe

ere

WZ

v

Plate,

EEA MO

i
q
oe
ri -
7 é
Py
J
‘i
cS
2
P La
i
{ j
ty; i
fy, i
Bs
i
Se Lt ates .
Peg ake ie
a us
— an
- - 4 i
i any ( ay
22) i
Eh on
om .
ei
>

Plate. X VET.

1863. | Sanskrita Inscriptions from Central India. 273

representation of the chaitya of ancient Budhist coins with central
relic chambers. The obverse may possibly represent a lotus bud.

Of the numerous small coins in the collection only six can be in
any way deciphered. These are figured in the plate and marked
Nos. 7 to 12 inclusive. The obverse in these coins appears generally
to contain a figure meant to represent a lion. In one instance, No. 8,
the figure is evidently a humped cow. At first sight the reverse of
these coins appears to bear traces of Burmese letters. Indeed some
of the marks do make veritable letters of the Burmese alphabet.
But no meaning can be extracted from them, and I incline to look
on these six small coins, as copies of ancient Buddhist coins made
by ignorant workmen, who, in copying the common chaitya symbols,
have made random marks like Burmese characters. But the symbols
in the coins marked 8 and 11, evidently differ from the rest. Iam
unable to offer any probable explanation of them.

Two Ancient Sanskrita Inscriptions from Central India ; teats, trans-
lations and comments.—By BABu RAJENDRALALA Mirra.

In my papers on Toramana and the kings of Gwalior I have noticed
nearly all of Major General Cunningham’s collection of Inscriptions
from Central India of which any sense could be made out. Of the
few which remained to be decyphered, most were full of lacune and
otherwise imperfect, and I have therefore returned them to their
owner, for such use as he may deem fit to make of them in his forth-
coming essay on the history of the celebrated stronghold of the |
Kachvahas. There were two, however, which were sufficiently legible
to admit of trustworthy interpretations ; and transcripts and trans-
lations of these I now offer to the readers of the Journal.

The first is from a small Jain temple at Kajraha, nine coss from
Chhatterpur, which is on the high road from Saugor to Hamirpur,
It is incised on a small slab nine inches square, the lines, eleven in
number, being, with one exception, just eight inches long.

Its language is pure Sanskrita, but the metre of its poetical
portion is defective, and the spelling throughout incorrect, the dental
sibilant being every where used instead of the palatal and the cere-
bral, and the cerebral being in one place used in the place of a kh as
in the modern Hindvi.

274 Sanskrita Inscriptions from Central India. [ No. 3,

The subject of the record is the donation, by one Bhabya Pahila,
of six small plots of garden land and a house for the use of a temple ;
it is dated, Monday the 7th of the waxing moon in the month of
Vais’‘kha, Samvat 1011 = A. D. 954.

When I first read the inscription I took the cypher in the date to
be a 7, as I felt it difficult readily to believe, that the modern Deva-
nagari, the character used, could be associated with the Samvat date
1011, but finding the figure 7 differently given at the foot of the
record, I had no alternative but to take it for a dot. The idea of 7
was suggested by a twisted tail at the right hand of the eypher
which in modern Nagari cannot be expected in any other figure. Its
presence, however, has been accounted for by General Cunningham,
who says, “ I have satisfied myself by personal examination that the
figure one was first engraved and afterwards changed to 0.’*

The inconsistency regarding the association of so early a date as the
tenth century, with very modern characters, General Cunningham
explains by assuming the record to be a recent transcript of an ancient
document. In a private letter (dated 10th November, 1860) to Mr.
A. Grote, commenting on my translation of the inscription, he
observes: “ Of the short inscription from Kajraha (or Khajuraha) I
have little to say. The date has puzzled Rajendra on account of the
modern style of the letters ; but the date can only be one of two, either
1011 or 111], (better 1711). I believe that the inscription may have
been engraved any time during the last 300 years, from a more ancient
copy. My reasons I will give in detail when giving my note on the
Khajuraha kings. I may mention, however, for Rajendra’s satisfac-
tion, that I copied in the same Jain temple an inscription, but without
date, which is word for word the same as the other down to the
enumeration of the gifts. I say word for word, but not letter for
letter, as this other shorter inscription has no mistakes in it of one s
for the other, and is besides in comparatively old characters, on the
pedestal of a Jain figure.”

The donor, a Jain, calls himself the respected of Raja Dhanga, and
gives away, among several parcels of garden land, a house and pre-
mises of the name of “ Dhdnga badi.” This would imply him to
have been either a near and elder relative of Dhanga, or a priest. The
latter is not likely, as a Pahilla, according to General Cunningham,

* Ante XXIX. p. 396.

1863.] Sanskrita Inscriptions from Central India. 275

was the founder of the Dhanga dynasty, and it is therefore likely that

‘the donor with the same name was a member of this family, though
there is of course nothing to prevent his being a priest. Any how, as
he is neither a royal nor a historical personage, the knowledge of his
identity is of little interest to the antiquarian. The fact, however,
of his having been a contemporary of Dhanga in 1011 Samvat, set-
tles the chronology of a long line of princes who exercised supremacy
in Bundelkhand eight hundred years ago.

The first mention of Dhénga occurs in a record published by the
late Lieut. W. Pierce in the 12th Vol. of the Asiatic Researches
(p. 357). The document was found inscribed on a large stone in the
vicinity of the town of Mhow about ten miles distant from Chatter-
pur, i. e., very near the same place whence the monument now under
notice has been brought. It was mutilated at its beginning and
end, owing to the stone having been used for grinding the knives
and axes of the neighbouring peasants. Enough, however, was left, to
afford a pretty connected account of nine chieftains and their minis-
ters. The first chief of the roll was Dhanga Deva, who, after a long
and prosperous reign, destroyed himself by drowning at the holy
junction of the Ganges and Jumna opposite Allahabad. The last of
his line was Madanavarma, who was, according to his historiocrast,
‘a conqueror of the glories of Chedi, Kas’i and Malava.” The docu-
ment gives no date, but judging from the circumstance of its having
been from the same locality whence our Kajraha stone has been
obtained, and from the age of the ruins where they were found, it would
not be, for Indian history, too presumptuous, to assume the identity
of the Dhangas named in the two records.* But we have more than
a presumption to establish their identity. In a large inscription
found at Kajraha by Capt. Burt and decyphered by the late Mr.
J. C. C. Sutherland,} we have the genealogy of a Kajraha chief
named Banga, who, in the Samvat era 1019 = A. D. 962, “ consigned
his mortal coil to the confluence of the Ganges and Yamuna” at
Prayaga. Now this Banga can be no other than the Dhanga of
our inscription, and I have the authority of General Cunningham,
who has examined the original stone, to state that the reading of Mr.
Sutherland, owing of course to the imperfection of the facsimiles he

* The credit of discovering the identity is due to General Cunningham, vide
Ante, vol. XXIX. p. 394, + Ante vol, VIII. p. 159.

276 Sanskrita Inscriptions from Central India. [No. 3,

lad before him, is defective in many respects, and that his Banga is
a mislection of Dhanga. Thus then we have the era of Dhanga
established by two inscriptions to be 1011 to 1019 Samvat, in the
last year of which he committed suicide. How long before 1011 he
had assumed the sovereignty of Kajraha, we have no means to ascer-
tain. His panegyrist assigns him a long life of “109 autumns,” a
good portion of which he must have spent in the exercise of his
sovereign powers; it would not be too much, therefore, to assume
that he reigned for at least fifty or sixty years, or Samvat 960 to
1019 = A. D. 902 to 962.* If we allow the usual average of eighteen
years to each reign to six of his predecessors, the founder of his
family would be placed 852 S. = 795 A. D., and the same average to
eight of his successors would bring down the last of his race with
whose name we are acquainted, Madanavarma, to S. 1173 = A. D.
1116. This would be, however, too early by two reigns, as the
Kajraha inscription of Capt. Burt is dated “ Friday, the 3rd of the
waxing moon in the month of Vais’akha S. 1173” = A. D. 1116
when Jayavarma, the grandfather of Madana, caused the eulogium of
his ancestor Dhdanga to be transcribed from an old and ill-written
document into the “ Kakuda” or, as correctly guessed by General C.
“ Kumuda” characters. If allowance be made for this discrepancy,
the average of the six reigns after Dhanga would come up to 254
years, which would be considerably more than the usual average of
Indian reigns; but inasmuch as the chieftains of Kajraha were
petty kings, or more probably vassals, enjoying from generation to
generation the little principality, without being exposed to those
vicissitudes which are incident to extensive sovereignty, their reigns
should assimilate more to the average of human generation than
to Indian reigns. And if this be admitted, thirty to thirty-three
years should be assigned to each life rather than twenty-six. At
the last named rate, which I accept to be on the safe side, Madana
would be removed to the middle of the 12th century, and the
chieftains of Kajraha for near four hundred years be thus arranged,
the years being of course mere averages except in the cases of
Dhanga and Jayavarma’s dates.

* General Cunningham says that he has got a long inscription of Dhanga,
dated 45 years before his death. The “109 autumns,” according to the same
authority, is a mislection of “ upwards of a hundred autumns.” Satam samadhi-
kam. Ante XXIX. p. 395.

1863. | Sanskrita Inscriptions from Central India. 277

T.—Nannuka, ......... 206-0 Beers ~ AD. 746-771
II.—Vagyati or Vakpati Ueerding if vaanoral C., 772—797
MD Ses Vijagragy (ceed) 8 Jocvetsss 4 798 —823
1V.—Vihala or Réhila a aking Ne Genetal ce 824—849
WR TNET CHIE Jon Bent He dee Becerra ieaiees SSR ne aE 850—875

VI.—Yasodharma Deva, son of Vv, Dili atm et 876—991
Mi Dltangareoniat Whe) 0262 Jeldesl.ccesdeawoes sce 902—962
VIII.—Ganda Deva, son of VIL., .....0...c2.000 008 962—988
IX.—Vidyddhara Deva, son of VIII., ............... 999-1014
Ne Vijavapealayson/of LK... cuss the ccdsanseeres, LOIS —104O
X1.—Kirttivarma Deva, son of X., .............22.5. 1040-—1066
XII.— Varma Deva, son of XI., ............ 1066—1092
XIII.—Jayavarma* Deva, brother of XII., ...... 1092—1118
XIV.—Sallakshana Varma, son of XIII1., ......... 1118—1144
XV.—Madanavarma, son of XIV., .............. 1144,—1170

Of the history of these chieftains I shall here say nothing. General
Cunningham has lately obtained a Hindvi poem, containing a chronicle
of the principality of Kajraha, a summary of which, now under his
pen, will, I have no doubt, throw much more light on the subject,
than any thing that I can compile from the meagre inseriptions at
my disposal.

The second inscription is from Ratanpur in the province of Nagpur,
It is inscribed on a temple of Mahadeva, and measures 2 feet 6 inches
by 14 inches. The face of the stone on which it is recorded, is in a
good state of preservation, and perfect facsimiles in intaglio may he
taken off, by impressing on it moistened paper with the hand. Col.
Cunningham’s facsimile has heen so prepared, and the depressions

have been since filled up with ink, but the operation having
been carelessly done, the ink-tracing, instead of proving a help to
the reader, often misleads him. In deeyphering the record, I have,
therefore, followed the relief side which, though reversed, is neverthe-
less more trustworthy than the former,

The character used for the inscription is intermediate between the
Kutila and the modern Devanagari, with several letters which seem
peculiar to the era of the document. The ¢ and the 62 have been
written almost alike, the lower arm of the one being slightly rounded,

* Mr. Sutherland had a notion that Jayayarma was the son of Dhénga, but
ee inscriptions completely refute his idea.

2%.

278 Sanskrita Inscriptions from Central India. [No. 3,

while in the other it is angular. The bh of this type, however, is not
invariably used. The Kutila 62, resembling the modern 4, is promis-
cuously used with the former. B, v and ch are written alike. At the
end of the first line, which is about + shorter than the rest, several
characters are scratched at the end, which cannot be made out;
probably they. were of the same type as those of the rest of the
inscription, but owing to partial obliteration they now look different.
The second and third lines have several letters of the same kind.
The last letter of every line, as also the initial letters of the 22nd,
23rd and 24th lines, are lost.

In regard to style, the inscription offers little for comment. Sans-
krita poetry of the later middle ages is noted for its unchaste ideas, silly
conceits, and over-strained metaphors ; and the author of the record
under notice, is in every way true to the age he livedin. An eager
attempt to make up for the poverty of ideas by a pruriency of diction,
pervades his composition,and the erotic tendency of his thoughts assails
him even in his salutation to his gods. The language, however, is
generally correct, and there is little to complain of against the
engraver Sampula.

The subject of the record is not of much interest. It is said that
in the reign of Prithudeva son of Ratnapala, King of Chedi, modern
Rewa and Mundla,* who was a prince of the lunar race, a Brahmana
of great learning came from Chedi to the Turmana country, and one
of his descendants, in the year 1150 A. D., dedicated a temple to S‘iva,
in the village of Sambagrama. The locality of Turmana must be
assumed, from the position of the temple, to be the district around
Ratnapur, and for the origin of the name, we must look to the prince
of the Gwalior inscription published in the last volume, whose
dominion extended to the west as far as Bhopal and perhaps farther.
By the testimony of the inscriptions and coins extant, it has been there
shewn that Toramana was a prince of some renown, and the association
of his name with the country, several centuries after his death, may
be taken as an additional proof in support of that opinion.

The name of the dedicator of the temple is indistinct, the syllables
de, va and na are alone legible, with a hiatus after va barely sufficient
for a single letter, which I suppose was a g. If this guess be correct,
the name would be Devagana, probably an alias of the Devadasa

* Vide Journal American Oriental Society, vol VI. p. 18.

1863. | Sanskrita Inscriptions from Central India. 279

described in a preceding part of the record. Rayera Siiha, the sixth
in* descent from Gobinda, the founder of the family from Chandail,
was probably his father. But the family panegyrist, after naming
Bhopa the daughter of Radyera, celebrates the intimacy of the two
brothers Balha and Devadasa without saying a word as to their descent.
A Devagana occurs as the composer of the record and he is said to
be the son of Ratna Sifha, but whether that Ratna Sifha was the
son of Mame or a different person, does not appear; probably he
was different, as otherwise the recital of three generations after the
composer would be scarcely called for; and it would be difficult to
account for the poet being, in sad breach of Hindu manners, so very
particular as to who was the most favourite wife of his own gon, and an
octogenarian contemporary of his great-grandson writing erotic poetry.

Kumarapala, son of Avanipéla is said to have written the eulogium
but whether on paper at the dictation of Devagana, or on the stone
for the engraver, the record makes no mention.

Of the family described, nothing is known for certain. They were
probably influential residents of Berar, (ancient Bidarbha,) which was
once a large and flourishing kingdom, but of the rulers of which we
have now no record. The panegyrist no where assigns to them any
royal epithet, and their history therefore can be of no interest to the
Indian antiquarian. The inscription, however, is of use as supplying
three names in the annals of Chedi, and as suggesting the fact of
Nagpur and the country around it, having been, in the year of Samvat
1207 = A. D. 1150 and for a time before it, subject to the princes
of Chedi; for it is not likely that the writer of the inscription should
select the chiefs of that principality for his eulogium, if he had any
sovereign of Nagpur or Bidarbha at the time, to make the theme of
his praise. The three princes of Chedi named, are Jajalla, Ratna
Pala and Prithvi Deva, the last of whom was a contemporary of
Govinda, the seventh ancestor of the dedicator of the temple, who
lived in A. C. 1150...

Transcript of an Inscription from Kajraha.
Gay {one waa | faaqgauaat a feaatu: |ajs (1)
aqu(Qearaqa: qaqa | @aasaifaqaawiaasa

* Govinda ; 2, Mame ; 3, Ratna Sifha; 4,—? had two wives Jénha and Prathé :
5, Jagat Sifiha; 6, Rayara Siiha; 7, Balha and his brother Devadésa alias (?)
Devagana.

2N 2

280 Sanskrita Inseriptions from Central India. [ No. 3,

ara: suata fraatat a aautfesarar(3) ie | afes-
atfeant e¢ agaticnt 2(4) waaatient 3 eacatfent(5)
eug@maraicn(6) y siaatteat ¢ unaits(7) wifea-
aa(8) gaa ae wucde9) a wife fasta ce eraa
erate wa eraea(10) utaaq(11) | weratsiae ei(12)
qeaqas Fae(13) efe © Safes 1

1. Ewe recte.

2. wa recte.

3. The measure is here broken; qifeeq should be qifea.

4. This ficure isnot legible in the mseription but there is space forit.

5. The sibilant should be a palatal w.

6. The m of Panchimra is doubtful ; it looks more like an 2.

7. J originally read this word dhagavatika, but the last syllable
being smudgy, I prefer Major General Cunningham’s reading of Badi.
The dhaga is clear, though evidently a miscript of Dhanga.

8. dw recte.

9. Read ayat for ae.

10. Read “i for @.

11. Read aTaag for wieag.

12. The sibilant should be a palatal.

13. ‘Gre recte.

TRANSLATION.

In the Samvat era JO71.

Bhabya Pahila, the ornament of his race, the well-formed, the
amiable, he who is possessed of entire controul over his senses and
his passions, who is merciful to all created beings and has gratified
all his kindred, he who has Jina for his lord, and is the respected of
Raja Dhanga, offers salutations.

Pahilavatika J, Chandravatika 2, Laghuchandravétiké 3, S’ankara-
vatika 4, Panchamratalavatika 5, Amravatika 6, Dhangavadi, 7. I
shall be a slave to the slave of him of any race, who will, on the
decease of the Pahila family, preserve this gift of mine.

Srivasavachandra preist of the Maharaja. In the month of
Vaisikha, Monday the 7th of the waxing moon.

Transcript of an Inscription from Ratanpur, Nagpur.

[N. B.—Letters within brackets are corrections suggested by the

transcriber, those within parentheses are suggestions to fill up blanks»

1863. | Sanskrita Inscriptions from Central India. 281

those that are doubtful have marks of interrogation after them,
Stars indicate blanks. |

aa: fara y arate aaayta: aaaar ay [Ss] wat
HT Hacer WHAT 33 syllables missing.

(2) 4 HoMarga AUT Bal TT TIGT 1 e Utaae-
famagigque staqagaias: auetaeaafigatfeaaaitte-
saeyrsy 17 syllables missing.

(3) Hiawaerasaasce uaat vaumaraat: 12 | Sz:
SI PCPS ECEESCE EST ICC RCCL CCIRenGiGeRicas
syqnem[Wlmidia *: | ate * * * * * #

(2) Be asain: quia: Srecarecafafeg-
SAMaARAST | 2 AN waewawsacmafssal-
aa faim: qoats [= areuedigeratieig fer: jae *

(a) fafeqamaufaaat| a taza yas aaa
aun fa sn seas aT aT, 1 8 ql qHeeataceawyaHaal-
cifeaaiasrsaysiasaaa: Blcaeareu[y] *

AC) atateraan gages aTA qiaaaeae LISCa-
mMalaalSsarsal ASAWS | 4 | AUAU CUE MATT TA.
quia vaadiacuatyacfa: aaauRaty: | at (aT)

(9) ara fenaafefaaeantere fararate: Val ae ALT
SU aaa: SaAV_IS ed TIA afar aTaita-
afefa, atwaddasusaaefauttafa yoy aaa
war (4)

(<) wufaesfeawsra! adiaraaurer Suaqarwar.
Te | < | VaR aara[q]emasfaajearrnpaar stata.
fasaumcpaac aaa sTTAI TTT | at ulsitasar = fasit-
wa (q)

(c) TagTeeteual fawerafatcARTVCMAT a TEE
ata en rat seraa sya HATAFTMAAL: | AMET
Waa AAATATa TA qalutol Walaa: wae saa-
cits (3)

Qe) Bae a memagiaaltianfsrastealeea-

282 Sanskrita Inscriptions from Central India. [ No. 3,

wy: | CHa Ueaieaeeaa Tslsee: fea: Wearscfa-
qagufaar strates: ata: | 22 | watafsurfafesa(z)

(Xx) aeratarstaa GHIA: | Bledt at aaah
Ts Caifa ATH SHITA Vat |e aia lasitad aasa-
qeaauewaqwaRrqRey: | TRAIT ICUTAE-
Weqcin: vaee *

(qx) * feanMTAT | (8 | Tage saaT facet
fewtefureraaciatl aaa facia fafedt arorgadifa-
a) aiitaeecaalacraseadiageeie aleafa ar-
fcxifaaaat *

(92) sIrfustasa: | 28 I W_aRaes feqaatad ees
qatar facemuarewgyzacrieara tare | taara
[a] acugiifesfasatatieamituai | wat aewsyera-
aGcSIaia (a)

((8) aaa wy oufseae faincigateat agita
ecatetiae: | afafafsagcigaiaat aq aryufcat
ay Tat 2) seeraret fediara fastaqafe: fyar|
siaayaaiseaite (al)

(qu) % stmaiecy yon staMfoAeaTAeHTTA
Sigs ATTA arrarta aaae yaa faq agiaat | a-
aime ata: mamfuat gaat ai fa wees:
vate (a)

(q¢) ota: Uat faq( [alfa nes) Basesraeataata
[ft gaitgarem: | safe tre aqag: tawag ts UIHG | RE ll
aTeaAfCLaI RAGA AQILA Wa! | Tag ciaesw sya”
TTL | Re I

Qs) Bure ¢feat areal afearafaafea: | ASI
eyes WaAAIUay | Re I USAT ATTATSNN aga.
Gl ULUCA | HASAGaAl HIT Wwawmtsatae | Bz AT-
atgia (fa)

(as) SITaaLs aattae aittaa Ul BCIATALTT
fasategtenainaa | Hesag (CAT ARI Re BART ATA TAT
AGT HSASIVATSCHeIMIV Gad | Ra waea *

1863. | Sanskrita Inscriptions from Central India. 283

Qe) trae fawuiiatuatfaa: | atari qurcifafe
[tz BTA ATT TA, Ve | aaa fafessaaaae-
aratfeatet feratarmadtstacaaqgegaiog aarat (a)

(ac) ateiqefacsar §«faafaaucadawiemcamaraai
aad unantwacsau wala yea = famemaqg-
Safe Aaya wat wuargfsaat wie (a)

(22) St? <wweiat aa | erry laws ABA G w-
wufasn eaam: yntaaaa wt) Beale eas | RZ 1
aq: argacafanrmantacimaciag(efasarsa

(2x) (fa) wien | fagfasreqefafaast onie
Sataat qacasay feta |) R01) oaelafeaqailar
afaciaca lata: | Hlaat SawMeU Tiss AAA | RE |

(x3) * * * qumrgar uate farcry | waqucat yar
famufwteattaa: || ee || wea fecutastasfad ata-
feuniguies atagucwmafeara waagisa ? *

(aa) * * * qagacremafaanegicate aTTait-
fimcuteatecfasratattst Feq) go || TAA wReo|

Translation.

1. Om; salutation to S’iva. The king of snakes hears by his eyes ;
how can he fail to see the moon* * * * * * May Rudra, thus
awakening the daughter of Salya for dalliance, protect you. * * *

2, With his frontal globes besmeared with a profusion of powder-
ed pure red-lead, and his pliant trunk covering all space with its
dancest * * * *** May the great among the Ganas prove propi-
tious to you!

3. The god whose nectar, flowing from his numerous arms, covers
all space, aud whereupon the army{ of Eros (Madana) sallies forth
* * * * the moon which is like a jewelled ear-ring of the ladies of

* The stanza is incomplete and therefore the connection of the’ sleeping
goddess with the visual organ of snakes which is supposed by the~ Puranics
to be the seat of their hearing, cannot be ascertained.

+ An allusion to the elephantine head of Ganes’a. The stanza is incomplete.

{ The bhramara, a large black bee noted for its sweet murmuring hum, and
snpposed, from its appearance in the commencement of spring, to heighten the
pangs of separation in love-sick maidens,

284 Sanskrita Inscriptions from Central India. [No. 3,

heaven, which expels from the inmost recesses of the hearts of
mature females the feeling of anger against their lovers* * * * * *

4. In his race was born king Jajalla Deva, an immeasurable ocean
of patience, the only great jewel that ever decorated the brow of
this sublunary sphere. The might of his wand pervaded the three
worlds. He assumed the title of the lord of the Stiras, and became
the favorite of his mistress the sea girt earth.

5. From that mighty sovereign of Chedi, who with his invincible
army was like unto an ocean, proceeded Sri Ratnapala his son, who
was fierce as the submarine fire Badavanalat * * * * * * * * * *
a Rahut to eclipse the moon-like countenance of heroes—a wonder
on the face of the earth for endless might and glory.

6. He is the birth-place of expansive renown. Radiant as the
hoary orb of the full moon-—a rising sun of unbounded majesty—an
ocean of Kshetria virtues—he is an all-yielding gem§ to the bards who
flock (round him) from all quarters. Unto him was born Prithudeva
the lord of mankind.

7. When the dominion of this sovereign was ruled according to
the principles of polity, when approach of evil portents had been
minimised, and the people lived in peace,

8. There came in the fulness of time to the Turmana country
from the regions of Chedi, Govinda the pious (or active?) of the
race of Vastavya, pure as the moon.

9. Unto him was born a son of the name of Mame. He was
an ocean of philanthropy, an ornament for the decoration of royal
courts, a sun to the lotus of wise men.|| May he live long in pros-
perity! He was the pride of his nurse and a garland to his pure
race. The renowned, the only bee extant on the lotus feet of the
destroyer of regions (Siva and—)

* The princes named in this inscription evidently belonged to the lunar race,
but owing to a hiatus in this stanza, the name of the particular branch of that
race from which they descended, cannot be made out,

+ Nine letters at the beginning of the second half of the stanza are unintelli-
ee The ascending node; in mythology, the son of Sinhika a Daitya, with
the tail of a dragon, whose head was severed from his body by Vishnu, but
being immortal, the head and tail retained their separate existences, and being
transferred to the stellar sphere, became the authors of eclipses; the first
especially by endeavouring at various times to swallow the sun and moon.”
¥ Saeed a fabulous gem, the possession of which is supposed to yield its

possessor whatever may be desired.
|| I. e. as gratifying is the sun to the lotus so is he to wise men.

1863. | Sanskrita Inscriptions from Central India. 285

10. His younger brother Sri Raghava was a prodigy of merit.
Gallant (in his bearing,) an ornament of creation like the sun (Pusha).

11. The son of Sri Mame was the poet Sri Ratna Sinha. The
arms* of his mighty deeds, spread, scattered and refulgent every-
where, white as the light of the Kundat} flower or the moon,
have enveloped the earth. He flourishes, the trampler of his excited
opponents, the pleasure ground of fortune, the receptacle of urbanity,
good conduct, wisdom and virtue!

12. The name of his wife was Rambha. Chaste and adored by
her friends, she was to her husband what Sachif is to Indra, the
mountain-born Girij4 to Sambhu,§ or the daughter of the ocean
to the wielder of the discus.]|

13. She bore a son renowned in all the three regions of the
universe, who had eclipsed the high pride of his enemies, as well as
of the learned, and was like unto a bee at the beautiful lotus-feet of
Chandi and Isa.4]

14. The earth around was enveloped by his fair fame bright as the
foam of the sea. Milk-maids observing that wide-spread whiteness
and mistaking it for the churning of the Kalindi with the serpent
Kalanemink 5%) ee

15. Clustering drops of melted nectar dwelt in his speech, which
was as charming as the moon, and the mouth of the learned, like the
beak of the Chakora,} pecked at them without intermission. His
hands were the cage in which dwelt, (birdlike,) the beggars who
crowded around him from various quarters. He was a royal{ tree of
desire,§ which was well fitted to gratify this desire in profusion.

16. His wife was the well-behaved Pratha, whose beauty had over-
shadowed the charm of goddesses. She was like unto the light of

* Lit. The creeper latd.

+ Jasminum pubescens, Willd. J. hirsutum, Linn.

~ Wife of Indra.

§ Durgé, daughter of the Himalaya mountain and wife of S‘iva.

|| Lakshmi produced by the churning of the ocean, and Vishnu whose chief
weapon is a discus.

@ Durga and Mahadeva.

* The last part is unintelligible. Kalindi is the river Jumna, so called on
account of her blue waters.

+ A bird unknown to modern ornithology, but supposed by Indian poets to
hover around the moon and live upon the nectar that exudes from the orb of
that luminary. The word is also used to indicate the Tetras rufus vel Perdix rufa.

+ Adhisa in the original; the epithet is of doubtful application.

§ Kalpadruma a fabled tree which yields whatever may be sought of it.

20

286 Sanskrita Inscriptions from Central India. [No. 3,

the orb of soothing rays,* or the blossom of the favourite tree} of the
gods.

17. His second object of enjoyment was the favourite Jahno. From
exuberance of love, (he had made her) a second abode for his life.

18. In loveliness she was an ivy{ without compare. Proud as
being the elixir which restored the life of him (Hindu Eros) who
had been consumed by the anger of Siva, she was the boastful
residence of all fortunate qualities. Dearer than life was she, the
lovely. Brahma, having designed her, felt satisfied, and gave up all
farther desire for creation.

19. His son was Jagatsifiha, who lived on the earth like a lion,
to break the frontal orbs of the elephant of ignorance. :

20. (As such) he was like the son of Salyasuta and the enemy
of Taraka.§ His son was Rayera Siftha a defender of his friends.

21. His daughter was Bhopé, chaste, bereft of the vices of the
Kaliyuga, and like the heavenly river Ganges, a purifier of the world.

22. Balha and Devadasa|| were united together by the ties of
friendship, and as radiant on earth as are the virtuous in heaven.

23. Life is unstable as cotton fleece before a breath of wind, and
fortune is to be compared to the play of lightning between masses
of heavy clouds. Knowing this, that virtuous man turned his atten-
tion to that eternal and benign path, which is like unto a blazing fire
to the forest of sins.

24. In the village of Samba, (or at Sdmbagr4ma,) Deva—na
dedicated to the holder of the Bilva] and the dread trident Pindka,
(S‘iva) a temple bright as the brow of a cloud-capped mountain.

25. The temple, as if excited by the deep embrace of the earth,
the abode of many kings, and bent on continuous dalliance with the
nymphs of the quarters, seemed, like a love-stricken swain, to kiss
the charming face of heaven in the presence of celestial damsels.

* The moon.

+ Parijata, like the kalpadrwma, a mythical creation. It is typified as a tree
of extreme beauty and its flowers are supposed to possess the most exquisite
fragrance.

{ Lit. a creeper.

§ Kartikaya god of war, son of Siva and Durga, called Tarakdri from having
killed a giant named Taraka.

|| These two were probably sons of Rayara Siftha. The latter evidently is
the same with the Deva-na of the 22nd stanza, but not the poet Devaguna
named in the 26th stanza as that would make the geneology unealled for.
Owing to the loss of a syllable, the name cannot be made out, the letters
Deva nu alone exist. @ Aigle marmelos, the favorite tree of S’iva.

1863. | Sanskrita Inscriptions from Central India. 287

26. Devaguna, son of Sri Ratna Sifiha, whose wealth consisted of
the pure knowledge of the Shastras, whose genius in poetry was vast,
who was proficient in logic and renowned for versification, rhetoric,
lexicography, the art of love, and other branches of learning, who
was like the son of Bhrigu, (S’ukra,) in the administration of the
criminal law, even he composed this chaste eulogium.

27. He who was like unto the moon in developing the lily* of
poetry, he who was the store-house of intelligence, and the pleasure-
ground of learning,—even he, the auspicious Kumarapala, son of
Avanipala, wrote this chaste eulogium.

28. And the charming composition was engraved in beautiful
letters and lines, by the intelligent carpenter (stone-cutter?)+ Sampula.

29, * * * * Vagana, the two great manifestoes of forms, erected
this temple of Pinaki, the holder of the Bilva,

30. As long as the sun and the moon will hold the earth envelop-
ed in their beams * * * * as long as the elephant, of the quarters
will—* * * * and the heaven will be embellished with—* * * * so
long and for ever shall the memory of his deeds last under pretence
of this temple to the enemy of Cupid{—Samvat 1207.

* The Kumuda a lily that opens at night.

+ Sutradhdra in Sanskrita, from which comes the modern Bengali word,
chhutdr a carpenter. According to the dictionaries it is never used to imply a
lapidary, an engraver or a sculptor, those being indicated by the terms manikéra,
takshaka or Mudrakara and Bhashkara respectively.

< Verses Ist, 2nd, 4th, 5th, 6th, 9th, 11th, 18th, 23rd, 26th, and 30th, are in
the Sardulavikridita measure, which reckons 19 syllables to the foot with a
cesura after the 12th, the long and short syllables being arranged thus — — — yu

mee Narr g ee = Sat) ee

Pinte 7th, 8th, 10th, 17th, 19th, 20th, 21st, 22nd, 24th, 28th and 29th are iu the
well known octosyllabic anustubh.

Five verses, viz. the 18th, 14th, 15th and 27th are in the Vasantatilaka, a
measure of 14 syllables to the foot, with a ceesura at the 8th, thus:

a re oO NO in aaa ORE

The 8rd verse is in the Sragdhara of 21 syllables with a cesura at every
seventh syllable, thus —— — — Fh VY YO IS VS SU SS
the 12th in the Indravajra of 11 syllables, —— Vv —— vu uv — yu — — ; the

16th in the Rathoddhata of 11 syllables, thus —- vu — vu uu —Uu — uu —, “and
the 25th in the measure of the Meghaduta, the mandikranta, thus, — — — —
MNES LNA et ere NA Te ee NA! ire eye

eee

PROCEEDINGS

OF THE

ASTATIC SOCIETY OF BENGAL,

For May, 1863.

The monthly general meeting of the Asiatic Society of Bengal
was held on the 6th instant.

E. C. Bayley, Esq., in the chair.

The proceedings of the last meeting were read, and the chairman
having put the question that they be confirmed, Mr. Oldham moved
that the paragraph commencing, “The motion was opposed” so far
as the words “ due notice given” be omitted.

The chairman stated that the note quoted in Mr. Grote’s amend-
ment had been advisedly omitted from the record of the proceed-
' ings, as being explanatory only, but that it could be inserted if the
meeting thought it expedient.

Mr. Oldham’s motion having been put to the vote, was lost, and
the record of the proceedings, with the addition of the note referred
to, was then confirmed ; Mr. Oldham then handed in a protest on the
ground that the record was in his opinion “incorrect, partial, and
unfair.”

Presentations were received —

1. From the National Hungarian Museum, a collection of fishes,
reptiles, birds and mammals.

2. From A. G. Macdonald, Esq., through Mr. J, D. Gordon, a
skull and teeth of Rhinoceros Indicus.

3. From Lieutenant-Colonel E. T. Dalton, several crania from
Ranchee, in Chota-Nagpore.

4, From Baboo Giridharee Lal, some supposed fossils from Raj-
mehal.

1863. | Proceedings of the Asiatic Society. 289

5. From Colonel Phayre, four inscribed tiles with Buddhist
figures, found at Pagan.

6. From the Literary and Philosophical Society of Manchester,
several publications of the Society.

7. From the Right Hon’ble the Soar of State for War,
through the Superintendent of the Ordnance Survey, a copy of the
Meteorological Observations, taken at the Stations of the Royal
Engineers, during 1853-59.

8. From the Under-Secretary, Government of India, Foreign
Department, a copy of a report on the Island of Mahi, the largest of
the Seychelle group, by Lieutenant-Colonel L. Pelly.

The following correspondence between the Council and a Com-
mittee of gentlemen at Lahore who had associated themselves for the
furtherance of the objects of the Society, was submitted for the
information of the meeting :—

To THE SECRETARY TO THE ASIATIC SOCIETY OF BENGAL.
Dated Lahore, January, 1863.

Str,—I have the honor to forward, herewith, copy of the proceed-
ings of a meeting held at Lahore on the 27th instant for the purpose
of devising some plan for collecting information concerning the anti-
quities, ethnology, physical statistics, &c. of the Punjab and adjoining
countries.

2. The Committee are anxious to co-operate, if possible, with your
Society, and would feel obliged if you would intimate whether their
proposal is acceptable, and in the event of its being so, will be
thankful for their suggestions and guidance in the matter.

3. The first object of the Committee will be to collect, in a com-
pact shape, all the information upon the above mentioned subjects
which already exists scattered though the pages of local reports,

‘magazines, and scientific journals.

4. Their next object will be to collect further information from
local officers and other persons taking an interest in these subjects.

5. The Committee believe that, being placed, as they are, at the
seat of the local Government, and having access to the Government
records, they are favorably situated for carrying out both these
objects ; at the same time they would wish it to be clearly understood
that they have no intention to trespass upon the field already occupied

290 Proceedings of the Asiatic Society. [ No. 3,

by the Asiatic Society of Bengal, but are simply desirous of aiding,
by an organized effort, the promotion of the objects of the Society,
I have &c.,
(Sd.) T. H. Toorytoy,
Secretary to the Provincial Committee.

“Proceedings of a meeting held on 27th January, 1863, with a
view of devising some plan for collecting information regarding the
antiquities, ethnology, climatology, arts, manufactures, &c., of the
Punjab and adjoining countries.

“ Present :—Lieutenant-Colonel Maclagan, Secretary to Govern-
ment, Department of Public Works; R. H. Davies, Esq., Secretary
to Government; Dr. Cleghorn, Conservator of Forests, Madras, (on
deputation to the Punjab); T. H. Thornton, D.C. L., Judge of
Small Cause Court, and Curator of the Lahore Museum.

“ Unavoidably absent.—T. D. Forsyth, Esq., C. B. ; Commissioner
of Lahore Division ; D. F. McLeod, Esq., C. B., First Commissioner,
Punjab ; R. N. Cust, Esq., Judicial Commissioner of the Punjab.

“ Tieutenant-Colonel Maclagan having consented to preside, and
Mr. T. H. Thornton to act as Secretary.

“It was resolved—

1. “That communication be opened with all Commissioners and
Deputy Commissioners and Assistants in independent charge, writing
to them to co-operate, and also with the following gentlemen :—

Rev. Isidore Loewenthal, (Missionary, Peshawur); Rev. H. A.
Jaesche (Missionary, Kotgurh,) and Mr. Drew (Kashmir).

2. “That the following gentlemen be asked to be members of the
Committee :—R. Stevens, Hsq.; Dr. Brown; Dr. Neil, and Pundit
Munphool.

3. “That Mr. Davies be requested to prepare a memorandum of
the existing information regarding the tribes, &c. inhabiting the
Punjab and adjoining countries.

4, “That Lieutenant-Colonel Maclagan be requested to prepare
a similar memorandum regarding the arts and manufactures.

5. “That Dr. Cleghorn be requested to afford his aid in the same
manner, regarding the fauna and flora of the Punjab.

6. “That Mr. T. H. Thornton be requested to prepare from local
reports, and other memoranda, a list of objects of historical and

1863. | Proceedings of the Asiatic Society. 291

antiquarian interest, concerning which further information is desirable.

7. “That a copy of the proceedings be forwarded to the Secretary
of the Asiatic Society of Bengal, with an intimation that it is the
desire of this Provincial Committee to co-operate with the Asiatic
Society in the manner above indicated, or in any other way by which
the objects of the above Socety may be promoted, and that they will
feel obliged by the Society’s guidance in the matter.”

FRoM THE SECRETARY TO THE ASIATIC SOCIETY OF BENGAL,
To T. H. THornton, Esq.,
Secy. to the Provincial Committee, Lahore,
Asiatic Society’s Rooms, Calcutta, 9th March, 1863.

Srr,—Your letter, dated January 1863, with its enclosures, having
been taken into consideration by the Council of the Asiatic Society,
I am directed to express the great gratification with which they have
received the announcement of the influential movement at Lahore
in furtherance of the objects to which the operations of this Society
have always been directed. ‘The Council feel that concentrated local
efforts, to promote these objects, cannot fail to be of great advantage
as well to the Society itself as to the general interests of literature
and science, and they believe that such efforts will be especially valu-
able in the Punjab, where the field of enquiry is of more than
ordinary interest, and gives promise of a rich and abundant harvest,
They, therefore, desire me to respond most cordially to the offer of
co-operation which has been made to them by the Lahore Committee,
and to intimate that they are prepared to assist in carrying out the
objects proposed to the utmost extent of the means at their disposal.

But before suggesting any definite arrangements for mutual assis-
tance, the Council desire to be informed what are the precise wishes
and intentions of your Committee as to its own constitution and the
publication of its proceedings and researches ; whether it is proposed
that the Committee should be constituted as a separate body corres-
ponding with, but independent of, this Society, and publishing its own
records, or whether its object is rather to work as a Local Committee
of this Society, contributing its papers for publication in the Society’s
Journal.

The Council would gather from your letter and from the resolu-
tions of the Committee that the latter course is the one contemplat-

292 Proceedings of the Asiatic Society. [No. 3,

ed, but they are unwilling to assume that this is the case without
a definite assurance that they have not misinterpreted the Commit-
tee’s views.

At the same time, I am to say that the Council are generally of
opinion that the association at Lahore will be most permanently
useful by co-operating as alocal Committee with the Society. It has
been found that all attempts hitherto made to maintain independent
societies in the interior of the country have invariably failed, and the
Council believe that the time has not yet arrived when similar
attempts are likely to be attended with more than temporary success.

The Council will be glad to be put in possession of your Com-
mittee’s view on this point, and receive any suggestions that may
occur to you regarding the mode in which communication should be
conducted, and they will then endeavour to make such arrangements
as will meet your wishes and be most conducive to the success of
the object of the Committee and this Society.

I have, &c.,
(Sd.) W. S. ATKINSON,
Secretary, Asiatic Society of Bengal.

From T. H. Tuornton, Hsq., D. C. L.,
Secretary, Lahore Committee.

To THE SECRETARY TO THE Asiatic SocIETY OF BENGAL.

Dated, Lahore, the 21st April, 1863.

Sir,—Your letter of the 9th March last has been laid before the
Lahore Committee, whose meeting was somewhat delayed owing to
the absence of some of the principal members from Lahore, and I am
directed to reply as follows to the inquiries made regarding the
“precise wishes and intentions of the Committee as to its consti-
tution, and the publication of its proceedings and researches.”

2. The latter portion of your second paragraph correctly describes
what the desire of the Committee is, viz., to bea Local Committee of
the Asiatic Society, contributing its papers for publication in the
Society’s Journal.

3. They would prefer this to attempting to establish an indepen-
dent Society, for the reason you mention ; for in a Society like that
of Lahore, composed chiefly of Government officials and other persons

1863. | Proceedings of the Asiatic Society. 293

liable to removal, it is impossible to ensure a continued active
interest in the department of literature taken up by the Asiatic Society
of Bengal. They are of opinion that as a Local Committee of your
Society, as much might be done by them for forwarding the objects
they have in contemplation, as if they were an independent body ;
while on the other hand, the duties being less onerous, the fear of
failure is less. They would wish, therefore, to be styled,—should the
appellation meet with the approval of your Society—“ The Punjab
Local Committee of the Asiatic Society of Bengal.”
4, Of the present members of the Committee,* the majority are
ee uae already members of your Society, and I
Lieut.-Colonel Maclagan. myself, though not a member, am anxious

Members.
DF. Maciced Bua., co.B, to become one, but I presume that the
R. N. Cust, Esq. fact that all the members of the Com-

R. H. Davies, Hsq. 4 Seige
T, D. Forsyth, ae, C.B. mittee are not members of the Asiatic
R. H. Egerton, Hsq.

Soci tT f ee
menor. ociety will not be considered an objection

Dr. B. Brown. to their recognition as a Local Committee
pre embs Re of your Society. Should such be the case,

T. H. Thornton, Esq., D.C.L. perhaps the appellation “ Punjab Auxi-
ae aS liary Committee to the Asiatic Society”
would meet with your approval.

5. Having thus described the position the Committee would wish
to assume in relation to your Society, I have now the honor to inti-
mate the views of the Committee regarding their future proceedings.

6. Their first object will be to collect together in a compact shape,
from scientific journals and local reports, all the existing information
regarding the antiquities, ethnology, arts, and physical statistics of
this Province.

As regards ethnology, the task has been undertaken by Mr. Davies,
Secretary to the Government, but as that gentleman has suddenly left
for England on six months’ leave, Mr. Cust has kindly taken it off
his hands for the present.

The subject of arts has been entrusted to Lieut.-Col. Maclagan ;
that of flora to Dr. Cleghorn ; meteorology to Dr. Neil ; numismatics
to Capt. Stubbs, and archeology and history to the Secretary.

7. This being done, they propose to issue from time to time lists
of desiderata to the local officers of the Provinces, and to others in-
terested in these subjects, from whom they have already received

2P

294 Proceedings of the Asiatic Society. [No. 3,

assurances of support; and they have already issued one general
circular, a copy of which is annexed, for furnishing periodical lists,
such as I have described. Any assistance or suggestions from your
Society would be gratefully received.

8. They would further propose that any written contributions of
importance which they may receive be forwarded in extenso for pub-
lication at your Society’s discretion, in the Asiatic Society’s Journal,
and that from time to time a reswmé of information obtained and of
the proceedings of the Committee generally, should be furnished by
the Secretary.

9. With regard to any coins or other antiquarian remains of
interest which may be contributed, the Committee would reserve a
discretion of depositing them in the local Museum of Lahore, if they
think fit.

10. Imay add that the Punjab Government has evinced a great
interest in the Committee, and has intimated its desire to aid its
operations in every way it can; and that the Committee hope that,
by their own exertions, aided by the countenance and assistance of
your Society, they may be able to be of some use in collecting infor-
mation of value and stimulating further research in a region abound-
ing with objects of historical, ethnological, and physical interest,

I have, &c.,
(Sd.) T. H. THornton,
Secy. to the Lahore Committee.

The chairman intimated that further information would be commu-
nicated when the correspondence was complete.

The nomination of the Hon’ble H. 8S. Maine to be a member of
the Council, vice the Hon’ble C. J. Erskine was confirmed.

The Council reported that on the recommendation of the Natural
History Committee they had raised the salary of Mr. J. Swaries,
taxidermist, at the rate of 4 annas for every working day.

A letter from Rev. T. H. Burn intimating his desire to withdraw
from the Society was recorded.

The following gentlemen, duly proposed at the last meeting were
balloted for and elected ordinary members :—

Lieutenant H. R. Thuillier; H. D. Robertson, Esq., C. S.; P. W.
Wall, Esq.; W. H. Stevens, Esq.; Dr. J. Tyler; Hon’ble E. P.
Levinge, and W. Edgar, Esq., B. C. 5.

1863.] Proceedings of the Asiatic Society. 295

The following gentlemen were named for ballot as ordinary mem-
bers at the next meeting :—

W. Clementson, Esq., Executive Engineer, Bassein, proposed by
Mr. Theobald, and seconded by Mr. Atkinson.

Colonel Hamilton, Commissioner of Delhi, proposed by Mr. Cooper,
and seconded by Mr. Grote.

Captain G. C. Depree, Royal Artillery, proposed by Lieutenant-
Colonel Dalton and seconded by Mr. Atkinson.

T. D. Forsyth, Esq., C. B., Commissioner of Lahore, proposed by
Colonel Maclagan, and seconded by the President.

Baboo Chundersekur Roy, of Julpigorie, proposed by Baboo
Rajendra Lal Mitra, and seconded by Mr. Grote.

T. H. Thornton, Esq., C. S., proposed by Mr. Bayley, and second-
ed by Mr. Grote.

How’ble G. Campbell, proposed by Mr. E. C. Bayley and seconded
by Mr. Grote.

Mr. Oldham gave notice that he would move at the next meeting —

1. That he would call the attention of the Society to the careless
and discreditable manner in which the Journal of the Society is at
present conducted, as calculated to reflect very serious disgrace on
the Society ; and to the unreasonable delays which occur in the issue
of the several numbers, by which much of their contents is rendered
obsolete and comparatively useless.

2. That inasmuch as no improvement in the Museum of the
Society is visible, the Council be requested to state in detail the
steps which have been taken for the proper disposal of the sum of
Rs. 200 per mensem granted by the Government for the improvement
and support of the Natural History Museum of the Society, which
sum the Society has received since April, 1862.

Captain Lees gave notice that at the same meeting he would
move—

That Bye-Law 77 of the Society be amended as follows :—

The Council shall elect from their own body Sub-committees or
sections of Oriental literature, Natural History, &c., also a Sub-com-
mittee of Finance, whose reports on all matters referred to them
shall be submitted to the Council.

Communications were received—

J. From the Secretary, Government of India, Public Works De-

He Ves

296 Proceedings of the Asiatic Society. [No. 3,

partment, a copy of a letter from Major General Cunningham, for-
warding his daily report of occupations for February last.

2. From the Under Secretary, Government of India, Public
Works Department, a printed copy of a memo. by Major General
Cunningham, regarding the life-size statues recently discovered inside
the Delhi palace, together with a copy of the report of his occupations
in January last.

Mr. Bayley read the memorandum as follows:—

“1, On the information furnished to me by Mr. Cooper, Deputy
Commissioner of Delhi, I went to the palace to inspect the fragments
of two human statues in red stone, and of two statues of elephants
in black stone, which had lately been found in clearing away some old
building inside the area of the palace walls.

“2. The two human statues which are of life-size are formed of
single blocks of the well-known reddish chocolate-coloured sandstone
of Futtehpore Sikri. One of the heads is missing, and the other is
separated from the statue, having been broken at the neck. The
head-dress is that of a royal personage, such as is seen in the pictures
of the kings of Delhi, and such as is now worn by all Rajput princes.
But the figure is certainly that of a Hindu, as the dress is represented
with its opening over the right breast. Both figures are squatted
in the native fashion. They were probably coloured originally to
represent the real figures, as the spots of the stone are not visible
anywhere on the surface, but only at the points of fracture.

“3. The elephant statues are each formed of many pieces of hard
black stone, which were originally built up with thick square bars of
wood inside the legs, the pieces being joined together by fine lac. One
forefoot measures six feet five inches in girth, and another measures
six feet two inches. If the height accorded with the well-known
porportion of twice the girth of the forefoot, these statues would
have been colossal, or not less than twelve feet ; but I believe that
the legs of these figures, as is usual in all Indian statues of elephants,
were made somewhat stouter than nature, to obtain actual stability,
as well as to give an appearance of sufficient strength. The num-
ber of pieces of these statues is very great, and many of them are
much injured; but I think that one complete statue, or very nearly
complete, might be built up with a little care and trouble. I recog-
nised the following pieces :—

1863. | Proceedings of the Asiatie Society. 297

“ Ist.—Top of head to below the eyes, in two pieces, which were
joined perpendicularly.

“9nd.—End of the trunk, holding a chain and resting on the
ground.

“ 3rd—Two ears, each three feet long.

“ Ath.—Piece of back, towards the tail.

“5th.— Piece of stomach, hinder portion.

“6th.—Several pieces of a howdah. ‘The chains (which no doubt
supported bells) are formed of yellow stone let into the black stone
of the howdah ; similarly, the cotton ropes which fastened the howdah,
are formed of white marble.

“‘'7th.—There are also several pieces with straight-lined ornamenta-
tion in white and yellow stone, let into the black stone, which, I
presume, must have represented the decorated borders of the jhal or
cloth trapping, which is usually embroidered in gold and silver.

“8th.—A doubtful piece with a deep round socket. This may, I
think, have been part of the jaw for the insertion of a tusk, which
would, of course, have been made of white marble.

“4, From this brief account it is evident that, in these broken
statues of men and elephants, we possess something quite unique in
Indian sculpture. The human figures are of life-size, and although
the legs of the elephants are rather massive, I believe that their
statues were also of the usual height. Small statues of elephants are
not uncommon, and may be seen in many Indian temples ; but with
one single exception, I am not aware that the Hindu artists have
ever attempted so large a piece of sculpture as a full-size figure of an
elephant. The exception which I refer to was the great elephant
statue which once stood on a pedestal outside of the upper gate of
the fort of Gwalior, which was accordingly called Hathiya-Paur or
Elephant Gate—a name which it still bears, although the statue has
long ago disappeared. This statue was of life-size, and bore on its
back three human figures—namely, Raja Man Singh of Gwahor, with
his mahout, and his attendant umbrella-bearer. Raja Man Singh died
during the siege of Gwalior by Ibrahim Lodi in A. D. 1518. The group
was soon afterwards seen by the Emperor Babur, who describes it
fully in his memoirs. It is afterwards noticed by Abul Faz] in his
Ayin Akbari, written in the 40th year of Akbar’s reign, and it is last
noticed by an English merchant who visited the fort of Gwalior in

298 Proceedings of the Asiatic Society. [No. 38,

the reign of Shah Jehan. That it was removed during the reign of
his son and successor, the bigoted Aurungzebe, I have little doubt,
as it is omitted in his minute account of Gwalior by Hiraman, a
Hindu Moonshee in the employ of Aurungzebe’s Mahomedan gover-
nor of the fortress.

“5. Now it seems to me possible that the statues just discovered in
Delhi may have been brought from Gwalior, for tradition says that
there was formerly a second life-size elephant in the Gujari Mahal, at
the foot of the fort of Gwalior. That it was usual to remove such ob-
jects to Delhi, we have a proof in the case of the brass statue of a bull
which was obtained by Ibrahim Lodi on his capture of the Badil-
garh outwork of the fort of Gwalior. This brazen statue, according
to Ferishta, was carried to Delhi and thrown down before the Bagdad
gate of the city.

“6. I know of only one objection to this identification of the Delhi
statues with Man Singh’s missing group from Gwalior—namely, the
probability that all the statues would have been formed of the
durable light-coloured sandstone of Gwalior. But as a black stone
was selected for the elephants, it seems probable that the designer
may have purposely made use of the reddish brown sandstone of
Futtehpore Sikri for the human figures, for the special purpose of
giving the group as nearly as possible the actual colours of real life.
This idea is further carried out in the white and yellow marbles of
the ropes and chains. It is only a surmise, however, that the Delhi
figures may possibly be the very group that once adorned the upper
gate of the fortress of Gwalior. Perhaps some one of the three
authorities whom I have quoted as making mention of the statue,
may have noticed some peculiarity of colour that may settle this
point. I have no means of reference at present in camp, and am
writing from memory, as I have only a few books with me.

“7,.—But whether these Delhi statues be identical with the Gwa-
lior group or not, their value as unique specimens of Indian sculpture
is undoubted. I would therefore most earnestly recommend that
immediate steps should be taken for their preservation and that an
attempt at least should be made to reconstruct one of the elephant
statues. If one statue should be found complete, or nearly so, it
should, of course, be preserved: but even if the fragments should be
found insufficient for one statue, I think that an attempt might still

1863. | Proceedings of the Asiatic Society. 299

be made to cqmplete it with the aid of brick and mortar coloured
black, if only for the purpose of having the group photographed.

““8.—Perhaps Lieut. Macsween, of the Engineers, would be able to
set up one of these statues at a small expense, say of Rs. 50, in about
one fortnight.

(Sd.) “A. CunnincHam, Major General,
“ Archeological Surveyor to the Govt. of India.

3. From Baboo Gopeenath Sen; Abstract of the Meteorological
Observations taken at the Surveyor General’s Office, Calcutta, in
February last.

4. From Mr. W. Theobald, Jr., the following note on the pheno-
menon known as Ignis-fatuus, or Will-o’-the wisp :—

“My pear ArKinson,—I wish through the pages of the Society’s
Journal to direct the attention of observers interested in the enquiry,
to that curious, and, I believe, hitherto unsatisfactorily explained

?

phenomenon “ Ignis-fatuus” or ‘ Will-o’-the-wisp,” and to record a
curious belief current in Burmah respecting it:—I am aware that a
certain class of reasoners have ventured to throw doubts on the very
existence of the phenomenon in question and have sarcastically
suggested that three conditions are requisite to insure its reported
development—that the ground must be ‘boggy,’ the atmosphere
‘fogey’ and the philosophic observer decidedly ‘ groggy,’ at the time ;
but having been myself a frequent eye-witness where only the two
first conditions were more or less realised, I must dissent from this
somewhat less charitable than ingenious theory. The European
superstition of the ‘ Elfish’ origin of Ignis-fatuus is well known,
and in Hindustan the belief is prevalent that the light is borne
by a ghost. The Burmese belief is very curious and recalls
some medieval Huropean superstitions of like character, and if it
proves nothing more, the existence in three distinct regions of a
different belief, as explanatory of a certain phenomenon, goes far to
prove the reality and non-imaginary character of the appearance in
question.

“In Burmah it is believed that there is a class of wizards whose
heads become dissociated from their bodies during the night and
wander about the jungle feeding on carrion, the bodies remaining
at home, and the Ignis-fatuus is supposed to proceed from the mouth
of one of the wandering heads. Ifa head is secured whilst abroad it

300 Proceedings of the Asiatic Society. [ No. 3,

loudly claims to be released, and if detained more than, twelve hours
from rejoining its body, both head and body perish, and it is believed
that such heads have often been captured, though I need hardly add,
none of my informants had themselves seen one. ‘This superstition
calls to mind the one formerly current in Hurope that the body of a
witch might remain at home, or its semblance, whilst the spirit was
at its evil practices abroad; hence the inutility of an alibe for the
wretched beings accused of witchcraft. In India, Ignis-fatuus is com-
monly known by the name of Bhutni. It usually occurs near villages
and usually about tanks, or marshy spots, flat malarious country.
The phenomenon is very common around the Rajmahal hills, on the
flat alluvium near the hills, and the best instance I ever witnessed was
near one of the bungalows built by the late M. Pontet near where
the railway passes, but the exact name I have forgotten. It was a
cold night in January (I think) when, about nine o’clock, I was
called by my servant in accordance with previous direction of mine,
and told that ‘many Bhutnis’ had come out. Sure enough several
lights were visible moving about a little, but usually not far from
one spot. I think I must have watched one at some 300 yards for a
quarter of an hour, and can only describe it without suggesting an
explanation, save that it may have possibly originated with some
luminous insects collected together. The light had all the appear-
ance of an ordinary mussal or oil torch, and appeared fully as large
and as bright. It had the appearance of emanating from some slowly
consuming body with the evolution of phosphorescent fumes, but
this might be merely the effect of a vivid light on the dense cloudy
stratum of fog at that particular spot. The night was still, but an
occasional puff of air would alter the position of the light; which,
however, seemed to possess the power of independent motion. The
light faded or even disappeared under a stronger breeze, to re-appear
on its dying away. The spot where this light I am describing
centered was near a tank in some flat ground traversed by a small
sluggish stream, and a tank margin is a common spot for such lights
to be seen on. I can add little more regarding the mysterious
appearance, save my conviction that its origin has yet to be traced
out and established; my own belief in favor of a congregation of
luminous insects being hesitatingly adopted for want of a better, and
from the fact, as I take it, of the light shifting its position indepen-

1863. ] Proceedings of the Asiatic Society. 301

dently of the wind, whose stronger force only causes its temporary
extinction.
“ Your’s sincerely,
© (sic) W. THEOBALD, Junior.
Bassein, 1st April, 1863.”

“N. B.—I have forgotten perhaps the most important observation
I made with respect to this light—viz., that it is decidedly fluctuat-
ing like that of a revolving light of a lighthouse. After a certain
period of ordinary brightness the light increases in size and bright-
ness and rapidly attains its maximum effect, after which it slowly
fades, sometimes to a mere speck barely visible, or even disappears
for a minute or two.”

5. From Lieutenant-Colonel Phayre, a paper on the history of
the Burman race.

6. From the same, a memorandum on some ancient tiles obtained
at Pagan, in Burmah.

7. From Major General Cunningham, a paper entitled “ Remarks
on the Bactro-Pali inscription from Taxila.

Mr. Bayley prefaced the reading of Major General Cunningham’s
paper by the remark that he had transmitted some time before to
Mr. EK. Thomas, in England, a tentative translation of the greater
portion of the inscription, the general purport of which agreed with
that now given by Major General Cunningham, save on one or two
important points—viz., the supposed name of the king and of the
month, also as to the name of the Satrap’s son, but that he would
reserve fuller remarks until the receipt of Professor Dowson’s paper.

Major General Cunningham’s communication having been read,
Baboo Rajendralal Mitra said that since the publication of the last
number of the Journal he had devoted some attention to the laxila
inscription and prepared a translation of it, which though generally
similar, was, as regards the interpretation of several words, different
from the version submitted to the meeting by Major General Cun-
ningham. He pointed out those differences in detail and advanced
some reasons which led him to think the General’s determination of
the name of a Greek month upon the relic, open to question. The
original paper and the Baboo’s comment on it will appear in an early
issue of the Journal.

Mr. Bayley agreed with Baboo Rajendralal Mitra that the name

28

302 Proceedings of the Asiatic Society. [No. 3,

of the month was not that of a Greek month in the present instance,
and believed further that the era used was that of the Great King
Kanishka, which he believed to be probably identical with that of
Vikramaditya.

The Chairman announced that Mr. Waterhouse, Royal Artillery,
had brought to the meeting a fine series of photographs of the Bhilsa
Topes, copies of which he offered to present to the Society.

The offer was accepted and the thanks of the meeting were voted
to Mr. Waterhouse.

The Librarian then submitted the usual report.

LIBRARY.

The following additions have been made to the Library since the
last meeting.

Presented.

Memoirs of the Literary and Philosophical Society of Manchester.
Vol. IV. Part 2, and Vol. V. Parts 1 and 2, Second Series —Vols. III.
to XV. and Vol. I. Third Series—By THE Socrrry.

A New System of Chemical Philosophy by John Dalton, F. R.S.,
Vol. I. Part 1, and Vol. II. Part 1.—By THE Samp.

Meteorological Observations and Hssays by John Dalton, D. C. L.,
F. R. S.—By THE Same.

Proceedings of the Literary and Philosophical Society of Man-
chester, Vol. II. Sessions 1860-61 and 1861-62.—By THE Samz.

Bye-Laws and Regulations of the L. and P. Society of Manches-
ter.—By THE SAME.

The Annals of Indian Administration, Part 1, of Vol. VII.—By
THE BENGAL GOVERNMENT.

Annaler for Nordisk Oldkyndighed for 1859.—By THE CopEn-
HAGEN SOCIETY.

Mémoires de la Socicté Royale des Antiquaires du Nord, 1850-60.
—PBy THE SaME.

Inscriptions Runiques der Slesvig Meéridional, interprétees par C. C.
Rafn.—By THE SAME,

Abhandlungen der Akad. d. Wissenschaften Zu Berlin for 1861.—
By THE BERLIN ACADEMY.

Abstracts from the Meteorological Observations taken at the
stations of the Royal Engineers in the years 1853-4, 1854-5, 1855-6,

1863. | Proceedings of the Asiatic Society. 303

1856-7, 1857-8, and 1858-9, edited by Col. Sir Henry James, R. E. ,
F. R.S., &c.--By THE SECRETARY OF STATE FOR WAR.

Archiv fur Kunde Osterreichischer Geschichts-Quellen, Vol.
XXVITI. Part 1.—By THe Soctery.

Appendix No. 5, with a map of the Nizam’s dominions.—By THE
BENGAL GOVERNMENT.

. Almanach der Kaiserlichen Akademie der Wissenschaften, Zwolfter
Jahrgang, for 1862.—By Tur Vienna ACADEMY.

Atlas Van Over Nievo Guinea.—By THE NeTHERLAND Sociery.

Bijdragen tot de Taal,—Land. en Volkenkunde Van Nederlandsch
Indié—Vijfde deel.— By THE Same.

Bulletin de l’academie Imperiale des Sciences de St. Petersburgh,
Vol IV. Nos. 3-6.—By tur Impprtan Acapremy.

The Charter, Bye-Laws and Regulations of the Zoological Society
of London, incorporated March 27, 1829.—By tux Soctery.

The Calcutta Christian Observer for April—By tur Eprrors.

Remarks on the Topography and Diseases of the Gold Coast. By
R. Clarke, Esq. (Read before the Epidemiological Society, May 7th
1860).—By tae AutTHorR.

Grammatices Palicae by G. S. Guestphalus.—By Dr. WeBER.

Finales as in Sanskrit vor Tonenden; from p. 385 to 404. By
Dr. Weber.— By Tub AUTHOR.

Die Fossilen Mollusken Band II. Parts 3 and 4, by Dr. Hornes.
—By THe Vienna Museum.

Considerations on the Phenomena attending the fall of Meteorites
on the Harth. By W. Haidinger (From the Philosophical Magazine
for Nov. and Dec. 1861).—By tHe AuTHoR.

Journal of the Statistical Society of London Vol. XXVI. Part 1.—
By THE SOCIETY.

Journal of the Chemical Society of London, Nos. 5 and 6, of 1862.
—By THE SOCIETY.

Lexicon Geographicum—Decimus Fasciculus. By T. G. J.
Juynboll—By tue Luep. Baravian ACADEMY.

Journal of the Proceedings of the Linnean Society—Zoology, Vol.
VI. Nos. 21 to 23, and Botany, Vol. VI. Nos. 21 to 23.—By rue
SOcrETy.

Jahrbuch—Vol. XII. No. 2.—By tHE Vinyna Museum.

Pa 8) 7

304 Proceedings of the Asiatic Society. [No. 8,

Kaladlit Assilialiale or Woodcuts drawn and engraved by Green-
landers.--By THE CoprnHaGEN Society.

Indische Alterthumskunde by C. Lassen.—By THE AUTHOR.

‘Land Anecdota Syriaca, Vol. I.

List of Vertebrated animals living in the gardens of the Zoological
Society of London, 1862.—By THE Soctrery.

List of the Linnean Society of London, 1861.—By Tux Sooctery.

List of the Royal Society of London, 20th Nov. 1861.—By THE
SOCIETY.

Contents of the Correspondence of Scientific men of the 17th
century. Compiled by Augustus De Morgan, F. Rh. A. and C. P. 5S.
1862. Pamphlet.—By THe CoMPILER.

Memoires de academie Imperiale des Sciences de St. Petersburgh,
Vol. IV. Nos. 1 to 9.—By THE IMPERIAL ACADEMY.

Notices of the Proceedings at the meeting of the members of the
Royal Institution of Great Britain for 1861-62.—By THE Insrrru-
TION.

The Oriental Baptist for March. By tHE Eprror.

Oriental Christian Spectator for Jan. and Feb.—By THE Epiror.

Proceedings of the Royal Geographical Society of London, Vol.
VII. No. 1.—By THE Society.

Proceedings of the Royal Society of London, Vol. XII. No. 58.—
By THE Socrery.

Photographs of Views in Kashmir.—By Capt. MontéomMeErts.

Photographs illustrating the hill tribes on the Peshawur Frontier.
— By Capt. MELVILLE.

Proceedings of the Royal Society of Edinburgh, Vol. IV. No. 56.
—By THE Socrery.

The Proceedings of the scientific meetings of the Zoological
Society of London, Part 3, of 1861 and Parts 1 and 2, of 1862.—
By THE SOcIery.

The Quarterly Journal of the Geological Society, Vol. XIX. No.
73.— By THE SOCIETY.

Annual Report on the Administration of the Province of Oudh,
for 1861-2.—By THE Benga GOVERNMENT. ;

Annual Report of the Branch of the Marine Department under
the control of the Government of India for 1861-2.—By THE SAME.

1863. ] Proceedings of the Asiatic Society. 305

Report of the Committee of the Bengal Chamber of Commerce
from Ist May to 31st Oct. 1862.—By THE CHAMBER.

Streiter’s De Sunahsepo Fabula Indica ex ecodicibus manuscriptis
edita.—By tHe AUTHOR.

Schoenborn’s Aitareya Brahmanae Specimen.—By Tue Epiror.

Selections from the Records of the Madras Government, Nos. 72
and 74.---By THE BuncaL GOVERNMENT.

Sitzungsberichte der Kaiserlichen Academie der Wissenschaften,
Philos—Histoire Classe, Vol. XXXVIII. Part 8, and Vol. XXXIX.
Part 1; Mathematische Classe, Vol. XLV. Part 1, Heft 1 and 2, Part
2, Heft 1, 2, 3 and 4..-By THE ACADEMY.

Table of high and low water at the Kidderpore docks, for 1868.—
By Mr. J. OBBarp.

Transactions of the Royal Irish Academy, Vol XXIV. Part 2.—
By THE ACADEMY.

Transactions of the Government of India in the Financial Depart-
ment in 1861-62.—-By THE BrncaL GOVERNMENT.

Transactions of the Linnean Society of London, Vol. XXIII. Part
2.—By THE SOCIETY.

Transactions of the Royal Society of Kdinburgh, Vol. XXIII.
Part 1.—By tHe Socrery.

Transactions of the Zoological Society of London, Vol. IV. Part 7,
and Vol. V. Part 1.—By THE Socrery.

Weber’s Indische Studien, Vol. V. Parts 2 and 3.—By THE Eprror.

Journal Asiatique, Vol. XX. No. 79.—By THE SocteTE ASIATIQUE
DE Parts.

Exchanged.

The Atheneum for January and February.

The London and Edinburgh Philosophical Magazine, Vol. XXIV. -
Nos. 166 and 167.

Purchased.

Gould’s Birds of Asia, Parts 1 to 14.

Dabry’s La Médecine chez Les Chinois. By M. J. Léon Soubeiran.

Numismatie Chronicle and Journal of the Numismatic Society of
London, New series, No. 8.

The Parthenon, Vol. II. Nos. 88 to 46.

The American Journal of Science and Arts, Vol. XXXV. No. 103.

Conchologia Iconica, by Lovell Reeve, Parts 222 to 225,

306 Proceedings of the Asiatic Society. [No. 3,

Annales des Sciences Naturelles, Zoologie, Vol. XIX. No. 1.

Revue et Magasin de Zoologie, No. 12 of 1862, and No. | of 1863,

Revue des Deux Mondes for 15th January, February and 1st
March.

The Annals and Magazine of Natural History, Vol. XI. Nos. 62
and 63.

Wolf’s Zoological Sketches, Second series, Parts 3 and 4.

Comptes Rendus, Vol. LVI. Nos. 2 to 7.

Journal des Savants for Dec. Jan. and Feb.

Zenker’s Bibliotheea Orientalis, Part 3.

Sir Charles Lyell on the Antiquity of Man.

LaueoraLt Durr.

6th May, 1863.

For June, 1863.

The Monthly General Meeting of the Asiatic Society of Bengal
was held on the 3rd Instant.

A. Grote, Esq., in the chair,

Mr. H. F. Blanford, at the Chairman’s request, read the proceed-
ings of the last meeting, which were confirmed.

Presentations were received —

1. From Professor T. Goldstticker, a copy of his Manava Kalpa
Sutras, and its preface entitled Paninz, and parts 1 to 4 of his San-
serit Dictionary.

2. From Mr. Oldham, on the part of Lieutenant-Colonel J. C.
Haughton, a small collection of flint implements from the Andamans.

The following letter accompanied the box, which had been over-
looked in the office of the Geological Survey, in consequence of its
having been enclosed in another box, alleged to contain shells only,
and addressed to the Museum of Economic Geology :—

Port Blair, 29th November, 1861.

My pear Srr,—I send you for submission to the next meeting a
collection of what I take to be Andamanese arrow-tips ; with thern is
an English flint arrow-tip (No. 1) for comparison. All the specimens
but No. 2 were found on the site of an old Andamanese encampment
close to the spot where Blair had his garden in 1789-90. I also
found a single iron arrow-head about the size and shape of the ace of

1863. | Proceedings of the Asiatic Society. 307

spades in playing cards. It has unfortunately been mislaid. The
specimen No. 2, found this morning on the top of Ross Island, where
no flint has yet been found, appears either very much weathered or
to be altered by fire. All the Andamanese arrows seen during the
last two years were either tipped with longish spikes, consisting of
nails, convicts’ anklets, beaten-out pieces of saws, stolen from us, or
they have had a long point of hard wood. I do not remember to
have seen any mention of flint implements among the Andamanese
before ; we must conclude, therefore, that if the specimens now sent
were really used for the purpose I suppose, then they belong to an
age when iron derived from the wrecks of ships was not to be had
around these Islands.
Your’s truly,
(Sd.) J.C. Haveutoy.
To the Secretary, Asiatic Society.

3. From Mr. A. Grote, on the part of Colonel Tytler, a Python
from the Nicobar Islands, believed to be a new species, and two
species of Herodias froin Port Blair, also believed to be different from
the Bengal species.

4. From Lieutenant-Colonel James, skin and skeleton of a
Khatass (Viverra Zibetha).

5. From Baboo Rajendra Mallika, skin and skeleton of a Snow
Bear.

6. From Mr. H. F. Blanford, an extra copy of his paper on the
“Specific Identity of the Described Forms of Tanalia,” published in
the 23rd Vol. of the Transactions of the Linnean Society of London.

7. From the Madras Central Museum, a collection of Natural
History specimens chiefly consisting of fish.

8. From Baboo Prankissen Shaw, skin and skeleton of a Para-
doxurus Musanga.

The following letter from Lieutenant-Colonel S. R. Tickell, an-
nouncing the dispatch of two stone shot, and enclosing list of the
kings of Arakan, was read.

Akyab, May 14th, 1863.

My par Grore,—Will you kindly present to the Society the
accompanying two stone round shot. ‘hey were dug up out of the
ramparts of the Old Fort of Arakan, by Captain Hamilton, our

308 Proceedings of the Asiatic Society. [No. 3,

Superintendent of Police, at whose request I forward them and beg
you will kindly mention him as the donor.

Accompanying is a list of Kings who reigned in Arakan, holding
their courts in the city and fort of that name. The city was called
the “ Old City” (Myohoung) or “ Myouko,” (the Yam) indifferently.
The meaning of the latter name I cannot discover. It was com-
menced in 1430 4 pD., by Khyaw-moon, but not completed till 1531,
by Mengba, who armed the fort and established in the ramparts the
magazines, which have now been dug into.

The shot are made, you will observe, very symmetrically. It is possi-

y)

ble they may have been purchased, with “ pierricrs,” or stone mortars,
as they were called, from old Portuguese or other European voyagers.
Of guns not a trace has yet been met with in or near the fort, and it
is probable they were carried away by the Burmese invaders subse-
quent to the last Arakan king Sanay, in 1652.
Believe me, &c.,
(Sd.) S. R. TIcKELL.
A. D.
SAUMOONY ess ase enes ee Leeaees tates) (el oO COmMmMenceduciiys
Mlewishen Glee pe schwaceseie sees, toe
JEGUUlleNTAEY SEIS © soa esansninge comesseeces JOS)
DAMS Ay, a aence chic du J) ascatstas- caller
AYES oka WN VO ea Ree aint re bya 8 2.
Vans gy een tetcdesosusmsaracommcccay beabe
Salen gathooy senchh nn. ase. eta ae
Meng Sau. oon epee cee asisees banat 3-4 PLOUD
Kasalyuddeey caer cent recessed |elaao
WMhtcerceb oom sens celeste esas ee pO
a) AMAA Nar eals anivawe eB stcersde teach sient LOL
Mone bates ren eeeter eee oO latins nedaun excl
Meng Mnklohagyy.c.24 essa) jocsscedae) LOS.
SEAM EM ael Aen coe ABe es coarse dsae) 9) JMS)
py ARILGVA ea ae ne ccitenperineoceeor amie Oa
Peilepylonciieg i ae MCN Banal coannda iileitek:
Boi GAMBLE coi oeloge sn cclenemeateoclsemGe seremmt LOU
KGW eat O UMS eee eereee seen ee Oe.
MHCEL CCEA OO epee eee secs.) LOB
AWAY! 52) Jesten mae sues teseiaes |) ce

1863. | Proceedings of the Asiatic Society. 309

A. letter from My. J. J. Gray, intimating his desire to withdraw
from the Society, was recorded.

The following gentlemen, duly proposed at the last meeting, were
balloted for and elected ordinary members :—

W. Clementson, Esq.; Colonel G. W. Hamilton; Captain G. C.
Depree; T. D. Forsyth, Esq, c. B.; Baboo Chunder Sekur Roy; T.
H. Thornton, Esq., c. 8.; Hon’ble G. Campbell.

The following gentlemen were named for ballot as ordinary mem-
bers at the next meeting :—

H. 8S. Kane, Esq., mM. D., proposed by Mr. H. B. Medlicott, and
seconded by Mr. H. F. Blanford.

H. L. Porter, Esq., c. 8., proposed by Mr. Grote, and seconded by
Mr. Blanford.

C. Horne, Esq., C. 8., proposed by Mr. Atkinson, and seconded by
Mr. Bayley.

The Council proposed Richard H. Barnes, Esq., of Gangarowa,
Ceylon, as a Corresponding member.

The Council reported that they had adopted the recommendation
made by the Philological Committee in the following report on the
subject of the MSS. of the late Sir Henry Elliot :—

Report of the Philological Committee.

The Committee have had under consideration a proposition which
has for its object an endeavour to secure the publication, even in an
imperfect form, of the valuable materials which the late Sir Henry
Elliot had collected for his work on the Mohammedan Historians.

It was the wish of many members of our Society, eight years ago,
to offer the Society’s aid to Lady Elliot in carrying out the author’s
project, but no proposition was made, because it was hoped and
understood that the more powerful assistance of the Home Govern_
ment would be given to that end.

The Committee are aware that the late Board of Control, in their
letter, dated 4th August 1856, to Professor Wilson, and Messrs. Morley
and Bayley, sanctioned the printing of the three first vols. of the
Elliot MSS. which had been left ready for press, on the understanding
“that the payment by the Court in respect of the three vols. is to be
strictly limited to the sum of £500, including the remuneration to
the gentleman who may undertake the superintendence of the publica-

28

310 Proceedings of the Asiatic Society. [No. 3,

tion.” It was hoped that the publication of the further vols. might
be effected by means of private efforts.

Messrs. Austin’s estimate for publishing these three vols. which
ineluded a reprint of the Ist vol. altered by the author (500 pp. per
vol.) including Oriental type, corrections, and cloth-binding, was
£200.

Mr. Bayley, who had examined all the materials, reported on them
thus ;—Vols. 4 and 5 far advanced; 6 and 7, materials and outlines
only ready ; 8, nearly as far advanced as vols. 10 and 11, which are
about, say, half ready ; 9, in an equally forward state with the three
first vols.

The arrangement which was made with Mr. Morley for publishing
the work to the extent of the Board of Control’s grant was terminated
by that gentleman’s death, and no similar arrangement has since
been found feasible. It seems to the Committee that there is great
risk of the late Sir H. Elliot’s labours being altogether lost, uniess the
Society comes forward with an offer to undertake the superintendence
of the publication.

They think that an arrangement on some such plan as the following
might be made with Lady Elliot in whose possession the materials
are.

1.—The publication to be a special series under the title of the
* Hlliot Papers,” or “ Remains,’ under the superintendence of the
Philological Committee, as the Bibliotheca Indica is published.

2.—This Committee to undertake the carrying each vol., as it
stands, through the press. No editorial amendments or alterations to
be made.

3.—The charges to be defrayed from the late Court’s grant to such
extent as this can be made to go. If the Society fail to get this
special grant increased they might, with the necessary permission,
continue the publication at the charge of the Oriental Fund. Vol. 12
will not be required. It was to contain selected texts, but the
Society is already publishing its own selection of these texts in the
new series of the Bibliotheca Indica.

None of the vols. from 4 to 11, apparently will be full vols. It
seems probable that on Mr. Austin’s estimate for the cost of three
full volumes, the Society will be able to print the whole for from
£300 to £900.

1863. | Proceedings of the Asiatic Society. 311

4.—The materials to be placed at the Committee’s disposal by
Jady Elliot. With Mr. EK. Thomas’ co-operation in England, the Com-
mittee will be in a condition to determine what they will require to
be sent out and what portion may be left with him, or accessible to
him, for compliance with references made to him from this Committee.

5.—Proceeds of the publication to be credited to the Oriental Fund
till such time as it shall have been reimbursed for all charges.

The Committee forbear at present to go further into details. The
proper time for these will be after obtaining the sanction of the
Council and of a general meeting to their communicating with Lady
Elliot with a view to entering on an undertaking such as that which
is outlined above. They are prepared for great difficulties, but the
alternative of facing these is, they fear, to lose the benefit of the
researches of one of their most distinguished members,

(Sd.) A. GROTE.
HK. C. BAYLEY.
W.N. Luss, Capt.
RasENDRALAL Mirra.
H. B. Cow.
W.S. ATKINSON.

30th April, 1863.

After the report had been read the Chairman, in a few words,
urged its adoption on the meeting, and some additional explanations of
the state in which he had left the materials were given by Mr. E. C.
Bayley.

The report was unanimously adopted.

The Chairman observed that he had received a communication
from Captain Lees, stating that he was prevented by indisposition
from attending the meeting, and requesting that he might be allowed
to defer the motion of which he had given notice.

He further observed that in Mr. Oldham’s absence the two motions
of which he had given notice must also be necessarily postponed. As
the notice of these motions had been published in the last meeting’s
proceedings, he was anxious to explain to the meeting that the
Council generally disapproved of both. They did not consider that
the management of the Journal was open to the reflections implied in
the first, and they were satisfied that the Government grants had
been duly appropriated to the service of the Museum. It seemed

2R 2

312 Proceedings of the Asiatic Society. [No. 3,

expedient to state thus much in anticipation of the discussion that
would probably follow on Mr. Oldham’s return to Calcutta, when the
motions would, he presumed, be duly brought forward.

Communications were received—

1.—From Mr. H. F. Blanford, a note on a tank section at Sealdah.

Mr. Blanford read his paper, and a vote of thanks was passed to him.

2.—From Mr. E. B. Cowell, a paper on the Persian game Chaugan
or Hockey on Horseback.

Mr. Cowell read his paper and the thanks of the meeting were
accorded to him.

3.—From Captain H. G. Raverty, an account of Upper Kashkar
and Chitral, or Lower Kashkar, together with the independent
Afghan State of Punj-Korah, including Talash, being a continuation
to his “‘ Notes on Kafiristan.”

4.—From Capt. H, H. G. Austen, notes on the system employed
in outlining the figures of Deities, and other religious drawings, as
practised in Ladakh, Zanskar, &c.

5.—From Baboo Gopinauth Sen, Abstract of the Meteorological
Observations taken at the Surveyor General’s Office, in March last.

The Librarian submitted the usual monthly report.

LIBRARY.

The following accessions have been made to the Library since

the Meeting in May last.
Presented.

On the specific identity of the described forms of Tanalia, by Mr.
H. ¥F. Blanford.—By tut Auruor.

The Calcutta Christian Observer for May.—By THE EpiTors.

Report on Epidemic remittent and intermittent fever occurring
in parts of Burdwan and Nuddea Divisions, by Dr. J. Elliott.—
By THE BrencaL GOVERNMENT.

Dictionary, Sanskrit and English, Vol. I. Parts 1 to 4.—By Pro-
FESSOR |’. GOLDSTUCKER.

Manava Kalpa Sutras.—By THE Same.

Panini, his place in Sanskrit Literature.—By THE Same.

Memoirs of the Geological Survey of India, Palzontologia Indica,
Part 5.—By THe Musrum or Economic GEOLOGY.

Ditto Ditto.—By Tay GOVERNMENT oF INDIA.

1863. | Proceedings of the Asiatic Society. 313

The Oriental Baptist for April—By THe Epiror.

Report on the result of the Administration of the Salt Department
for 1861-62.—By THE BENGAL GOVERNMENT.

Selections from the Records of the Bombay Government, No. 68.
—By tHe BompBay GOVERNMENT.

Selections from the Records of the Bengal Government, No. 39.—
By tar BenGat GOVERNMENT.

Transactions of the Bombay Geographical Society, Vol. XVI.—
By THE SocIery.

Lateorat Durr.
ord June, 1863.

For Juuy 1863.

The Monthly General Meeting of the Asiatic Society of Bengal
was held on the Ist instant.

A. Grote, Esq., in the chair.

The proceedings of the last meeting were read and confirmed.

Presentations were received —

1. From Major J. L. Sbherwill—Specimens of locusts from a flight
which passed over Raneegunge on the Ist June.

2, From H. Lockwood, Esq. C. S.,—A large collection of birds
egos.

3. From Captain E. Smyth,—Skins of birds and animals from
Thibet.

4. From Dr. C. Williams.—A collection of bird skins from Bur.
mah.

5. From Major J. T. Walker, Superintendent, Great Trigonome-
trical Survey,—2 copies of Tables of heights in Sind, the Punjab, N,
W. Provinces and Central India.

6. From the Director of the Hydrographischen Anstalt der K. K.
Marine, Trieste,—A copy of the first part of ‘ Reise der Osterreichis-
chen Fregatte Novara um die Erde” with seven lithographed maps.

7, From Mr. A. Grote on the part of Lieutenant Colonel R. C.
Tytler,—A second Python from the Nicobar Islands.

8. From Captain H. Howe,—A Somali wooden pillow and spoons.

old Proceedings of the- Asiatic Socvety. [No. 3,

9. From J. F. Shekleton, Esq., M.D., Officiating Assay Master,—A
copy of the Assay Tables, in continuation of Tables VIII. and IX. of
Mr. James Prinsep.

A letter from Mr. D. Fitzpatrick, intimating his desire to withdraw
from the Society, was recorded.

The following gentlemen, duly proposed at the last meeting, were
balloted for and elected ordinary members:—H. S. Kane, Hsgq.,
M.D.; G. E. Porter, Hsq., C.S.; C. Horne, Esq., C. S.

R. H. Barnes, Esq., of Ceylon was also balloted for and elected a
Corresponding member.

The following gentlemen were named for ballot as ordinary mem-
bers at the next meeting :—

Coomar Chunder Nath Roy of Nattore, proposed by Mr. H. C.
Sutherland and seconded by Mr. Cowell.

Baboo Bunkim Chunder Chatterjea, B. A., proposed by Baboo Gour
Doss Bysack and seconded by Mr. Atkinson.

The Council reported that they had adopted the following report
of the Philological Committee.

KEport OF THE PHILOLOGICAL COMMITTEE.

The Philological Committee submit the following suggestion to
the Council :

In 1854 Dr. Sprenger published the first Vol. of a catalogue of Per-
sian MSS. at the expence of the government; similarly in 1855 Dr.
Ballantyne published the first Vol. of the great Sanscrit grammar,
the Mahdbhashya with native commentaries; and in 1860 Dr. Hall
published his Contribution to an Index of the Hindu Philosophical
Systems. ‘These three works possess respectively great value to
Huropean scholars, but unfortunately they are almost entirely un-
known even by name in Kurope. ‘The Secretary has made enquiries
of the Curator of Government Books at Allahabad, and he has learned
that the stock of the two latter works is at Allahabad, but we fear
that the first mentioned work on Persian Literature was probably
destroyed during the mutiny.

As the Government so liberally advanced the expence for the
printing of these books, it can hardly have been their intention that
the volumes when printed, should remain locked up from the learned
world who alone could appreciate them. Now if fifty or eighty
copies were ordered for distribution among the principal learned socie-

1863. | Proceedings of the Asiatic Society. 315

ties and the leading Orientalists of Europe, Oriental science would be
benefited, and the original object of government in printing the books
forwarded.

A large portion of the edition of the Rigveda, commenced by the
late Court of Directors, and continued by Her Majesty’s Government,
has been gratuitously distributed in this manner.

The Philological Committee would therefore suggest that a propo-
sition should be made to Government for the distribution of fifty or
eighty copies, and the Society might offer to send the books to their
respective destinations along with its own publications, government
paying any extra expence.

The report was adopted.

Communications were received.

1. From Dr. C. Williams, extracts from a journal of his trip from
Mandelay to Bhamoo, containing some accounts of a visit to old
Pagan.

The paper was read by the Secretary.

After its perusal the chairman observed that he was in hopes of
receiving further communications shortly from Dr. Williams through
Colonel Phayre. The Doctor had reported the Bhamoo river to be
navigable for steamers up to Bhamoo, He had not found it practi-
cable, in consequence of the disturbances in Yunan, to reach the
Chinese frontier, but he had travelled in that direction as far as the
Kakhyan mountains.

2. From the Under-Secretary to the Government of Bengal, copy
of a journal kept by Mr. J. W. Masters, late Assistant Commissioner
at Golaghat, during a tour made by him towards the end of last year
in Upper Assam.

3. From Baboo Gopinauth Sen an abstract of the hourly meteoro-
logical observations taken at the Surveyor General’s Office in April
last.

The chairman then addressed the meeting, calling its attention to
the intelligence which had just reached India of the successful issue
of Captains Speke and Grant’s expedition, in Hastern Africa.

Some of the members present, he observed, might probably have
known these officers who were both placed by the Home Government
at the disposal of the Royal Geographical Society on the 24th Feb-
ruary 1860. Captain Speke he had had the pleasure of seeing here when

316 Proceedings of the Asiatic Society. [No. 3,

he came down some 10 years ago to proceed to join Burton’s expedi-
tion to the Somali country ; though never a member of this Society»
he had contributed to the museum a fine collection of zoological speci-
mens made by him under great difficulties in the course of that expedi-
tion, and he was a frequent correspondent of the Society’s Curator,
Mr. Blyth. In later years his efforts in aid of African exploration had
been made known through European journals, and they obtained for
him in 1861 the gold medal of the Royal Geographical Society.

His first experiences as a traveller were gained in sporting tours in
the Western Himalaya, where, as the Society were aware, there was
at present another equally enterprising man, long known ag a sports-
man on and beyond the passes into Thibet, who was only waiting for
a mission such as the London Geographical Society entrusted to
Captains Speke and Grant, to emulate those officers in their exertions
and to achieve, it might be hoped, the same brilliant success. He
trusted that now that there was no longer room for doubt as to the
sources of the White Nile, we might be able to draw more attention
to the doubts that still hang over the sources of the Berhampootur,
the solution of which Captain Smyth, with a trusty few, was ready
and eager to attempt.

Feeling confident that amid the applause which awaited the
travellers in England, a greeting from their old friends in India and
from this Society, would be most acceptable to them, he would move
a resolution in the following form for the adoption of the meeting :

That this meeting desire to record the high gratification with
which they have heard of the successful issue of Captains Speke and
Grant’s expedition in Hastern Africa, and to offer to those officers
their warm congratulations on the great discoveries which have
resulted from it.

The Resolution was unanimously adopted.

Captain Lees then brought forward a motion for amending Rule 77
of the Bye-Laws, the notice of which was given at the May meeting.

He stated in a few words his reasons for proposing an alteration in
the rule. His object was to prevent the recurrence of discussions
regarding the present mode of conducting the Society’s journal, which
had lately occupied, he thought, too much of their time at more than
one of their meetings. He wished to see the Rule amended as follows :

The Council shall elect from their own body Sub-committees or

1863. | Proceedings of the Asiatic Societi. 317

sections of Oriental Literature, Natural History, &e., also a Sub-
committee of Finance, whose reports on all matters referred to theni
shall be submitted to the Council.

The chairman then read the Rule as it now stands, and moved that
Captain Lees’ proposed amendment be referred to the Council for
report in accordance with Rule 43 of the Bye-Laws.

Agreed to.

The Librarian submitted the usual monthly report.

LIBRARY.

The additions made to the Library since the meeting held in June
last are as follows :—

Presented.

Accidents on Railways in India during the year 1861.—By THE
Benga GovERNMENT.

Annual Report on the administration of the Bombay Presidency
for 1861-62.—-By THE BomBay GOVERNMENT.

The Prayer Book in the Burmese language.— By THE TRANSLATOR.

The Calcutta Christian Observer for June.—By THE Eprrors.

Catalogue de Livres Anciens et Modernes, Part 4.—By tur Com-
PILER.

Lecture on Buddhism, By G. M. Tagore.-—By tun AvutTHor.

Dictionary Sanskrit and English, Vol. I. Part 5—By Prorrssor
T. GOLDSTUCKER.

Journal of the Chemical Society, 2nd series, Vol. I. Nos. 1 to 3.—
By Tur Society.

Journal of Sacred Literature and Biblical record, Vol. III. No. 5.
—By rur Epitrors.

Mittheilungen der Hydrographischen anstalt der, K. K. Marine,
Trieste, Band I. Heft 1, with seven maps.—By THE AcapEMmy.

Memoirs of the Geological Survey of India, Paleontologia Indica,
Part 5.—By THE BENGAL GOVERNMENT.

Eee essing of the Royal Society of London, Vol. XII. Part 54.—
By THE Society.

Report of the Committee of the Bengal Chamber of Commerce,
from Ist Nov. 1862 to 30th April 1863.—By THE CHAMBER.

Report on the administration of the N. W. Provinces for 1861-62.
—By THE GOVERNMENT N. W. PROVINCEs.

318 Proceedings of the Asiatic Society.

Weekly Statement of Meteorological Returns of the N. W. Pro-:
vinces from June 1861 to May 1862.—By THE Samp.

Treaties, Engagements, Sunnuds, &c., Vol. 11.—By THE Govery-
MENT OF INDIA.

Tables of Heights in Sind, the Punjab, the N. W. Provinces and
Central India, published under the superintendence of the Trigono-
metrical Survey of India, 2 copies. By the Superintendent G. T.
Survey of India.

Journal Asiatique Sixieme Serie, Vol. I. No. 1.—By THE Societe’
ASIATIQUE DE Paris.

Eixchanged.

The Atheneum for March, 1863.

The London and Edinburgh Philosophical Magazine and Journal
of: Science, Vol. XXV. No. 168.

Purchased.

Bopp’s Sanskrita Sprache, Part 2. \

The Edinburgh Review for April, No. 240.

Hewitson’s Exotic Butterflies, Part 46.

Notices et Extraits des Manuscrits de la Bibliotheque Imperiale,
Paris, Vol. XIX. Part 1.

Numismatic Chronicle and Journal of the Numismatic Society of
London, New Series, No. 9.

‘The Parthenon, Vol. II. Nos. 47 to 50.

Reinaud’s Catalogue Annuaire Frangaise, Vol. V.

Revue et Magasin de Zoologie, No. 2 of 1863.

Revue des Deux Mondes for 15th March 1863.

Annals and Magazine of Natural History, Vol. II. No. 64.

The Westminster Review for April 1863.

Dr. Weber’s Indische Studien, Vo. VII. Part 3.

Comptes Rendus, Vol. LVI. Nos. 8 to 11.

Journal des Savants for March 1863.

The Natural History Review for April 1863.

Lateorat Dorr.
1st July, 1868.

JOURNAL

OF THE

ee ere SOC hh

OOOO

No. IV. 18638.

$< eee

SO

Contributions to Indian Malacology. No. IV. Descriptions of new
land shells from Ava, and other parts of Burma.—By WitLiaM
T. BuanrorDd, Associate of the Royal School of Mines, Ff. G. 8.

The species of land shells described in this paper are a few of
peculiar interest selected from a numerous collection of novelties
obtained in Pegu and Upper Burma. A far larger number remain
to be examined, as well as several new species of Estuary and
Marine shells from the Irawadi delta and the coasts of Arakan,

I trust hereafter to be able to furnish drawings of the species now
described, as well as of those published in a previous number of
these contributions.

Genus Sprracutum Pearson : emend.

Shell depressed; sub-discoidal, covered with a thick epidermis,
sometimes hairy ; aperture circular; last whorl furnished, a short
distance behind the mouth, with a short reverted sutural tube, open
at both ends, anteriorly inside the body whorl, and posteriorly into
the air.

Operculum concentric, horny, multispiral, convex or flat; edges
of the whorls externally free and raised, similar to that of Ptero-
cyclos.

Animal similar to Cyclophorus and Pterocyclos, except that the
mantle is deeply notched, (in Sp. Avanum,) the notch corresponding
to the sutural tube.

1. Sp. AVANUM, n. s.

Shell convexly depressed, widely umbilicated, marked with radia-

ting striz and covered, (in young specimens,) with a thick scabrous
2%

320 Contributions to Indian Malacology. [No. 4,

epidermis ; colour white, with broad zigzag chesnut stripes crossing
the whorls, and a wide submedian band of the same colour surround-
ing the shell. Spire scarcely raised, suture deep. Whorls 43, round-
ed; the last cylindrical, descending slightly and gradually towards
the mouth, and bearing, 3 mm. behind the aperture, a short reverted
sutural tube curved into an arch, so that its posterior termination is
close to the suture, and open at both ends. Aperture slightly oblique,
circular. Peristome, (in well grown specimens,) double, the inner lip
continuous and slightly protruded, angulately incised at the suture.
Outer lip expanded and produced, close to the last whorl, into a
small vertical tongue-shaped projection. Operculum multispiral,
almost flat, with a central prominent nucleus within, slightly con-
cave externally, the edges of the outer whorls being free and slightly

raised.
mm. inch
Majors diameter yie-\ssdee-jecs-2-)-<4 te otn Ud 0.68
IM SonGre. GUO Ry ear ivene neu aranecese tno.) ALA! 0.56
Allevidesy wu Peyenra ee a cee ay Ca eS 0.34
Diameter of aperture, ......... 53 0.25

Hab. Shan Hills, east of the ne af en

Of this most interesting shell, I only obtained two specimens, one
alive and in good condition, but barely full grown, the other old,
worn and dead: one was picked up at the base, the other on the top
of the range of hills lying to the east of the beautiful valley, in which
are situated the present and former capitals of the kings of Burma.

The genus Spiraculum was proposed in 1883, (J. A. S. Vol. II.
p- 391) by Dr. Pearson, then Curator of the Asiatic Society of Ben-
gal, for the reception of the anomalous Sp. hispidum, and also of
Pterocyclos parvus from the Khasi hills. Mr. Benson had, a very
short time previously, in 1832, published the description of the allied
genus Pterocyclos,(J. A. S. Vol. I. p. 11) and Dr. Pearson proposed
to substitute the name Spzraculum, under the idea that the type of
Mr. Benson’s genus was an imperfectly developed shell. Dr. Pear-
son was entirely in error, as was shewn soon after by Mr. Benson,
(J. A. S. Vol. V. p. 355) whose generic name has been universally
adopted, while Dr. Pearson’s appellation has been treated a synonym
by many authors, by Dr. Pfeiffer amongst others, while the brothers
Adams and a few other conchologists have preserved the name Spira-

1863. ] Contributions to Indian Malacology. 321

culum, but have restricted it to the only species hitherto described
as possessing a tube, viz. Sp. hispidum,* (Pterocyclos hispidus). The
discovery of a second species shews that this separation is justified.
The genus is distinguished from Péerocyclos both in the possession
of this small tube, which recalls the same process in Optsthoporus
Bens. and also in the absence of the “wing” or cowl-shaped free
process of the outer lip in the peristome of Pterocyclos, which is
represented by the small linguiform projection of Spiraculum. 'There
also appears, if the character of the mantle of Sp. Avanum prove
constant, to be a distinction in the animals; for although several
species of Pterocyclos have been carefully examined, no peculiarity
in the animal has been found to correspond to the singular formation
of the peristome, while in the present species of Spzraculum there is
a deep notch in the mantle, corresponding to the tube in the shell.

A third and very singular species of Spiraculwm exists in Assam,
but has not yet been described J am disposed to consider the ge-
nus as forming an important link between the Oyclophoride, certain
forms of the Pupinidw, and the aberrant genus Alyceus.

The present species is distinguished from Sp. hispidum, Pearson, by
its smaller size, by the epidermis being only slightly rough, instead
of hairy, and by the sutural tube being nearer the mouth, and bent
backwards in the form of an arch. The projection of the outer lip
near the suture is vertical instead of horizontal. The operculum is
far flatter, resembling in this character, that of the Burmese species
of Pterocyclos e. g. Pt. pullatus, Bens.

2. CYCLOPHORUS HISPIDULUS, Nn. s.

Shell widely umbilicate, subplanulately depressed, radiately striated
and marked by extremely fine and close concentric impressed lines,
white, covered with a thick dark brown epidermis, which forms a broad
raised spiral costulation around the shell, more marked in young than
in fully grown specimens. Spire almost flat, apex just exserted,
suture deep. Whorls 5, cylindrical, the last descending very little
near the aperture, which is subvertical and circular. Peristome
double, inner lip continuous and projecting a little; outer lip slightly
expanded. Operculum multispiral, externally flat, the margins of the

* Gen. Rec. Moll., H. and A, Adams, Vol. II. p. 278, the following is the
description given, “Shell with a reverted, closed tube or spiracle, situated on
the suture near the aperture.” The tube is not closed however, but open, the
interior aperture being more or less in the form of a longitudinal slit.

Sie

322 Contributions to Indian Malacology. [No. 4,

whorls being very rough and free, internally very slightly concave,
with a minute central nucleus projecting.

mm. inch
Miajoridvamis, cciven ce. ceencete. sosece, Fell 0.55
Minor tdi btoteerercssc settee: cores tee 0.5
PANCIbUCe me mean emeaheor. meen cen rd 0.28
Diameter of aperture, ...2......5.-.. 0 0.15

Habitat. Mya Leit Doung, near Ava.

This species, with C. calyx, Bens., from Molmain, and C. pinnulzifer,
Bens. from the Khasi hills, forms an extremely well marked section
of the genus Cyclophorus, having indeed quite as good claim to
separation as some acknowledged genera, e. g. Leptopoma. All are
distinguished from other discoid species by a scabrous epidermis, and
an operculum with raised edges to the whorls externally, thus exactly
resembling that of the Burmese forms of Pterocyclos and Spiraculum,
to the former of which genera this little group forms a passage. If
considered worthy of separation as a subgenus of Cyclophorus, 1
would suggest for it the name Scabrina.

The description of C. calyx by Mr. Benson in the Ann. and Mag,
Nat. Hist. for 1856 (2nd series, Vol. XIX. p. 228) must have bee”
taken from a dead specimen which had lost both its epidermis and
operculum. In living specimens, brought to me by a collector whom
I sent to Molmain, the shell was covered with a scabrous dark epi-
dermis, radiately striated, and with raised spiral lines which, as in C-
hispidulus, were more marked in young than in adult individuals.
The operculum was slightly concave externally, in consequence of the
edges of the whorls being raised and ragged, especially near the
circumference ; internally it was smooth and nearly flat, with a small
central nucleus. C. calyx is well distinguished from C. hispidulus and
O. pinnulifer by its smaller whorls, the strong subangulation around
the umbilicus, the ornamentation beneath the epidermis, and the
markings of the epidermis itself, the raised ridges surrounding the
shell being fewer and much more pronounced in C. hespidulus.

In C. pinnulifer the mouth is larger, and the markings on the
epidermis very oblique, instead of concentric, and somewhat irregu-
lar. The operculum is very Pterocycloid with rough raised edges to
the whorls.

1863. | Contributions to Indian Malacology. 323

3. ALyomuSs VULCAN, n. s.

Shell moderately umbilicated, depressly turbinate, thin, translu-
cent, varying in colour from amber to nearly white, rather closely
costulated throughout, more strongly upon the inflated portion of
the last whorl, and very closely ribbed within the umbilicus. Spire
conoid, apex blunt, deep rufous ; suture impressed. Whorls 4, round-
ed, the last moderately swollen at the side, then constricted, and
swelling again slightly towards the mouth. Constriction smooth ;
sutural tube of moderate length, about 2 mm. Aperture oblique,
round, peristome crenulately waved on the outer edge, the lowest
crenulation forming a rudimentary channel at the base; peristome
double, the inner alone continuous, both lips somewhat expanded.
Operculum thin, horny, distinctly multispiral, very concave exter-
nally, internally convex and with a prominent central nucleus.

mm. inch.
INIA ONMCIATII Ss “neeeelcceiiss cesses actos | Ate 0.18
IMitwonrsclitGsrcsnce cesses ascents. ss cues CO: 0.14
IAM AD se ware ee tion chiens coe tay t ellic 0.05

Habitat.—This species abounds on the upper portion of the isolated
peak of Puppa, an extinct volcano lying about 40 miles E. 8. HE. of
the town of Pu-gadn in the territories of the king of Ava. It is a
more globose form than either A. Succineus, mihi, or A. polygonoma,
mihi, to which it is allied. ‘The crenulation of the mouth is perhaps
more marked than in any other Burmese species.

4. ALyomus AVA, n.s.

Shell depressed, openly umbilicated,thin, closely costulated through-
out, more strongly upon the inflated portion of the last whorl, white
or light amber in colour. Spire very depressly conoid, apex blunt,
suture impressed. Whorls 4, the last very little inflated at the side,
then moderately constricted, constriction rather long, swollen in the
centre, indistinctly costulated. Sutural tube short, about 14 mm. in
length. Aperture circular, diagonal. Peristome thickened, double,
external lip expanded, inner continuous and projecting slightly atthe
base. Operculum, thin, horny, multispiral, very concave externally
and convex within, wanting the central boss.

B24 Contributions to Indian Malacology. [No. 4,

mm. in.
Mayoridiami ls vee.) eens 0.14
Manorsdittos (in. Peers spes sti 0.12
LCR ine AEE TAR SOL ee 0.08
Diaimivapery Bae jae 1 0.04

Hab.—The hills Hast of Mandalay and Ava.

This species approaches A. Strangulatus, Hutt. which is larger and
more discoid.

5. Atycmus RICHTHOFENI, ND. s.

Shell umbilicated, turbinate, rather solid, closely flexuously costu-
lated, more strongly so on the inflated portion. Spire conical ; apex
rather acute ; suture impressed. Whorls 5, rounded, the last moder-
ately swollen at the side, and sub-angulate at the periphery, and more
strongly so round the umbilicus, then much contracted, ascending
slightly at the inflation, descending considerably behind the aper-
ture. Constriction slightly costulated, crossed by a very prominent
vertical ridge. Sutural tube of moderate length, about 23 mm.
Aperture circular, very oblique. Peristome continuous, double, the
inner lip projecting slightly, and waved 3 times on the dextral side.
Outer lip broadly and flatly expanded. Opere. ?

mm. in.
Major diam., 5 0.2
Minor ditto, Moria cae eerie eG J 0.15
ENE Me AOi est ee SSeS ES eM ah 0.15
Diam. ap., i: 0.06

Hab —Molmain.

1 am indebted to Baron F. v. Richthofen for the only specimen
of this shell which has been found. It is perfect, but bleached. The
species is quite distinct in type from any Indian or Burmese form
with which I am acquainted ; it combines a high conical spire with
a strong ridge on the constriction, but it recalls somewhat the
Javanese A. Jagori, Martens. I have much pleasure in naming
this interesting little form after the discoverer, to whom I was also
indebted for some living specimens of Raphaulus chrysallis, Pfr. and
other Molmain shells.

6. DIPLOMMATINA PUPPENSIS, n. s.

Shell dextral, not rimate, elongately subovate, thin, translucent,

light amber in colour, very finely and closely costulated, spire with

1863. | Contributions to Indian Malacology. 325

convex sides, apex pointed, not acuminate, suture impressed. Whorls
7, the antepenultimate being the largest, last whorl rising considerably
upon the penultimate. Aperture vertical, nearly circular, the colu-
mellar margin being straight, with an obtuse angle at the base, and
furnished with a small tooth internally. Peristome double, orange
in colour; both lips expanded, the inner forming a thin callus upon
the penultimate whorl. Opere. thin, horny, white, circular, flat, with
no distinct spiral structure.

mm. in.
aN es Sa aL DDI Wea ea ner eR 0.15
JD TROT SUN E Ces yea CREO ea ees SSM ee sO 0.08
ID Mena, Bhan ene seni 0.04

Habitat.—Puppa Hill in ie Pe with Alyceus Vulcani.

The largest species yet discovered in Burma and the most symme-
trical, so far as I know, of all Asiatic forms. None of the Burmese
representatives of Diplommatina shew the strongly acuminate spire,
or the great swelling of the antepenultimate whorl which distin-
guishes the species inhabiting the Himalaya.

7. DIPLOMMATINA EXILIS, n. s.

Shell dextral, not rimate, very slenderly subfusiform, rather solid,
moderately, closely and obliquely ribbed throughout. Spire turreted
with straight sides, apex obtuse, suture impressed. Whorls 73,
rounded, antepenultimate slightly larger than the penultimate.
Lower whorl rising a little near the aperture, which is subvertical,
slightly inclined downwards, almost circular, the columellar margin
being straightened, terminating in a right angle at the base, and
bearing a moderate-sized internal tooth. Peristome double, the
inner lip being prominent, slightly expanded, and continuous upon
the penultimate whorl, but not forming a broad callus ; outer lip,
slightly expanded, retro-relict. Opere. ?

mm. in.
PNNGE ONE Sakis stiauiadtilbs lc uolddabasuse Pek 0.12
DDRII Gash Sousa. «els dalld vodlabei dull 0.05
IDMENaT Sey O eae ae Se eeabt el On) 0.03

Habitat.—_Mya Leit Deiaa tal

The most slender species of the genus with which I am acquainted,
and easily distinguished by this character from all others, by its
long narrow form.

326 Contributions to Indian Malacology. [ No. 4,

8. HypsrLostoMa BENSONIANUM, N. s.

Shell moderately umbilicated, turbinate, not distinctly striated,
thin, horny. Spire conical, apex papillar and with the axis oblique,
suture deep. Whorls 4, the upper ones flattened, the last bulging
below the suture, and again at the periphery, (where it bears a pro-
minent rounded keel,) rounded beneath, and compressed towards the
umbilicus. It rises somewhat towards the mouth, which is round,
nearly vertical, slightly turned upwards, free from the other whorls,
and furnished inside with 5 lamellar teeth, 4 of which are equidis-
tant and opposite to each other, at the upper and lower corners of
the mouth, so as to form a partial St. Andrew’s cross, while the
fifth, which is smaller, is close to and above that at the upper corner
of the parietal margin. Peristome free, simple, broadly expanded
and trumpet-shaped.

mm. in.
Nay ornciamc Me cesmerees so onctacee oro 0.12
IU Tovoys CIMMIO ES Aesdcsindencacigasecaaase: mee: 0.09
PIG Caeca see ecrnen Merete 2 0.08
Diam. of peristome, ......... 1 0.04

Hab.—Mya Leit Doung, Ava.

The differences between this shell and Aypselostoma tubsiferum,
Benson, hitherto the only known species of the genus, are numerous.
That shell has the spire scarcely exserted, while the last whorl
ascends so much that the mouth, which is horizontal, is on a level
with the apex. In the present species, the spire is conical, the
mouth nearly vertical, and the last whorl only ascends very slightly.
In A. tubiferum also, there are more teeth in the mouth, they are
situated further back from the aperture, and are somewhat differently
disposed, the upper two lamelle being produced in front of the
others, and forming an imperfect tube. ‘There are also minor differ-
ences in striation, umbilicus, &c. Nevertheless the general appear-
ance of the two species is strikingly similar, and the peculiar shape
of their whorls and mouth recalls those of the Brazilian genus
Anostoma, Lam.

Hyps. Bensonianum occurred together with H. tubiferum on the
high limestone peak of Mya Leit Doung about 20 miles South of
Mandalay, the present capital of other kingdom of Ava. H, tubi-
Serum has also been found over a wide range of country. It occurs

1863. | A memoir on the Rats and Mice of India. 327

on the Tsagyen hills, north of Ava, famous for their marble quarries,
and on various hills in Pegu as far south as Henzada. In some
places hundreds of specimens may be found adhering, in dry weather,
to the surface of limestone rock, upon which alone it appears to
occur, in the same manner as species of Pupa and Clawsilia are fre-
quently found in Europe, though rarely in India.

The animal of H. tubiferum is very small and black, of the usual
Helicidous form, with 4 tentacles, and so far as I could observe,
presented no peculiarity.

ea

A memoir on the Rats and Mice of India.—By Kpwarp Buy tH.

The following must be regarded as merely a somewhat rude at-
tempt to reduce the present utter chaos of Indian Muride to some
kind of approximation to systematic order; at all events, to present
a Conspectus of the long series of names and descriptions, that should
facilitate the future study of these small animals, and conduce even-
tually, no doubt, to an extensive reduction of the number of named
species, and to the rectification of their perplexed synonyms. At all
events, I have brought together every notice which I could find, de-
scriptive of the Murine animals of India and the countries adjacent.

Genus GERBILLUS, F. Cuvier.

The Gerbilles are a group of burrowing field-rats, common (as a ge_
nus) to Asia and Africa, of gracile form, with small fore-limbs and
inversely developed hind-limbs, a longish furred tail, the hairs of
which are gradually lengthened towards the extremity into a kind of
tuft, and with distinctly grooved upper rodential tusks. There ap-
pears to be one Indian species only.

G. mnpicus; Dipus indicus, Hardwicke, Tr. Lin. Soc. VIII. 279,
pl. 7; F. Cuv., Mamm. Lithog., I, t. 73 (not good) ; Hardwicke, Z7/.
Ind. Zool.— G. Cuviert, Waterhouse, P. Z. S. 1838, p, 56 ;— G@. Hard-
wickei, Gray, Br. Mus. Catal., Mamm., p. 182 ;—Meriones apicalis (?),
Kuhl, apud Gray ; Mus yencus, B. Ham., I. 8. ; ‘ Desert Rat’ of El-
phinstone’s ‘ Cabul’ (vzde Introduction).* For description of habits,
vide W. Elliot, Esq., in Madr. Journ. Lit. Se. X, 211.

* The ‘Desert Rat’ of Arthur Conolly, ‘Overland Journey to India,’ I. 54,
refers to the Jerboa (ALAcTAGA INDICA, erroneously so called, of Gray).

2 7

328 A memoir on the Rats and Mice of India. [No. 4,

On careful comparison of numerous specimens from Afghanstan,
Sindh, Upper Hindustan, Lower Bengal, Midnapore district, Madras
Presidency, and Ceylon, I am satisfied that all belong to one and
the same species; the differences which have been stated to exist
being merely indicative of individual variation.

A second species, however, inhabits Afghanstan,—the G. ERY-
THROURA, Gray, Ann. Mag. N. H. X, (1842), p. 266: wide also
J. A. 8. XV. 139, Dr. Gray states—“ Hab. India, Afghanstan.” I
doubt if it inhabits India, any more than does his Alactaga indica,
ibid. p. 262, from “ India, Candahar, at Quetta ;” or his Lagcomys
RUFESCENS, zbid. p. 266, from “ India, Cabul;” these latter animals
are not at all hkely to be found on the Indian side of the passes
into Afghanstan, but are inhabitants of a region possessing essen-

tially an European climate.

Genus Nesoxia, Gray.

Ann. Mag. N. H. X. (1842), p. 264. “ Cutting teeth very large, flat in front,
and smooth ; grinders 3-3 ; front upper, large with three cross ridges ; the middle
oblong, and the hinder much narrower behind, each with two cross-ridges ; hinder
each with two ridges, the hindmost smallest, rather narrow behind ; tail short,
thick, with whorls of scales and scattered bristles ; toes 4-5, moderate, the three
middle sub-equal, long, the outer moderate; claws small, compressed ; front
thumb tubercular, with a rudimentary claw; ears moderate, naked.

«This genus is easily known from Mus by the large size of the cutting teeth
and the comparative shortening of the tail; it appears to be intermediate to
the Rats and Ruizomys,” (J. H. Gray).

I have studied both Moroma and Ruizomys alive, in their indigenous haunts,
and living examples of both of them ; and can perceive no particular approxima-
tion in the instance of these two genera.

N. 1nptca; Mus indicus, Geoffroy, Desmarest, p. 474; Lesson,
Manuel, p. 266; Brandts Maz, p. 114, t. 85; Schinz, Synopsis
Mammatlium, 11.174; Arvicola indica, Gray, Hardw. Ill. Ind. Zool.

“M. supra cano-rufescens, subtus canescens; pedibus dorso concoloribus,
cauda corpore paululum breviore ; auriculis magnis, rotundatis, fuscis, nudius-
culis; cauda nigricante. Pili omnes basi cami. Magnitudine M. decwmani.
Habitat. circa Pondichery.”

In his Catalogue of the specimens of mammalia in the British Museum, Dr.
Gray cites the name M. indicus, Geoffroy, as a synonym of his Mus Kok; the
former name having the priority by many years; but in his subsequent Cata-
logue of the specimens presented by B. H. Hodgson, Esq. to the British
Museum, Dr. Gray gives M. indicus, Geoff., as a separate species, and refers to

1863. ] A memoir on the Rats and Mice of India. 329

it the M. rattus (?) v. rattoides of Hodgson, the description of which indicates
a very different animal, with tail longer than the head and body. He also
dubiously refers the M. bruwneusculus, Hodgson, to the same.

This is undoubtedly the common shortish-tailed field Rat of all
India, with Ceylon; varying somewhat in shade of hue according
to the colour of the soil on which it dwells. Though the reverse
of gracile in its appearance, with much of the aspect of an arvicola,
it is marvellously rapid in its movements, as it plays about the
entrance of its burrow!* And the type, if not the same species,
occurs in Afghdnstén ; but I have not seen it from the eastward of
the Bay of Bengal though it is likely enough to occur in the dry
climate of the region of the upper Irawadi.

The Indian animal is excellently described by the Hon’ble Walter
Hlliot, in the Madr. Journ. Lit. Sc. X, 209 (1839), by the name
Mus (Neotoma) providens, with M. indicus, Geoff. and Arvicola in-
dica, Gray, cited as synonyms, and the Canarese name Kok or Koku
also assigned to it. He gives an elaborate account of the habits of
the animal; and remarks that—‘“ A variety found in the red soil is
much redder in colour than the common Kokw of the black land.
Another variety, he adds, “is said to frequent the banks of nullahs,
and to take to the water when pursued; but the specimens I have
seen differed in no respect from the common kind, (of which they
appeared to be young individuals,) except im size.” “ The dimensions
of an old male were as follow :—length of body, 7 in.; of tail 63 in. [!]
sole 1,4, in., weight 6 oz. 5 dr.” According to my observation, the
tail has not exceeded 54 in., from any part of the country.

In the Proc. Zool. Soc. for 1835, p. 108, it is recorded that speci-
mens were exhibited of eight species of Rats and Mice, collected in
India by Walter Eliot, Esq, They were brought under the notice
of the meeting by Mr. Gray, who stated that five of them were

hitherto undeseribed* * *. The mouse which Mr. Gray has figured
from Gen. Hardwicke’s drawings, in the ‘ Illustrations of Indian Zoo-

* The species of RH1zomys are rather slow in their movements.

+ ‘‘ It seems necessary,” remarks Mr. Elliot, “ to distinguish this species by a
new name, that of indicus bemg too general and indefinite. Geoffroy’s animal]
is not sufficiently particularized, to indicate which of the Indian species he meant:
and Gray’s was given under the supposition that it applied to an ARVICOLA,
which, he subsequently discovered, it did not (P. Z. 8. 1835, p. 108). The pre:

sent term seems sufficiently applicable to its habit of laying up a large eof
grain for its winter food.” sais ee

rine?

330 A memoir on the Rats and Mice of India. [No. 4,

logy,’ under the name of Arvicola indica, is really aus. A second
time, therefore, the specific name InDIcUS claims priority. Mr. Elliot
subsequently presented specimens of this common Indian field Rat
to the Society’s Museum, which are before me as I now write.

In the Mag. Nat. Hist. n. s. I. (1887), p. 585, Mr. Gray de-
scribes a Mus Kok (!), with the synonym of Arvicola indica, Gray.
“Length of body (dry) 93 in., tail 43 in.; hind-feet 12 in. Inha-
bits India.” Doubtless from one of Mr. Elliot’s specimens; but
how different the admeasurements taken froma dry skin! On the
same occasion he describes a Mus Hardwickei. “Very much like
MM. Kok, but the skull is much wider and stronger, and rather larger ;
and the cutting teeth are nearly twice as wide, and are flat in front.
The grinders are very little larger than those of that species. Inhabits
India; gardens.” I considerably suspect that these are merely adult
and young of the same species! With numerous specimens before me
from Lower Bengal, the Midnapore district, the Carnatic, S. Malabar,
and Ceylon, I can recognise one species only, varying a little in shade
of hue from different localities, and also somewhat in quality of fur,
unless this latter difference may prove to be seasonal, as is not impro-
bable. In his catalogue of the specimens of Mammalia in the British
Museum, p. 110, Mr. Gray retains his JZ. Kok under mus, and gives
as synonym J. (Neotoma) providens, Elliot, Arvicola indica, Gray,
and also MUS INDICUS, Geoffroy. (Why, therefore, not adopt this
last and much the oldest name for the species F). And at p. 113, well
removed from the former, he gives Nesoxra HarpwicKel, v. Mus
Hardwickei, Gray, and no other species is referred by him to Nesokia
in that catalogue. But in his catalogue of the specimens and draw-
ings of Mammalia and birds of Nepal and Tibet, presented by B. H.
Hodgson, Esq., to the British Museum (1846), the Kok v. providens,
is assigned to Wesokia.*

So common and widely diffused a Rat as this is, throughout the
plains of India, must needs be found in the valley of Nepal; and, if so, —
will be sure to have received one or more names from Mr. Hodgson.

* The late Dr. Kelaart, in his Prodromus Fannae Zeylanicae, recognises apart
Nesokia Hardwickei, Gray, (Mus dubiws, Kelaart), and Nesokia Kok, Gray (Arvi-
cola indica, Gray, and Neotoma providens, Elliot). A Cinghalese specimen pre-
sented by him to the Society is undoubtedly of the common Bengal species.
His N. Kok appear to have been described from a distorted stuffed specimen, of

at most a slight individual variety to the best of my judgment; and he states

of it “ Dentition as in the last species.” (!) -
Ld

1863. | A memoir on the Rats and Mice of India. 331

One and probably more than one of the following descriptions in
the Ann. Mag. N. H. XV. (1845), pp. 267—8, are likely to refer to
M. rnpicus; and not any of these names occur either in the Br.
Mus. Catal. of Dr. Gray, nor in the late Dr. Horsfield’s Catalogue of
the specimens of Mammalia in the India-House Museum, (1850) ;
but some of them are noticed, as will be shewn, in the Br. Mus. Catal.
of Mr. Hodgson’s specimens.

“Mus ? pyororis,* H. characterized by its bluff face with short thick muzzle,
and by its short tail, one-third short of the length of the animal. Pelage of two
sorts, with the long piles sufficiently abundant, colours of rattoides, or of dusky-
brown, with a very vague rufous tinge. Below fulvescent ; long hairs all black ;
rest with hoary bases and black points. Inner piles mostly dusky. Snout to vent
7 in.; tail 43 in; head 13 in.; ears 13; palma 2; plauta 14. Tenants the woods
only ;”’—4. e. open jungle ? (I take this to be a synonym of NESOKIA INDICA.)

“Mus Mysrurix, H. Remarkable for its soft mouse-like pelagi, and for its
tail covered with hairs, so as to conceal the annulated skin nearly. Fur soft,
short, and of one kind only; colours clear; above dull fawn, below fulvescent.
The piles above are dusky at their roots, black in their centres, and red at
their tips. The tail is still shorter than in Mus ? pyctoris, being not two-thirds
of the length of the animal. Snout to rump 6 in.; tail 3$; head 13; ears 14;
palma j%; plautalj,. Tenants the woods only, dwelling in burrows under
the roots of trees, but not gregariously.” (Qu. young of NESOKIA INDICA ?)

“Mus (?) HypRoPHILUS, H. [Arvicola hydrophilus, H., J. A. 8. X. 915, [apud
Gray]. Small Water-Rat of Nepal. Dwellsin holes on the margins of ponds
and rivers: characterized by its small ears, which are hardly above one-third the
length of the head; also by its short tail, and by a pelage that is short and
fine, though not so mouse-like as in the last, Above dusky-brown, below and
the limbs nearly white. Long piles inconspicuous. Head larger and muzzle
thicker than in the common land Rats. Snout to vent 33 in.; tail 22 in. head

14 in. ; ears 3, in.; palma 2; planta %.’t

* In Br. Mus., a “specimen with skull, in very bad state.” Also a “ draw-
ing, of natural size’—‘‘ Inhab. Nepal, central and northern hilly region.” “ Fur
soft, dark brown, minutely gray varied, with scattered narrow, white bristles.
Lower cuttime teeth very narrow, rounded in front, middle of belly whitish.
Tail nakedish, Hind-feet 1 in. 3 lin,; tail 4in.; (imperfect) body and head 7 in. ;
skull 1} im.’ (Gray).

+ In Br. Mus., ‘a flat skin, without fore-limbs ; tailskinned at the end ;” and
‘a drawing of natural size.’ ‘‘Inhab. Nepal, central and northern hilly
region.” “Fur yellow-brown, minutely black-varied; hair rather short and
rigid, lead-coloured, with yellow tips, and with scattered narrow black bristles ;
beneath yellowish-white ; tail hairy, yellow, hind feet 1 in.; tail 3 im.’ (Gray.)

{ NeEsoKIA HYDROPHIZA apud Gray ; who also admits his Nesokia (!) kok from
Nepal, v. M. providens, Mlliot, &e. In Br. Mus., a “specimen without tail, im-
perfect skull, and drawing of adult and young, nat. size. Grey-brown, beneath
whitish ; fur very soft, with rather elongated, very slender, soft, longer hairs ;

332 A memoir on the Rats and Mice of India. [ No, 4,

“Mus (?) macropus, H. A Water-Rat like the last, but twice as large. Dis-
tinguished by the largeness of its feet, and also by the fine pelage and the
proportions of the last, as well as by a similar bluff face, though less so than
in M. (2?) pyctoris. Above smoky black, below smoky-grey. Legs dark, toes
pale. Snout to rump 7% in.; tail 6 in,; head 2,4 in.; ears 1, in.; palma plus
1 in. ; planta 123 in. ; weight 6 oz.” (Hodgson.)

In J. A. S. XV., 139, I referred a species from the extreme V. W.
of India and Afghanstan, to this Mesokia group by the name Mus
Huttoni, nobis; and Mr. F. Moore has since described a Wesokia
Griffithii, Horsfield, from Afghanstén, in the Catalogue of the
Indian-House specimens of mammalia, which is probably the same
animal, notwithstanding certain discrepancies in the descriptions.

N. Hurroni, nobis—“ Bears a near resemblance to M. 1npica (vy. kok), but
the tail is shorter and the general colour much lighter, resembling that of the
Gerbilles. On comparison of the skulls, the Zygomatic arch is seen to be con-
spicuously broader anteriorly ; and the palate is much narrower, and contracted
to the front: but the most obvious distinction consists in all the teeth, both
incisive tusks and grinders, being considerably broader and stronger. In other
respects, the skulls of these two species bear a very close resemblance. Leneth,
minus the tail, about 6 in,; the tail, (vertebre,) 4 in.: tarsus with toes and
claws, 1? in.; ears posteriorly 4 in.; to anteal base in. Fur soft and fine,
blackish for the larger basal half of the piles—the surface pale rufescent-brown,
deepest along the crown and back, pale below, and whitish on the throat ;
whiskers small and fine, and chiefly black; tail naked; feet light-brown:
incisive tusks buff-coloured ; the enamel of these has been partially worn away
on those of the upper jaw.’ (B1.)

This animal ‘“ occurs south of Bwhawulpore, and is abundant in Afehanstan,
from Quetta to Girishk, throwing up the mould after the manner of the mole,
It feeds on herbs and seed, and burrows in the ground beneath hedge-rows and
bushes, as well as along the banks and ditches. Its nest is deep-seated, and it
constructs so many false galleries immediately below the surface, that it is difficult
to find the true passage to its retreat, which dips down suddenly from about the
middle of the labyrinth above. In the gardens and along the sides of water-
courses in the fields at Kandahar, their earth-heaps are abundant.” (Hutton.)

Nesoxia Grirrirait, Horsfield “ Fur very soft and silky : colour above, dusky
chesnut-brown with streaks of a plumbeous tint, the separated hairs being of a
leaden-colour at the base, and chesnut-brown towards the extremity ; chin,
chest, and under parts of a lighter tint, passing into a greyish-leaden colour on

ears moderate, rounded ; whiskers black at the base, slender, weak; front cut-
ting teeth broad, yellow; grinders very large, much}larger than in Mus bandi-
cota. Hind-foot 1 in. 8 lin. ; skull to back of palate 1 in. 1% lin. ; grinders 45 lines
Jong and 2 lines wide.” (Gray).

1863. | A memoir on the Rats and Mice of India. 333

the abdomen. Wars moderately large : thumb of the fore-feet very minute.
Cutting teeth flat anteriorly, comparatively large, broad and nearly white. Tail
nearly naked, and shorter than the body. Length from snout to root of the
tail, 64 in.; of the tail3 in. Hab. Afghanstin, Pushut. (F. Moore.)

The skin of the body of the specimen was probably a little stretched, and
that of the tail shrunk, if the caudal vertebrae were not retained within it, as is
very commonly the case with skins prepared for stuffing of this group of animals.

All of the foregoing names are applied to animals of a bluff arvi-
coline or vole-like aspect, with tail shorter than the head and body ;
excepting the WZ. rattus et rattoides of Hodgson, which Dr. Gray
refers to JL. indicus as adopted by him, whatever that species may
prove to be, though it does not seem likely to turn out a Wesokia,
and is not classed as such by Dr. Gray.

Mus gBanpicota, Bechstein; founded on the Bandicota Rat of
Pennant’s ‘ Quadrupeds,’ p. 877 ; the name, according to Mr. Elliot,
being a corruption of Pandi-Koku (literally Pig-rat), Telegu, of the
Wuddur caste, S. India:* I. giganteus Hardwicke, VII. p. 306, t.
XVIII. ; I. perchal et ML. malabaricus, (Pennant) Shaw ; MW. tkria,
B. Ham. (éned.) ; MW. nemorivagus, Hodgson, Ann. Mag. N. H. XV.
(1845), p. 206, J. A. S. V. 284, ML. (Neotoma) giganteus, Eliot,
Madr. Journ. Lit. Se. X. 209 (who thus classes it in the same parti-
cular division as the NESOKIA INDICA).

Gen. Hardwicke figures and describes this huge Rat of extraordi-
nary size ; stating that—“ The subject here described and figured was
a female. Its weight was 2 Ibs. 113 oz. Its total length 264 in., of
which the tail measured from root to tip 18in. The male grows larger
and weighs 3 tbs. and upwards.” Hence Mr. Hodgson was induced
to consider his nemorivagus as distinct, beng about one-third smaller.
He gives:—snout to rump 12 in.; tail 93 in.; weight 17 to 20 oz.
“A full grown male,” according to Buchanan Hamilton (JZSS.),
“measures 10,%, in. from nose to tail, and the tail 83 in.” The stuff-
ed specimens in the Society’s collection are from Ceylon ; and mea-
sure :—the head and body about 13 in., and tail (vertebrae) 94 in.
These well agree with Buchanan Hamilton’s published figure.

I find, however, on reference to the late Dr. Kelaart’s Prodromus
Faune Zeylanice, that a large Cinghalese Bandicoot Rat measured

* In Australia, the appellation ‘ Bandicoot’ has been currently adopted for
a genus of small marsupial animals, the Perwmeles of Shaw.

334 A memoir on the Rats and Mice of India. [No. 4,

—‘‘head and body 14 in.; tail 13 in.; weight 2 Tbs. 10 oz. Rarely
are larger specimens found.”

Dr. Kelaart continues—“ The Bandicoot is found in all parts of
the island. Those from Newera Ellia are particularly large, and of
a darker colour than those from the maritime provinces. A speci-
men found in the neighbourhood of Kandy, had a rufous tinge on
the posterior portion of the back.* * * These animals are very de-
structive to grain-crops. At Newera Hllia, they are the farmers’ pest ;
fields of potatoes and beds of peas are much injured by these rapa-
cious creatures ; and the dove-cot and poultry-yards are not exempted
from their attacks. Some classes of Malabars are very partial to the
flesh of these Rats, and they are much sought after by the coolies
on coffee estates, who eat them roasted.”

The late Dr. Cantor includes this species in his catalogue of
the Mammalia inhabiting the Malayan peninsula; but I have
never seen it from the Indo-Chinese region. It inhabits various
parts of India; but I never succeeded in procuring a fresh speci-
men from the vicinity of Calcutta. It is not unusual, however, here
as elsewhere, to hear a full-grown Mus pDecumanus designated a
‘Bandicoot.’ This huge species would seem to be intermediate in
habits as in structure, to M. rnpicus and M. pEcuUMANUs.*

M. setirer, Horsfield, figured in his Zoological Researches in
Java: MW. giganteus juv. Temminck, apud Gray. “ Allied to the M.
BANDICOTA, hut clearly distinct as a species.” Horsfield’s Catalogue.
Inhabits Sumatra, Jéva and Borneo: and Dr. Cantor gives it from
the Malayan peninsula (Penang), J. A. 8S. XV. 254. “ The larger
of two individuals, captured in gardens, measured :—head and body
102 in.; tail 72 in.” (Cantor.) In his Br. Mus. Catal., Dr. Gray
mentions a‘ black variety,’ anda “ brownish variety with face brown”
from Tasmania! In the ‘ Zoology’ of the voyage of the ‘Samarang,’
Dr. Gray has attempted a Conspectus of the Zoology of the Malayan
peninsula and islands, wherein he includes but five species of Mus;
viz., M. serirer,—M. panpicora, from the Malayan peninsula, Java,
and Sumatra, M. pecumanus, Pallas from Java, Sumatra, Banda,
Borneo, Celebes, Amboyna, Timor, Malayan peninsula (Penang).

* A “specimen, from Egypt,” is given in the Br. Mus. Catal., as the Egyp-
tian Bandicoot, M. cieas.

1863. | A memoir on the Rats and Mice of India. 335

M. nurescens, Gray, apud Gray (flavescens, Elliot), from Penang,
on the authority of Cantor; and M. musounus (?) apud Cantor, from
Penang. We possess two specimens from Malacea, which bear con-
siderable resemblance to each other except in size; but one is cer-
tainly not the young of the other, as shewn by the comparative size
of the feet. Had they been of the same species, the feet of the small-
er specimen would have been considerably larger. The larger of the
two is perhaps the young of M. seTIFER; measuring about 64 in.
long: tail 5} in.: hind-foot 1,4 in.: auricles of medium size, naked:
tail with close rings fringed with short sets: fur rather coarse on the
upper parts, approaching to the spinous character, and the soft un-
der-fur not shewing at the surface ; of an uniform yellowish rufescent
brown above, a little paler below, passing into dull albescent on the
throat: the whiskers reach to beyond the ears, and are of a shining
dark brown colour ; and there are only a few fine long hairs protruding
beyond the general surface of the fur of the back; the smaller speci-
men appears to be the young of M. RopusTULUS, nobis, and is doubt-
less the M. RuFEScHNS apud Cantor; but its fur tends somewhat
unusually to be weakly spinous. The general colour is of a dull
murim-brown above, slightly albescent below, passing to dull white
on the throat. Length of head and body about 43 in.; and of
hind-foot 1% in., Mws setifer is included in M. ? of H. L. Layard’s ‘ List
of the Mammalia observed in Ceylon,’ Ann. Lag. N. H., 2nd series,
VII. (1851), p. 405; but not in Dr. Kelaart’s Prodromus Faune.*

Mus pecumanvs, Pallas, Glires, 91; Buffon, H. NV. VIII. ¢. 27:
MM. javanus, Pallas, apud Schinz, JZ norvegicus, Buffon. To this
species Dr. Gray refers (with a mark of doubt), in his Catalogue of
Mr. Hodgson’s collection, the Jf. decumanoides, Hodgson, (nec Water-
house, nee Horsfield), which does not appear to have been described ;
also MZ. brunneus, Hodgson, Ann. Mag. N. H. XV. (1845), 267;
described as follows ;

‘Mus brunmeus, H. Common house rat of Nepal. As nearly allied to decu-
MANUS AS Nemorivagus is to the Bandicoot, [%. e. identical]; above rusty-brown ;
below rusty, more or less albescent. Hxtremities pale, fleshy-white nearly.
Tail barely longer than the head and body. Long piles sufficiently numerous,

* Another species has been (or is to be) described from those islands, by the
same naturalist, as M. pALMARUM. I have not seen any description. The name
would indicate the habits of Mus rurescens.

20

336 A memoir on the Rats and Mice of India. [No. 4,

but not rigid. Snout to vent 95 in.; tail 9} im.; head 24 in.; ears 1 im. ; palma
Zin.; plantal? in.; weight 12 to 15 oz. (Hodgson).”

“<M. bruaneusculus, H. Lesser Brown Rat of Nepal. Closely resemblirg the
last, but considerably smaller, as proved by numberless specimens: above
rusty-brown, below rusty. Extremities pale. Snout to vent 8% in.; tail 9 in.;
head 24; ears 1; palma —?; planta —?; weight9 to10 oz.” (This as before
remarked, Dr. Gray assigns dubiously to M. rnpicus, Geoffroy, apud Gray ; nec
M. indicus apud nos.)

In the Ann. Mag. N. H., N.S. XVI. (1855), p. 112, Dr. Horsfield

describes :—

“ Mus tarayensis, Hodgson. Nearly allied to M. brunneusculus. Colour of the
body and head above, dark brown, delicately variegated with blackish and
rufous hairs; a very slight gloss on the surface. Outer sides of the extremities,
rather darker. Under parts from the chin to the vent, and inner parts of the
extremities, greyish-brown, with arusty shade, Tail shorter than the body,
tapering to an abrupt tip.* Head lengthened and compressed, muzzle gradu-
ally tapering to an abrupt tip— Distinguishing character. A dark-brown surface
with a slight gloss. Head lengthened. Tail shorter than the body. Underneath
rusty-grey. Mr. Hodgson’s collection,’ continues Dr. Horsfield, “ contains
only a single specimen, and further observations are required to confirm the
distinctness of this species.”

Mus prurtmammis, Hodgson, ibid. “* Colour above, brown, with a rufescent
shade; fur soft, consisting of brown and rufous hairs intermixed in equal pro-
portions, forming an uniform upper surface; a rather obscure band extending
from the gape over the cheek, terminating under the ears; and the abdomen
and adjoining parts, rufous-grey. Head proportionally short, muzzle abrupt,
ears moderate. ‘Tail equal in length to the body, tapering to a sharp point, and
minutely annulated. Length of the head 23 in.; of the body from the neck
to the snout 53; of the tail the same.”

“The distineuishing character, according to Mr. Hodgson,’ remarks Dr.
Horsfield, “rests on the number of teats exceeding that of other species; but
the number is not stated!” This is perhaps a GOLUNDA ?

Dr. Kelaart called “the attention of observers to a yellow reddish-brown
variety of the common house Rat, found at Trincomali and Batticaloa which
may probably,” he suggested, “be the Mus decwmanoides of Hodgson :—this
Rat may be thus described ;—above, dark yellowish-brown, with long thin
black hairs. Beneath, dingy, or yellowish-ash, with a few long grey hairs:
Shorter fur of the back very similar to that of I. rufescens, (Gray, v. flavescens,
Elliot) ; but much darker and of a slight rufous or reddish shade on the ramp
and posterior limbs. Base of hairs ash. Feet brown; soles purplish. Length
of head and body 7% in.; tail 8} in.; planta 1,13, in. This is the common

* Qu. Mutilated and healed? E£. B.

1863. | A memoir on the Rats and Mice of India. 337

house Rat of Trincomali, smaller than the Mus prcumaNnus,* of which we have
seen only afew specimens in Trincomali, where itis rare in houses in the
town; but abundant in the dock-yard. Mus DECUMANUS is not very common in
the hilly parts of the island: other Rats seem to replace it altogether on still
higher parts. At Newera Ellia, where we resided for seven months, not one
was observed. But it will not be long, ere the Brown Rat will find its way
there also. (Prodromus Faune Zeylowice, pp. 60-1.)

Dr. Kelaart zlso describes—

“Mus ceytonus, Kelaart. Fur soft, lead colour; hair of upper parts tipped
with dark fawn and black. Hars large, naked. Whiskers tinged black, Tail
longer than the head and body, scaly. Head and body 4 in.; tail6 in. This
small Rat is found in out-houses in the cinnamon gardens at Colombo. I have
no reason to think it to be the young of the former species. The teeth were
well developed. The darker colour and long tail will easily distinguish this
species from other Colombo Rats.” (Ibid., p. 61.)

The common European Brown Rat is nowhere a more intolerable
nuisance than in Calcutta and its vicinity: but it is not generally
distributed over the interior of the country. In 8. India Mr. Elliot
states that “it is not so common above the Ghats as below.” Col.
Sykes, however, states that “the Norway or Brown Rat abounds in
Dukhun.” I observed it to be very numerous at Akyab; but fur-
ther south, at Rangoon and Moulmein, also in Tavoy and Mergui,
I remarked no traces of it; nor have we ever received specimens from
that line of coast; though Dr. Cantor gives it from Penang, and
notes it as “ cosmopolita.” Other sites in the intertropical Hastern
Archipelago are noted in p. 834; and the nuisance that Dr. Kane found
this species to be in the course of his arctic explorations is sufficient-
ly described in his most interesting narrative. In N. America, Mr.
Catlin describes its first appearance among the wigwams of the far
west, where its advent was rather hailed at first by the red men, on
account of its attacking and destroying the indigenous Murionss;
but it fast proved to be by far the greater pest of the two, and soon
domiciled itself as completely among the red men as elsewhere.
According to Fischer, this noxious animal was introduced into Eurepe
about the year 1730, and the current statement is that it originated.
in Persia or its vicinity; if so, it should at least have spread into

* « A large Brown Rat at Colombo measured, the head and body 10 in., and
tail 11 in.” (Kelaart.) A specimen with which he favored the Society ag an
example of his small house Rat of Trincomali appears to me to be a half-erown
M. nemorauis! and a tailless specimen irom Newera Hllia appears to be quite
sunilar,

2 2,

338 A memoir on the Rats and Mice of India. [No. 4,

Afghanstan, where, according to Capt. 'T. Hutton, it would seem to
be unknown in Kandahar (J. A. S. XV. 140). According to Mr.
F. T. Buckland, “it made its appearance in Paris about the middle
of the eighteenth century, and in England not many years earlier.
It is now agreed by most naturalists,” remarks this author, “that it
is a native of India and Persia; that it spread onwards into Eu-
ropean Russia, and was thence transferred by merchant-ships to Eng-
land and elsewhere.” (Curiosities of Natural History, 5th Edit.
p- 62.)

If an indigenous ixhabitant of India, it would undoubtedly be
more generally diffused over this, if not also the neighbouring coun-
tries. I suspect that the trans-Baikalian region of KH. Asia has at least
as good a claim to the discredit of originating the abominable Brown
Rat asany other. Mus pzcumanus is included in the list of Mamma-
lia inhabiting the Amur territories by Mr. H. G. Ravenstein, in his
‘Russians on the Amur,’ &c., (1861), p. 316; and again, at p. 323,
“Tt is owing to the rapacity of the Mus pecumanus that the Tun-
guzians build their store-house on four poles, to keep the contents
beyond its reach ; and among the Goldi the Manchus are nicknamed
‘Sungari,’ 7. e. Fats, on account of the rapacity with which they
exact tribute.” Whatever the extremes of temperature and climate,
Mus DECUMANUS contrives to find itself a home, and to increase and
multiply about human abodes and granaries, to the serious detriment
of not quite all-subduing man! Calcutta specimens are undistinguish-
able from British ; and I observe no marked difference in one receiv-
ed from Amoy, except that it is in finer pelage and rather brighter

coloured than usual.

M. pecomanotess, Temminck (nec Hodgson), is given in Dr,
Horsfield’s Catalogue of the Mammalia in the India House Museum:
“two specimens, from Bengal, presented by Gen. T. Hardwicke.”
I have seen no description. Surely not JL. nemoralis, nobis ?

Mus narrvs, L. (Buffon, H. WV. VII. 278, t. 36.) ‘The European
Black Rat I have only seen from vessels in the port of Calcutta, which
differs in no respect from others received from France. Mr. Elliot,in his
‘ Catalogue of Mammalia in the Southern Mahratta country’ notes it as
“rare,” and Mr. Layard includes it from Ceylon, where Dr. Kelaart ob-

tained one individual in a house, in Trincomali, remarking that he had

1863. | A memoir on the Rats and Mice of India. 339

not seen it from any other part of the island. “No doubt,” he adds,
the Black Rat has been introduced by ships which frequent the vari-
ous ports of the island.” This, and not M. prcuMANUS, Is said to
be the species which has overrun New Zealand, and is there suppos-
ed to have exterminated the frugivorous native Rat of the country,
stated to have been of frugivorous habits.* The J. ratius v. ratioides
of Hodgson, Dr. Gray refers to M. inpicus, Geoffroy. I% is thus
described.

“<M. rattoides, H. Black Rat of Nepal ag similar to the Black Rat of Hurope,

as the foregoing, [M. brunneusculus, | is to our Brown Rat, and bearing in Nepal

the same relation the one to the other as in Hurope. Above, dusky or blackish
brown; below, dusky hoary. Limbs dark, fingers pale ; tail decidedly longer than

the body and head; long piles sufficiently numerous. Snout to vent 7% in. ,

z3 weight 5 to 7 oz.”

tail 8$; head 17 ; ears §; palma 12; planta 15

Specimens presented by Mr. Hodgson to the British Museum are marked as
«A. B. Reddish, bad state. C.B. Rather brown, not good state. G.I. Three
skulls, J? Var. darker, with whitish bristles, no hind-feet. MW. brunneusculus,
Hodgson H. (?)”

* Referring, however, to the ‘ Mauna of New Zealand’ in Dieffenbach’s work,
I find that he cites Mus rarrus, L., with a note of doubt; and adds—‘‘ It would
be interesting to see whether it is the Huropean, the Indian, or the New Holland
Rat, that has been introduced, or if there may not be more than one kind.”
What he means by the Hwropean or the Indian Ratis not so clear. But he adds
—‘ There exists a frugivorous native Rat, called Kiore maori (indigenous Rat)
by the natives, which they distinguish from the Hnglish Rat, (not the Norway
Rat), which is introduced, and called Kiore pakia (strange Rat). On the former
they fed very largely m former times; but it has now become so scarce, owing
to the extermination carried on against it by the Huropean Rat, that I could
never obtain one. A few, however, are still found in the interior, viz., at Rotu-
rua, where they have been seen by the Rev. Mr. Chapman, who described them
as being much smaller than the Norway Rat. The natives never eat the latter,
It is a favorite theme with them to speculate on their own extermination by the
Huropeans, in the same manner as the English Rat has exterminated their indi-
genous Rat.” (Dieflenbach’s Travels in New Zealand, &ec., 11. 185.)

Mr. ¥. T. Buckland, however, qucting the Field newspaper, on the subject of
the imported Rat of New Zealand, mentions that ‘‘ with the exception of a
small species of Rat, now nearly extinct, having been all but exterminated by
the importation of the common Norway Rat, there is not a single indigenous ani-
mal [mammal] in the country; the Rats have become a serious nuisance.”
(Vide, however, p. 168 antea regarding a small aquatic furred quadruped not
improbably an ORNITHCRHYNCHUS.)

Of Mus ravrus, Mr. Buckland writes—“ The Black Rat, or as it is sometimes
called the old English Rat, does not seem to be an aboriginal occupier of the
British soil. The earliest mention of it is by Genver, in his Historia Animaliwm,
published at Zurich ubout the year 1687. tis probable that it was introduced
into Britain from FWrance, the Welsh name for it being to this day, as I have it
from a gentleman of Welsh extraction [lyyoden Frenziz,—the ‘* french mouse,’ ”
Certainly, the remains of neither Mus ravrus nor of M. pEcuMANUS have been
found fossil in the British island, as those of ARVICOLA AMPHIBLA are so abund-
antly,

340 A memoir on the Rats and Mice of India. [No. 4,

In a late No. of the Proceedings of the Linnzan Society* it is shewn
that, in London, the M. pecumanvs, M. rarrus, and M. anexanpgt-
NuSs, interbreed and commingle, yielding fertile hybrids of all degrees
of intermediateness.

Mus Anpamanensis, Blyth, J. A, S. XXIX.108. IL Nicobari-
cus (?) Scherzer, ‘ Zoology of Novara Expedition.’

The indigenous Rat of the Andaman Islands. Length about 8 in.;
tail the same; ears much as in M. pEcumanus. ‘The fur a shade
darker on the back than in that species, paler on the sides, and dull
white below; the long piles at once distinguished by their flattened
spinous character, which is also slightly the case in M. narrus,
though much less conspicuously than in the present species. It
would appear to be a burrower in the ground.

There are certain Indian Rats with the tail longer than the head
and body, of arboreal habits, building nests in the branches of trees,
never burrowing in the ground, and when they enter houses, (the
commonest Bengal species (M. RUFESCENS) at least,) very commonly
hide or attempt to hide during the day, in the jilmils or venetian
blinds of apartments. The largest of these I have termed,—

M. nemorauts, Blyth, J. 4. 8S. XX. 168. This resembles the
next, except in being considerably larger, much less rufescent above,
and the under parts are merely paler or dull greyish brown, occasion-
ally somewhat albescent. Length about 8} in., tail 95 in., hind-
foot 14 in. Inhabits Lower Bengal and also Ceylon.

Mus rurescens, Gray, W. N. H., N.S., I. (1837), p. 585, apud
Gray, though the description does not apply, and the tail is stated to
be shorter than the head and body, whereas the reverse is the case.

* Proc. Lin. Soc., Feb. 6th, 1862, p. 66: also Zoologist, p. 7983.

4 Mi. RUFESCENS, Gray. House Rat [!] Fur pale brown; beneath, yellowish-
grey. Under fur lead coloured, with numerous slender brown bristles, marked
with a deep central channel, ending in a black hair-point ; of the chin and under
sides, softer, with whitish slender bristles. Tail nearly as long as the body [!],
with rather small square scales, and very short hairs. Feet brown; claws white,
covered with white hairs. Length of the body and head 63 in.; tail 5; in. [!],
hind-foot 14 in. ; to base of thumb 7% lines. Inhabits India.”

It is utterly impossible to recognise the species from the foregoing description.
On the same occasion Dr. Gray described—

“WM. Astaticus, Gray. Pale brown blackish, varied. Hars large, nakedish.
Cheeks, chin and beneath, greyish. Whiskers elongate, black, Tail as long as
the body and head, with short adpressed black hairs, longer and more abundant
near the tip. Cutting teeth smooth, and yellow in front. Thumb of fore-feet
quite rudimentary, slightly clawed. Sole of hind-feet bald to the heel, with six
tubercles; outer hinder largest. Heel narrow, one-third the length of the foot,

1863. | A memoir on the Rats and Mice of India. B41

M. flavescens et rufus, Elliot; M. arboreus, B. Ham., Horsfields,
Catalogue, and figured by this name in one of B. Hamilton’s unpub-
lished coloured drawings; (vide J. A. S., XX. 168) ; I. montanus,
Kandianus, et tetragonurus, Kelaart J. A. S8., XX. 169,185. In
general about 7 in. long, with tail 8 to 83 in. Colour rufescent, brown
above, white or yellowish white beneath, mostly abruptly separated
from the hue above, and rarely gradually blending. Inhabits per-
haps all india, with Ceylon, also China ;* and as Mr. Hodgson could
searcely but have met with it in the valley of Nepal, I take the
following also to refer to it.

Mus Caudatior, Hodgson ; described in Horsfield’s Catalogue of the Mamma-
jia in the H. I. Museum, p. 144, “ Above, chesnut-brown with a rufous shade,
more clear and passing into reddish on the rump; underneath from the chin to
the vent, with interior of the thighs, white, with a very slight yellowish shade.
Muzzle rather sharp, ears proportionally long. Body and head, 5% in. long;
tail, in the prepared specimen, 6 in.” (A young individual?) “Tail exceeding
the body in length,’ Hodgson, Ann. Mag. N. H., 2nd series, III. (1849) p. 203.

The Mus PatMarvM, Scherzer, from the Nicobar islands, probably
belongs to this group.

M. cinnamomeus, Blyth, J. A. S., XXVIII. 294. “Like IL fla-
vescens, but smaller, with proportionally longer tail and softer fur,
of a fine bright cinnamon colour, with mconspicuous black tips, the

under-parts white, which is abruptly divided from the cinnamon hue
above. Length of head and body about 6 in., the tail 7 in., and

The ball of the outer toes rather less than half the distance from the front of
the foot. Inhabits India.’ Dimensions not stated.

In the Brit. Mus. Cat. p, 109, specimens are recorded from Mexico and Bahia!
Another is stated to have been received from India, on which the description
was founded.

Dr. Kelaart gives a Mus asraticus, Gray, with a note of doubt. ‘‘ Head and
body (of a full grown enciente female) 6 in.; tail 5z in. Fur soft; above, pale
brown mixed with black; sides, ashy-grey. Beneath, pure white, but not so
defined as in MUs RUFESCENS (fiavescens, Wiliot) ; tail rather thin, shorter than the
head and body. LHars large, slightly villous. Limbs slender. Geographical
distribution, India, Ceylon.”

In Dr. Kelaart’s Prodromus Faune Zeylanice we have Mus flavescens, Hlliot
(syn. M. rufescens, Gray, and M. rufus, Elliot), with var. rufo flavescens (syn. VM.
tetragonwrus, Kelaart); also var. Kandianus (syn. M. Kandiawus, Kelaart) ; and
M. nemoralis, Blyth (erroneously described, syn. M. arboreuws ? apud Kelaart).
Specimens of all these were received in the Society's Museum from Dr. Kelaart,
and may he positively referred to M. RuFEScENS, Gray, (apud Gray). It is
therefore useless to quote his descriptions ; but he also sent the true M. NEMoRA-
Lis, nobis, of which I take his “small house Rat of Trimcomali” to be a half
grown example.

* We have a Chinese specimen, presented by R. Swinhoe, Esq.

342 A memoir on the Rats and Mice of India. [No. 4,

hindfoot 13 in.” Two specimens received from the late Major Berd-
more, of Schwe Gyen, on the Sitang river, which separates Pegu
from Martaban. ‘The upper parts of this species are as brightly
coloured as in the British Dormouse (Myoxus AVELLENARIUS), or
scarcely less so.

Mus NIVIVENTER, Hodgson, J. A. 8., V. 234; Ann. Mag. N. #7,
XV. (1845), p. 267, a house Rat. Proportions and characters of the
last [rattoides |, but tail rather shorter, and long piles of the pelage
rarer. Size less. Above, blackish brown, shaded with rufous; below,
entirely pure white, tail and all. Snout to vent 54 in. Kail 6 in.
weight 4 to 5 oz., of rare occurrence in Nepal.* Col. Tytler ee
two specimens in spirit from Masuri, which I have considered to be
this, and have noticed in J. A. S., XXVIII. 295, as “a well marked
species, rather larger than as originally described.” A male measur-
ing 6 in. long, with tail 7 in., and hind-foot nearly 1§ in., female
even larger or 7 in. long, with tail 73 in. Two specimens, from
Landour, I have supposed to be of this race ; but they are very like
M. RnvurEscens, only with coarser and sub-spinous fur of duller colour-
ing, and the minute setz on the tail are dusky-brown.}

Mus ropustunus, nobis, J. A. 8., XXVIII. 294; also M. Ruress-
cENS, Gray (?), var ? ibid. ; and (1 te an M. RUFESCENS, auct. of
Burma and Penang, auctorum: JZ. ratius, brown var, apud nos, J.
A. S., XVII. 559 (?) perhaps also WL. Berdmorei, nobis, J. A. S., XX.
173. The common Rat of Lower Pegu and the Tenasserim provin-
es, taken about houses at night, but I think not a burrower. The
description of M. RoBUSTULUS was taken from a particularly fine speci-
men preserved in spirit; much like M. ruFusceEns, but the upper
parts are darker and less rufescent, and the tail about equals the
head and body in length. One example procured in the vicinity of
Calcutta, or perhaps this should rather be regarded as a variety of
M. RUFESCENS.

* In J, A. 8. V. 234, it is thus described ** Above, saturate black-brown ; be-
low, pure white, tail considerably longer than the body, and paled on the inferior
surface.”

+ “ Dark brown; the cutting teeth very narrow and slender; hind-feet slend-
er, 1 in. Length ‘of. head and body, 64 in.” (Gray, in Cat. of Mr. Hodgson’s
specimens), Probably, therefore, not the same as the above; the fore teeth of
which are of the usual breadth, and the hind-foot measures 12 in. ( ,..,..... ?
Specimens.)

1863. | A memoir on the Rats and Mice of India. 343

M., Berdmorei is thus described—“ Length about a foot, of which
the tail is not quite half. Lars posteriorly 2 in. Hind-foot 12 in.
Fur shortish, even coarse and hispid, but not spinous, of one quality,
with no long hairs intermixed. Its colour grizzled grey, [dull brown]
above, unmixed with rufous, below and on the feet, white. Roden-
tial tusks white. Tail rather more copiously clad than usual with long
hairs.” (EH. B.) We have three specimens from Mergui, neither of
which accords well with either of the others. One bad skin is de-
cidedly M. ropustuLvus; that of J. Berdmorei has peculiarly hispid
fur; and the third (entire in spirit) has dark upper-parts and very
white lower-parts, also smaller front-teeth.

Mus wnitipus, Hodgson, Ann. Mag. N. H., XV. (1845), p. 267.
“ Distinguished for its smooth coat or pelage, wherein the long hairy
piles are almost wanting. Itis a house Rat, like M. Nivivenrsr,
but much rarer, and frequents the mountains rather than the valleys.
Structure nearest to ratéoides, and colour very similar to that or
dusky brown above and dusky-hoary below. Long piles 12 in. long;
basally horny, apically black. Short piles cinereous below, with pale
rufous tips. Snout to vent 6} in. ; tail 7} in.; head 141 in.; ears 3
in. ; palma (with nail) 14 in.; weight 33 oz.” We have several speci-
mens of what I take to be this Rat from Darjiling: they are especi-
ally distinguished by the fineness and softness of the fur. One speci-
men only of eight, from Darjiling, which I refer to this species has
the lower-parts pure white, abruptly defined ; but it is obviously of the
same species as the other, and one supposed Mus RUFESCENS from
China (J. A. S.), seems really not to differ, except in being not
full grown. :

Mus nortetes, Hodgson, Ann. Mag. N. H., XV. (1845), p. 268.
“‘ Dwells in houses and out-houses. A small land species with fine
pelage, and no peculiarity of physiognomy or proportion. Tail long-
er than the animal. Colour above, sordid brown; below, sordid white.
Snout to rump 4 in.; tail 44; head 14; ears;,; palma 3; planta 14.”
Hodgson.

Mus FULVESCcENS, Gray, Catalogue of Mr. Hodgson’s specimens,
p. 18. “Fur pale fulvous, hair very soft, lead coloured, with bright
yellow tips, and interspersed slender black bristles ; throat, belly, and
beneath, pure white ; tail elongate, nearly bald; cutting teeth nar-

Zs

344 A memoir on the Rats and Mice of India. [No. 4,

row ; skull about 1in., 2 lin. ; hind-feet about lin.” (Gray). No other
measurements given! “ Nepal.”

Mvs Z#QUIcAUDALIS, Hodgson, described in Horsfield’s Cata-
logue, p. 144. “ Pure dark brown above, with a very slight cast of
rufescent in a certain aspect ; underneath, from the chin to the vent
with interior of the thighs, yellowish-white. ars nearly an inch
long; head proportionally long. Dimensions from the snout to the
root of the tail, 83 in.; tail in the living animal, equal in length to
the body ; head 25 in.” (Hodgson.)

Of all of the foregoing species or races described by Mr. Hodgson,
carefully prepared specimens are most acceptable; and residents in
the hill-stations should be able to identify at least some of them, and
so help to elucidate such distinctions as may really exist among them.

Mvs concotor, nobis, J. A. 8., XXVIII. 295 (the young) ; and
M. (unnamed), p. 294 zbed., (the adult). Common small thatch Rat
of Pegu and Tenasserim provinces. This species conducts from the
long-tailed Arboreal Rats to the ordinary house Mice. Certain Arboreal
Mice that are diminutives of the former constitute the VANDELEURIA
of Gray Ann. Mag. N. H., X. (1842), p. 265: such are—

Mus oneracevs, Bennett, P. Z. 8. 1832, p. 121: AL. oleraceus et
(olim) longicaudatus, Klliot; Jf. dumeticola, Hodgson, and the
young (?), IL. povensis, H., Ann. Mag. N. H., XV. (1845) 268-9,
also J. dwmecolus, Hodgson, (undescribed). Length about or nearly
6 in.; tail 4 to 44 in.* Ofa bright pale chesnut hue; below, white.
“Constructs its nest of oleraceous herbs in the fields.’’ (Sykes).
Specimens from Asam and from the Deyra Doon are absolutely simi-
lar to others from 8. India; and as Hodgson’s descriptions of a
Nepalese Mouse also accord, I infer that his species differs in no
respect. “Tenants woods and coppices.”’ (Hodgson).

Mus panvivs, Blyth, J. A. 8., XXVIII. 295. Like M. oLeRAcEtvs,
but the eye fully twice as large, and black whiskers; colour of the
upper-parts a more rufous chesnut or cinnamon hue; of the lower-
parts white, almost pure. Length of a female 3 in. to base of tail ;
the tail 4$ in.; and hind-foot 3 in. Received from Schwe Gyen.}

* A Deyra Doon example in spirit measured 23 in., with tail 43 in.

+ We have a small rufous Mouse in spirit, which I suspect is from Kashmir,
or otherwise trans-Himalayan. I cannot distinguish it from M. minutus, Pallas
(vide Messorius, White, &c.), also in spirit from England.

1863. | A memoir on the Rats and Mice of India. 345

Mus exvrrorpes, Blyth, J. 4d. S. XXIV. 721. “This has very
much the aspect of the British Dormouse (Myoxus AVELLANARI-
US) ; but what little remains of the tail of the only specimen sent is
nude, and the colouring is much less bright, though inclining to the
same hue. It would seem to represent a very distinct division of
the genus Mus; but the specimen is evidently young, and more and
better examples are needed for a satisfactory examination. Fur ex-
ceedingly dense and fine, nearly $ in., long upon the back, and of a
light brown colour tinged with fawn externally, the piles dusky-ash
for the basal two-thirds or more; lower parts white, very faintly
tinged with fawn ; the white purest about the lips and chin: whiskers
long, copious and fine (like those of Myoxus AvELLANaARIUS) : feet
large and clad scantily with white hairs ; but a distinct dark brown
mark upon each hind-foot, reaching almost to the division of the
toes: ears rather small, ovoid and naked. Length of head and body
2 in.; tail
Cherra Punji.

Mus pecuensis, Blyth, J. dA. S. XXVIII. 295. “ A field Mouse with
tail longer than the head and body, well clad with hairs that become
longer to theend. Length to base of tail 34 in.; of tail 32 in. ; ear-

2; ears posteriorly 13 in.; and tarsa 3 in.” From

conch 4 in.; and hind-foot #in. These are the measurements of a
female in spirit. A stuffed male has the tail (vertebra) 44 im. Fur
very full and dense, pale fulvescent olive-brown on the upper-parts,
slightly yellowish-white below: whiskers remarkably long.” Not
much unlike M. syivaTicus in appearance, but the tail longer and
very conspicuously hairy towards the end, indeed more so throughout
than in any other mouse I know of, as especially seen when held up
to the light; but it does not appear to be specially akin to the Ha-
PALOMYS LONGICAUDATUS, nobis, J. A. S. XXVIII. 296. Both
were received from Schwe Gyen, on the Sitang river.

The series next following consists chiefly or wholly of house Mice.
Mts ursanus, Hodgson, Ann. Mag. N. H., XV. (1845), p. 269:
M. dubius (?) H., ibid. p. 268: JL musculus apud Elliot et Kelaart :
M. mami, Gray (undescribed). “The common house Mouse of India
generally, with Ceylon. Species usually found in the city of Kat-

Of the diminutive species from China noticed in J. A. S. XXIX. 90, the speci-
men has been lost or mislaid by one of our taxidermists, to whom I gave the
skin to be mounted,

Ds 3.6)

346 A memoir on the Rats and Mice of India. [No. 4,

mandoo: allied to dubius in its proportions and colours, and possibly
dubius may be the immature. Above, embrowned ruddy-luteous ;
below, luteous, more or less rufescent. Feet paler. Snout to rump
22 in.; tail 32 in.; head 1, in.; ears 5% in.; palma 3 in.; planta
3 in.; weight 3 oz.” (Hodgson).* “On comparing fine specimens
of the common English mouse in spirit with equally fine examples
of the Indian house mouse, it is seen that M. Muscunus has con-
spicuously larger ears, much smaller eyes, broader paws, and the tail
is one-fourth shorter, measuring 3 in., in Muscunus and 4 in. in
Urnsanus. The fur again is of very different texture,” J. A. 8.
XXVIII. 296. This animal has been received from Port Blair, where
doubtless recently introduced.

Mus nomourvus, Hodgson, Ann. Mag. N. H., XV. (1845), p. 268.
M. Nipalensis, ., J. A. S. X. 915, (undescribed). “The common
house mouse of the Himalaya hill-stations, from the Panjab to Dar-
jiling.” “ Distinguished by a tail equal to the animal, being usually
quite equal, but sometimes rather less. Coloured like precumanus
but purer, or rufescent brown above, and rufescent white below.
Hands and feet fleshy white. Snout to rump 34 in.; tail 32 in.;
head 1); in.; ears ,%; in.; palma —?; planta —?; weight 3 oz. It
has eight teats only in the females? ‘The other Mice have ten and
the Rats twelve.” (Hodgson). “ As compared with the European M.
MuscuLuS, the fur is much more Gerbille-like in character, the piles
less dense and sinuous.” (J. A. S. XXVIII. 295.) |

Mus crassipes, Blyth, J. d. 8S. XXVIII. 295. “Like the pre-
ceding, but with the tail rather longer than the head and body.
Length 2¢ in., tail 34 in.; hind-foot 7 in.” “The feet particularly
large, and, like the tail, well furnished with coarse short sete. From
Maswei.” Described from a specimen in spirit belonging to Col. Tytler.

Mvs Tyrrenri, Blyth, J. dA. 8. XXVIII. 296. “Length 22 in. ;
tail the same (having about 24 vertebra). Fur unusually long and
full, of a pale sandy mouse colour above, isabelline below, and pale
on the well clad limbs and also on the tail laterally and underneath.
Whiskers exceedingly fine in texture, and of a whitish colour. Male

* M. dubius, H., “a house Mouse, but also found in out-houses and gardens
rarely allied to dumeticola [oleraceus| by its long tail. Above, dusky brown,
touched with fawn; below, sordid fawn. Snout to rump 24 in. ; tail 4 in. ; head
% in.; ear $ in.; weight 2 oz,” (Hodgson.)

1863. | A memoir on the Rats and Mice of India. 347

from Deyra Doon,” also described from a specimen in spirit belong-
ing to Col. Tytler.

Mus sactrianus, Blyth, J. 4d. 8S. XV. 140. “ Presents a very
close approximation to M. MuscuLUs in size, proportions and
structure, inclusive of the conformation of the skull; but the fur is
much denser and longer, and its colouring absolutely resembles that
of a pale specimen of GERBILLUS INDICUS, except that there is no
whitish about the eyes, nor is the crown of a deeper hue, and the tail
is thinly clad with short pale hairs to the end.* * * The entire un-
der parts and feet are white; and the upper-parts light isabelline,
with dusky extreme tips to the hairs, and their basal two-thirds deep
ashy.”’ (B.) :—The common house Mouse of Kandahar ; but the house
Rat is, I believe, unknown there: at least so all my informants agreed
in stating, and I certainly never saw one, although for two years I
was in charge of extensive grain godowns, which would naturally have
attracted them had any existed.” (Hutton.) Syn? JW. gerbillinus,
nobis, J. A. S. XXII, 410, and MW. TVheobaldi, nobis, J. A. V,
XXII. 583.

IM. gerbillinus. Entire length.of male 5 in., of which the tail is

2 in. Hind-foot $ in., ear-conch barely } in. Female rather smaller.
Fur of mean length, of a sandy-brown colour on the upper-parts,
white below and on the limbs, which latter have a faint tinge of
the colour of the back. About twenty-five caudal vertebre. ‘Tail
thinly clad with minute sete.” From Pind Dadun Khan.

M. Theobaldi. “ake WM. gerbillinus [BactRianus], but larger,
with comparatively shorter tail and larger feet. Dimensions of an
adult female—Length of head and body 2% in.; tail 23 in.; ears $
in.; tars and toes 13 in.” From Kashmir.

M. nitipunus, Blyth, J. A. S. XXVIII. 294. “A house mouse
apparently, with tail equal to the head and body, and uniformly
furnished with minute setz to the end; ears large and ample. To-
tal length 6% in.; hind-feet a little exceeding # in.; and ears (poste-
riorly) .®; in. Colour nearly that of M. prcumanvs, with the under
parts subdued white tolerably well defined. Of the same subgroup
as M. muscunus* and M. urpanus,” but with the front-teeth con-
spicuously larger. Received from Schwe Gyen, on the Sitang river.

* Perhaps M. muscuuus (?), L., apud Cantor, from Penang; J. A. S. XV. 254.
“In colours, this slightly differs from the European Mouse, the upper parts

348 A memo on the Rats and Mice of India. [ No. 4,

Mus cunicuparis, Blyth, J. A. S. XXIV. 721. “A small
field (?) mouse remarkable for its ample ears, and tail shorter than
the head and body. Length of head and body 23 in.; of tail 2% in. ;
ears posteriorly § in.; and hind-foot 13 in. Colour of a wild Rabbit
(LEPUS CUNICULUS) ; above, below white; and the feet with brownish
hairs above, but with white hairs upon the toes: tail conspicuously
ringed, the sete minute and inconspicuous.” From Cherra Punji.

Mus Darsrntincensis, Hodgson, described in Horsfleld’s Cata-
logue. “ Above dusky brown with a slight chesnut reflection ; under-
neath pale yellowish white. Snout to vent 3 in.; ears long; tail 24

in. Proportions of body, tail and extremities, comparatively slender.”
(Horsfield).

Movs eryrurotis, Blyth, J. d. S. XXIV. 721. “Another and
very different form of mouse from [M. exrrorpEs], and equally from
the common house mouse. Length of head and body 24 in.; tail 22
in.; and consisting of about 26 vertebree: ears small and hairy, } in.,
long externally : hind-foot and claws +4 in. Fur long and very dense ;
of a rich dark brown colour, grizzled, and brightly tinged with ru-
fous or rufo-ferruginous towards the tail and upon the ears conspi-
cuously : lower parts albescent, tinged with fawn: feet with brown
hairs upon their upper surface; and the tail considerably hirsute,
From Cherra Punji.

The ordinary field Mice of India have the tail shorter than the
head and body, the fur not spinous, and white or pale lower parts
abruptly separated from the colour of the back. Such are—

Mos Inrratineatvs, Elhot, WZ. 8. MM. Hott, Gray, (undescrib-
ed, nec Golunda Ellioti, Gray,) Br. Mus. Catal. Mamm., p. 110. The
largest of the group. Length about 5 inches ; and tail 44 in. ; hind-
foot 13, in. Light fulvous brown above, white below, with a mark
on the chest of the colour of the upper parts. From S. India.

being a mixture of shining grey and tawny. The separate hairs are leaden grey
at the base, then tawny with black apex; some are longer and uniformly dark
brown. Beneath, pale ash. The ears are larger, more than half the length of
the head, with very short hairs, rounded, blackish. Toes, palms, and soles,
whitish. Tail slender dark grey, with very short adpressed brown hairs.
Length of head and body 2§ in. ; tail 23 in.’ (Cantor).

I had missed our solitary specimens of M. nirmpunus and of M. GuiRoIDEs ;
when I chanced to find the former in a bottle containing Kandyan examples of
M. rurescens! No doubt some one had broken the bottle, and said nothing
about it; a trick not wholly new to my experience in the Society's Museum.

1863. | A memoir on the Rats and Mice of India. 349

Mts cEervicotor, Hodgson, Ann. Mag. N. H., XV. (1845), p. 268 ;
M. albidiventris, Blyth, J. A, S. XXI. 351. “ Distinguished by its
short tail. Above dull fawn, below sordid white. Lining of ears
and extremities pale. Snout to rump 33 in.; tail 2% in.; head 1 in. ;
ears ,°; in.; weight ? oz. Females less and having ten teats,” (Hodg-
son). Length of a large male 34 in.; of which the tail is 23 in.; tarsi
to tip of claws 14 in.; ear (from anterior base), 5%; in. Nepal; Ben-
gal (vicinity of Calcutta) ; Malabar.

Mus Funvipivenrris, Blyth, J. 4. S. XXI. 351: I. cervicolor ?,
Hodgson, apud Kelaart, Prod. Faune Zeyl.; p. 64. “ Length about
23 in.; tail (vertebra) 23 in.; tarsi to tip of claws 2 in. Colour of
M. syuivaricus above the fur shorter and less fine (as in its various
Indian affines), lower parts rufescent or isabelline, or they may be
described as a pale weak ferruginous. ‘Twenty caudal vertebre dis-
tinguishable, with + in. additional of tail-tip.” (EH. B.) From Cey-
lon. “ Found in houses in Trincomali.” (Kelaart).

Mus stroputatus, Hodgson, Ann. Mag. N. H., XV. (1845), p. 268.
“A field mouse closely allied to M. crrvicotor, but seemingly dis-
tinct. Bright fawn above, pure white below; a cross or gorget on
the breast. Snout to vent 34 in.; tail 2,4; head less 1; ears {9 in.;
weight § oz.” (Hodgson.)

Mus Terriconor, Blyth, J. A. 8. XX. 172. “This much resem-
bles M. tepipus, Elliot, in form and colour, but the face is very
much shorter, and the fur short, soft, and not spinous in the least de-
gree. Its colour varies, however, according to the soil; those of the
alluvium of the Ganges being darker than specimens from the ferru-
ginous soil to the westward. All have the under-parts white, abrupt-
ly separated from the hue of the upper-parts, and in the various
affined species. Length 24 in.; of tail 2}; ears {; hind-foot in.
Inhabits gardens and is very numerous in the open fields; together
with GERBILLUS INDICUS and Mus rnpicus.” (H.B.) The most
common field and garden Mouse in Lower Bengal. I found it very
abundant in the Santal districts westward of Midnapore.

Allied to the foregoing are certain spine-clad field Mice which have
been designated Luaeapa by Dr. Gray, (AL. WN. #., I., 1837, p. 586).

L. sprnuLosa, Blyth, J. A. 8S. XXIII. 734. “Nearly affined to
M. puatryrarix, Sykes, but of a dark dusky colour above, with ful-

.

350 A memowr on the Rats and Mice of India. [No. 4,

vous tips to the softer fur: below and all the feet [dull] whitish.
Upper rodential tusks orange, the lower white. Whiskers long and
fine, the posterior and longer of them black for the basal half or more,
the rest white. Length of adult male (in spirit) 384 in.; tail 3 in.
(about, the extreme tip wanting in the specimen); planta % in.”
(K. B.) From the Punjab, and specimens since received from 8,
Malabar, (J. A. S. XXIX. 3,) are quite similar, unless rather larger,
and there is little difference in the colour of the upper and lower
tusks.

L. Jerpont, Bl. 2. s. Bright dark ferruginous above, pure white
below; some fine long black tips intermingled among the spines of
the back: limbs marked with blackish externally; the feet white.
Length about 4 in.; tail 35 in.; hind-foot Zin. Procured in Sikhim
by Dr. Jerdon.

L. pratyturix; Mus platythriz, Bennett, P. Z. S. 1832, p. 1213
M. saxicola, Elliot, MSS. Light sandy brown, white beneath ; the
flat spines less developed than in the two preceding species. Length
34 in.; tail 24 in.; hind-foot 2in.; 8S. India. Vide Elliot in Madr.
Journ. Lit. Sc. X. (1839), p. 215.

L. vepipa; Mus lepidus Elliot, Madr. Journ. L. Sc. X. 216: L.
booduga, Gray, I. N. H., 1. (1887), p. 586. Similar to the last but
smaller, and but weakly spinous. “The dimensions of an old male
were—length of head and body 2,% in.; tail 2,4 in.; hind-foot 55
in.” (Hlliot). Vide loc. cit. 8. India. “ Inhabits India, Bombay.
They live in pairs in the black soil, making little burrows, in which
they produce two or three young.’ (Gray.) ‘The colour of this
small mouse would rather indicate that its abode was in a pale sandy
soil. Mr. Elliot writes—‘“ Lives generally in pairs in the red soil,” &.

Another type has been designated Gonunna by Dr. Gray, in
MM. N. H., 1. (1887), p. 586. “The grinders, when perfect, low,
with a broad flat crown; the cross-ridges of the crown of the upper
grinders divided into three distinct slightly raised tubercles. Rat-
like Mus.”

G. Exuiott, Gray, I. WV. H. 2nd series, I. (1837), p. 586, (nec
Mus Ellioti, Gray, Br. Mus. Cat.). “ Fur pale brown, with minute,
very slender, hair-pointed black tips. Chin, throat, and beneath,
whitish. Under fur paler. Teeth yellow; upper cutting teeth groov-

1863. | A memoir on the Rats and Alice of India. 351]

ed in front. Ears covered with short hair. Inhabits India, Bombay.”
No dimensions given!

Syn. Mus hirsutus, Elliot ; the Gulandi of the Canarese. ‘“ About the size of
MW. lanuginosus, or a little larger,—but differs in living entirely above ground,
in a habitation constructed of grass and leaves, generally in the root of a bush
at no great height from the ground, often indeed touching the surface. The
head is longer than that of the Mettade, but the muzzle is blunt, rounded, and
more obtuse, and covered with rough hair, The face and cheeks are also rougher
than those of other Rats; the ears round and villose, the eyes moderate; the
whiskers long and very fine. The colour is an olive-brown above, mixed with
fulvous ; beneath yellowish-tawny ; sometimes paler, or light yellowish-grey.

“A male Golunda measured—length of body 64, of tail 43,; of head 175; of

ear =&, weight nearly 3 oz.”

Hor habits, vide Hlliot, loc. cit.

A number of specimens in spirit presented to the Society’s Museum
by Mr. Elliot are considerably smaller, though appearing to be adult,
and a female is sent with its born young; these accord, however,
precisely with the ‘Coffee Rat’ of Ceylon, as described by the late
Dr. Kelaart. He presented the Society with a specimen which
is unquestionably identical in species with Mr. Elliot’s specimens
sent by the latter to the Society’s Museum.

G. corrzus, Mus coffeus, Kelaart, Prodromus (1852), p. 67.
“ Head and body 43 in.; tail4in. Fur thick, stiff; above, fulvous-
brown, mixed with black ; beneath, tawny-grey. Hairs of upper-parts,
flattened, ashy-grey, tipped yellow, with some thinner and longer
ones, also tipped yellow, with subterminal black hand. Under fur
soft, and of a light lead-colour. Face and cheeks rough. Kars moder-
ate, subovate, villous ; yellow-ferruginons. Tail round, tapering, scaly
and villous ; its upper surface dark brown—lower surface yellowish.
Cutting teeth yellow. Upper ones grooved as in GERBILLUS.

“This is the Rat which [in Ceylon] is so destructive to coffee-
trees. Whole plantations are sometimes deprived of buds and blos-
soms by these Rats. They are found in all the higher parts of the
Kandian provinces. The attention of EKuropeans has only been
drawn to them since coffee-planting commenced in the island. hey
appear to be migratory ; and are not always seen in coffee estates:
when they do visit the cultivated parts, their numbers are so great,
_ that in one day more than a thousand have been known to be killed
on one estate. In clearing forests, the nests of these Rats are met

Ns

B02 A memoir on the Rats and Mice of India. [No. 4,

with under the roots of trees. We have not been so fortunate as to
see many fresh specimens ; only one was brought to us from Kadu-
ganava: a premium is set by some coffee-planters on the heads of these
rodents. The Malabar coolies are very fond of eating them roasted,
or fried in oil.”

G. MitTapA, Gray, WZ. WN. H., 2nd series, I. (1837), p. 586.
“Length of body and head 43 in. Fur very soft, mouse-coloured
varied with black; chin, and beneath, whitish. Under-fur lead-co-
loured, with very numerous soft brown hairs having long black tips;
of the belly white, with brownish tips. Lars large, hairy. Whiskers
very slender, long. ‘Tail shorter than the body, scaly, covered with
short adpressed black hairs, hiding the scales. Feet pale ; claws white.
Tnhabits Bombay. Lives in cracks in the black soil, in pairs; and
are often crushed, when the rain, or cultivation, obliterates the cracks.”

Syn. Mus lanuginosus, Elliot, Madr. Jown. Lat. Sc. X. (1839), p. 212. “ Metta-
de of the Waddurs. The name adopted to designate this species is taken from
the word Mettade, meaning sott, in allusion to its fur, which is fine and soft,
mettanu meaning soft in Telegu. It is about half the size of M. rnpicus, which
it somewhat resembles. The head is short, but the muzzle, instead of beine
square and truncated is sharp ; the ears are larger in proportion and more ovate.
The general form is not so stout. The tail is shorter than the body. The co-
lour above is reddish-brown, with a mixture of fawn ; lighter beneath, close and
soft, with a few longer hairs projecting. A large adult male measured—length of
body 5,8 in. ; of tail 4,3, ; total 9,,; of head 1,4; of ear 8. Weight 23 oz.”

For description of habits, vede Elliot, foc. cit. I have not yet seen
this species.

G. NewnRaA, Kelaart, dnn. MW. N. H., 2nd series, VIII. (1851),
p. 839. Length of body and head 8] in. ; tail 23 in. Fur soft, yellow-
ish-brown varied with black; chin and beneath yellowish-grey; un-
der-fur dark lead colour; soft long hairs on the upper parts of the
head and body, with longer black-tipped hairs having a subterminal
yellowish band ; fur of belly dark lead-colour, tipped with yellowish-
grey ; ears large, hairy on both sides, of a light rusty or ashy colour ;
whiskers slender, moderately long, some greyish, others blackish ;
tail shorter than the body, tapering to a point, scaly ; upper surface
of a black colour and covered with short semi-adpressed black hair ;
lower surface yellow or ashy colour, covered with short hair of the
same yellow colour; feet having dark brown claws, purplish, four toes

1863. | A memoir on the Rats and Mice of India. 353

to the fore-feet, with a clawless rudimentary thumb [as in all smuri-
de’| *** Yneisors yellow, the superior grooved in the centre:
molars flat, deeply 3-lobed, the tubercles rising in three distinct lines,
middle larger than those of the sides, and the front one extending
beyond the other lobes.

“This Rat is found in pairs in the black soil of Newera Ellia, and
is a great destroyer of peas and potatoes. In the Ouva district, we
found another soil Rat, smaller than the above, and of a pale ashy
colour, which at the time we referred to ZL. boodaga of Gray, but
having since lost the specimen preserved in spirit, we are not able to
give a description of it. That it was very different from every other
Rat here described [in Prodromus], we have no doubt.”

Genus Hapatomys, Blyth, J. 4. S. XXVIII. 296.
H. Loneicaupatws, Bl., loc. cit. Received from Schwe Gyen, on

the Sitang river.

The reader has at length before him, without need of further re-
search in books (so far as I can discover), an epitome of the long and
perplexing series of Indian Muride, so far as the published descrip-
tions of them can help him to identify any species that may fall un-
der observation. In any part of India and the neighbouring coun-
tries, he might render useful service by collecting an adequate series
of examples of the species procurable in the vicinity, both carefully
prepared skins for mounting, and some entire specimens in spirit.
Wherever found, these animals are, in general, obtainable in any
quantity, from certain classes of natives who eat them, (or at least
those inhabiting the jungles or open country,) and who are familiar
with their haunts and habits. With really good and properly pre-
served specimens from different parts, and in sufficient number, the
real species would soon be discriminated from the factitious, as in-
deed is already the case with a good many of them; and the latter
would soon fall into the rank of synonyms, as by degrees one after
another became identified and understood. It may not be a particu-
larly inviting group to study, in the opinion of many observers and
collectors; but it needs to be assiduously ‘wrought out ;’ and the
difficulty of reconciling the synonyms will be considerably diminished
now that all the very numerous names and descriptions have been
collated in one continuous grand series.

eae

Bod Notes on the Indian terrestrial Gasteropoda. [No. 4,

Notes on the distribution of Indian terrestrial Gasteropoda considered
with reference to its leaning on the origin of species.—By W.
THEOBALD, J7.

«There are more things in Heaven and Harth, Horatio, than are dreamt of in
your Philosophy.”

I am led to make the following remarks on a subject of considerable
interest, by some suggestions contained in a Paper by my friends the
Messrs. Blanford, which appeared in the fourth number of the Journal
of the Asiatic Society for 1861. This paper is I trust but one of
many which we may receive from the same writers, and it is by such
contributions alone that we can hope to arrive at sound and compre-
hensive views of the distribution of the animals of which it treats,
which, from their often limited range within the tropics, and the mark-
ed and peculiar forms they there exhibit, afford peculiar facilities for
estimating the amount of support, derivable from their study, which
they afford to the ingenious theory of Mr. Darwin of the origin of
species. In several respects indeed the problem of the distribution
of land mollusea and the origin of both their generic and specific
types, is less encumbered with subsidiary considerations, requiring
special allowance and elimination, than the same problem as regard
any class of the vertebrata, and the land mollusea therefore afford not
only a simpler, but also a more satisfactory field for testing how far
a theory, which may find plausible justification and analogical support
from admitted physiological modifications among the vertebrata, is
applicable to and in aecord with our knowledge of the invertebrate
classes.

With this view therefore it will be well to sift carefully a sugees-
tion made in the above quoted paper, which does not appear to me
to stand on any firmer foundation than mere hypothesis.

After tabulating the distribution of the Terrestrial Gasteropoda of -
the Kolamully, Putchamully, Kalryenmully and Shevroy ranges of
hills, the authors arrive at the conclusion that the whole area is
occupied by one and the same fauna, (referring of course to the mol-
lusca only,) with which conclusion I fully agree, but this uniformity
is brought about not by the dispersion of the same species over the
entire area, but by the occurrence of the same species on ranges of

1863. | Notes on the Indian terrestrial Gasteropoda. 305

hills isolated from one another by tracts, in which, from physical
causes, shells are absent ; hence it is argued, that at the period these
colonists attained their present quarters, very different physical
features and conditions must have obtained over the intervening area,
to what now exist. In support of this they appeal to the geological
history of the Peninsula, on which point I in no wise differ from them,
but it seems to me that no necessity exists for appealing to any such
agency to explain the distribution above mentioned, and that more-
over it is utterly and beyond expression inadequate to promote the
results attributed to it.

In a former paper I alluded to the existence of several distinct
Indian Provinces of land mollusca, to which very few shells are com-
mon, and it is not less suggestive than singular that among the few
shells common to two or more Indian Provinces, some of them trespass
far beyond the geographical limits of India, even as far as Africa,
Mauritius, &e. Now it is sought to be argued, that because some
few shells such as Helix Huttont, B., H. Similaris Fer., H. Castra B.
Bulimus punctatus, Anton, and some others, have a very wide range,
that they must have migrated, inch by inch, over all the intervening
space, or must have availed themselves of such means of conveyance
as a conveniently submerged country, or the reverse of such a condi-
tion, as supposition demands, afforded.

A geologist certainly is not easily staggered by any considerations
involving a mere question of time, but I confess that to me, more
than ordinary ditliculty seems to be involved in the supposition of
the case of these living travellers, restlessly diffusing themselves as
though urged on by the furies of Orestes, or propelled by the desire of
possessing the fairer pastures of a far off land. The migratory instinct
of birds certainly offers an instance of an irresistible and spontaneous
impulse from within to seek other climes, but I am aware of no facts
which would lead us to suppose that any similar instinct or stimu-
lus is implanted in the invertebrate classes, which would ensure or
conduce to their dispersion. In such cases too, as Mr. Darwin suggests,
(Origin of Species, page 397,) the means of transport afforded by winds
and waves, is quite independent of any voluntary effort on the part
of the animal, who, for many a weary day or week, must have concen-
trated its energies to retaining hold of its straw or stick. The possi-
bility of a small Helix being carried uninjured round the globe,

306 Notes on the Indian terrestrial Gasteropoda. | No. 4,

wedged in a cleft stick or cemented to a bough, I fully admit, but not
if the animal was exposed to the moist sea air, not to say immersed
in either fresh or salt-water, as such a condition would certainly pro-
voke its dormant vitality and lead to its destruction ; and it must be
remembered, that the period when shells are most liable to be car-
ried down by streams, is just the time when they are most active and
unlikely to be hermetically fastened to their hot-weather roosting-
places : the method of diffusion therefore of shells on floating wood, I
must, though of course opinions will differ, regard as strained and
improbable even as an exceptional case.

Equally difficult is it to realize the dispersion by the accidental
method of the freshwater shells of India, enjoying as they do a far
wider range than the terrestrial races, though they must be less fit-
ted than any land shell for transmission across a submerged country.
Birmah for example possesses its own peculiar Uniones, but many Indian
freshwater shells (including Unio ceruleus and U. marginalis) range
our Birmah also, though it will hardly be contended that these shells
navigated the salt seas on sticks, or ploughed their way inchmeal over
every water-shed between the Indus and Irawadi; neither is it easy
to say, if such means were really subservient to the diffusion of the
wide spread species, how the peculiar or local species which are the
most numerous, did not come to extend their range in like manner.
Indeed it seems to me an inevitable conclusion, if we admit the
potency of accidental transmission to extend the range of a species,
that no such thing as a local fauna, possessing a special facies and
circumscribed limit, could exist, or at the most that such a limitation
of species among the mollusca would be the exception and not the
rule, which our knowledge of the distribution of Indian mollusca, (to
confine myself to my topic,) emphatically disproves. With whatever
theory we associate the fact, few will deny that all animals have a
definite range in space, no less than in time, and which is not the less
a reality, because it is capable of extension or mutation under the in-
fluence of physical conditions, just as the normal life of an animal
may be prolonged or curtailed by the conditions by which it is sur-
rounded; and as some genera enjoy a far larger range in time than
others in the vista of the past, so some genera and species are far more
widely spread as regards space than others, whose restricted areas
are swallowed up as it were in the domain of their numerically in-

ferior allies.

1863. | Notes on the Indian terrestrial Gasteropoda. 357

The widely diffused species are not individually so numerous as to
favour the idea of their extended range being the result of a vivacious
debacle of individuals overflowing from the cradle of their species:
indeed most of the more restricted species are fully as numerous or
more so within their own area, than those whose area is one hundred
times larger: we must, therefore, I think, reject the idea of their diffu-
sion being either the result of accidental transmission, vagabond in-
stincts, or numerical pressure of individuals. Some of the suggested
methods indeed of explaining the subject, do not seem greatly to
differ in kind or credibility from the nursery machinery of the blue
bag and the parsley bed, with which crones are wont to satisfy the
curiosity of troublesome juveniles, regarding the antecedents of the
little stranger who is occasionally incorporated in the family circle.
The whole question in fact of the distribution of animals hinges on
the origin of species, anything throwing light on one, helping equal-
ly to elucidate the other, and here my own views differ from those of
my friends, the Messrs. Blanford. If it can be established that all ani-
mals are descended froma single pair, whose descendants radiate from
their own little Ararat and that the world was replenished with life from
a point, then all the fine arguments that can be adduced against the
feats of navigation and travel, performed by these tiny sailors under
trying circumstances, fall to the ground before the plain deduction,
that however the deed was accomplished, accomplished it has been;
but till the fact is established, or unless we shackle ourselves by an
assumption, known facts seem to favour the idea of a plurality of arche-
typal pairs, and their sporadic distribution, (as the ethnic centres of
the human races,) over the specific area, proportionately to its extent.
Ample room would still be left under this supposition, for extensive
migration of the animals themselves, and for the enlargement or con-
traction of their area, even to the entire change of its original site,
under pressure of changed conditions and such surface revolutions as
many species must have been subjected to. Such changes, however, of
distribution must have ever constituted the exception, and are probab-
ly confined to a few, and those few widely spread species ; and to ap-
ply the argument in favour of all, that may be admissible with a few,
appears rather opposed to, than supported by, the most liberal inter-
pretation of facts. The inherent weak point in the theory of the
distribution of species, is the same as the weakest point of the Ori-

308 Notes on the Indian terrestrial Gasteropoda. [ No. 4,

gin of Species,—the unlimited application of facts which have but a
limited bearing. It is as though any one should argue, that because
aman may live to 20 years or 40 or 80, therefore he may live
to 160. Migration of species as well as individual changes may take
place, but to these there are limits not the less impassable, because
not sharply defined. Many of our domestic animals are as artificial
creations as our 8-day clock, but their variation from the focal stocix,
though censiderable, and ill-defined in its limits, is subject to certain
bounds; and I cannot see that from these known deviations, it is
logical to argue unknown deviations, such as no sick man ever dream-
edof: or that a bear, though the breeder might in time lengthen his
nose or shorten his claws or fur, could ever suffer a sea change and
cleave the deep like a whale, any more than he could scale the heavens
like a cherub. The idea may be philosophical but it zs absurd.

Those who reject the idea of original or archetypal pairs of all
animals in favour of the theory of “natural selection,’ must embrace
the same views regarding the method of their distribution, as those
who hold every animal to have radiated from Mt. Ararat, as lineal
descent is the Ariadnean thread whereby they seek to solve the
mystery of the “ parsley bed,” but though this theory certainly shifts
the difficulty a long way off, yet it by no means disposes altogether
of the necessity of a primordial ‘‘ blue bag” of some sort or another,
as none of its adherents, that I am aware of, have advanced any
refutation of the accepted aphorism.

“ sion
“ F nihilo nihil, in nihilem nil posse reverti.”

It is clearly essential for those who support the natural selection
theory, and regard species as merely pronounced or rigorous varieties
springing from the same stock, to establish the efficacy of transport
or migration, to bring about the distribution of all animals within
their respective areas : hence the variety of means suggested for that
end, most of which seem, to say the least of it, far fetched and impro-
bable. Earth, ocean, and the winds of Heaven are taxed in turn to
afford means of transport for widely diffused species ; hence the inter-
est attaching to a careful study of the distribution of the mollusca,
as affording serious grounds for doubting some of the conclusions the
above theory necessitates, and the light which it is likely to afford to
future enquirers. But to return to the more immediate subject of re-
mark :—the diffusion of terrestrial mollusea over their individual area

1863. ] Notes on the Indian terrestrial Gasteropoda, 309

To account for the diffusion of the descendants of a single pair, two
modes are usually suggested as adequate, viz., voluntary migration of
individuals, and their fortuitous transport on floating logs or lesser
vehicles over the watery waste. Now the spontaneous migration of
animals can only be brought about by the operation of two causes,—
a natural instinct such as regulates the movements of migratory birds»
the operation of which we may safely dismiss from our present cal-
culations, or the necessity for seeking more abundant supplies of food,
or of avoiding unsuitable physical conditions. In the case, however,
of the invertebrata we are considering, the second cause can have but
little more effect than the first in stimulating their movements, as we
know of no migratory hosts of snails, compelled by dearth of food to
shift their quarters, or of any who adopt any other mode than torpidi-
ty to escape the prejudicial effects of either extreme heat or cold:
representing therefore the results of migration as a, we may safely
conclude that «0. ‘There still remains the very varied, and as it
is usually deemed, efficacious mode of accidental transport by winds
and waves through the agency of floating wood and the like. Cer-
tainly a complete list of all the terrestrial shells which have trusted
their lives to floating wood since the days of Adam, would, maugre
its small size, prove a formidable difficulty for me to dispose of, and
I am prepared to admit that many cases of dispersion by accidental
agencies may have occurred, and to give the full weight to this cause,
which I think it is fairly entitled to ; but it is not to explain an occa-
sional or exceptional case, that the power of floating wood is invoked,
but to account for the general diffusion of individuals throughout the
area of the species, and this, as I have before remarked, seems utterly
disproved by great numerical preponderance of species enjoying very
restricted areas, (most strikingly so among the operculata,) a few only
overrunning the boundary of the province in which they occur, and
of these which do so, some extend their range far beyond any strictly
Indian Province. To illustrate this more forcibly, I give a tabular
statement, exhibiting the distribution of the two most important
families of terrestrial mollusks in India, viz., the Helicide and Cy-
clostomide ; prefacing it with a few words respecting the provinces,
into which I conceive India and the adjacent countries may be divid-
ed. The provinces as now proposed depend in a great measure on
physical demarcation, and are therefore to some extent natural divi-
2%

360 Notes on the Indian terrestrial Gasteropoda. [No. 4

sions, though they might, if regard were had solely to their (mollus-

cous) fauna, be again subdivided, but I prefer the more comprehen-

sive natural boundaries, as at once more intelligible and real.

It may be urged with some show of truth, that the altitude of a
range or district, exercises a similar influence on its fauna, that a
change of latitude does, and that consequently mere geographical
divisions are arbitrary, unless consideration is also had to the modify-
ing influence of the height of the country embraced within it, but
whilst admitting that altitude corresponds in a manner, as far as
climate goes, with latitude, and that similar faunas maintain a
co-relation with either a certain latitude or corresponding altitude, yet
it does not seem that these similar conditions give rise to specific
identity as a result, thereby diminishing the significance of specific
areas; but rather that such similarity of conditions permits of the
presence of interlopers or stragglers from other areas, without such
examples ever rising above the category of exceptional cases.

The six provinces which I think can naturally be established, are
as follows :—

Province I.—The Himalayan, embracing the main and lower ranges
of the Himalayas, together with the Khasi and
Jynteah Hills.

Province 11.—The. central, embracing the plains of India, South of
Province I. including and bounded by the valleys of
the Ganges, Indus, Taptee and Godavery.

Province I1I.—The Southern, embracing Peninsular India, South of
Province II.

Province [V.—The Birmese, embracing Arrakan, British and Indepen-
dent Birma, the Tenasserim Provinces and adjacent
Islands.

Province V.—The Cingalese.

Province VI.—The Germanic (in part), embracing Afghanistan and
the Thibetan face of the Himalayas.

The Table given below exhibits the number of species of each
genus of the Helicide and Cyclostomidze in India, and the number of
species which may be termed “ vagrant,” or which range beyond the
limits of one or more provinces, but of course, when so many addi-
tions are being made yearly to the list of our Indian shells, this Table
can only be taken as illustrating a general proposition, and not as

1863. | Notes on the Indian terrestrial Gasteropoda. 361

_ having pretensions to absolute accuracy, as to the actual number of
species described up to date. Some shells too, regarded by me as
mere varieties, are by some esteemed species, so that if the latter view
prove correct, a reduction would be effected in the number of vagrant
species e. 9. Helix bistrialis (H. Ceylanica,) and all additions will pro-
bably go to swell the numbers of species possessing a restricted area,
rather than those of more extended distribution, so that the numbers
given above are I think sufficiently correct, and the data ample
enough as they stand,to support the proposition which I wish to
establish, viz., that species which from their wide diffusion may be
termed “ migratory,’ are more aptly described as “ sporadic” and that
so far from the fact of their wide distribution being the result of a
general law, or of certain universal conditions favourable to their dis-
persion, it is plainly an exception, and moreover, so very exceptional
as to militate strongly against the idea of any law or conditions favour-
able to migration, ever having existed,so far as we may judge by results.
The following species are excluded from my list.
Helix pullula, B. MSS., H. acris, B.
. bombax, B. Streptaxis Petiti, Gould. juv.
. ceryx, B.
. Ceylanica, Pfr.
. puteolus, B.

Leptopoma aspirans, B. juv.
. bistrialis, Beck.

. clathratula, Pfr.

. trifasciata, Ch.

. strigella, Drap.

. Laidlayana, 2,

. Bactriana, Hutton.
. unicincta, B. . propinqua, Pfr.
. petrosa, Hutton. . vitrinoides, Desh.
. Zoroaster, Theobald,
Bulimus Andamanensis, Zh. -
. Jerdoni, B.

. rivicola, B.

THORS eae
GeEeeeee

. similaris, Fer.
Spiraxis Haughtoni, B.
B. Abyssinicus, Rup.
B. arcuatus, Hutton.

. pullus, Gray. B. insularis, Hhr.
. atricallosus, Gould. B. perversus, L.
. citrinus, Reeve. B. perversus, L.
. latebricola, B.
. tutulus, B.

Achatina frumentum, Reeve.

Achatina latebricola, B. sp.

Botte

Pupa tutula, B. sp.

A. gemma, B.

A. punctogallana, Pfr.

A. Perrotteti, Pfr.
24% 2

A. ceylanica, Reeve.
A. Nilagirica, 8.

eee Tey) Wee Ne Te 0 tk |

362 Notes on the Indian terrestrial Gasteropoda. [No. 4,

Table I. exhibiting the numbers of the Helicide im India and the
proportion of vagrant species which range beyond the bounds of «@
single Province.

Helicide. Total of species. Vagrant species.
WValbreiniaaeniy pee mo ecaae weno maaee OL ac wells None
(Cir OLMOSOLTNER A And Sas co dctodd bed Ssacoasbocen oon) 9) 24 1
DUCCHNER RR Ll hia leismeasemad auc anummn yh OIL None
HES isepe os eascblmopioreeteceesun sneden telecom eon: 14
ly pselostomayss. ase ese ey ones cue odaseitene ee None
DERE PUAMIS UML Wacilsles te tea ctmoncninect-tetsiciesiual oO None
PB ULMUS URE R Me SoU Fes cere en SM | SEO) 7
Pavel wa ui y Saya ls VaR ne RN CUS LO 3
US OSHA wor Pei Sere tele ele came a eee ile Ruma c Men uly wae None
ERO As aN aetsldet Seiad cuwe sie dimbeicoe Mouton teaied eed y (it. i
Clausilliiay ee ccr ceaskiine ios eanics ioeiau tonteseee cle un meted: None

375 26

The following are the vagrant species and those only are marked
thus (*) whose distribution is peculiar, as, of course, where provinces
meet, some few species trench on the adjoining province without
properly belonging to it, so that the actual number of truly vagrant
species is less than the number of the above table. For some of my
data marked thus (+) Iam indebted to my friends the Messrs. Blanford.

-Cryptosoma planospira, Provinees I. and II.
Helix Barrakporensis,} Provinces I. and IIL.
H. bistrialis, Provinces III. and V.

I include this species as I regard H. Ceylanica as a mere variety
of it.
H. castra,* Provinces I. III. 1V. and V.+
H. capitium,* Provinces I. and II.

A rare shell in the two localities known to me, the Katak jungles
and hills North of Tirhoot.

H. climacterica,f Provinces I. and IV.+
Hi. delibrata,* ' Provinces I. and IV.

H. fallaciosa, Provinces III. and V.+
Hi. fastigiata,* Provinces I. and III.

H. Huttoni,* Provinces I. and III.

1863. | Notes on the Indian terrestrial Gasteropoda. 363

H. ligulata,
H. similaris,*

H. Tranquebarica,
H. Lychnia,*
H. vitrinoides,*

Bulimus Bengalensis,

B. Sindicus,
B. gracilis,*

B. ecenopictus,*

B. insularis* (pullus, Gray),

B. punctatus,*

B. Abyssinicus,*

Achatina punctogallana,

A. Oreas,
A. tenuispira,

Provinces II. and ITI.

Provinces II. and IV. also Singa-
pore, Mauritius, Prazil, &e., &e.

Provinces III. and V.

Province V.+ also Singapore.

Provinces I. II. and III.

Provinces I. and II.

Provinces I. and II.

Provinces J. IJ. III. IV. and Y.
also Mauritius.

Provinces IJ. III. IV. and V. and
Mozambique.

Provinces II. III. and IV. also Red
sea, &c., &e.

Provinces II. III. and V. also East
coast of Africa, &e.

Province IT. and Abyssinia.

Provinces III. and V.+

Provinces II. and III.+

Provinces I. and LY.

Achatina fulica I do not include, as it was introduced very recent-

ly from Mauritius.
Pupa bicolor,*

Cyclostomide.

KOT LAS UP sMetie ceed stcecessciogeeneecee vide
TET yO IHOEEINE),, cha odo cod O56 POR RER COBCHOFECIEE EC OAD
(DIEO/DXOIIEY, sch a50 cdo eccdon ooo dabeonn seadeo bea aoe
HID OVS DISH: Wes cMsosincelt ssivce'see sesdices vases
PNG SCOTS tes cel csjs'scle sec asses acess
SEO SHON eye esteeisos2s/-cc canlesoces|seeices
“oyyG@leyolnenais: 65 5Sedo paclespcouNbedcubeeceonee
sees, sestetjedsoe <i ss<- des eee
EW UO POUR ssisscedcsenaatvee ssces +s

Ca AUMIS raees siaeeentietcesor ce coeeee «

Pupina,.., 200 FOF SOR +A0 POT OOH 208 POE Oo

Provinces I. If. III. LV. and V.

Table II. Cyclostomide..

Total of species. Vagrant species.
2 None
5 None
] 1]
1 None
1 None
1 None

49 2

Beenie ato None

Hececoooos | ded) None
MICS MOMASLOMA I i dssisvelens vases soe vee ses

3 None
paral riley None
6 None

364 Notes on the Indian terrestrial Gasteropoda. [ No. 4,

Total of species. Vagrant species.
GETOCYCLOS, uit. hacitasdosheascnesceseeen- eae es see aL Ne None
Sypirracuillintyn Wess Ce cele Gene chimes ele None
Cy clobus,gaueeece heat acne ee. osu GB None
A ulopomiageie O80 Fe Scand Weekes cedoe ee at None
Ribvostorneaye 5h) Pes Gay ak ee Oana oe 1 None
Cyathopomia: ese beet. cectem en ean To None
BV CUS, Cicccecwecoatecosten celtec am eee tee OU None
Sireptauluss Paces ae ascs emer see oastesenes None

} Pp eit
Tubaphia mus ieee ccseereeneccsse tease cceee. al None

The only three vagrant species are
Cyclophorus involvulus, Provinees Ii. IIT. and V.
C. pyrotrema, Provinces I. II. and LY.
Otopoma clausum,* Province II. and Arabia.

Summary.

Province I. Motaltot species; y.ccsces-s eee alo
WASKANUCS A Sorte. coon cocatoe gel

— 13l
Province II. Totaly: ee Se ea ON aero)
NAGEANUS, <8. avcae cao oeieteisen eee

— 58
Province III. Total. 0t, Slice ssece Courerece EOS
WAGTAMESS.. cc nc saloechmeiecieanis 8

— 51
Province IV. Total, \,.ciiiconscssoosae sateen ae
VASTANLS cosussesacedoaeecenest suet ee

—— 133
Province V. Total saihesceeed oot ediealaO
VASTANUS,y py ame ncsne ostetdaanpase 7

Total vagrants in all provinces, 29

* This may be excluded, the shell from W. India being distinct.—Hd.

1863. | Notes on the Indian terrestrial Gasteropoda. 365

The following is a list of the land mollusca distributed through
the different Provinces, though some may be erroneously placed,
from the loose manner in which some species are described as simply
* from India’ by authors. Vagrants marked thus.(*)

Province 1.—Tur HIMALAYAN.

Family Limacide.,
Limax altivagus, 7/2. MSS.
L. modestus, Zh. MSS.
Family Helicide.
Hoplites Cassiacus, 7. MSS.
Vitrina gigas, B.
V. salius, B.
V. scutella, B.
V. cassida, Hutton.
V. monticola, B.
Cryptosoma planospira, B.*
Succinea indica, Pfr.
Helix acris, B.
. anopleuris, B.
. Barakporensis, Pfr.*
. bascunda, B.
. Blanfordi, Th.
bullula, Hutton.
calpis, B.
camura, B.
. capitium, B.*
castor, Th.
castra, B.*
celox, B.
cestus, B.
convexa.
. chloroplax, B.
. climacterica, B.*
. eyclotrema, B.
. corys, B.
. cycloplax, B.

erie soi ==Bie=[s«Il=«IA soll -cB==i-+(-cBl-efils«IAsoilnefitee R==il ==

366 Notes on the Indian terrestrial Gasteropoda. [No. 4,

Helix delibrata, B.*
diplodon, B.
fragilis, Hutton.
fastigiata, Hutton.*
galea, B.

glauca, B.
Himalayana, Lea.
Hodgsoni, B.
humilis, Hutton.

. Huttoni, B.*
hyba, B.

[. labiata, Pfr.

. lubriea, B.
macropleuris, B.
nana, Hutton.
nuda, Pfr.
ornatissima, B.
orobia, B.

oxytes, B.

PRR T EE EEE eee eee

patane, B.

(Plectopylis, B.) pinacis, B.

. planiuscula, B.

. (Plectopylis, B.) plectostoma, B.
Pollux, Th.

. radicicola, B.

°

rimicola, B.
rorida, B.
splendens, Hutton.
seposita, B.
sequax, B.

serrula, B.
submissa, B.
tapeina, B.
tugurium, B.

. vesicula, B.

PRE R RESET Pe Eee eee

. vitrinoides, Dh.*
var. H. petrosa, Hutton.
Streptaxis ‘Vheobaldi.

1863.]

Notes on the Indian terrestrial Gasteropoda.

Bulimus arcuatus, Hutton.
. Bengalensis,* Lam.

- Boysianus, B.

. celebs, B.

. ceenopictus, Hutton.*

. candelaris, Pfr.

. ceratinus, 2.

. domina, B.

. gracilis, Hutton.*

. insularis, Hhr.*
Kunawarensis, Hutton.
. rufistrigatus, B.

. segregatus, B.

. Sikkimensis, B.

. Sindicus, B.*

. Smithu, B.

. Sylheticus, B.

. vibex, B.

Achatina Cassiaca, B.

jes} ee} lee) lee) \es} los) (se) los) les} lee) lec! |osl Ice) lec! lee] locl (ec)

. erassula, B.

. crassilabris, B.
. hastula, B.

. latebricola, #8.
. leptospira, B.
. orobia, B.

_ pyramis, B.

rrPPrbe rr SP LS

. tenuispira, B.*

Pupa Huttoniana, B.

P. plicidens, 3.

P. (Ennea) stenopylis, 2B.

P. (Ennea) bicolor, Hutton,*
P. (Ennea) bora, B.

Family Auriculide.
Carychium indicum, B.

Family Diplommatinide.
Diplommatina Blanfordiana, B.
D. costulata, Hutton.

567

368

Notes on the Indian terrestrial Gasteropoda.

Diplommatina folliculus, Pfr.
D. diplocheilus, B.

D. Huttoni, Pfr.

D. pachycheilus, B.

D. polypleuris, B.

D. pullula, B.

Family Cyclostomide.

Pomatias pleurophorus.
P. Himalaye.
Hydrocena sarrita, B.
Cyclophorus Aurora, B.
var C. stenomphalus, Pfr.
C. exul, B.
C. Himalayanus, Pfr.
C. Pearsoni, B.
var OC. Bensoni, Pfr.
. phenotopicus, B.
. pyrotrema, B.*
. pinnulbfer, B.
. Siamensis, Sow.
. tryblium, B.
. zebrinus, B.

QOQaaeage

Lagocheilus tomotrema, B.
Leptopoma cybeus, B.
Megolomastoma funiculatum, B.
M. pauperculum, B.
Pupina imbricifera, B.
Pterocyclos Albersi, Pfr.
P. parvus, Pearson.

(var P. rupestris ?).
Spiraculum hispidum, Pearson.
S. sp. nov.
Alyceeus bembex, B.
A. constrictus, B.
A. crenulatus, 2B.
A. gemmula, B.
A, hebes, B.

[No. 4,

1863.]

Notes on the Indian terrestrial Gasteropoda.

Alyceus otiphorus, B.
A. physis, B.

A. prosectus, B.

A. plectocheilus, B.

A. stylifer, B.

A. strangulatus, Hutton.
A. Theobaldi, Blanford.
A. urnula, B.
Streptaulus Blanfordi, B.
Clausilia bacillum, B.

C. cylindrica, Hutton.

C. ignota, Th.

C. ios, B.

C. loxostoma, B.

Province I1.—-Tur Crntrat.
Family Oncidiade.
Oncidium, sp.
Family Limacide.
Limax Bengalensis, 7h. MSS.
L. Memnon, 7h. MSS.

Family Helicide.
Vitrina Bensoni, Pfr.
Cryptosoma planospira, B.*
Succinea Baconi, B.
S. Bensoni, Pfr.
S. crassiuscula, B.
S. daucina, B.
S. Girnarica, Th.
S. subgranosa, Pfr.
Helix asperella, Pfr.
. Baconi, B.
. Bajadera, Pfr.
Bombayana, Grat.
. capitium, B.*
. decussata, B.
. infula, B.
. interrupta, B.

bt pt et bt tt

oa 2

369

Notes on the Indian terrestrial Gasteropoda.

Helix lecythis, B.

See ete ee

. ligulata, Fer.*

. Nagporensis, Pfr.
. orcula, B.

. propinqua, Pfr.

. similaris, Her.*

. Subjecta, B.

. trifasciata, Ch.

. vitrinoides, Deh.*

Bulimus Abyssinicus, Rwp.*

es ocdlo= os IM ooln- Io collle-Blcefilcclilee

. Bengalensis, Lam.*

. Boriliz, B.

. ceenopictus, Hutton.*
. Estellus, Reeve.

gracilis, utton.*

. insularis, Hhr.*

. militaris, 7. MSS. (near B. mavortius, #.)
. pertica, B.

. pretiosus, Cantor.

. punctatus, Anfon.*

. Salsicola, B.

. Sindicus, B.*

Achatina amentum, B.

A.

balanus, B.

A. fulica, Gntroduced).

rrr > > > b

. gemma, B.

5 HOWE, JB,

. notigena, B.
OKC ASHE

. prelustris, 3.
. sarissa, B.

. serutillus, B.

Pupa bathyodon, B.

P;
12

lee
IP
1B,

bicolor, Hutton.*
brevicostis, B.
diploos, B.
planyunculus, B.
seriola, B.

[No. 4,

1863. ]

Notes on the Indian terrestrial Gasteropoda.

Pupa tutula, B.
Boysia Bensoni, Pfr.

Family Auriculide.
Camptonyx Theobaldi, 3.
Melampus fasciatus,* Desh.
M, pulchellus,* Petit.
Pythia plicata.
Cassidula mustelina, Desh.
C. auris-felis, Brug.
Auricula Chinensis, Pfr.
A. auris-mide, L.*
A. Gangetica, B,
A. fustis, B.

Family Aciculide.
Truncatella, sp.

Family Cyclostomide.
Otopoma clausum, B.*+
Cyclophorus indicus, Desh.
C. involvulus Mull.*
C. pyrotrema, B.*
Pterocyclos rupestris, B.
Cyclotus spurcus, Gra¢.
C. semistriatus, Sow.
C. subdiscoideus, Sow.

Province [I1].—Tue SournHeErn.

Family Helicide.

Succinea rugosa, Pfr.
Helix acuducta, B.
. ampulla.
. basileus, B.
. Belangeri, Dh.
. bidenticulata, B.
. cacuminifera, 2,
. crinigera, B.
. cysis, B.
. fastigiata, HZutton.*

+ See note ante p. 364,.—Hd.

SSOP

vi

372 Notes on the Indian terrestrial Gasteropoda. [No. 4,

Helix Guerini, Pfr.

. Indica, Pfr.

. Nilagirica, Pfr.

. Perrotteti, Pfr.

. (Plectopylis) retifera, B.
. ruginosa, Fer.

. sordida, Pfr.

. semifusca, Desh.

Tee eee

. semirugata, Beck.
H. Shiplayi.
H. solata, B.
H. thyreus, B.
H. Tranquebarica, Fabr.*
H. vitellina, Pfr.
Streptaxis Perrotteti, Petit.
S. Watsoni, Blanford.
Bulimus ceenopictus, Hutton.*
B. gracilis, Hutton.*
B. insularis, Hhr.*
B. Nilagiricus, Pfr.
B. physalis, B.
B. punctatus, Anton.*
Achatina Bensoniana, Pfr.
A. botellus, B.
A. Punctogallana, Pfr.
A. facula, B.
A. Jerdoni, B.
A. oreas, B.*
A. Perrotteti, Pfr.
A. Shiplayi.
Pupa (Ennea) bicolor, Hutton.*
P. (Ennea) Pirriei, Pfr.
Of the Auriculide of this Province I have no notes whatever.
Kamily Diplommatinide.
D. Kingiana, Blanford.
D. Nilgirica, Blanford.
Opisthostoma Nilgiricum, Llanford.

1863. ]

Notes on the Indian terrestrial Gasteropoda.

Family Cyclostomide.
Cyclophorus cceloconus, SB.
C. deplanatus, Pfr.
C. Nilgiricus, B.
C. ravidus, B.
C. stenostomus, Sow.
C. Shiplayi, Pfr.
Pterocyclos Blandi, B.
P. bilabiatus, B.
P. nanus, B.
Cyclotus montanus, Pfr.
Cyathopoma filocinctum, B.
C. malabaricum, Blanford.
Alyceus expatriatus, Blanford.
A. Footei, Blanford.
Province [V.—Tur BrirMesn.
Family Oncidiade.
Vaginula Birmanorum, Zh. MSS.

Family Limacide.
Limax Peguensis, 7h. MSS. @
Family Helicide.
Vitrina Birmanica, Phil.
V. Christiane, 7h. MSS.
Cryptosoma prestans, Gould.
Succinea semiserica, Gould.
Helix acerra, 2B.
H. achatina, Gray.
H. Akoutongensis, 7h.
H. anceps, B.
H. artificiosa, B.
Helix arx., B.
H. Atkinsoni, 7h.
H. attegia, B.
H. bifoveata, B.
H. bolus, B.
H. capessens, B.
H. cassidula.

373

B74 Notes on the Indian terrestrial Gaste. opoda. [No. 4,

castra, B.*

caussia, B.

choinix, B.
consepta, B.
convallata, B.
eyclaspis, B.
delibrata, B.*
Gordoniz, B.
galata, B.
gratulans, Blanford.
hariola, B.
Haughtoni, &.
Helferi, B.
helicophora, Blanford.
honesta.

Hutton, B.*
infrendens, #.
levicula, B.
(Plectopylis) letophis, B.
Merguiensis, Phil.
molecula, B.
octoplax, B.
Oldhami, B.

pausa, B.
pauxillula, B.
Peguensis, B.
perpaula, B.
petasus, B.

petila, B.

Phayrei, Zh.
pilidion, B.
poongee, Th.
pylaica, B.
resplendens, Phil.
refuga, Gould.
retrorsa, Gould.
rotatoria, Von d Busch.*

sanis, B.

BEER PEPPER eee eee

1863.]

Notes on the Indiun terrestrial Gasteropoda. 375

. stephus, B.

. Saturnia, B.

. scalpturita, B.

. similaris, Fer.*

. textrina, B.

. Theodori, Phil.

. Tickelli, Th.

. trochalia, 6.

uter, Th.

Sophina calias, B.

S. forabilis, B.

S. schistostelis, B.
Hypselostoma tubiferum, B.
H. Bensoni, Blanford.
Streptaxis Andamanica, B.
S. Petiti, Gould.

S. exacuta, Gould.

8. Sankeyi, B.

S. sp.

Bulimus ccenopictus, Hutton.*
Bulimus Haughton, B.

. gracilis, Hutton.*

. insularis, Hhr.*

. putus, B.

. Janus, Pfr.

. moniliferus, Gould.

. Sinensis, B.

. Theobaldianus, B.
Achatina Peguensis, B1.

lee} ‘eel les} lee} tos} (es| leg)

A. pertenuis, B1.
A. tenuispira, B.*
A. octona, Gould.
Pupa bicolor, Hutton.*
Clausilia insignis, Gould.
C. Philippiana, Gould.
Family Auriculide.
Pythia plicata, Pfr.*
Auricula dactylus, Pfr.
A. auris-Mide, Z.* 3B

376

Notes on the Indian terrestrial Gasteropoda.

Family Diplommatinide.

Diplommatina sperata, Blanford.
Family Cyclostomide.

Hydrocena illex, B.

H. frustrillum.

H. pyxis, B.

H. Rawesiana, B.

Hyboceystis gravida, B.

Clostophis Sankeyi, B.

Cyclophorus affinis, 7’.

. aurantiacus, Schwrn.

. cucullatus, Gould.

. calyx, B

. cornu-venatorium, Sow.

. eryptomphalus, B.

. expansus, Pfr.

. excellens, Pfr.
C. Haughton, Th.
C. balteatus, B.

C. foliaceus, Chem.

C. fulguratus, Pfr.
C_ patens, Blanford.

Cyclophorus flavilabris, B.

AAQAAaQg ©

C. perdix, Sov.

C. speciosus, Phil.

C. scurra, B.

C. Theobaldianus, B.
Lagocheilus scissimargo, B.
Leptopoma aspirans, B.

L. Birmanum, Pfr.
Megalomastoma sectilabrum, Gould.
Pupina artata, B.

P. arula, B.

P. Peguensis, B.

usps

Pterocyclos cetra, B.

P. pullatus, B.

Rhiostoma Haughtoni, B.

[ No. 4,

1863.]

Notes on the Indian terrestrial Glasteropoda.

Alyceus amphora, B.
. armillatus, B.
Andamanie, B.
. graphicus, Blanford.
. humilis, Blanford.
Ingrami, Blanford.
. nitidus, Blanford.
. pyramidalis, B.
polygonoma, Blanford.
. Richtofeni, Blanford.
. scepticus, Blanford.
. sculptilis, B.
. succineus, Blanford.
. umbonalis, B.
. vestitus, Blanford.
Rhaphaulus chrysalis, Pfr.
Helicina Andamanica, Bb.
H. Merguiensis, Pfr.
Province V.—THE CINGALESE.
Family Oncidiade.

bP>> >> b> b> > b> bb b> > b

Vaginula maculata, Zempleton.
Kamily Helicide.
Vitrina Edgariana, B.
V. irradians, Pfr.
V. membranacea, B.
Succinea Ceylanica, Pfr.
Helix bistrialis, Bech.*
H. Ceylanicea, Pfr.
. biciliata, Pfr.
. carneola, Pfr.
. Cingalensis, B.
. Chenui, Pfr.
. Charpentieri, Pfr.
. coriaria, Pfr.
. ceraria, B.

THT e eee

. concavospira, Pfr.
Helix clathratula, Pfr.

3B 2

377

3

lar

8

Yotes on the Indian terrestrial Gasteropoda.

Helix convexiuscula, Pfr.
. corylus, Heeve.

cyix, B.

. Emiliana, Pfr.

. (Corilla). erronea, Pfr.
. fallaciosa, Fer.*
galerus, 3B.

Ganoma, Pfr.
Gardneri, Pfr.
hemastoma, L.
hyphasina, Pfr.
Isabellina, Pfr.
Juliana, Gray.
Layardi, B.

. lychnia, B.*

miccyla, B.

al Fl fe] Co Fol Fol fos) el al (fd

melanotragus, Born.
HI. superba, Pfr.

. mononema, B.

. marecida, B.

. nepos, Pfr.

. novella, Pfr.

partita, Pfr.

perfucata, Pfr.

Phenix, Pfr.

politissima.

regulata, B.

(Corilla) Rivolii, Desk.

Rosomonda, B.

Skinner1, Heeve.

- semidecussata, P/r.

. serrucula, Pfr.

. subopaca, Pfr.

- subconoidea, Pfr.

. Taprobanensis, Dohrn.

. Thwaitesi, P/r.

. trifilosa, P/r.

. umbrina, Leeve.

sr eed cefiles|ifs=llsepils=lf==filce)fcefae(Moo)=cfilee)=efilsfise)l-mfils= =n

[No. 4,

1863.]

Notes on the Indian terrestrial Giasteropoda.

Helix vittata, Zul.

H. vilipensa, B.

H. Waltoni, Reeve.

H. Woodiana, Pfr.
Streptaxis Cingalensis, B.
8. Layardiana, B.
Bulimus albizonatus, Reeve.
. adumbratus, P/r.

. Ceylanicus, Pfr.

. eenopictus, Hutton.*
. fuscoventris, B.

. gracilis, Hutton.*

. intermedius, Pfr.

. Mavortius, Reeve.

. panos, B.

. proletarius.

. punctatus Anton.*

. rufopictus, B.

leeiuloeialesialeeeloe} aloe) los/mlosjmerinlorialesiace

. trifasciatus, Brug.
Achatina capillacea, Pfr.
. inornata, Pfr.

. nitens, Gray.

. punctogallana, Pfr.*
. pachycheila, B.

. parabilis, B.

. panetha, B.

. serena, B.

rrr PrP PPS PS

. veruina, B.
Pupa bicolor, Hutton.*
P. ceylanica, Pfr.
P. mimula, B.
P. muscerda, B.
Family Auriculide.
Melampus Ceylonicus, Petit.
M. Layardi, H. et A. ddams.
Pythia Ceylanica, Pfr.
P. ovata, Pfr.
Truncatella Ceylanica,

379

380

Notes on the Indian terrestrial Gasteropoda.

Family Cyclostomida.
Cyclophorus alabastrinus, P/r.
. annulatus, Zrosch.
. Bairdi, Pfr.
. Ceylanicus, Sow.
cratera, B.
eytopoma, B.
. cadiscus, B.
. involvulus, Mull.*
loxostoma, Pfr.
. punctatus, Grat.
. parapsis, B.
parva, B.
. Thwaitesi, Pfr.
Leptopoma apicatum, B.
. conulus, Pfr.
. elatum, Pfr.
. flammeum, Pfr.
. halophilum, B.
. orophilum, P.
. pecilum, Pfr.
. semiclausum, Pfr.
Cataulus Austenianus, Pfr.
. aureus, Pfr.
. Cuming, Pfr.
. decorus, B,
. duplicatus, Pfr.
. eurytrema, Pfr.
Layardi, Gray.

OAAAAAQAAQAAA

leat ell fel teal Jel [oh fe

. marginatus, Pfr.

. pyramidatus, Pfr.

. Templemanni, P/r.

. Thwaitesi, Pfr.

©. Blanfordi, Dohrn.
Pterocyclos bifrons, Pfr.
P. Cingalensis, B.

P. Cumingi, Pfr.

P. Troscheli, B.

AGAPOAaaaae

[No. 4,

1863.]

Notes on the Indian terrestrial Gasteropoda. 38L

Aulopoma grande, Pfr.
A. helicinum, Chem.

A. Itieri, Guer.

A. spheroideum, Dohrn.

Province VI.—THE GERMANIC.

But little is known of the portion of this vast province which comes
within the scope of my remarks, and I merely allude to it, as many of
its well known species wander down to the confines of India and must

clearly be arranged by themselves.

Family Limacide.
Parmacella etnilla, Hutton.
Vitrina baccata, Hutton.
Suecinea Pfeifferi, Ross.
S. putris, ZL.
Helix Candaharica, Pfr.
H. costata, Mull.
H. fulva, Drap.
H. nitida, Beck.
H. pulchella, Jul.
Bulimus eremita, B.
B. Grifftthu, B.
B. lubricus.
Pupa muscorum, L.
P. lapidaria, Hutton.

TasBuE I11.—Hevhibiting the numerical distribution of spectes in the

Provinces.

Some discrepancy may be remarked between this Table and Tables
I. and II., as some species are included in them, whose exact habitat
is not certainly known to me.

Genera. Provinces.

Fi os TE dpe aL Vie ave
WGC UCL. Wee. cosciscessecseess, OF. 1 ) 0) 0 oO
Mermna ACR epp es te. sceicecresee 0 0 0 1 1,0
AAI MR asso eos deestvace 2. 2 0 ] 0 Oo
AEMACcUla Oates. os sseiccvcs) 0. | O 0) 0 Oo 1
OVE LCA MP Aes pecdedeodecs 2 0 0 0 0 O
TOP aera cee ess enesas ace Of |. 0 2 aged
PAD UOROTIALE 2, thes joo 2ieieos dadede cae.) ky 0 1 0 oO
CCM OOD ie tects ivinntaesiier ses 1 6 1 i ne

382 Notes on the Indian terrestrial Gasteropoda.
Genera. Provinces.
Tent, eave
Helix, Z... ba 1, 22) 150 oe
Plectopy lis, 2. ‘@xduding Corila), Pye <0) ih 4 0
Sophina, pe on Oh ences UY 0) 3 0
Hypselostoma, iy Oo ) 2 0
Streptaxis, Gray. ... 1a) 2 5 2
Bulimus, Scop. Ahielt aaceeeea oils LO mules 6 Oi Hse
MOMS JOINS eka oadseneresconnsen, LLG) 8 4 9
Popa Drop eerseseesctdstisascuasdcc) 1 Om nEh 2 il 4
IBovisia| Page ei eins: teuionh cr Oneal O 0) 0
Clausilia WOOD Posada ceeeets uOumey O 0 2 0
Camptonyscyarssoccsu neces eer snccu) ai) miley 0 O 0
MelampusseWonteecmercasetrrsncc, | Ont 2 0 2
IPythia, Olen et ceccacsse-cesccssceeten Ola w P 1 2
Wassidulax Heri dws aasetecci ce \esclyahOh | Mommas 0 0
Auricula, Tier oe socrponcee tu O) ftes a 2 0
Carychium, O. F Muller. wot arama ume Ha lBblbe! kya Stle— 0 0
Truncatella, Risso. . eine Oey 0 iL
104 71 42.794 09 89
Diplommatina, Benson............... 8 O 2 1 0
Romatias OLUden tee eeee esecseeoes te @) 0) 0
Hydrocena, Parreyss. $8056 1) 0 4 0
Omoynenne, (CA rigs 24 05- coo nsaseb oon" On 1 0) 0) 0
Elly DOCVStis | OCISOMs ecu oeeaecee ee OURO 0 1 0
Clostophis, Benson. .........-0+-s- Oe 0 1 0
Opisthostoma, Blanford. a I @ 1 Q 0
Cyclophorus, Montfort. .. LOM si 6>, Loy As
Lagocheilus, Theobald MSS... LOO) 0) 1 0
Leptopoma, Pfeiffer. .. Lara, mittee) 0 2 8
Megalomastoma, Guilding. Sooroones a 0 1 0
Cataulus, Pfeiffer. ...... 200 One sO 0) Os a2
Pupina, Vignard....... seoemetnae wee O, 0 Ar
Pierocyclos wb ensona ry. acndcscee.csee- te ed 3 2 4,
Spimacwlumyee COrsOs creer ects souseonet 21 A) O (0) 0
Cyelobis\ Galdiige seren..).c a OS 1 0 0
Aulopoma, Proschel. ..........-....... O O 0 0 4
IRIMNMO SMO, SACS Ncocsossaoonesneon (WO) (0) 1 0)
Cyathopoma, Blanford............... O O 2 0 0)
PA WCr alias (ER CUE) Goaebmonscthbonnaeeapeey,.\eke) | nD Ai Maples 0
Streptaulus, Benson. ........ A 0) 0 0 0
Rhaphaulus, "Pfeiper.) so.0.. 0.0.2 2) Ov 0 0 i 0
Heliema, Lamarck cress soctiesece. 0% (OmmO 0 2 0)
Adi 1 AeRS! 0) ONG «905 ie eae
Total number of species per Province, 148 79 59 145 1380

LD OOOO

[No. 4,

P i
| ° | SoocooOC oC OOO SOOO COCOSCSCCE| eoocooooonowoooon| =

14

1863. ] The hot srings of Pai in the Tavoy district. 383

Account of a visit to the hot springs of Pai in the Tavoy district.
Ly Capt. J. F. Stevenson, Deputy Commissioner.

(Communicated by T. OLDHAM, Esq., F. R. 8.)

T have the pleasure of sending with this letter, a case containing four
quart bottles of water and conferve, one soda water bottle of the same,
and two packets of stones, which I collected a few daysago at the hot
springs near Paz in this district.

The four quart bottles ant the packet of stones not labelled, are
all from the remarkable springs which I believe to be partially,
(but I should say inaccurately,) described in Mason’s Tenasserim,
page 18. He says that “ According to Phillips they are hotter than
any on record out of volcanic regions, ‘with the questionable excep-
tion of three springs in China, which probably exceeded the tempera-
ture of the air from 70 to 120 degrees.’ The principal spring at Pai,
—for there are several, is in alittle sandy* basin in the midst of granite
rocks, on the margin} of a cold water stream, where it bubbles up
from three or four vents, and on immersing the thermometer into
one, the mercury rises to 198°, within fourteen degrees of boiling
water. Its location is ratber peculiar, not being in a valley like the
others I have seen, but on the side of a hill more than a thousandt
feet above the level of the sea, and surrounded by large masses of
coarse-grained granite recks, which seem to have been detached from.
the summit above.”

These springs are in a small mountain stream called by the people,
the hot-water stream, (Ye boo Hkyoung,) and about 2 miles from
the Pai river.

The soda-water bottle and the second packet of stones are labelled.
They are from a small spring on the bank of, and quite close to
the Paz river.

The Paz river is about 65 miles south from Tavoy town, near
the Mergui boundary. It rises in the range of hills which intersects
this district between the Tenasserim and the Tavoy river valleys,

* No sand.

+ See page 386.
{ 300 feet.

384 The hot springs of Pat in the Tavoy district. [No. 4,

and after a generally direct Hast and West course falls into the sea
about 6 miles below the village of Kyaukhtsay.

Pai Dap the nearest village to the springs, is about 5 miles East,
and inland from Kyaukhtsay ; and thence to the great hot springs on
the “ hot-water stream,” the distance is about 104 miles: the direction
of the road is generally Hast for about 8 miles, and then Southerly,
up the course of the hot stream for about 2 miles.

I visited these streams about a week ago in company with the
Rev. Charles Parish, Chaplain of Moulmein, and Lieutenant Harrison,
Deputy Commissioner of Mergui. The following is a short and I fear
unscientific account of the visit.

On the 21st January we left Kyaukhtsay about 6 a. M. and reached
Pai Dap a 7.30. This is a neat village of ten houses, pleasantly
situated on the North bank of the Pai river, about N. EH. from
Kyaukhtsay. Vt has a pretty good Zayat (rest house). The path
hence runs about East ; and generally through thick jungle. A good
deal of cutting down was necessary, to open it up in some places:
ground generally smooth and level. We halted after a brisk walk of
2 hours and 5 minutes, at a shady spot on the Paz stream, about 74
miles from Pai Dap, and started again between 2 and 3 P.M. We
were told that we were now about half way between Pai Dap and the
stream : and before leaving Pai Dap we had been led to expect that we
had a 20-mile march before us.

The distance from this halting-place proved te be only about
3 miles. The path much the same as in the first part of the journey,
with one or two bad bits : it was rather more up and down, and crossed
the Pai river in one or two deep places. The latter part, perhaps
half of it, was up the course of the hot-water stream :—and we came
to hot water, (that is the water of the streare was hot), ¢ of a mile
before we reached the springs.

A heavy column of steam, which I at first mistook for the smoke
of camp fires, or burning jungle, shewed us the whereabouts of the
hot springs, some 100 yards off. The last part of the path was
a steep ascent, but we estimated that we had not ascended altegether
more than 300 feet trom Pat Dap. The total distance thence was
about 104 miles. We found the springs in a narrow granite rock
channel, through which a shallow stream falls in little cascades, divided
by small pools. The most striking feature of the scene was the jet of

1863. ] The hot springs of Pai in the Tavoy district. 385

steam which seemed to give off the greater portion of the clouds of
steam overhead. It rushes out of a hole nearly midway down a cas-
cade some 6 feet high, with a noise precisely like that of a steam-jet,
and with such force, that it drives the water of the cascade horizontally
out 4 or 5 feet. The water which issues from this hole with the steam,
or at least comes into contact with the steam, was hot enough te boil
an egg well enough to eat, in 38 minutes. ‘There are several holes
in the pools above this cascade, but all within 15 yards of it, from
which hot water bubbles up. The stream above the pools containing
these bubbling holes, is cold, and the water, close to and around the
upper or higher holes of the stream, is also cold. The holes from
which the hot water spouts up are all small: the water from them is so
hot, that we boiled eggs in all of them, fit to eat in 3 minutes. No
steam arose from these holes. Thestream itself there is a cold stream,
until it reaches the hot water springs or holes: from these, jets of hot
water spout up into it, and the water below them becomes warm at
once: below the cascade it is hot and continues so, as we proved, for a
quarter of a mile ; perhaps further on. You will observe that Mason
records that the temperature of these springs is 198°. We all
thought it that, if not higher. By an unfortuyate mischance we
had not a thermometer with us. The water had no unpleasant taste
or smell.

There are other large and small jets of steam below the cascade ;
one about 380 yards lower down is a remarkable one. It escapes
in a broad column from under a rock with the loud sound of an
engine blowing off. All the rocks (granite) about the hot water
are hot: and the ground on which we slept, about 30 yards from the
stream, and several feet higher than it, became very hot under our
beds at night. We removed some stones and found the ground hot
beneath them. We dug a hole near our beds, and steam began to rise
from it at 8 or 9 inches from the surface of the ground. Two of our
party heard a rumbling sound several times during the night, which
may have been thunder, but which appeared to us to be subterranean.

We walked only about two miles of the way back, and descended
the rest of the distance in small bamboo rafts, (12 bamboos about
20 or 22 feet long), to Par Dap: water distance, about 12 miles:
time occupied, nearly 4 hours. About half way down we collected the
water in the Soda water bottle, and the labelled stones, on the left

3c 2

386 The hot springs of Pai m the Tavoy district. {No. 4,

bank of the Pai river ; the water here was very shallow, without steam
or bubbles. It contained much conferve ; and you will see that the
stones from it are coated with a saline crust.

Memorandwm.— By A. TwrEn, Esq.

T have examined the water from the spring near Pai. The sub-
stances present are Iron, Alumina, Lime, Potash, Soda, Silica, Hydro-
chlorie Acid, Sulphuric Acid, Hydro-sulphuric Acid and Organic matter
which is nitrogenous.

Of the 4 bottles sent, 2 were empty, one but half full, through being
imperfectly corked, and the fourth held, besides water, a considerable
quantity of stones and water plants. i

The siliceous deposit contains in addition to Silica, Iron, Alumina,
Lime, Potash, Soda, a trace of Magnesia, Carbonic Acid, Sulphuric Acid,
Hydrochloric Acid and Organic Matter. There is about 12 to 14 per
cent. of soluble matter, of which the greater part is Carbonate of lime.

The Soda water bottle which held water from the second. spring had
nothing in it but stones and conferve. This had a fetid smell, was
alkaline to test paper, and evolved Ammonia on being treated with
Hydrate of lime.

Some of the stones which accompanied the Soda water bottle are
coated with deposit from the spring, but not in any quantity: this
is calcareous.

1863. ] A visit ta Xiengmai. 387

A visit to Xiengmat, the principal City of the Laos or Shan States.—
By Sir Rosert H. Scoompurer, At. #. k. S., Her Majesty's
Consul ut Siam.

It will be requisite before I read my remarks on Xiengmai to pre-
face them by some observations. ‘The journey was undertaken to ac-
quire some knowledge of the interior of Siam as far as the city of Xieng-
mai,* called variously Changmai, Zimay, Zumay, and in the inflated
language of the Asiatics, by the Burmese, “ the City of the Golden
Palace,” although if such a splendid structure once existed, it must
have been swept away, for nothing palatial did I observe in the struc-
ture of any of the habitations in that city.

From Xiengmai, I planned to turn eastward to Maulmain and by the
Gulf of Bengal to Tavoy, and to return from thence by crossing the
ereat mountain chain to Bangkok.

His Majesty the first King had provided me with a royal letter,
enjoining the authorities of the places through which we had to pass,
to give us every assistance, and to provide us with provisions, where
such were to be had, on the public account. ‘Two comfortable boats,
the oarsmen dressed in the Royal livery, were placed at my disposal ;
Mr. Clarke, one of the student interpreters of the Consulate, and two
nephews of the King, sons of Prince Krom Lluang Wongsa, who were
then residing with me in the Consulate, accompanied me.

We left Bangkok on the 12th of December, 1859, rapidly progress-
ing, but having passed the tidal waters, we found soon that we had
started a fortnight too late for our heavy boats. The river was rapidly
falling, and we had often to dig channels through the sandbanks to
get along.

On the 28th day after our departure from Bangkok, we reached
Raheng the most southern of the Lao cities. Here we resolved at
once to send the boats back to Bangkok, and to continue our journey
over land on elephants.

This mode ot travelling was certainly any thing but comfortable ;
and although we had two ponies to vary it occasionally, the fourteen days
which we reyuired to reach Lamboon were fatiguing and tedious

* The late Bishop Palegoix explained to me that it was called Xiengmai, the

new City, in contradistinction of the one which had been destroyed by the Baro-
ma-zaxa-thirat in 1480,

388 A visit to Xiengmai. [No. 4,

enough. We arrived at. Lamboon on the 11th of February and left
it on the 14th, much to the regret of the Governor, who wished us to
stay some time longer. I shall now take up my more detailed descrip-
tion of our further progress to Xiengmai, which is only one day’s jour-
ney from Lamboon.

As already mentioned, we left Lamboon at half-past 9 o’clock
A. M., of the 14th February, passed round the north gate and turned
into the Xiengmai road. The suburb of the city extended for more
than half a mile on our right. We traversed the canal which brings
the water from the Méping to Lamboon, serving in its course to
irrigate the whole adjacent country by numerous side canals. At the
point where we forded it, branches as large as the main canal itself
flow to the right and to the left. Indeed it was a perfect network of
canalization, so that every cultivator might get his supply of water.

Villages and habitations were on both sides of our road. It was a
succession of them ; generally surrounded with trees, they formed bands
extending N. and 8., between which, tor miles in breadth, the ground
was cultivated with rice.

Our road led us through the village of Luk—the Wat at its entrance
is very neat; the roof is supported within by eight columns of scarlet
colour, richly ornamented with gilt tracery. The other buildings
which belong to the Wat were merely built of unbaked bricks.

Having passed the groves of trees that surround the village, we saw
before us on both sides of the canal, gardens planted with vegetables,
tobacco, safflower, and here and there some indigo. A number of women
and girls, some of the latter no more than five or six years of age,
were employed to water the plants, while the men were sitting under
the shade of a shelter, the frame prepared of bamboo and covered with
large leaves, so constructed that it might be turned east or west accord-
ing to the position of the sun, their only employment being to smoke
and to see what the women and children were doing. To facilitate the
method of irrigation a kind of huge shovel or ladle of basket-work,
fixed to a pole, is used, which works upon a crinkle or fork, and dips
in the canal; the water is taken up and transferred to a tank, from
whence it flows by trenches to the different parts of the field.

From Bang Pokok, a hamlet, the elephants had to wade for a con-
siderable distance through water. The canal had been forced by a
dam to throw its waters over the adjacent fields, to render them pro-

1863.] A visit to Xiengmai. 389

per for transplanting the yet tender rice-plants. What a multitude
there were employed!—men, women and children, waded more than
ankle deep,—every one so busy—a kind of basket slung over their
shoulders which contained the young plants—a stick in their right
hand, to thrust a hole in the soil below the water, the left ready to
place there one of the seedlings, and to insure for it a hold by pressing
the mud to its roots: the number of plants thus fixed into the soil in
a given time, is very large.

Our harvest gatherings, the fields speckled with people, can only
convey an idea of the prospect before me—and nevertheless how ditter-
ent the persons thus occupied, how difierent the scenery from that in
my own home, which brought the comparison to my recollection !

Having passed the large village Tavong-tawng, we had to cross the
river Ping to its right bank, (which, from its junction with the Wang
forms the Me’nam). While fording it, I admired ‘the pretty view
which the tower or Pagoda of Wat Hong offered to us, rising to a
height of above 150 feet, the river scenery lovely, with high mountains
in the back ground, and the banks lmed with numerous people, led by
curiosity to see us pass, the fair sex dressed in Lao petticoats, which
in consequence of their bright colours, added to the liveliness of the
picture.

Having crossed the river, we saw Xiengmai before us, distant about
a mile, the intervening space consisting of rice-fields, only interrupted
by Wat Papa-ow surrounded by a wall and shaded by large trees.
On approaching the city, I saw a number of peculiarly shaped towers,
evidently built of bricks, and so odd in appearance that it seemed they
had been standing there for centuries, without any person caring
whether they might fall down, or be taken possession of by a tropical
vegetation, which had already covered them with twiners and creepers.
These towerlets ace Phratshedees, the topes of Buddhist architecture.

Our residence had been ezected outside the city walls, between the
bridge which leads over the Méping and the east gate of Xiengmai.
The principal house erected for our reception, was on a larger scale,
and neater in execution, than any we had yet mhabited. Opposite
stood the public Sala, a large wooden building ; near it a little tower-
let likewise of wood, as a look-out, and the usual stand for mounting
and dismounting the elephants ; the whole space, including the huts for
our own servants, was surrounded by a fence constructed of bamboo.

390 A visit te Xiengmar. [No. 4,

With the exception of the Sala and the look-out, the other structures
had been all expressly prepared for us—moreover sheds had been built
outside the fence for our escort.

We found a large number of people assembled between the bridge
and the city gate to witness our arrival ; some were standing ; others,
sitting in groups or pressing near us. They were a medley crowd.
The true Lao in turbaned kerchief, with his tartan-like Khatung,
worn as the Scotch wear their plaid; the Thai or Siamese merely
girdled round the loins ; the fat smiling Chinese in his blue vestments ;
and to make the medley still more conspicuous, there were likewise
inhabitants from Muang Teh in the Chinese Province of Yunnan, a
caravan of which had arrived a day or two previous: all these people
added to the peculiarity of the scene before us. Fatigued, I slept
soundly, but what a stir there was on awakening, from the early morn-
ing hours, in front of our residence. The bridge is the great pub-
lic thorough-fare fos the population residing on the left bank of the
Méping, not only in the suburb, but likewise for those in the adjacent
country. A number of these persons come daily to town, to sell or
purchase: the women entered in parties, consisting of twenty or
thirty ; seldom accompanied by men, passing in single file towards
the city gate. The Lao females, have long glossy hair of an mtense
black, which, with tidy persons, is neatly plaited and gathered in a
knot behix.d, the hair of the forehead bemg drawn up backwards in
the manner of the Chinese women. They wear the Lao petticoat,
more or less ornamented with gold thread, and embroidered with silk
of bright colours. The married womer are moreover dressed in a
jacket or spenser, closely fitting as far as the waist, and from thence
expanding more amply until it reaches nearly to the knee. This vest- ,
ment resembles the polka spenser formerly so fashionable in England
and on the Continent. Those who can atiord it, have rich necklaces,
and rings in their ears and on their fingers ; their arms and ankles sur-
rounded by circlets of gold or silver ; a silk shawl or scarf of red or rose
colour is thrown loosely over their shoulders. The latter refers to the
married women—young ladies, unmarried, do not dress above their
waist.

Black and shining as their hair is, the racemes of the white flowered
Moringa or the fragrant Vateria, or if such be not in blossom, those

of any other tree or plant similar in coiour, set it off much more by

1863. ] A visit to Xiengmat. 391

the great contrast, when these flowers are placed in their raven tresses.
The mouth of the young girls is formed exquisitely. But few of the
Lao women indulge in betel chewing, hence they do not render that
organ, so fairly formed by nature, hideous by the prevailing custom of
the Thai; and their teeth remain white as nature made them.

Though much fairer in colour, in stature they, like the Indians of
Guiana, very seldom veach a height above 4 feet 10 inches.

The men wear generally the Khatung or Lao plaid, but a number
are dressed in blue or white tunics, fitting closely and reaching like
the spenser of the women to the knee. ‘The hair of the head is allow-
ed to grow; only when it becomes too long, it is cut; some have
whiskers, a custom not adopted by the Thai, where nature has yielded
him hairs on his cheeks. I observed but few instances of the tuft of
hair on the crown, as worn by the Siamese proper.

They dress their children very neatly ; on the head, they place a
cap consisting of seven pieces, in the shape of a cardinal’s cap, made
of scarlet cloth with a band of black velvet below, embroidered with
gold thread. Boys of six years and upwards, are dressed in the close
fitting tunic, and, acvording to the wealth and standing of the parents
they are made of velvet, or white cotton cloth.

The Laos consist, it may be said, of two clans, namely such as who,
if men, paint their bodies from the waist to the knee, and designate
themselves as the Thong dam or “ black bellies,’ and the others who
do not paiut, as Thong Khao or “ white bellies.” I saw more of the
former than of the latter in and about Xiengmai. The tattooing
represents figures of dragons, tigers, labyrinths, &e. The operation
of producing these figures is upon the same principle as our sailors
employ, to have anchors, crosses and other figures printed upon their
arms. Several of our own men had the operation performed, without
exhibiting their suffering great pain under the operation.

There is little design in the tattooing ; sometimes patches of colour
produced by Indigo, exhibit no figure whatever.

The Guiana Indians show much more design in painting their
bodies, and a belle of the Carib or Macusi tribe, will not consider it too
tedious, when preparing for attendance at some great display, to sub-
mit to the painter’s brush for 8 or 10 hours at a sitting.

The generality of the men and women among the Lao, walk like the
Indians of Guiana, one foot set before the other, without turning the

3 D

392 A visit to Xiengma. [No. 4,

little toe outside. They have another fashion similar to the Guianese,
namely the ear-lap is bored and a piece of bamboo is inserted, its two
ends ornamented by a piece of looking-glass ; or in lieu of the bamboo
merely a scroll of bark is placed in the ear-lap. This fashion belongs
more particularly to the inhabitants of the eastern province, of which
Muang Nan is the capital. A number of these people were in XMieng-
mai on trading speculations, having brought cotton for sale to where
but little is cultivated. They were staying en the other side of the
river during their sojourn, and daily passed our place in going to the
city: they could not fail attracting attention by their darker com-
plexion and slighter stature than the Laos. Their dress is also very
different : they have trowsers like the Chinese and a small jacket of
cotton cloth, that once might have been white but now looks doubtful
as regards colour. The hair is worr tied up in a knot at the back
part of the head, hke that of the Lao females, with the diiference that
they do not keep it in such gocd order. Their legs are pamted like
those of the Lao Thong-dam, and the head is covered by a plaited hat
with a most expansive rim, to protect the bronze features of its
wearer against the effects of the sun.

The Deputy Viceroy Chao Operat called on us shortly after noon.
He was a man of an advanced age, dressed meanly without shirt or
shoes, very different in appearance from any of the officials of a similar
rank which I had previously met. He came on foot, observing that
some disease from which he suifered, prevented him from riding on
horseback. We of course used our ponies to carry us to his residence
after our interview had ended, and he had proposed that we should
accompany him there.

The King’s letter was conveyed in the usual manner te the Deputy
Viceroy’s residence. The latter was anything but palatial for so high
a personage: the greatest ornaments in the hall were a large number
of embroidered pillows—similar to the ene which I had received in
Bangkok from his superior, the actual Viceroy Chao-kavi Rorot
Suriwong, who was then there on a visit.

We had some difficulty to get a person to read the letter written to
him by the King’s order, which was in ths Siamese language and
characters: the Lao differs in both points, and I am told that the dif-
ference is more thar dialectical. The Officer who came with us from
Raheng, read it ultimately to the prostrate multitude, the Chao Operat

1863. ] A visit to Xiengmai. 393

keeping his high backed chair, and we ours, for I made it always a
pot to have carried to such audiences, two cane chairs for myself
and Mr. Clarke, which I had brought with me froia Bangkok, (and IL
may as well observe en parenthese, | brought them back thither on.
my return).

As soon as the ceremony was performed, we returned to our resi-
dence ; I saw already that Chao Operat was not very favourably
inclined to us.

On our return from the Deputy Viceroy, we took a ride through
the town. The bazar is held ip the principal street, extending east and
west : the goods for sale are exposed in open stalls along the lines of the
street. ‘They consist of English manufactured goods, such as cotton
handkerchiefs, prints, cups and saucers, plates, needles and thread ;
raw silk from China, lacquered boxes from Ava and a number of knick
knacks from other countries. For the sake of opposition, I believe,
speculating geniuses exhibit for sale in the next stall, pork, vegetables,
and the indispensable betel-nut with all its accessories. There were,
likewise short clay-pipes and tobacco finely cut, similar to the Turkish,
for supplying them with the necessary ingredient. The stalls in
the bazar are tenanted by women, who, when their attention is not
claimed by purchasers, occupy themselves with making those pretty
embellishments or embroideries worked with gold thread and all kinds
of coloured silks, which adorn the Lao ladies’ petticoats. Others were
occupied in embroidering upon black velvet, ornamental designs accord-
ing to their conception, for the covering of head cushions, and here and
there the mother would have her darling, of course the youngest, to
nurse, notwithstanding that her fingers were busily employed in em-
broidering. The silk for the manufacture of petticoats, &c., is import-
ed from the Chinese territories.

We extended our ride round the town “ proper” not including the
suburb. It is surrounded by a double wall—each wall having a ditch
in front. The entrance to the town is by double gates with bastions to
protect them. The suburbs are stockaded, but the gates of that per-
tion of the town, are also fortified. I regret that some differences
which arose between myself and Chao Operat, regarding the jurisdiction
over British subjects residing in Xiengmai, rendered every act I did,
suspicious in the eyes of that individual, and I could not ascertain with
precision the extent of the city. I believe, however, that it is no less

3D 2

304: A visit to Xiengmai. [No. 4

than two miles and a half in length, including the suburb to the south-
west. ‘The number of inhabitants amounts probably to 50,000, of whom
5,000 are able to bear arms: such a contingent force was furnished to
Prince Krom Lluang Wongsa in his late attack upon Chiangtung.

The streets of the city have originally been laid out at right angles.
Time it seems has worked changes with regard to their regularity ;
nevertheless I have not seen any other Siamese city, laid out appar-
ently so regularly at its foundation, as Xiengmai appears to have been.

The habitations are seldom, if ever, placed so as to front the street ;
they stand some distance back. In their structure they do not differ
materially from such as I saw in the other Lao towns: however
those of the high nobility are not surrounded with walls as in Lakong,
to prevent any vulgar prying on what is going on within.

There are numerous Wats in the city, but none can vie in extent
or appearance with Wat Luang in Lamboon. At some of the Wats I
noted the peculiar towerlets or Phratshedees. The number of these
isolated towerleis is large; they not only surround the city, but
extend for a mile or more beyond it, principally to the west. I have
already remarked that they are the topes of Buddhist architecture,
erected to commemorate some of the actions of the last Buddha, when
wandering upon our globe, promulgating his doctrines. I doubt that
they contain relics. ‘“‘ We pray to Gaudama on passing a Phratshedee,”
an intelligent person told me, “ they are built in memory of him and
his divine acts, and some of his doctrines are written there on tablets.”

These remarkable towers are only cased with stone-work and filled up
with the soil from near to the place where they stand. I judge so from
two or three instances where the stone casing had given way so as to
expose the interior mass. Half way up the height of the tower, seen
from outside, is a belt or string course—sometimes the space is divided
and there are two ; and at about 30 to 40 fest above the base, rises the
dome, crowned by a fee with narrow blind windows, terminating in a
spire consisting of from 5 to 7 umbrellas or disks, each decreasing in
size until the spire ends in a sharp point, ornamented with small bells,
that tinkle when they are moved by the wind. Only in a few instances
the domes have retained their termination perfect: owing to neglect
of the requisite repairs, they are mostly broken off.

The nature and object of topes at Xiengmai, the only place where
I have seen them in Siam, not connected with Wats or forming parts

1868. | A. visit to Xiengmai. 395

of the temple for worship, is no doubt the same as in Central India,
in the Punjaub, Afghanistan and in Ceylon; either to contain relics
of Buddha and his disciples, or to commemorate some of his acts dur-
ing his pilgrimage upon earth.

There are few persons at Bangkok who have not heard of the cele-
brated image of Buddha, which, by those who follow his religion, is
considered to be the acme of what can be adored in a visible shape. 1t
is now in the Royal Wat.

This image was discovered in 1486 in the city of Chiangrai or
Xiengrai about forty miles N. N. E. from Xiengmai. A small pagoda
which contained this precious image, over which a second building had
been erected, was struck by lightning, and thus it was exposed to view.

This precious image was removed to Xiengmai, (then as now the
principal town of the Lao country,) which was being rebuilt after
its destruction in 1480. Several other localities, amongst them
Lamboon, were afterwards assigned to preserve it, until it was ultimate-
ly transferred to Bangkok in 1779. It was formerly reported the
image had been worked out of an emerald, it is however only green
jasper.

The bridge which leads over the Meping seems of considerable age :
(the river is here 380 feet wide, as [ ascertained by measurement)
and although men, horses and cattle pass over it, the elephants have
to ford the river. These animals are too heavy for such a frail structure,
ot which the greater number of planks that stretch across horizontally,
are not even fixed by wooden pegs or iron nails. The clattering
noise of these loose planks, when a drove of oxen is passing over
the bridge, is almost stunning, and has repeatedly awaked me out
of sleep at night, when sounds are so much more distinct than during
day.

There are many cocoa and betel-nut trees in and arouud Xiengmai.
Oil is prepared from the first, and the betel-nut forms an article of
commerce, being exported from Xiengmai, after setting aside what is
used for home consumption. Indeed the produce of the. trees for
export is far from sufficient for the more eastern and northern Lao
states, where few or none of the palms that produce the nut grow;
hence large quantities are brought from Pegu and the Tenasserim
provinces. Both these kinds of palms, namely the cocoa and betel,
seem to thrive very well at Xiengmai. While I was there, two dry cocoa-

396 A visit to Xiengmai. [No. 4,

nuts were brought to me, grown at Xiengmai, the one measuring
2 feet 8 inches, the other 2 feet 6 inches in circumference.

Shaddocks or pumplemose, oranges, citrons and limes, bananas,
and plantains are likewise raised, but of the two first kinds of fruits
I have scarcely found one of a good taste. The Viceroy whom I
met at Bangkok, told me, that there was only a single mangosteen
tree in Xiengmai, and that in consequence of the cold temperature, it
was in a sickly state and seldom produced fruit. At the bazar a number
of kitchen herbs, may, however, be found, such as cucumbers, onions,
garlic, beans, and lettuce.

The customs of the Lao people resemble in general those of the
Siamese. Marriage contracts are made verbally, the parents of the
girl receiving a compensation from the future husband, for the loss
which they suffer by having no further assistance from their daughter
in their daily labour. The amount of that compensation depends
upon the bride’s beauty, youth and family connections. It seems the
minimum is 40 Rupees (£4)

They practise cremation for such as die of a natural death—that
is, if the relations can pay the expenses connected with it—but the
remains of such as lose life by accident, as by drowning, by a fall, or
being killed by an animal, cannot be burned but must be interred.

The smoking of cigars is very common amongst the women—they
sometimes use pipes which are made of the rhizoma or rootstock
of the bamboo, nicely carved. Little girls, no more than 6 or 7 years
of age imitate their elders. It is quite amusing to see with what
gravity these children enjoy their weed. On the other hand, I have
not seen that the Lao females use the betel-nut to the same extent as
the Siamese: hence, as I have already observed, they do not show
those distorted mouths which disfigure the sex in Bangkok, and render
their teeth black and corroded.

On the north-eastern angle of the town is an extensive marshy
ground. During the rainy season it forms a large expanse of water
which has given rise to the accounts that prevailed in the 17th and
18th century, that it was a large lake, something like the fabled lake
of Parince of the western continent, a kind of Caspian, and that the
Menam flowed out of it.

This famous lake which owes its existence to the low level of
ground and its waters to the accumulation of rain or the overflowing

1863. | A. visit to Xiengmai. 397

of the Méping which flows at a short distance, is frequented by a
large number of wading birds, namely waterfowls, ducks, teal, egrets,
and a kind of swan-goose. Nor is the Nock Bua wanting; and occa-
sionally a Karen bird, the flesh of its breast yielding excellent steaks,
may be shot there.

Amongst the articles which I saw carried for sale to the bazar, are
large rolls of paper of the usual Siamese kind. It is prepared from the
bark of two different kinds of trees, (one of which is the Ton Kain of
the Siamese). Each roll of the manufactured paper consists of 3 sheets,
5 feet long and 2 feet 7 inches broad. Such a roll is sold at the rate of
the eighth of a rupee or about three pence. They give it sometimes
a greenish or bluish tint, but in general it is of a dusky white.

Chao Operat had expressed a wish to present some gifts, according to
Lao custom to the young princes Ong Teng and Ong Sawa who were
with me. ‘The ceremony took place in the large Sala adjacent to our
residence. The Deputy Viceroy did not come himself, but sent one
of his high nobles accompanied by some other officers of rank.

Two pyramids of flowers, consisting of three rows, one above the other,
but each smaller than the preceding and the whole about 5 feet high,
were carried before the procession—then came two smaller ones, of
more intrinsic value, each of the branchlets of the pyramids ending in
a kind of network with a rupee in it. ‘There were 50 of these on one
tree, and 49 on the other, the missing one having probably found its way
to the fob of one of the attendants, or rather to the corner of his girdle.

The pyramids having been placed in the middle of the Sala, a num-
ber of dishes with legs of pork, fowls, fish, eggs, fruits, vegetables, &c.,
were placed around them. Ong Teng and Ong Sawa squatted on the
ground near the pyramids; one of the noblemen then stept forward,
and having seated himself near the young princes, he made his salaam
and took a book out of his girdle, and read a homily or prayer of ten
tedious pages, addressed to Buddha, invoking him to protect the young
princes during their journey, and to vouchsafe their safe return to their
parents and friends. The prayer finished, he tore down one of the long
cotton threads which were hanging from the branches of the larger
pyramids, and taking the end part, about four inches in length, in his
hands, he passed the rest from the wrist of Ong Teng to the end of
the boy’s forefinger, murmuring all the time some sentence or incanta-
tion—he then tore off the short end which he had kept in his hand,

398 A visit to Xiengma. [No. 4,

and threw it away, for in it according to their superstition all the evi]
was embodied, winding, as already mentioned, the long part of the
thread around the wrist as a talisman. The same operation was gone
through with the left hand. Some of the noblemen who were present
followed his example, and the second prince Ong Sawa having been
performed upon in a gimilar manner, the ceremony was over. Not
the slightest decorum was observed during it, the people present
talking, smoking, and making jokes while the exhortation was being
read.

I had observed at a short distance between our residence and the
city wall, two monuments or resting-places of the dead, surrounded by
a railing and kept in good order. It was entirely an accident that I
addressed the Chao Ratcheput who was close to me in the Sala when
the ceremony took place, asking him whose graves they were. “ They
are those of my parents,” he said, “ their ashes after cremation had
taken place, were interred here. Twice a year I come to put flowers
over their graves, and have the railing restored.”

I thought that this care bestowed upon the resting-place of his
parents showed as deep an affection as the temples erected by the high
nobility and the opulent in Bangkok, over the graves of their nearest
relations.

Our delay at Xiengmai became irksome. Chao Operat put all pos-
sible difficulties in the way of our departure. In consequence of his
detaining some British subjects against their will in Xiengmai, I had
some differences with him and from that time none of the persons
who had been previously so friendly with us, ventured to come near us °
—nay, we even found difficulties in purchasing provisions, the people
being afraid to seli to us. After repeated delays we got under way at
last on the 27th of February, having been detained thirteen days in
Xiengmai. The number of elephants at starting was not complete and
Chao Operat refused obstinately to let us have any horses, although :t
was expressly mentioned in the king’s letter. It was then that Chao-
puri-eatenah, seeing our disappointment, presented to Mr. Clarke and
myself, each a pony of his own stud, so that we might occasionally
relieve the monotony and hardship of elephant riding. [I felt grateful
to the donor, and brought the pony safely with me to Bangkok.

I shall now hurry on to the conclusion. The number of elephants was
ultimately increased to 89—our escort consisted of 55 soldiers and 85

1863. | A visit to Xiengmai. 399

persons to attend to the elephants, carriers, &c., indeed ourselves
included and the boatmen from Bangkok, we mustered 150 men. We
had to traverse the regions infested by the Red Karens, a wild and
predatory Indian tribe, who had recently been very troublesome ;
hence so numerous an escort was requisite.

Although we had not received much courtesy and attention from
the Operat while in Xiengmai, he had by all means exercised his
authority under the King’s letter, and as long as we travelled in the
Siamese territory, we found comfortable night quarters erected, when
arriving at our halting-place, a party having been always sent in
advance for that purpose.

The journey from Xiengmai to Maulmain occupied us twenty-four
days ; from thence we went by steamer to Tavoy, and again resorting to
elephants for our transport, we crossed the great Central mountain
ridge, which being a spur of the great Himalaya, traverses the Malay
Peninsula, and ends at Cape Romania. We had a journey of eight days
from Tavoy to the mouth of the Menam noi where that rivulet falls
into the Canbari river near Chai-Yoke. Our journey from Tavoy
to Chai-Yoke occupied eight days, the report that it is only a distance
of a couple of days is erroneous. At last we arrived safely at Bankok.

We had been absent from it 185 days, 86 of which found us under
way.

We felt very grateful that our journey had been accomplished with-
out any further drawback than the loss of nearly all that i had col-
lected in illustration of Natural History. Five days of almost inces-
sant rains during our journey from Tavoy to the central mountain
ridge, was sufficient to defy the precautions which had been taken to
secure my gatherings: moreover in lieu of the nice howdees which we
had in our journey from Xiengmai, here we had miserable structures,
only to be compared to the crates in which earthenware is packed,
and open to the whole influence of the weather. During the period
that we had to undergo this ordeal, the order of the day was, that
every one of us, previous to the morning’s cup of cofiee being served,
had to take two grains of quinine in a wine-glass full of water—and
to this remedy next to God’s will, I ascribe it, that all of us escaped
the pernicious jungle fever, more fatal to Huropeans and Americans
ati the setting in of the rainy season than at any other time.

3

400 Notes on the Tribes of the Eastern Frontier. [No. 4

* Notes on the Tribes of the Eastern Frontier, No. I—By J. H.
O’DoneEL, Esq., Revenue Surveyor of Arracan.

(Conmunicated by A. Grote, Esq.)

The Survey of the northern portion of the Akyab district and the
remaining portion of the frontier bordering on Chittagong was finished
in March last. A high range of hills, called Modooting, Mraneedong
and Yandong forms a natural boundary between the two districts. Op-
posite Tulukmee the altitude is about 2,500 feet, farther north the
altitude increases to 5,000 feet at Yandong. ‘To the eastward of this
boundary range the Koladyne river flows at a distance of 10 to 16
miles. From Tulukmee northwards and within 12 miles along the banks
of the river, there are 6 villages on the right bank and four on the
left bank: no other villages are met with higher up for 60 miles, the
intermediate country being totally uninhabited. The Loosai Kookees
reside on the west of the boundary range. The independent Shendoos
occupy the tract of country to the east of the Koladyne river, from
the mouth of the Sulla Kheong northwards. Further north, to the
28rd parallel of north latitude, the country is occupied by the indepen-
dent tribes of Muneepoor, Arracan and Ava; there is no recognised
frontier in that direction and it will be necessary to fix a frontier line
after the survey towards the Yeomadoung range is finished.

In 1851 Captain Tickell proceeded as far as Tulukmee and tried
to induce the Khoomee Chiefs to come in. From his published
Journal, it appears that 4 or 5 subordinate chiefs attended, but the
heads of the most powerful clans made excuses. It was not however
till the last cold season that the first attempt was made to explore
the country on the Upper Koladyne, oceupied by fierce wild tribes,
who have for years committed periodical aggressions on the inhabitants
of the lower hills and lowland border villages both in the Akyab and
Chittagong districts. In April and May 1859, several dacoities were
committed on the Myo river and within the northern lowland circles
on the Koladyne ; many persons were killed, and their wives and chil-
dren carried away as slaves and sold. In Dec. 1859 a dacoity was
committed 5 miles from my camp at Ralla. The coolies were so
alarmed, that a few days after, most of them deserted.

* Extract from a letter to the Commissioner of Arrakan.

1863. | Notes on the Tribes of the Eastern Frontier. 401

The Koladyne circle includes within its limits an area of 2,652
square miles. The population consists of Kheongthas, Mroos,
Khoomees and Shendoos, all distinguished from the people of the
plains by peculiar usages. The Kheongthas live in 9 villages, intermixed
with the Khoomees far apart from each other: they number 713 souls.
Of these, 189 are cultivators who pay 5 Rs. each annually, 1 Rupee
land rent and 4 Rupees capitation tax. The Mroos occupy 12 villages
on the Mee Kheong all within 8 miles of Koladyne Thannah; they
number 839 souls ; of these 1386 are cultivators who pay 3 Rupees
each annually. Both Kheougthas and Mroos are in general quiet,
inoffensive people, similar to the Joomeea Mughs. Tulukmee is a
Kheongtha village with thirty houses ; during the day the people live
on land, but at night they occupy large substantial floating huts
moved into the middle of the stream, being afraid of the secret and
sudden attacks made by their wild neighbours.

The Khoomees, the largest and most important of the hill tribes in
Ayracan, occupy the country on both banks of the Koladyne river,
from the thannah to the mouth of the Sulla Kheong. Their chief
occupation apparently is agricultural industry and they manufacture
cloths, spears and gunpowder. All or nearly all practise dacoity.
They do not acknowledge the authority of any Rajah or paramount
chief, and although they respect and obey their own village chiets
and heads of elans, each chieftain is in some measure under the control
of the confederate chiefs. They are divided into 27 clans, who occupy
104 villages, and the estimated number of inhabitants is about 12,000
souls, over whom our authority has never been practically established.
The spear and shield are sometimes used, but all adult males are armed
with muskets kept clean and ready for use. 'The most powerful clans,
Khoongchoo, Khoong, Anoo, and Yeasing are called Shendoos, they
reside on the higher ranges distant from the river, and pay no revenue ;
those living towards Tulukmee speak a different language from the
southern Khoomees. The Keok collects annually about 608 Rs. as
land rent, &., from the Khoomees. The total amount annually col-
lected from Kheongthas, Mroos, and Khoomees is 2,165 Rupees.
The independent Shendoos, cailed Poehs by the Muneepoorees, occupy
the lofty and distant ranges on the eastern bank of the Koladyne,
northwards from the mouth of the Sulla Kheong. They are held in
great diead both by the Khoomees and other hil! people living lower

dE 2

402 Notes en the Tribes of the Kastern Frontier. [No. 4,

down. They speak a different language, understood only by a few of
the nearest Khoomees with whom they barter cloths and other articles.
Several Shendoos were slain in an attempt to levy black mail, and
within the last 2 years there has been little or no intercourse between
them. Being at feud with each other, no accurate information could
be obtained of the population or the precise limits of the Shendoo
country.

My best endeavours have been directed to carry out the instruc-
tions contained in your letter No, 348 of the 12th October, 1859.
I was always of opinion that without kindness and conciliatory
measures, there was not the slightest chance of my being able to
complete the duties entrusted to me in a satisfactory manner. I
availed myself of every*opportunity to reconcile the people of one
village with another with whom they are at feud. Rangkreegree and
Kaffa, village chiefs of the same clan, are the only two Khoomees now
at feud with each other ; this is a blood-feud, and it is not likely it will
ever be adjusted till both become better men. There are no other
internal feuds among the different clans of Khoomees. For the first
two months of my stay in the hills, my proceedings were viewed with
apprehensive jealousy by the chiefs Moungkhine, chief of the clan
Yeasing who had committed dacoities near the thannah a few years
ago, at first objected to my parties surveying near his village, but
some months after, finding that all the most influential chiefs had paid
their respects to me, he offered no further resistance.

You are well aware that the Khoomees have always avoided
any intercourse with the local authorities. Military expeditions had
failed in effectually putting down their mroads, for the troops seldom
penetrated beyond a short distance from the thannah, the country being
most difficult of access. Before the troops reached the villages to be
attacked, the robbers received timely notice, and deserted their villages,
taking away their families with them, ‘There are no paths, and the
hills being covered with lofty forest, no guides would venture to assist
in making a search for fear of their lives. We knew nothing de-
finitely of the most distant clanswho are separated by language, manners,
prejudices of race, and a most difficult hilly country, from the neigh-
bouring population. One of the leading points therefore, to which my
attention was directed, was to induce the chiefs to meet me, so as to
ascertain from them, how they propose that the system of dacoity and

1863. | Notes on the Tribes of the Kastern Frontier. 403

marauding, which they all practise to a great extent, might be put down.
I found it at first most difficult to induce the most powerful chiefs
to meet me,and to remove the general dread and distrust that prevailed.
At the first conference, to quiet their fears, I fully explained that my
intentions were peaceable, and that my object was to survey and make
a map of the country. I also explained to them that dacoity would in
future be promptly and severely punished, and asked them how they
proposed to put a stop to the same, appealing to the oldest chiefs, who
seemed to possess considerable influence over the others. Many of
them indignantly denied that they were robber chiefs ; others were
noisy, and put thew hands to their sides, to feel they had daggers to
defend themselves in case of treachery. After urging all the arguments
I could think of, I broke up the conference, advising them to reconsi-
der the subject more at leisure, and to let me know the result here-
after. Some weeks after, Thambway, a chief of one of the largest clans,
offered to serve as Frontier Police Sirdar. Considering that our Police
stationed at the thannah, is perfectly useless.in preventing dacoities
or apprehending offenders, unless supported by a large Military force,
I brought the subject to your notice, and recommended the chief for
employment. The chief object in the plundering expeditions is to
obtain slaves. The village attacked is surrounded at night, and gener-
ally set on fire, or a volley of muskets is fired into it. The inhabitants,
as they leave their burning houses, are seized, the males are speared,
and the women and children carried away into slavery. In the dis-
tribution of plunder and slaves, they are guided by their own recognised
rules. The leader of the expedition receives a double share, the petty
leaders a share each, and their followers generally the plunder secured
by each individual. Adult males are difficult to manage, and are inva-
riably killed. The captive women and children are employed as
domestic servants, and considered valuable property : 200 Rupees is
generally demanded as ransom for each captive. During the period
of my stay in the Hills, for 4 months, with one exception, the most
perfect harmony prevailed between my party and the surrounding
chiefs of banditti. For several months previous, the Police had at-
tempted to recover several captives and were unsuccessful; when
J was about leaving Tulukmee, at the earnest intercession of their
relatives, I obtained all the 12 captives, valued at 2,400 Rupees,
through the clan influence of the chiefs, four of whom were, on my re-

404A Notes on the Tribes of the Eastern Frontier. No. 4,

commendation, rewarded for their good services. I trust the manner
in which [ have carried out your instructions to restore confidence
amongst the lowland people, whose lives and property were exposed
to attack, will meet with your approval.

The work of the current season will include the unfinished
portion of the distzict, from the Bay of Bengal and Lemroo river
on the west, to the Yeomadoung range of [ills on the Ava frontier.
The Keoks of the two frontier circles, Tandan and Lemroo, have in-
formed me, that in addition to the wild Khengs, there are several vil-
lages of Burmese dacoits, (living within their circles paying no revenue,
and saying they are subjects of Ava,) who, it is likely, will oppose my
proceedings on the frontier, ‘

eee

*Notes on the Tribes of the Kastern Frontier, No. II—By J. H.
O’DoneEL, Esq., Revenue Surveyor of Arracan.

(Communicated by A. Grore, Hsq.)

The Eastern portion of the district from the Yeomadoung to the
Lemroo river is mountainous and hilly. The lowlands are situated
chiefly on the west of the Lemroo river, and oa the east of the same
river there is a narrow belt of lowland, 50 miles in length, and from
1 to 4 miles in breadth. The hill tribes living on our eastern frontier
are Khyens, Mrookhyens, and Koos.

Kuyens.—The Khyensdiffer from the Burmese in dress, language and
habits : they occupy both banks of the Lemroe river from the Wah Khe-
ong to the Khee Kheong and the low hills west of the Jegaendong range
visible from the plains, the valley of the Taroce Kheong and the low
hills and plains within the Tandan, Gnacharain, Prwanrhay and Dain-
boong circles. They are a quiet inoffensive people and number 3,304
souls who pay land revenue and capitation tax to the amount of
Rs. 3,883. Several Khyens have settled down as permanent lowland
cultivators, where they have been driven to the necessity of cultivating
the fields, to avoid the violence and periodical aggressions of the neigh-
bouring wild people; those living en the west of the Lemroo river,
consider that broad river as a sufficient protection. The males fre-
cuently go almost naked, having a rag fastened by a string in front

* Extract from a letter to the Commissioner of Arrakan.

1863. | Notes on the Tribes of the Eastern Frontier. 405

of the lower part of the body: occasionally they wear a chang as a
cloak to cover the body. ‘The dress of the females consists of a dark
blue cotton gown, fastened at the neck and descending to the knees.
The faces of the women are all tattooed, and it gives them asingularly
hideous appearance: the tattooing commences with a circle in the
forehead and a straight line bisects it, extending to the nose: curved
lines are made along each cheek, converging towards the chin, where
they end in a circle: the outer line forms a curious edging asif the face
was covered with amask. Figures of animals are sometimes tattooed
as ornaments; these marks and figures are made by pressizg sharp
points into the flesh, and filling the punctures with a liquid, prepared
from the juice of a tree fourd in the forests. The operation is so
painiul, that young girls of 8 or 10 years are obliged to be tied down,
their faces remaim swollen for a fortnight afterwards. From 5 to 30
Rs. is generally paid for disfiguring the faces of young females.

Mroo Kuyerns.—The most northern village, occupied by the Mroo
Khyens paying revenue, is Sikcharoa, situated 14 miles north of the
junction of the Saeng Kheong with the Lemroo river. The Mroo Khyens
occupy the valleys of the Wah Kheong, Saeng Kheong, Mau Kheong
and that part of the valley of the Lemroo between Peng Kheong and
Saeng Kheong. They number 4,020 souls, of whom 387 cultivators
pay an aunual revenue of Rs. 111. This small revenue is chiefly
derived from the sale of bamboos, which are floated down in rafts of
10,000 or more, and sold in the plains at 1 Rupee the hundred. The
village of Anoongroa is a refuge for deformed, maimed, and all sick
persons labouring under palsy, ulcers, leprosy and other incurable
diseases. Some who recover, cultivate for themselves, but in general
they are supported by their relatives, who consider them outcasts:
they are not allowed to beg, and would on no account receive shelter
in any other villages.

The inhabitants of Hytweegree and the villages on the heights near
the Mau Kheong pass,* situated several miles within our frontier,
would not render me any assistance or receive presents, being afraid
of the barbarous and czuel punishments inflicted by the Burmese.
A Burmese official resides at Loong-shai-mroo, 2 days’ journey on the
Ava side of the boundary range. He collects annually from each of
these villages, one male or female slave valued from 50 to 100 Rs. and

* Kangto, Thonoo, Atareepoong, Okreepoong.

406 Notes on the Tribes of the Eastern Frontier. [No. 4,

a chang cr covering from each house, valued at 1 Rupee. Although
they pay readily whatever is demanded from them by the Burmese,
they do not hesitate to levy black mail from the few travellers who
attempt to pass by this route over the Yeomadoung at Kooeelandong;
(5924 feet high,) to purchase cattle from Burmah proper. They did
not however offer any opposition to the survey parties employed in
this direction. The high central ridge of the Yeomadoung is a dis-
tinct natural boundary, and there is no doubt that the villages named
above are situated within the limits of the Akyab district.
Koos.—The Koos occupy the mountainous country neax the sources
of the Lemroo river and its principal feeder the Peng Kheong, within
the 22nd parallel of north latitude, westward of the Yeomadoung
range; they have never paid ary revenue and it is only after entering
the hills for 8 or 10 days, that the first villages of these wild people
are met with. The approximate number of houses is 2897, and allowing
5 persons for each house, the number of inhabitants may be estimated
at about 14,485. Those living on the Peng Kheong have intercourse
with the neighbouring Khoomees of the Koladyne circle, from whom
they differ but little in their habits. On occasions of rejoicing, the
latter amuse themselves by dancing round a bull or gayal tied down
toa stake. As they dance round and round the animal is slowly
despatched by numberless spear wounds, aimed at every part of its
body. Bamboo cups are apphed to the wounds; men, women and
children drink the blood. Beyond vague information that the Koos
exceeded the Khcomees in their barbarous practices, by torturing human
creatures in the same manner, nothing was known of them. Revenge
may occasionally be gratified in this cruel manner, but the practice is
not common, nor could I ebtain any information on the subject. The
Koos living on the Lemroo river are perfectly wild and at feud with
each other. Interpreters and guides from the nearest Mroo Khyen
villages could not be obtained; they would not accept of presents, stating
that it was as much as their lives were worth, to attempt proceeding
higher up the river. Three attempts were however made to proceed
a few miles beyond Khopatong hill station ; twice the Khyen coolies
deserted, and the third time they resolutely refused to proceed, and said
they would again desert, if another attempt was made. The direction
of the Hill statious was changed more to the westward, and the tri-
angulation was carried on along the heights bordering on the Peng

1863. ] Notes on the Tribes of the Eastern Frontier. 407

Kheong. The Koos being unacquainted with the use of salt, their
food is extremely insipid and the smallness of their appetite was noticed.
Their chief food is Indian corn. Like the Khyens and Mroo Khyens,
they wear but little clothing. Canes slit in two and painted red are
wrapped round the stomach about 20 times, as a protection from
poisonous arrow wounds. Muskets are common amongst the Koos of the
Peng Kheong. Spears, bows and arrows, manufactured by themselves,
are the other weapons used.

The Khyens made no complaints about any of their villages being
attacked by Hall robbers or of any of their number being carried away
as slaves. Cattles are, however, frequently stolen.

The only route by which the Hills can be entered, is the bed of the
Lemroo river, which, in the upper part of its course, is a mountain
torrent, and admits only of canoes of the smallest size. There is a
waterfall 4 miles above the village of Goonguen or Lemroo, and after
the first day’s journey, falls and rapids are met with almost at every
mile and sometimes oftener. The principal feeders of the Lemroo are
the Peng Kheong, Saeng Kheong, Wap Kheong, Mau Kheong and
Saroee Kheong. Canoes are used on these streams for short distances
from their junctions with the main stream.

OPI PII ON rn,

Notes on the Tribes of the Eastern Frontier, No. III.—By H. J.
Reyno.ps, sq.

(Communicated by A. Grote, Esq.)

I have alluded in my 8th para.* to the existence of several Kookie
villages near the boundary line. I was told that there are 18 such
villages, and I have myself visited 7 of them, all cf which are
within the British territory. As these hills have perhaps never before
been traversed by an Officer of Government, a few remarks respecting
these hill people may not be out of place. I have above spoken of
them as Kookies; but the name is not properly applicable to these
people, who are an entirely different race from the Kookies of the
Chittagong jungles. The name by which they are commonly known
is “ Tipperahs.” In physiognomy some of them are like the Muri-
poorees, but the greater part bear more resemblance to the Khasiah

* In a foregoing portion of the letter from which the above is extracted.

3 FE

408 Notes on the Tribes of the Eastern Frontier. [No. 4,

tribes, having strongly marked Calmuck, or Mongolian features, with
flat faces and thick lips. Those whom I saw were not in general
shorter in stature than Bengalis, and were far more muscular and
strongly made. I was struck, with the fair complexions of many of
them, scarcely darker than a swarthy Huropean. The villages which
I visited contained perhaps from 100 to 200 inhabitants each, and
each house is raised on bamboo piles 4 or 5 feet from the ground.
This is done, as I was told, partly as a protection against wild beasts,
and partly to keep the houses out cf the reach of floods after a heavy
rain ; (1 may remark, that though I heard a good deal of wild animals
being numerous upon these hills, yet I saw none whatever; indeed
the hills appeared to be remarkably bare of life, even birds being very
scarce.) The “'Tipperahs” understand and speak Bengali, the better
class of them correctly enough and the lower class imperfectly : but
they conversed with each cther in a dialect of their own, which none
of my party understocd. They appear tc maintain no caste restrictions,
and eat any kind of food; even taking with perfect readiness some
which I offered them. They keep pigs, fowls and pigeons, but they
do not seem toe have any bullocks, nor did I see any ploughs in their
villages. 'They cultivate cotton and rice upon patches of the hills
which they clear of jungle. They pay no rent, I was informed, for
the lands they occupy; but they pay a nuzzer of cne rupee to the
Rajah of Tipperah upon every occasion of a marriage among them,

1863. | Aornos. 409

Aornos.—By Lt.-Col. J. ABBorr.

In the Asiatic Society’s Journal No. 1 of 1863 I have lately perused
an interesting paper by the Rev. I. Loewenthal upon the antiquities of
the Peshawur district, of which I hope to see many more numbers.
My object in noticing it at present, is less to support my own theory
regarding the site of Aornos, which does not appear to me to be
shaken, than to invite attention generally to the subject and others
connected with the footsteps of the Greeks ; whose coins and sculpture
abound in all old sites of the Peshawur district and in a large number
of those between the Jelum and Atuk. Not only is this ground classi-
cal to us Huropeans ; it is also the classical soil of the Hindoo—the
Kusufzye and the valley of Sohaut containing many of the old sites
spoken of in the heroic poems of that race.

At page 13 of Mr. Loewenthal’s essay he calls in question the loca-
lity I have assigned for Aornos, upon the verdict of some great Mili-
tary authority (unknown) because “‘ the Mahabunn commands nothing,
and is so much out of the way, that it could hardly ever have been
a place of refuge for the people of the plains, and if it had been, a
general like Alexander would not have wasted his time on the reduc-
tion of an isolated hill which was by no means impeding his passage
to the Indus.”

Now at first sight all this may appear to be sound argument. It is
only when we find that not a single position agrees with fact, that we
regret the rashness of great Military authorities, in deciding, without
investigation, questions so perplexing as this.

First, it is stated, that the Mahabunn commands nothing.

I answer, that it commands the liberties of the most warlike of the
tribes in the Peshawur valley ; the Aspasioi, or Asupzye, as they still
term themselves. So long as Aornos was free, the Aspasioi could not
be conquered. And as long as the Mahabunn is free, the Asupzye can
never be subdued. Their villages may be occupied at great expense
by armed garrisons: but sooner or later those garrisons will be cut off,
and the people will reassert their freedom. It was this certainty, (in
all probability,) which led Hercules four thousand years ago to assail
Aornos. And it was possibly the same assurance, that, (after an interval
of 2000 years,) conspiring with his emulation of the herves of antiquity,
prompted Alexander to the same undertaking with better success.

3.F 2

410 Aornos. [No. 4,

Secondly, it is asserted that the Mahabunn “is too far out of the
way to have been a refuge to the people of the plains.” But this is
contrary to fact; for the Mahabunn, which includes a vast tract of
forest-belted mountain, ever has been, as it still is, and always must be,
the retreat to which the Aspasioi (Asupzye) when invaded, drive their
flocks and herds and carry their women and children : its very distance,
(to an invader, for it is not very distant for them) forming one of the
especial reasons tor its selection. Not only did Hercules and Alexander
Gf the Mahabunn be Aornos) find it necessary to assail this stupend-
ous mountain, but Nadir Shah himself could not reduce the Kusufzye
to submission, until he had crowned the summit with his army. Her-
cules (we learn from Curtius and Diodoros) made earthquakes and
heavenly portents his plea for abandoning the siege. His real reason,
probably, was that, less provident than the son of Philip, he found his
supplies cut off and the prosecution of the siege impossible. It is
because the Mahabunn is the immemorial retreat of the Aspasioi of the
plains when overmatched, that I was first led to enquire whether it
might not be Aornos.

Thirdly, it is objected, that “had the Mahabunn been the refuge
of the people of the plains, a General like Alexander would not have
wasted his time on the reduction of an isolated hill, which was by
no means impeding his passage to the Indus.”

Had it been said “a General like Napoleon or Wellington or Mar!l-
borough,” the rashness of this remark had been less obvious. But
Alexander differed from all other great generals in this, that his love
of conquest was rivalled by his ambition to excel the heroes and demi-
gods of antiquity. Neither Napoleon nor Marlborough nor Welling-
ton, probably, would have headed the forlorn hope in storming like a
common grenadier a mud-walled town, which any of his Captains could
have reduced in a week. Yet we are obliged to believe that Alexander
did this ; nor can we well believe that he attacked Aornos, without
crediting what all his biographers assign as his reason, that it had
resisted three assaults of Hercules. We must, moreover, remember
that Alexander was already in possession of the Ferry of the Indus.
Ee awaited the construction of boats, of which the timber* must be

_* ?Eel 5& Kad bAn epyucinw evérvxe Tapa Tov ToTapoy, Kal GuTn exdmn aITa

br) THS OTparias Kal vads emolnoay. Arrian iy. 30.

1863. | Aornos. 411

felled in the Mahapunn, ere he could cross. He was not, therefore
(as our great Military authority supposed,) in any hurry to approach
the Indus ; but was steadily conquering the country of the Asufzye
and the valley of Swat, conquering in order to retain possession, not
merely to ravage and destroy. So that although it might have flat-
tered his pride to dispute with Hercules the prize of valour, it was
quite reconcileable with his prudence to reduce that stronghold, with-
out which the Asupzye could never be effectually subdued.

Unless greatly mistaken, we have fully answered all the objections of
the unknown Military authority. We now come to Mr. Loewenthal’s
reasons for thinking that the castle of Hodi near Atuk on the farther
brink of the Indus is the veritable Aornos.

The unknown authority already quoted goes on to say, “The hill
above Khyrabad is not only a most conspicuous point for friend and
foe, but also one that must be taken before a passage of the Indus at
Atuk would be attempted by an invading force.”

The castle of Hodi is conspicuous enough ; it occupies the summit
of a hill about 600 feet high, standing on the river’s brink about a
mile below the crossing. But as, according to Mr. Loewenthal’s
account, it could be entered only from the river side, a very small
force would have sufficed to keep its garrison prisoners to their
castle. And I must deny that any garrison, armed with spear, sword,
shield, bow and arrow, could have impeded the crossing of such an
army as Alexander’s from Hodi’s castle. Supposing, however, that
this castle was then in existence, (of which there is not the slightest
probability,) and that the Asupzye had fled thither from Bazira, Ora
and the rest of the cities of the plains, Alexander might probably
have deputed Ptolemy or one of his other Captains to reduce it. But
we can see nothing in the castle itself, nor in the paltry hill on which
it stands, to justify either the repulse of Hercules or the ambition
of Alexander to be its captor.

The next supposed point of resemblance is itsname. Its veritable
name is Raja Hodi ki killa, the castle of Raja Hodi, and it has no other.
But as Atuk is often called Benares Atuk, just as Chuch is called
Chuch Benares, Mr. Loewenthal assumes that Raja Hodi’s castle
may have been called Benares, in order that it may be reduced, first
to Varanas and from thence to Aornos. We think that such a chain
of suppositions will scarcely answer to identify the contemptible hill

412 Aornos. [No. 4,

in question with the magnificent mountain described as Aornos. That
the ancient name of the purgunna or tract on which Atuk rests
was Benares is probable enough; but it seems to me that this
Benares (whether city or tract) must have been on the same side
of the river as Chuch, which to this day is called Chuch Benares. For
the breadth of the Indus there, (upwards of two miles,) completely
severs Chuch from the Eusufzye, and when Alexander visited them,
he found them subject to two distinct sovereigns.

The name is variously pronounced as Bunnarr, Bunares, Bunass, the
latter signifying “ destruction.”

We think it may serve an important end in the elucidation of this
knotty question to record all the different accounts now extant of
Aornos. Persons who do not possess the ancient authors treating
upon the subject, may then visit the various possible sites and judge
for themselves which was the tremendous rock that repulsed three
attacks of Hercules, the greatest General of his age.

To begin with Arrian, who, in spite of Mr. Loewenthal’s disparaging
remarks, has left us one of the most succinct and detailed accounts
ever penned, of this campaign, Aornos was a table mountain 14: miles
in circuit at base, 4125 feet in height, extremely steep, having abun-
dant water at the summit and numerous welling springs, plenty of wood,
and soil for 1000 ploughs (should it be tilled). It was the refuge
of all the cities of the plains, but especially of Bazira (Bajra) and Ora,
(perhaps Ooud or Owra). The ascent to 1t was from Umb, Balima,
(sites retaining this name at the foot of the Mahabunn). Although so
steep, Alexander led up it a squadron of the companion horse, 20 mount-
ed archers and his engines of war. Though the rock held by the enemy
was so lofty, yet the mountain had still higher ground, which Ptolemy
cot possession of by the aid of a spy, attacking thence the enemy im rear.
Alexander met none but natural obstacles, until he had ascended the
mountain after 6 days’ toil and incessant hand-to-hand combat. He
then apparently reached a table summit, having soil, in which he dug his
trench and raised his parapet of approach. Near the rock was a mound
of equal height, which the Macedonians carried by assault. After which
the garrison lost heart, and when Alexander withdrew his pickets,
vacated the place by night. The rock on the table summit must
of course have had parapets, or the enemy could not have held it an
hour after Alexander’s attainment of the table summit. But it was

1863. ] Aornos. 413

not in itself very formidable, for Alexander and his companions
scrambled up it without waiting for ladders.

This is the account of Arrian, generally the most faithful of historians.
It has all the appearance of having been copied from the journal
of an eye-witness : perhaps Ptolemy, perhaps Beton, Alexander’s quar.
ter-master, whose journal was published. According to him the dif-
fieulty of the enterprize was the exceeding courage of the defenders
opposing Alexander on a very steep acclivity, which he was 6 days
in surmounting. But walls or ditches are no where mentioned. The
fidelity of the people in concealing from him the path by which such a
wilderness of mountain might be safely entered, was amongst the fore-
most difficulties. A foreigner who had long resided there was his
guide, bribed by a large sum* of money. This is Arrian’s account,
and should any one have to attack the Mahabunn, Arrian would serve
him as a guide step by step.

We next come to Strabo’s very meagre notice of Aornos. “ Alexan-
der had taken, in the first assault, a certain rock called Aornos, whose
roots the Indus, not far from its springs, washes.”

Next follows Curtius, whose account is so diametrically opposite
to that of Arrian, that it is necessary to choose the one and reject the
other. I am not singular in siding with Arrian, whose detailed narra.
tive is as sober as Curtius’ is wild and inflated. Curtius describes the
rock Aornos as having the figure of a goal, terminating above in a
sharp pinnacle, its roots bemg entered by the river Indus, scarped
on both sides by lofty rocks. On the other hand were interposed gulfs
and quagmires, which Alexander filled, by felling and casting in a
forest ; a work of 7 days. ‘The assailants who were repulsed, fell into
the Indus, as the garrison rolled down upon them rocky fragments.
The repulse was signal, but as Alexander showed no symptom of aban-
doning the siege, the Indians after a while evacuated the rock. This
rock was near Ora and one march from Ek-bolima, beyond which was
a defile : after which he reached the Indus in 16 marches, and found all
prepared for crossing. -

No mention is made of walls to this Fort. In fact, supposing it to
have had the figure of a Roman goal as above described, walls
had been utterly superfluous, and its name of Aornos had been well

deserved.
* 80 Talents,

414 Aornos. [No. 4,

Diodoros’ account is as follows. Aornos was the refuge of the
people of the plas. (The loss of a portion of the narrative prevents
our knowing the names of the cities from which the garrison had
fled.) It was excessively steep; and Hercules had desisted from the
siege, owing to earthquakes and heavenly portents. This rock had a
circuit of 84 miles, an elevation of 10,560 feet and its surface was
every where smooth and taper; being washed at the South by the
river Indus. Elsewhere it was girt with deep ravines and was diffi-
cult with precipices. A foreigner of destitute circumstances led him
to a post which gave him the upper hand of the garrison, and com-
manded its only outlet. Alexander therefore, having blockaded the
rock, filled with earth its chasm and roots and pressed the siege inces-
santly 7 days and 7 nights: when, conjecturing that the garrison had
lost heart, he withdrew his guard from the outlet, and the barbarians
evacuated the rock by night.

Several points in this account agree with that of Curtius, who pro-
bably took much of his narrative from Diodoros. All three agree
in one fact, however they may differ in others; viz. that Aornos was
fortified by nature alone and not by human art. Whatever therefore
the site to be considered, it must be one, almost impregnable by
nature if well defended, and destitute of artificial defences, except-
ing of course that rude parapet of loose stones or earth, which barbarous
nations from the earliest days have employed. Diodoros makes no
mention of the assailants being hurled into the Indus. This appears to
be a pure invention of Curtius, deduced from the fact that the Indus
washes the roots of the mountain. Arrian’s and Diodoros’s accounts
do not differ very materially, if we consider the six days’ ascent of the
mountain (so circumstantially described by Arrian,) and the ambush
of Ptolemy to be embraced by Diodoros in his brief statement, that a
foreigner for reward led Alexander where he commanded the only
access to the rock. To Curtius, generalship was nothing: courage
and dash every thing. The mountain up which Alexander, with con-
summate skill, fought step by step for six days, was far too prosaic for
his page. He makes it rise out of the river ike a Roman goal and
then he makes Alexander fell forests to build a ramp up to the summit.
All of a sudden we stumble upon Diodoros, who estimates its perpendi-
cular height at 10,000 feet or 2 miles; and then we wonder whence
forests could be had sufficient for the work, or hands to fell and pile

them up in six days.

1863. ] Aornos. 4415

We know of no other ancient accounts of Aornos beside those just
now quoted. When Plutarch wrote, there were 16 different histories
of Alexander’s exploits, every one of which has perished. Plutarch
himself offers no account of this siege, excepting the words of encourage-
ment which Alexander offered to a leader of one of the storming parties
of his own name. We have therefore, I believe, collated together all
that is authentic relating to Aornos.

From these it appears that in our search for Aornos the following
particulars must absolutely be borne in mind ; two of the three authori-
ties agreeing together in all.

That Aornos was on the right bank of the Indus, near the cities
Masaga, Oora, Bazira and Em-bolima.

That it was the place of refuge of the dense population of the plains,
including that of the cities aforesaid.

That its defences were not artificial but natural.

That its perpendicular height was very considerable, being rated
by one historian at 10,000 feet, by the other at 4,000,

That it abounded in forest.

That, high as stood the rock itself, the mountain which it crowned
had yet higher ground.

That when the mountain summit had been won, and the rock con-
fronted, the extraordinary danger to the besiegers was past.

Now, in considering Hodis hill—if it be the Aornos we are seek-
ing, all the fortifications which now render it formidable must have
been built since Alexander’s day ; and therefore we must imagine the
hill stript of them before asking whether this be Aornos. Would Mr.
Loewenthal really believe that one born and nurtured amongst the
wild mountains of Macedonia, who had stormed Tyre, carried some
tremendous natural strongholds in Bactria and in the Buktari moun-
tains, and had just crossed twice the Hindu Koosh, with all his
engines of war, would have felt much piqued by the fame of a hill
some six or seven hundred feet high, little differing from thousands
around him,—a hill, too, which fron: the river side at least (for I
have a faithful sketch of it from Attok) is perfectly accessible from
base to summit.

If this hill be Aornos, we have also to discover south of the Loondi
or Cabul river, sites answering to the cities Bazira, Oora, Masaga
and Embolima. or fugitives from the Eusufzye could not have fled to

3

416 Aornos. [Wo. 4,

the hill of Hodi’s castle ; being intercepted by the strong column under
Craterus, marching from Peshawur direct to Atuk, to prepare boats
for the transit across the Indus. This column, on its way, took and
fortified the city Orobatis on the Northern side of the Loondi. This
city I discovered in ruins, under the name Arabutt. The sites Bajra,
Ooria, Moosagurh, Umb-balimah near the roots of Mahabunn answer
well to the sites that must be found near Aornos, but I have heard of
none such being discovered* near Atuk.

Thus then stands the case, Raja Hodi’s hill is recommended as being
near the main ferry of the Indus, and on the river’s brink where scarped
with abrupt rocks, although no man struck down in ascending it, could
possibly fall into the Indus as Curtius supposes they fell from Aornos.

It is liable to objection, as not being near Embolima, Oora, Bazira,
or Massaga. As not being suited to shelter the people of the plains
or their cattle, having no grass and little water, and being within an
hour’s march of the main road. Its only known name cannot by any
ingenuity be converted into Aornos. It does not in the slightest degree
resemble a Roman goal, being perfectly accessible from base to sum-
mit on the river face. Its height is not a fourth of that reckoned
by Arrian, nor a tenth of the height assigned to Aornos by Diodoros.
Being visible from base to summit from Atuk, Alexander could never
have required a guide at an expenditure of 80 talents, to show him
the road up. It has at summit no ground on which the 220 Horse
which accompanied Alexander up Aorncs could act. Nor can we ima-
gine any reason why it should be called the Rock, bemg no more
formidable, no less accessible than thousands of scrubby hills of like
figure scattered all over Asia.

When (according to Arrian,) the fortified hill city Bazira had
been evacuated by its defenders, who fled with others of the plains for
refuge to Aornos, and when Alexander, fired with emulation of his
great ancestor Hercules, had determined upon attacking that rock ;
he established garrisons in the cities Ora and Massaga, and secured
with a wall the city Bazira. Meanwhile Hephaistioon and Perdikkas,
whom he had despatched from Nikaia, (Jullalabad,) direct to Peshawur
and the river indus, walled and garrisoned Orobatis (Arabutt on
north bank of Loondi) and reached the Indus to prepare boats for

* There is a Bazaar, not very far from the Loondi river, but it is on a
flat and Bajira was built on a hill, &e.

1863. ] Aornos. 417

the passage across. Alexander, who had come through the country
of the Aspasioi (Issupzye) and Gouraioi and Assakanoi,* (people of
Punjgour and Swaut,) to Bazira, leaving this town, and subduing
some others on the Indus, came to Embolima at the foot of Aornos.

Had Alexander marched towards Atuk where Hodi’s hill is sited,
he had not sent half his army} with Hephaistioon and Perdikkas, as
he would have been himself close in rear to support them. But he
had gone through the countries of the Punjgour, the Assazye and
Asup or Issupzye, and rejoined Hephaistioon after the siege of Aornos
by a march off 16 stages: proving manifestly that Aornos was no
where near the crossing of the Indus.

Were Raja Hodi’s hill, when divested of its fortifications, a strong-
hold calculated to have thrice foiled the greatest General of his age,
and to be regarded as the greatest capture of Alexander ; it would be
time enough J think, to enquire whether its name had ever been
Benares or any thing else convertible by etymologists into Aornos.

Mountains guite worthy of Hercules and of Alexander overshadow
the Indus above the plain of the Aspasioi. Whether Mount Wunj
(Aon}) the most difficult of these, and which, according to tradition,
was not violated even by Alexander, be Aornos, or whether it be the
Mahabunn, which more exactly suits Arrian’s description, I must leave
to be determined by after research. In the case of the Mahabunn the
name alone differs. Its title of “The Rock” it well deserves, as
seen from the river side, being scarped by tremendous precipices at
summit: and its name of “ Mahabunn” or the mighty forest, may
very possibly be a corruption of “ Mahabutt,” the mighty rock ; even
as we know from Jehangir’s autobiography, the neighbouring moun-
tain of Gundgurh, to have been called in his day§ Gurrjgurh or “ the
house of Thunder,’ and Huzara to have been called “ Abisara.”’

Persons who first visit Atuk, look up at once to Hodi’s castle and
if they have not Arrian beside them, naturally ask, may not that be
Aornos? But after considering the contemptible nature of the hill,

* Assakanoi are no doubt the Assazye or sons of Assa who inhabit Swaut.

+ exovTas thy Te Topyiov takiw kat KaAe:rov kat Medcaypou kat twy ETOLpwy
IMTEWY TOUS NMLGEAS, KaL TOUS LoVOPopous imTEas GuMmavTas. Arrian iv. 22.

{ Inde processit EHkbolima, &c. Hine ad flumen Indum sextis decimis cas-
tris pervenit. Curtius VIII. 12, i. e., to the crossing of the Indus. For he had
just descended Aornos which is on the Indus.

§ From the thunderous sound which seems at times to proceed from its summit,
but is probably the reflection of a sound generated high up in the river channel.

3G 2

418 Aornos. [No. 4,

and comparing it with the stupendous mountains overshadowing the
Indus, forty miles higher, they wonder that they should ever have en-
tertained the idea.

Those who would wish to see the subject discussed at length, I beg
to refer to my paper in the XXIII Vol. of the Asiatic Society’s Jour-
nal, entitled ‘“‘ Gradus ad Aornon.” *

I beg to take this opportunity of correcting the following note
which occurs in the paper aforesaid. It relates to my rendering of a
passage of Curtius.

“ Note. This passage ‘ Hane (7. e. petram) ab Hercule frustra obses-
sam esse, terreque motu coactum absistere fama vulgaverat’ is ob-
scure: the word coactum agreeing neither with Hercule, nor with
petram. I would suggest its being read ‘ coactam, which reconciles
the difficulty: and after consideration I have adopted this reading.
Our respect for Hercules would not improve, could we thmk him one
to have been terrified by an earthquake.”

When the above was written I had not consulted Diodoros, which
now hes before me. He repeats the tradition in better grammar.

Reyetar yop tov Tahowv ‘Hpaxdca tavryv tyv mérpav émiaddojuevov
moNopKely GmooTHval Oud TWas émLyevoevovs reyahous GELopoUsS Kal
dvoonpetas. Lib. XVII. ze.

Now Hercules might have been a very stout fellow and have knocked
out other men’s brains without boasting any of his own. But he
could not have been the great conqueror which his deeds attest, had not
his wit been in proportion to his strength and courage. We think
he was far too shrewd a fellow to be outwitted or bullied by an earth-
quake. And therefore, if he made this his plea for raising the siege
of Aornos, it was, in all probability, because his supplies had been cut
off, (an easy matter in the Mahabunn,) and he was ashamed to own
his imprevidence. Alexander, (see Arrian,) did not attempt the siege
until he had appointed Krateros to collect corn for the army into the
town Embolima.

Of the name Aornos, I do not think it certain, as does Mr.
Loewenthal, that it is Sanscrit. It was the second rock of that
name and description which Alexander had taken: the first being
in Bactria beyond the Hindoo Koosh and out of reach of the San-
serit tongue. Its meaning in Greek is *‘ unwinged” as if challeng-

[* The map there given will be found useful for the present article.—ED. |

1863.] Aornos. 419

ing all unwinged things. If, however, it be not Greek, it is not
necessarily Sanscrit, for we have undoubted proof that the Pushtoo
language was in use at that time in that region, and that the Afghan
race held the region to which Aornos appertains. It might therefore
be either a, Pushtoo, or a Sanserit, or an Aboriginal, or a Persian word.

There are several Hindi names of Forts which would have been
rendered by the Greeks Aornos,—Urniya cr the unapproachable,
Woorna, Awur, Aon} or Wunj. The first of these, (now called
Kotta,) stands at Umb Balimah (Hmbolimah,) and so overhangs the
Indus on its eastern face, that water is ordinarily drawn up from the
Indus by the garrison. But this rock, like Hodi’s hill, is too con-
temptible to be the Aornos of history.

When first L approached the Indus at Torbaila, I felt that I was
in presence of the veritable Aornos. And on discovering that the
mountain rising like a green wall to the height of 3000 feet above
the water, bore the name of Wunj or Aonj which the Greeks would
have written Aornos, I deemed it almost certain that this particular
rock was the stronghold in request. It was only when I learnt that
Mount Aonj has no arable land and little water, so that although
quite inaccessible against sudden invasion, it cannot hold out long ;
and that the Mahabunn, which has abundance of water, grass, firewood
and arable land, is the ordinary refuge of the Husufzyes of the plains
with their families and cattie, that I was obliged to prefer the Maha-
bunn, a spur of which falls sheer into the Indus.

The Mahabunn itself, however, is invisible from the western brink of
the Indus, bemg concealed behind Mount Aonj. The Greeks there-
fore might easily have confounded the two and have thought they
were ascending the mountain pomted out to them as Aonj or Aornos.

From the junction of the Burrendor torrent (flowing out of Boo-
nair) with the Indus, down to Atuk, the river margin has been most
earefully searched, but although it seems improbable that Aornog
should be below Atuk, this should not be left in doubt. The river’s
bank should be explored, as opportunity offers, down to Neeldb at
least, bearing in mind that it is not a castle we must seek for, but a
stupendous rock or mountain to which the people of the plains flee
for refuge.

It is difficult to understand why Mr. Loewenthal supposes the
author of the “ Gradus ad Aornon” to have followed Curtius rather

4.20 Aornos. [No. 4,

than Arrian, in spite of the contrary assurance, given at the outset of
that paper and carefully maintained throughout.

Although ourselves satisfied that the Mahabunn is the Aornos of
history, we think the question quite open to discussion. We believe
that the epithet of “rock” given to what Arrian’s account clearly
defines to have been an immense table mountain, has been the great
difficulty hitherto in the search. Curtius’ imagination immediately
depicted 1t, as an obelisk of rock rising out of the Indus: and being
more popular than Arrian, he has led many astray. But Arrian’s ac-
count so distinctly lays down which part of the river to search for
Aornos, viz., the neighbourhood of Umb Balimah, Bajra, Oora and
Moosagurh, that the mountain in their neighbourhood forming the
ordinary refuge of the Eusufzye, abounding in springs, grass, wood,
and arable land, must needs be Aornos. And excepting the Mahabunn,
which can turn out 12,000 matchlockmen, there is no such mountain
on the right bank of the Indus.

Hitherto no British traveller has passed up the Indus higher than
Umb, and to search higher for Aornos would be to no purpose, because
no mountain higher up could have been the refuge of the Asupzye.
But in cross-questioning native travellers, I discovered that there
exists a white rock, (perhaps of milky quartz) on the right bank of
the Indus, in the river basin, about fifty miles above Umb, called to
this day “ Tchitta Butt Kephale Bous.” The first two words in the
Punjaub dialect signifying “the white rock” and the two latter bemg
manifestly Greek, signifying the “ Bull’s Head,” which was also the
name of Alexander’s celebrated charger. So far as I can learn, there
is no longer any carving on the rock; but it seems not umprobable
that there may have been a basso-relievo of Boukephalon in former
days. The bigotry of the Muhummadans causes them to deface all
sculptured figures of men or animals. It is the only instance I have
discovered of a Greek name in a country abounding in coins bearing
Greek Inscriptions. JI mention this not as connected with Aornos
but in order that it may be borne in mind by persons making enqui-
ries in that corner of the Punjaub. During the eight years I was
employed in Huzara, I was too much overworked to take even one
week’s leave of absence for the purpose of exploring.

PPP DIP PSS PAPI PDAS PIED ee

1863. | Remarks on the Taxila Inscription. 421

Remarks on the Taxila Inscription—By Professor J. Dowson,
Sandhurst College.
[The following is a letter addressed to H. Thomas, Esq., the Society’s Honorary
Agent in London, and by him communicated to the Society. |
Sandhurst, 15th September, 1863.

My pear S1r,—I am much indebted to you for so promptly send-
ing to me General Cunningham’s paper on the Taxila Inscription, and
I very willingly adopt your suggestion of sending the few remarks I
have to make upon it for insertion in the Journal of the Asiatic So-
ciety of Bengal. The discussion upon it will thus be greatly facilitat-
ed and more speedily brought to a conclusion.

The call which you sent to India, before my translation was pub-
lished, for a separate independent version of this important record,
was at once responded to by General Cunningham. Both translations
are now before the world, and although there are many points of
difference between them, there is quite sufficient of agreement, to satis-
fy even the most sceptical, that we are working upon a sure foundation.
I perceive that General Cunningham has discovered the two slightly
varying forms of the prefixed r, he has also made out the diverging
form of the letter y as it appears in the Wardak Urn Inscription, with
a rounded instead of the usual pointed head. We have thus simul-
taneously arrived at these decipherments, and I am happy to have my
name associated with his as their godfather. Other identifications
which I proposed will I hope recommend themselves to his approval,
such as the ft, the compounds han, mam, yan, s’wa, &c.

Your announcement of my discovery of the true values of the Bactrian
numerals has at once been adopted, and General Cunningham has
gone through the various Bactrian dates, with results entirely in ac- .
cordance with my own. In one instance, that of the Ohind Inscrip-
tion, he has amended the old reading of the date, by changing the
unintelligible word vaomite into attamitt. I proposed this emendation,
but having only the lithograph before me, I did not venture upon
making it. He has doubtless consulted the original document or in-
dependent copies. We thus get another confirmation of the value of
the two crosses forming the number 8.

I have gone most attentively through General Cunningham’s trans-
literation, and after duly considering all the points of difference between

A22 Remarks on the Taxila Inseription. [No. 4,

his reading and my own, I in every instance prefer my own translitera-
tion. In his laudable desire to prepare an entirely independent version,
he was necessarily hurried, and was unable to bestow upon the Inscrip-
tion the same amount of attention and study as it received from me.
I am sanguine therefore as to the probability of his acquiescing
in most if not in all of my readings, and that eventually our differences
both of transliteration and interpretation will be reduced to a mini-
mum.

It is not my intention to minutely compare our readings, or to
comment upon all the differences. Any passages in my version which
may be impugned, I shall be ready to defend, or frankly surrender when
the time comes; but there are a few points of difference which are of
some importance, and deserve notice, one especially in which General
Cunningham’s version enables me to improve my own translation.

First as to the transliteration. The compound character which I have
rendered ft, General Cunningham has made to be ¢h in the date and
in the Ohind date. ‘The same character really appears again in the
third line, in the word which I have read aprattitavita, but the copy
published in this Journal is defective in this instance, having v instead
of ff. This blemish in the copy renders necessary a revision of Gener-
al Cunningham’s reading, and I doubt not that he will accept my ver-
sion. General Cunningham corrects the word prachu (east) mto pa-
cham (west), because Hussun Abdal, the place where the plate was
found, is N. W. not N. E. of Taxila. I cannot, however, assent to
this alteration. The letters of this word are as perfect and distinct as
any in the whole Inscription, and they form most unequivocally the
word prachu. ‘This may be a blunder, but it is just as possible that
it may admit of explanation. The plate was “found” at Hussun Ab-
dal but we are not sufficiently acquaimted with the facts of its disco-
very, to justify us in a positive assumption of its having been originally
deposited there. However this may be, it is surely better to trans-
eribe the word as it stands, and if it be an error, to prove it so. The one
course decides the matter, whether rightly or wrongly; the other
leaves it open to discussion and to the light of future discoveries.
‘The next point of difference which requires notice, is the words which
I read “sangharamam cha,” but in which General Cunningham finds
“Sangha Rachile (na)” and understands them as forming the name
of the person who deposited the relic. We agree in the word “ Sangha”

1863. ] R:mirks on the Taxila Inscription. 423

but I unhesitatingly reject the reading “ Rachite (na)”. The first
letter is certainly 7, but it is completely curled round at the point in
a way that I have supposed to represent the vowel 7 in the word
Chhatrapast. There is this difference, however, between the two
words; both occur twice, but while the curled point is distinctly re-
peated in the s it is not 60 in the 7. In the short line at the foot, the
word is clearly written “ sangharame.” ‘This leads me to believe that
the curl of the r in this passage is simply an exaggeration. ‘The next
character is “mam. General Cunningham has failed to recognize the
anuswara here, like as he has failed to observe it as subjoined to the &
in the word mahantasa. For these reasons I hold to the reading “ san-
gharam cha,” taking the final syllable of the first word to represent
a Gen. pl. I may also add, that it seems clear to my mind, that
Liako Kusuluko himself, and no other person, performed the deed
which the Inscription commemorates. There are other minor points
of difference in the transliteration which may be passed over at present,
TI will only remark that the final letters of the body of the Inscrip-
tion which General Cunningham has passed over as illegible, and
which I have read as weajae, are perhaps better brought out in the
copy seat to India than in the lithograph published at home. They
are at best only doubtful, and my reading can only be looked upon
as plausible.

Babu Rajendra Lal has already suggested some emendations of
General Cunningham’s translation which bring it more into conformity
with my own. Thus, he proposes pijd, instead of puiiya, as the equi-
valent of puyaye ; and he is disposed to reject the idea of ayu-bala-
vardhia* being a name. With the analogies of raya for rdjé and
Kuyula for Kujula it is needless to argue in favour of pijd being the
night word. It may, however, be observed that puiiia not puya is the
Prakrit and Pali form of pujiya. This emendation will require that
the rendering of sarva-buddhana should be changed from “all Bud-
dhists” into “all the Buddhas” as I translated it, and which seems in
every way preferable.

IT will now proceed to notice that portion of General Cunningham’s
rendering which I consider more accurate than my own. It is the
beginning of the Inscription, where he refers the phrase “ etaye

* The final of this word is clearly a not ka. The lithograph of this Journal
is inferior to the home one in this spot.

3

ADA Remarks on the Taxila Inscription. [No. 4,

purvaye’ to the date, and not, as I did, to the general context. This
leaves the words “ Chhahara and Chukhsa” free to represent the names
of those districts of which Liako Kusuluko was Satrap. In the first
instance I was inclined to look upon this phrase as the equivalent of
the Sans. etat-purve “ before this,’ and could this rendering have been
made consistent with grammar, it might have been worked in; for
the Inscription speaks of the erection of the buildiny in the past, and
the deposit of the relic in the present. I had no knowledge of the
same or similar phrases having been met with in other Inscriptions,
and not seeing how to connect the words with the date, I very dubi-
ously rendered them as signifying “in the presence.” General Cun-
ningham says he has found the same words in an Inscription which
he has lately discovered at Sravasti,* and that a similar phrase occurs
in the Mathura Inscription. These, however, remain unpublished, and
the enly other records in which the phrase is used, are the Grants of
King Hastin and the Inscriptions of Krikaina, which were published
in this Journal in 1861 by Professor Fitz-EKdward Hall, and which
unfortunately had not come under my notice when I made my transla-
tion. The interpretation which Professor Hall put forth, in his very
careful reproduction and translation of these Inscriptions, has been
adopted by General Cunningham, and he accordingly translates the
expression etaye purvaye as “ on this aforesaid date.” The true mean-
Ing of purva is “ first, prior,’ and if two dates were given it would
refer to the first of them. The word might possibly have the sense
of purvokta, “ aforesaid,” but I cannot admit this to be its meaning
in the Inscription before us. It is not credible that a document of
such remarkable conciseness and brevity, should, immediately after the
date and without the intervention of a single word, employ the need-
less tautology “on this aforesaid date.’”’ The same observation is
applicable to the equivalent phrase in Professor Hall’s Inscriptions.
In every instance it is used in immediate connection with the date—
never in the middle or towards the end of the record, where such a
form of words as “ on the aforesaid date” might be required to obviate
ambiguity. A careful consideration of all the passages in which the

* He also reads it immediately after the date in the Manikyala Inscription.
The word purva is most probably there, as I have pointed out; but we are
hardly justified in reading “ etaye pwrvaye.” The first and last letters are dis-

tinct in my tracings—they are certainly different from the e of which we have
an example at the end of the first line.

1863. ] Remarks on the Taxila Inscription. 425

expression occurs fully confirms the justice of this general criticism,
and convinces me that the true signification has yet to be discovered.

The following are the passages in which the words are found :—

ot of King Hastin—No. 1. yaqgrmrmisara THEITIAHAT
aeanediaat aifaaas VaTdedtaaae}t fearon ]

2 fauepatsrwta UASTUAAT FCIGITI ATE Sana warts:
aaa: feqeg 4 ata |

Hrikaina Inseriptions—No. 1. wa waryyiaa aarut yaa q quay
WMSHINAS Gta dgcw afeelanes ravi areata
VHT AAAI aeregtaqaawata quay 4 Bul waqrtara-
feraysiai '

2. a4 944 Bfadt seala Taga ASICS CIST AAT CATT sraratet
area ieae ana <a cimaaarated: vault Gaga aaqaUIA-
qarat |

The phrase divasa-purvaydm in the first of these was translated by
the late Professor Wilson, “in the forepart of the day.” Professor
Hall in the first instance adopted this interpretation, though objecting
to the original phrase “as illegitimate Sanskrit in this sense.” Sub-
sequently he altered it, saying “a re-perusal of the Eran Inscriptions
has taught me to unlock this quaint and antiquated expression.
Understanding tithydm 1 would construe, not over literally, ‘on that
1. e. the aforesaid lunar day, and on the day of the week therewith
eoincident.’”” In the second Hrikama Inscription, the phrase appa-
rently differs, being, as above quoted, puérvayame. This however is a
supposititious restoration of Professor Hall’s, who says, in respect of
the final syllable, “‘ here there is an erasure where I propose me until
ingenuity shall improve upon it.” This phrase he translates “ during
the first watch of the said lunar day ;” but this is inadmissible. Hta-
sydm is a locative and cannot be thus construed asa genitive. The
phrase is the manifest parallel of the “asydm pirvdyém” of the other
Inscriptions. ‘The inserted final ¢ should therefore be struck out, and
with it the meaning of “watch of the day.” Professor Hall’s idea
of the word tithydm being understood is very ingenious, but it will
not, I think, bear the test of a rigid scrutiny. In the first two of
the passages above quoted the expression is “ dwasa-pirvdydm,” in the
third it runs “ samvatsara-misa-divasa-pirvaydm.” These are both
compounds, agreeing grammatically with the word expressing the
date of the month, in which numeral the word éthydm is undoubtedly

3H 2

426 Remarks on the Taxila Inscription. [No. 4,

imphed. There is nothing therefore to prevent their being taken
together if they can be reasonably connected. If however these phrases
apply with the date of the month, to the word tithydm understood
it can only be as Bahuvrthi or descriptive compounds ; and it is diffi-
cult to see how the words “ day,” and “ year, month and day,” can in
any way make a descriptive epithet of a ¢z¢hi or “lunar day.” Pro-
fessor Hall’s rendering “ on that 1. e. the aforesaid lunar day and on
the day of the week therewith coincident” is an amplification which
I cannot extract from “ divasa-ptrvayam ;” nor can I see my way to
his rendering of the longer compound “on that lunar day specified
with the year, month, and week day aforesaid.” The last of the above
quoted passages gives, at first sight, some support to Professor Hall’s
theory. Having amended the reading, as above proposed, we have
elasyam pirvdyam which might fairly be taken as applying to tithydm
if we could conceive such an expression as “ aforesaid” to be required
or appropriate. Unfortunately however for the theory, the date does
not refer toa #itht or lunar day, being expressed in the masculine,
“ Phalquna-divase das'ame,’ with which, it is obvious. the feminine
“ etasyam pirvayam” can have no grammatical agreement. This seems
conclusive proof that the expression cannot signify “ aforesaid,” there
being nothing aforesaid with which it agrees.

Again, in our Taxila Inscription, the phrase “ etaye purvaye,” the
exact equivalent of “ etasyim purvdyam,” is used after a date which
General Cunningham and I have independently concurred in reading
as Panemus, and it is obvious, that the technical ¢ithi of Hindu Chro-
nology can have no application to a Macedonian date.

I have entered thus at length imto the reasons which induce me to
dissent from the proposed interpretation, because I am anxious to
arrive at the true solution of the phrase; and because the respect
due to the learning of Professor Hall demanded a full statement of
the grounds for my dissent from his rendermg. What then is the
signification of the phrase? The Dictionaries afford no satisfactory
information. As an adjective the word pérva means “ first, prior ;”
as a feminine noun pérvd, it signifies ‘the East.” These sienifica-
tions are clearly inapplicable. We must therefore, if possible, deduce
a meaning, consistent with the primitive sense of the word and the
context of the passages in which it occurs. After careful consider-
ation of the different sentences I am of opinion that the word is

1863.] Remarks on the Taxila Inseription. 427

always used as a noun (feminine), by so taking it, all difficulties of
construction are avoided. Keeping in view the primary signification
of the adjective, and the repeated use of this word in connection with
dates, it may be conjecturally rendered as first or remarkable occasion.
The day to which the phrase is applied may have been made famous
by the deed which the Inscription commemorates, but, it may also
have been notable for events of which we are necessarily ignorant,
such as the birth or accession of the king. The second Hrikaina
Inscription affords perhaps some slight corroboration of this theory,
as it records the building of a temple in the first year of the king’s
reign, possibly the first temple he had erected. The same Inscription
supplies some little further support im the curious phrases immediately
preceding and following the words “ etasydm puérvdydm.” Professor
Hall transcribes the first passage as above, “ rajya-varsha-mdsa-dinaih,”
but m Prinsep’s Lithograph (Journal Vol. VII. p. 632) the last word
is clearly dineh. He, however, coincides with Professor Hall in trans-
eribing it dinaih,i. e. an instrumental plural. This case, however,
comes in very awkwardly as is shewn by the translation “7m the year,
month, and day of his reign.”” The Lexicons afford no countenance to
a crude form “ dini” for “day,” but if such a form exists, “ dineh” will
be the Genitive singular and the context will read “On this notable
oceasion of day, month and year in the king’s reign (or, of the king-
dom).” After this passage, come the words “ swalakshanairuktaptrva-
yam” * which Hall renders “as circumstantiated,” but which may signi-
fy in accordance with the view now taken “an occasion remarkable for
its peculiar incidents.” I propose these interpretations as conjectures
only, and will readily give them up if better solutions are produced.
The phrase “ etasydm purvdydm” is undoubtedly full of obscurity, and
if I have failed in throwing a true light upon it, I must console my-
self with the recollection that the deep learning of a Wilson failed to
elicit its meaning.

To return now to our Taxila Inscription. I propose to amend my
translation as follows: “In the year seventy-eight (78) of the great
king the great Moga, on the fifth (5) day of the month Panzemus.
On this notable occasion, the Satrap of Chhahara and Chukhsa, by
name Liako Kusuluko deposits a relic of the Holy S’akyamuni in the.
s'epatiko (which he had) established in the country called Chhema,

* The letters 7u are confessedly very indistinct and open to improvement.

428 Remarks on the Taxila Inscription. [No. 4,

north-east of the city of Taxila, in honour of the great collective body
of worshippers and of all the Buddhas ; for the honouring of his father
and mother ; for the long life, strength and prosperity of the Satrap’s
son and wife; for the honouring of all his brothers and relatives; and
for making known his great liberality, fame and success.”

General Cunningham proposes to identify Chhahara and Chukhsa
with Hazara and Chach, or “ Chach-Hazara” as the twin districts are
now designated. The locality is suitable and there is some similarity
in the sound of the words, but the identity cannot be considered more
than presumptive. A clearer and more valuable identification is pro-
posed in his supposition of the Joga of the Taxila Inscription being
the same as the Moa or Aaua of the Coins. To support this identifi-
cation he cites the name of Gondophares, which appears on some of
the coins as “ Undopherras.” In my former paper I have given reasons
for considering the Yarugasa and Yaiiasa of the coins to be varying
forms of the same word, like dhamikasa and dhamiasa. To this IL
will now add, in illustration of the way in which the guttural letters
are elided, the name by which the Prakrit designates itself, 1. e. Pada-
dam = Prakritam. So far as mere orthography goes, the names may
be considered identical. The number and variety of the coms of J/oa
prove him to have been a monarch of considerable power and import-
ance, one from whom an era might well take its rise. For these and
the other reasons which General Cunningham has advanced, I am dis-
posed to consider the identification of Joga with Moa to be all but
proved.

General Cunningham’s rendering of the Peshawar Vase Inscription
as amended in his Postscript at page 172 is identical with my own,
save and except the first letter, which is given as S instead of G. This
is a manifest error of the copyist or printer. We get the letter m of
ayam somewhat differently. He perceives a dot after the y which he
takes to be the m; I, however, find the nasal in the curve of the right
limb of the y. A few passages of the Wardak Vase Inscription have
also come under the notice of General Cunningham and he proposes to
amend Rajendra Lal’s reading “asansthanana?’ in the last line by
substituting “acharyanam.” Not satisfied with the Babu’s reading,
I somewhat hesitatingly changed it in my version to “asans'rana”
a word of much the same meaning. Rajendra Lal admitting the
General’s rendering to be more appropriate, demurs to the accuracy of

1863. | Remarks on the Taxila Inseription. 429

the transliteration. I am quite prepared to read the third character
as ry instead of s’r, for as I formerly stated the 7 certainly comes first,
and the s’ is not distinguishable from y. The difficulty is in the se-
cond character, which is badly formed and somewhat dubious, but I
cannot bring myself to recognize in it the letter ch. The General
says he tinds the same word, “ acharyanam,” in the unpublished Sra-
vasti Inscription or I should hesitate in admitting the word to have
been so used among the Baddhists.

While on the subject of Inscriptions I take the opportunity of sug-
gesting an emendation of Professor Hall’s translation of two import-
ant passages in the grants of King Hastin, which will be found in the
lines I have above quoted. My observations apply to the words bhuk-
tau and bhukte. The simple idea conveyed by these words is that of
eating or enjoyment, but out of these the Professor has elaborated the
sense of “waste” or “destruction” in order to bring them into con-
formity with the word “ s/dute” which is elsewhere similarly used and
which he has translated “being extinct.”* He has certainly got an
approximation to the sense, though, to adopt his own words upon Pro-
fessor Wilson’s rendering of another passage, he has not, verbally consi-
dered, unriddled them aright. The first passage is ‘‘ Gupta-nripa-rdjya-
bhuktau,” which he renders ‘‘ (In the year 156) of the extinction of the
sovereignty of the Gupta Kings.”” Wilson’s version was “ of the oceupa-
tion of the kingdom by the Gupta Kings” (Prinsep I. 251-2). This was
certainly objectionable, but simply change the word dy into of and all
becomes clear. The word bhuktaw may be taken in its well ascertain-
ed sense, and no development or stretching of the signification is re-
quired. The true reading of the sentence, as I take it, is “In the

-year 156 of (my dynasty’s) possession of the realm of the Guptas.”
The second Inscription reads “ Trishatyuttare *bdas'ate Gupta-nripa-
rijya-bhukte,” the noun bhukti being changed for the participle bhukte,
which is made to agree with the date. Professor Hall renders it “163
years after the domination of the Guptas had been laid to rest.” Ac-
cording to my view, it should read “ In the 163rd year that the realm
of the Guptas has been possessed (by my dynasty). It may be con-
sidered perhaps that the words s’dnte and bhukte, having been similer-
ly used, must therefore have a similar signification. To meet this view

* See Kahaun Inscription, Journal for 1861, page 3.

430 Remarks on the Taxila Inscription. [No. 4,

it may be observed, that the words may be brought into pretty close
agreement without any violation of the true meaning. S’dnta signi-
fies “quieted, humbled.” The.words “rdjye Skandha-quptasya s‘dnte
varshe trins’ad-dasaikottaraka-s'atame” may therefore be rendered
“In the year 141 since the kmgdom of Skandha Gupta was humbled
(by us)” which is much the same as saying that it was taken posses-
sion of and ocewpied. The origi of this difference of translation is
palpable. Professor Hall considered the matter from a Gupta point
of view, I have looked upon it through the medium of the authors of
the Inscriptions, who probably thought more of magnifying themselves

than of recording the downfall of a by-gone dynasty.

ee

PROCEEDINGS

OF THE

ASTATIC SOCIETY OF BENGAL,

For Aveust, 1863.

A. Grote, Esq., in the chair.

The proceedings of the last meeting were read and confirmed.

Presentations were received—

i. From Lieut.-Col. R. C. Tytler, a collection comprising speci-
mens of bats, birds, reptiles, and fishes from Port Blair; also some
skulls of turtles and two skulls said to be skulls of natives of the
Andamans; one of these, coloured with ochre, was found in a native
camp and is supposed to be the skull of a chief.

2. From the same, a large black basket prepared by the natives of
the Nicobars, and a light-coloured basket made by the aborigines of the
Andamans, and used by them as a fishing bag.

3. From His Honor the Lieutenant-Governor of Bengal, a dead

Gayal.
4. From A. Galloway, Esq., a stuffed specimen of a crocodile killed

by himself.

5. From the Assistant Secretary, Government of India, Foreign
Department, two copies of a series of fifty-four photographs, illustra-
tive of the tribes of Central India, taken by Lieut. J. Waterhouse, of
the Royal Artillery.

The Chairman stated that Lieutenant Waterhouse had kindly
mounted a set of this series and other photographs in their collection
in the Society’s portfolio.

The thanks of the meeting were voted to Lieutenant Waterhouse.

A communication from Sir Mordaunt Wells intimating his desire
to withdraw from the Society was recorded.

The following gentlemen, duly proposed at the last meeting, were

balloted for and elected ordinary members :—
3 I

452 Proceedings of the Asiatic Society. [No. 4,

Coomar Chundernath Roy and Baboo Bunkim Chunder Chat-
terjee, B. A.

The following gentlemen were named for ballot as ordinary members
of the next meeting :—

Captain F’. Norman, Quarter-Master General’s Department, proposed
by Colonel Strachey and seconded by Mr. Atkinson.

Baboo Shama Churn Sirkar, proposed by Mr. Cowell and seconded
by Mr. Bayley.

T. Bruce Lane, Esq., B. C. 8., proposed by Captain Lees and se-
conded by Mr. Grote.

Duncan Stewart, Esq., proposed by Mr. H. F. Blanford and second-
ed by Mr. Heeley.

The Chairman read to the meeting the following letter from Mr.
Cowell resigning the office of Jomt Secretary :—

“ A. Grote, Esq., Vice-President, Asiatic Society.

“ Dear Sir,—I beg to tender my resignation of the Secretaryship of
the Asiatic Society, as my health, as well as my professorial engage-
ments, entirely preclude my undertaking any longer to hold it.

“Tt will be remembered that this is no new idea. I have several
times wished to resign, and I now feel an absolute necessity to do so.
I am merely sacrificing my health and time uselessly to the Society
as well as myself, as my editorial work for the Bibliotheca Indica is
at a stand-still, from the incessant interruption which the editing of
our Journal causes. I believe that more credit would redound to the
Society as well as myself from vigorously continuing the Tuittiriya
Sanhitad. 'There are many in Europe who are anxious to see this, but
the edition must continue ata stand-still so long as the little leisure
I can command has to he given to correcting proofs for the Journal.

“T may remind the Council that I reluctantly accepted the office
at the very first, as | knew how difficult it would be to find time for
it ; and I have already held it five years and a half, so that I think I
may now fairly claim my discharge. I need hardly add that it is
from no diminution in my attachment to the Society; had I more
time, I should have been proud to retain the Secretaryship as long
as the Society wished.

“T remain &c.,
“(Sd.) EH. B. CowEut.

“ Calcutta, 80th July, 1863.”

1863. ] Proceedings of the Asiatic Society. 433

The Chairman observed that he read this letter with very great
regret in which he felt sure that the meeting and the Society generally
would join. The only set-off against the loss of Mr. Cowell’s services
as Secretary was the hope held out of greater progress in the publica-
tion of the Black Yajur Veda in the Bibliotheca Indica.

He would move the following resolution, which he thought would
have the meeting’s countenance :—

That this meeting desires to record its sense of the services rendered
by Mr. Cowell as Secretary during an incumbency of five and a
half years, and to express its regret at his inability to remain in
that office.

The resolution having been put to the vote, was carried unanimously.

Communications were received—

1. From Lieut.-Col. R. C. Tytler, a short description of a new
species of Paradoxurus.

2. From C. Campbell, Esq. Executive Engineer, Delhi Division, a
copy of a memorandum lately submitted to the Punjab Government on
the life-sized statues of elephants exhumed in the Delhi palace.

3. From Baboo Gopeenath Sen, Abstracts of the Hourly Meteoro-
logical Observations taken at the Surveyor General’s Office in
May last.

4, From Colonel Tickell, an account of the Gibbon (Hylobates
lar), with remarks on its range and habits.

Mr. Blanford read the paper of Colonel Tickell, and made some com-
ments on the subject of it, which were subsequently confirmed by the
Chairman.

Thanks were then accorded to the author and to Mr. Blanford.

For SEPTEMBER, 1863.
The Monthly General Meeting of the Asiatic Society of Bengal was
held on the 2nd instant.
H. C. Bayley, Esq., President, in the chair.
The proceedings of the ies ea were read and coment

Presentations were re
1. From Colonel re on the part of Dr. C. Williams, an in-
scribed tile with Buddhist figure found at Tagoung, similar to those
presented by the Colonel in May last. .
3.12

434 Proceedings af the Asiatic Society. [No. 4,

2. From the Anthropological Society of London, a copy of No. 1
of the Anthropological Review, containing the proceedings of the
Society.

3. From H. L. Haughton, Esq., five specimens of sea snakes from
Hidgelli, viz., Hydrus Schistosus, Hydrus Obscurus, Hydrophis Gra-
cilis, and two species not determined.

4. From Baboo Rajendra Mallika, a dead Emeu.

5. From the Imperial Government of Russia, a copy of the Bzblio-
rum Codex Sinaiticus, in four folio volumes, published by the Imperial
Government.

The following letter, which was read, accompanied the presenta-
tion :—

“ Londres, le 11 Juillet, 1863.

“ MonstpuR,—Le Ministre de I’ Instruction publique, d’ordre de sa
Majesté l’)Hmpereur, m’ a invité 4 offrir a la Societé Asiatique du
Bengale 4 Calcutta un exemplaire du Codex Stnaiticus, édité aux frais
du Government Imperial par les soins du professeur Tichendorf.

“ Je fais un devoir empressé de vous transmettre cet ovvrage, en
vous pr.ant d’agréer assurance de ma consideration trés distinguée.

(Signed) ““ BRUNNOW.

“ Aw Seerétaire de la Société Asiatique du Bengale a Calcutta.”

On a motion made by the President, the thanks of the meeting were
unanimously accorded to the Imperial Government of Russia.

A letter from Lieutenant-Colonel H. C. James, intimating his desire
to withdraw from the Society, was recorded.

The following gentlemen, duly proposed at the last meeting, were
balloted for and elected ordinary members :—

Captain F. Norisan, Quarter-Master General’s Department ; Baboo
Shama Churn Sirkar; T. Bruce Lane, Esq., B. c. s., and Duncan
Stewart, Esq.

The following gentlemen were named for ballot, as ordinary mem-
bers, at the next meeting :—

T. Martin, Esq., Principal, Civil Engineering College, proposed by
Mr. Blanford and seconded by Mr. Atkinson.

Dr. J. Ewart, Professor of Physiology at the Medical College, pro-
posed by Dr. Fayrer, and seconded by Mr. Blanford.

Dr. W. K. Waller, proposed by Mr. Blanford and seconded by Dr.
Fayrer.

1863. ] Proceedings of the Asiatic Society. 435

Moulvie Waheedoon Nubbee Khan Bahadoor, Deputy Magistrate
of Sealdah, proposed by Moulvie Abdool Luteef Khan Bahadoor and
seconded by the Secretary.

Major Dickens, proposed by Dr. Fayrer and seconded by Mr.
Blanford.

The Council reported that they had received a letter from Colonel
Thuillier resigning the office of President, and a letter from W. S.
Atkinson, Esq., resigning the office of Secretary to the Society. The
first mentioned letter they had received in April, but they had deferred
acting upon it until the present time, in the hope that after a few
months’ absence Colonel Thuillier might be enabled to resume his seat
as President of the Society, but having lately received an assurance
that he had no expectation of returning to Calcutta for several months,
they had, in accordance with the provisions of Rule 57, elected Mr.
EK. C. Bayley to the office of President for the remainder of the current
year. This election would be subject to confirmation by the Society
at the next meeting.

The Chairman read the letter.

Calcutta, 15th April, 1863.

‘Srr,—I regret very much that circumstances compel me to leave
Calcutta to proceed to the Upper Provinces on duty, and how long I
may be abzent is quite uncertain. I much fear I shall not be back
before the end of the year, if then.

“My health is also somuch broken that it is absolutely necessary
to have some respite from work, I therefore beg to request the favour
of your laying my resignation of the President’s chair, to which I was
elected at the last annual meeting, before the Council of the Society.

“In giving up this honour, I need hardly say with how much
regret I do it. I have tried hard to avoid the alternative of leaving
Calcutta, and have put it off to this late date, solely on account of my
position in the Society.

I have, &e.
(Signed) “HH. L. Tourer, Lt.-Colonel.

“W.S. Atkinson, Esq.,
Secy. Asiatic Society of Bengal.”

The Chairman then read Mr. Atkinson’s letter resigning the office
of Secretary to the Society :—

436 Proceedings of the Asiatie Society. [No. 4,

“ August 14th.

“ My pear Grorz,—l expect to leave Calcutta within a fortnight
and to be absent probably for several months, I shall be much obliged
if you will at once lay before the Council my resignation of the office
of Secretary.

“You and our colleagues are aware that I have long intended to
take this step on the first occasion when my absence from Calcutta
became necessary, and it will be convenient for all parties that I should
give up the Secretaryship now, so that I may make over charge oi the
office to my successor before I leave.

“JT must ask you to convey to the Council and the Society my
warm thanks for the confidence they have so long reposed on me, and
assure them that, though no longer in office, I shall not cease to take
the same hearty interest as heretofore in all that concerns the Society’s
welfare.

“‘ Very sincerely yours,
(Signed) “W. S. ATKINSON.
“A. Grote, Esq., Vice-President, Asiatic Society.”

The Chairman then stated that in accordance with the provision of
the same Rule, the Council had appomted Mr. H. F. Blanford as
Secretary to the Society, which appoimtment would likewise be sub-
mitted to the Society for confirmation at the following mecting. He
then proposed and Mr. Grote seconded the following resolutions expres-
sive of the Society’s acknowledgment of the eminent services rendered
to it by Col. Thuillier and by Mr. Atkinson :—

That the thanks of the Society be given to Col. Thuillier for his
conduct of the Society.

This being put to the vote was carried unanimously.

The Chairman proposed that the warm thanks of the Society be
given to Mr. Atkinson for his services as Secretary during the long
period of more than seven and a half years.

This proposition being put to the vote was carried unanimously.

The chairman further anaounced that the Council had elected
Lieutenant-Coionel J. E. Gastrell and Dr. 8. B. Partridge, as members
of their body, in the place of Colonel Thuillier and the Hon’ble
H.S. Maine, and that Captain W. N. Lees, LL. D., had been appomted
a Vice-President of the Society in the place of Mr. H. C. Bayley.

The Council further reported that they had granted to My, Blyth a

1863. ] Proceedings of the Asiatic Society. 437

further leave of nine months on full pay, contingent on the application
for pension not being complied with by the Secretary of State for
India before the expiration of his present leave.

Communications were received—

1. From the Under-Secretary to the Government of India, Foreign
Department ; Lieutenant-Colonel Pelly’s report of his tour round the
northern portion of the Persian Gulf, with journal of the route and a
sketch map by Dr. Colvill.

2. From Lieutenant-Colonel J. Abbot; remarks on the site of
Aornos.

3. From Lieutenant-Colonel S. R. Tickell ; Memo. relative to three
Andamanese in the charge of Lieutenant-Colonel 8. R. 'Tickell, when
Deputy Commissioner of Amherst, Tenasserim, in 1861.

The Secretary having read this paper, the thanks of the meeting
were voted to the author for his interesting remarks.

4. From Baboo Gopinauth Sen ; Abstracts of the Hourly Metero-
logical observations taken at the Surveyer General’s Office in June
last.

5. From Major-General Cunningham; note on a Bactro-Pali
inscription from Taxila.

6. From the same ; remarks on the date of the Pehewa Inscription
of Raja Bhoja.

The Chairman read the papers from General Cunningham.

Babu Rajendralala Mitra, adverting to General Cunningham’s com-
ments on his paper on the Bhoja Raja of Dhar and his homonyms, stated
that some of the errors dilated upon by the General had been already
acknowledged or corrected by him, and that others were due to misap-
prehensions on the part of that gentleman, which could be easily
explained ; but they required more time and attention than he could
then devote to them, and that, even if he did, he would tire the
patience of the meeting by a number of quotaticns and references
which could not be easily followed. There were others, again, he said,
which were attributable to ditferences of opinion, and he did not wonder
that they should exist. When it is remembered that scholars differ as
to the correct readings of texts published only three or four centuries
ago, and that the commentators of Shakespeare had not yet come to a
determination as to the original reading of many passages in the writings
of that prince of poets, it was but naturai that those who had to deal

438 Proceedings of the Asiatic Society. [No. 4,

with smudgy inscriptions recorded on dilapidated stones, battered by
the rains of centuries, written in characters new all but unknown, and
in languages which had bacome obsolete, and the decypherment of
which had to be effected by a series of guesses, should entertain
opinions irreconcileable with each other. These, therefore, he did not
wish then to dwell upon. He could not, however, allow that opportu-
nity to pass without adverting to the three instances of “errors of
omission” of which he stood charged. They were as injurious to him
as they were unfounded, and he wished therefore to give them the
earliest possible correction. The first instance, he observed, of which
the General complained, was a discovery of his as to the identity of
the Bhoja Raja of Gwalior with the great Bhoja of Malwa, noticed in
the Rdjatarangint, which, it was alleged, had bsen appropriated to
himself by the Babu without acknowledgement. 'The General, in his
letter published in the 29th volume of the Journal (p. 395,) says—‘ Of
the Gwalior inscriptions one of the most interesting is a record of
Bhoja Deva, dated in 933 Samvat, both in words and figures, A. D.
876. As this date agrees with that assigned to the great Bhoja of
Malwa by Kalhan Pundit, viz., A. D. 883-901, there can be little
hesitation in attributing this inscription to the famous Bhoja.” The
epithets “great” and “ famous” used by the General (the latter in
Italics,) coupled with the Bhoja of Malwa, leaves no doubt as to his
having alluded to the hero of the Bhaja probandha, for to no other
sovereign of Malwa could those epithets be correctly appled. To
him, however, the Babu had made no allusion. In this paper on the
Bhojas, he had pointed out the identity of the Bhoja of Gwalior with
one of the two Bhojas of Kanouj, of whom General Cunningham had
made no mention whatever, and not with the king, of that name, of
Malwa, who, he maintained, lived a century after the Prince of Gwalior,
and could not, therefore, have been identical. The accusation of mis-
appropriation in connection with the Bhojas was, therefore, entirely
unfounded.

With regard to the second instance of error of omission it was
remarkable, the Babu noticed, that in the same breath in which the
General blamed him for adhering to the old reading of the Rohtas
inscription, he accused him of having pirated his new reading. If he
did one he could not do the other. The fact, however, was that he had
done neither. He had to compare the history of the same line of kings

1863. ] Proceedings of the Asiatie Society. 439

in two separate inscriptions, the Rohtas and the Narwar, and on find-
ing one of the names to be written Hungara in one and Dungara in
the other, he attributed the difference to an error in the reading of
the first named document, as that of the second, he found, had the
support of three independent inscriptions from Gwalior. His reading
of the documents was perfectly independent of the researches of the
General, and his identification the imevitable result of the proofs he
had before him, and he could not therefore hold himself in any way
indebted for them to his eritic, who, to the best of his knowledge, had
nowhere given the correct reading Dungara. General Cunningham,
in his letter on the subject, alluded exclusively to the Rohtas record,
and said “the name of the fourth prince has been mis-read, it should

te)

be Dunggara and not Hungara.” There was nothing to show that
when he said this he had read either the Narwar or the Gwalior records,
for he made no allusion to them, and his new reading, or more strictly
suggestive alteration, was wrong, as he spelt the name with two g’s
(Dunggara) and not with one g (Dungara ;) he could not therefore
fairly claim the credit of a deduction which was founded upon an
examination of four, tiil then, undecyphered documents.

The last imstance of alleged error of omission on his part, the
Babu said, referred to the reading of the name of Huvishka and his
identification with the Hushka of the Rdjataranginé which General
Cunningham claimed as his own. The name, however, as read by the
General and printed in his letter in the 29th Vol. of the Journal,
pages 400 and 401, was Hoveshka in the Wardak and Huveshka in the
Mathura inscriptions. These readings were got at without decypher-
ing either of those records, and consequently were, to all intents and
purposes, quite as much guesses as the General’s suggestive reading of
Harishchandra of the same word, and all three being wrong, had no
claim to any consideration.

The Babu was the first to deeypher and translate the Wardak
record, and as his reading was different from that of General Cunning-
ham, (Huvishka and not Hoveshka) he felt bound in justice to him-
self to deny the claim of the General. The correct reading, Huvishka,
was first met with in the Mathura inscription by the Babu himself,
and subsequently in the Wardak record which he read with Mr.
Bayley’s tentative Nagari transcript in hand, and he did not feel called
upon to concede to the General what was strictly Mr. Bayley’s and his

3K

440 Proceedings of the Asiatic Society. [ No. 4,

own. Had General Cunningham decyphered or commented upon the
Wardak inscription, the Babu admitted he would have been bound to
allude to him had he borrowed from such comment or decypherment,
but he repudiated the necessity of quoting incorrect readings of single
words given casually in miscellaneous letters, even if he had remember-
ed them, (which in the present instance he did not) and that simply
to show thet he had come to a different opinion. The identity of
Huvishka with Hushka had been traced by perfectly independent
research, and was quite different from that of Hoveshka with Oderke
and Hushka, for it was one thing to say Huvishka was the same with
Hushka and quite another to say Hoveshka was the same with Oderke.
Where quotation was necessary no quotation was wanting. In the
very paragraph in which the identity of Hushka and Huvishka was
mentioned, the Babu had quoted from the General’s paper in the
Numismatic Chronicle for the date of Hushka, and he thought that was
all that he was called upon to do. The General in his letter in the 29th
Vol. of the Journal, lays great stress on the identity of Heveshka with the
Hiéerke or Oderke of the coins, but the Babu had nowhere named |
Oéerke in his paper on the Wardak record, or attempted to trace his
identity. Mr. Bayley, in his published note on that paper, alluded to
the “probable” identity of Huvishka with Oderke but not of Hovesh-
ka with Oderke, and therefore did not name the General. It is possi-
ble that the identity supposed by the General might suggest the idea
of the identity doubtingly pomted out by Mr. Bayley, but the Babu
hoped that nobody would deny that those who were deeply engaged in
the study of Bactrian numismatics, of the history of Kashmir, and of
Northwest India generally during the supremacy of the Indo-Scythians,
should more readily remember the well-known and well-established
identity of Kanishka with Kanerke and Hushka with Oderke and be
thereby led to the idea of Huvishka being the same with Eiushka, than
remember an isolated passage in a short miscellaneous letter ; but even if
the reverse of this position be insisted upon, it was not necessary, he
contended, to pomt out the suggestive power of an idea which had been
already published and become the property of the public for along time
by guotations of authority and parade of foot-notes. The omission of
quotations in such a case, would not in any way amount to neglect of
the amenities of literature. The charge, however, was not of benefiting
by working out in a differsmt direction the first idea of another, but

1863. ] Proceedings of the Asiatic Society. 441.

of positive misappropriation of calling the discovery of another as one’s
own, and as he had shewn that he had nowhere borrowed the General’s
reading of Hoveshka, he held that the charge brought against him was
utterly groundless. There was no doubt some similitude between
Huwvishka and Hoveshka, and in attempts to read the same document
by different individuals such similitude must always occur; but he
urged that it would be unjust if he who read the document correctly
should be deprived of credit because his predecessors had given an
avowedly incorrect but somewhat similar reading of only one of its
words. Should the General maintain so wrong a principle and say
that the difference between Hoveshka and Huvishka was immaterial
and the credit of reading the word should be his, it should be observed
that the syllables which he read Hevesh had been before him read to
be the same by Mr. Thomas, and the credit of first reading therefore
must rest with the latter gentleman and not with him. He regretted
auch, the Babu said, that he had to make these remarks, for he enter-
tained the highest respect for the General as a distinguished and most
successful antiquarian, who had done much to throw new light on the
history of his native land ; but he was sorry he could not sit down quietly
under the imputation of having misappropriated the discoveries of
another.

The President remarked that he was perhaps personally somewhat to
blame in the matter, for as Babu Rajendra Lal had owned to obtaining
from himself the reading of Huvishka and as the identification of. the
king of the Wardak Inscription with the Huvishka cf the Muttra
Inscription and the Hushka of the Raja Tarangini and the Oderke
of the Indo-Scythian coin-series had been already published by Gen.
Cunningham, he was bound to say that the source from which he had
derived the reading of Huvishka was undoubtedly General Cunning-
ham himself. The President’s tentative reading and transliteration
had been, however, made merely for self-guidance, and the papers were
made over without remark to Babu Rajendra Lal, as the President
had no leisure to complete the enquiry.

The Babu had therefore no notice of the real author of the dis-
covery at the time he wrote his article in question, for which the over-
sight of the President was chiefly to blame.

But in truth the identification of the Hushka of the Raja Tarangini
with the Oderke of the coms had been made so long since by General

3) Ik

44.2 Proceedings of the Asiatic Society. [No. 4,

Cunningham, that the further reading of Huvishka and its identification
with Hushka was a comparatively obvious step, and though the whole
merit rests with General Cunningham the earlier discovery is certain-
ly the most important.

For OcroBer, 1863.

The Monthly General Meeting of the Society was held on the 7th
instant.

E. C. Bayley, Esq., President, in the chair.

The proceedings of the last meeting were read and confirmed.

Presentations were received—

1. From the Natural History Society of Dublin, Part 2, of Vol.
III. of the Proceedings of the Institution.

2. From Babu Gunesh Chunder Banerjea, a copy of his work en-
titled Chitta Santoshint.

3. From Lieutenant-Colonel E. T. Dalton, three skulls of Moon-
dha and Aheer tribes of Chota-Nagpore.

4. From Mr. Grote, on the part of Lieutenant-Colonel R. C. Tyt-
ler, an Andamanese Mynah and a Crow.

5. From Mr. Blanford, the skull of a young Polar bear.

6. From the Assistant Secretary to Government of India, Foreign
Department, two copies of a series of 17 photographs of tribes inhabit-
ing Cachar and Assam, taken by Dr. Simpson.

7. From the American Philosophical Society, several volumes of
the Transactions and Proceedings of the Society.

8. From Mr. H. F. Blanford, the following collection of ieiee —

115 species of German miocene fossils.

104 ,, English miscellaneous fossils.

47 ,, Swiss cretaceous fossils, (chiefly cephalopoda.)
75 ,, German oolitic fossils.

15, ‘Indian.

34 ,, Miscellaneous.

The following letter, which was read by the President, accompanied
the presentation.

“ Asiatic Society's Rooms, 2nd October, 1863.
“To THE PRESIDENT OF THE ASIATIC SOCIETY.

“Dear Sir,—lI have the pleasure of offering to the Society the

collection of fossils of which the accompanying list is a summary.

1863.) Proceedings of the Asiatie Society. 443

Having devoted some months to the determination and arrangement
of the Society’s fossil collection, I have much satisfaction in being able
to add to that collection a series, a considerable number of which being
the authentic determinations of two of the first paleontologists of
Europe, Dr. Dunker, and M. Pictet, will, I believe, afford useful ob-
jects of reference to those who work at paleontology.

“As a valuable and extensive collection of fossils arranged in strati-
graphic or geological order has been already formed by Dr. Oldham,
i have arranged the fossils of the Society im natural history order,
so as to form an integral, as they are an essential, part of a zoological
museum, That such a collection is absolutely essential to the working
naturalist and paleontologist I can affirm, not only from my own
limited experience, but also from that of my late teacher, Edward
Forbes, and I believe of paleontologists in general.

“The arrangement is that adopted in the British Museum collection ;
that of the Geological Museum of Jermyn Street being followed in the
Survey Museum of Hasting’s Street, in accordance with the require-
ments of field geologists.

“It is with the view mainly of aiding in the formation of a zoologi-
cally arranged series of fossils that I have the pleasure of offering the
present collection to the Society ; and it is with a view, so far as in
me lies, to ensure the perpetuation of such a collection when the
Society’s museum becomes the property of Government, that I request
that, should such a collection not be retained in the new museum,
the present collection be then presented to the Presidency College.

“To avoid misapprehension I would say that the retention in the
new museum of a zoologically arranged series of fossils, of which the
present and all future donations of mine shall form part, is the sole
condition I attach to the gift.

“Whether such a collection pass into the geological or zoological
section of the new museum, I consider to be matter of secondary im-
portance.

“T trust meanwhile that the Society may receive such additions
to its fossil collection from other members of the Society as may
render it a worthy representation of fossil zoology.

“JT remain, &e., &c.,
(Sd.) “H. FE. Buanrorp.”

444 Proceedings of the Asiatic Society. [No. 4,

The President then proposed a vote of thanks to the donor, which
was unanimously accorded.

9. From Captain Stubbs, Horse Artillery, Meean Meer, a new type
of a silver coin of Shere Shah.

The following gentlemen duly proposed at the last meeting, were
balloted for and elected ordinary members :—T. Martin, Hsq.; Dr. J.
Ewart; Dr. W. K. Waller; Major Dickens; Moulvie Waheedoon
Nubee Khan Bahadoor.

The following gentlemen were named for ballot as ordinary mem-
bers at the next meeting :—

Dr. M’Clelland, proposed by Mr. Grote, and seconded by Mr.
Blanford.

Mr. Duff, proposed by Mr. Blanford, and seconded by Dr. Fayrer.

Dr. F. Stoliezka, proposed by Mr. Mallet, and seconded by Mr,
Blantord.

R. T. Martin, Hsq., barrister-at-law, proposed by Mr. Blanford, and
seconded by Mr. Grote,

Major J. G. Gowan, proposed by Mr. Grote, and seconded by Mr.
Blanford.

Babu Modhoosoodun Dass of Dacca, proposed by Moulvie Abdcol
Luteef Khan Bahadoor, and seconded by Moulvie Syud Ahmed Khan
Bahadoor.

H. D. Sandeman, Esq., proposed by Mr. Blanford, and seconded by
Mr, Bayley.

Letters from Messrs. 8. Wauchope, J. Sanders, and from Major
Fitzgerald, intimating their desire to withdraw from the Society were
recorded.

The appointment of E. C. Bayley, Esq., President, whose election
by the council had been announced at the previous meeting of the
Society, being put to the vote, the choice of the Council was confirmed
without dissent.

The appointment of Mr. Blanford as Secretary was also put to the
vote, and confirmed by the meeting.

The election of Lieut.-Col. J. HE. Gastrell and Dr. 8. B. Partridge
as members of the Council in the place of Colonel Thuillier and the
How’ble H. S. Maine, and that of Captain Lees as a Vice-President of
the Society in the place of Mr. E. C. Bayley, were likewise confirmed.

The Council further reported that they had taken into considera-

1863. ] Proceedings of the Asiatic Society. 445

tion the motion of Captain Lees, and resolved to recommend the disso-
lution of the Committee of Papers and an alteration in accordance
therewith to be made in Rule 77—-viz., that im place of the words
“ sub-committees of finance and papers,” the words “a sub-committee
of finance” be substituted.

The proposal being put to the vote by show of hands, it appeared
that five votes were in favour of the alteration, and four against it.
The President therefore announced that the votes of non-resident
members would be taken in accordance with the provisions of Rule 43,
and that it would then be finally submitted to the Society at the
ensuing annual general meeting,

The Council also submitted the following report of the Philological
Committee for the approval of the Society.

Philological Committee's Report.

“ Dr. Kern, of Benares, has offered to edit the Sanskrit astronomi-
eal work, the Vrihat Sanhita by Varaha Mihira. It will oceupy about
four fasciculi, The Philological Committee recommend to the Coun-
cil that it should be accepted, as it will be a valuable continuation
of the astronomical works already published in the Bibliotheca Indica.
They hope that Dr. Kern will add an English translation, which will
greatly increase the value of the work.”

The vote of the meeting being taken on the report, the recommend-
ation of the Philoiogical Committee was unanimously adopted.

The President announced that an aerolite which had lately fallen
near Dacca had been presented to the Society by the Lieutenant-
Governor of Bengal; and he proposed that the thanks of the meeting
‘be voted to his Honor for this valuable donation. The aerolite, he
added, was now on its way to the museum.

Communications were received—

1. From J. H. T. Aitchison, Esq., a paper “ On the Vegetation of
the Jheium District,’ with lithographed maps and plans to illustrate
the paper.

2. Krom the Under-Secretary, Government of India, Public Works
Department, copy of a ietter from Mr. G. Manners, Officiating Hxecu-
tive Engineer, Barrackpore Division, containing a list of the principal
architectural remains near Hooghly.

3. From Babu Gopinath Sen, abstract of the hourly meteorologi-
cal observations taken at the Surveyor General’s office in July last.

4AG Proceedings of the Asiatic Society. [No. 4,

4. From Captain H. H. G. Austen, a letter containing an emend-
ation of his article, betore submitted, on the system employed in outlin-
ing the figures of deities and other religious drawings as practised in
Ladakh, Zanskar, &e.

5. From the Under-Secretary, Governmentof India, Foreign Depart-
ment, a report by Lieutenant-Colonel Pelly on the tribes, trade, and
resources around the shore line of the Persian Gulf.

The Secretary having read extracts from Colonel Pelly’s report, the
thanks of the meeting were voted to the latter for his interesting
remarks.

6. From Captain H. G. Raverty, a paper on the languages of the
Siah Posh Kafirs, with a short list of words, to which are added spe-
cimens of the Kohistani and other dialects spoken on the northern
border of Afghanistan.

7. From TT. Oldham, Hsq., a note on the fossils in the Society’s
collection reputed to be from “ Spiti.”

The Librarian submitted the usual monthly report.

LIBRARY.

The following are the accessions to the Library since the meeting
held in July last.

Presented.

Annals of Indian Administration, Parts 2 and 3 of Vol. VIJ.—By
THE BENGAL GOVERNMENT.

Annual Report of the Geological Survey of India for 1862-63.—
BY THE SUPERINTENDENT, GEOLOGICAL SURVEY.

Annual Report of the Insane Asylums in Bengal for 1862.—By THE
Bengal GOVERNMENT.

Annual Report with tabular statements on the condition and ma-
nagement of the Jails, N. W. Provinces, for 1862.—By THE GovERN-
mEeNT N. W. PROVINCES.

The Anthropological Review, No. 1.-—By THE ANTHROPOLOGICAL
Socrery oF Lonpon.

Bijdragen tot de Taal-Land-en Volkenkunde van Nederlandsch
Indié, Stuk 5 and 6, Vierde Deel.—By THz AmMsTERDAM ACADEMY.

Calcutta Christian Observer for July, August and September.—By
THE Eprror.

1863. | Proceedings of the Asiatic Society. 447

Chitta Santoshinf.—By Basu GuNESH CHUNDER BANERJEE.

Bibliorum Codex Sinaiticus Petropolitanus. Auspiciis Augustissimis
Imperatoris Alexandri IJ. Vols. 1 to 4.—By THe ImpertaL GovERN-
MENT OF RusgsIa.

Journal of the Statistical Society of London, Vol. XX VI. Part 2.—
By Tue Society.

Journal of the American Oriental Society, Vol. VII. No. 2.—By
THE SOCIETY.

Journal of the Chemical Society of London, 2nd series, Vol. I. Nos.
4 to 6.—By THE Socrpry.

. Journal of the Academy of Natural Sciences of Philadelphia, Vol.
V. Part 3.—By THE ACADEMY.

_ Journal of the Royal Asiatic Society of London, Vol. XX. Part 2.
—By THE SOCIETY.

_ Jahrbuch der K. K. Geologischen Reichsanstalt, Vol. XII. No. 4,
and Vol. XIII. No. 1, and a General Index.— By THE ViENNA Mv-
SEUM.

Journal of Sacred Literature and Biblical Record, Vol. III. No. 6.
—By tue Eprrors.

Mahabharata, Bengali Translation, Part 9—By Basu Katt
PRosonno SINGH.

The Relations of Landlord and Tenant in India, Pamphlet.—By
THE EDITOR OF THE FRIEND OF INDIA.

List of the Fellows of the Zoological Society of London.—By THE
SocrEry.

Monatsberichte der K. Akademie der Wissenschaften for 1862.—
By THE ACADEMY.

Muir’s Sanskrit Texts, Part 4.—By THe AUTHOR.

Memoirs of the Geological Survey of India, Vol. IL. Part 6, 3 copies,
and Vol. III. Part 1, one copy.—By THE GOVERNMENTS OF INDIA
AND BENGAL AND BY THE SUPERINTENDENT, GEOLOGICAL SURVEY.

Natuurkundig Tijdschrift voor Nederlandsch Indie, Deel, XXIV.—
By THE BATAviaN SOCIETY.

The Oriental Baptist for May, June and July.— By tur Eprror.

The Oriental Christian Spectator for March.—By tur Eprtor.

Proceedings of the Royal Geographical Society of London, Vol. VII.
Nos, 2 and 3.—By THE Socrery.

3 OL

448 Proceedings of the Asiatic Society. [No. 4,

Proceedings of the Royal Society of London, Vol. XII. Nos. 55 and
56.—ByY THE SOCIETY.

Proceedings of the Academy of Natural Sciences of Philadelphia
from January to March, 1863.—By tHe AcApDEMY.

Proceedings of the Natural History Society of Dublin, for 1860-62,
Vol. III. Part 2.—By rue Soctery.

Proceedings of the Zoological Society of London from June, 1562 to
March, 1863.—By THE Socrery.

Proceedings of the American Philosophical Society—Philadelphia,
Vol. II. Nos. 23 to 27, Vol. IV. Nos. 28 to 39, Vol. V. Nos. 40 to
50, Vol. VI. Nos. 51 to 60, Vol. VII. Nos. 61 to 63, Vol. VIII. Nos.
67 and 68.—ByY THE SOCIETY.

Patra Kaumudi or Book of Letters—By Babu Rajendralal Mitra.
—By THE CoMPILER.

Quarterly Journal of the Geological Society of London, Vol. XIX
Nos. 74 and 75.—By THE Socrery.

Report on the operations at the Alguada Reef and Double Island
lighthouses for 1862-63.—By THE GOVERNMENT oF INDIA.

Revue Orientale et Americaie Nos. 43 and 45.—By tHE Eruno-
GRAPHICAL SOCIETY OF Parts.

Report of the British Association for the advancement of Science
for 1861.—By THE BririsH ASsocraTIon.

Report Statistical and Geographical of the district of Bancoorah —
By tHe BENGAL GOVERNMENT.

Rahasya Sandarbha, Vol. I. Nos. 4,5 and 6.—By THe CaxcurTa
Scnoot Book Sociery.

Selections from the Records of the Bombay Government, No. 59
with 7 maps.—By THE GOVERNMENT OF INDIA.

Chinese and Japanese Repository, Vol. I. No. 1—By Professor
Summers.—By THE AUTHOR.

Selections from the Records of the Government of India, Foreign
Department, No. 39, two copies. —By THE GovERNMENT oF INDIA.

Schriften der Koniglichen, Physikalisch-Okonomischen Gesellschatt
zu Konigsberg, Vol. III. Parts 1 and 2.—By Tue Soctzry.

Transactions of the Zoological Society of London, Vol. V. Part 2.—
By THE SOCIETY.

Transactions of the American Philosophical Society of Philadelphia,

1863. ] Proceedings of the Asiatic Society. 449

Vol. VIII. Parts 2 and 3, and Parts 1 to 3 cf Vols. IX. X. XI. and
XII.—By rue Soctery.

Verhandelingen van het Bataviaasch Gentooschap, Deel XXIX.—By
THE BATAVIAN SOCIETY.

Weber’s Indische Studien, Vol. VII. Part 3.—By tHe AUTHOR.

Whitney’s Atharva Veda Pratisakhya—By THE Eprror.

Journal Asiatique, Vol. XX. No. 80, and Vol. I. No. 2——By THE
Parts AstaTic SOCIETY.

Zeitschrift der Deutschen Morgenlandischen Gesellschaft, Vol. VII.
Parts 1 and 2.—By THE GERMAN ORIENTAL SOCIETY.

Exchanged.

The Atheneum for April, May, June and July, 1863.
The London and Edinburgh Philosophical Magazine, Vol. XXV.
Nos. 169, 170 and 171, Vol. XX VI. Nos. 172 and 178.

Purchased.

Novorum Actorum Academiz Caesareae Leopoldino-Caroline Nature
Curiosorum, Vols. IX. to XXIII., Part 1.

Benfey’s Orient und Oeccident, Vol. II. Part 2.

Sanskrit Worterbuch, Part 4, Bogen 21—30.
- Bleeker’s Atlas Ichthyologique des Indes Orientales Neerlandaises,
Parts 7, 8 and 9,

Catalogue of Fossil Mammalia and Aves in the Museum of the
Royal College of Surgeons of England.

Clark’s Comparative Grammar.

Grimm’s Deutsches Worterbuch, Vol. IV. Part 1.
The Edinburgh Review for July, 1863.

Enault’s Histoire de la Literature des Hindous.

Feriduddin Attar’s Mantic Uttair.

Goldstiicker’s Sanskrit-English Dictionary, Vol. I. Part 5.

Gould’s Birds of Asia, Part 15.

Hewitson’s Exotic Butterflies, Part 47.

Hagen’s Bibliotheque Entomologica, Vols. I. and II.

Kaschmir und das Reich der Siek. Von Carl Freiherrn von Higel.
IV. Band, Zweite Abtheilung.

Jerdon’s Birds of India, Vol. II. Part 1.

Lane’s Arabic-English Lexicon, Book I. Part 1.

450 Proceedings of the Asiatic Society. [No. 4,

Lewis’s Historical Survey of the Astronomy of the Ancients.

Noldeke’s Leben des Mohammad.

Numismatic Chronicle and Journal of the Numismatic Society of
London, New Series, No. 10.

Ndmi’s Poems, (Waémik Azra, Khusrau Shirin, and Laili Majnin,)
Persian MS.

The Parthenon, Vol II. Nos. 51 to 55.

Palzontographical Society’s Publications, 7 Vols.

The Quarterly Review for April and July, 1863.

The American Journal of Sciences and Arts for March, May and
July, 1863.

Reeve’s Conchologia Iconica, Parts 226 to 229.

Rosenzweig’s Auswahl aus den Diwanen.

Sir G. C. Lewis on the decipherment and interpretation of Dead
Languages. By P. Le Page Renouf.

Stelling’s Bau und die Verrichlangen des Gehans.

Tornberg’s Ibn-Athiri, Vol. IX.

Tabakat-i-Akbar Shahi, Persian MS.

Tugault’s Elements de la Langue Malaise ou Malaye.

Revue et Magasin de Zoologie, Nos 3,4, 5 and 6 for 1863.

Revue des Deux Mondes for April, May, June, July and Ist Au-
gust, 1863.

The Annals and Magazine of Natural History, Vol. X. Nos. 65 to
68.

Monier Williams on Indian Epic poetry.

Weber’s Indische Studien, Vol. VII. Parts 1 and 2. | :

Comptes Rendus, Vol. LVI. Nos. 12 to 26, and Vol. LVIT. Nos. 1
to 3, with an Index to Vol. LV.

Journal des Savants for April, May, June and July, 1863.

The Natural History Review for July, 1863.

Zenker’s Dictionnaire Turc-Arabe-Persan, Part 4.

Lategorat Durr.

7th October, 1863.

1863.] Proceedings of the Asiatic Society. 451

Report of the Curator, Zoological Department.
(Continued from page 90.)

VII. From the Melbourne Institution. A collection of Mammals
and birds, the skin of one reptile and that of a fish.*

The Mammals are—

Of PracentTania Fam. Murip»,—

*HAPALOTIS APICALIS, Gray, P. Z. 8.1851, p. 126. (2 specimens).

*H. Mircuennit; Dipus Mitchell Ogilby, Tr. L. Soc. XVIIL.,
129. (2).

*Mus—? Length 4 in., with tail about 3 in. ; hind foot 12 in.
ear-conch small, posteriorly ¢ in. Fur straight, gee long, of he
ordinary rat-brown above, ashy beneath, and the feet somewhat albes-
cent ; tail clad with short hairs, biackish above, aibescent below. (2).

*Mus—? Like a diminutive Hapatorts, with the exception of the
tail. Length 3% or 33 in., with tail 23 in. ; hind foot ¢ im. ; ear-conch
ample, + in. long posteriorly. Colour ight brown above, the tips of
the hairs black upon the back ; below pure white, abruptly separated
from the hue of the upper parts ; tail dark above, whitish below and
tolerably well clad ; feet white. (2).

Of MarsupraLta,—

*PHASCOGALE CRASSICAUDATA ; Podabrus crassicaudatus, Gould,
P. Z. 8. 1844, p. 105; Mammals of Australia, pt. I. pl. 5; Water-
- house, Wamm. I1., 428. (2).

*PHRAMELES OBESULA; Didelphys obesula, Shaw; Waterhouse,
Manm. I., 368. (2).

ae oo Gray ; Waterhouse, Mamm. I., 376.

*Berroncia Grait; Hypsiprymnus Grav, Gould, P. Z. 8. 1840,
p- 178; Waterhouse, ‘Manin I., 203. @).

*HYPSIPRYMNUS RUFESCENS; Letiongia rufescens, Gray, MW. N. H.
n. 8., 1. (1837), 584: Hypsiprymnus melanotis, Gould, Monogr. pt. 2 :
Waterhouse, Mamm. I., 196.

*MacRopus FRmNATUS, Gould, P. Z S. 1840, p. 92; Gould,
Monogr. pt. I. pl. 18. (2). Also skull.

* Species new to the Society’s museum are distinguished by having an aste-
risk prefixed.

452 Proceedings of the Asiatic Society. [No. 4,

M. eteanteus; Didelphys gigantea, Schreber; Waterhouse,
Mamm. 1. 62. Adult male; and female sent as IZ. ocydromus, Gould,
Ann. Mag. N. H., X. (1842), p. 1,—considered by Mr. Waterhouse
to be a variety of the former. We had previously but a small example
of this species, with its skeleton.

The Birds are—

LicmeEtis Nasicus ; Cacatua nasica, Temminck : Gould’s B. Austr.
Wo

*Cacatua LEADBEATERI, Vigors: Gould’s B. Austr. V. 2.

*POLYTELIS MELANURA; Paleornis melanura, Vigors: Gould’s
B. Austr. V. 16. (2).

PLATYCERCUS FLAVEOLUS, Gould’s B. Austr. V. 25. (2).

Pu. Barnarpit, Vigors and Horsfield: Gould’s B. Ausir. V.
22).

*PsEPHOTUS HEMATOGASTER, Gould’s B. Austr. V. 33. (2).

*Ps. MULTICOLOR; Psittacus multicolor, 'Temminck; Gould’s
B. Austr. V. 35. (2). ;

Ps. HEMATONOTUS, Gould’s B. Austr. V. 36.

EUPHEMA CHRYSOSTOMA ; Psittacus chrysostomus, Kuhl. : Gould’s
B. Austr. V. 37. (2).

Merops ornatus, Latham ; Gould’s B. Austr. II. 16. (2).

This would appear to be the only Australian Bee-eater. It is not,
however, peculiar to Australia ; for Mr. Wallace lately obtamed it in
Ternate (P. Z. S. 1860, p. 348). It is not generally known among
ornithologists ; that the ScyrHrops Nova Ho1ianpr has been pro-
cured in Celebes and Batchian—apparently the limit of its equatorial
migration.

CucULUS INORNATUS, Vigors and Horsiield: Gould’s B. Austr. IV..
85. (2).

C. crnERACEUS, Vigors and Horsfield: Gould’s B. Austr. IV. 86.

Curysococcyx Lucipus ; Cuculus lucidus, Gmelin; Gould’s B.
Austr. IV. 89.

GRALLINA PIcaTA; Gracula picata, Latham: Gould’s B. Austr.
I. 54. (2).

*CHLAMYDERA MACULATA, Gould’s B. Austr. IV. 8. (2).

*CINCLOSOMA CASTANOTUS, Gould’s B. Austr. IV. 5. (2).

Fatcuncutus Govnpit, Cabanis; £ frontatus, (Latham), apud
Gould’s B. Austr. II. 79. (2).

1863. | Proceedings of the Asiatic Society. 453

Orrorca cristata; Lurdus cristatus, Lewin: Gould’s B. Austr.
II. 81. (2).

*SPHENOSTOMA CRISTATUM, Gould’s B. Austr. III. 17.

*POMATORHINUS SUPERCILIOSUS, Vigors and Horsfield; Gould’s
‘B. Austr. 1V. 22.

*P, PILEATUS, nobis, . s. Distinguished from the last by having a
bright ferruginous-brown cap, bordered by the white supercilia, and
conspicuous white tips to the wing-coverts and tertiaries: the feet
also are more robust. Sent as male of the preceding race; the sexes
of which (according to Mr. Gould) are quite similar in plumage.

*CLIMACTERIS ERYTHROPS, Gould, var.? (CL. AFFINIS, nobis,
n.s.?). Like Cu. pryTHROPS, but with slight pale non-rufous saper-
cilia, which are not conspicuously noticeable: throat dull whitish,
passing to greyish on breast, and a small central ferrugimous spot at
base of throat: ear-coverts pale, streaked. Specimen doubtless of the
female sex.

*SITTELLA PILEATA, Gould’s B. Austr. IV. 104.

CoLLURICINCLA HARMONICA ; Turdus harmonicus, Latham : Gould’s
B. Austr. I. 74. (8).*

*PACHYCEPHALA GILBERTII, Gould’s B. Austr. I]. 71.

. P. RUFIVENTRIS ; Sylvia rufiventris, Latham: P. pectoralis apud
Gould’s B. Austr. II. 67. (2).

PETROICA BICOLOR, Swainson: Gould’s B. Austr. ILI. 7. (2).

*P. GoopENovit Muscicapa Goodenovii, Vigors and Horsfield :
Gould’s B. Austr. ITI. 5.

*M ALURUS MELANOTUS, Gould’s B. Austr. III. 21. (2).

SEISURA INQUIETA ; Turdus inquietus, Latham: Gould’s B. Austr.
II. &7.

*RHIPIDURA (?) MoracitLoipes, Vigors and Horsfield: Gould’s
B. Austr. 11. 85.

* Gould, in his ‘ Birds of Australia,’ restricts the range of C, Harmonica to
H. and 8. Australia, and of C. SniBir to Tasmania. We have, however, both
types alike from Port Philip or Victoria land and Van Dieman’s land: but, in
each case, offering a certain amount of difference. C. SELBi1, from Port Philip,
has rather a small bill, the throat is but slightly albescent, and the breast not at
all so, but uniform brownish-ashy, passing to sullied white on the belly and lower
tail coverts. Length of bill to gape 1% in., in the Tasmanian bird 14 in.; of
closed wing respectively 5; in., and 5 in. ; and tail 44 and 4 in. : the Port Philip
bird being thus the larger of the two, but having a conspicuously smaller bill.
The Tasmanian C. Harmonica accords in dimensions with the continental race;
but its plumage is altogether browner, having the ashy tinge much weaker.

454 Proceedings ef the Asiatic Society. [No. 4,

GRAUCALUS MENTALIS, Vigors and Horsfield: Gould’s B. Austr.
II. 56. (4).

ARTAMUS sorDIDUS ; Turdus sordidus, Latham: Gould’s B. Austr.
II. 27. (2). ,

*A. LEUCOPYGIALIS, Gould’s B. Austr. II. 33. Of two specimens
sent, one is wholly undistinguishable from A. LEUCORHYNCHUS, (L),
from the Andaman islands (!) ; while the other has rather more of white
upon the rump.

Manoruina Garruta; Merops garrulus, Latham: Gould’s B.
Austr. 1V. 76.

*PLECTRORHYNCHA LANCEOLATA, Gould’s B. Austr. IV. 47.

*MELITHREPTUS GULARIS, Gould’s B. Austr. IV. 71.

ENTOMYZA CYANOTIS; Gracula cyanotis, Latham: Gould’s B.
Austr. IV. 68.

*TROPIDORHYNCHUS CITREOGULARIS, Gould’s B. Austr. IV. 60. (2).

ACANTHOGENYS RUFOGULARIS, Gould’s B. Austr. IV. 53. (2).

*PTILOTIS SONORUS, Gould’s B. Austr. LV. 33.

*OCYPHAPS LOPHOTES ; Columba lophotes Temminck, Gould’s B.
Austr. V. 70. (2).

GEOPELIA TRANQUILLA, Gould’s B. Austr. V. 73. (L).

DRoMAIUS NOVH-HOLLANDIAZ ; Casuarius nove-hollandie, Latham :
Gould’s B. Austr. VI. 1. Young.

ERyTHROGONYS cINCTUS, Gould’s B. Austr. VI. 21.

*ARDEA PACIFICA, Latham: Gould’s B. Austr. VI. 52. (2).

BorTavRvus MELANOTUS, G. R. Gray : Gould’s B. Austr. VI. 64. (2).

Larus (Gapranus) pacrFicus, Latham, apud Bonap., nee apud
Gould; young. We have another Australian example in similar
plumage; and a third, from the Cape of Good Hope, in adult plumage
(J. A. S. XXIX.101.). A much larger bird, otherwise similar, but of
which the black of the mantle of the aduit is less intense, we also possess,
from Australia: and this I take to be L. (GaBranus) Groret, King,
apud Bonap. (pacificus apud Gould’s B. Austr. VII. pl. 19) : but Mr.
Gould combines, in his figure of the adult, the greater size of the latter
race, with the deeper-black mantle of the former ; stating, that his
figures are about two-thirds of the natural dimensions. Length of
closed wing, of the larger race, 183 in. ; of the smaller, 15 in.

XEMA NOVH-HOLLANDIA ; Larus nove-hollandie, Stephens : Gould’s
B. Austr. VII. 20.

or

1863 ] Proceedings of the Asiatic Society. AS

*THALASSEUS POLIOCERCUS, Gould’s B. Austr. VII. 24.

*PHALACROCORAX CARBOIDES, (rou'd’s B. Austr. VII. 66.

Undistinguishable, so far as I could perceive, from Pu. CARBO of
the northern hemisphere.

The Reptile is—

Hyprosavrvs varius ; Lacerta varia, Shaw. Specimen exceeding
55 in. in length; and distinct from another Australian HypRosaurus
in the Society’s Museum, which I have hitherto supposed to be the
H. varius. The latter may be described as

H. ocEennartus, nobis, 2. s. Scales on the head and face very much
smaller than in H. varius and H. satvaror; those on the neck also
smaller ; and the transverse rows oi scales upon the tail are uniform
in size throughout, and on its lower surface are much smaller than in
the others: the claws also are weaker and less hooked. Colour
blackish ; a yellow stripe from the eye, and another from the gape
continued along the sides of the neck: sides of the body with numer-
ous transverse rows of yellow rings, which are continued across the
back more distinctly posteriorly : a series of well-defined narrow yel-
low stripes crossing the tail, the tip and under surface of which are
‘spotless yellowish ; rest of the under-parts freckled with black scales :
limbs spotted and barred with yellow, including the upper surface of
the toes. Length of specimen about 32 in.*

The Fish is—

Heteropontus Purirerr; Squalus Philippi, Bloch Schneider ;
Cestracion Philippi, Agassiz ; C. Quoyi, de Framenville. ‘ Port Jack-
son Shark.’

VIII. Babu Rajendra Mallika. Several dead animals: among
them a buli Gayal (Bos FRONTALIS) ; a doe fallow deer ; a large male
pig-tailed monkey (INUUS NEMESTRINUS) ; and a hybrid monkey, a
cross between the preceding individual and a female of the Cape

* Specimens of a Hyprosaurus from the Andaman and Nicobar islands ap-
pear to differ only in colouring from H. sanvaror; the transverse rows of ocelli
upon the body being rarely traceable, however, faintly, while the entire upper
surface is besprinkled with dull yellow scales. The H. satvaror I obtained at
Mergui; and Monirok pracona at Patpoung, upper Martaban. The length
which Dr. Gray assigns to his Australian H. GIGANTEUS, viz. 78 im,, 18 commonly
attained by H. satvaror. We have one of that length from Ceylon, and -have
seen several from Lower Bengal, It appears to be the ordinary length of the full
grown animal,

3 M

456 Proceedings of the Asiatie Society. ° [No. 45,

Baboon (CYNOCEPHALUS PORCARIUS). The last is, I believe, the first
instance of a hybrid monkey on record. The infantile specimen resem-
bles much the young of the NEMESTRINUS, but has the considerably
more developed tail of the Porcartus. The two parents had been
long kept together.

1X. Lt. Beavan, now with the Darjiling sappers. Skull of an
Otter (Aonyx), killed near the road from Calcutta to Barrackpore.
Also sundry birdskins.

X. Lt. Forbes, late 2nd B. N. I. A pair of TETRAOGALLUS
TIBETANUS, Gould.

XJ]. Lt. Campbell, H. M. 90th Regt. A skin of DiomEDEA
EXULANS, L.

XII. His Excellency Earl Canning, Viceroy and Governor-General
of India. The carcass of an adult male Giraffe. I much wished to
have had this prepared as a stuffed specimen ; but owing to the pro-
tracted absence from duty of our head taxidermist, the skin could not
be properly set up. ‘The skeleton, however, has been preserved ; and
is that of a considerably larger animal than was the female already
mounted as a skeleton, the carcass of which was presented to the
Society by Viscount Hardinge.

XIII. Lt.-Col. Nuttall, late in command of the Arakan battalion.
A few bottles of snakes, of well known species ; and one containing
numerous specimens of TEREDO NAVALIS extracted from thei perfora-
tions. A water snake in this collection, new to the Society’s museum,
is the ArurtA CaPENOIDES of Gray’s Catalogue of the snakes im the
British Museum.

XIy. J. F. Galiffe, Esq. Several living examples of GEcKo
veERUS, from the vicinity of Calcutta.

XV. J. H. Gurney, Hsq., M. P., of Catton Hall, near Norwich.
Skin of Fatco pEREGRINUS, L., from Inverness; MILVUS ATER,
(Gmelin), @ from Tangier, and specimen in immature plumage ;
M. arrinis, Gould, from Australia; Gyps vulgaris, Savigny, (G.
Ruppellii, Pr. Bonap), young, from Natal, SERINUS MERIDIONALIS,
Pr. Bonap, 2g 1, from Algeria and ARDEOLA comaTa, (Pen.) in
winter dress, from Natal.

Mr. Gurney writes—“TJI have a good series of kites from Chima
and one specimen from Japan ; but my series of Indian kites is not so
good as it ought to be, and I have none from Ceylon. I have not a

1863. | Proceedings of the Asiatie Society. 457

sufficient series of Indian kites to make a satisfactory comparison
between them and the Chinese.

“T have one or two small Indian kites which appear to me to be
identical with the Minvus arrryis of Australia: M. arrinis I have
also received from Macassar; and I have some Chinese kites which
appear quite adult and in which the pale streaks have entirely disap-
peared, as in adult specimens from India.

“JT have never yet been able to discover any difference in the
plumage of old and young specimens of M. areryrs—which is remark-
able, as there is so great a difference in the case of M. Govinpa and
M. aver, and also a difference (though much less) in the case of M.
PARASITICUS.

“The British Museum contains adult specimens of the Faleon which
I presume you identify with F. canipus of Latham; but I have a
suspicion that the true f\. PEREGRINUS is sometimes found in India, as
well as F. canrpus.

“ Capt. Irby has brought a Falcon from Oudh which appears to Mr.
Sclater and myself to belong to an undescribed species intermediate to
F. catrpus and F. nanarius of Schlegel (Feldeggi, auctorum). Be-
sides Capt. Irby’s specimen, which he has kindly presented to the
Norwich museum, we have two other examples of this Falcon there—
one said to be from Abyssinia, the locality of the other unknown. The
late H. I. Company’s Museum contains a fourth specimen brought from
Babylon by the ‘ Euphrates’ exploring expedition. (Since published as
I’. BaByLonicus, Gurney, in the Ibis, Vol. III. p. 218).

“f’, PEREGRINATOR (as you justly say) is a well marked species,
and very distinct from all the above. It is singular that it has never
yet (so far as J know) been figured in fully adult plumage.

“F. sue@ur belongs to a distinct group, in which are two other
species, viz. F. sacrer, Schlegel,=F. tanarius, auctorum,—and
I. potyacrus of N. America.” *

* The more typical Falcons appear to me to resolve into—

1. Arctic or Jer. Falcons (excluding certain species from Australia and N.
Zealand).

2. Desert Falcons, The Lanner group, to which F. sacrr, ¥. suceur, F. Ba-
BYLONICUS, and K'. PEREGRINOIDES appertain ; and to which the ImracipEA of Mr.
Gould approximates, his supposed two species, being (in Dr. Jerdon’s, and my
own opinion) in all probability but young and old of the same; as also the alleg-

ed ‘Jer. Nalcons’ of the Southern Hemisphere.
3. Clif Falcons ; consisting of the Peregrine group,

3 M 2

458 Proceedings of the Asiatic Society. [ No. 4,

XVI. H. H. The Mahéraja of Burdwan. The stuffed skin of a
two headed calf.

XVII. Mr. C. K. Hamilton, Calcutta. A canine tooth of the great
‘ Hlephant-seal,’ or ‘Sea-elephant’ MorunGa PROBOSCIDHA, (Des-
marest).

XVII. Mr. Morgan. A small common Rat (Mus pecuMants),
with abnormally developed rodent-tusks.

XIX. Major W. A. Anstruther Thomson, Commander of the
Viceroy’s Body-guard. A Cuttle-fish common in the Bay of Bengal.

XX. Lt. W. G. Murray, Topographical Assistant G. T. Survey.
A box of bird skins from the Dholpur and Gwalior territories. The
only noteworthy specimen is that of a female Propasszr of Hodgson,
which cannot be referred to any ot the species hitherto recognised :—

Pr. Murrayi, nobis, 2. s. Most nearly affined perhaps, to Pr.
RODOPEPLA (Vigors) ; but the bill much smaller, shaped more as in Pr.
RODOCHROUS, (Vigors), though more elongated and distinctly approx-
imating in form to that of ProcarDuELIs, Hodgson. Colour brown
above, paler below, a little rufescent on the rump, belly, and upper
and lower tail-feathers ; very indistinctly striated, except on the crown
where the feathers have contrasting pale lateral edges: a tolerably
distinct rufescent whitish supercilium ; and the throat also rufescent
whitish, with dusky spots towards and upon the chin: greater and
less wing-coverts pale-tipped, and tertiaries pale-margined, the secon-
daries much more narrowly pale-margined. Bill and feet corneous.
Length about 63 im.; of closed wing 3 in.; and tail 23 in., bill to
frontal point {2; in. The male will, of course prove to be more or less
erimson like that of its congeners.

A very fine new species of this Genus has lately been obtained by
Lieut. Beavan of the late 62nd B. N. I., on Tonglu mountain (10,000
ft.), on the Sikhim frontier bordering on Nipal ; together with other
novelties in the bird class, and several known species that are rare m
collections. I avail myself of this opportunity to introduce the former.

Pr. FRONTALIS, nobis, 7. s. Most resembling PR. RODOPEPLA,
(Vigors), but the bill smaller, and the tail longer. Broad frontal
band, supercilia, and feathers of cheeks and throat, consisting of elonga-
ted plumes, vinaceous with glistening whitish medial lme more or less
developed, the entire feathers composing the frontal band being thus
whitish ; rest nearly as in PR. RODOPEPLA, but without the ruddy

1863. | Proceedings of the Asiatic Society. 459

tinge above, or the pale spots on centre of back, and the upper tail-
coverts (as well as the feathers of the rump) are broadly tipped with
rosyvinaceous ; crown, nape, and back, deep brown with a blackish
central streak to each feather ; tertiaries margined with whitish, greater
wine-coverts the same towards their tips, and the next range of wing-
coverts having each an oval terminal spot ; axillaries and under-coverts
of the wing white ; primaries and tail dusky ; bill and feet brown. The
female is similar to the male above, but has no frontal band, the super-
cilia are whitish, and the rump feathers are margined with golden
fulvous ; throat and breast rufous, the cheeks and sides of the throat
and the abdominal region, whitish, with a strongly marked black
median line to each feather. Length of wing 24 in., of tail 3 in. ;
tarse $ in, Female rather smaller. From Tonglu mountain.

Also a very fine new species of true Bullfinch, being the fourth now
known to inhabit the Himalaya.

PYRRHULA ERYTHACA, nobis, 2. s. Upper parts pure ashy, like the
back of P. vunearts, Ray, also the front of the neck becoming whitish
on the throat ; pectoral region fine red ; the abdominal pale ashy, and
the lower tail-coverts white ; a broad white band on the rump, as in
P. vunearis, above which is a sight black band, and the upper tail-
coverts and tail are rich purple-black, the middle tail feathers being
# in. shorter than the outermost ; a black ring encircles the bill, and
spreads over the loral region, this rmg being bordered and set off with
white ; wings black, except the smallest coverts which are grey, and
a brownish-grey band (% in. broad) tipping the greater coverts; no
red mark upon the tertiaries. Bill black and feet pale. Length of
wing 3% in., and of tail3 im. This fine species is as large as P. NIPA-
LENSIS, Hodgson, and serves to link that somewhat peculiarly coloured
species with its congeners. The female is unknown. From Tonglu
mountain.

Parus Beavanti, nobis, m. s. Like P. RUFONUCHALIS, nobis, of
the N. W. Himalaya, but the black much less extended upon the
breast as in P. MHLANOLOPHUS, Vigors; no trace of rufous, on the
white nuchal spot, but the axillaries and lower tail-coverts are of this
hue. From Tonglu mountain.

ANTHUS ROSACEUS, Hodgson. Thisis not the A. cervinus, Pallas,
of China, Upper Pegu, and also the Andaman islands. The upper
parts are much darker, the ear-coverts are duskyish whereas in the other

460 Proceedings of the Asiatic Society. [No. 4,

they are light rufous like the supercilia, which latter are also whitish
in the bird from Tonglu, contrasting strongly with the dark crown
and ear-coverts. In the other race the supercilia are of the same hue
with the lores and cheeks (4. rufosuperciliaris, nobis, passim). The
throat, also, in the Tonglu specimen is much paler than in the other.

A specimen of a CorypHEpDEa in Lt. Beavan’s collection is of an
extraordinary pale grey colour, nearly as in ALAUDA RAYTAL, (B.
Ham.) ; but I cannot venture to describe it as a distinct race.

P. 8. The following letter on the Cetacea of the Chinese Seas, from
R. Swinhoe, Esq., British Consul at Formosa, will be read with
interest.

“Some time ago you asked me for information about Whales, in
these Seas. I have kept your request in mind, though I have not till
now succeeded in meeting with any one who could give me information
on the subject. My informant was many years at Swatow, off which
port more Whales have been seen than elsewhere on this coast, and I
will now narrate what I have been able to gather from him. Whales
visit the Straits of Namoa regularly every May. They are mostly
cows, and are usually accompanied with their calves some 20 or 30 ft.
long. Some of the adults attain the length of 70 feet. When the
opium ships were anchored off Namoa island, these cetals used to gam-
bol round them in the night-time, making their proximity known by
the loud puffing noise they made, which resembled the sound produced
by the piston of a steam-engine. In the day-time they were to
be seen putting their long heads out of the water and opening
their immense jaws. ‘The Captain of a vessel broke the back of one
of them with a cannon-shot, and the animal lashed about the water
some hours before he died. He drifted on shore eventually on Namoa
island, and was cut up by the native Chinese. Some enterprising
Americans at Hong-Kong, on hearing of the occurrence of Whales in
this Strait, fitted out a lorcha for their capture. The whalers landed at
Swatow, built huts and erected boiling-vats, and then started to the
pursuit. They soon, however, returned from the expedition, saying that
the Whales were only Razor-backs, the same with those found off San
Francisco, which are dangerous creatures to meddle with, and yield too
little oil to compensate for the trouble and risk incurred in their cap-
ture. The whalers took down their gear and returned to Hong-Kong.
These Whales have very large flat heads, and smooth backs. Some

1863. ] Proceedings of the Asiatic Society. 461

ten or eleven years ago American whalers used to rendezvous at Hong-
Kong, and thence send their oil to the States; but the citizens that
had settled in the colony treated them so badly and cheated them so
much, that they now seldom come there, preferrmg to make their
head-quarters at the Sandwich islands.

“Some time in spring last year a large Whale was stranded on the
sand-spit at Takow (Formosa) ; and I hear that scarcely a year passes
but one is stranded somewhere in the vicinage of Swatow.

“In May 1860, I saw a huge beast of the Whale kind thrust him-
self half out of the water, when I was on my way from Hong-Kong to
Amoy in the Mail-Steamer.

“Of other cetals, I know only of the large White Porpoise that
visits Amoy and other southerly harbours from the Sea. I have
striven in vain to procure specimens, but may yet succeed.”

ite es iid i onveegiis aire |
bine Seah hl gle oi Hoa ee gig oy “

Sh Naat De pis a ai at ae ,

AEC tena

Pale ne ieee

rOURN AL

OF THE

oe tS OC Tr rs

SUPPLEMENTARY NUMBER.

—

Colonel Cunningham’s Archeological Survey Report for 1861-62,
communicated by the Government of India.

From
Cotonen A. CUNNINGHAM,

Archeological Surveyor to the Govt. of India,

To
THE SECY. THE GOVT. OF INDIA,
Public Works Department.
Dated Nynee Tal, 3rd June, 1862.
SIR,

T have the honor to transmit an abstract Report of my
proceedings as Archzological Surveyor to tle Government of India,
for the months of December 1861 and January 1862, being just one_
half of my work for the past season. The Abstract Report for the
months of February and March will follow in about a fortnight hence.

2. In explanation of the delay that has occurred in the submission
of this Abstract of my proceedings, I beg to explain that I had at
first intended to draw up only a mere outline of what had been done,
but I found it quite impossible to make such a meagre statement
sufficiently intelligible. I therefore deemed it better to draw up a
more detailed Report, which should give a tolerably full account of
all the more interesting and important discoveries at once, leaving
all the maps, detailed drawings, and inscriptions, to accompany my
complete Report, which will be submitted on or before the Ist of
October next. That month I propose to devote to the gleaning up
of as much information as possible, regarding the numerous places
which I am to visit during the next season.

il Archeological Survey Report.

3. I have already made considerable progress in reducing the
inscriptions and maps to a size sufficiently small for publication. It
is not necessary to say anything regarding the usefulness of the
maps, but with respect to the inscriptions, my experience has taught
me that the translations of even our best scholars are not free from
errors, and that it is quite impossible to attempt any revised transla-
tions without having fac-similes of the original inscriptions. With
the object of furnishing reliable fac-similes for the use of scholars, I
have made impressions of all the inscriptions that I have met with,
and I am now engaged in reducing them with my own hand.

I have the honor to be,
: Sir,
Your most obedient servant,
A. Cunyineuam, Colonel,
Arch. Surveyor to the Govt. of India.

FRoM
Cotonrt A. CUNNINGHAM,
Archeological Surveyor to the Govt. of India,
To
Lievut.-Cou. R. STRACHEY, R. EH.
Secy. to the Govt. of India, P. W. Dept.
Dated Nynee Tal, 11th October, 1862.
SIR, .

I have now the honour to forward the remaining portion*
of the Report of my proceedings, as Archzological Surveyor to the
Government of India, for the months of February and March, 1862.
This portion of the Report has extended to a much greater length
than I anticipated, being more than double that of the former
portion. It has been completed for some time, but I have delayed
its submission for the purpose of re-examining it throughout, whilst
I was engaged in the preparation of the numerous plates necessary
for its illustration. These plates are now nearly ready, but as the
Report is complete in itself without them, I beg to submit it at once
before beginning my exploring operations for the ensuing cold
weather of 1862-63.

2. Ina few days I will again address you regarding the various
ruined buildings, sculptures, and other ancient remains, which I

* From para. 101.

Archeological Survey Report. ill

deem worthy of being illustrated by photography, according to Lord
Canning’s intention. In the mean time I beg to submit a photo-
graph of a piece of sculpture which I have lodged in safety at
Benares. It represents the celebrated goddess of the later Buddhists,
named Vajra Vardéhi, and is in most excellent preservation. This
goddess is frequently mentioned in my Report.

3. I propose to commence my operations for the ensuing season
by exploring the ruins of Sankassa, an ancient city near Futtehgurh,
the remains of which I discovered in 1842. It was celebrated
amongst the Buddhists as the spot on which Buddha descended from
heaven by a golden ladder. From thence I propose to visit Kanoj,
Fyzabad, and Sultanpoor, and other places m Oudh, Kausémbi on
the Jumna, Mathura and Delhi, and lastly Khalsi-Kangra, at the
exit of the Jumna from the higher range of hills. At Khalsi there
is a huge rock covered with one of Asoka’s inseriptions, in which the
names of the five Greek Kings are all distinctly legible.

I have the honor to be,
SIR,
Your most obedient servant,
A. CunnineuHam, Colonel,
Archeological Surveyor to the Govt. of India.

Abstract Report of operations of the Archeological Surveyor to the
Government of India during the season of 1861-62.

In the explorations which I have carried out during the past season,
J have adhered strictly to the plan of proceedings sketched in the
Memorandum which I submitted to the Governor-General in Novem-
ber, 1861. I began work in December at Gaya; and after exploring
all the places of antiquarian interest in Bihar, Tirhut, and Chumpa-
ran, I visited several ancient sites in Goruckpore, Azimgurh, and
Jaunpore on my way to Benares, where on the 3rd April, I closed
work for the season. I will now give abrief sketch of my operations
at the different places in the order in which I visited them :—

I.—Gaya.

2. There are two places of the name of Gaya, one of which is
ealled Buddha Gaya, or Buddhistical Gaya, to distinguish it from the
city of Gaya, which is situated six miles to the northward. In Gaya
itself there are no ancient buildings now existing; but most of the

B 2

iv Archeological Survey Report.

present temples have been erected on former sites and with old materi-
als. Statues, both Buddhistical and Brahmanical, are found in all
parts of the old city, and more especially about the temples, where
they are fixed in the walls, or in small recesses forming separate
shrines in the court-yards of the larger temples. I have noted the
names and localities of all these statues.

3. The inscriptions at Gaya are numerous; but owing to the
destruction of the ancient temples, there are but few of them in situ,
or attached to the objects which they were originally designed to
commemorate. I have taken copies of all the inscriptions, of which
the most interesting is a long and perfect one, dated in the era of the
Nirvan, or death of Buddha. I read the date as follows :

Bhagavati parinirvritte Samvat 1816 Kartike badi 1 Budhe

that is, “in the year 1816 of the emancipation of Bhagavata on
Wednesday, the 1st day of the waning moon of Kartika.” If the
era here used is the same as that of the Buddhists of Ceylon and
Burmah, which began in 543 B, C., the date of this inscription will
be 1816—543=A. D. 1273. The style of the letters is in keeping
with this date, but is quite incompatible with that derivable from the
Chinese date of the era, The Chinese place the death of Buddha up-
wards of 1,000 years before Christ, so that according to them the date
of this inscription would be about A. D. 800, a period much too early
for the style of character used in the inscription. But as the day of the
week is here fortunately added, the date can be verified by calculation.
For the reckoning of Hindu dates I have prepared elaborate Tables
which render the operation a comparatively easy one. From: these
Tables I deduce the date of the inscription to correspond with Wed-
nesday, the 17th September, A. D. 1842. This would place the
Nirvdna of Buddha in 477 B. C., which is the very year that was
first proposed by myself as the most probable date of that event.
This corrected date has since been adopted by Professor Max Miller.

4. Some of the inscriptions, though less interesting, are still
valuable for the light which they will throw upon the medizval period
of Indian history. Several Rajas are mentioned in them ; and in one
of them the date is very minutely detailed in several different eras.

5. The most noteworthy places at Gaya are the temples of Vishnu-
pad, or “ Vishnu’s feet ;” of Gadddhar, or the “ mace-bearer,” a title of

Archeological Survey Report, Vv

Vishnu, and of Gayeswari Devi. The figure in this last temple is
however that of Durga slaying the Buffalo, or Maheshasur ; but as
the destruction of the Asur Gaya is universally attributed to Vishnu,
this temple must originally have contained a statue of that god as
Gayeswara Deva, or the “lord of Gaya.” Several interesting sculp-
tures, and one long and well preserved inscription, are also to be seen
at the Krishna Dwdrika temple.

6. In the neighbourhood of the Vishnu-pad there is a deep tank
ealled Suraj Kund, to the west of which is atemple to Surya, or the
Sun. The vestibule of this temple is formed of two double rows of
pillars, all ten feet in height, and all leaning more or less to the
north. There are five pillars in each row. The whole temple,
both inside and outside, has been repeatedly white-washed, so as
almost to conceal the ornaments of the pillars. One long inscription
was found inside, and a second was afterwards obtained by scraping off
the thick coating of white-wash from a part of the wall pointed out by
a good-natured Brahman. This inscription was the valuable one first
mentioned as containing a date in the era of the death of Buddha.

7. The several hills in the immediate neighbourhood are also
esteemed holy, and are accordingly crowned with temples. The
highest of these, to the south of the town, is called Brahmjuin, or
Brahma-yoni, the temple on its summit being dedicated to the S‘aktz,
or female energy of Brahma, whose five-headed statue is enshrined
in the temple. This hill is 450 feet in height, and very steep on the
town side. But the ascent has been rendered easy to pilgrims by
the erection of a long flight of steps from the base to the sum-
mit by the Mahratta Deva Rao Bhao Saheb, since the accession of
the present Maharaja Jayaji, of Gwalior, that is, withis the last 18
years, as recorded on an inscription slab let into the pavement.

8. To the north of the town the granite hill of Ramsila rises to
a height of 372 feet. The granite temple on its summit contains a
lingam called Pdtdleswara Mahadeva, as well as small figures of Siva
and Parbati. The upper portion of this temple is modern, being
constructed of various ancient fragments that do not fit well together,
and which are in some instances placed upside down. The lower
part of the temple, from 8 to 10 feet in height, is undoubtedly old ;
and perhaps the date of 1071 Samvat, or A. D. 1014, found on one
of the blocks of the granite pavement, may record the actual period

vi Archeological Survey Report.

of the erection of the temple. The basement mouldings are strikingly
bold and effective.

9. 'To the north-west of the town, the hill of Pretsila bears a
small temple erected by Ahalya Bai to pacify the ghost or spirit
(preta) who is said to dwell in the hill. I could learn nothing of the
origin of this spirit, who is held in great awe, from which I infer
that he is identical with Yama, the god of death, one of whose
titles is Pretaraja, or king of ghosts, that is, of departed spirits.
The hill is 541 feet in height, and its rocks are believed to contain
gold. The shrine is much frequented by pilgrims who seek to appease
the dread spirit by their offerings. There is a curious serpentine
road leading from the foot of Ramsila to Pretsila. The road has been
metalled, and trees have been planted on both sides of it, by some
wealthy devotee.

10. Ham Gaya isasmall hill on the eastern bank of the Phalgu
river, opposite Brahmjuin. There are some ruins and broken statues
scattered about it, but nothing of any interest, except one short
inscription of S'7z Mahendra Pala, Deva, dated in the 8th year of his
own reign, or of some new era.

Il.—Buppwa Gaya.

11. Buddha Gaya is famous as the locality of the holy Pipal
tree, under which Sakya Sinha sat for six years in mental abstrac-
tion, until he obtained Buddhahood. A long and detailed account
of this sacred place is given by the Chinese Pilgrim Hwen Thsang,
between the years A. D. 629 and 642. He describes minutely all
the temples and statues which surrounded the celebrated Pipal tree,
known throughout the Buddhist world as the bodhi-drum, or “ tree
of knowledge.” Several of the objects enumerated by the Chinese
Pilgrim I have been able to identify from their exact correspondence
with his description.

12. The celebrated Bodhi tree still exists, but 1s very much
decayed; one large stem with three branches to the westward is
still green, but the other branches are barkless and rotten. The
green branch perhaps belongs to some younger tree, as there are
numerous stems of apparently different trees clustered together.
The tree must have been renewed frequently, as the present Pipal is
standing on a terrace at least 30 feet above the level of the surrounding
country. It was in full vigour in 1811, when seen by Dr, Buchanan

Archeological Survey Report. vii

(Hamilton), who describes it as in all probability not exceeding 100
years in age. Hwen Thsang also describes an early renewal by King
Purna Varmma after its destruction by King Sasangka, who dug up
the ground on which it had stood, and moistened the earth with
sugar-cane juice to prevent its renewal.

13. Immediately to the east of the Pipal tree there is a massive
brick temple, nearly 50 feet square at base and 160 feet in height,
from the granite floor of the lower story to the top of its broken
pinnacle. This is beyond all doubt the Vihar, from 160 to 170 feet
in height, described by Hwen Thsang as standing to the east of the
Bodhi tree. Its base was about 20 paces square. It was built of
bluish bricks plastered with lime; it was ornamented with niches
in stages, each niche holding a golden statue of Buddha, and was
crowned with an amalaka fruit in gilt copper. The existing temple,
both in size and appearance, corresponds so exactly with this
description, that I feel quite satisfied it must be the identical temple
that was seen by Hwen Thsang. The ruined temple, as it now stands,
is 160 feet in height, with a base of rather less than 50 feet square.
It is built entirely of dark red brick of a bluish tinge, and has for-
merly been plastered all over. Lastly, the walls are ornamented
externally with eight tiers, or rows, of niches, many of which still
hold figures of Buddha. These figures are made of plastered brick,
but they were no doubt formerly gilt, as is done with the plaster
statues of the Burmese at the present day. There is, however, no
trace of the copper gilt amalaka fruit. I have thus been particular
in noting the points of correspondence between the two temples,
because there seems to me to be a very strong probability that the
existing temple was originally built by the celebrated Amara Sinha,
the author of the Amara Kosha, as I will now proceed to show.

14. On the site of this temple, according to Hwen Thsang, there
was originally a small Vihar built by Asoka between 259 and 241
B.C. Afterwards anew temple of very great size was built by a
Brahman in compliance with the instructions of the god Mahadeva
conveyed to him in a vision. Inside the temple was placed a statue
of the ascetic Buddha as he appeared when seated in meditation
under the Bodhi tree. The statue was 1] feet 5 inches in height,
8 feet 8 inches in breadth across the knees, and 6 feet 2 inches across
the shoulders. The figure was sitting cross-legged facing the east.

vill Archeological Survey Report.

Now these particulars correspond almost exactly with the arrange-
ments of the present buildmg. Its doorway is towards the east, and
consequently the enshrined statue must have faced toward the east.
The statue itself has long ago disappeared, but its pedestal still
remains in good order. Its dimensions are as follows :—length 13
feet 2 inches, breadth 5 feet 8 inches, and height 4 feet 4 inch, which
measurements agree most closely with those recorded by Hwen
Thsang ; namely, 12 feet 5 inches in length by 4 feet 2 inches in
height. Considering how exactly both the temple and the pedestal
of the figure correspond in size and in other respects with the descrip-
tion of Hwen Thsang, I think there can be no reasonable doubt that
the present temple is the same that was seen by him in the 7th
century of our era.

15. Now in an inscription dated in A. D. 948, which was found
at Buddha Gaya, and translated by Sir Charles Wilkins, the author of
the record ascribes the building of this temple and the erection of an
image of Buddha to the illustrious Amara Deva, who is stated to
have been one of the nine gems of the Court of King Vikramaditya.
The last fact serves at once to identify Amara Deva with Amara
Sinha, the author of the Amara Kosha, who as a contemporary of
Vardha Mihira and Kélidds must have lived in A. D. 500. In this
inscription the temple is said to have been erected in compliance with
the command of Buddha himself, conveyed to him in a vision. Here
then we have same story that is found in Hwen Thsang. In both
statements a Brahman in a vision receives command from a god to
build a temple, with an enshrined figure of Buddha. The corre-
spondence is complete, excepting only one curious point of difference
in the name of the god, whom the Buddhist Hwen Thsang describes
as the Brahmanical Mahadeva, but whom the Brahmanist recorder of
the inscription calls Buddha himself.

16. Now the holy places at Buddha Gaya were visited between
A. D. 399 and 414 by another Chinese pilgrim Fa-Hian, but his
account of them is unfortunately very brief. It is, however, sufficient
to show that there was no temple in existence at that date. Fa-Hian
notes the spot where Buddha, seated on a stone under a great tree,
ate some rice presented to him by two maidens. The stone still
exists, and is described by him as about 6 feet in length and
breadth, and 2 feet in height. Now there is a large circular stone

Archeological Survey Report. 1X

5 feet 7} inches in diameter, and about 2 feet high in the small
temple of Vageswari Devi, which is most probably the identical stone
described by Fa-Hian. Itisa blue stone with whitish veins, and
the surface is covered with minute ornament.

17. From all the facts which I have brought forward, such as the
non-existence of any temple in A. D. 400, the recorded erection of a
large one by Amara Deva about A. D. 500, and the exact agreement
in size as well as in material and ornamentation between the existing
temple and that described by Hwen Thsang between A. D. 629 and
642, I feel satisfied that the present lofty temple is the identical
one that was built by the celebrated Amara Sinha about A. D. 500.

18. Further information regarding this temple is to be found in
the Burmese inscription discovered at Buddha Gaya by the Burmese
Mission in 1833, and translated by Colonel Burney. Another earlier
translation by Ratna Pala was published by James Prinsep. In this
inscription the dates have been read differently by the two translators ;
Ratna Pala and James Prinsep reading 667 and 668, while Colonel
Burney and his Burmese assistants read 467 and 468. I have care-
fully copied this inscription, and I am thus enabled to state positively
that Colonel Burney was certainly wrong in adopting the earlier
date in compliance with the views of the Burmese priests, whose
object it was to reconcile the date of the inscription with their own
history. James Prinsep remained unconvinced by Colonel Burney’s
arguments, and appended a note to his translation, in which he
states that the first figure of the upper date might be a little doubtful,
but that the first 6 of the lower date seemed to him quite plain, and
essentially different from the 4 which occurs in the second line of the
inscription. ‘The two dates of 667 and 668 of the Burmese era, as
read by Ratna Pala, correspond with A. D. 1305 and 1306.

19. In this Burmese inscription the erection of the original temple
is ascribed to Asoka, as recorded also by Hwen Thsang. Having
become ruined, it is said to have been rebuilt by a priest named
Naik Mahanta according to Ratna Pala, or by a lord named
Penthagu-gyi by Colonel Burney. Where the term “ priest” is used
by Ratna Pala, Colonel Burney gives “lord,” because, as he states,
it is not now customary to say fa-youk of a priest, although in former
times both priests and laymen are said to have been styled youk. The
Burmese affix gyi, which means “ great,” has apparently been translated

Cc

x Archeological Survey Report.

into the Indian Wayak, or Chief, and Penthagu which Colonel Burney
regards as a proper name, and which would therefore be Pensagw in In-
dian pronunciation, is rendered Mahanta by Ratna Pala. I cannot pre-
tend to reconcile these differences myself ; but I will submit a copy of
the inscription to Colonel Phayre, whose intimate knowledge, both of
the Burmese language and of the Buddhist history, will enable him to
give an authoritative opinion on the disputed points of this interesting
record. One thing is quite clear, if these different records are to be
reconciled, namely, that Penthagu-qyi (or Naik Mahanta) should
represent the Brahman of Hwen Thsang, and also the celebrated
Amara Deva of Wilkins’s inscription.

20. The Burmese inscription goes on to say that the temple after
being again destroyed was rebuilt by King Yhado. Then having
once more become ruinous, the “ Lord of the White Hlephant and
the great King of Righteousness” deputed S7t Dharmmapada
Rajaguna to rebuild it fora third time. After some delay the work
was begun in A. D. 1805, and the temple was consecrated in the
following year 1306.

21. In front of the Great Temple there is a small open temple of
four pillars covering a large circular stone, with two human feet
carved upon it. This temple is now called Buddhapad ; but there
can be little doubt that it is the same that is mentioned in the Amara
Deva’s inscription under the name of Vishnu-pad, or “ Vishnu’s feet.”
Originally the feet may have been those of Buddha, which, on the
decline of Buddhism, were quietly appropriated to Vishnu by the
accommodating Brahmans.

There is a short Nagari inscription on the east side of the stone,
giving the date of Saka 1280, which is equivalent to A. D. 1308.

22. There are other points of interest connected with the building
of the Great Temple at Buddha Gaya, such as the date of the
Brahmanist King Sasdngka, who rooted up the Bodhi tree, and
placed an image of Mahadeva in the temple, as well as the date of
his contemporary the Buddhist Purna Varmma, who renewed the
Bodhi tvee.

23. Close to the Great Temple there is a small plain Samddh, or
cenotaph over the remains of the earliest Brahmanical Mahant. 'This
is of no interest in itself, but the vestibule in front is supported on
nine square sandstone pillars, which have once formed part of a

Archeological Survey Report. x1

Buddhist railing, similar to those at Sanchi near Bhilsa, and which
eannot be of much later date than Asoka. Many similar pillars, but
of granite, support the arcades in one of the courts of the Mahant’s
residence. A few of them have an inscription in the ancient Pali
characters of Asoka’s pillars— > Nea tar Ci i ue L*, Ayaye Kudrangiye
danam, that is, “Gift of the venerable Kudrangi.” There are
altogether 33 of these pillars still remaining, of which 5 or 6 bear
the above inscription. As the pillars are all sculptured, the value
of the gift made by the venerable lady Kudrangi could not have been
less than 1,000 Rupees. Some of the sculptured bas-reliefs on these
pulars are highly interesting. They show the Buddhistic belief of
the donor in the veneration for solid towers and trees ; they show the
style of architecture in the representations of temples, houses, gates,
and city walls; and the costumes of the people in the dresses of the
king, and of other worshippers of each sex.

24. Ofthe 33 ancient pillars above described, there are 10 of
sandstone from some distant quarry, and 23 of granite from the
neighbouring hills. ‘They are all of the same dimensions and of the
same age, as they were the gifts of the same venerable lady Kud-
rangi. But as the two sets of pillars were found in different
localities, although not far apart, I believe that they originally formed
different enclosures. ‘The sandstone pillars are said to have been
found at the southern side of the Great Temple, and close to the
holy Pipal tree. I believe therefore that they originally formed an
enclosure round the Bodhi tree. The granite pillars are said to have
been discovered about 50 yards to the east of the Great Temple ; and
I think it probable that they once formed an enclosure either round
the Vajrdsan or “ Diamond throne,” or round the Buddha-pad, or
temple of “ Buddha’s feet.” A square of six pillars on each side,
with one entrance, would require exactly 23 pillars.

25. ‘To the south-east of the Great Temple there is a small tank,
called Budhokar-Tdl, which exactly answers the description given by
the Chinese pilgrim of the tank of the dragon Muchalinda. This
agreement is so striking that it was seen at once by the members of
the Burmese embassy.

26. ‘There are two small ruined temples to the east of the Great
Temple, the nearer one being called Zara Devi, and the further one
Vagiswart Devi. But the former temple contains only astanding male

c 2

xil Archeological Survey Report.

figure, with a short inscription over the right shoulder in characters
of about A. D. 1000, Sri Buddha- Dasasya, “ (the gift) of the fortunate
slave of Buddha.” The goddess Tara belongs to the later days of
Buddhism, after the introduction of Tantrika doctrines. The other
temple contains a seated male figure, holding a lotus in his left hand,
and a sword in his uplifted right hand, with a Buddhist tope or solid
tower on each side of him.

27. To the north ofthe Bodhi tree there is a ruined fortress of
earth 1,500 feet long by 1,000 feet broad, attributed to Raja Amara
Sinha, Suvira. This is possibly the same person as the Amara Deva
who built the Great Temple, as the arched passage leading to the
temple is said to have been built for the convenience of Amara Sinh’s
Rani when returning from her morning bath in the Nilajan river
to pay her devotions at the shrine. The preservation of the title of
Sinha down to the present day would seem to strengthen the suppo-
sition of Amara Deva’s identity with the author of the Amara Kosh.

28. The remaining antiquities of Buddha Gaya consist of numerous
Buddhist statues of all sizes, some placed in small temples, and
others scattered about the ruins; but the greatest number of them,
and by far the finest, are fixed in the walls of the Mahant’s residence.

29. ‘The existing inscriptions at Buddha Gaya are few in number,
and, with one exception, they are of little importance. Two valuable
inscriptions translated by Wilkins and James Prinsep are no longer
to be found ; nor does the Mahant know anything about them. This
is the more to be regretted as the former was the record already
quoted of Amara Deva and the other hada doubtful date which
might have been re-examined. In searching for these, however, I
found a new inscription in the pavement of the gateway of the
Mahant’s residence. The tenon hinge of the gate works in a socket
formed in the very middle of the inscription. There are two socket
holes, the second one having belonged to an older gate, or having
been cut in the wrong position. This inscription opens with an
invocation to Buddha.

I1I.—Baxror.

30. To the eastward of Buddha Gaya, on the opposite bank of the
Phalgu or Lilajan River, and immediately to the north of the village
of Bakror, there are the ruins of a large brick tope, with a stump
of a sand-stone pillar at a short distance to the northward. The

Archeological Survey Report. xiii

ruined mound, which is called Katani, is 150 feet in diameter at base,
and 50 feet high. Itis built of the usual large bricks, 153 ~% 102
Xx 3%. Several excavations have been made in it in search of bricks
and treasure. About 70 years ago numerous lac seals impressed with
a figure of Buddha were found in excavating this tope. These are
engraved in Moor’s Hindu Pantheon, Plate LXX, figures 6, 7, and 8,
where they are said to have been dug up at Buddha Gaya. My
information was, however, derived from the Mahant himself, and as
Bakyror is only half a mile to the eastward, it would have been more
correct to have described the locality as near, instead of at, Buddha
Gaya. The stump of the pillar, which is still in situ, is 3/ 03// in
diameter, and there is another fragment near a well to the north-west
that measures 3/ 02/’ in diameter. Both of these pieces belong to
the rough bottom portion of the pillar, which must have been
imbedded in masonry. The shaft of this pillar is said to have been
taken to Gaya by a former Magistrate. Accordingly in Sahebgunj,
or the new city of Gaya, there is a sand-stone pillar 2’ 43’/ in diameter,
and upwards of 16 feet in height, which was set up as a central point
in Sahebeunj, as recorded in a Persian inscription by Charles Badam
Saheb (Bodham) in A. D. 1789.

31. The tope and pillar of Bakror were visited by Hwen Thsang,
who relates a story regarding the capture by a certain king of an
“ Elephant of perfume,” (gandha-hasti). Ina former existence, as a
Bodhisatwa, Buddha was said to have been the son of this Elephant,
and a stupa and pillar had accordingly been erected in commemoration
of the tradition. There was also a sacred tank, which is perhaps
represented by a small walled tank generally called Mérttand Pokhar,
or Suraj Kund, that is, the “tank of the Sun.” It is also called
Buddhakund ; but this name was applied by some to a large unwalled
tank, about 800 feet square, immediately to the north of the small
tank. An annual fair is held at the Suraj Kund, when thousands of
pilgrims assemble to bathe in its holy waters. They sit in the water
in rows, and repeat, after their attendant Brahmans, the names of
all the holy places around Gaya. ‘The ancient name of Bakror is
said to have been Ajayapura.

IV.—Punawa.

32. The village of Pundwa is situated 14 miles to the eastward

of Gaya, between two hills of grey granite, To the north there is

xiv Archeological Survey Report.

a fine old square tank called Budhokar Tdl, and to the east another
tank called Karamdr Tdl. The principal object is a pillared temple
of TDrilokndth. As it stands at present, this temple is a modern
work made up of different sized pillars of various patterns, some
with and others without capitals, so as to bring them to the required
height. Half pillars have even been made use of as whole pillars,
with the old rough engaged backs left exposed. One of the door-
ways of hard blue stone is richly sculptured. In the centre is a
figure of the ascetic Buddha, with a three-pointed crown over his
head, and on each side of him nine figures with joined hands kneeling
towards him. The other doorways are of granite, and, though
very plain, are evidently of the same age as the more highly or-
namented one.

38. Several statues and granite pillars of different sizes are
scattered about the foot of the hills. Portions of the usual Buddhist
formula, “ Ve Dharmma,” &c., are found upon some of the statues.
There are no dates in any of these inscriptions, but the style of
their letters fixes their date at about A. D. 1000. To the north-
west, on a mound 60 feet square, there are five broken pillars and a
broken statue of the three-headed goddess Vajra-Varadhi, one of
the principal objects of worship amongst the later Buddhists. Two
of her heads are human, but the third is that of a hog, and on the
pedestal there are seven hogs. The ruined temple on this mound is
called Narting.

V.—KURKINAR.

34. About three miles to the north-east of Pundwa is the large
village of Kurkihar. It is not to be found in any of our maps, not
even in No. 103 sheet of the Indian Atlas, although it is perhaps the
largest place between the cities of Gaya and Bihar. The remains at
Kurkihar consist of several ruined mounds, in which numerous sta-
tues and small votive topes of dark blue stone have been found. The
principal mass of ruin, about 600 feet square, lies immediately to the
south of the village. A second less extensive mound lies to the
south-west ; and there is a small mound, only 120 feet square, to the
north of the village. The last mound is called Sugatgarh, or the
one of the well known titles of Buddha. In the
principai mass of ruin the late Major Kittoe dug up a great number

ee)

“house of Sugata,

of statues and votive topes; and a recent excavation on the west side

Archeological Survey Report. KV

showed the solid brick-work of a Buddhist stupa. In the north-west
corner of this excavation the relic chamber had been reached, and I
was privately informed that a small figure and some other remains
had been discovered inside. But the head man of the village stoutly
denied that anything had been found, and all the villagers then deni-
ed the discovery also,

35. The principal statue is a squatted figure of the ascetic Buddha
under the holy Pipal tree, or dodhi-drum. Over head there is a repre-
sentation of the Mivdna, or death of Buddha, and on the pedestal
there is an inscription in three lines, which is incomplete owing to
the loss of a projecting corner of the base. To the right and left
there are smaller figures of M/dyd standing under the Sal tree at the
birth of Buddha, and of Buddha himself teaching the law at Bena-
res after his first attaimment of Buddhahood. On the mound to the
east there is a standing figure of Buddha, with a small attendant
figure holding an umbrella over him. As this attendant has three
heads, I believe that it represents the Hindu Triad in the humble
position of a servitor of Buddha.

36. At the north-east corner of the village there is a small rude
Hindu temple of brick, in and about which a large number of statues
have been collected. The temple is didicated to Bagheswari Devi
(Vyaghreswari), but the principal figure inside is a life-size statue of
the eight-armed Durgd conquering the Mahishasur or Buffalo demon.
The figure pointed out to me as that of Bagheswari was a four-arm-
ed female seated on a lion with a child in her lap; but I believe that
this figure represents either Indrdni with her son the infant Jayanta,
or Shashti, the goddess of fecundity, a form of Durga. The princi-
pal figure outside the temple is a life-size statue of Akshobya, who is
represented squatted under the Bodhi tree, in the same manner as the
ascetic Buddha, with the left hand in the lap, and the right hand
hanging over the knee. There is a halo round the head inscribed
with the usual Buddhist formula, Ye Dharmma, &c.; and near the
head there is a short inscription giving the name of the figure “ Tun
Akshobya-vajra, hun.”

37. I procured several short but interesting inscriptions at Kur-
kihar. The name of Sdkala is mentioned in several of them, and
also Kerala in Dakshinades. "The age of these inscriptions, judging
from the shapes of the letters, must be about A. D. 800 to 1,000. I
am now employed in making reduced copies of them.

XV1 Archeological Survey Report.

38. The true name of Kurkihar is said to be Kurak-vihar, which
I believe to. be only a contracted form of Kukkuta-pada Vihdra or
“temple of the cock’s foot,” which is described by Hwen Thsang.
The Sanskrit Kukkuta is the same word as the Hindi Kukkar or
Kurak a cock, so that Kurak-vihar is clearly the same appellation as
Kukkuta-pada Vihira. There was a monastery also of the same
name. These buildings were situated near a three-peaked hill called
Kukkutta-pada-giri or “ cock’s foot hill,” which was celebrated as the
abode of the great Kdsyapa, as well as the scene of his death. On
this account the hill was also called Guru-pada parvata, or “'Teach-
er’s foot hill.” The situation of Kurkthar corresponds exactly with
Fa-Hian’s account, excepting that there is no three-peaked hill in its
neighbourhood. ‘There are, however, three bare and rugged hills
which rise boldly out of the plain about half a mile te the north of
the village. As these three hills touch one another at their bases, I
_ think that they may fairly be indentified with the three-peaked hill
of Hwen Thsang.

VI.—GIRYEK.

39. From the neighbourhood of Gaya two parallel ranges of hills
stretch towards the north-east for about 36 miles to the bank of the
Panchana River, just opposite the village of Giryek. The eastern
end of the southern range is much depressed, but the northern range
maintains its height, and ends abruptly in two lofty peaks over-hang-
ing the Panchana River. The lower peak on the east is crowned with
a solid tower of brick-work, well known as Jarasandha-ka-baithak, ov

?

“ Jarasandha’s throne,’ while the higher peak on the west, to which
the name of Giryek peculiarly belongs, bears an oblong terrace cover-
ed with the ruins of several buildings. The principal ruin would ap-
pear to have been a wihdr or temple on the highest point of the ter-
race, which was approached by a steep flight of steps leading through
pillared rooms.

40. The two peaks are connected by a steep pavement, which
was formerly continued down to the foot of the hill opposite the
village of Giryek. At all the commanding points and bends of this
road are still to be seen the stone foundations of small brick stupas
from 5 and 6 feet to upwards of 12 feet in diameter. At the foot
of the upper slope, and within 50 feet of Jarasandha’s Tower, a tank
100 feet square has been formed, partly by excayation and partly by

Archeological Survey Report. XVI

building up. There is a second tank, at a short distance to the
north, formed by the excavation of the rock for building materials.
Both of these tanks are now dry.

41. The stupa called Jarasandha-ka-baithak is a solid cylindrical
brick tower 28 feet in diameter, and 21 feet in height, resting on a
square basement 14 feet high. The cylinder was once surmounted
by a solid dome or hemisphere of brick, of which only 6 feet now
remain, and this dome must have been crowned with the usual
umbrella rising out of asquare base. The total height of the building
could not therefore have been less than 55 feet, or thereabouts. The
» surface has once been thickly plastered, and the style of ornamen-
tation is similar to that of the Great Temple at Buddha Gaya. I
sank a shaft 41 feet in depth from the top of the building right
down to the stone foundation; and I continued a gallery, which
had been begun many years ago, at the base of the cylinder, until
it met the well sunk from above, but nothing whatever was discovered
in either of these excavations to show the object of the building.

42. On the west side of Jarasandha’s Tower, and almost touching
its basement, I observed a low mound which seemed like the ruin
of another stupa. On clearing the top, however, I found a small
chamber 5 feet 8 inches square, filled with rubbish. This chamber
gradually widened as it was cleared out, until it became 7 feet square.
At 5% feet in depth the rubbish gave place to brick-work, below
which was a stratum of stones, evidently the rough foundation of
the building. In the south-west corner of the brick-work, about
one foot below the surface, I found 84 seals of lac firmly imbedded
in the mud mortar. The seals were all oval, but of different sizes,
generally about 3 inches long and 2 inches broad. All, however,
bore the same impression of a large stupa with four smaller stupas
on each side, the whole surrounded by an inscription in Medieval
Nagari characters, Ke Dharmma hetu prabhava, &c., being the well
known formula of the Buddhist faith. Mxternally this building was
square with projections in the centre of each face and similar in its
ornamentation to the basement of Jarasandha’s Tower.

43. On the eastern side of the Panchana River, there is an
extensive mound of ruins, being half a mile long from north to south,
and 800 yards broad in its widest part. There are the remains of
two paved ascents on the river side, and of three more on the opposite

D

¥VIi1 Archeological Survey Report.

side of the mound. In the middle of the mound there is a small
mud fort, and at the northern end there are several pieces of sculpture
collected together from different places; one of these is inscribed and
dated in the year 42 of some unknown era, somewhere about the
eleventh century, or perhaps even somewhat later.

44. At two miles to the south-west of the village of Giryek, and
one mile from Jarasandha’s Tower, there is a natural cavern in the
southern face of the mountain, about 250 feet above the bed of the
Banganga rivulet. This cave, called Gidha-dwar, is generally believed
to communicate with Jarasandha’s Tower ; but an examination with
torches proved it to be a natural fissure running upwards in the
direction of the tower, but only 98 feet in length. The mouth of
the cavern is 10 feet broad and 17 feet high ; but its height diminishes
rapidly towards the end. ‘The cave is filled with bats, and the air
is oppressively warm and disagreeable, which alone is sufficient to
prove that there is no exit to the cavern, otherwise there would be
a draught of air right through it. Vultures swarm about the
precipitous cliffs of pale grey horn stone, and I picked up their
feathers in the mouth of the cave.

45. The remains at Giryek, which I have just described, appear
to me to correspond exactly with the accounts given by Fa-Hian of
the “ Hill of the Isolated Rock,” where Indra questioned Buddha on
forty-two points; and with that given by Hwen Thsang of Jndra-
Stlaguha, which refers to the same story. I’a-Hian states that there
was a stone building on the summit of the hill facing the south, on
the spot where Buddha sat when questioned by Indra, and also a
monastery ; but he makes no mention of any stupa. Hwen Thsane
states that on the crest of the hill there were marks in two places
where the four former Buddhas had sat and walked. On the eastern
peak there was a stupa and also a monastery called the “ Hansa
Sanghdrama”’ or “Goose’s Monastery,” to account for which he
relates the following legend:—One day when taking exercise, a
mendicant, who was the steward of the monastery, saw a flock of
geese high in the air, and as the monks of his fraternity, although
strictly abstemious, had experienced great difficulty in procuring
sufficient food, he exclaimed playfully—“ To-day the pittance of the
monks is insufficient. O noble beings (Mahkdsattwas) you ought

r)

to have compassion on our circumstances.” No sooner had he spoken

Archeological Survey Report. xix

these words, than one of the geese fell dead at his feet. The horror-
struck mendicant ran to tell the tale to his brethren, who became
overwhelmed with grief. “ Buddha,” said they, “established his
law for man’s guidance under all circumstances. The IMahdydna
(great Vehicle) is the source of truth, while we have foolishly
followed the doctrine of the Hindydna (lesser Vehicle). Let us
renounce our former opinions. This goose has taught us a salutary
lesson, let us do honour to her eminent virtue by transmitting it
to the most distant ages.” They accordingly built a stupa over
the déad goose, which was interred in the base of the monument, and
adorned it with an inscription relating the pious devotion of the
goose.

46. If my identification of the Giryek Hill with the Indra-Sila-
guha of Hwen Thsang is correct, there can be little doubt that
Jarasandha’s Tower is the very stupa that was built in honour of
the devoted goose. Only this one stupa is mentioned by Hwen
Thsang, and Jarasandha’s Tower is the only one now existing on
the hill. In further corroboration of this identification, 1 may
mention that close by I found a broken figure with a large goose
carved on the pedestal, and further that one of the stupas on the
lac seals, found on the spot, appears to bear a goose on its summit.
As no meution is made of any stupa by Fa-Hian, the erection of this
tower most probably took place between his date and that of Hwen
Thsang, or about A. D. 500.

47. The position of Giryek corresponds so exactly, both in bearing
and distance, with that of the hill of Indra-Sila-guha, that I feel
quite satisfied of their identity. No etymology has yet been proposed
for the name of Giryek ; but it seems to me not unlikely that it is
nothing more than Giri + eka, “ one hill,” that is, the Hill of the
Isolated Rock of Fa-Hian.

48. Both of the pilgrims mention the cave in the southern face
of the mountain, which corresponds exactly with the natural cavern
Gidha Dwar, which I have already described. Gidha Dwar, in
Sanskrit Gridhra-dwdra, means the vulture’s pass, or opening. By
Hwen Thsang the cave is called Indra-Sila-guha, or “the cave of
Indra’s stone,” being thus named after a stone on which were
delineated the forty-two points on which Indra had questioned
Buddha. Fa-Hian adds that Indra himself drew the marks upon the

stone with his finger. D 2

XX Archeological Survey Report.

49. A second cave is described by Hwen Thsang as the Vulture’s
Cave or Hill of the Vulture’s Cave. This name was derived from the
story of Ananda’s adventure with the demon Mara in the shape of a
vulture. The demon suddenly stopped before the cave, and terrified
Ananda, when Buddha passing his hand through the rock laid hold
of Ananda’s arm, and at once removed his fear. The cleft in the
rock, said to have been made by Buddha’s hand, was seen by Fa-Hian
early in the 5th century. Major Kittoe thought that the Gidha
Dwar cave was the Vulture’s Cave of the Chinese pilgrims, but its
distance of 44 miles from the old capital of Rdagriha is too great, as
both Fa-Hian and Hwen Thsang place the Vulture’s Cave at 15 i
from old Rajagriha, that is, at only 2} miles from it. This cave
besides answers exactly to that described by Hwen Thsang under the
name of Indra-Sila-Guha, and the two caves were certainly distinct.
I made every enquiry for another cave, but could only hear of one very
close to that of Gidha Dwar, which was quite inaccessible. But
taking the distance and direction from old Rajagriha, the Vulture’s
Cave must have been in the lofty precipitous hill now ealled Saila-
girt, or the “ Rocky Mountain.” Gidha Dwar is the name of a
narrow pass where the two parallel ranges of hills before described
close together within two miles of Giryek, and the Gidha Dwar Cave
is immediately above the pass.

VII.—Raseir.

50. Whatever doubts may exist regarding the identification of
Kurkihar and Giryek, there can fortunately be none respecting R@gir,
as the representative of the ancient Ra@agriha. The name is still
preserved in the modern Ad@gir, and I found it repeated in numerous
inscriptions in the temples on the Baibhar and Vipula Mountains.
The old city of Rajagriha is described by Fa-Hian as situated in a
valley between five hills, at 4 Jz (or two-thirds af a mile) to the south
of the new town of Rajagriha. ‘Ihe same position and about the
same distance are given by Hwen Thsang, who likewise mentions the
hot springs which exist to this day.

51. The old city of Rajagriha is called Kusdgdrapura, or the city
of the Kusagrass, by Hwen Thsang, who further describes it as the
“town surrounded by mountains.” This last is almost a translation
of Giri-vraga, or the city of “many hills,” which is the old name
of the capital of Jarasandha, preserved both in the Rdmdyana and

Archeological Survey Report. XXi

the Mahdbhérata. Fa-Hian states that the “five hills form a girdle
like the walls of a town,” which is an exact description of the site
of old Rajgir. A similar description is given by Turnour from the
Pali annals of Ceylon, where the five hills are named Gijjhakuto,
Isigilt, Webharo, Wepullo, and Pandawo. In the Mahabharata the
five hills are named Vathdra, Varéha, Vrishabha, Rishigiri, and
Chaityaka ; but at present they are called Baibhar-giri, Vipula-giri,
Ratna-giri, Udaya-giri, and Sona-giri.

52. In the inscriptions of the Jain temples on Mount Baibhdr,
the name is sometimes written Baibhara, and sometimes Vyavahdra.
Jt is beyond all doubt the Webharo Mountain of the Pali annals,
on whose southern face was situated the far-famed Sattapanni Cave,
in front of which was held the first Buddhist Synod in 543 B. C,
This cave still exists under the name of Son Bhandar, or “ Treasury
of gold.”

53. Ratnagiri is due east, one mile distant from the Son Bhandar
Cave. This situation corresponds exactly with Fa-Hian’s position
of the “ Pipal Tree Cave,” in which Buddha after his meals was
accustomed to meditate. It was situated at 5 or 6 li (about one
mile) to the east of the cave of the First Synod. The hill of Ratna-
giri is therefore identical with the Pandawo Mountain of the Pali
annals, in which Buddha dwelt, and which in the Lalita-Vistara is
always styled the “ King of Mountains.” A paved zigzag road now
leads from the eastern side of old Rajagriha to a small Jain temple
on the top of Ratnagiri, which is frequently visited by Jains. I
would identify it with the Rishigiri of the Mahabharata.

54. Mount Vipula is clearly identical with the Wepullo of the
Pali annals, and as its summit is now crowned with the ruins of a
lofty stwpa or chaitya, which is noticed by Hwen Thsang, I would
identify it with the Chaityaka of the Mahabharata. Regarding the
other two mountains, I have nothing at present to offer, but I may
mention that they are also crowned with small Jain temples.

55. The old city between the hills is described by Fa-Hian to
be 5 or 6 Zi from east to west, and 7 or 8 di from north to south,
that is, from 24 to 28 i or 43 miles in circuit. Hwen Thsang makes
it 30 Zi or 5 miles in cireuit, with its greatest length from east to
west. My survey of the ancient ramparts gives a circuit of 24,500
feet, or 43th miles, which is between the two statements of the

XXxil Archeological Survey Report.

Chinese pilgrims. The greatest length is from north-west to south-
east, so that there is no real discrepancy between the two statements
as to the direction of the greatest length of the old city. Each of
them must have taken his.measurement from the Nekpai embankment
on the east (which has been described by Major Kittoe) to some
point on the north-west. If taken to the Panch-Pandu angle of the
ramparts, the direction would be W. N. W., and the length upwards
of 8,000 feet ; but if taken to the temple of Torha Devi, the direction
would be N. N. W., and the distance upwards of 9,000 feet.

56. Ihave already quoted Fa-Hian’s statement that the “five
hills form a girdle like the walls of a town.” This agrees with Hwen
Thsang’s description, who says that “high mountains surround it
on four sides, and form its exterior walls, which have a circuit of 150
iv” or 25 miles. For this number I propose to read 50 li or 83 miles,
a correction which is absolutely necessary to make the statement
tally with the measurements of my survey. ‘The following are the
direct distances between the hills :—

ie Erom Barbharito Wipulla ye, i) cure. cee 2,000 teats
Vipula; to Raima, ie eee... 4,500 ,,
atnatto Wicdaya: = kes. ee sees ee 830007 &
Widava tolSona = O08 Sie ems SAO UO mer
Fy eon vo! Barbhar i) ee Boteawenkes 2,000...

MH o9 to

Total...... 41,000 ,,

This is somewhat less than eight miles, but if the ascents and
descents are taken into account, the actual length will correspond
very closely with the statement of Hwen Thsang when corrected to
50 li. The old walls forming this exterior line of rampart are still
to be seen in many places. I traced them from Vipulagiri over
Ratnagiri to the Nekpai embankment, and thence onwards over
Udayagiri, and across the southern outlet of the valley to Sonagiri.
Across this outlet, the walls, which are stillin good order, are 13
feet thick. To obtain a circuit of 25 miles, as given in Hwen
Thsang’s text, it would be necessary to carry these ramparts as far
as Giryek on the east. As similar ramparts exist on the Giryek
Hill, it is perhaps possible that Hwen Thsang intended to include it
in the circuit of his outer walls. But this immense cireuit would not

Archeological Survey Report. XXIiL

at all agree with his statement that “hich mountains surround the
eity on four sides,” for the distant Hill of Giryek cannot in any
way be said to form one of the sides of old Rajagriha.

57. The new town of Rajagriha is said to have been built by
King Srenika, otherwise called Bimbisdra, the father of Ajdtasatru,
the contemporary of Buddha. Its foundation cannot therefore be
placed later than 560 B. C. according to Buddhist chronology. In
Hwen Thsang’s time (A. D. 629—642), the outer walls had already
become ruinous, but the inner walls were still standing, and occupied
a circuit of 20 d2 (33 miles). This statement corresponds tolerably
well with the measurements of my survey, which make the circuit
of the ramparts somewhat less than 3 miles. Buchanan calls new
Rajagriha an irregular pentagon of 12,000 yards in diameter. ‘This
is clearly a misprint for 1,200 yards, which would give a circuit of
11,300 feet, or 24 miles ; but this was probably the interior measure-
ment, which according to my survey is 13,000 feet. The plan of
new Rajagriha I make out to be an irregular pentagon of one long
side and four nearly equal sides, the whole circuit being 14,260 feet
outside the ditches, or rather less than 3 miles.

58. On the south side towards the hills a portion of the interior,
2,000 feet long and 1,500 feet broad, has been cut off to form a
citadel. ‘The stone walls retaining the earthen ramparts of this
work are still in good order in many places. It is possible that this
work may be of later date, as suggested by Buchanan, but I am of
opinion that it was simply the citadel of the new town, and that
its walls have suffered less from the effects of time, owing partly to
their having been more carefully and more massively built than the
less important ramparts of the town, and partly to their having been
occasionally repaired as a Military position by the authorities, while
the repairs of the town walls were neglected as being either un-
necessary or too costly.

59. The existing remains at Rajagriha are not numerous. The
place has been occupied at different times by Musalmans and Brah-
mans, by whom the Buddhist stupas and vihars were pulled down
to furnish materials for tombs, masjids, and temples. All the
eminences that must once have been crowned by objects of Buddhist
worship are now covered with Muhammadan graves; and all the
Grahmanical temples about the hot springs have been constructed

XX1V Archeological Survey Report.

with the large bricks of Buddhist stupas. One of these last monu-
ments can still be traced outside the south-west corner of the town
in a large circular hollow mound, which attracted the notice of both
Buchanan and Kittoe. I examined this mound carefully, and I was
satisfied that the hollow represented the original site of a stupa
from which the bricks had been carried off, while the surrounding
- circular mound represented the mass of earth and broken brick
rubbish left by the workmen. The excavated stupa at Sarnath, near
Benares, now offers almost exactly the same appearance. According
to Hwen Thsang’s account, this circular hollow was the site of a
stupa 60 feet in height, which was built by Asoka. Beside it there
was a stone pillar, 50 feet high, on which was inscribed the history
of the foundation of the stupa. ‘The pillar was surmounted by
an Hlephant.

60. On Mount Baibhar there are five modern Jain temples,
besides the ruins of an old Saiva temple, of which 4 granite pillars,
10 feet in height, are still standing, and 50 or 60 smaller pillars are
lying confusedly about. At the southern foot of the mountain the
rock has a natural scarp for about 100 yards in length, which at the
western end has been smoothed to a height of 19 feet, in front of
which the rock has been cut away to form a level terrace 90 feet in
length by upwards of 30 feet in breadth. Two caves have been
excavated out of the solid rock behind ; that to the west, now called
the Son Bhandar, or “ Treasury of gold,” being 34 feet long by 17
feet broad, and that to the east perhaps somewhat less in length,
but of the same breadth. This cave has either fallen in naturally
through the decay of the rock, or, which is more probable, was
blown up by a Zemindar in search of treasure, as related by Major
Kittoe of the other cave.

61. The Son Bhandar Cave has one door and one window. Inside
there are no traces of seats, or of pedestals of statues, and the walls
and roof are quite bare, excepting where a few scarcely legible
inscriptions have been cut. ‘There are several short inscriptions on
the jambs of the doorway, as well as on the outside. In the principal
inscription, which is in two lines outside, the author speaks of this
eave as the “auspicious cave,” evidently alluding to the fact of the
first Buddhist Synod having been held in a temporary building
erected in front of it by Ajdtasatru, Raja of Magadha. This

Archeological Survey Report. XXV
G

inscription, which is not later than A. D. 200, and is perhaps earlier,
records that a certain “ Muni named Vaira Deva, of powerful dignity,
was able to obtain emancipation, having shut himself up for spiritual
enjoyment in this auspicious cell, a retired abode of Arhantas, fitted
for an ascetic for the attainment of liberation.’ On the east jamb
of the door also the same epithet is applied to this cave, as if it was
a well known name for it. As the scene of the first Buddhist Synod,
it was an object of reverence to every pious follower of Buddha. It
was accordingly visited by both of the Chinese pilgrims, whose *
records enable us to identify beyond any possibility .the present Son
Bhandar Cave as the famous Satapanni Cave of the Buddhists.

62. In the centre of the valley between the five hills, and in the
very midst of the old city of Rajagriha, there is a ruined brick mound
19 feet 8 inches in height, which my excavations proved to be an an-
ecient stupa. A diminutive Jain temple, called Manidr Math, stands on
the top of the mound. It was built in A. D. 1780. As I expected
to find a solid brick building, I sank a shaft outside the Maniaér Math
with the intention of inclining gradually towards the centre ; but I soon
found that the core of the mound was a mere mass of rubbish, filling
a well 10 feet in diameter. ‘This rubbish was so loose that its removal
was dangerous; but by propping up the portion immediately below
the little temple, and removing the bricks cautiously, I was enabled
to get down to a depth of 21% feet. At 19 feet I found three small
figures. One of them represents Maya lying on a couch in the lower
compartment, and the ascetic Buddha and two attendants above.
The second is a naked standing figure with a seven-headed snake
forming a canopy over the head. This is clearly not a Buddhist,
but a Jain sculpture. The third is so excessively rude that it is
difficult to identify it. The figure is four-armed, and is seated upon
a recumbent animal, which looks more like a bull than any thing
else. It probably therefore represents Mahadeva and his bull Nanda.
As all three figures formed only a part of the rubbish, it seems to
me certain that the well must once have been empty; and further,
that the rubbish was most probably thrown in when the little Jain
temple was about to be built.

63. The natives of the place call this well the treasury, and they
assert that it has never been opened. On my arrival I found a
Punjab Sepoy, with a servant, making an excavation on his own

H

XXVI Archaological Survey Report.

account. He had sunk a shaft 3 feet in diameter at 74 feet from
the little temple. The shaft was then 17 feet deep. I examined
the bricks which had been taken out, and on finding some with
bevelled and rounded edges, and others thickly coated with plaster,
I guessed at once that the original structure had been covered with
an outer wall, and that the shaft had been sunk just outside the
original work. ‘To ascertain whether this conclusion was correct,
I laid bare the top of the mound, and soon discovered that the well
was surrounded by a wall only 6 feet in thickness. This would give
the original stupa a diameter of 22 feet. The Punjab Sepoy continued
his shaft down to the stone foundation without finding any thing,
and then gave up the work.

64. Having observed that the slope of the mound on the north
side was very gentle, I thought it probable that the building must
have been approached on this side by a flight of steps. I therefore
made an excavation in a line due north from the centre of the mound,
and within a couple of hours I found a doorway. Continuing the
excavation to the east and west as well as to the north, I found a
small room with brick walls and granite pillars containing two middle
sized sculptured slabs of middle age. Outside the doorway a flight
of steps led downwards towards the north; I therefore turned to the
south and continued my exeavation until I reached the main building,
On examining the wall I found three recesses, the middle one being
roofed by overlapping bricks. On clearing out the rubbish, this
opening proved to be a carefully built passage only 2 feet 2 inches
wide, and 3 feet 43 inches in height, right through the outer wall
of the building. Behind it, but a few inches out of line, there was a
similar passage through the original wall, only 2 feet in width. At
the end of the passage I found the well filled with the same rubbish
as on the south side.

65. The discovery of this passage shows that the Buddhist Monks
had easy aceess to the interior of the building. I conclude therefore
that it must originally have contained some relic that was occasionally
shown to visitors and to the public generally on certain fixed days.
J cannot, however, discover in the accounts of Fa-Hian and Hwen
Thsang any mention of a stupa inside the walls of old Rajagriha.

66. The hot springs of Rajagriha are found on both banks of the
Sarsuti rivulet; one-half of them at the eastern foot of Mount

Archeological Survey Report. XXVil

Baibhar, and the other half at the western foot of Mount Vipula.
The former are named as follows: 1.—Ganga-Jamna; 2.—Anant
Rikhi; 8.—Sapt Rikhi; 4.—Bhahm-kind; 5.—Kasyapa Rikhi;
6.—Byas-ktnd ; and 7.—Markand-kund. The hottest of these are
the springs of the Sapt Rikhi. The hot springs of Mount Vipula
are named as follows: 1.—Sita-kind; 2.—Suraj-kind ; 3.—Ganes-
kind ; 4.—Chandrama-kind; 5.
kind. The last spring has been appropriated by the Musalmans,
by whom it is called Makhdum-kund, after a celebrated Saint named
Chilla Shah whose tomb is close to the spring. It is said that Chilla

Ram-kand ; and 6-—Sringgi-Rikhi-

was originally called Chilwa, and, that he was an Ahir. He must
therefore have been a converted Hindu.
VIII.— Baragaon.

67. Due north from Rajgir and 7 miles distant lies the village
of Baragaon, which is quite surrounded by ancient tanks and ruined
mounds, and which possesses finer and more numerous specimens of
sculpture than any other place that I have visited. The ruins at
Baragaon are so immense that Dr. Buchanan was convinced it must
have been the usual residence of the King; and he was informed by
a Jain priest at Bihar, that it was the residence of Raja Srenika and
his ancestors. By the Brahmans these ruins are said to be the ruins
of Kundilpur, a city famed as the birth-place of Rukmini, one of the
wives of Krishna. But as Rukmini was the daughter of Raja Bhishma,
of Vidarbha, or Berar, it seems probable that the Brahmans have
mistaken Berar, for Bihar, which is only 7 -miles distant from
Baragaon. I therefore doubt the truth of this Brahmanical tradition,
more especially as I can show beyond all doubt that the remains at
Baragaon are the ruins of Nalanda, the most famous seat of Buddhist
learning in all India.

68. Fa-Hian places the hamlet of Nalo at one yojan, or 7 miles
from the Hill of the Isolated Rock, that is, from Giryek, and also
the same distance from new Rajagriha, This account agrees exactly
with the position of Baragaon, with respect to Giryek and Rajetr.
In the Pali annals of Ceylon also Nalanda is stated to be one yojan
distant from Rajagriha. Again Hwen Thsang deseribes Nalanda as
being 7 yojans, or 49 miles, distant from the holy Pipal tree at
Buddha Gaya, which is correct if measured by the road, the direct

distance measured on the map being 40 miles. He also describes
gE 2

XXvill Archeological Survey Report.

it as being about 30 Zz (or five miles) to the north of new Rajagriha.
This distance and direction also correspond with the position of
Baragaon if the distance be measured from the most northerly point
of the old ramparts. Lastly, in two inscriptions, which I discovered
on the spot, the place itself is called Nalanda. This evidence seems
conclusive ; but I may add further that the existing ruins, which I
am now about to describe, correspond most minutely with the
descriptions of Hwen Thsang.

69. Fa-Hian calls Nalanda the birth-place of Sariputra, who was
the right hand disciple of Buddha; but this statement is not quite
correct, as we learn from the more detailed account of Hwen Thsang
that Sariputra was born at Kalapindka, about half-way between
Ndlanda and Indra-Sila-Guha, or about 4 miles to the south-east of
the former place. Nalanda has also been called the birth-place of
Maha Mogalana, who was the left hand disciple of Buddha ; but this
is not quite correct, as the great Mogalana, aecording to Hwen
Thsang, was born at Kulika, 8 or 9 lu (less than 1$ mile) to the
south-west of Nalanda. This place I was able to identify with a
ruined mound near Jagdispur, at 14 mile to the south-west of the
ruins of Baragaon.

70. ‘The mound of Jagdispur is 200 feet square, and of little
height, except in the south-east corner, where there is a considerable
eminence, 70 feet square. On the southern edge of this height there
is a magnificent Nim tree, under which several statues have been
collected. One of thése is the finest and largest piece of sculpture
that I have met with. It isa figure of the ascetic Buddha, seated
under the Bodhi tree at Buddha Gaya, and surrounded by horrible
demons and alluring females who are seeking by different means to
distract him. On each side other scenes of his life are represented,
and over all, his Mirvdz, or death. A large drawing of this elaborate
piece of sculpture is given in Buchanan’s Hastern India, Plate XIII.
volI. The slab is 15 feet high and 93 feet broad; and considering
the excellence of the sculpture, the multiplicity of the details, and
the fine state of preservation, this work is in every way worthy of
being preserved by photography. The figure is called Rukmini by
the ignorant villagers, who daily smear its forehead and nose with
red lead, and pour milk over the mouth. The offering of milk is
considered very efficacious; but the most acceptable offering is a

Archeological Survey Report. XXiX

goat ; and at the time of my visit, the ground was still wet with the
blood of a recently killed goat.

71. The remains at Baragaon consist of numerous masses of brick
ruins, amongst which the most conspicuous is a row of lofty conical
mounds running north and south. These high mounds are the
remains of gigantic temples attached to the famous monastery of
Nalanda. The great monastery itself can be readily traced by the
square patches of cultivation, amongst a long mass of brick ruins,
1,600 feet by 400 feet. These open spaces show the positions of the
court-yards of the six smaller monasteries which are described by
Hwen Thsang as being situated within one enclosure forming alto-
gether eight courts. Five of the six monasteries were built by five
consecutive princes of the same family, and the sixth by their
successor, who is called King of Central India. No dates are given ;
but from the total silence of Fa-Hian regarding any of the magnificent
buildings at Nalanda, which are so minutely described by Hwen
Thsang, I infer that they must have been built after A. D. 415.
Fa-Hian simply states that he came to the hamlet of Nalo, “where
and this is all that he says of Nalanda. But
surely if the lofty temple of King Baladitya, which was 300 feet in
height, had then existed, it seems scarcely possible that he should

Sariputra was born,”

not have noticed it. I would therefore assign the probable date of
the temples and monasteries of Nalanda to the two centuries between
the visits of Fa-Hian and Hwen Thsang, or from A. D. 425 to 625.
This date is further borne out by the fact recorded by Hwen Thsang
that the great temple of Baladitya was similar to that near the sacred
Pipal tree and Buddha Gaya, Now as similarity of style may gener-
ally be taken as denoting proximity of date, the erection of Baladitya’s
temple at Nalanda may, with great probability, be assigned to the
same century in which the Buddha Gaya temple was built. As I
have already shown this to be about A. D. 500, the date of the
Nalanda temple will lie between A. D. 450 and 550.

72. Several inscribed stones lie scattered over the ruins of Bala-
ditya’s monastery. The letters are only mason’s marks, but their
forms are those of the 6th and 7th centuries.

73. As it is an object of much importance in early Indian history
to fix even a single date with something like precision, I may add
that Hwen Thsang makes Baladitya a contemporary of Mihirakula of —

xR Archaeological Survey Report.

Kashmir. Now I possess several copper coins of Mihirakula, as well
as of Hiranyakula and Gokarna, all of which are certainly of later
date than Mr. Bayley’s gold coin of Pravarasena, and the well
known copper dinars of Toramana of Kashmir. In fact the coins of
Gokarna appear to be but little earlier than those of the Karkota dy-
nasty, which dates from A. D. 625. The date of Mihirakula and of his
contemporary Laladitya may therefore be assumed at between A. D.
500 and 550.

74, I may further mention that we possess gold coins of a
Baladitya, who in all probability is the same as Hwen Thsang’s King
of Nalanda. THis coins, which have been chiefly discovered in the
districts of Patna and Benares, are similar in type execution to the
two Hindu gold coins found by Masson in one of the Hidda Topes
in company with gold coins of Theodosius, Marcian, and Leo. As
the last of these princes died in A. D. 474, the Hindu coins may be
assigned with great probability to the following century.

75. To the south of the monastery there was a tank in which
the dragon, or Naga, Nalanda was said to dwell, and the place was
named after him Nalanda. There is still existing immediately to the
south of the ruined monastery a small tank called Kargidya Pokhar,
which answers exactly to the position of the Nalanda tank, and is, I
have no doubt, the identical pool of the Naga.

76. As the people have no particular names for the different
masses of ruin, but simply call them collectively “the mounds,” I
will, for convenience of description, name each of the principal masses
after the ancient tank on its western side. Other mounds will be
described with reference to their relative positions with respect to the
principal ruins. In my survey of the ruins, I have also attached a
letter of the alphabet to each separate mound.

77. Wwen Thsang begins his account with a vihdr, or temple,
just outside the western wall of the monastery, which had been
erected on a spot where Buddha had dwelt for three months explain-
ing the sublime law for the benefit of the gods. This temple I would
identify with the ruined mound marked A, still 53 feet in height,
and from 65 to 70 feet in thickness near the top, and which is
situated immediately to the westward of the ruined monastery. It
stands to the east of the Panwa tank, and may therefore be called
the Pinwa mound. My excavations, which were carried down to a
depth of 17 feet, exposed the straight walls of a temple.

Archeological Survey Report. XXX1

78. To the south, at 100 paces, there was a ‘small stupa, erected
over a spot where a pious mendicant, from a far country, had per-
formed the panchdnga, or reverence of the five members (namely
head, hands, and knees) in honour of Buddha. This stupa is well
represented by a small mound marked B, which is due south of the
Panwa Mound.

79. Still further to the south there was a statue of Avalokiteswara.
As this statue must have had some kind of covering as a shelter
from the weather, I believe that it is represented by another small
ruined mound, marked C, immediately to the south of the last.

80. To the south of the statue there was a stupa, containing the
hair and nails of Buddha. Sick people recovered their health by
making the circuit of this monument. Another mound, marked D,
to the east of the Rahela tank, corresponds with the position of this
stupa exactly, as it is due south of the last mound, C. It is still 20
feet high. I made an excavation in the top which showed that the
mound had been opened previously, as I found nothing but loose
rubbish. The solid brick-work on all sides, however, satisfied me
that it was the ruin of an ancient stupa.

81. Outside the western wall of the monastery, and close toa
tank, there was another stupa, erected on the spot where Buddha
had been questioned by a heretic on the subject of life and death.
A small mound, marked EH, on the east bank of the Balen tank,
corresponds exactly with the position of this stupa.

82. At a short distance to the east there was a lofty vihar, 200
feet in height, where Buddha had explained the law for four months.
In the position here indicated, there stands the highest and largest
of all the mounds, marked F. It is still 60 feet in height, with a
diameter of 70 feet at 50 feet above the ground, and of 80 feet at 35
feet above the ground. As the outer edges of the walls are much
broken, the original size of this massive building at the ground level
cannot have been much less than 90 feet square. To ascertain its
probable height, we may compare it with the Great Temple at Buddha
Gaya, which has a base of 50 feet square, and a height of 160 feet.
But as the copper gilt amalaka fruit, which once surmounted it, no
longer exists, the original height cannot have been less than 170
feet. Now taking the same proportions for the Nalanda temple, we
may deduce the height by simple rule of three, thus as 50: 170: :

Xxx Archeological Survey Report.

90: 306 feet. It is true that Hwen Thsang states the height at
only 200 feet, but there is a discrepancy in his statements of the
height of another Nalanda temple, which leads me to propose cor-
recting the height of that now under discussion to 300 feet. In
speaking of the Great Temple erected by Baladitya, Hwen Thsang
in one place makes it 200 feet high, (Julien, Vol. Il. page 160,) and
in another place 300 feet high, (Julien, Vol. III. page 50). In both
accounts the enshrined statue is said to be of Buddha himself, as he
appeared under the Bodhi tree, and as the other large temple also
contained a statue of Buddha, it seems highly probable that there
has been some confusion between the accounts of the two temples.

83. I am quite satisfied that the lofty mound, marked F, is the
ruin of a temple, for I discovered three horizontal air holes, each in
the form of a cross, at a height of 385-feet above the ground. They
measured respectively 6, 83, and 113 feet in length. The last
measurement, coupled with the broken state of the brick-work, shows
that the walls must have been upwards of 12 feet in thickness. In
fact on the east side, at 50 feet above the ground, the broken wall is
still 15 feet thick. Most probably the walls were not less than 20
feet thick at this height, which would leave an interior chamber 30
feet square. There is now a great hollow in the centre of this mound,
which I would recommend to be further excavated down to the
ground level, as I think it highly probable that both statues and
inscriptions of much interest would be discovered. Perhaps the
colossal statue of Buddha the teacher, now standing at the foot of
mound H, may have been originally enshrined in this temple.

84. In the north-east corner of the square terrace that surrounds
this massive ruin, I found the remains of several small stupas, in
dark blue stone of various sizes, from 10 to 380 feet in height. The
ornamental carvings are still in good order, many of them being very
elaborate. Rows after rows of Buddhas of all sizes are the most
favourite decoration. ‘The solid hemispherical domes are from 1 foot
to 4 feet in diameter. The basement and body of each stupa were
built of separate stones, which were numbered for the guidance of the
builders, and cramped together with iron to secure greater durability.
No amount of time, and not even an earthquake, could have destroyed
these small buildings. Their solid walls of iron-bound stones could
only have yielded to the destructive fury of malignant Brahmans. I

Archeological Survey Report. XXXIli

tried to complete a single stupa, but I soon found that several pieces
were missing. I believe, however, that a complete one might be
obtained by a careful search about the village temples, around the
Jain temple, and in the small court-yard opposite Mitrajit’s house.
If one could be obtained complete, or nearly so, it would form a most
striking and ornamental addition to the Calcutta Museum.

85. A short distance to the north of the Great Vihar, there was
another temple containing a statue of the Bodhisatwa Avalokiteswara.
This Saint is the same as the Padma-pani of the Tibetans, and is
always represented with a lotus in his hand. An extensive low
mound, marked G, immediately to the north of the great mound,:
corresponds exactly with the situation of this temple.

86. To the north of the last temple there was a grand vihar, built
by Baladitya, containing astatue of the ascetic Buddha. The height,
as I have already noticed, is differently stated by Hwen Thsang at
200 and at 300 feet. The lesser height I believe to be the correct
one, more especially as Hwen Thsang mentions that in its magnificence,
its size, and its statue of Buddha, it resembled the Great Temple at
Buddha Gaya. As this last was 170 feet in height, Baladitya’s
Vihar might very fairly be said to resemble it in size, if it was 200
feet high ; but if it was 300 feet in height, there could have been no
resemblance whatever in the dimensions of a temple that was nearly
twice as lofty. A mound, marked H, to the east of the Dehar tank,
corresponds exactly with the situation of this temple. It is still 45 feet
in height, with a breadth of 50 feet at top from edze to edge of brick-
work. As the facing has disappeared on all sides, the original breadth,
at the ground level, could not have been less than 60 feet; and if the
relative proportions were the same as those of the Buddha Gaya
Temple, the height of this temple must have been 204 feet, or say,
in round numbers, 200 feet, exactly as stated by Hwen Thsang,
There is a colossal statue of the ascetic Buddha in a small court-yard
ealled Baithak Bhairav, at the foot of this mound, which, in all
probability, was the original statue enshrined in Baladitya’s Vihar.

87. Four other buildings and statues, which I have been unable
to identify, are next mentioned by Hwen Thsang, who then goes on
to describe a brick vihar containing a very lofty copper statue of Tara
Bodhisatwa. This was situated at 2 or 3 lz to the north of the
monastery, that is between one-third and one-half of a mile. Now,

E

XXX1V Archeological Survey Report.

at a distance of 2,000 feet to the north of the monastery, and to the
east of the Suraj Pokhar, there is a brick ruin of a very large temple,
marked N. From its close proximity to the village, this ruin has
supplied materials for all the existing houses, and is consequently of
much smaller dimensions than those which have been already described.
But the removal of the bricks has exposed the actual walls of the
temple in several places; and, by making a few excavations, I was able
to determine the exact dimensions of the base of this temple. It
was 704 feet by 67 feet, and it stood on a raised terrace, 6 feet in
height and 125 feet square. If the relative proportion of base to
height was the same as that of the Buddha Gaya Temple, the height
of this temple could not have been less than 228 or 240 feet, accord-
ing to which side of the base is taken for the calculation. ,

88. Hwen Thsang also mentions a large well which was just within
the gateway on the south side of the surrounding walls of this vihar.
Now there is a large well, marked P, immediately on the south side
of the ruined mound above described, which must be the very one
noticed by Hwen Thsang as having owed its origin to Buddha
himself.

89. There are many other objects worthy of notice at Baragaon,
which I can only briefly enumerate: Ist, the sculptures collected in
the enclosure at Baithak Bhairav, marked M ; 2nd, the colossal figure
of the ascetic Buddha at S, This statue is remarkable for having
the names of the attendant figures inscribed over their heads. Thus
we have Arya Sdriputra and Arya Maudgaldyana inscribed over two
flying figures carrying garlands; and Arya Ditreyandtha and Arya
Vasumitra over two attendant standing figures. An inscription in
two lines on the back rail of the seat gives the usual Buddhist formula,
and adds that the statue was “the pious gift of Ganggaké (a lady
who had attained the religious rank of) paramopdsikd.” This statue
is well worthy of being photographed. 8rd, a small temple, marked
T, with a figure of the three-headed goddess Vajrdé-Vardhi. The
Buddhist formula is inscribed on this figure, which is evidently one
of those mistaken by Major Kittoe for Durga slaying the buffalo
demon Maheshasur. The goddess has one porcine head, and there
are seven hogs represented on the pedestal. 4th, a life-size ascetic
Buddha in the village of Baragaon, and a number of smaller figures at
an adjacent Hindu temple, and also at the house of Mitrajit Zemindar

Archeological Survey Report. XXXV

5th, two low mounds to the north of the village, marked V, one hav-
ing a four-armed image of Vishnu on Garud, and the other having
two figures of Buddha seated on chairs. ‘The former must clearly
_ have belonged to a Brahmanical temple. 6th, three statues at W,,
near the Tar Sing tank, of which two are females and one a male
figure seated with hands on knees. 7th, the small temple in the
hamlet of Kapatiya, marked X, where there are several interesting
figures collected. Amongst them there is a fine Vajra Varahi, and a
very good Vagiswari, with an important inscription in two lines,
which gives the name of the place Nalanda, and is dated in the year
1 of the reign of the paramount sovereign Sri Gopala Deva. 8th,
a large mound at Y, which looked like a ruined stupa. I sank
a shaft, 20 feet deep, in the centre of the mound, and found that
it was filled with rubbish. If therefore it was a stupa, it had
been opened long before; but I am inclined to believe that it
was a temple, as a large stone was found in the excavation at a depth
of 13 feet. 9th, a Jain temple at Z, which is only remarkable as
being of the same style of architecture as the Great Temple at Bud-
dha Gaya. It is probably of about the same age, or A. D. 500. Its
present height is only 36 feet without the pinnacle, which is modern.
The whole is whitewashed. Inside the temple there are several Jain
figures, of which that of Mahdvir bears the date of Samvat 1504,
or A. D. 1447. 10th, on the banks of the Suraj-ktind many interest-
ing figures are collected. They are chiefly Buddhist, but there are
also some figures of Vishnu four-armed, of the Varaha Avatar, of
Siva and Pavati, and also of Surya himself.

90. I cannot close this account of the ancient Nalanda without
mentioning the noble tanks which surround the ruins on all sides.
To the north-east are the Gidi Pokhar and the Pansokar Pokhar, each
nearly a mile in length ; while to the south there is the Indra Pokhar,
which is nearly half a mile in length. The remaining tanks are
much smaller in size, and do not require any special notice.

1X.—BIHar.

91. Theold city of Bihar lies 7 miles to the north-east of Baragaon,
In our maps the name is spelt Behar, but by the people it is written
Bihar, which is sufficient to show that it must once have been the
site of some famous Buddhist Vihar. But the only existing Buddhist
remains that I could find were votive stupas and fragments of figures.

F 2

XXXvl Archeological Survey Report.

One of the last was inscribed with characters of about A. D. 900,
but the inscription is unfortunately only a fragment.

92. The city of Bihar consists principally of one long narrow
street, paved with rough stones. ‘There are two bridges with pointed
arches over some irrigation canals, the remains of former prosperity ;
but the whole place is now dirty and decayed. In all directions are
seen Musalman tombs; the smaller ones of brick, the larger ones of
squared and carved stones from the usual Muhammedan quarries of
ruined Buddhist or Brahmanical buildings. To the north-west of
the city there is a long isolated hill, having a precipitously steep cliff
on its northern face, and on the southern face an easy slope in suc-
cessive ledges of rock. The hill is now crowned by some Musalman
buildings, of which the largest is said to be the tomb of Malik Baya,
but I believe that it is the tomb of one Ibrahim in the reign of
Feroze, as I read both of these names in one of the inscriptions. To
the north-east of these tombs, and distant 1,000 feet, on the highest
point of the hill, there is a square platform of brick, which must
once have been the basernent of a building, perhaps of a stupa, while
the more genial site of the Durga, where fine trees are now growing,
might once have held a Buddhist Vihar, and its attendant monastery.

92a. One mile due east from the Durga, and about 100 yards
inside the northern gate of the old fort of Bihar, there lies a
sand-stone pillar which bears two separate inscriptions of the Gupta
dynasty. Unfortunately the surface of the stone has peeled off
considerably, so that both of the inscriptions are incomplete. ‘The
upper inscription, which is of Kumara Gupta, has lost both ends of
every line, being probably about one-third of the whole. The lower
inscription has lost only the left upper corner, and some unknown
amount at the bottom, where the pillar is broken off. But as the
remaining portion of the upper part is letter for letter the same as
the opening of the Bhitari pillar inscription, nearly the whole of the
missing part of the left upper corner can be restored at once. This
record belongs to Skanda Gupta, the son and successor of Kumara
Gupta.

93. Outside the northern gate of the old fort, there are some
tombs that are said to belong to Christiaas, as they lie east and west,
whilst all Musalman tombs lie north and south. One of them bears
an inscription surmounted by a cross, which proves it to be a Christian

Archeological Survey Report. XXXVI

tomb. The inscription I believe to be in the Armenian character ;
but though it does not appear to be old, probably not more than fifty
or a hundred years, yet I could not obtain any information regarding
the tombs.

94, The cyclopean walls of the old fort are very curious ; but as
the fort has been fully described by Buchanan, it is unnecessary for
me to do more than make this mention of it.

X.—GHOSRAWA.

95. <A Buddhistical inscription from Ghosrawa, a village to the S.
S. W. of Bihar, distant 7 miles, was first discovered by Major Kittoe,
who published a translation of it made by Dr. Ballantyne, in the
Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal, Vol. XVII. Part I. p. 492.
This inscription is a very important one for the illustration of the
later history of Buddhism, as it mentions the existence, somewhere
about the 8th or 9th century, of several of the most famous places of
the Buddhists. For instance, it mentions, 1st, the Kanishka monas-
tery in the City of Nagarahara, close to Jelalabad in the Kabul
valley ; 2nd, the Vajrasan, or Diamond throne of Buddha, at Buddha
Gaya; 38rd, the Indra-Sila peak, which I have already identified ,with
Giryek ; 4th, the Viharin Nalanda, the city of Yaso Varmma, This
part of the translation, however, requires revision, as the name of
Nalanda, which occurs twice, has in both instances been rendered as
if it was merely a term for some ascetic posture, instead of the proper
name of the town which contained the most famous monastery in all
India. I will submit this inscription for retranslation.

96. The other remains at Ghosrawa are few and unimportant. There
is a mound of brick ruin touching the village, and a small temple on
a low mound with some broken figures between Ghosrdwa and the
small village of Asanagar. The inscription obtained by Major Kittoe
is now fixed in the wall of this temple. At the western foot of the
Ghosrawa mound there is a four-armed standing male statue of life size,
inscribed with the usual formula of the Buddhist faith. In the upper
right hand there is'a necklace, but the lower hand is open, the upper
left hand holds a lotus, and the lower hand a bell. There is a small
figure of Buddha in the head dress of the statue, from which I believe
that this figure represents Avalokiteswara, as Hwen Thsang describes
a similar statue at the Kapotika Sangharama. The characters of the
inscription do not seem to me to be later than A. D. 800,

XXXVill Archeological Survey Report.

97. On the top of the mound I found the lower portion of a
female figure, of which the upper part was fixed in the ground near
the A’/sanagar temple. The statue is two-armed, and holds a lotus
in one hand. It probably represents Dharmma. There are two
four-armed female attendants, that to the left carrying a human
head.

XI.—TITARAWA. ©

98. At Titardwa, 2 miles to the north of Ghosrawa, there is a fine
large tank, 1,200 feet in length, with a considerable mound of brick
ruin to the north, and a colossal statue of the ascetic Buddha to the
south, which is now called Bhairav. ‘The pedestal is 7 feet broad,
and the whole figure is still 9 feet high, although the upper portion
is wanting. The usual Buddhist formula is inscribed on the lotus
leaves of the pedestal. There are besides several others small and
unimportant, one of which bears the Buddhist formula, and another
inscription in three lines of small letters. The greater portion of this
inscription is injured, but sufficient remains to declare the date of
the statue, which I believe to be about A. D. 800; I can read the
name of Mahapala at the end of it. On the west side of the statue
there is the foundation of a brick stupa, 15 feet in diameter.

99, The mound of Titaréwa is about 20 feet high, and has a
small modern fort on the top, with a round tower at each of the
angles, Excavations for bricks are still going on, as at the period of
Major Kittoe’s visit. I traced the remains of several walls, from
which I infer that the mound was the site of a large monastery.
There is no mention of this place either in Fa-Hian or Hwen Thsang.

XII.—APuHsar.

100. Five miles to the east of Ghosrawa, and on the eastern bank
of the Sakri river, there is a low hill covered with brick ruins, close
to a village called Aphsar. The long and important inscription of
a second dynasty of Guptas, that was discovered at this place by
Major Kittoe, is no longer to be found at Aphsar. The people are
unanimous in stating that Major Kittoe removed it to Nowada
for the purpose of copying it; and he himself states that he
“brought it away to re-examine it, and to restore if as much as
possible before having it fixed in a pedestal near the Varaha” in
Aphsar. J inquired for this inscription at Nowdada, at Gaya, and at
Benares, but could not hear any thing of it. The loss of this

Archeological Survey Report. XXX1X

important inscription is very much to be regretted; but luckily I
possess a transcript of it in modern Nagari, which Major Kittoe
himself gave me in 1850. This is now being translated by Babu
Rajendralal Mitra.

XIII.—Barapar.

101. At 16 miles to the north of Gaya, or 19 miles by the road,
there are several groups of granite hills, called Aawwa-Dol, Bardbar,
Nigarjunt, and Dhardwat. All of these possess some Buddhistie
remains, but the most interesting are the caves of Bardbar and
Nagérjunt, which were hewn out of the solid rock upwards of two
thousand years ago.

102. Kauwa-Dol is a detached hill nearly one mile to the south-
west of the main group of hills, and just six miles to the east north-
east of the Belah Dak bungalow. ‘This hill is quite inaccessible, as
it is formed entirely of huge masses of granite piled precipitously
above one another, and crowned with a single lofty block that frowns
grandly over the plains below. It is said that this pinnacle was
formerly topped by another block, which was so nicely balanced that
it used to rock even when a crow alighted upon it. Fyrom this belief
the hill acquired the name of Aawwa-Dol, or the “ crows’ swing.”

103. At the northern foot of the Kauwa-Dal there has formerly
been a temple of hewn granite. A large village must also once have
existed on the north and east sides of the hill, as the foot of the hill,
which is considerably raised above the fields, is strown with broken
bricks, hewn stones, and fragments of pottery. ‘There are several
Muhammedan tombs on this mound, built chiefly of pillars and other
squared and ornamented stones of some Hindu temple. The name of
this old place is said to have been Samanpur. Major Kittoe, however,
was told that this name applied only to the northern portion of the
ruins, the eastern portion being called Sarain.

104. On the rocks of the northern face of the hill, numerous rude
figures have been sculptured. One of these is a figure of Ganes, 23
feet high, beside a lingam. Several of them represent Gawri-Sankar
or Hara-Gauri; but the most common of these sculptures is the
favourite figure of the four-armed Durga slaying the Aahesasyr, or
Buffalo demon. In her two right hands she holds a sword and
a trident, and in her upper left hand a shield, while her lower
left hand grasps the tail of the buffalo, All of these are Brah-

xl Archeological Survey Report.

manical figurers; but there are also rude figures of Buddha seat-
ed, and one female figure which is said to be Padmavati, or Maya
Devi, but which is most probably only a representation of
Dharmma. In a recess on the east side of the hill, and amidst
the ruins of a large temple, of which several pillars are still standing,
there is a colossal figure of Buddha the ascetic, as he appeared. when
seated in mental abstraction under the Bodhi tree at Budhha Gaya.
A drawing of this figure has been given in Buchanan Hamilton’s
Eastern India, Vol. I. Plate XIV. Fig. 5. It is the largest statue
that I have seen, the figure alone being 8 feet high, with a breadth
across the shoulders of four feet, and of six feet across the knees.
But the great statue in the temple of Buddha Gaya, which was seen
and described by Hwen Thsang, was somewhat more than one-third
larger, its dimensions being 11 feet 5 inches in height, 8 feet 8 inches
in breadth across the knees, and 6 feet 6 inches across the shoulders.

105. In the Bardbar group of hills there are several distinct
peaks, of which the most conspicuous are the Murali peak to the
north, and the Sanda-Giri on the south, both ot which join the
Bardbar or Siddheswara peak on the east. On the summit of the
Bardbar peak there is a small Hindu temple dedicated to Mahadeva
which contains a lingam called Siddheswara, and which, from an
inscription in one of the caves mentioning this name, we know to be
at least as old as the 6th or 7th century. Immediately to the south of
the Bardbar peak, there lies a small valley, or basin, nearly square in
shape, and entirely surrounded by hills, except at two points on the
north-east and south-east, where walls have been built to complete
the enclosure. Its greatest length, measured diagonally from peak
to peak, is just half a mile, but the actual basin is not more than 400
yards in length by 250 yards in breadth.

106. . Towards the southern corner of the basin, there are two
small sheets of clear water which find an outlet underground to the
south-east and re-appear in the sacred spring called Pdtal Gangé,
where an annual assembly is held in the month of Bhddrapada for
the purpose of bathing. On this side is the principal entrance to
the valley, which lies over large rounded masses of granite, now worn
smooth and slippery by the feet of numerous pilgrims. I ascended
by this path without any difficulty, after having taken off my shoes,
but in descending I found a shorter and quicker way down the mass

Archeological Survey Report. xli

of loose rough stones at the foot of the enclosure wall on the same
side. These stones are the ruins of buildings which once crowned
the wall on this side.

107. Immediately to the south of the water, and in the southern
angle of the valley, there is a low ridge of granite rock lying from
west to east about 500 feet long, from 100 to 120 feet thick, and
from 30 to 35 feet in height. The top of the ridge is rounded, and
falls rapidly towards the east. It is divided longitudinally by natural
cleavage into three separate masses. The block towards the north is
much the smallest, being not more than 50 feet long by 27 feet in
thickness. Originally it was probably about 80 or 100 feet in length,
but its eastern end has been cut away to obtain access to the face of
the central mass of rock, in which the Karna-chopdr cave has been
excavated. A lingam and two rude Brahmanical figures are sculptured
on the end of the northern rock. The middle rock is between 200
and 300 feet in length, with a perpendicular face towards the north.
The largest mass of rock, which faces towards the south, is rounded
at top, but the lower part has been scarped to form a perpendicular
wall for the two large caves now called Suddma and Lomas Rishi. A
level piece of ground, about 100 feet in width, intervenes between
this great rock and the foot of the southern hill. Sheds and tempo-
rary buildings are erected on this spot during the annual fair time,
when the caves are visited by thousands of pilgrims. The ground is
strown with broken bricks and fragments of pottery, and the rubbish
has now accumulated to a height of three feet above the floors of the
eaves. This will account for the fact of there having been one foot
of water in these caves when visited by Buchanan. ‘The water was
drained away by Major Kittoe, who dug a trench along the foot of
the rock, and brought to light several pieces of stone pillars which
probably belonged to some portico or cloister in front of the caves.

108. The Barabar Basin is naturally a strong defensive position,
as it possesses plenty of water, and is only accessible at two points,
on the north-east and south-east. Now both of these points have
been closed by walls, and as there are also traces of walls on the
surrounding hills, and more particularly on the Siddheswara Hill, it
seems certain that the place must once have been used as a strong-
hold. There is indeed a tradition of some Raja having been besieged
in this place, and that he escaped by the narrow passage over the

G

xa Archeological Survey Report.

Siddheswara Hill. Its very name of Barabar, that is, bara and awara
2 ? 3

or Bardwara, the “ great enclosure,’ points to the same conclusion,
although this may have been orginally applied to the much larger
enclosure between the Barabar and Nagarjuni Hills, and the western
branch of the Phalgu river, where, according to Buchanan’s infor-
mation, the original Ram Gaya was situated. The numerous heaps
of brick and stone that lie scattered over the plain would seem to
show that this had once been the site of alarge town. ‘The situation
is similar to that of old Raja Griha, namely, that of a small valley
or basin almost surrounded by hills; but in size it is very much less
than the famous Guirivraja, or hill-encircled city of Jarasandha.
This enclosure had the Barabar Hill on the west, the Sangar branch
of the Phalgu river on the east, and the two parallel ridges of the
- Nagarjuni Hills to the north and south. It was upwards of one
mile in length, with a mean width of half a mile, and a circuit of
rather more than three miles. The circuit of the hills surrounding
old Raja Griha was about 8 miles.

109. The caves in the Barabar Hills are usually known as the
Sat-ghara or “seven houses.” Major Kittoe proposed sapt garbha, or

the “seven caves ”

as the true name; but I think that sapta-griha,
or as it is pronounced in the vernacular of the present day, Sat-ghara,
is a preferable etymology, as it is the very same name by which this
collection of caves is now known.

110. The Nagarjuni Hills consist of two very narrow ridges of
granite running nearly parallel, and about half a mile distant from
each other, between the Barabar peak and the Phalgu river. The
northern ridge would appear to be the same as that which Buchanan
calls Murali (Hastern India, Vol. I. p. 100), but my informants
applied this name to another peak in the Barabar group. The sou-
thern ridge contains the famous old caves, of which the largest one,
called the Gopi cave, is on the southern side, with its entrance to the
south. The two other caves are situated on the southern face of a
small spur, or off-shoot, on the northern side of the hill.

111. There are therefore altogether seven caves in these hills, four
of which belong to the Bardbar or Siddheswara group, and three to
the Ndgdrjuni group. I incline therefore to believe that the name
of Sat-ghara, or the “ seven houses,” belonged originally to the whole
of these seven caves, and not to the four caves with seven chambers

Archeological Survey Report. xlili

in the Barabar group. It is true indeed that the Barabar caves are
somewhat older than those of Nagarjuni, but the difference of date
is very little, being not more than 30 years, as will be shown when I
come to speak of the inscriptions.

112. The Karna Chopdr cave is situated in the northern face of
the Barabar ridge of granite which has already been described. The
entrance, which is of Egyptian form, faces the north. The cave is 33
feet 64 inches in length, by 14 feet in width. The sides of the cave
are 6 feet 13 inch in height, and the vaulted roof has a rise of 4 feet 8
inches, making the total height 10 feet 9 inches. At the western
end there is a raised platform 7 feet 6 inches long, 2 feet 6 inches
broad, and 1 foot 3 inches high. From its length I infer that this
was the pedestal of a statue. ‘The whole of the interior of the cave
is polished. On the outside, and at the western corner of the en-
trance, there isa sunken tablet containing a short inscription of five
lines in the ancient character of Asoka’s pillars. It records the
excavation of the cave in the 19th year of the reign of Raja Piya-
dasi, that is, of Asoka himself. ‘This cave therefore dates as far
back as 245 B. C. The inscription has been so much injured by the
weather that it is very difficult to make out the letters satisfactorily.
It also faces the north, so that no advantage can be obtained from
the difference of light and shade which is caused by the sun in the
hollows of the letters of such inscriptions as face in other directions.
There are also several short inscriptions on the jambs of the door-
way, such as Bodhimula, “the Root of Intelligence,” Daridra Kdn-
tdra, “‘ the cave of the poor,” or “the mendicant’s cave,” and others
the records of mere visitors.

113. The Suddma cave is situated in the same granite ridge, but
on the opposite side of it, and with its entrance facing the south.
The door-way which is of Egyptian form, is sunken in a recess 64
feet square and 2 feet deep. On the eastern wall of this recess or
porch, there is an inscription of two lines in the ancient Pali charac-
ters of Asoka’s pillars. An attempt has been made to obliterate
the greater part of this inscription with a chisel, but owing to the
great depth of the letters the work of destruction was not an easy
one, and the clearly cut lines of the original letters, with the excep-
tion of one perhaps at the end, are still distinctly traceable in the
midst of the rough holes made by the destroyer’s chisel. This in-

G 2

xliv Archeological Survey Report.

scription records the dedication by Raja Pryadasi (that is, Asoka
himself), in the 12th year of his reign of a Wigoha cave. The exca-
vation of this cave therefore dates as far back as 252 B. C., the
very same year in which many of Asoka’s edicts were promulgated,
as recorded in his different inscriptions both on pillars and rocks.
The cave itself consists of two chambers, of which the inner one is
nearly circular with a hemispherical domed roof. This roof, which
projects beyond the wall of the circular room into the outer apart-
ment, is considerably under-cut, as if to represent a thatch with its
overhanging eaves. ‘The circular room is 19 feet 11 inches in diame-
ter from west to east, and 19 feet from north to south. The outer
apartment is 32 feet 9 inches in length by 19 feet 6 inches in breadth.
The walls are 6 feet 9 inches in height to the springing of the vaulted
roof, which has a rise of 5 feet 6 inches, making the total height of
the chamber 12 feet 3 inches. At the east end of this apartment
there is a shallow recess which may have been intended as a niche
for a statue, or more probably as an entrance to another projected
chamber. But the work was abandoned soon after its commencement,
and remains rough and unfinished, while all the rest of the cave,
both roof and walls, is highly polished.

114. The Lomas Rishi cave is similar to the Suddma cave, both as to
the size and arrangement of its two chambers; but the whole of the
interior of the circular room has been left rough, and both the floor
and the roof of the outer apartment remain unfinished. The straight
walls of this apartment are polished, but the outer wall of the
circular room is only smoothed and not polished. The chisel marks
are yet visible on the floor, while on the roof, which has only been
partially hewn, the cuts of the chisels, both broad and narrow, are
still sharp and distinct. The excavation of the roof would appear
to have been abandoned, owing to the work having reached a deep
fissure, which forms one of the natural lines of cleavage of the rock.

115. The door-way of this cave is exactly of the same size and
of the same Egyptian form as that of the Suddma cave, but
the entrance porch has been much enlarged, and has been sculptured
to represent what I believe to be the ornamental entrance of a
wooden building. A tolerably faithful sketch of this entrance will
be found in Buchanan (Eastern India, Vol. I. p. 104), but owing to
the accumulation of rubbish at the time the sketch was taken, the

Archeological Survey Report. xlv

full height of the work is not shown. The inscriptions also are
represented as extending below the top of the door-way on one side,
which is not the case, as they are all confined to the semi-circular
space above the door. This sketch, however, shows distinctly the ends
of the roofing beams and the bamboo lattice work of the gable, just
such as may still be seen in the wooden buildings of Burmah.

116. As the inscriptions over the door-way of this cave are all in
the same character as those of the later Princes of the Gupta dynasty,
the date of this sculptured fagade may be assigned to the 3rd or 4th
century of our era. But as the cave itself corresponds so exactly,
both in size and in arrangement, with the Sudama cave, I feel
satisfied that it must have been excavated at the same time, and that,
before the enlargement of the entrance porch, there must have existed
an inscription of Asoka, recording the name and purpose of the cave.
The present inscriptions are deeply and boldly cut, but the letters
are not polished. There are two distinct inscriptions, the upper one,
of two lines, being somewhat later in date than the lower one, of four
lines, in rather larger letters. Both of these inscriptions have been
translated by James Prinsep, (Journal 1837, p. 647,) who, owing
perhaps to the misplacement of the lines of his fac-similes, did not
perceive that translations of both had already been published by
Wilkins in the second volume of the Asiatic Researches. There is
some variation in the two versions of these inscriptions, which I will
submit to Babea#Rajendra Lala Mitra for retranslation.

117. The fourth cave of the Bardbar group is that which is called
Viswa Mitra by Major Kittoe, but which was named simply Viswa-
jhopri, or “ Viswa’s hut,” by my informants. ‘This cave is excavated
in a large block of granite lying to the eastward of the cave ridge,
and at a somewhat lower level. It consists of two rooms, an outer
apartment or ante-chamber which is polished throughout, and an inner
apartment of 11 feet in diameter, which is rough and unfinished.
The former is 14 feet long by 8 feet 4 inches broad, and has an in-
scription on the right hand wall of four lines in the ancient Pali
character of Asoka’s inscriptions. The last five letters have been
purposely mutilated with the chisel, but they are still quite legible.
The inscription, which is otherwise perfect, records the dedication
of the cave by Raja Piyadast (that is, Asoka himself) in the 12th
year of his reign, equivalent to 252 B, C, This is the only inscription

xlvi Archeological Survey Report.

in this cave, which would seem to have escaped the notice of the
Brahmanical occupants or visitors of the other caves. On the floor of
this outer chamber there are four oblong socket holes, which would
appear to have been intended for the reception of timber framing,
as suggested by Major Kittoe.

118. The great cave in the Nagarjuni hill is excavated in the
southern face of the rock, at a height of 50 feet above the country.
It is approached by a flight of stone steps, but the entrance is conceal-
ed partly by atree and partly by an Jdgah wall, which was built by
the last Musalman occupants. It was inhabited when visited by
Major Kittoe in 1847, but was empty when I sawit. This cave is
46 feet 5 inches long and 19 feet 2 inches broad, both ends being
semi-circular. The walls are 6 feet 6 inches high, and the vaulted
roof has a rise of 4 feet, making a total height of 10 feet 6 inches.
The whole of the interior is polished, but quite plain. There is alow
brick platform of modern date at one end, which is said to have
been the seat of a Musulman saint, who was the disciple and successor
of Haji Harmdydn. 'The door-way of the cave is of Egyptian form,
being 2 feet 6 inches wide at top, and 2 feet 114 inches at bottom,
with a height of 6 feet and $ an inch. On the eastern jamb of the
door-way there is an inscription in ten lines of the same family and
same date as those over the door-way of the Lomas Rishi cave.
This inscription has been translated by Wilkins (Asiatic Researches,
Vol. I. p. 282), and by James Prinsep (Bengal Journal, 1837, p. 672).
On the western jamb of the door there is a short inscription in large
letters of the 7th or 8th century, Achdrya Sri Yogananda “the
teacher Sri Yogananda,’ whose name will be found repeated in
another cave.

119. On the outside, immediately over the door-way, there is a
small sunken tablet, containing a short inscription of four lines in
the ancient Pali characters of Asoka’s edicts. This has been trans-
lated by James Prinsep (Bengal Journal, 1837, p. 677). The cave
is called Gopi-ka-kubha, that is, the “Gopi’s or Shepherdess’s Cave.”
The inscription records that “ The Gopi’s cave an abode lasting as the
Sun and Moon, was caused to be excavated by Dasaratha, beloved of
the Devas, on his accession to the throne, as a hermitage for the
most devoted Bhadantas (Buddhist ascetics).”

120. The other two caves of the Nagarjuni group are situated

Archeological Survey Report. xlvil

in a low rocky ridge on the northern side of the hill. To the south,
and in front of the caves, there are two raised terraces. The lower
one to the eastward has a well, 9 feet in diameter and 23 feet deep,
immediately in front of the entrance to the eastern cave, which in
the inscription is called the “ Vapiya-ka-kubha, or Vapiya Cave,”
which I believe refers to the well (vapz) above described, and which
may therefore be translated as the “ well cave.” ‘The upper terrace
to the westward is 120 feet long from north to south, 60 feet broad
from west to east and 10 feet in height above the plain. The walls
are chiefly of brick, but there are several squared stones and granite
pillars near the top. These must, I think, have been added afterwards
by the Muhammedans when they occupied the caves, for the platform
is covered with their small tombs. All around there are heaps of
bricks and fragments of carved and squared stones, which show that
several buildings must once have existed in this place. The upper
platform I believe to have been the site of a vihar, or Buddhist
chapel monastery, but there is nothing now remaining to prove any
Buddhist occupation, excepting only one fragment of a standing
statue. 5

121. The Vapiya cave has a small porch or ante-chamber 6 feet
long by 53 feet broad, from which a door-way only 2 feet 10
inches wide leads to the principal room, which is 16 feet 9 inches
long and J1 feet 3 inches broad. The roof is vaulted, and 10 feet 6
inches in total height. ‘The whole of the walls are highly polished.
On the left hand side of the porch there is an inscription of four lines
in the old Pali characters of Asoka’s edicts. In this record the cave is
ealled, as already mentioned, the Vapiya-ka-kubha, or “ the well cave,”
in evident allusion to the well in front of it. The remainder of the
inscription is word for word the same as that of the Gopi’s cave.
There are several short inscriptions on the side walls of the porch and
on the jambs of the door-way, but they are of little interest, as they
merely record the names of visitors. The longest of them reads—

Achdrya Sri Yogananda pranamati Siddheswara, “ The teacher Sri
Yogananda offers adoration to Siddheswara.” In this inscription we
find the name of the dingam now existing in the temple of the; Bara-
bar peak, recorded in characters of the 6th or 7th century. James
Prinsep refers them to the 6th century. A still older inscription,
Videsa vasusya Kirttih, or “ the renown of Vasu of Videsa,” belongs

xlvili Archaeological Survey Report.

to the age of the Guptas. According to Buchanan this cave is called
Mirza Mandai, or the “ Mirza’s house.”

122. The third cave of the Nagarjuni group is situated imme-
diatly to the westward of the last cave, in a gap, or natural cleft of
the rock, which has probably been enlarged by art. ‘The entrance to
the cave les in this gap facing the east. It is a mere passage, only
2 feet 10 inches in width and 6 feet 14 inch in height, with a
length of 7 feet 2 inches on the northern side, and of 5 feet 9 inches
on the southern side. There are socket holes both above and below
for the reception of a wooden door. The cave itself is 16 feet 4
inches by 4 feet 3 inches; but it has been divided into two rooms by
a rude brick wall. This must have been the work of some ascetic
of former days, as the only opening to the inner room appears to be
too small for the passage of any grown-up man, and could only have
been used by the occupant for the reception of food. On the right
hand jamb of the door-way there is an inscription of four lines in the
old Pali characters of Asoka’s edicts, in which this cave is called
the Vadithikd-kubha. The remainder of the record is letter for
letter the same as those of the Gopt and Vapiya caves. The mean-
ing of the name of Vaditht I am not able to explain. The root Vada
means to separate or divide, to surround or encompass, and also to
cover. Any one of these meanings might be appropriately applied as
descriptive of the peculiar position of this cave, for it is entirely
separated from the other cave, it is encompassed by the bluff rocks
of the gap in which it is situated, and is so effectually covered or
screened from view, that it altogether escaped the notice of Mr.
Hathorne when he made copies of the inscriptions in the Gopi and
Vapiya caves for James Prinsep. I think therefore that the term
secluded would be descriptive of the position of the cave, and I would
suggest that Vadithika may probably be a vernacular form of vada
+ arthika, the whole meaning simply the cave of the “secluded
mendicants.” According to Buchanan this cave is called the abode
of Haji Harmayan.

123. From the foregoing account of the Bardbar caves it will
be seen that the two groups are separated by date as well as by posi-
tion, the Satghara caves having been excavated in the 12th and 19th
years of Raja Piyadasi (or Asoka) while those of Nagdrjuni were
excavated in the first year of Dasaratha, the beloved of the Devas.

Archeological Survey Report. xlix

According to the Vishnu Purana, Daseratha was the grandson of
Asoka and the son of Suyasas; and as the son of Asoka, according
to the Vayu Purana, reigned only eight years, the accession of Dasa-
ratha must have taken place in 214 B. C. The age of the Nagar-
juni caves is therefore 31 years later than that of the Karna-chopar,
and 88 years later than that of the Sudama and Viswa caves.

124. Fyrom the various inscriptions we learn that these caves have
been successively occupied by Buddhists and by Brahmanists. They
were originally excavated for the occupation of Buddhist monks by
the Kings Asoka and Dasaratha in the 3rd century before Christ.
About the 3rd or 4th century after Christ, the Kings Sérdula Varm-
ma and Ananta Varmma, placed Brahmanical images of Deva-mdtd,
of Kdtydyani, and of Mahddeva and his wife in three of the caves. At
a somewhat later date, in the 6th or 7th century, the teacher Yoga-
nanda recorded his adoration of the Siddheswara lingam. This occu-
pation by Brahmans in the 7th century may account for the silence
of the Chinese pilgrin Hwen Thsang regarding the caves, which, as
being in the immediate neighbourhood of Gaya, would otherwise
have attracted his attention. Ata still later date, somewhere about
the 12th century, the Jogi-Karmamdrga and the pilgrim Bhayankara
Natha visited the caves and inscribed their names. Still later the
Nagarjuni caves were occupied by Musalman Pakirs. The Idgah
outside the Gopi cave is said to be only 150 years old, but the
numerous graves on the raised terrace in front of the Vapiya cave
would seem to denote a much longer occupation of probably not less.
than 300 or 400 years.

125. During this successive occupation the caves would appear
to have received new names, as not one of the ancient names record-
ed in the inscriptions has been preserved. Indeed the most ancient
names would seem to have been lost at avery early date, for the Gop
eave of Dasaratha is designated by Ananta Varmma as “ this cavern of
the Vindhya mountains,” and the Vadzthi cave is called simply “ this
cave,” as if the ancient names had already been forgotten. Similarly
the Lomas Rishi cave is called Pravara-giri-guha, or “the great
mountain cave.” From these instances I would infer that the present
names of the caves are all of later date than the time of Ananta
Varmma in the 3rd or 4th century. That they were also of Brah-
manical origin scems to me to be quite certain for the following

an

} Archeological Survey Report.

reasons :—Karna-chopdar I take to be simply Karna-jhopra, ox “ Karna’s
Hut,” so named after Karna, King of Angga, the illegitimate son of
Pritha, the mother of the Pandus, Similarly, Lomas Rishi, who was
described to Buchanan as a “very hairy Saint,” is no doubt the same
as Loma-Pdda or “hairy foot,’ who was also one of the Kings of
Angga (or Bhagulpur). But as Loma-Pada is only a descriptive
appellation of a Prince whose true name was Dasaratha, it would
seem as if the name of Dasaratha, the founder of the three Nagarjuni
caves, had actually been preserved down to a comparatively late period,
and was then ignorantly referred by the Brahmans to the early king
of Angga instead of to the Maurya Prince of Magadha. Regarding
the name of Suddma, or Sudhdma, 1 am unable to offer any conjec-
ture; but Viswamitra, was one of the most celebrated of the seven
Rishis, or great Brahmanical Saints.

126. The silence of Hwen Thsang regarding the caves has been
already noticed ; but I have a suspicion that he had heard of the
celebrated spring of the Pdtdl Gangd at the foot of the Barabar Hill.
According to his account there was a famous spring of pure water
situated at 30 di (or 5 miles) to the north of Gaya. Now as I could
not hear of any spring to the northward of Gaya nearer than Barabar,
I would suggest that Hwen Thsang’s distance of 30 Zi should be cor-
rected to 130 & (or 21% miles), which would make his famous spring
agree exactly with the position of the Pdtdl Gangd, according to the
distance by road, which is 18 miles to the Bela Dak Bungalow + 6
to the Kauwa-Dol hill + 2 more to the Patal Ganga. Hwen Thsang
adds that “the Indians following an ancient tradition called this
spring the ‘holy water’ (eau sainte), and that at all times whoever
drank of it, or bathed in it, was instantly purified from the stain of
his sins.” Now the source of the Patal Ganga is still held in such
esteem that, according to Buchanan, from 20,000 to 50,000 people
assemble annually in the middle of the month of Bhadrapada to
bathe in its waters, and about 500 people bathe daily during the
whole of that month.

127. Should this identification be correct, it would seem to be
almost certain that towards the middle of the 7th century of our era,
not only were these caves occupied by the Brahmans, but the very

memory of their Buddhist origin had been either forgotten or was
carefully concealed.

Archeological Survey Report. li

128. The Dhardwat group of hills lies immediately to the north-
ward of the Barabar hills, about 14 mile distant. There are two
distinct ridges running from west to east, that to the south
being nearly 2 miles in length with three peaks named Saleya, Gureya
and Dhaoli. The nearest road from Barabar to Dharawat lies through
a pass between the Gureya and Dhaoli hills. The northern ridge
consists of a single hill named Ratanz, which in former days was
occupied by some establishment of the Buddhists. On the northern
slope of the hill there are two brick terraces which have been built up
against the rock. The eastern terrace is 60 feet long by 20 feet
broad, and 50 feet above the plain. Near the top the solid brick-
work can still be seen for 20 feet in height, below which the brick
rubbish reaches to the foot of the hill. The second terrace lies
more than 200 feet to the westward of the other ; it has a front of 250
feet, but its height is not more than 15 feet above the plain. On this
terrace there are two broken Buddhist figures, and beneath it there
are four others, of which one bears the usual Buddhist formula of
“ Ye Dharmma hetu prabhava, &c.,” in characters of the 9th or 10th
century.

129. ‘To the north of the Ratani Hill there is a large tank called
Chdndokar Tal, 2,000 feet in length and 800 feet in width. On the
eastern embankment there is a new temple to Mahadeva, only three
years old, and close beside it a very small old temple to Narsingh.
Outside this temple there is a very fine life-size statue named Bhairav.
The figure stands under a thick stem of lotus which forms an arch
overhead, and from which little curling branches strike off on both
sides, ending in lotus flowers which support tiny figures of men,
women, and animals. The statue has twelve arms, and bears in the
head-dress a small figure of Buddha squatted with hands in lap. I
recognized it at once as a statue of the famous Bodhisatwa Avalo-
kiteswara. Reside the statue there are several sculptured stones
containing rows of Buddhas, and also several fragments of votive
stupas, and two slabs with representations of the Wavagraha, or
“nine planets.” There are also numerous fragments of sculpture
under a Pipal tree close by, two of which bear inscriptions in cha-
racters of the 9th or 10th century.

130. To the north-east of the Chandokar Tal there is an extensive ~
mound of brick ruin, which is probably only the remains of the

H 2

lu Archeological Survey Report.

former town of Dharawat. In the north-west corner of this mound
there are two small eminences, which may be the remains of temples,
but as the surface of the mound now presents nothing but small
fragments of bricks, all the larger bricks having been removed to
furnish materials for the present village, it is quite impossible to
say what kind of buildings may once have stood upon it. All
that can be inferred, I think, from the present remains, is that
Dhardwat must at one time, probably about the Sth or 9th century,
have been the seat of a considerable Buddhist community. Major Kié-
toe paid a hurried visit to Dharawat by moon-light. He notices the
twelve-armed figure, which he calls a Buddhist sculpture, as being
very remarkable.
XIV.— BEsaru. j

181. The village of Besdrh, aur, is situated 27 miles a little to
the east of north from Patna, and 20 miles from Hajipur on the left
bank of the Ganges. Both the distance and direction from Patna
point to this place as the representative of the ancient Vaisdli. ‘The
name also is the same, as it is written Besdr by Abul Fasl in his
Ayin Akbary (Gladwin II. 198). Now Hwen Thsang places the
King’s palace in Vaisali at from 124 to 185 lz (20 to 22 miles) to
the east of north from the northern bank of the Ganges opposite
Pataliputra, that is, from the present Hajipur. He also describes
the King’s palace as being from 4 to 5 dz (from 3,500 to 4,400 feet)
in circuit, which agrees with the size of the ruined fort now called
Rija Bisdl-ka-gurh, which is 1,580 feet long and 750 feet broad
inside, or 4,660 feet in circuit round the erest of the mound. This
almost perfect coincidence of name, position, and dimensions, seems
quite sufficient to place the identification of Besarh with Vaisali
beyond all reasonable doubt. I will therefore now proceod to de-
_seribe the objects of interest that still remain in Besarh and the
neighbouring village of Bakhra, which will afford further proof of
the identity of Besarh and Vaisali.

132. These ruins were visited by Mr. J. Stephenson in 1834,
and described by him in Prinsep’s Journal for 1835, p. 128. They
consist of two distinct groups, one at Besarh itself, and the
other, 2 miles to the north north-west of Besarh, and 1 mile to the
south-east of Bakhra. But the whole of these must have belonged to
the ancient Vaisali, as Hwen Thsang describes the old foundations of

Archeological Survey Report. hit
G Y 4ve}

the city, although even then much ruined, as occupying a circuit of
from 60 to 70 di or from 10to 12 miles. Now an oblong square, 32
miles from north to south, and 23 miles from west to east, making a
circuit of exactly 12 miles, would include both Bakhra and Besarh
and all the remains that are at present traceable. This of itself would
be sufficient to show that the Bakhra ruins must have formed part of
the ancient Vaisali; but the fact will be placed beyond all doubt
when I come to describe the ruins themselves, which correspond in the
most remarkable manner with the minute details recorded by Hwen
Thsang.

133. The remains at Besarh consist of a large deserted fort, and
aruined brick stupa. The fort is a large brick covered mound of earth,
1,589 feet long from north to south and 750 feet broad from west to
east measured from edge to edge. It has round towers at the four
corners, and the whole is surrounded by a ditch which was full of water
at the time of my visit. The ruined ramparts alone the edge,
and the four towers at the corners, are somewhat higher than the
mass of the mound, which has a general elevation of from 6 to 8 feet
above the country. The height of the north-west bastion I found by
measurement to be 12 feet above the fields, and 15 feet above the
bottom of the ditch, where it is dry. The main entrance was in the
middle of the south face, where there still exists a broad embankment
across the ditch as well as a passage through the rampart. In the
northern face there was probably only a postern gate, as there is no
passage through the rampart, and no trace ofany embankment across
the ditch, excepting the fact that the only dry part of the ditch is on
this face. The only building within the fort is a small brick temple
of modern date.

1384. Outside the south-west angle of the fort, and about 1,000
feet distant, there is a ruined mound of solid brickwork, 23 feet 8
inches in height above the fields. The whole ofthe top has been
levelled for the reception of Musalman tombs, of which the largest
ascribed to Mir Abdal, is said to be 500 years old. Mr. Stephenson
gives the name of the saint as Mir Abdullah, and the age of the tomb
as 250 years. My informant was the Musalman whom I found
in charge of the tomb. On the south edge of the mond there is a
magnificent wide-spreading Banian tree, supported on numerous
trunks, which shades the whole of the tombs. On the same side also

liv Archeological Survey Report.

a flight of steps leads down to the village of Besarh. This brick
mound is the ruin of one of the stupas, or solid towers of Vaisali,
of which so many are described by Hwen Thsang. ‘ Both within
and without and all round the town of Vaisali,” says he, “ the sacred
monuments are so many that it would be difficult to enumerate them.”
He has however described a few of them, which were situated to the
south of the town, one of which I have no doubt is the solid brick
mound that now bears the tomb of the Musalman saint Mir Abdal.
135. At a short distance to the south of the town, there was a
vihar and also a stupa in the garden which Amraddrikd had present-
ed to Buddha. Beside the garden there was another stupa erected on
the spot where Buddha had announced his approaching Wirvdna (or
death). Beyond this there was a third stupa, on the spot where
the “thousand sons had recognized their mother.” A fourth stupa
stood over the spot where Buddha was said to have taken exer-
cise, and a fifth, erected on ancient foundations, commemorated the
site on which he had explained certain sacred books. A sixth stupa
held the relics of one-half of the body of Ananda, (N. B.—The
other half was enshrined at Rajagriha). The bearing of these stupas
from the garden of Amradirika is not stated ; but as the mass of the
existing brick ruins lies to the westward of the southern entrance of
the fort, the whole of these monuments must have been situated in
that direction. Ofthe six stupas described by Hwen Thsang it is
probable that only two were of any size, namely, that erected on the
spot where Buddha had announced his approaching Wirvdna, and
that which contained the relics of the half body of Ananda. It is
much to be regretted that the presence of the Musalman tombs on
the top of this ancient stupa effectually precludes any attempt at
excavation, otherwise a shaft sunk down through the centre of the
mound would probably reveal the purpose for which the monument
had been erected. The stupa built by the King of Magadha in Ra-
jagriha, over the other half of the remains of Ananda, is said by
Hwen Thsang to have been a superb one. An annual fair is held at
the Besarh stupa in the month of Chaitra, when many thousands of
people assemble at the shrine of Mir Abdal. As the occurrence of
this fair is regulated by the solar reckoning of the Hindus, and not
by the lunar year of the Muhammadans, I conclude that the festival
was established long before the time of the Musalman saint, I would

Archeological Survey Report. lv

therefore, as the fair is held beside the ruined stupa, connect the fes-
tival with some celebration in honour of Buddha or of one of his
disciples. Two ornamental stone pillars of medizval date were found
a short time ago in excavation near the foot of the mound.

136, To the westward of the fort, there is a large sheet of water
with an island on the east side, on which is situated a small temple
dedicated to Mahadeva. Inside the temple all the sculptures found
in the ruins of Besarh have been collected. The principal sculpture
is a group of Mahadeva seated on his bull Nandi and caressing Dur-
ga, or Gauri, who is seated on a lion. There is also astanding figure
of the four-armed Vishnu with a radiated halo round his head. In
his hands he holds a club, a ball, a quoit, and a shell. A third sculp-
ture represents the Ashta S’akti, or eight female energies seated on
their respective vdhans or vehicles. The remaining sculptures are
Buddhistical. One is of Buddha the ascetic, two represent the
Dhyani Buddha, Amitibha, while a fourth is a seated figure of the
famous Bodhisatwa Avalokiteswara.

137. There are several small sheets of water to the north and
north-west of the fort, but when I saw them they were irregular in
shape and seemed to me mostly natural hollows filled with the rain
which had recently fallen. The natives however say that formerly
there were 52 tanks (Bdwan Pokhar) around Besarh, two of which
still exist in the neighbourhood of Bakhra.

138. The remains at Bakhra are all situated on a low mound just
~ one mile to the south-east of the village, and two miles to the north
north-west of the fort of Besirh. The greater portion of this mound
is now cultivated, but the whole surface is covered with small frag-
ments of bricks. The edge of the mound is best defined on the
western side, where it has an elevation of four feet. The remains
consist of—I1st, a stone pillar surmounted by a lion; 2nd, a ruined
stupa of solid brick ; 8rd, a tank; 4th, four small eminences which
mark the sites of ancient buildings; and Sth, a very fine life-size
statue of Buddha the ascetic, which was discovered only eight years
ago. The pillar and the ruined stupa have already been described
by Mr. Stephenson, and the site has already been identified by M.
Vivien St. Martin, as well as by myself with the Vaisali of the
Buddhists.

139. The lion pillar of Bakhra is situated in the middle of a small

lvi Archeological Survey Report.

court-yard with small rooms on three sides, the residence of a Sanydsz
who has recently settled at this place. The people call him Baba.
He is about 30 years of age, and appeared to me very like a sepoy.
He was obliging and communicative, and gave me both assistance
and information. If he had been surly and disobliging, he might
easily have raised religious scruples, and thus have thwarted me from
making an excavation round the pillar, which I was particularly -
anxious to do, as 1b was evident to me that the column had sunk
considerably into the earth. The man had a few followers, and
appeared to be very comfortable. There was plenty of food stored
in his house, and a fine old well on the east side of the court-yard.
140. The shaft of the pillar is a single block of polished sand-
stone, 18 feet in height above the present ground level of the
court-yard in which it stands, and 27 feet 11 inches above the
surrounding fields. The difference between these two measurements,
or 9 feet ll inches, respresents the accumulation of rubbish around
the pillar above the general level of the country. I made an excava-
tion all round the shaft until I reached water at a depth of 14 feet
below the level of the court-yard, and of 4 feet 1 inch below the
level of the fields. The water in the old well close by was standing
at the same level. As the whole of the shaft exposed by the excaya-
tion is polished, it appears to me certain that the pillar must have
sunk into the ground at least 4 feet 1 inch in depth, and most pro-
bably several feet more, as there was no appearance of any basement
at the point reached by my excavation. The whole height of shaft
above the water level is 32 feet. I was informed by an old man at
Besarh that the saheb who excavated the Bakhra stupa left a Bengali
to make an excavation round the pillar, and that just at the water
level he found asquare pedestal in three steps. Before I began my
own excavation, I was told that a previous excavation had been made
down to the water level without revealing any inscriptions. I found
however a few short records in the curious flourished characters,
which James Prinsep called “shell-shaped,” and which Major Kittoe
thought somewhat resembled Chinese. I believe that these characters
belong to the 7th or 8th century. But at whatever period these may
have been in use, it is certain that at least 4 or 5 feet more of the
shaft must then have been exposed to view. The pillar now leans
to the westward, and is from 4 to 5 inches out of the perpendicular

Archeological Survey Report. lvii

at the ground level. I attribute the sinking of the pillar partly to
the insufficiency of the basement, and partly to the want of stiffness
in the sub-soil, which is a loose wet sand. In such a soil the base-
ment should have been well spread out, with its foundation resting
on wells, so as to offer an effectual resistance to the thrust of the
heavy pillar, which with its capital must weigh nearly 50 tons. The
shaft alone above the water level weighs 37 tons.

141. The upper diameter of the pillar is 38.7 inches, and the lower
diameter at the water level is 49.8 inches, the mean diameter being
44.2 inches, as the slope of the shaft is quite straight. The pillar is
is surmounted by a bell-shaped capital, 2 feet 10 inches in height,
with an oblong abacus of 12 inches, making the whole height of
capital 3 feet 10 inches. This forms the pedestal of a lion statue of
life-size. The animal is seated facing the north, with his hind legs

ander him, with his mouth open as if snarling, and his tongue slightly

protruded. The attitude is rather stiff, and the fore legs of the
animal seem to be both too short and too thick, but the hair of the
mane is boldly and cleverly treated, and the general appearance of
the statue is certainly striking.

142. ‘There is no inscription on the pillar to declare the object for
which it was erected. It is possible that a short inscription may
once have existed, for the surface of the pillar has suffered consider-
ably, and in one part, 25 feet above the present ground level, the
polished surface has peeled off allround. Numerous names of visitors
have been cut on the pillar. Some few are of Musalmans, several of
Hindus, but the most of Christians. The visitors, I was told, wrote
their names in charcoal, and a village blacksmith afterwards traced
them roughly with a chisel. The whole surface of the pillar within
reach is disfigured with these rude scrawls, of which the neatest and
smallest is that of “ Reuben Burrow, 1792.” Some of the Nagari
inscriptions consist of two short lines, but none of them, as far as
could judge, are more than 200 or 3800 years old. he pillar is
known by the people as Bhim-Sen-ka-lat and Bhim-Sen-ka-danda.

143. Immediately to the south of the pillar there is a small tank,
200 feet from east to west, and 150 feet from north to south. It
has no name, but is simply called Kund or Pokhar. To the south,
at a distance of 35 feet, there is a low mound of broken bricks, which
must have been the site of some ancient building. At short distances

oi

lvili Archeological Survey Report.

from the south-west and north-west corners of the tank, there are two
similar mounds. ‘The probable identification of the tank and mounds
will be noticed hereafter.

144. Due north from the pillar, and just outside the court-yard,
there is a ruined stupa of solid brick surmounted by a fine old Pipat
tree. This stupa is 25 feet 10 inches in height above the fields, but
only 15 feet 11 inches above the present ground level of the pillar.
An excavation has been made right into the centre of the mound
from the north-west. The excavation, I was informed by an old
man, was superintended by a Bengali servant of some Saheb more
than 50 years ago; but no discovery was made. This account agrees
with that given by Mr. Stephenson, who relates that the excavation
was made by a Doctor, resident at Muzafarpur, 30 years ago, that is,
previous to 1835, or about A. D. 1805. As the eentre of the mass
had evidently been reached by the Bengali, I did not think it neces-
sary to make any further excavation.

145. To the north-east of the ruined stupa, at a distance of 250
feet, there is a low mound similar to those near the tank, and due
north, at a distance of 500 feet, there is a small temple containing a
life-size statue of Buddha the ascetic, which was discovered only
eight years ago in digging up some brick walls immediately to the
east of the temple. The statue is perfect, not even the nose being
broken. There is a small Buddha on each side of the figure, and
there are two lions on the pedestal, besides a long inscription, begin-
ning with the usual Buddhist formula. There is no date, but the
characters are those of the 8th or 9th century. The spot on which
the figure was found was most probably the site of an ancient whdr
or Buddhist chapel monastery, in which the statue was enshrined.
I saw several of the bricks with bevelled edges similar to those that
form part of the mouldmgs of the Great Temple at Buddha Gaya,
and of the stupa at Giryek.

146. The lion pillar and the surrounding remains at Bakhra I
would identify with a group of holy buildings deseribed by Hwen
Thsang as being situated upwards of one mile to the north-west of
the palace of Vaisali. ‘The exact distance is not mentioned, but the
existing remains correspond so closely with his details regarding the
situation and nature of the different objects, that there can be no
reasonable doubt as to the identity of the whole group. The first

Archeoiogicai Survey Report. lix

work noticed by Hwen Thsang as being upwards of one mile to the
north-west of the palace of Vaisali is a stupa that was built by King
Asoka, of which the purpose is not stated. Beside the stupa there
was a stone column from 50 to 60 feet in height, surmounted by the
statue of a lion. To the south of the pillar there was a tank which
had been exeavated by a flock of monkeys for the use of Buddha.
At a short distanee to the west of the tank there was a stupa erected
on-the spot where the monkeys climbed a tree and filled Buddha’s
begging pot with honey. On the south side of the tank there was
another stupa erected on the spot where the monkeys offered the
honey to Buddha, and at the north-west angle of the tank there was
a statue of a monkey.

147. The ruined stupa to the north of the pillar I would identify
with Asoka’s stupa, and the small tank to the south of the pillar
with the celebrated Markata-hrada or “ Monkeys’ Tank,” which, as
we have already seen, was in the same position with respect to the
lion pillar. The two low mounds to the west and south of the tank
correspond with the sites of the two stupas built to commemorate
the monkeys’ offering of honey to Buddha ; and the low mound to
the north-west agrees exactly with the site of the monkeys’ statue.
The correspondence between the several objects so minutely detailed
by Hwen Thsang and the existing remains is complete. The only
point on which there is any seeming discrepancy is the height of the
pillar, which was from 50 feet to 60 feet, while the actual pillar may
perhaps be less. The height of the lion statue is 4 feet 6 inches,
that of the capital is 3 feet 10 inches, and that of the polished shaft
down to the water level is 35 feet 10 inches, making altogether a
height of only 44 feet 2 inches, bnt as neither the basement of the
pillar nor the end of the polished portion of the shaft have been
reached, it is quite certain that the pillar must have been higher
than this measurement. I would therefore fix its probable original
height at about 50 feet, which would then agree with the measure-
ment of Hwen Thsang.

148. Vaisali, the capital of the Lichchhavi family, was especially
famous as the scene of the second Buddhist Synod in 443 B.C. The
assembly was held, according to Hwen Thsaug, at a spot 24 miles to
the south-east of the city, but I could find no remains in that direc-
tion, Vaisali was also celebrated as the place where Buddha had

I 2

x Archaeological Survey Report.

announced his approaching Mirvdna. The actual spot was to the
westward of the town, but after the announcement, Buddha with his
cousin disciple Ananda repaired to the Kutdgdra hall, where he ad-
dressed his followers for the last time. Kutagara, which means the
“ upper-storied hall,” was a famous edifice situated in the J/ahdvano
Vihdro, in which Buddha had dwelt during the 5th year of his teach-
ing. MMahdvano Vihdro means “the Chapel Monastery of the great
forest.” Fa-Hian speaks of “a great forest and a chapel of two
stories ;’ but Hwen Thsang makes no allusion to the upper-storied
hall, although, as we know from the Mdndhdtri Sutra of the Divya
Avaddna, translated by Burnouf, the Kutdgdra Hall was situated on
the bank of the Markata-hrada, or “ Monkey Tank.” From Hwen
Thsang’s silence I infer that this once famous hall, which Fa-Hian
had seen about A. D. 410, must have become ruined before A. D. 640.
Altogether the agreement of these details is so very close that I think
there can be little, if any, doubt that the Bakhra ruins represent the
site of the group of sacred objects described by Hwen Thsang. Even
the great forest can still be traced in the numerous fine groves of
trees which surround the ruins on all sides. The name of Bakhra
may possibly have been derived from Vak (S. Vach) “to speak,”
from the fact that in the Awtdgdra Hall Buddha had addressed his
disciples for the last time.
XV.—KESARIYA.

149. To the north north-west, distant 30 miles from Besarh, and
somewhat less than two miles to the south of the large village of
Kesariya, stands a lofty brick mound capped by a solid brick tower
of considerable size. This ruin has already been brought to notice
by Mr. B. H. Hodgson, but no description has been published, and
in the Sketch taken by his native artist (Prinsep’s Journal, Vol. IV.
Plate VII) the mound appears much too high for its breadth, while
the stupa (or dagopa) on the top is made much too small.

150. The mound of Kesariya is a ruined mass of solid brick-work,
62 feet in height, and 1,400 feet in circumference at the base of the
ruins. On the top of this there is a solid brick stupa, the whole
surface of which is ruined, excepting at the base, which is still perfect
in several places. In the most perfect part there are 15 courses of
surface brick-work still in good order, and in two other places there
are 10 and 11 courses perfect. From these three points | made ont

Archeological Survey Report. Ixi

the base of the stupa to be 68 feet 5 inches in diameter. My mea-
surement of the height was necessarily rough, as there was no defined
edge at the top, the whole being thickly covered with long grass.
After much trouble I made out a height of 38 feet 74 inches for the
cylindrical portion, and of 12 feet 103 inches for the dome, or alto-
gether of 51 feet 6 inches. But as the height of the dome cannot
have been less than the half diameter of the building, or 34 feet 23
inches, the original height of the solid brick-work of this stupa
must have been 72 feet 10 inches, and the whole height of the stupa
with its pinnacle not less than from 80 to 90 feet, or including the
ruined basement on which it stands, not less than 150 feet above
the ground,

151. From the ruined state of the lower mound compared with
the perfect state of the base of the upper stupa, I am of opinion
that the present stupa is of middle age, say from A. D. 200 to 700,
and that it was built upon the ruined mass of a much older and much
larger stupa. That such a practice was not uncommon, we learn
from Hwen Thsang, who describes two stupas at Vaisali as having
been erected on ancient foundations. I feel quite satisfied that such
has been the ease with the Kesariya Monument, and as all the early
stupas are found to be hemispherical, I infer that the lower and
earlier stupa musthave been of that form. Its great size may be
deduced from the breadth of the base of the upper stupa, namely, 68
feet 5 inches, at a height of 62 feet above the ground; and as there
must have been a clear terrace all round this stupa, for the peram-
bulation of pilgrims, the actual thickness of the early stupa at this
height cannot have been much less than 100 feet, which would give
a diameter at base of 160 feet. The height of the hemisphere would
of course have been 80 feet, but with the usual square Buddhist
eapital surrounded by an umbrella, or other pinnacle, the stupa could
not have been less than 100 feet.

152. ‘This ancient monument is known to the people as Raja Ben
ka Deora. The similar but smaller stupa at Kastya is also called a
Deéra, or, as it is written by Buchanan, Dewhara. In both cases
the name belongs to the upper stupa, and not to the whole mass, as
all mounds, whether of earth or brick, in this part of the country,
are named Bhisa. Dedriya, which is a very common village name in
the districts of Tirhtt, Champaran, and Gorakhpur, is applied, I

ixil Archeological Survey Report.

believe only to such places as possess either a temple or some other
holy buildings. Of Raja Ben the people have no tradition, except
that he was one of the five Supreme Emperors of India, and he is
therefore called Raja Ben Chakravartti. The piece of water imme-
diately to the south of the stupa is also named after him, kija Ben
ka Digha, or Raja Ben’s Tank. I know only of one Raja Vena,
whom the Rishis are said to have inaugurated as “ Monarch of the
earth,” but whom they afterwards slew because he would not allow
them to worship Vishnu, “ Who,” exclaimed he, “ is this Hari whom
you style the lord of sacrifice?” From Vena’s right arm, when
rubbed by Brahmans, was produced a son named Pirthi, who accord-
ing to the Vishnu Purana also become a Chakravartiti Raja. This
Vena Chakravarttl is most properly the great Raja Ben to whom the
tradition refers.

158. Now it is remarkable that according to the acconnt of Hwen
Thsang, this stupa was also referred to a Chakravartti Raja by the
Buddhists of the 7th century. He states that at somewhat less than
200 li (that is, less than 33 miles, or say about 30 miles,) to the
north west of Vaisali, which is the exact position of the Kesariya
stupa, there was an ancient town which had been deserted for many
ages. It possessed a stupa built over the spot where Buddha had
announced that in one of his former existences he had been a Bodhi-
satwa, and had reigned over that town as a Chakravartii Rdja, named
Mahéddeva. It can hardly, I think, be doubted that the tradition of
Raja Ben preserves the very same story which is recorded by Hwen
Thsang. That the stupa was intended to commemorate a Chakravartti
Raja might also have been inferred from its position at the meeting
of four principal roads. “ For a Chakravartti Raja,” said Buddha
addressing Ananda, “they build the ¢hupo at a spot where four prin-
cipal roads meet.” Now to the south of Kesariya, within one quarter
of a mile of the stupa, the two great thoroughfares of the district
cross each other, namely, that from Patna northward to Bettiah, and
that from Chapra across the Gandak, north-eastwards to Nepal.

154. On the east side of the Kesariya stupa a gallery has been
excavated right to the centre of the building. This is said to have
been done upwards of 40 years ago by one Kasi Nath Babu, the
servant of a Colonel saheb. As the name of “ Lieutenant-Colonel
Mackenzie, Madras Engineer, 1814,” is inscribed on the Bakhra

Archeological Survey Report. Ix

pular, I think it probable that the excavation was made by his
orders. No discovery was made, andif I am right in my identifica-
tion of this stupa with that which was erected on the spot where
Buddha announced his previous existence as a Chakravartti Raja, it
is almost certain that it would not have been the depository of relics
or of other objects. The monument was in fact only a memorial stupa,
erected to perpetuate the fame of one of Buddha’s acts, and not a
sepulchral stupa for the reception of relics.

155. To the north north-east of the stupa, and rather less than
half a mile distant, there is a small mound which has been partially
excavated to furnish materials for the bridges on the high road,
which within the last few years have been made from Bakhra to
Motihari vid Kesariya. The exeavations have disclosed the walls of
a small temple, 10 feet square inside, and the head and shoulders of a
colossal figure of Buddha, with the usual crisp curly hair. The
mound, which is about 200 feet square, is called dniwds, and also
Gorai, and the buildings are attributed to some ancient Rani. It
appears to me to have been the site of a Vihara or temple monas-
tery, as portions of cells are still traceable on the eastern side. At
the south-west angle there is another smaller mound of brick ruin,
120 feet from north to south and 60 feet from west to east. It is
- probably the ruin of a temple.

XVI.—Lavurtya Ara-Ras.

156. Between Kesariya and Bettiah, at the distance of 20 miles
to the north-west of the Kesariya stupa, and one mile to the south-
west of the Hindu temple of Ara-Raj Mahadeo there stands a lofty
stone column which bears in well preserved and well eut letters
several of the edicts of King Asoka. The pillar itself is simply

?

ealled Laur, that is, “the phallus ;” and the neighbouring village,
which lies not more than 100 yards to the westward, is called Lau-
riya. his is the pillar which, on the authority of Mr. Hodgson,
has been called the Radhia Pillar. Now as the other pillar to the
north of Bettiah is also called Zawr, and the large village close to it
Lauriya, while Mr. Hodgson has named it Mathiah, I presume that
his Munshi intentionally suppressed the phallic name of Lauriya,
and named the two pillars at random after some of the neighbouring
villages. ‘Thus Rahariya, (Rurheea of Indian Atlas Sheet No. 102,)

which is Mr. Hodgson’s Radhia, lies 23 miles to the west north-west

Ixiv Archeological Survey Report.

of the southern pillar, while Mathiah lies 5 miles due south from the
northern pillar. In describing these pillars I will preserve the cha-
racteristic name of Lauriya, and for the sake of distinguishing the
one from the other, I will add to each the name of the nearest vil-
lage, thus the village near the southern pillar I shall call Lawriya
Ara-Raj, and that near the northern pillar Lauriya Navandgarh.

157. The Ara-Raj Pillar is a single block of polished sand-stone,
363 feet in height above the ground, with a base diameter of 41.8
inches, and a top diameter of 37.6 inches. The weight of this por-
tion only is very nearly 34 tons, but as there must be several feet of
rough shaft sunk in the earth, the actual weight of the single block
must be about 40 tons. This pillar has no capital, although there
can be little, if any, doubt that it must once have been crowned with
a statue of some animal. The people, however, know nothing of it,
and not a fragment of any kind now exists to suggest what it may
have been. The site of the village is a very secluded one, and there
are no ruins or other remains to attract attention. It has accord-
ingly escaped the notice of travellers, and the disfigurement of their
names, the only record being that of “ Reuben Burrow, 1792,”
besides a few flourished letters, or marks, of the kind which James
Prinsep called shell-shaped characters.

158. The edicts of Asoka are most clearly and neatly engraved,
and are divided into two distinct portions, that to the north contain-
ing 18 lines, and that to the south 23 Jines. I made a copy of the
inscription by the eye, which I then compared with James Prinsep’s
text, and afterwards I re-examined every letter in which our copies
differed. I also made an inked impression of the whole inscription
on paper, which I am now engaged in reducing for publication. But
though the variations from Prinsep’s text are not many, yet, as no
fac-simile has yet been made public, it is important, for the sake of
comparison, to afford access to one which has been carefully copied
in every letter.

XVII.—Lavriva NavanpGarH.

159. The lion pillar of Lauriya Navandgarh, which, after Mr.
Hodgson, has hitherto been called the Mathiah Pillar, is situated at
rather less than half a mile to the north-east of the large village of
Lauriya, at 15 miles to the north north-west of Bettiah, and at 10
miles from the nearest point of the Gandak River. As Mr, Hodg-

Archeological Survey Report. | lxv

son’s name of Mathiah serves only to mislead, I propose to call the
site of this pillar Lauriya Navandgarh, by adding the name of a
very remarkable deserted fort which stands just half a mile to the
south-west of Lauriya. The village of Mathiah lies no less than 3
miles to the south of the pillar, and is besides both smaller and of
less consequence than Lauriya, The name of this Lauriya is printed
in Roman letters in the Indian Atlas Sheet No. 102, and even the
“stone pillar” itself is inserted in its proper place to the north-east of
the village. The deserted fort of Navandgarh is omitted, but it will
be found in the Calcutta Map, on the 8-mile scale, as Naonad-garh.
The mound is from 250 to 300 feet square at top, and 80 feet in
height. On account of its height it was chosen as one of the stations
of the Trigonometrical Survey, and for the same reason it commands
a most extensive and beautiful view of the well wooded country
around it.

160. The remains at Lauriya Navandgarh are particularly inter-
esting, as they are very extensive, and at the same time quite differ-
ent in character from any others that I have examined. The remains
consist of three rows of earthen barrows or huge conical mounds of
earth of which two of the rows lie from north to south, and the
third from west to east. The stupas hitherto met with have been
made either of stone or of brick; but the earliest stupas were mere
mounds of earth, of which these are the only specimens that I have
seen. I believe that they are the sepulchral mounds of the early
kings of the country, prior to the rise and spread of Buddhism, and
that their date may therefore be assumed as ranging from about 600
to 1500 B.C. The word stupa meant originally only “a mound of
earth,” and this is the rendering given to the word by Colebrooke in
his translation of the Amarakosha. In the time of Asoka all the
stupas were certainly built either of stone or brick, as recorded by
Hwen Thsang; and although he is silent regarding the material of
the earlier stupas of Ajatasatru and other contemporaries of Buddha,
yet, as he makes no mention anywhere of earthen stupas, I presume
that all the Buddhist monuments were either of brick or stone. The
earthen barrows I would therefore refer to an earlier period, as the
stupas or sepulchral mounds raised over the ashes of the rulers of
the country, the larger mounds belonging perhaps to the greater or
more famous monarchs who had assumed the title of Chakravartti

Kk

|xvi Archeological Survey Report.

Rajas. Every mound is called simply Bhisd, and the whole are said to
have been the fortified residences of the Ministers and Nobles of
Raja Uttdnpat, while the fort of Navandgarh was the Raja’s own
residence. Uttdnapdda, King of Brahmavarta or Bharatkhand, that
is, of the Gangetic Doab, was the son of the Manu Swayam bhuva, the
first created of Brahma, and the progenitor of mankind. Raja Vena,
to whom the Kesariya Monument is assigned, was the seventh in
descent from Uttanapada. Another decisive evidence in favour of
the great antiquity of these barrows is the fact that Major Pearse, of
the Madras Artillery, found one of the small punch-marked silver
coins in his excavations amongst them. These coins are certainly
anterior to the time of Alexander the Great, and I believe that many
of them are as old as 1000 B. C., and perhaps even older.

161. There are three rows of these earthen mounds, of which one
line runs from east to west, and the other two lines from north to
south. There are five barrows in the east and west row and six
barrows in the middle row, while the outer northern row has four
large and at least seven small barrows. There are probably several
more small mounds which escaped my observation in the jungle sur-
rounding some of the larger mounds, but I do not believe that any
barrow of greater height than 5 or 6 feet remains unnoticed. In my
Survey of these remains I have attached a separate letter of the
alphabet to each mound for the sake of greater clearness of description.

162. Inthe east and west line there are five mounds marked A to
K. Four of these mounds, A, C, D, and H, are covered with frag-
ments of brick, and there are also traces of the walls of small brick
buildings on their summits. Mound A is 20 feet inheight. Within
5 feet of its top, 1 excavated a portion of a circular foundation wall,
16 inches thick, formed of single bricks 203 inches long and 4 inches
thick. There were only four courses of bricks resting on the earth
of the mound. This work may either have been the retaining wall
of a circular terrace which once crowned the top of the mound, or it
may have been the foundation of a tower; but as the wall was only
16 inches thick, the former would seem to be the more probable
supposition. Mound B is a simple earthen barrow, 25 feet in height.
Mound C, which is 80 feet in height, is thickly covered with broken
brick. There are traces of foundation walls on the top, but a former
excavation shows that the whole mass is plain earth. ‘here are traces

Archeological Survey Report. Ixvil

also of walls on the slopes of the mound; and in an excavation
amongst these superficial brick ruins made by Mr. Lynch, Deputy
Magistrate of Motihari, there was found a seal of black earthen-ware,
bearing a short inscription in characters of the Gupta period, that 1s,
of the 2nd and 38rd century after Christ. The inscription, which
consists of four letters, reads Atavijd. This is most probably only a
name which may mean either Afavi + jd, “the forest born,” or less
probably Ata + vya, “the cause of motion.” At the end of the
name there is the Swdstika, or mystic cross, and over the name in
the middle there is the symbol of Dharmma, and to the left, in a
slanting direction, a trident, or ¢risél. The discovery of this seal
shows that Navandgarh Lauriya was certainly occupied by the
Buddhists as late as the 2nd or 8rd century A. D. Doubtless their
occupation continued to a later period, for although both Fa Hian
and Hwen Thsang make no allusion to it, their silence is easily
accounted for by the fact that the course of their travels did not
take either of them into the Bettiah district. The two remaining
barrows of this row are somewhat higher, mound D being 35 feet,
and EH 45 feet. Both of them are covered with broken brick. The
top of D had already been opened, and I myself made an excavation
on the top of mound E. Both had flat tops, as if terraces had ounce
existed on their summits; and with this impression I began my
excavation. At the depth of 4 feet all trace of brick disappeared,
the mass of the mound being plain earth. The bricks were large,
NG! Ria!”

163. None of the barrows of the middle line have any traces of
brick upon them, but seem to be made of plain earth. They are all
covered with low thorny jungle. The most northerly mound of this
line, marked H, is 25 feet in height; the next mound, marked G, is
20 feet; the next F is 50 feet; and the next M is 55 feet. The last
two are the highest of all the barrows at Navandgarh Lauriya. The
next mound N is only 15 feet high, and the next southerly mound,
marked Q, is 25 feet in height. About one-half of the mass of the
last mound has been excavated and carried away to Bettiah on bul-
locks and donkeys. The whole heart of the mound is formed of an
extremely hard whitish clay, which is used by the people as a light
coloured clay-wash for the walls of their houses. This clay is indeed
so hard that it turns the edges of common digging tools. When freshly

kK 2

Ixvil Archeological Survey Report.

cut it glistens, and has a bluish tint. From whence was this clay
obtained? ‘There is none now anywhere near the place, the soil being
generally light and sandy. Can it have been found here formerly,
or was it brought from a distance ?

164, In the outer line there are only four large barrows, the most
northerly, marked L, being 20 feet in height, and the other three,
marked K, J, and R, being each 30 feet. The last mound R, which
is the most southerly of this line, has also been excavated for the
sake of its stiff white clay, which is similar to that of mound Q of
the middle line. Between J and R I traced seven small mounds, of
which the largest, marked O, is only 83 feet in height. I made an
opening in this mound down to the ground level, but without any
result, except that it proved the mound to be formed of common
hard earth, and not of the indurated glistening white clay which
forms the masses of the two barrows Q and R.

165. There is another question regarding these barrows which is
perhaps quite as puzzling as that of their origin, namely, from whence
was the earth for so many large mounds procured, for there is not a
single hollow or excavation of any kind in their neighbourhood ?
On three sides of the huge mound of Navandgarh the tanks still
exist to show from whence its material was obtained, but with respect
to the material for the tumuli we are left entirely to conjecture.
Between the mounds and the village of Lauriya there is the dry bed
of an annual flood stream called the Zurkdha Nala, but its soil is
light and sandy, excepting only in the deeper pools, where the water
lies for several months. It seems scarcely possible that the earth
could have been taken from this sandy channel, and yet it is equally
impossible to say from what other place it could have been obtained.

166. The lion pillar of Lauriya N avandgarh stands to the north
of the mounds A and B, at a distance of less than 500 feet from
each. Its shaft is formed of a single block of polished sandstone,
32 feet 91 inches in height, with a diameter at base of 35.5 inches
and of 26.2 inches at top. The capital which is 6 feet 10 inches in
height, is bell-shaped, with a circular abacus supporting the statue of
a lion facing the north. The abacus is ornamented with a row of
Brahmani geese pecking their food. The column has a light and
elegant appearance, and is altogether a much more pleasing monument
than the stouter and shorter pillar of Bakhra. The lion has been

Archeological Survey Report. Ixix

yjured in the mouth, and the column itself bears the round mark of
a cannon shot just below the capital, which has itself been slightly
dislodged by the shock. One has not far to seek for the name of
the probable author of this mischief. By the people the outrage
is ascribed to the Musalmans, and on the pillar itself, in beautifully
cut Persian characters, is inscribed the name of MWahi-ud-din Muham-
mad, Aurungzeb, Padshah Alamgir, Ghazi Sanah 1071. This date
corresponds with A. D. 1660-61, which was the fourth year of the
reign of the bigoted Aurungzeb, and the record may probably have
been inscribed by some zealous follower in Mir Jumla’s army, which
was then on its return from Bengal, after the death of the Emperor’s
brother Shuja. The Navandgarh Pillar is much thinner and much
’ lighter than those of Ara-Raj and Bakhra. The weight of the
polished portion of its shaft is only 18 tons, or rather less than half
that of the Bakhra Pillar, and somewhat more than half that of the
Ara-Raj Pillar.

167. The pillar is inscribed with the edicts of Asoka in the same
clear and beautifully cut characters as those of the Ara-Raj Pillar.
The two inscriptions, with only a few trifling variations, correspond
letter for letter. I made acareful copy of the whole for comparison
with the text made public by James Prinsep. I made also a fac-
simile impression in ink, which I am now reducing for publication
with that of the Ara-Raj Pillar.

168. The Navandgarh Pillar has been visited by numerous
travellers, as it stands in the direct route from Bettiah to Nepal.
There are a few unimportant inscriptions in modern Nagari, the
oldest being dated in Samvat 1566 chait badi 10, equivalent to
A.D. 1509. One of them, without date, refers to some petty Royal
Family, Nripa Ndrdyana Suta Nripa Amara Singha, that is, “King
Amara Singha, the son of King Narayana.’ ‘The only English
inscription is the name of Rn. Burrow, 1792.

169. The pillar itself has now become an object of worship as a
phallus or lingam. Whilst I was copying the inscription, a man
with two women and a child set up a small tlag before the pillar,
and placed offerings of sweetmeats around it. They then all knelt
before it, bowing down their heads to the ground with their hands
behind their backs, and repeating some prayer. The erection of the
pillar is ascribed to Raja Bhim Mari, one of the five PAndaya bro-

4

xx Archeological Survey Report.

thers to whom most of the pillars in India are now ascribed. I
could not learn anything regarding the title of AZdri. There are two
fine Banian trees close to the pillar, one to the north, and the other
to the south; but there are no traces of buildings of any kind
near it.

XVITI.—Paparaona.

170. The large village of Padaraona, or Padaravana, is situated
12 miles to the west of the river Gandak, 27 miles in a direct line
to the north north-west of Navandgarh Lauriya, and 40 miles to the
north north-east of Gorakhpur. I believe that it is the ancient
Pdwd, as it is situated just 12 miles from Kasia, which agrees with
the position assigned to Pdwd, in the Pali Annals with respect to
Kusinagara. The very name of Pdwd also seems to be only a cor-
ruption of Padara-vana, or Padar-ban, which might easily be short-
ened to Parban, Pdwan, and Paéwé.

171. The remains at Padaraona consist of a large mound covered
with broken brick, and a few statues. The mound is 220 feet
in leneth from west to east, 120 feet in breadth from north to south,
and 14 feet in height at the western end above the fields. The
long trench mentioned by Buchanan still exists on the west side, and
looks as if a wall had been dug out for the sake of the bricks.
About eight years ago a large hole was excavated to the east of the
trench by a Zamindar for the sake of bricks. Two houses were
built of the materials then obtained, but sufficient trace of the walls
still remains to show that they were in straight lines, one of them
being parallel to Buchanan’s trench. From this [infer that there was
a court-yard about 100 feet square, with cells on each side for the
accommodation of monks. In the centre there was probably either a
stupa ora temple. Butif I am right in my identification of Pada-
raona, with Pdwd, the building would almost certainly have been a
stupa, for we know that the people of Pawa, after the cremation
of Buddha’s body, obtained one-eighth of the relics, over which they
erected a stupa. ‘lhe entrance to the court-yard would appear to
have been on the east side, where the mound is now low and thickly
covered with bricks.

172. Ina small roofless brick building at a short distance to the
northward, there are a few old figures. This temple is dedicated to
Hathi Bhawani, or the Elephant Goddess, who is accordingly propi-

Archeological Survey Report. Ixxi

tiated with rude votive figures of elephants in baked clay, of which
numbers lie scattered about the temple, both inside and outside.
The statue called Hathi Bhawani represents a squatted male figure
with a triple umbrella over his head. The figure appears to
be naked, and if so, it must belong to the Jains, and not to the
Buddhists. A drawing of it may be seen in Buchanan’s Hastern
India, Vol. 2, Plate I, Fig. 2. There are also two fragments with
seated Buddhas, and a third with the upper half of a female figure.
On referring to Buchanan I recognized all three fragments as having
belonged to the statue sketched as Fig.2in his Plate. The principal
figure is now gone, but there are a few unimportant fragments not
noticed by Buchanan, and in the village there is the pedestal of a
statue,

173. I made an excavation on the highest part of the mound on
the west side, and to the northward of the Zamindar’s excavation.
Tn this I found bricks with rounded edges such as I had noticed in
the mouldings of the Great Temple at Buddha Gaya, and of the
stupa at Giryek. I found also wedge-shaped bricks of two sizes.
The largest ones being only fragments, I was unable to ascertain
their length, but their breadth was 202 at the end, and J9% inches
at 6 inches distance. As the larger end was rounded, these bricks
must have formed part of some circular building, and most probably
of a solid stupa, which would have been just 30 feet in diameter,
The smaller bricks were 83 inches long, 5% inches broad at the widest
end, and 5 inches at the narrow end, with a thickness of 2} inches.
These may have belonged to a small stupa about 9 feet in diameter,
In my excavation I found also the base of a pillar of coarse grey sand-
stone. It was 15 inches square and 63 inches high, with a few plain
mouldings at the upper edge. The complete excavation of this
mound would not be difficult, and the work might be superintended
by the Civil Authorities of the place, who live close by.

XIX.—Kasta.

174. The village of Kasia is situated at the crossing of two great
thoroughfares, at a distance of 35 miles due east from Gorakhpur.
The name is written Kasia, with the short a in the first syllable; but
I have little doubt that it should be written Awsta with the short zw,
for the place corresponds, both in position and in name, with the
celebrated Ausinagara, or “'Town of the Kusagrass,”” which, as the

Ixxil Archeological Survey Report.

scene of Buddha’s death, was famous throughout India. This sacred
spot was visited both by Fa-Hian and by Hwen Thsang; and the
latter has left a detailed account of the various stupas which still
existed in his time. Most of these have now disappeared, owing
partly to the removal of bricks by the people, but chiefly, I believe,
to the inundations of the Little Gandak River, which at some former
period must have flowed close by the sacred buildings of Kusinagara,
as there are several old channels between the two principal masses of
ruins, which are still occasionally filled during the rainy season.

175. The existing remains have already been described by Buch-
anan, in his Eastern India, Vol. 2, p. 8357, and by Mr. Liston in
Prinsep’s Journal, Vol. 6, p. 477; but their accounts are very brief,
and offer no attempt to identify the ruins with any of the ancient
cities which are known to have existed in this part of the country.
The remains consist of—I1st, a lofty mound of solid brick-work called
Devisthén and Radmdbhdr Bhawdni ; 2nd, an oblong mound called the
Fort of Mathd Kudér, which is covered with broken brick and jungle,
and on which stands a brick stupa much ruined; 3rd, a large statue
of Buddha the ascetic; 4th, a low square mound covered with
broken brick near the village of Anrudhwa; and 5th, a number of
low earthen mounds, like barrows, which are scattered over the plain
to the north and east of the great mound.

176. The mound called Devisthan and Rdmdbhdr Tila is the
ruin of a large ancient stupa of solid brick-work, which is still
49 feet in height above the fields. It is situated somewhat less
than one mile to the south-west of Kasia. On the top, under
a fine old Banian tree, is the shrine of the goddess Devi. There
is neither statue nor building, but only some votive figures in
baked clay, the offerings of the poor people to their favourite
Devi. The goddess is also called Rdmadbhdr Bhawdni, because the
mound is situated on the western bank of the Rdmdbhdr Jhil, a large
natural sheet of water, which forms part of the bed of the Roha
Néla, one of the old channels of the Little Gandak. As the mound is
also called Ramabhar Tila, it is possible that the name may have
originally belonged tothe stupa. 1 attempted to make an excavation
at the top of the mound, but the large interlaced roots of the Banian
tree soon forced me to give up the work. At the south-eastern foot
of the mountd I discovered a portion of a small stupa formed of very

Archeological Survey Report. Ixxiil

large bricks, averaging 5 inches in thickness. These bricks were 17}
' inches in length, and wedge-shaped, being 83 inches broad at one end,
and only 7 inches at the other end. These dimensions would give a
diameter of only 163 feet to the stupa.

177. he large mound called Mdthd-Kudr-ka kot, or the “ Fort
of Matha Kuar,” is 600 feet in length from north-west to south-east»
and from 200 to 300 feet in breadth. At its highest point, which is
30 feet 3 inches in height above the plain, the mound is formed
entirely of solid brick-work, which I believe to be the remains of a
very ancient stupa. On this point stands a solid tower of brick-work,
with sides much ruined, and its top covered with long grass. This
is undoubtedly a stupa, and from its position it must be of much
later date than the ancient mass of brick-work on which it stands.
I conelude that it is a work of middle age, or between A. D. 200 and
600. At present the mass of the tower is only 24 feet thick, but
by clearing away the rubbish, I measured a circumference of 86 feet,
which gives a diameter of nearly 273 feet. The present height of
the lower portion is only 15 feet, and that of the grass-covered top
12 feet 9 inches, the whole being 27 feet 9 inches above the ancient
foundation, and 58 feet above the plain. But as the original height
of this later work was most probably equal to two diameters, or 55
feet, the whole height of the stupa above the plain would have been
85 feet. I drove a horizontal gallery into the centre of the building
at its base without making any discovery. I confess that I did not
expect to find any thing, as I believe that, whatever relics may have
been deposited on this spot, they would have been placed in the
more ancient stupa below, which forms the foundation of the present
monument. There is a fine Pipal tree close to this stupa.

178. The mound called the Fort of Matha Kuar is situated nearly
1,600 yards to the north north-west of the ruined stupa called
Ramabhar. Buchanan give the distance as 400 yards, which 1s most
probably a misprint for 1,400 yards. My distance was measured
from centre to centre; if taken from foot to foot, the distance would
be a little over 1,400 yards. This mound would seem to have been
formed of the ruin of two large buildings and of several small ones. |
The site of one of the larger ones has just been described ; that of
the other is to the north-westward, the summit of the mound at this
point, which is crowned by a large Pipal tree, being 20 feet in height

L

Ixxiv Archeological Survey Report.

above the plain. To the east of the stupa there is also a small
detached mound, 15 feet 8 inches in height. I made an excavation
in the top of this mound, which I abandoned after reaching a depth
of 4 feet 3 inches, as I found only broken bricks mixed with earth.
Both to the north and south of the stupa there are low mounds,
which are probably the remains of small detached towers or other
buildings. The top of the large mound is in most parts thickly
eovered with bricks, but towards the north-west end, where the
elevation is low, there are some rather large spaces quite clear of
bricks, which may be supposed to represent the court-yards, or vacant
spots between the buildings. I noticed many wedge-shaped bricks,
which must have belonged to stupas of small size, besides several
bricks with one half-face bevelled like those in the mouldings of the
Great Temple at Buddha Gaya and of Jarasandha’s Tower at Giryek.
i was unable to trace any straight lines of surrounding walls, and
from the irregular outline of the mound, I incline to believe that it
has been formed by the ruin of a considerable number of independent
buildings, such asa cluster of stupas of all sizes. From the total
absence of statues, I infer that there were probably but few tempies
on this site.

179. The large statue known as that of Mdthd Kuédr, or the
“‘ Dead Prince,” is now lying on the ground, ata distance of J,100
- feet from the brick stupa above deseribed. Quite close beside it, to
the eastward, there is a low square mound which I believe to be the
remains of a temple in which the image was formerly enshrined.
The statue, which is made of the dark blue stone of Gaya, is split
into two pieces from top to bottom, and is otherwise much injured.
The short inscription on its pedestal has been almost worn out by
the villagers in sharpening their tools, but the few letters which
remain are sufficient to show that the statue is not of older date than
the 11th or 12th century. The figure itself is colossal, and represents
Buddha the ascetie seated under the Bodhi tree at Buddha Gaya.
The whole sculpture is 10} feet in height by 42 feet in breadth.
The height of the figure alone is 5 feet 43 inches, the breadth across
the shoulders being 8 feet 8% inches, and across the knees 4& feet
5 inches. A sketch of this sculpture is given in Buchanan’s Hastern
India, Vol. II, Plate 2.

180. Between the Fort of Mdthé Kuiir and the great stupa on

Archeological Survey Report. Ixxv

the Ramdbhdr Jhil, there is alow mound of brick ruins about 500
feet square, which is said to have been a kot or fort, and to which no
name is given, but as it lies close to the village of Anrudhwa on the
north-west, it may be called the Anrudhwa mound. ‘There is nothing
now left to show the nature of the buildings which once stood on
this site; but from the square shape of the ruins, it may be conjec-
tured with some probability that they must be the remains of a
monastery. ‘There are three fine Pipal trees now standing on the
mound.

181. To the north and east of the mound of Matha Kuiar the
plain is covered with a number of low grassy mounds, from 3 to 6
feet in height, and from 12 to 25 feet in diameter. Regarding these
barrows the people have a tradition that gypsies were formerly very
numerous about Kasia, and that these mounds are the tumuli of their
dead. I opened three of them, but without making any discovery.
They were all formed of plain earth, without any trace of bones, or
ashes, or broken bricks. ‘lhe people call them simply mounds, but [
was informed by an old man that he had heard them styled Bhimdwat,
and that ghosts were sometimes seen flitting about them. Ifthe
name of Bhimdwat has any reference to these ghosts, it might perhaps
be translated as the “ fearsome place ;” but J cannot be certain of
the spelling, and it is also possible that the old man may not have
remembered the name correctly. I counted 21 of these mounds, but
as they are generally not more than 3 or 4 feet in height, it is pro-
bable that their actual number is much greater.

182. Ihave already stated that the site of Kasia corresponds,
both in position and in name, with the ancient city of Ausinagara,
which was famous throughout India as the scene of Buddha’s death.
According to Hwen Thsang, Kusinagara was situated at 700 li, or
116 miles to the north-east of Benares. Now Kasta is 112 miles to
the north north-east of Benaresin a direct line. Fa-Hian also places
Kusinagara at a distance of 20 yajanas to the north-west of a place
which was situated only 8 or 10 miles to the north of Vaisali, where the
Lichchhavi Nobles had taken a last farewell of Buddha. At 7 miles
to the yojana, Fa-Hian’s measurement would place Kusinagara at
148 or 150 miles to the north-west of Vaisali. Now the distance by
the route which I marched is exactly 140 miles in a north-west
direction, but as this measurement was taken along the straight lines

L 2

lxxvi Archeological Survey Report.

of road which have been laid out by the British Authorities, the
actual distance by the old winding native roads must certainly have
been somewhat greater, or a8 nearly as possible 150 miles.

183. The only name now associated with the ruins near Kasia is
that of Wdthd Kudr or the “ Dead Prince.” Mr. Liston gives the name
as Mata, but a Brahman of the neighbouring village of Bishanpur,
who wrote the name for me, spelt it as 1 have given it, Mdthd.
As this spelling points to the derivation of the word from Matha, or
Matha, “to kill,” I have translated Mdthd Kudr as the “ Dead Prinee,”
which I refer to Buddha himself after his death, or, in the language
of the Buddhists, after his obtainment of Nirvdna. Hwen Thsang
when speaking of Sakya’s assumption of the mendicant’s dress, calls
him Aumdra Rida, or the “ Royal Prince ;” but although this title was
never, I believe, applied to him by the learned after his assumption
of Buddhahood, it does not seem at all improbable that it may
have remained in common use amongst the people. We know from
Hwen Thsang that on the spot where Buddha died there was a brick
vihdr or temple monastery in which was enshrined a recumbent statue
of Buddha on his death bed, with his head turned to the north.
Now this statue would naturally have been the principal object of
veneration at Kusinagara, and although amongst the learned it might
have been called the “ statue of the Nirvdna’ yet I can readily believe
that its more popular name amongst all classes would have been the
“statue of the Dead Prince.” Iam therefore of opinion that the
name of Mdthaé Kudr, which still clings to the ruins of Kasia, has a di-
rect reference to the death of Buddha, which according to his followers
took place at Kusinagara on the full moon of Vaisakh, 5438, B. C.

184. Owing to the wanderings of the little Gundak river, it is
somewhat difficult to follow Hwen Thsang’s account of the sacred
edifices at Kusinagara. The whole of the existing remains are
situated to the eastward of the Khaniia Ndla, which is only a branch
er inundation channel of the little Gandak river. All the old chan-
nels are called Chawar; the Lambuha Chawar, running between the
two ancient stupas, and the Roha Chawar, or Roha Nala to the east
of the Ramabhar Tila. An intelligent man, whom I met at Padraona,
called the stream to the westward of Kasia the Hirana, but the
people in the villages about the ruin, knew only the Ahaniia Ndla,
and had never heard of the Hirana. Buchanan, however, calls the

Archaological Survey Report. Ixxvii

Hirana a considerable rivulet, which has a course of about 15 miles,
and makes it a feeder of the little Gandak (Hastern India, Vol. 2, p.
316) ; but there is some confusion in his description of this river.
The changes of name would however appear to have been as numerous
as the changes of channel; for in the time of Hwen Thsang this
stream was called the Ajitavati, its more ancient name having been
Hiranyavati, while the present name is Chota Ganduk, and the
eastern inundation branch is called Khaniia. There is now no trace
of Hwen Thsane’s Ajitavati, but the name of Hiranyavati is still
preserved in the Hirana of my Padraona informant.

185. At the time of Hwen Thsang’s visit, the walls of Kusinagara
were in ruins, and the place was almost deserted ; but the brick found-
ations of the old capital occupied a cireuit of about 12 12, that is, of
about two miles. After a long and attentive comparison of all our
available information, I have come to the conclusion that the famous
city of Kusinagara must have occupied the site of the mound and
village of Anrudhwa. The ruined mound, which is about 500 feet
square, I would identify as the site of the palace of the Mallian
Kings, which was in the midst of the city, and to the city itself I
would assign an extent of about 1,000 feet on all sides of the palace,
This would give a square area of 2,500 feet, or nearly half a mile on
each side, with a circuit of 10,000 feet or nearly 2 miles as recorded
by Hwen Thsang. I will now compare the existing remains with
the account of the Chinese pilgrim, and with the details given in the
Pali annals of Ceylon, as translated by Turnour.

186. The spot where Buddha died is fixed by Hwen Thsang at 3
or 4 d2 (rather more than half a mile) to the north-west of the city,
in a forest of sal trees, at a short distance from the western bank of
the Ajitavati river. The distance and direction correspond exactly
with the site of the great mound now called the fort of Mdthd Kuiar.
On this spot was erected a great brick vihdr or temple monastery, in
which was enshrined a statue of Buddha in a recumbent posture as
he appeared when about to enter Mirvdna. This vihdr I would
identify with the extensive mass of ruin marked K in my survey of
the site at the western end of the mound. Beside the vihar there
was-a stupa, 200 feet in height, built by Asoka, and a stone pillar,
on which was recorded the history of the Mirvdna, or death of Buddha.
This stupa I would identify with the foundation or lower part of the

Ixxvill Archeological Survey Report.

brick tower marked A, now standing on the mound, and of which an
account has already been given. Hwen Thsang describes two smaller
stupas, and then a third grand stupa which stood on the spot where
the Brahman Subhadra had entered into Wirvdna.* As the whole of
the buildings above described, as well as three small stupas, were
clustered together around the spot where Buddha was said to have
died, their ruins, in the lapse of ages, would naturally have formed a
single large mound of irregular outline, in all respects similar to
the mass of ruins now called Mdthd-Kuir-ka-kot. I think, there-
fore, that no reasonable doubt can now remain against the identification
of Kasia with the ancient Kusinagara. With regard to the slight
difference of name, I have already stated my belief that the name of
the present village should in all probability be written Kwsta instead
of Kasia, and in favour of this spelling I may add that the name is
variously spelt in the Buddhist books as Kusigrdmaka, Kusindra,
Kusinagara and Kusinagart.

187. After the death of Buddha, the assembled Bhikshus (or
mendicants) were consoled by the venerable Aniruddha, who assured
them that he saw the Devatas looking down from the skies upon
earth, and weeping and bewailing with dishevelled hair and up-lifted
arms. Aniruddha was the first cousin of Buddha, being the second
son of Amitodana, one of the brothers of Suddhodana, the father of
Sakya Sinha. He was one of the ten great disciples of his cousin, and
was renowned for his penetrating sight. Accordingly, on the death of
Buddha, he took the lead of all the disciples present, and conducted
their proceedings. By his directions Ananda made known the death of
Buddha to the Mallian nobles, who at once proceeded to the spot with
garlands of flowers, and numerous cloths, and music. For six days
the body lay in state, attended by the people of Kusinara. On the
seventh day, when eight of the Mallian nobles, who had been selected
to carry the corpse to the place of cremation, attempted to lift it,
they found themselves unable to move it. The amazed nobles, on
enquiring of the venerable Aniruddha the cause of this prodigy,
were informed that their intention of carrying the corpse through
the southern gate to the south of the city, was contrary to the
intention of the Devatas. ‘“ Lord,” said the Mallian nobles, “ what-

* This last I would identify with the high point in the centre of the mound
marked B,

Archeological Survey Report. Ixxix

ever be the intention of the Devatas, be it acceded to.” Accordingly,
the corpse was borne by the eight Mallian chieftains, on a bier formed
of their lances, through the northern gate to the centre of the town,
and then through the eastern gate to the coronation hall of the
Mallians, where the funeral pile had been prepared. Four noble
Mallians then advanced and applied their torches to the funeral pile,
but they were unable to ignite it. Again the bafiled nobles inquired
of Aniruddha the cause of this second prodigy, who informed them
that it was the intention of the Devatas that the corpse should not
be burnt until the arrival of Maha Kasyapa the chief disciple of
Buddha. At that moment Kasyapa was on his way from Pdwéd
to Kusindra. On his arrival he perambulated the pile three times,
and then opening it at the end, he reverentially bowed down his head
at the feet of Buddha. As he rose, the pile spontaneously ignited, and
the corpse of the great teacher was consumed.

188. I have given this long account of the obsequies of Buddha
for the express purpose of showing the very prominent part that was
taken by Aniruddha in all the proceedings. He first consoled the
disciples on the death of Buddha; he then explained the causes of the
miracles, why the Mallian nobles were unable at first to lift the corpse
of Buddha, and afterwards to ignite the funeral pile; and lastly,
according to Hwen Thsang, he ascended to the heavens to inform
Maya Devi, the mother of Buddha, of her son’s death. As the whole
of these acts were performed at Kusinara, we might not unreasonably
suppose that some memorial monument of Aniruddha would have
been erected there. There is, however, no record of such a monument
in Hwen Thsang’s aecount of the sacred edifices at Kusinagara; but
I think it more than probable that the village of Anrudhwa must
have received its name from some former memorial of the far-sighted
Aniruddha, the cousin of Buddha. In Sheet 102 of the Indian Atlas the
name of this village is spelt Aniroodwa which is incorrect, as I had
the name written down for me by a Brahman of the place. The
existence of this name in the immediate vicinity of the ancient
monuments of Kusia must, I think, add considerable weight to all
the other evidence in favour of the identification of Ausfa with the
ancient Kusinagara.

189. There is a discrepancy between the Ceylonese annals and
the accounts of the Chinese pilgrim regarding the site of Buddha’s

lxxx Archeological Survey Report.

cremation. According to the Pali annals above quoted, the corpse
must have been burnt somewhere to the eastward of the city, and
with this account Fa-Hian would seem to agree, for he places the
scene of Buddha’s death to the northward of the town. Hwen
Thsang, however, places the site of the cremation to the northward of
the city, across the river Hiranyavati. I think that these different
accounts may perhaps be reconciled by identifying the stupa of the
cremation with the large brick mound called the Rdmabhar Tila,
which being situated opposite to the north-east corner of the
Anrudhwa mound (or ancient city as I suppose), might have been
loosely described by one party as lying to the north, and by the other
as lying to the east.

190. But the Ramabhar Tila perhaps corresponds more exactly
with the site of another stupa, which is described by Hwen Thsang
as having been built by Asoka near the ancient dwelling of Chanda,
to the north-east of the city gates. This account, however, is some-
what vague, as no particular gate is specified. The existence also of a
second stupa at the south-east foot of the Rdmdbhdr Tila is against this
identification, as only one stupa is mentioned on this site by Hwen
Thsang. I am therefore strongly inclined to identify the Rdmibhar
Tila with the famous cremation stupa ; but if this position should be
considered too far to the eastward to agree with Hwen Thsang’s
description, than the cremation tower must have occupied some posi-
tion to the north of the Anrudhwaé mound, in the very midst of the
ancient channel of the little Gandak river. I confess, however, that
my Own opinion is against this conclusion and in favour of the iden-
tification of the Ramabhar Tila with the cremation stupa.

XX.—KHUKHUNDO.

191. On leaving Kusinagara, Hwen Thsang directed his steps
towards Benares, and after having travelled about 200 Wd (or upwards
of 30 miles) to the south-west, he reached a large town, in which
dwelt a very rich Brahman devoted to Buddhism. If we adhere
closely to the south-west bearing, we must identify this large town
with Rudrapur, an ancient place 80 miles to the south-east of
Gorakhpur, and 28 miles in a direct from Kasia. But as Hwen
Thsang speaks of the Brahman’s hospitality to travellers going and
coming, it would appear certain that the town must have been on the
high road leading from Kasia to Benares. Now the high road can

Archeological Survey Report. Ixxxi

never have passed through Rudrapur, as it would have entailed the
passage of the Rapéi in addition to that of the Ghdgra river. Ihave
had some experience in the laying out of roads, and I feel quite
satisfied that the old high road must have crossed the Ghagra some-
where below its junction with the Rapti. According to the people,
the old passage of the Ghagra was at MJazli, 4 miles to the south of
Kahaon, and 3 miles to the north of Bhagalpur. From Kasia to this
ghat on the Ghagra the road would have passed through the ancient
town of Khukhundo and the large villages of Kahaon and Bhdgal-
pur. Of these three, Khukhundo corresponds best with the descrip-
tion of a large town, and as it is 27 miles from Kasia by the present
straight road, it must have been about 30 miles by the winding native
tracks. I believe, therefore, that it is the large town described by
Hwen Thsang in which a rich Brahman had spent his wealth in
the magnificent decoration of a Buddhist monastery. Khukhundo
is not now a place of any note amongst the Brahmans, but it is visited
by Agarwal Srawaks from Gorakhpur and Patna, who have built a
small Jain temple amongst the ruins. By them its proper name is
said to be Kishkindapura, so called from Kishkinda, » mountain in
the south of India, famous in the history of Rama. Khukhundo
must therefore have been a Brahmanical town.

192. The remains at Khukhundo consist of a few large tanks and
a number of low mounds covered with broken brick and thick jungle.
The ruins which lie scattered about over the plain and amongst the
fields to the south of Khukhundo cover nearly one square mile of
ground. All the larger mounds are square in form, and are beyond
all doubt the ruins of temples. There are a few low oblong heaps
which may possibly be the ruins of long ranges of inferior buildings,
but I think it more probable that they are only the collections of
brick from the fields. very large mound has at least one fine lofty
tree growing on its summit, and to the destructive power of the roots
of these trees I would attribute the overthrow of the Khukhundo
temples. I verified this opinion in one instance, that of mound K,
by an excavation which showed the floor of a temple completely
broken up by the wide spreading roots of a fine tamarind tree.
Another notable instance is that of a temple at Kahaon, which was
standing at the time of Buchanan’s visit, but which is now only a

M

Ixxxil Archeological Survey Report.

low mound of brick ruin. Its overthrow is attributed by all the
villagers to a pipal tree which stands close by the ruin.

193. The mounds of Khukhundo are about 30 in number, but
not more than three of them have any names, the rest being called
simply Deora, or “mounds.” In my Survey of the ruins I have
distinguished them by different letters of the alphabet, and under
these letters I will now describe them.

194. Mound A is 100 feet square at base and 16 feet in height.
There is a Bel tree (Mgle Marmelos) on the top, and a Pékar (Ficus
Venosa) on the west side. Under the Bel tree there is a good
figure of the four-armed Vishnu in sandstone, with a peculiar rayed
halo, which is boldly pierced through the slab.

195. Mound B, which is 50 feet square at base and 10 feet high,
is called Stva-ka-Tila, or Siva’s mound, because there are the found-
ations of a lingam temple on its summit ; the temple was only 8 feet
square, but the /zngam in blue stone is still perfect. There is one
good piece of sculpture representing two seated figures, male and
female, the latter with a child in her arms. A tree rises behind them,
and with its branches forms a canopy over their heads. The figures,
which appear to be entirely naked, with the exception of some
ornaments, are I believe, Mahadeva and his wife Devi, or Bhawani,
represented as the goddess of fecundity, with a child in her arms.
Another sculture represents a four-armed female standing in what
appears to be the prow of a boat. The subordinate figure of Ganesa,
on the upper right hand, shows that the principal figure must be
Parvati, the wife of Siva.

196. Mound C is 120 feet in length, by 110 feet in breadth, and
15 feet in height. On the top there are the ruined walls of a brick
temple, from 4 to 5 feet in height, forming a room of 9 feet square,
with a langam in the centre. To the south-west there is a walled
entrance built of bricks of different sizes, and containing one piece
of moulded brick with a flower ornament. The small size of the room,
the mixture of large and small bricks in the walls, and the unusual
direction of the entrance, all lead me to conclude that this is an
insignificant modern structure, built of bricks of all kinds found on
the surface of the mound. On both sides of the entrance there are
several sculptures in sandstone, of which the principal is a statue of
Ganesa. The other sculptures are a broken statue of Ganesa with

Archeological Survey Report. Ixxxill

his rat; the pedestal of a statue with a foot resting on a bull; a
four-armed female, most probably Parvati, attended by two heavenly
musicians; and a slab containing personifications of the Navagraha,
or “ Nine Planets.”

197. Mound D, which is 100 feet square at base and 15 feet in
height, is crowned with a fine banian tree. Beneath the tree are
collected several pieces and fragments of sculpture, which are partly
Brahmanical and partly Jain. The principal sculpture represents a
four-armed seated male figure, with beard and moustaches, his right
foot resting on a bull. In his four hands he holds a two-pronged
sceptre, a necklace, a ball, and a square pole. This is probably a
figure of Siva. A second statue represents the four-armed Vishnu
standing, and holding in three hands a club, a quoit, and a shell, the
fourth hand being open with a lotus flower marked on the palm. A
third sculpture is the pedestal of a statue with some naked figures on
the face of it, and an antelope in the middle. The antelope is the cog-
nizance of Santanath, the 16th Jain hierarch. A fourth stone is simply
the pedestal of a lingam. The remaining sculptures are two pairs of
apparently naked figures, male and female, seated, the latter with a
child in her arms. ‘These two sculptures are similar to one in the
Siva Temple on mound B, which I have supposed to represent Maha-
deva and his wife Bhawani as the goddess of fecundity. But in
these two sculptures the god has a small naked figure of Buddha fixed
in the front of his head-dress, from which I infer that these figures
probably belong to the Jain religion, while that on mound B certainly
belongs to the Brahmanical Shashti, the goddess of fecundity.

198. Mound E is about 75 feet square and 15 or 16 feet in
height. 1t is now quite bare, the whole surface having been recently
excavated for bricks. Any figures that may have been discovered
were probably removed to mound D, which would account for the
mixture of Saiva and Vaishnava sculptures now lying on its
summit.

199. Mound F is 150 feet in length, by 120 feet in breadth,
and 18 feet in height. On the south slope of the mound there is a
fine statue of the four-armed Vishnu, in blue stone from the quarries
near Gaya.

200. G and H are small low mounds from which bricks have
been recently excavated, They are probably the remains of inferior —
temples. wtp

]xxxiv Archeological Survey Report.

201. Mound J which is 75 feet square at base and 15 feet in
height, has also been recently excavated. I was able to trace the
straight walls of a temple, and in the excavated holes I found large
thick pieces of plaster, which had once covered the walls. There
are no sculptures now lying about this mound, but immediately
to the south of it, and outside a small modern Jain temple, there is
a very fine standing figure of the four-armed Vishnu in blue stone.
The head and arms are gone, but the rest of the sculpture is in good
order. On the left side there are the Fish, the Tortoise, and the
Boar Avatars ; and on the right the Buddha and the Kalki Avatars.
The five missing incarnations must have been lost with the head of
the figure. This fine statue was probably enshrined in a temple now
represented by mound J.

202. The Jain temple is a small square flat roofed brick building
of recent date. There are no Jains now living at Khukhundo, but
the temple is visited by the banias and bankers of Gorakhpur and
Patna. Inside the temple there is a large naked figure in blue stone,
sitting squatted with his hands in his lap. Overhead there is a triple
umbrella, and above that a Dundubhi musician fiying with his drum.
On the pedestal there is a bull with a lion on each side. Now the
bull is the cognizance of Adi Buddha, the first of the 24 Jain pon-
tiffs. The people are therefore mistaken in calling the figure a statue
of Pdrswandth, whose well known symbol is a snake. Outside the
temple, however, there is another naked Jain statue which has two
snakes twisted around its pedestal, and is therefore most probably a
figure of Pdrswandth. It is possible that this may have been the
original figure enshrined in the temple. Another sculpture, in coarse
sandstone, represents the same naked couple, male and female, whom
I have before described. A tree rises behind them, and with its
boughs forms a canopy over their heads. Over all there is a small
squatted figure like a Buddha, but naked. The male figure in this
sculpture has a lotus in his right hand.

208. Mound K, which is crowned with a fine tamarind tree, is
the largest mass of ruin at Khukhundo. It is 120 feet square at
base and J6 feet in height. At 10 feet above the ground level I
made an excavation at a point on the western edge, where I observed
something like a piece of terraced flooring. My excavation uncovered
a portion of terraced floor 9 feet square, but completely broken up

Archeological Survey Report. Ixxxv

by the wide-spreading roots of the tamarind tree, which have pierced
the mound in all directicns. I found several ornamental bricks with
boldly cut flowers and leaves 14 inch in depth. ‘Two of these bricks,
with opposite curves forming an ogee, had evidently belonged to a
cornice. The outer faces of all the bricks are ground smooth, and all
the edges are so sharp and clean that the joints between the courses
of bricks must have been very fine indeed. As I saw no fragments
of figures about this mound, I think it is very probable that the
statue belonging to it may be one of those now standing outside the
Jain temple.

204. Mound N is low and clear of jungle, having been
excavated for bricks within the last few years. It is 45 feet
square at base, but only 8 feet high. From its being both
low and clear I thought it favourable for excavation. I dug
a circular hole of about 8 feet diameter in the top of the mound,
and near the middle, at a depth of only 1 foot, I came upon a stone
Yoni, or receptacle for a lingam, fixed in its original position, with
the spout end turned towards the north. Further excavation showed
that the floor had been broken up, but the marks of the original floor
level were quite distinct on the centre stone. As there were no
traces of any figures, I gave up the excavation, which had already
been sufficient to determine that the mound N is the ruin of a linga
temple, dedicated to the god Mahadeva.

205. Mound 8 is 100 feet in length, by 60 feet in breadth, and 12
feet in height towards its western end. The top is crowned with two
fine Stris trees, under which there is a life-size standing figure in
sandstone. The nose and forehead have been lost by a split of the
stone, which must have been as old as the figure itself, for there are
two holes in the split face which still retain bits of the metal clamps
that were used in repairing the statue. The figure has apparently
had four arms, and is called Jug-bhira or Jug-hira, “the Champion of
the Age,” a title which might be applied appropriately to Vira, or
Mahavira, the last of the 24 Jain hierarchs and the pontiff of the
present age.

206. Mound Z is a long low mass of ruin to the south-west of
Khukhundo, half hidden amidst bamboos. I found a recent excavation
at the western end of the mound, from which the bricks could not
have been removed above a few days, as the sides of the excavated

Ixxxvi Archeological Survey Report.

hole still preserved the shape of the walls exactly. In form the
building was an octagon of 14 feet across, with projections on the
four sides facing the cardinal points. On the north-east side a por-
tion of solid brick-work still remained, but not of sufficient thickness
to show whether the building had been solid or hollow. As far as
my experience goes, the only buildings of this shape are Buddhist
stupas as at Dhamnar and Kholvi in Malwa, at Baragaon (or Nalanda)
in Bihar, and throughout Pegu and Burmah. In all instances the
four projecting sides form niches for statues of the previous Buddhas.
In the gigantic Shwe-Dagon stupa at Rangoon these niches are
expanded into distinct temples enshrining colossal figures. I incline
therefore to conclude that the building recently excavated in mound
Z was a Buddhist stupa. But if Brahmanical temples of this form
have ever been built, I should certainly prefer to consider mound Z
as the ruin of another orthodox temple, and to add one more to the
long list of Brahmanical remains at Khukhundo.

207. With the exception of Baragaon (the ancient Ndlanda), I
have seen no place where the ruins offer such a promise of valuable
discovery as at Khukhundo. The mounds are all low, and as they
appear to be the ruins of temples, the work of excavation would be
comparatively easy. I think that it would be sufficient to remove the
top of each mound down to the level of the floor of the building,
clearing away the rubbish entirely, but leaving the walls standing to
show the plan of the building. Amongst the rubbish we might
expect to find both statues and inscriptions, and perhaps other objects,
all of which would help to throw light on the rise and progress of
modern Brahmanism, more particularly during the long period of its
struggles with expiring Buddhism.

XXJI.—Kanaon.

208. The village of Kahaon is situated eight miles to the south
of Khukhundo, and 46 miles to the south-east of Gorakhpur in a
direct line. To the north of the village there is a stone pillar, and
also some other remains, which have been described by Dr. Buchanan
(Hastern India, Vol. 2, p. 366), and by Mr. Liston (Prinsep’s Journal,
Vol. 7, p. 83.) Dr, Buchanan calls the village Kangho, but the name
is written Kahaon, or Kahdwan, by the people of the place, and I
can only surmise that Buchanan’s Aangho may have been originally
written Kanghon, and that the final nasal has been omitted by mistake,

Archeological Survey Report. Ixxxvii

either in copying or in printing. In the inscription on the pillar the
village would seem to be called Kakubharati ; and from some com-
pound of Kakubha, such as Kakubhdwan, the name of Kahdwan
would be naturally derived.

209. The remains at AKahaon consist of an inscribed stone pillar,
an old well, two ruined temples, and several tanks. The whole of
these, together with the village itself, are situated on a low but
extensive mound of brick ruin. Although the mound is of rather
irregular outline on the east side, it may be best described as a square
of nearly 500 yards. The village occupies the south-western quarter
of the square, and contains some fine old wells built of very large
bricks, which are a sure sign of antiquity. The tanks, which would
seem to have been connected with the old buildings, are all called
gar, the meaning of which I was unable to ascertain, but which as
applied to water must certainly be derived from the Sanskrit giz, to
wet. These tanks are, 1st, the purena-gar, a dirty pond immediately
to the north of the village ; 2nd, the Karnahi-gar, a small deep pond
at the north-west angle of the ruins; 3rd, the Jhakrahi-gar, another
small pond at the north-east angle, which is also called Sophd-gar ;
and 4th, a large sheet of water to the east of the village called
Askdmini, or Akdskdmini-gar, This is the tank which Buchanan
ealls karnaht, a misprint probably for Admini. From the size and
appearance of the Askdminz tank I conclude that from it must have
been excavated all the bricks and earth for the construction of the
temples and village of Kahaon.

210. The Kahaon pillar is a single block of coarse grey sandstone,
24 feet 3 inches in height from the ground to the metal spike on
the top. The existence of this spike shows that the pillar has
once been crowned by a pinnacle of some kind, perhaps by a statue
of a lion, or of some other animal rampant ; but whatever the pinnacle
may have been, its height could not have exceeded 23 or 3 feet.
The total height of the column therefore must have been about 27
feet. The lower part of the shaft, to a height of 44 feet, is a square
of 1 foot 10 inches; above this, for a height of 6 feet 3 inches, it is
octagonal; then sixteen-sided for a height of 5 feet 103 inches; and
then circular for a height of 2 feet 1} inch. Above this, for a height
of 9 inches, the pillar becomes square with a side of 18 inches, and
then circular again for a height of 43 inches, making the total height

Ixxxvill Archeological Survey Report.

of the shaft 19 feet 103 inches. The height of the capital, in its
present incomplete state, is 4 feet 43 inches. The lower portion,
which is 23 feet high, is bell-shaped, with circular bands of mould-
ing both above and below. The bell itself is reeded, after the fashion
of the Asoka pillars. Above this the capital is square, with a small
niche on each side holding a naked standing figure. The square top
slopes backward on all sides, and is surmounted by a low circular
band, in which is fixed the metal spike already described.

211. On the Western face of the square base there is a niche
holding a naked standing figure, with very long arms reaching to
his knees. Behind there is a large snake folded in horizontal coils,
one above the other, and with its seven heads forming a canopy
over the idol. Two small figures, male and female, are kneeling at the
feet, and looking up to the idol with offerings in their hands.

212. On the three northern faces of the octagonal portion of the
pillar, there is an inscription of 12 lines in the Gupta characters of
the Allahabad pillar. There is a good copy of this inscription in
Buchanan’s Eastern India, Vol. 2, Plate V. and another and better
copy in Prinsep’s Journal, Vol. 7, Plate I. In the translation given
by James Prinsep, the date was read as being 133 years after the
decease of Skanda Gupta, instead of in the year 133, after the death
of Skanda. The true number of the year is 141, as pointed out by
Professor Fitz-Edward Hall,but the epoch or era in which the years are
reckoned is doubtful. Professor Hall, on the authority of Bapu Deva
Sdstri, the learned astronomer of the Benares College, prefers the
era of Vikramaditya, but I am inclined to adopt that of Saka; and
this era, I believe, is also preferred by Mr. Thomas. The difference
between the two is 1385 years. If dated in the Vikrama era the
pillar must have been erected in 141—57=84 A. D. ; but if dated
in the Saka era, the period of its erection will be 141+78=219
A. D. The latter date I think accords best with the known epoch
of the overthrow of the Gupta Dynasty in A. D. 319.

213. The purport of the inscription as translated by Pzinsep is
simply to record the dedication of five images of Indra by one Madra,
who calls himself “the constant and friendly patron of Brahmans,
Gurus, and Yatis,” or “ Brahmans, religious teachers, and sages,” or
ascetics who have subdued their passions. In the present day the
term Yati is, I believe, applied only to a Jain priest ; and although

Archeological Survey Report. Ixxxix

at first the mention of Brahmans would seem to preclude any reference
to the Jain religion, yet the Yatis themselves are usually, if not
always, Brahmans, aud the naked figures with crisp curled hair, on
- the base and capital of the pillar, must belong either to the Jains, or
to the later Taéntrika Buddhists. I founda similar naked standing
figure, canopied by a seven-headea snake, inside the great mound of
old Rajagriha. I am inclined therefore to consider the figure as that
of Buddha himself, who is fabled to have been protected under a
canopy formed by the seven-headed snake Muchalinda, who inhabited
the holy tank at Buddha Gaya.

214. Both of the temples described by Buchanan (Eastern India,
Vol. 2, p. 367) are now in ruins; and as they are not mentioned by
Mr. Liston in 1837, they must have fallen before his visit. Buchanan
describes them as pyramidal in form, with two apartments, one over
the other, as in the great temple at Buddha Gaya. Inside he found
only two fragments of images, of which one showed the feet of a
standing figure, with a female votary seated at one side. I made an
excavation in the northern ruin, and found that the temple had con-
sisted of a room, 9 feet square, with walls only 1 foot 9 inches in
thickness. The building therefore was only 12 feet 6 inches square
on the outside. In the slight sketch of this temple, given by
Buchanan, no dimensions are noted, but the height of the building
is twice and a half its width, or about 30 feet, according to the
measurement obtained by my excavation. On the ruin of the southern
temple, I found a naked standing figure of life-size, similar to that on
the base of the pillar.

215. Immediately to the north of the pillar, and on the highest
point of the mound, there are traces of the brick walls of some
buildings ; and to the south-east, there is an old well which has been
lately filled up. Buchanan describes the pillar as having originally
“stood in a small quadrangular area, surrounded by a brick wall, and
probably by some small chambers.” I presume that the pillar must
have been placed opposite the entrance of the temple, in which the
Panchendra or five images of Indra were enshrined. It is probable
that there were several temples and other buildings crowded around
the pillar, otherwise it will be difficult to account for the great size
of the mound, which, though not more than 6 feet in height above
the fields, extends from west to east upwards of 1,200 feet, with an
average breadth of 400 feet. N

XC Archeological Survey Report.

XXIJ.—Haruiya-pDan.

216. Twelve miles to the east of Deogaon, and nearly midway
between Azimgarh and Benares, there is an old dry tank, called
Hathiya-dah, or the “ Elephants’ Tank,” with an ‘inscribed pillar -
standing in the middle of it. The pillar itself is called Hathiya-dah-
ka-ldt. The name is derived from a large stone elephant, 5 feet 6
inches in length and 4 feet 10 inches in height, which stands to the
north-west of the pillar, at a distance of 138 feet. Both the pillar
and the elephant are formed of a coarse grey sandstone, and they
have accordingly suffered from exposure to the weather and are now
much worn. The shaft of the pillar is a single block, 12 feet 9 inches
in height and 1 foot 54 inches in diameter, both at base and top.
Originally it must have been several feet higher, but the bed of the
tank has gradually silted up, and in the month of March bore a fine
crop of wheat. The capital is a flat circular slab, slightly rounded on
the upper edge, and quite plain. In fact the pillar is a mere cylindrical
block intended apparently for the sole purpose of exhibiting the
inscription. 'To the west of the pillar there is a low mound of brick
ruins, 170 feet in length from north to south, and 25 feet broad. It
is called Siwari-ka-Tila, or “ Siwari’s Mound ;” but the people have
no tradition about it, and do not know what is the meaning of the
name. Most probably it has some reference to a temple of Siva,
which may have stood there in former days. The villages nearest to
the pillar are Singhpura to the north, Nowa Rasiya to the east, Pakari
to the south-east, Debhao to the south-west.

217. The pillar is said by the people to have been set up by Raja
Gajpat Singh in Samvat 207, or A. D. 150; but both name and date
are wrong. Gajapati, or “Lord of Elephants,” is only one of the
titles of the king in whose reign the pillar was erected, and the date
is Samvat 1207, or A. D. 1150. This inscription occupies 10 lines
but as the letters are large and coarsely cut, it is not a long one. It
records the excavation of the tank by several Thdkurs, of whom the
chief is Bellan Thakur, the treasurer (Bhandagarika) of Gosalla Devi,
the Queen (Mahara) of Raja Govinda Chandra Deva, the Lord of
Horses, Lord of Elephants, and Lord of Men, on Thursday the 5th
of the waning moon of Ashdrh, in Samvat 1207. The record is not
of much value, but it is of later date by 25 years than any inscription
hitherto found of the Rahtor Prince Govinda Chandra Deva of Kanouj,

Archeological Survey Report. xci

XXIII.—Buirart.

218. The large village of Bhitari is situated on the left bank of the
Gdngi Nadi, nearly midway between Benares and Ghazipur, and five
miles to the north north-east of Sacdpur. The Gangiriver, which sur-
rounds the village on three sides, is crossed by an old stone bridge of
early Muhammedan style. The original bridge consisted of only two
small arches, to which two others have since been added at different
times. Bhitari has once been a town of some consequence, and it is still
a considerable village, with a great number of brick-houses. Both in
speaking and in writing its name is usually coupled with that of another
place in its vicinity, as Saidpur Bhitari. It is thus designated in the
Ayin Akbari, but the name has been strangely misread by Gladwin as
Syedpoor Nemedy (Vol. 2, page 202), a mistake that must be due to
the faulty nature of the Persian character in which his original was
written, as its alphabet is utterly unsuited for the correct record of
proper names.

219. The remains at Bhitari consist of several ruined brick
mounds, an inscribed stone pillar, and a few pieces of sculpture.
Some of the mounds appear to be mere heaps of broken stone and
brick, the gatherings from the fields after each season’s ploughing.
The larger mounds, which run parallel to each other from the bridge
towards the village, seem to me to be only the ruins of houses that
once formed the two sides of a street. The remaining mounds, which
are of square form and isolated, are at present covered with Musalman
tombs ; but I have little doubt that all of them were originally either
temples or other Hindu buildings. That one of these mounds be-
longed originally to the Hindus, we have an undoubted proof in the
existence of the inscribed stone pillar, which stands partially buried
in the rubbish of its eastern slope, and in the discovery at the foot of
the pillar of an old brick inscribed with the name of Srt Kumdra
Gupta. The early occupation of the place by the Hindus is further
proved by the discovery of several Hindu statues and lingams in the
rubbish above the mounds, and by the finding of numerous bricks
inscribed with Kwmdra Gupta’s name in the fields. I obtained further
proof of the same by the purchase on the spot of three Indo Sassanian
coins of base silver, which probably date the 8th or 9th century, and
of one small round copper coin with an elephant on the obverse, and
a peculiar symbol, supposed to be a Chaitya, on the reverse, which

N 2

XCH Archeological Survey Report.

cannot, in my opinion, be of later date than the invasion of Alexander
the Great.

220. The Bhitari pillar is a single block of reddish sandstone,
apparently from one of the Chunar quarries. The shaft of the pillar
is circular, with a diameter of 2 feet 44 inches and a height of 15
feet 5 inches. The base is square, but its height is rather uncertain,
The upper portion, on which the inscription is cut, has been smoothed,
but the lower portion, as far as my excavation went, still bears the
marks of the chisel, although not every deep. My excavation was
carried down to the level of the adjoining fields, a depth of 6 feet 9
inches below the top of the base, without finding any trace of a
pedestal ; and as itis most probable that the inscription was placed
on a level with the eye, I would fix the height of the original base
at about 6 feet, thus giving it an elevation of only 9 inches above the
level of the country. The capital is 3 feet 2 inches in height, bell-
shaped and reeded like the capitals of the Asoka pillars. A large
portion of the capital is broken off on the western side, thus exposing
a deep narrow socket, which could only have helda metalspike. The
upper portion of the shaft also is split to a depth of about 2 feet.
The people say that the pillar was struck by lightning many years
ago. It certainly was in the same state when I first saw it in
ganuary 1836, and I know of only one reason to make me doubt the
accuracy of the people’s statement, namely, that both the iron pillar at
Delhi and the stone pillar at Navandgarh Lauriya have been wantonly
injured by cannon shot. If the capital of the Bhitari pillar had been ~
surmounted by a statue of any kind, as it most probably was when
the Muhammedans first settled there, I think that the breaking of
the capital may be attributed to their destructive bigotry with quite
as much probability as to lightning. I found a portion of the broken
capital in my excavation of the foot of the pillar.

221. The inscription, which is cut on the eastern side of the base,
consists of 19 lines of well shaped characters of the early Gupta
period. Unfortunately this face is much weather-worn, and the stone
has also peeled off in several places, so that the inscription is now
in even a worse condition than when I first saw it in January 1836.
The copy which I then made by eye I compared letter by letter with
the original inscription on the spot, and although I found several
errors in different parts of the inscription, yet the only serious one is

Archaeological Survey Report. x¢Cili

an omission of five letters in the 15th line. I made also an impres-
sion of the inscription over which I pencilled all the letters as they
appeared to the eye. This is indeed the only successful method of
copying a weather-worn inscription, for the edges of the letters being
very much rounded, an impression gives only a number of confused
and shapeless spots, although many of the letters being deeply cut are
distinctly legible, and may easily be copied by the eye. The value
of an impression thus pencilled over is very great, as it ensures
accuracy in the number of letters, and thus most effectually prevents
all errors, both of insertion and omission. ‘The copy which I have
thus made is, I believe, as perfect as it is possible to obtain now,
considering the weather-worn state of the letters.

222. From the copy which I prepared in January 1836, a translation
was made by Dr. Mill, which was published in Prinsep’s Journal
for January 1837. My re-examination of the inscription has corrected
some of Dr. Mill’s proposed readings, while it has confirmed many of
them, a few being still doubtful owing to the abraded state of the
letters. As translated by Dr. Mill, the inscription refers chiefly to
the reign of Skanda Gupta, closing with his death, and the accession
of his infant son. The object of the inscription was to record the
erection of a sacred image, the name of which Dr. Mill was unable
to read, but which may possibly be recovered when my new copy is
retranslated by some competent scholar. In my remarks on the lower
inscription on the Bihar pillar, 1 have already noticed that all the
remaining part of the upper portion of it, which contains the genea-
logy, is letter for letter identical with the first part of the Bhitari,
record, and I repeat the notice here for the purpose of adding that
by a comparison of the two inscriptions, every letter of the upper
part of both, or about one-third of the whole, may be restored with-
out chance of error.

223. The sculptures now to be seen at Bhitari are very few, but
they are sufficient to show the former existence of several large
stone temples. In the village there is a colossal figure of Glanesa,
and a broken bas-relief of the Wavagraha, or “ Nine planets.” The
colossal statue must almost certainly have been the principal figure
enshrined in a temple dedicated to Ganesa. There is also a large
slab with a half-size two-armed female figure, attended by another
female figure holding an umbrella over her, both in very high relief.

Xclv Archeological Survey Report.

The figures in this sculpture are in the same style and in the same
attitudes as those of the similar group of the Raja and his umbrella
attendant on the gold coins of the Gupta Princes. This sculpture,
I believe, represents a queen on her way to worship at the temple.
The group is a favourite one with Hindu artists, and as far as my
observation goes, it is never used singly, but always in pairs, one on
each side of the door-way of a temple. The age of this sculpture
I am inclined to fix as early as the time of the Gupta kings, partly
on account of the similarity of style to that of their gold coins,
partly also because the pillar belongs to one of that family, but
chiefly because the bricks found in various parts of the ruins are
stamped with the name of Siz Kumdra Gupta.

224. If Lam right in attributing the sculptures to the time of
the Gupta dynasty, or from A. D. 100 to 300, then the Bhitari
ruins will be amongst the oldest Brahmanical remains now known
to us. For this reason alone I would strongly advocate the excava-
tion of all the isolated mounds, and more particularly of the pillar

mound, in which we might expect to find not only all the fragments
of the original capital, but also many sculptures and other objects
belonging to the temple in front of which the pillar was erected. I
have already stated that the bridge over the Gangi river is built
entirely of stones taken from the ancient buildings of Bhitari. Many
of these stones are squared, and ornamented with flowers and various
mouldings, and on one of them I observed the syllable yz. This is a
mere mason’s mark, but as the shape of the letter is the same as that
of the Gupta alphabet, the discovery of this single character tends
strongly to confirm the accuracy of the date which I have already
assigned to the Bhitari ruins on other grounds. As Bhitari is in the
_Jdghir of the enlightened Raja Deo Narayan Singh, every facility
for excavation would of course be obtained on application to him.

XXIV.—-Brenares, SARNATH.

225. Benares is celebrated amongst the Buddhists as the scene
where their great teacher first expounded his doctrine, or, as they
metaphorically express it, where he first began to “turn the wheel of
the law.” This is one of the four great events in the life of Buddha,
and accordingly it forms one of the most common subjects of Buddhist
sculpture. In the great Buddhist establishment near Benares,
which is described by Hwen Thsang, the principal statue enshrined

Archeological Survey Report. xcVv

in a temple 200 feet in height was a copper figure of Buddha
represented in the act of “turning the wheel of the law.” I found
numerous statues of Buddha in the same attitude during my explo-
rations about Sarnath in 1835-36, and Major Kittoe discovered
several more in 1851-52. I found also many other figures, but those
of Buddha the “teacher” were the most numerous. The inscribed
pedestal, found by Dewan Jagat Singh in 1794, also belonged to a
statue of Buddha the teacher. Similarly at Buddha Gaya, where
Sakya Sinha sat for six years meditating under the Bodhi tree, the
favourite statue is that of Buddha the ascetic.

226. The city of. Benares is situated on the left bank of the
Ganges, between the Barnd Nadi on the north-east, and the Asi
Ndla on the south-west. The Barnd or Varand is a considerable
rivulet, which rises to the north of Allahabad, and has a course of
about 100 miles. The As? is a mere brook of no length, and owing
to its insignificant size, it does not appear in any of our most detailed
maps. It is not entered in the Indian Atlas, Sheet No. 88, which
is on the scale of 4 miles to the inch, nor even in the larger litho-
graphed map of the district of Benares on the double scale of 2 miles
to the inch. This omission has led the learned French Academician

M. Vivien de Saint Martin to doubt the existence of the Asi as a
- tributary of the Ganges, and he conjectures that it may be only a
branch of the Barnd, and that the joint stream called the Vardnasi
may have communicated its name tothe city. The Ast Nala will
however be found, as I have described it, in James Prinsep’s map of
the city of Benares, published by Hullmandel, as well as in the
small map which I have prepared to illustrate this account of the
remains at Benares. The position of the As? is also accurately
described by H. H. Wilson in his Sanskrit dictionary, under the
word Vardnasi. I may add that the road from Benares to Ramnagar
crosses the Asz just outside the city, and only a short distance from
its confluence with the river. The points of junction of both
streams with the Ganges are considered particularly holy, and
accordingly temples have been erected both at Barnd Sangam below
the city, and at Ast Sangam above the city. From the joint names
of these two streams, which bound the city to the north and south,
the Brahmans derive Vardnast or Vardnasi, which is said to be the
Sanskrit form of the name of Benares. But the more usual deriva-

xeV1 Archeological Survey Report.

tion amongst the common people is from Raja Banar, who is said
to have rebuilt the city about 800 years ago,

227. The Buddhist remains of Benares are situated nearly due
north, and about 33 miles distant from the outskirts of the city at
a place popularly known by the name of Sdrndth. This name, which
is usually applied to the great Buddhist tower, or stupa, belongs
properly to a small Brahmanical temple on the western bank of the
lake, while the great tower itself is called Dhamek. An annual fair
is held close to the temple of Sarnath, and there is an indigo
factory only 200 yards to the north of it. The name of Sarnath
was accordingly well known both to the natives and to the English,
and when the neighbouring ruins first attracted attention, they were
always referred to by that name. ‘The earliest mention of them is
by Jonathan Duncan in 1794, in his account of the discovery of two
urns by Babu Jagat Singh “in the vicinity of a temple called
Sarnath.” It is possible that Duncan here refers to the Brahmanical
“temple;” but in the subsequent notices by Wilford and James
Prinsep, both of whom had resided for many years at Benares, the
name of Sarnath is always applied to the great tower. The same
name is given to the tower in an engraving which was published
in 1834 in Captain Elliot’s Views in India, published by Fisher
and Co. :

228. Sdrndth means simply the “ Best Lord,” which title is here
applied to the god Mahadeva, whose symbol, the lingam, is enshrined
in the small temple on the bank of the lake. I believe, however, that
the name is only an abbreviation of Séranggandtha, or the “ Lord of
Deer,” which would also be an appropriate epithet for Mahadeva, who
is frequently represented as holding a deer in his left hand. As the
lake in front of the temple is still occasionally called “ Sdrang Tal,”
my conjecture that the true name was Sdrangga Ndth seems a very
probable one ; but I would refer the epithet to Buddha himself, who
in a former existence was fabled to have roamed the woods in this
very spot as the king of a herd of deer. But this spot was specially
esteemed by the Buddhists on account of a curious story which is
given at some length by Hwen Thsang, and which, as illustrative of
the Buddhist tenderness for life, I will now relate—“ The Raja of
Benares, who was fond of sport, had slaughtered so many deer that
the king of the deer remonstrated with him, and offered to furnish

Archeological Survey Report. XCV1

him with one deer daily throughout the year, if he would give up
slaughtering them for sport. The Raja consented. After some time,
when it came to the turn of a hind, big with young, to be presented
to the Raja, she objected that, although it might be her turn to die,
yet the turn of her little one could not yet havearrived. Theking of
the deer (that is, Buddha), struck with compassion, offered him-
self to the Raja in place of the hind. On hearing the story the Raja
exclaimed, “I am but a deer in the form of a man, but you are aman
in the form of a deer.” He at once gave up his claim to the daily
gift, and made over the park for the perpetual use of the deer, on
which account it was called the ‘Deer Park.’ (MMrigaddva.)” It is
curious to learn that a rama, or antelope preserve, still exists in the
neighbourhood of Sdrndth.

229. The principal remains at Sarnath are the following :-—

Ist. The great stone tower called Dhamek ; 2nd, the remains of
a large brick tower opened by Jagat Singh; 3rd, the traces of build-
ings excavated by myself in 1835-36; 4th, the remains of build-
ings excavated by Major Kittoe in 1851-52; and Sth, a high
mound of solid brick-work, crowned with an octagonal brick towers
called Chaukandt, and situated at rather less than half a mile from
the great tower of Dhamek. With the simple exception of Chawkandz,
the whole of these remains are situated on an extensive mound of
brick and stone ruins, about half a mile long, and nearly a quarter
of a mile broad. On the north and east there are three large sheets |
of water which communicate with one another. To the east lies the
Narokar, or Sdrang Tal, which is 3,000 feet long and 1000 feet broad.
On the north-east this communicates with the Chandokar or Chandra
Fadl, which is of about the same size, but of less regular shape. On
the north lies the Muya Tél, or “ New Tank,” which is upwards
of half a mile in length, but little more than 300 feet in width.

230. At the north-eastern end of the mass of ruin is situated
the village of Bardhi, which, as I infer from the spelling, must have
been named after Vajra Vardht,a goddess of the later Buddhists.
To the west, beyond the bend of the Naya Tal, hes Guronpur, or
the “ Village of Teachers,” which in its day was probably inhabited
by Buddhist Gurus. The ALrigaddva, or “ Deer Park,” is represented
by a fine wood, which still covers an area of about half a mile, and
extends from the great tower of Dhamek on the north to the

O

Xcvill Archeological Survey Report.

Chaukandi mound on the south. To the south-west of the great
tower the Jains have erected a modern temple of Pérswandth. The
temple is white-washed and surrounded by a wall enclosing an area
167 feet square. Since I first surveyed these ruins in 1835, a second
or outer enclosure has been added on the east side, the walls of
which run right up to the great tower, and cause much inconvenience
to visitors, by obstructing their free passage round the building,

231. The most remarkable of the Sarnath Monuments is the
great tower called Dhamek. In his hand-book of architecture (Vol.
I. p. 15) Mr. Fergusson has stated that “ this building was opened by
Major Cunningham, wader Mr. Prinsep’s auspices ;” but this state-
ment is incorrect, as the operations were begun by myself before any
communication was made to James Prinsep, and were afterwards
continued entirely under my own guidance. The cost of opening the
tower was shared between James Prinsep, Captain Thoresby, Major
Grant, and myself, but the work had been commenced “ under my
own auspices,” and was not suggested to me by James Prinsep. The
excavation was begun in December 1834, and closed in January 1836,
at a cost of Rs. 517-3-10. But before detailing these operations I
will describe the tower itself.

232. The Buddhist stupa called Dhamek is a solid round tower,
93 feet in diameter at base, and 110 feet in height above the surround-
ing ruins, but 128 feet above the general level of the country. The
foundation or basement, which is made of very large bricks, has a
depth of 28 feet below the level of the ruins, but is sunk only 10 feet
below the surface of the country. The lower part of the tower, to a
height of 43 feet, is built entirely of stone from one of the Chunar
quarries, and with the exception oftthe upper five courses, the whole of
this part of the building is a solid mass of stone, and each stone, even
in the very heart of the mass,is secured to its neighbours by iron cramps,
The upper part of the tower is built entirely of large bricks, but as the
outer facing has long ago disappeared, there is nothing now left to
show whether it was formerly cased with stone, or only plastered
over and coloured to imitate the stone-work of the lower portion. I
infer, however, that it was plastered, because the existing stone-work
terminates with the same course all round the building, a length of
292 feet. Had the upper part been cased with stone, it is scarcely
possible that the whole should have disappeared so completely that

Archeological Survey Report. Xc1x

not even a single block out of so many thousands should now remain
in its original position. In one part I observed some projecting bricks
which appeared very like the remains of a moulding at the base of
the dome. On the top I found a small brick cap, 8 feet in diameter
and only 4 feet high. From its size I infer that this was the ruin of
the base of a small pinnacle, about 10 feet square, which most pro-
bably once supported astone umbrella. I infer this because the figures
of Buddha the Teacher are usually represented as seated under an
umbrella.

233. The lower part of the monument has eight projecting faces,
each 21 feet 6 inches in width, with intervals of 15 feet between them.
In each of the faces, at a height of 24 feet above the ground, there
is a semi-circular headed niche, 54 feet in width, and the same in
height. In each of the niches there is a pedestal, 1 foot in height, and
slightly hollowed on the top to receive the base of a statue; but the
statues themselves have long ago disappeared, and I did not find
even the fragment of one in my excavation at the base of the monument.
There can be little doubt, however, that all the eight statues represent-
ed Buddha the preacher, in the usual form, with his hands raised before
his breast, and the thumb and forefinger of the right hand placed on
the little finger of the left hand for the purpose of enforcing his
argument. Judging by the dimensions of the niches, the statues
must have been of life-size.

234. From the level of the base of the niches the eight projecting
faces lessen in width to 5 feet at the top; but the diminution is not
uniform, as it begins gradually at first, and increases as it approaches
the top. The outline of the slope may have been possibly intended
for a curve, but it looks much more like three sides of a large polygon.
Around the niches seven of the faces are more or less richly decorated
with a profusion of flowing foliage. The carving on some of the
faces has been completed, but on others it is little more than half
finished, while the south face is altogether plain. On the unfinished
faces portions of the unexecuted ornamentation may be seen traced
in outline by the chisel, which proves that in ancient times the
Hindus followed the same practice as at present, of adding the carving
after the wall was built.

235. On the western face the same ornamentation of flowing
foliage is continued below the niche, and in the midst of it there is a

0 2

€ Archeological Survey Report.

small plain tablet, which can only have been intended for a very short
inscription, such perhaps as the name of the building. A triple band
of ornament, nearly 9 feet in depth below the niches, encircles all the
rest of the building, both faces and recesses. The middle band,
which is the broadest, is formed entirely of various geometrical figures,
the main lines being deeply cut, and the intervening spaces being
filled with various ornaments, On some of the faces where the spaces
between the deeply cut lines of the ruling figures are left plain, I
infer that the work is unfinished. The upper band cf ornamentation,
which is the narrowest, is generally a scroll of the lotus plant with
leaves and buds only, while the lower band, which is also a lotus scroll,
contains the full blown flowers as well as the buds. 'The lotus flower
is represented full to the front on all the sides except the south south-
west, where it is shown in a side view with the Chakwa or Brahmani
goose seated upon it. This indeed is the only side on which any
animal representations are given, which is the more remarkable as it is
‘one of the recesses and not one of the projecting faces. In the middle
of the ornament there is a human figure seated on a lotus flower,
and holding two branches of the lotus in his hands. On each side of
him there are three lotus flowers, of which the four nearer ones sup-
port pairs of Brahmani geese, while the two farther ones carry only
single birds. Over the nearest pair of geese, on the right hand of
the figure, there is a frog. The attitudes of the birds are all good,
and even that of the human figure is easy although formal. The
lotus scroll with its flowing lines of graceful stalk, mingled with
tender buds and full blown flowers, and delicate leaves is very rich
and very beautiful. Below the ornamental borders there are three
plain projecting bands.

236. I employed two expert masons for twelve months in making
full-size drawings of the whole of these bands of ornament. Two
plates of the east south-east and south south-west sides were after-
wards engraved in Calcutta under my own guidance, for publication
by James Prinsep in the Asiatic Researches ; but his lamented illness
put a sudden stop to the work, as his successor, Mr. Curnin, would not
allow the mint engraver to continue it.

237. Near the top of the north-west face there are four projecting
stones placed like steps, that is, they are not immediately over each
other, and above them there is a fifth stone which is pierced with a

Archeological Survey Report. el

round hole for the reception of a post, or more probably of a flag-staff.
The lowest of these stones can only be reached by a ladder, but
ladders must have been always available, if, as I suppose, it was
customary on stated occasions to fix flags and streamers on various
parts of the building, in the same manner as is now done in the
Buddhist countries of Burmah and Ladak.

238. With the single exception of the Taj Mahal at Agra, there
is perhaps no Indian building that has been so often described as
the great Buddhist tower near Sarnath. But strange to say, its
dimensions have always been very much under-stated, although the
circumference might have been very closely ascertained, with the
greatest ease, in a few minutes, by measuring, either with a walking
stick or with the fore-arm, the breadth of one projecting face and of
one recess, which together form one-eighth of the whole. H. H.
Wilson, quoting Wilford, states that “ Sarnath is about 50 feet hich,
and may be as many paces in circumference.”” Miss Emma Roberts
states that it is “ about 150 feet in circumference,” and “ above 100
feet in height.”” Mr. Fergusson calls it “ between 50 and 60 feet in
diameter, and 110 feet in height.” This last statement of the height
is correct, having been taken from a note of mine, which was published
by Mr. Thomas in the Bengal Asiatic Society’s Journal. This
height was carefully measured by myself with an iron chain in
January 1835, by means of the scaffolding which I had put up for
the purpose of opening the tower. By a previous measurement with
a theodolite I had found the height to be 109 feet 10 inches. The
breadth of one projecting face and of one recess is 86 feet 6 inches,
which multiplied by 8 give 292 feet as the circumference, and a
trifle less than 93 feet as the diameter, or nearly double the thick-
ness stated by any one of the authorities just quoted.

239. On the 18th January, 1835, my scaffolding was completed,
and I stood on the top of the great tower. On cutting the long grass,
I found two iron spikes, each 8 inches long, and shaped like the head
of alance. On the following day I removed the ruined brick pinnacle
and began sinking a shaft or well, about 5 feet in diameter. At 3 feet
from the top I found a rough stone, 24 inches x 15 inches % 7 inches;
and on the 25th January, at a depth of 103 feet, I found an inscribed
slab 282 inches long, J3 inches broad, and 42 inches thick, which is
now in the Museum of the Bengal Asiatic Society. The inscription

cll Archeological Survey Report.

consists of the usual Buddhist formula or profession of faith, beginning
with the words “ Ye Dharmmd hetu prabhavd, Sc.,” of which trans-
lations have been given by Mill, Hodgson, Wilson, and Burnouf.
The following is Hodgson’s translation, which has received the
approval of Burnouf:—“ Of all things proceeding from cause, their
causes hath the Tathdgata (Buddha) explained. The Great Sramana
(Buddha) hath likewise explained the causes of the cessation of
existence.” The letters of this inscription, which are all beautifully
cut, appear to me to be of somewhat earlier date than the Tibetan
alphabet, which is known to have been obtained from India in the
middle of the 7th century. JI would therefore assign the inscrip-
tion, and consequently the completion of the monument, to the
6th century.

240. On the 22nd January I began to excavate a horizontal gallery
on the level of the top of the stone-work, and on the 14th of
February, at a distance of 44 feet, the gallery joined the shaft,
which had been sunk from above. As IJ now found that the upper
course of stone was only a facing, I sank the gallery itself down to
the level of the stone-work, and continued it right through to the
opposite side. I thus discovered that the mass of the inner stone-
work was only 33 feet in height, while the outer stone-work was 43
feet. In the middle, however, there was a pillar of stone-work,
rising 6 feet higher than the inner mass. This was perhaps used as
a point from which to describe the circle with accuracy. Small
galleries were also made!to reach the tops of the east and west faces,
but nothing was discovered by these works.

241. The labour of sinking the shaft through the solid stone-
work was very great, as the stones which were large (from 2 to 3
feet in length, 18 inches broad, and 12 inches thick) were all secured
to each other by iron cramps. ach stone had usually eight cramps,
four above, and as many below, all of which had to be cut out before
it could be moved. I therefore sent to Chunar for regular quarry
men, to quarry out the stones, and the work occupied them for
several months. At length, at a depth of 110 feet from the top of
the monument, the stone gave place to brick-work, made of very
large bricks. Through this the shaft was continued for a further
depth of 28 feet, when I reached the plain soil beneath the founda-
tion. Lastly,a gallery was run right through the brick-work of .

Archeological Survey Report. cul

the foundation, immediately below the stone-work, but without
yielding any result. :

242. Thus ended my opening of the great tower after 14
months’ labour, and at a cost of more than Rs. 500. When I began
the work I was not aware that many of the most hallowed of the
Buddhist monuments were only memorial stupas, raised over spots
rendered famous by various acts of Buddha, such as we know from
Hwen Thsang’s account was the great tower near Benares, which
was erected by Asoka near the spot where Buddha had begun to
“turn the wheel of the Jaw,’ thatis, to preach his new doctrine.
The “tower of the Deer Park near Benares”’ is likewise enumerated
by another Chinese author as one of the “eight divine towers”
erected on sites where Buddha had accomplished “ many important
acts of his terrestrial career,” the particular act which he had accom-
plished at Benares being his preaching. This tower was seen by
Fa-Hian in the beginning of the 5th century, who notices that
Buddha, when he began to “turn the wheel of the law,’ sat down
looking towards the west. Now on the western face of the great
tower there is a small plain tablet, which, as I have said before, could
only have been intended for some very short inscription, such as the
name either of the tower itself, or of the event which it was intended
to commemorate. But whatever it may have been intended for, its
position was no doubt significant, and as at Buddha Gaya, where
Sakya had been seated facing the east, his statue was placed in the
same position, so at Benares, where, when he began to preach, he had
been seated facing the west, I conclude that the western face of the
monument erected to commemorate that event would have been the
principal side, and that any inscription would certainly have been
placed on that side.

243. It now only remains to notice the name by which this great
tower is known amongst the people of the neighbouring villages. This
name is Dhamek, of which no one knows the meaning. It is
evidently some compound of Dharmma, and bearing in mind that on
this spot Buddha first began to “ turn the wheel of the law,” I would
suggest that Dhamek is only an abbreviation af the Sanskrit Dharm-
mopadesaka, or “ Preacher of Dharmma,” which is indeed the common
term now in use to designate any religious teacher. The term is
also used in the simpler form of Dharima desaka, which in familiar

civ Archeological Survey Report.

conversation would naturally be shortened to Dhammadek and Dhamek.
The special fitness of this name for the great tower in the Deer Park
at Benares is so obvious and striking, that I think it needless to
offer any further remarks on the subject.

244. Ata distance of 520 feet to the westward of Dhamek, there
is a large circular hole, upwards of 50 feet in diameter, surrounded
by a very thick brick wall. This is the ruin of the large brick stupa
which was excavated by Babi Jagat Singh, the Dewan of Raja Chait
Singh of Benares, for the purpose of obtaining bricks for the erection
of Jagatganj. In January 1794 his workmen found, ata depth of
27 feet, two vessels of stone and marble, one inside the other. The
inner vessel, according to Jonathan Dunecan’s account, (Asiatic Re-
searches V. p. 13],) contained a few human bones, some decayed
pearls, gold leaves, and other jewels of no value. In the “same
place” under-ground, and on the “same occasion” with the discovery
of the urns, there was found a statue of Buddha, bearing an inscrip-
tion dated in Samvat 1083, or A. D. 1626. An imperfect translation
of this inscription was given by Wilford, accompanied by some re-
marks, in which he applies the statements of the record to the great
tower of Dhamek, instead of to the building in which it was
actually discovered.

245. At my suggestion Major Kittoe made a search for this
statue amongst the plundered stones of Jagatganj, where it was found
broken and mutilated. The inscription, however, was still legible
and the remains of the figure are sufficient to show that the statue
was a representation of Buddha the preacher, and not of Buddha the
ascetic. Major Kittoe sent me a transcript of the inscription in
modern Nagari, which I strongly suspect to have been Brahmanized
by his Benares Pandits. In its modern Nagari form, as translated
for me, it records that Mahi Pala, Raja of Gdurdé (or Bengal), having
worshipped the lotus-like feet of Sri Dhdmardsi (“ heap of light,”?
Buddha) caused to be erected in Kasi hundreds of Isdna and
Chitraghanta. Syi Sthira Pdla and his younger brother Sri Vasanta
Péla having restored religion, raised this tower with an inner chamber
and eight large niches.” I strongly suspect that the word Isdna,
which is a name of Siva, has been obtained by a Brahmanical
modification of the original, Wilford read Bhupdla instead of Isana,
bub I am unable to offer any conjecture as to the true reading, as I

Archeological Survey Report. eV

know not where the original is now deposited. Major Kittoe’s fac-
simile of the inscription is perhaps amongst those deposited by him
in the Asiatic Soeiety’s Museum.

246, My reasons for fixing on the large round hole, 520 feet to
the west of the great tower, as the site of the stupa excavated by
Jagat Singh, are the following :--In 1835, when I was engaged in
opening the great tower itself, I made repeated enquiries regarding
the scenes of Jagat Singh’s discovery. Every one had heard of the
finding of a stone box which contained bones, and jewels, and gold,
but every one professed ignorance of the locality. At length an old
man named Sangkar, an inhabitant of the neighbouring village of
Singhpur, came forward and informed me that when he was a boy, he
had been employed in the excavations made by Jagat Singh, and that
he knew all about the discovery of the jewels, &¢. According to his
account the discovery consisted of two boxes, the outer one being a
large round box of common stone, and the inner one a cylindrical box
of green marble, about 15 inches in height and 5 or 6 inches in diame-
ter. The contents of the inner box were 40 to 46 pearls, 14 rubies,
8 silver and 9 gold earrings (karn phul), and three pieces of human
arm bone. The marble box was taken to the Bara Sahib (Jonathan
Dunean), but the stone box was left undisturbed in its original posi-
tion. As the last statement evidently afforded a ready means of
testing the man’s veracity, I enquired if he could point out the spot
where the box was left. To this question he replied without any
hesitation in the affirmative, and I at once engaged him to dig up the
box. We proceeded together to the site of the present circular hole,
which was then a low uneven mound in the centre of a hollow, and
after marking out a small space about 4 feet in diameter, he began to
work. Before sunset he had reached the stone box at a depth of 12
feet and at less than 2 feet from the middle of the well which he had
sunk. The box was a large circular block of common Chunar sand-
stone, pierced with a rough cylindrical chamber in the centre, and
covered with a flat slab as a lid. I presented this box, along with
about 60 statues, to the Bengal Asiatic Society, and it is now in
their Museum, where I lately recognized it. In their catalogue,
however, it is described as “942 B, a Sarcophagus found in the tope
of Alanikyala (!) ; Donor, Lieutenant A, Cunningham.”

247. The discovery of the stone box was the most complete and

P

evi Archeological Survey Report.

convincing proof that I could wish for of the man’s veracity, and I
at once felt satisfied that the relics and the inscribed figure of Buddha
found by Jagat Singh’s workmen had been discovered on this spot,
and consequently that they could not possibly have any connexion
with the great tower of Dhamek. My next object was to ascertain
the nature of the building in which the box was deposited. As I had
found the box standing on solid brick-work, I began to clear away the
rubbish, expecting to find a square chamber similar to those which
had been discovered in the topes of Afghanistan. My excavations,
however, very soon showed that if any chamber had once existed,
it must have been demolished by Jagat Singh’s workmen. Sangkar
then described that the box was found in a small square hole or
chamber only just large enough to hold it. I cleared out the whole
of the rubbish until I reached the thick circular wall which still exists.
I then found that the relic box had been deposited inside a solid brick
hemispherical stupa, 49 feet in diameter at the level of the deposit,
and that this had been covered by a casing wall of brick, 163 feet in
thickness ; the total diameter at this level was therefore 82 feet. The
solid brick-work of the interior had only been partially excavated by
Jagat Singh’s workmen, nearly one-half of the mass, to a height of 6
feet above the stone box, being then untouched. I made some
excavations round the outer wall to ascertain its thickness, but I left
the brick-work undisturbed.

248. About 18 years afterwards, the excavation of this stupa was
continued by Major Kittoe and Mr. Thomas until the whole of the
inner mass had been removed, and the foundation of the outer casing
exposed. The inner diameter is given by Mr. Thomas as 49 feet
6 inches, the slight excess over my measurement being due to the
. thickness of a base moulding of the original stupa. I have again
earefully examined the remains of this monument, and I am quite
satisfied that in its original state it was an ancient hemispherical
stupa, 49 feet in diameter at base, and about 35 or 40 feet in height,
including the usual pinnacle. Afterwards, when as I suppose, the
upper portion had become ruinous, it was repaired by the addition of
a casing wall 16} feet in thickness. The diameter of the renewed
edifice thus became 82 feet, while the height, inclusive of a pinnacle,
could not have been less than 50 feet,

249. Ona review of all the facts connected with this ruin, I incline

Archeological Survey Report. evil

to the opinion that the inner hemisphere was an ancient relic supe,
and that this having become ruinous, it was repaired, and an outer
easing added by the brothers Sthira Pdla and Vasanta Pdla in A. D.
1026. In the Mahdéwanso we find the record of similar additions
having been made to some of the s¢wpas in Ceylon, and I know from
personal inspection that many of the great Dhagopas of Burmah have
been increased in size by subsequent additions.

250. Due south from the great tower of Dhamek, and at a distance
of 2,500 feet, there is a lofty ruined mound of solid brick-work, sur-
mounted with an octagonal building. When I first lived at Benares,
this mound was always known by the name of Chaukandi, of which no
one knew the meaning. But during my late visit I found that the
old name was nearly forgotten, having been superseded by Luri-ka-
kodan, or “ Luri’s leap.” ZLurt was an Ahir, who jumped from the
top of the octagonal building some years ago, and was killed. The
mound itself is 74 feet in height to the floor of the octagonal building,
which rises 23 feet 8 inches higher, making a total height of 97 feet
and 8 inches. An inscription over one of the door-ways of the build-
ing records that it was built in the reign of Humdywn, as a memorial
of the emperor’s ascent of the mound.

251. In 1835 I opened this mound by sinking a well from the
floor of the building right down to the plain earth beneath the found-
ation. JI also drove a horizontal gallery to meet the well about half
way up the ascent. But as neither of these excavations resulted in any
discovery, I then thought it possible that my well might not have
been sunk in the axis of the building. I therefore began to widen
the well from the point of junction of the gallery until it was nearly
20 feet in diameter. This work was stopped at a depth of 27 feet,
by my departure from Benares. I have again examined this ruin,
and I am now quite satisfied that my first well was sunk in the very
centre of the mound. The absence of any relic chamber shows that
this was not a relic tower, a conclusion which is fully borne out by
Hwen Thsang’s description of one of the most remarkable of the
sacred edifices near the Deer Park at Benares, which I believe may
be identified with the Chawkandi mound.

252. At 2 or 3 li (or rather less than half a mile) to the south-
west of the Deer Park monastery, Hwen Thsang places a stupa
which was no less than 300 feet in height, This lofty monument

P 2

evil Archeological Survey Report.

sparkled with the rarest and most precious materials. It was not
ornamented with rows of niches, neither had it the usual bell-shaped
cupola, but its summit was crowned with a sort of religious vase,
turned upside down, on the top of which was an arrow. This is the
whole of Hwen Thsang’s account of this remarkable building, which,
although too meagre to gratify curiosity, is still sufficient for the
purpose of identification. In position it agrees almost exactly with
that of the great brick mound of Chawkandi which I have just de-
scribed. The distance of this last from the ruined mound on which
the village of Barahipur stands, and which I have already identified
with the position of the Deer Park monastery, is just half a mile
but the direction is south south-west instead of south-west. With
regard to size, it is difficult to say what may have been the height of
the Chaukandi edifice. My excavations have proved that the centre
of the present mound is all solid brick-work; but the subsequent
explorations of Major Kittoe have brought to light three immense
straight walls about midway up the eastern side, and two more on
the western side, which have all the appearance of gigantic buttresses.
Now as these walls could not possibly have been required for the
stability of the great solid mass below, it seems not unreasonable to
eonclude that they must in some way have been connected with the
support of the upper portion of the building, which no longer exists.
Hwen Thsang’s account is somewhat vague, but I believe his intention
was to describe a dome or cupola narrowed at the base, ike the neck
of a religious vase reversed. He distinctly states that it was not a
bell-shaped cupola, that is, the dome did not spread outwards in the
form familiar to us, in the great Dhagopas of Rangoon and Pegu.
An excellent illustration of the reversed vase form may be seen in a
rock cut temple at Ajanta, which is given in Fergusson’s Hand Book
of Architecture, Vol. I. page 20.

253. I will conclude this notice of the remains at Sarnath Benares
with a short account of the excavations which have been made at
different times during the last seventy years in the vicinity of the
great tower of Dhamek.

254. The earliest excavations of which we possess any record were
those made by Babu Jagat Singh in 1793-94, for the purpose of
obtaining materials, both stones and bricks, for the erection of a
market-place, which was named after himself, Jagat ganj. I have

Archeological Survey Report. cix

already noticed his discovery, January 1794, of the two stone boxes
containing a few bones, with some decayed pearls and slips of gold.
A brief account of this discovery was published by Jonathan Duncan
in the Asiatic Researches, Vol. V. page 131, and a more detailed
notice by Wilford in a later volume of the same work. I can add
little to their accounts, except that the original green stone vase,
which Jonathan Duncan presented to the Asiatic Society in 1794, had
disappeared before 1834, when I wrote to James Prinsep about it.
I may mention also, on the authority of the work-people, that the
dilapidated state of the lower part of the Dhamek tower is due en-
tirely to the meanness of Jagat Singh, who, to save a few Rupees in
the purchase of new stones, deliberately destroyed the beautifuy
facing of this ancient tower. As each stone was slowly detached
from the monument by cutting out all the iron cramps by which it
was secured to its neighbours, the actual saving to the Babu could
have been but little, but the defacement to the tower was very great
and as the stones were removed at once, the damage done to the tower
is quite irreparable.

255, Jagat Singh’s discovery would appear to have stimulated
the curiosity of the British Officers, for Miss Emma Roberts, writing
in 1834, relates that “ some 40 or 50 years ago,” (that is, about 1794,)
“the ruins near Sarnath attracted the attention of several scientific
gentlemen, and they commenced an active research by digging in
many places around. Their labours were rewarded by the discovery
of several excavations filled with an immense number of flat tiles,
having representations of Buddha modelled upon them in wax. It is
said that there were actually cart loads of these images found in the
excavations before mentioned. Many were deposited in the museums
and collections of private individuals; but whether they were ever
made the subject of a descriptive account seems doubtful, there being
at least no public document of the kind.” (Views in India, China,
and the Red Sea, Vol. II. p. 8.) I can add nothing to Miss Robert’s
account, as all my enquiries have failed to discover any of the wax
seals of Buddha above mentioned. I many note, however, that in
the temples of Ladak I have seen small chambers quite full of similar
little figures of deceased Lamas. In Burmah also I have seen small
figures of Buddha in burnt clay accumulated in heaps equal to cart
loads, both in the caves and in the temples, The figured seals dis-

ex Archaological Survey Report.

covered near Sarnath would appear to have been of a similar kind to
those which I extracted from the ruined building close to Jarandha’s
tower at Giryek, and also to those which I have described as having
been found in the ruins at Bakror, opposite to Buddha Gaya. |

256. The next excavations, as far as I am aware, were those
undertaken by myself in 1835-36. These excavations, as well as the
drawings of the elaborate ornament of the great tower, were made
entirely at my own expense, the cost during 18 months having been
Rs. 1,200. I made several desultory excavations wherever I saw traces
of walls, but they all proved to belong to temporary habitations of a
late period. At last, after a heavy fall of rain, I observed a piece of
terraced floor which I ordered to be cleared for the purpose of pitch-
ing my tent upon it. After a few hours’ labour, however, the flooring
terminated on what appeared to be the edge of a small tank, which
was only 13 feet 9 inches square. Continuing the work, I found the
bases of pillars in pairs surrounding the square. Amongst the rubbish
inside the square, I found an elaborately sculptured bas-relief, in grey
sandstone, representing the Nirvdna of Buddha. The stone had been
broken into four pieces, of which one was missing, but the remaining
three pieces are now in the Calcutta Museum. This sculpture I
consider particularly interesting, as the subject is treated in a novel
and striking manner. In the ordinary representations of the death-
bed scene, the spectators are confined to a few attendants, who hold
umbrellas over the body or reverentially touch the feet. But in the
present sculpture, besides the usual attendants, there are the WVava-
graha or “ Nine Planets” in one line, and in a lower line, the Ashta
Sakti, or “ eight female energies,” a series of goddesses apparently
belonging to one of the later forms of Buddhism. This sculpture is
well worthy of being photographed.

257. Further excavation showed that the small pillared tank, or
court-yard, was the centre of a large building, 68 feet square, of
which the outer walls were 44 feet thick. My exploration was not
completed to the eastward, as the walls of the building in that direc-
tion had been entirely removed by some previous excavation, with
the exception of detached portions of the foundation, sufficient to
show that it¢ corresponded exactly with the western half of the
building. The central square was apparently surrounded by an open
verandah, which gave access to ranges of five small rooms or cells

Archeological Survey Report. exi

on each of the four sides of the building. In all the cells I found pieces
of charred wood, with nails still sticking in some of them, and in the
middle cell on the western side I found a small store of unhusked rice
only partially burnt. Ina few places I found what appeared to be
pieces of terraced roofing, and in one place a large heap of charcoal.
On the south side the central room was lost by previous excavation,
but on the north side I founda room entirely open towards the
verandah, as if it was a hall, or place of general meeting for the
resident monks. Inside this room there was the base or pedestal of
what I believe to have been a small votive stupa, the top of which
probably reached to the roof and took the place of a pillar. A small
drain led under-ground from the north-west corner of the central
square to the outside of the building on the north, for the purpose,
as I conclude, of carrying off the rain-water.

258. The building which I have just described would appear to
have been a Vihdra, or “ Chapel Monastery” that is, a monastery with
a chapel or temple forming an integral part of the building. From the
thickness of the outer wall I infer that this edifice was not less than
three or four stories in height, and that it may have accommodated
about 50 monks. The entrance was probably on the south side, and
I think that there must have been a statue of Buddha in the northern
verandah. The bas-relief which I found in the central square almost
certainly formed one of the middle architraves of the court.

259. Continuing my excavations in the high ground to the west-
ward, I came upon the remains of a building of a totally different
description. The walls of this edifice were 3 feet thick throughout,
and I found the plaster still adhering to the inner walls of what I
will call the verandahs, with borders of painted flowers, quite fresh
and vivid. The mass of the building consisted of a square of 34 feet,
with a small porch on each of the four sides. The building was
divided into three parts from west to east, and the central part was
again sub-divided into three small rooms. I think it probable
that these three rooms were the shrines of the Buddhist Triad,
Dharmma, Buddha, and Sangha, and that the walls of the two
long rooms or verandahs to the north and south were covered
with statues and bas-reliefs. The entrance verandah of one of
the vihar caves at Kdnheri, in Salsette, is adorned in a similar
manner, and even in the present day the inner walls of the temples

exli Archeological Survey Report.

both in Ladak and in Burmah are covered with figures of Buddha.
This also, we know from Hwen Thsang’s account was the style of
the walls of the great vihar in the Deer Park at this very place, and
a similar style of ornamentation prevailed both at Buddha Gaya and
at Nalanda. Outside the walls also I found a great number, about 50
or 60, of large deeply carved stones, which had once formed part of
a magnificent frieze, with a bold projecting cornice. The face of the
frieze was ornamented with small figures of Buddha seated at
intervals in peculiar shaped niches, which I have traced from the
rock hewn caves of Dhamnar in Malwa to the picturesque but
fantastic Kyoungs of Burmah. <A few of these stones may now be
seen in the grounds of the Sanskrit College at Benares. As I found
no traces of burnt wood, I am inclined to believe that the roof of the
building was pyramidal, and that the general appearance of the
edifice must have been strikingly similar to that of the great temple
of Brambanan, depicted in the 2nd volume of Ratfiles’s Java.

260. Whilst engaged in excavating the walls of this temple, I was
informed by Sangkar, Rajbhar of Singpur, the same man who had
pointed out to me the position of the relic box in Jagat Singh’s séupa,
that whilst he was engaged in digging materials for Jagatganj, the
workmen had come upon a very large number of statues, all collected
together ina small building. The walls were pulled down and the
bricks were carried away, but the statues were left untouched in
their original position. JI at once commenced an excavation on the
spot pointed out by Sangkar, which was only a few feet to the north
of the temple just described. At a depth of 2 feet below the surface,
I found about 60 statues and bas-reliefs in an upright position, all
packed closely together within a small space of less than 10 feet
square. The walls of the building in which they had been thus
deposited had been removed, as stated by Sangkar, but the remains
of the foundation showed a small place of only 11 feet square out-
side. I made a selection of the more perfect figures, which, together
with the bas-reliefs, I presented to the Asiatic Society. A sketch of
the principal bas-relief, which represents the four great events in the
eareer of Sakya Muni, has been published as Plate 1 of M. Foucaux’s
translation of the Tibetan history of Buddha. A second bas-relief
represents the same four scenes, but on asmaller scale. A third bas-
relief, which gives only three scenes, omitting the Mirvdna, has a
short inscription below in two lines, which records the sculpture to

Archeological Survey Report. CX1L

have been the gift of Hari Gupta. The characters of this inscription
which are of the later Gupta type, show that this piece of sculpture is
certainly as old as the 3rd or 4th century. ‘Some of the seated figures
were in excellent preservation, and more particularly one of Buddha
the teacher, which was in perfect condition, and coloured of a warm
red hue. ‘The remaining statues, upwards of 40 in number, together
with most of the other carved stones which I had collected, and
which I left lying on the ground, were afterwards carted away by the
late Mr. Davidson, and thrown into the Barna river under the bridge,
tu check the cutting away of the bed between the arches.

261. As the room in which I found all these sculptures was only
a small detached building, and as it was quite close to the large
temple which I have just described, I conclude that the whole of the
sculptures must have belonged to the temple, and that they were
secreted in the place where I discovered them, during a time of
persecution, when the monks were obliged to abandon their monas-
teries and take refuge in Nepal. This conclusion is partly borne
out by the fact that I found no statues within the walls of the
temple itself.

262. To the north of the temple, at a distance of 26 feet, my
excavations uncovered a large single block of stone, 6 feet in length,
by 3 feet in height, and the same in thickness. The stone had been
earefully squared, and was hollowed out underneath, forming a small
chamber, 4 feet in length, by two feet in breadth, and the same in
height. This large stone has also disappeared, which is the more
to be regretted, as I think it highly probable that it was the cele-
brated stone, described by Hwen Thsang, on which Buddha had
spread out his kashdya to dry, after washing it in the neighbouring
tank. Certain marks on the stone appeared to the Buddhists to
represent the thread lines of the web of Buddha’s cloth, as “ dis-
tinctly as if they had been chiselled.” Devout Buddhists offered
their homage before the stone daily ; but whenever heretics, or wicked
men, crowded round the stone in a contemptuous manner, then the
dragon (Ndga) of the neighbouring tank let loose upon them a storm
of wind and vain.

263. My excavations at Sarnath were brought to a close suddenly
by my removal to Calcutta. Luckily I had prepared plans of the
buildings while the exhumation was going on, for nothing whatever

qQ

CXx1V Archeological Survey Report.

now remains of all my excavations, every stone and every brick having
been removed long ago.

264. The last excavations at Sarnath were made at the expense
of Government under the personal superintendence of Major Kittoe.
On his departure for England in January 1853, in ill-health, he
earried away all his measurements and memoranda for the purpose
of compiling an account of his discoveries for publication. His
continued ill-health and early death effectually prevented the fulfil-
ment of this intention, and no one, as far as I can learn, knows what
has become of his papers. His drawings, which were numerous and
valuable, were sent to the India House Museum by Mr. Thomason.
One of them has since been published in 1855 by Mr. Fergusson in
his “‘ Hand Book of Architecture,’”—Vol. I. page 7; and another in
1856, by Mrs. Spiers, in her “ Life in Ancient India”—page 267.
Major Kittoe’s inscriptions were entrusted to the charge of the
Asiatic Society in Calcutta, evidently in deposit for the sake of safety,
as he hoped to return again to India, and to prepare them for publi-
eation with his own hand.

265. My account of Major Kittoe’s discoveries must necessarily
be brief, as the only information which I possess is contained in 2
long letter from himself, dated 19th May, 1852, and in Mr. Thomas’s
‘* Note on the excavations at Sarnath,” which was published in the
Bengal Asiatic Society’s Journal for 1854, page 469. In writing
to Major Kittoe previously I had mentioned the three stupas which
T had myself opened, and which I have already described. In reply
he wrote, “ How do you make out three towers at Sarnath ? I make
out four, to say nothing of innumerable smaller affairs down to the
size of a walnut, which I had laid bare.” Attached to this he gave
a rough sketch of the ground, showing the position of the fourth tower
to be immediately to the north of Jagat Singh’s stupa, where I have
accordingly inserted it, on his authority, in my survey of the ruins.
Further on he writes, “I have laid bare ehaityas upon chaityas, four
and five deep, built one over the other.” In another place he
describes the oblong court-yard which was excavated by himself, at
a distance of 125 feet to the westward of the great tower, as a “large
quadrangle, or hospital, for I have found pestles and mortars, sills
(or flat stones for mashing,) loongas, &e. &e.” This is the quad-
rangle marked Z in my plan of the ruins. It is 60 feet long from

Archeological Survey Report. CXV

west to east, and 42 feet broad, and is surrounded by a low wall 8 feet
thick and 13 foot high above the level of the terraced floor, parts of
which still remain. Fixed in this wall are the stumps of twelve
stone pillars, which are split in all directions as if destroyed by fire.
I agree with Major Kittoe in thinking that this quadrangle is
probably the ruin of a hospital.

266. In reply to a question about stone umbrellas, Major Kittoe
wrote to me as follows: ‘I have got hold of two, one in fragments
(burnt), of say 6 feet diameter, mushroom-shaped, and another, also
burnt, but not broken, elegantly carved in scroll on the inside, but
nearly defaced by the action of saltpetre.”’

267. Of the great tower itself, Major Kittoe’s opinion was that
“ arrangement was precisely the same as at Rangoon, rows and rows of
small temples, umbrellas, pillars, &c. around the great tope. They all
run north and south,and east and west, large and small.” ‘To this ac-
count he added a small rough sketch showing the arrangement of the
smaller stupas about the great tower. This sketch I have inserted in my
survey in dotted lines. Judging from the arrangement of the subsidiary
buildings about the great stupas of Burmah and Ladak, I have every
reason to accept Major Kittoe’s sketch as a correct outline of what
he had himself ascertained by excavation ; but as the sketch is not
drawn to scale, the relative sizes and distances may not perhaps be
quite accurate.

268. Of his other discoveries he wrote as follows: “I have got
fine specimens of carved bricks, and two heads of Budda, made of
pounded brick and road-earth, coated with fine shell lime, in beautiful
preservation. I havea fine head of a female in white marble (partly
calcined) and a portion of the arm. It has been a nearly life-size
figure of Pérvati.”

269. It will have been observed that every excavation made near
Sarnath has revealed traces of fire. I myself found charred timber
and half burnt grain. The same things were also found by Major
Kittoe, besides the evident traces of fire on the stone pillars, umbrellas,
and statues. So vividly was the impression of a great final catastro-
phe by fire fixed in Major Kittoe’s mind, by the discoveries made
during his excavations, that he thus summed up his conclusions to
me in a few words: “ All has been sacked and burnt, priests, temples,
idols, all together, In some places bones, iron, timber, idols, &c., are

Q 2

CXVi - Archeological Survey Report.

all fused into huge heaps; and this has happened more than once.”
Major Kittoe repeated this opinion in almost the same words when I
saw him at Gwalior in September, 1852. I will recur to this subject
again before I conclude my account of the discoveries at Sarnath.

270. On Major Kittoe’s departure from Benares, the excavations
were continued at first under Mr. E. Thomas, and afterwards under
Professor FitzHdward Hall. To the former gentleman we are indebt-
ed for a general account of the state of the excavations at the time
of his assuming charge, and more especially for a very clear and
interesting description of the ancient monastery which was then being
exhumed, and of the various articles which were discovered within
its precincts. This work was subsequently completed by Mr. Hall, and
Thave made a plan of the building as it now appears. Mr. Thomas calls
it an “old Buddhist monastery,” and with this identification I fully
agree. According to Hwen Thsang, there were no less than 39
monasteries about the Deer Park at Benares, which together con-
tained 8,000 monks, or an average of 100 monks each. Now the
building under review contains no less than 28 separate apartments,
and if one of these be set aside as a shrine for a statue of Buddha, and
a second as a hall for teaching, there will remain 26 eells for the
accommodation of monks. Again, judging from the thickness of* the ~
walls, I am of opinion that the building could not have been less
than 8 or 4: stories in height. Assuming the latter to have been the
actual height, the building would have contained 104 cells, and there-
fore may possibly have been one of the 30 monasteries noted by
Hwen Thsang.

271. The ground plan of the monastery shows a central court, 50
feet square, surrounded by pillars which must have supported an open
verandah or cloister in front of the four ranges of cells. In the north-
east corner of the court-yard there is an old well, 4 feet 10 inches in
diameter, and 37 feet deep. As this well is placed on one side, I
infer that the middle of the court was occupied by a stupa, or a statue,
or more probably perhaps by a holy tree, as I could not find any
traces of the foundation of a building. On the outside, the building
is 107 feet square. In the centre room on the north side, which is
18 feet in length, there are two large stones placed against the walls
as if intended for the reception of statues. This also was Mr. Thomas's
opinion. This room I believe to have been the shrine of the monas-

Archeological Survey Report. exvii

tery. In the centre room on the south side there is a “ square,
elaborately corniced block,” which Mr. Thomas believed to have been
the throne for a seated figure of Buddha. I incline, however, to the
opinion that this was the seat of the teacher for the daily reading and
expounding of the Buddhist scriptures. The cells on each side of
these two central rooms are somewhat larger than those on the eastern
and western sides of the court, and were therefore probably assigned
to the senior monks. The common cells are 8} feet by 8 feet and
each hag a separate door.

272. The ground plan of this monastery is similar to that of the
large caves at Bagh and Ajanta, sketches of which may be seen in
Mr. Fergusson’s “ Hand-Book of Architecture,’ Vol. I. pp. 33, 34.
The plan is in fact almost identical with that of the Bagh cave, the
only difference being the want of cells in the cave monastery on the
side opposite to the sanctuary, which was necessarily left open for
the sake of affording light to the interior. The great cave at Junir
is also similar in plan, but it is apparently of older date, as it wants
the sanctuary opposite the entrance.

273. The destruction of this large monastery would appear to
have been both sudden and unexpected, for Mr. Thomas records that
Major Kittoe found “the remains of ready-made wheaten cakes in a
small recess in the chamber towards the north-east angle of th,
square.” Mr. Thomas himself also found portions of wheat and other
grain spread out in one of the cells. These discoveries would seem
to show that the conflagration had been so sudden and rapid as to
force the monks to abandon their very food. Such also is Mr. Tho-
mas’s opinion, conveyed in the following vivid description: ‘The
chambers on the eastern side of the square were found filled with a
strange medley of uncooked food, hastily abandoned on their floors,—
pottery of every-day life, nodes of brass produced apparently by the
melting down of the cooking vessels in common use. Above these
again were the remnants of the charred timbers of the roof, with
;ron nails still remaining in them, above which again appeared broken
bricks mixed with earth and rubbish to the height of the extant walls,
some 6 feet from the original flooring. Every item here bore evidence
of a complete conflagration, and so intense seems to have been the
heat, that in portions of the wall still standing, the clay, which
formed the substitute for lime in binding the brick-work, is baked to

eXVill Archeological Survey Report.

a similar consistency with the bricks themselves. In short, all exist-
ing indications lead to a a necessary inference that the destruction of
the building, by whomsoever caused, was effected by fire applied by
the hand of an exterminating adversary, rather than by any ordinary
accidental conflagration.”

274, This opinion was expressed by Mr. Thomas in 1854, before
the whole of the monastery had been exhumed. A later account has
since been published by Dr. Butter in 1856, who states his opinion
that “ the burnt grain and masses of half fused iron discovered by Mr,
Hall corroborate the conclusions drawn by previous explorers, that
the monastery had been destroyed by fire.”

275. During my stay at Benares I examined the collection of
articles found by Professor Hall in the various excavations which he
conducted at Sarnath, and which are now deposited in the museum
of the college. The only article requiring special notice is No. 18,
an impression in burnt clay, of a seal, 15 inch in diameter, with two
lines of Sanskrit, surmounted by a lozenge-shaped device, with two
recumbent deer as supporters. The device of the two deer is significant,
as it no doubt shows that the seal must have belonged to some _per-
son or establishment attached to the monastery of the Deer Park.
The end of the upper line and the whole of the lower line of the
inscription are too much injured to be made out satisfactorily. The
inscription begins with the word Srz Saddharmma, “ the auspicious
true Dharmma,” and the letters at the end of the first line look very
like vrakshita the ‘“ preserver.” This would be a man’s name Sri
Saddharmma Rakshita, “ the cherisher of the true Dharmma,” a title
not uncommon amongst the Buddhists. Of the lower line I am
unable to suggest any probable rendering.

276. In the absence of any general plan of the ruins, showing the
extent of the explorations carried on by Major Kittoe and his suc-
cessors, I do not think it would be advisable to undertake any further
excavations at Sarnath, Benares: I have already suggested that the
ground immediately around the great tower should be levelled for the
purpose of affording easy access to visitors. In carrying out this
operation, every fragment of sculpture should be carefully preserved,
as I think it very probable that some portions of the statues, which
once adorned the eight niches of the great tower, may be discovered
in the masses of rubbish now lying in heaps at its foot. It might

Archeological Survey Report. ») Vex

perhaps be worth while to make a few tentative excavations in the
mass of ruins to the north and north-west of the great tower, by
digging long narrow trenches from west to east, and from north to
south. Should these trenches uncover the remains of any large
buildings, the work might then be continued. But should nothing
promising be discovered, I would recommend the immediate stoppage
of the work.
A. CunntneHam, Colonel,
Archeological Surveyor to the Government of India.

eee

Meteorological Observations, xlix

Abstract of the Results of the Tourly Meteorological Observations
taken at the Surveyor General’s Office, Calcutta,

in the month of January, 1863.

Latitude 22° 33’ 1” North. Longitude 88° 20’ 34” East.

Feet.

Height of the Cistern of the Standard Barometer above the Sea-level, 18.11.
Daily Means, &c. of the Observations and of the Hygrometrical elements

dependent thereon.

OCOIA}HR Bwwe | Doe.

eo
DD

ft et et
MID OB w

oe
ow

BO BO BO
© he

bw
ous

OE SE ES)
CoO ONS

w
a

the Barometer

Mean Height of
at 32° Faht.

Inches.
30.060
.039
.050

Sunday.

057
.009
042
047
042
073

Sunday.

.068
29.996
30.012

054:

.035

.028

Sunday.

.070
051
042
103
027
29.991
Sunday.

30.105
.086
032
031
.009
.006

Range of the Barometer
during the day.

Max. Min. | Diff.

Inches. | Inches. | Inches.
80.185 | 29,985 0.150
113 985 128
134 991 143
151 .989 162
077 955 122
.128 994: 134
123 984 .139
113 .998 115
165 | 30.019 146
.158 006 152
072 | 29,919 153
072 .954 .118
138 | 30.008 130
122 | 29.978 144
.090 .981 .109
153 | 30.013 140
142 | 29.995 147
101 997 104
164 | 30,050 114
04 | 29,953 51

051 938 113

189 | 80.043 146

177 019 158
120 | 29.964 156
.102 982 .120
.099 922 177
074 950 124

Mean Dry Bulb
Thermometer.

OID
OHO
“TWO OL

|
Range of the Tempera-
ture during the day.

Max, Min. | Diff.

) 0 0

79.6 59.3 | 20.3
19:9 64.8 | 18.1
78.5 63.8 | 14.7

75.4 59.6 | 15.8
74.0 57.4 | 16.6
75.8 57.2 | 18.6
76.0 56.4 | 19.6
76.4 58.0 | 18.4
74.0 58.3 | 15,7

75.1 54.9 | 20.2
76.2 54.8 | 21.4
78.4 59.8 | 18.6
76.4 60.8 | 15.6
79.4 59.8 { 19.6
71.0 64,4 6.6

78.4 60.0 | 18.4:
76.4: 62.4 | 14.0
78.8 63.3 | 15.5
79.5 62.3 | 17.2
79.6 63.0 | 16.6
74.3 64.6 9.7

76.4: 60.2 | 16.2
75.2 59.0 | 16.2
75.2 56.4 | 18.8
75.2 56.2 | 19.0 ©
76.6 59.5 | 21.1
74.6 57.6 | 17.0

The Mean height of the Barometer, as likewise the Mean Dry and Wet Bulb
Thermometers are derived from the twenty-four hourly Observations made during

the day.

\

i Meteorological Observations.

Abstract of the Results of the Hourly Meteorological Observations
taken at the Surveyor General's Office, Calcutta,

in the month of January, 1863.
Daily Means, &c. of the Observations and of the Hygrometrical elements

dependent thereon.—(Continued).

fg ra) 5 aq Bo
| o o t —= 2
| g . ° A ) a4 ie 3 ez
| él 3 a 2 > <3 | se) ieee
z S S 2 & Peele) 2 2
2 Py ° °° |e 5 Ee
-Q ° © Ss 2 |e-s Silo”
2 Q wa = = =} Oo “.
G 5 rs = a(S ie 2 a ass.
Ss = 2 cae A = PO ie = allows
2 3 3 a 2 a (2x @) Ses
See ase las. S| 22 | 3a |= oe) oe
S ® A E 5 a o> | $3 |3 ae) 6 3.8
A = a S) a) = = < S
ty) 0 o O Inches. | T. gr.| T. gr
1 61.9 6.6 56.6 11.9 0.467 5.15 | 2.50 | 0.67
2 63.3 7.0 57.7 12.6 485 2 76 .66
3 63.1 6.6 57.8 11.9 486 30 08 68
4 | Sunday.
5 60:0 6.6 54.7 11.9 438 4.85 36 67
6 58.9 6.3 53.9 11.3 426 74 Uy, .69
7 58.9 6.4 53,8 11.5 425 n/a 22 .68
8 59.0 6.5 53,8 11.7 425 “71 27 68
9 59.2 6.0 54.4, 10.8 434 S81 NOY ect
10 58.4 6.9 52.9 12.4 412 09 | 34 .66
11 | Sunday.
12 57.3 6.5 51.4 12.4 392 87 24 66
13 58.9 6.1 54.0 11.0 428 75 12 .69
14 63.8 4.8 60.0 8.6 023 5.76 | 1.91 75
15 63.4 3.9 60.3 7.0 528 85 52 79
16 63.3 5.6 58.8 10.1 503 541 2.20 72
17 64.3 3.2 61.7 5.8 2004 6.12 | 1.30 83
18 | Sunday.
19 62.3 6.6 57.0 11.9 473 5.21 | 2.58 67
20 65.0 3.6 62.1 6.5 561 6.18 | 1.49 81
21 64,1 6.5 58.9 Tf 5OA 5.538 | 2.62 68
22 64.2 6.5 59.0 267/ .506 05 63 68
23 65.9 5.3 61.7 9.5 554, 06.07 ||. vi28) | eae
24 63.3 5.7 58.7 10.3 501 5.53 23 oa
25 | Sunday. |
26 61.0 6.9 | 55.5 12.4 450 4.98 03 .66
27 59.0 6.6 53.7 11.9 A423 70 .30 67
28 58.6 6.9 | 53.1 12.4 415 62 | .86| .66
29 58.2 7.0 52.6 12.6 .408 03 38 .66
30 58.5 6.9 53.0 12.4: 414 .60 .385 .66
31 59.4 6.1 54.5 11.0 A485 83 15 .69

All the Hygrometrical elements are computea by the Greenwich Constants.
From the Ist January 1863, the Greenwich New Factors have been used

for, computing Dew-point.

Meteorological Observations.

hi

Abstract of the Results of the Hourly Meteorological Observations
taken at the Surveyor General's Office, Calcutta,

in the month of January, 1863.

Hourly Means, &c. of the Observations and of the Hygrometrical elements

scl

dependent thereon.

ve
}
Ss
ou
Mean Height of
the Barometer
at 32° Fabt.

30.043

039
031
.025
021
027
044
065
097
113
120
-100

fed ed 2
HOO MATS OUP CoD

Zz
S)
)
5

072
040
016
29.998
991
.996
30,001
014
032
043
.048
047

FOOONANAWNH

ae

Inches.

Range of the Barometer for

each hour during the

month.

Max. Min. Diff.
Inches. | Inches. | Inches.
30.104 | 29.951 0.153

101 944 pl Lair7/

.095 .938 SIL aie/

.086 .938 148

084 .955 .129

.086 969 117

.105 954 151

1384 .992 142

157 =| 80.024 133

LTA 04:7 127

189 .051 .138

ASL .033 .148

0152 .010 142

112 = | 29.983 129

.098 .964 134

.085 .933 0152

.067 6928 139

.090 .922 2168

.095 .919 .176

111 .933 178

118 972 .146

120 .968 152

119 .962 157

110 6993 157

Mean Dry Bulb
Thermometer.

Range of the Tempera-
ture for each hour
during the
month.

Max. | Min. | Diff,

64.8 54.8 | 10.0
67.4 59.0 8.4)
69.6 62.6 7.0
72.2 65.4 6.8
74.9 68.4: 6.5

76.6 69.4, 7.2
75.2 66.8 8.4
73.4 64.8 86
72.1 63.4 8.7
71.4 62.2 9.2
70.4: 60.8 9.6
69.3 59.6 9.7

The Mean Height of the Barometer, as likewise the Mean Dry and Wet Bulb

Thermometers are derived from the Observations made at the several hours
during the month.

li

leteorological Observations.

Abstract of the Results of the Hourly Meteorological Observations

taken

at the Surveyor General's Office, Calcutta,
in the month of January, 1863.

Hourly Means, &c. of the Observations and of the Hygrometrical elements

Hour.

MOODTIA MA WHE:

ft fo

Noon.

moO ONTOS OU CO DS

fo food

Mean Wet Bulb Ther-
mometer,

°

60.1

59.3
58.8
58.5
58,1
56.9
57.0
56.8
58.6
60.0
61.4
62,8

63.4
64,1
64.4
64.6
64.1
64,2
64.4
63 6
62.9
62.3
61.6
61.1

dependent thereon.—( Continued),

ae a | 6 o 1 © wo 1 © 29
o r=] o sf OS om ° ~~
Bo) ee | Bee ee
2 5 S OS ES! omen alam
io) oO i=) Ce op es , o 2 a) fo)
2 a 3 Sete weiss aS
Ge aS Se a ies. Soo le S
S 3 ee tape lees |eas ole ce
I 2 ee, Bs |B, oo 1§ 68 clos fe
ra a. el: Pi so |5 Sisle= 2s
E a pe | SS | Bae SrPStisaas
A 5 1S = = 4 =
0 ° re) Inches. |Troy grs./Troy grs.
3.4 57.0 6.5 0.473 5.27 1.28 - 0.81
3.4: 56.2 6.5 A461 14 25 80
3.3 55.8 6.3 455 09 18 SL
3.1 55.7 5.9 453 07 10 82
3.1 50.3 5.9 447 -OL .09 82
3.0 54.2 5.7 431 4.83 .02 Fists)
2.9 54.4 5.9 434 86 0.99 38
2.8 54,3 5.3 A432 86 94 84
4.4, 54.6 8.4 437 .88 1.57 | 76
5.5 55 6 9.9 452 5.02 96 72
7.0 55.8 12.6 455 02 2.60 .66
8.5 56.0 | 15.3 458 02 3.31 60
10.2 56.3 17.3 462 05 Aste) a7
10,8 56.9 18.4: 465 07 4.21 .00
11.6 56,3 Ur / 462 02 538 ay]
11.9 56.3 20.2 A468 .02 73 02
11.2 56.3 ONO) 462 .03 37 OL
8.8 57.2 15.8 476 .20 3.56 09
6.5 09.2 Aloe .009 5.09 2.64 .68-
5.9 59 2 9:9 .009 62 16 72
5.0 58.9 9.0 004 OF 1.94: AYE!
4.4) 58.8 7.9 .503 06 67 17
4.0 58.4 | 7.2 496 .50 .00 79
3.5 58.3 6.3 494 49 29 81

All the Hygrometrical elements are computed by the Greenwich Constants.
From the Ist January 1863, the Greenwich New Factors have been used
for, computing Dew-point.

Meteorological Observations. iti

Abstract of the Results of the Hourly Meteorological Observations
taken at the Surveyor General's Office, Calcutta,
in the month of January, 1863.
Solar Radiation, Weather, &ce.
e ° o ®
ed |2:
Ba Sa Ub clit
.| 2s |© S| Prevailing direction General Aspect of the Sky.
2| es |e 38 of the Wind.
BS] oo eae
(0) Inches
1) 139.6 Bee IN: Cloudless till 4p. mu. Scatd. “i after-
wards.
2) 140.9 N. Scatd. i till 10 a. mw. cloudless till 5
p. M. Scatd. i afterwards.
3] 134.0 N. Seatd. i till 7 a. m. cloudless after-
wards; also slightly foggy after 8 P. M.
CH eas Sunday.
5} «134.0 N. Cloudless.
6} 129.0 N. Cloudless ; also slightly foggy after 7
. P. M.
Zi BBE) N. Cloudless; also slightly fogey after 9
P. M.
8} 134.0 N. Cloudless; also foggy between Mid-
night & 7 A. M.
9} 1384.0 N. Cloudless.
10} 139.0 . |N.& W. Cloudless.
il eee 50 Sunday.
12) 1334] ... |N.&N. W. Cloudless.
13} 134.0 ae 8. &N. Cloudless till 5 a. mu. Seatd. “i and “i
till 1 p. mu. cloudless afterwards.
14) 132.0] ... |S.GN.&S.W Cloudless till 7 a. m. Scatd. “i and i
till 3 Pp. M. cloudless afterwards.
15) 126.2 a 8S. & H. Cloudless till 10 a. mM. Scatd. \-i till 2
p. M. cloudless afterwards ; also foggy
between 4 & 7 A. M.
16) 134.0 shee N.&S Cloudless ; also fogey between 4 and 7
A. M.
We age S.&N. W. Scatd. -i till 5 a. u. cloudy till 7 Pp. u.
Scatd. -i afterwards; also slightly
drizzled at 3 P. M.
18 500 Sunday.
19) 134.0 N.&S.W. &H Cloudless.
20| 121.2 S.&S. W. Cloudless till 7 a. mu. Scatd. oi till 4
p. M. cloudless afterwards.
21} 132.0 N. & HE, Scatd. i & “i till 7 a. m. cloudless
afterwards.
22) 185.0 EE aIING Cloudless; also foggy at 9 Pp, mu.
23| 1382.0 . |N.& W. Cloudless.
24 ; soo. No es Se Cloudless till 7 a. m. cloudy till 3 P. um.
cloudless till 7 p.m. Scatd. i after-
wards.
25 noe ve ~=6| Sunday,
-AG|) IBYALO IE aan Wy aNle Cloudless; also slightly fogey after 8

P. M.

Mi Cirri, \-i Cirro strati, %i Cumuli, +i Cumulo strati, v-i Nimbi, —i Strata
wi Cirro cumuli,

liv Meteorological Observations.

Abstract of the Results of the Hourly Meteorological Observations
taken at the Surveyor General's Office, Calcutta,
in the month of January, 1863.

Solar Radiation, Weather, &c.

asl [AS

et 2 25

ne |o @ 8| Prevailing direction Geneval Aspect of the Sky.
£| 4s |288| ofthe Wind.
cS So L Bee
Al = pO
site soe ek aca

3S Inches.
27| 128.0 ea INE oa Was Cloudless ; also slightly fogey between
7&10P. mM.

28) 1381.2 N Cloudless.
29) 129.2 nk N. &N. W. Cloudless.
30] 132.8 .. |N. & N. W. Cloudless ; also fogey after 7 P. mu.
31| 126.4 W.&N. &S. W. Cloudless till 5 a. m. Scatd. clouds til]

- 4p. Mm. cloudless afterwards.

Meteorological Observations. lv

Abstract of the Results of the Hourly Meteorological Observations
taken at the Surveyor General's Office, Calcutta,
in the month of January, 1863.

Mownruiy RKesucrs.
Inches
Mean height of the Barometer for the month, 96 ee 30.043
Max. height of the Barometer occurred at 10 A.M. on the 26th, .. 30.189
Min. height of the Barometer occurred at 6 P. M. on the 13th, oe 29.919

Eutreme range of the Barometer during the month, 60 oe 0.270
Mean of the daily Max. Pressures, 50 30 oe 30.121
Ditto ditto Min. ditto, ie a .. 29.984;
Mean daily range of the Barometer during the month, .. an 0.137
to)
Mean Dry Bulb Thermometer for the month, oe ee 67.3
Max. Temperature occurred at 3 P. M. on the 2nd, ate Sts 79.9
Min. Temperature occurred at 7 a. M. on the 13th, ve ete 54.8
Lxtreme range of the Temperature during the month, .. 0 25.1
Mean of the daily Max. Temperature, 50 a0 oe 76.5
Ditto ditto Min. ditto, ate OC 50 59.5
Mean daily range of the Temperature during the month, Ol 17.0
()
Mean Wet Bulb Thermometer for the month, a ae 61.2
Mean Dry Bulb Thermometer above Mean Wet Bulb Thermometer,.. 6.1L
Computed Mean Dew-point for the month, oo e 56.3
Mean Dry Bulb Thermometer above computed Mean Dew-point, .. 11.0-
Inches
Mean Elastic force of Vapour for the month,.. ee ee 0.462

Troy grains

Mean Weight of Vapour for the month, oe ve oe 5.11
Additional Weight of Vapour required for complete saturation, a0 2.26
Mean degree of humidity for the month, complete saturation being unity, 0.69

Inches
Drizzled 1 day, Max. fall of rain during 24 hours, ae oe ap Nite
Total amount of rain during the month, .. a6 8 Nil.

Prevailing direction of the Wind, as oe oe N,

lvi Meteorological Observations.

“Abstract of the Results of the Hourly Meteorological Observations
taken at the Surveyor General's Office, Calcutta,
in the month of January, 1863.

Monruiy Resvurs.

“Table showing the number of days on which at a given hour any particular wind
blew, together with the number of days on which at the same hour,
when any particular wind was blowing, it rained.

Hour. 2 sg : :i g Bi Wiiscrefes) fae breil (aes
of .|° S 5 | 5 Sf; |54 ./oys
eis) s =| £ ele els|aie

J21Z 4) EB. |S48. 5.2] aIW. |e) 7 jelS leis
3
No
Midnight. } 1; 2 1 1 3
1 1 3 1 2
2 1 3 il 2
3 2 3 1 2 il
4 1 3 1 2 3
5 1 3| ” 2 6
6 1 2 : 2 2
vA 2 2 2 1)
8 2 4 5 2
9 2| Wl 3
10 3 2 4 i 2
11 3 3 3 1 3 1
Noon. 3 3 3 5 5
1 3 1 3 6 a
2 3 il 2 5 6
3 1 2 3 3} 1} 5
4 2 3 2 3 4
5 3 3 1 2 2 2
6 2 4 2 3 3 1
7 1 4 3 2) 2 1
8 1 4 2 3 2 2
9 1 4 3 2 2 1
10 1 4 3 2 2
11 1 3 3 1 2 1

Meteorological Observations. lvii

Abstract of the Results of the Hourly Meteorological Observations
taken at the Surveyor General's Office, Calcutta,
in the month of February, 1863.

Latitude 22° 33’1” North. Longitude 88° 20’ 34” East.

Feet.
Height of the Cistern of the Standard Barometer above the Sea-level, 18.11

Daily Means, &c. of the Observations and of the Hygrometrical elements

dependent thereon.

= S ee
s Bae Range of the Barometer z 3 |Range of the Tempera-
“Ep ae during the day. i 5 ture during the day.
o 5 ‘si
Date, | 72 a i a Ge -
=< | Max. | Min. | Dif. | 8 | Max. | Min. | Dif.
a a
Inches. | Inches. | Inches. | Inches. ) ty) | oO 0
1 | Sunday.
2 29.994 | 30.082 | 29.935 0.147 | 69.7 81.2 60.0 | 21.2
3 £900 | 29.987 826 GH | ZO ela 628 | 18.6
4 867 944, 812 132) 71.1 81.4 62.6 | 18.8
5 887 962 836 AU26) lez 81.0 | 62.8 | 18.2
6 916 984 855 2129) | 72.4: 81.8 | 63.8 | 18.0
7 -964 | 30.069 907 | 162 | 73.4 81.8 66.4 | 15.4
8 | Sunday. |
| |
ty) .920 001 77 ; 124 | . 69.8 79.6 60.8 | 18.8
10 .909 | 29.981 801 130 | 70.1 80.2 60.0 | 20.2
il .965 | 30.026 882 | 144) 63.7 69.8 | 61.2 8.6
12 980 047 923 | 124 | 68.0 75.2 62.4 | 12.8
13 961 050 | 895 | .155 | 68.8 77.5 60.0 | 17.5
14 902 | 29.964: | 850) 114 | 67.5 72.8 63.2 9.6
15 | Sunday.
16 AB BEG RR RE GRA Wee GS) | oe
17 919 soil 867 | 124 | 72.2 81.2 65.9 | 15.3
18 971 | 30.044: 924 | 120, 72.9 82.8 63.8 | 19.0
19 994 073 935 | .188 | 73.5 83.8 64.0 | 19.8
20 80.009 .093 955 138 | 74.3 83.9 66.2 | 17.7
21 29.988 .070 927 143, 73.9 82.6 67.0 | 15.6
22 =| Sunday.
23 964) 051 .899 152 | 70.1 82.4 59.4 | 23.0
24, 985 097 928 GD eile 83.0 61.6 | 21.4
25 961 .036 898 138 | 72.1 84.6 61.1 | 23.5
26 .924 | 29.995 861 134 | 74.6 85.6 65.2 | 20.4
27 913 989 829 160 | 75.4 86.8 65.8 | 21.0
28 903 995 841 154) 77.8 87.8 67.0 | 20.8

The Mean height of the Barometer, as likewise the Mean Dry and Wet Bulb
Thermometers are derived from the twenty-four hourly Observations made during
the day.

lyil Meteorological Observations.

Abstract of the Results of the Hourly Meteorological Observations
taken at the Surveyor General's Office, Calcutta,
in the month of February, 1863.

Daily Means, &c. of the Observations and of the Hygrometrical elements
dependent thereon.— (Continued).

Hains a ease pas) | =

Wise 3 = 2 @ Sito > 3 | 5 2
E 0). Pe : See ea 2 psi aS
Aa ° > Seg 2
es o 5 Se a. O 7a ae S| O-5
5 3 3 ra © oe | Seas
Daten ou. z=) a ia S Zo ee | SE on
a5 a |e 2:| #2 Se | Ss
= a = 2 Bo as agra bese ec ps SS)
a Ss 3 |e Bp Se | sh eee epee
a 8 aa) 2. = a = eles e ol eee
oS 2 x ar] Sot!) e= 2
6 8 P 5 agen Si | ie a cabrio

| = a O a z = ss a
oO 0 05 |" "0 Inches.| T. gr. | T. gr. |

1 Sunday.

2 63.0 6.7 57.6 | 12.1 0.483 5.31 2.62 0 67

3 65.4 5.6 60.9 | 10.1 0389 92 30 712

4 63.0 8.1 56.5 | 14.6 465 10 | 3.18 .62

5 62.8 8.4: 56.1 | 15.1 459 04: 26 61

6 63.9 8.5 57.1 | 15.3 475 .20 40 6

7 66.6 6.8 61.2 | 12.2 544. 95 2.92, .67

8 {| Sunday.

9 61.0 88 54.0 | 15.8 428 4.70 3.25 59
0 62.4 7.7 56.2 | 13.9 461 5.06 2.97 63
il 60.8 2.9 58.2 5.5 493 48 Lil 83
£2 63.5 4.5 59.9 8.1 021 .76 77 nid,
13 63.0 5.8 58.4 | 10.4 496 47 2 2¢ 71
14 63.9 3.6 61.0 6.5 O41 98 1.44 Si
15 Sunday.

16 67.9 4.5 64.3 8.1 603 6.61 99 17
17 66.1 6.1 61.2 | 11.0 04.4 5.97 2.58 70
18 64.1 8.8 57.1 | 15.8 ATS 19 3.54 .60
19 65.9 7.6 60.6 | 12.9 004 82 .08 .63
20 65.9 8.4 | 60.0 | 14.3 .023 Bf AL 63
21 64.9 9.0 68.6 | 15.3 .499 45 .56 61
22 Sunday.
23 60.2 9.9 52.3 | 17.8 404, 4,44, 59 50
24 60.9 10.8 52.3 | 19.4 404: 43 4.00 53
25 62.3 9.8 54.5 | 17.6 435 16 3.77 06
26 64.9 87 58.1 | 16.5 491 5.34 86 58
27 66.2 9.2 59.8 | 15.6 520 64: af) -60
28 67.6 9.7 60.8 | 16.5 537 82 4.16 58

|

|

|

All the Hygrometrical elements are computed by the Greenwich Constants.
From the lst January 1863, the Greenwich New Factors have been used for
computing Dew-point.

Meteorological Observations. lix

Abstract of the Results of the Hourly Meteorological Observations
taken at the Surveyor General's Office, Calcutta,
in the month of February, 1863.

Hourly Means, &c. of the Observations and of the Hygrometrical elements

dependent thereon.

iro) 2 | Range of the Barometer = 8 Range of the Temperature
age for each hour during mae for each hour during
Hour = g loa the month. bs the month.
4) feel as) as
ao? : i eS : :
sc 2 | Max. Min. Diff. se, | Max. Min. Diff.
= =
Inches. | Inches.| Inches.) Inches. o to) tv) ti)
Mid- {, 9
night. 29.944 \30.010 | 29.863 | 0.147 67.5 71.8 62.4, 9.4
1 933 .001 .853 .148 66.7 70.8 62.8 8.0
2 923 |29.992 841 -L51 66.1 69.8 61.2 8.6
3 914 -981 .835 146 65.2 69.4 60.8 8.6
4 907 974 .822 152 64.5 69.2 60.2 90
5 929 |30.007 846 161 63.8 67.6 60.0 7.6
6 941 04:4 856 .188 63.7 68.8 59.4 9.4
7 961 .052 874 178 63.6 68.4 596 8.8
8 .984 .060 .908 6152 66.5 71.4, 61.2 10.2
9 |30.008 091 .935 £156 69.6 74.3 61.3 13.0
10 019 .097 943 154 72.9 77.8 62.4 15.4:
11 007 081 937 144 75.6 81.6 61.9 19.7
Neon. | 29.984 .060. 917 143 "7.9 84.0 62.6 21.4
1 .953 .037 .882 .155 79.4 85.8 63.8 | 22.0
2 .920 007 844 .163 80.4 86.8 64.2 22.6
3 .898 '29.986 .823 163 80.7 87.8 63.2 24.6
4 .888 .977 812 .165 80.3 86.4 63.2 23.2
5 .888 .962 824: .138 79.4 84.9 70.6 14.3
6 894 .965 .813 0152 75.8 82.6 63.6 19.0
7 .910 .991 837 154 73.4 79.8 63.0 16.8
8 .927 |30.011 | 851 .160 72.0 79,2 63.0 16.2
9 941 .028 .858 .170 70.8 78.6 63.4: 15.2
10 .946 .020 .850 170 69.7 78.0 62.8 15.2
il 944 021 1855 166 68,9 77.6 62.0 15.6

The Mean Height of the Barometer, as likewise the Mean Dry and Wet Bulb
Thermometers are derived from the Observations made at the several hours
during the month.

lx Meteorological Observations.

Abstract of the Results of the Hourly Meteorological Observations
taken at the Surveyor General’s Office, Calcutta,
in the month of February, 1863.

Hourly Means, &c. of the Observations and of the Hygrometrical elements
dependent thereon.—(Continued.)

ae
Fa eS
beh: >
Oo 2
Hour. ae S
ae) a
ga | a
25 |p
= a
o )
Me eS aah AA
night
1 62.7 4.0
2 62.4 3.7
3 61.7 3.5
4 61.0 3.5
5 60.6 3.2
6 60.6 3.1
v | 60.4: 3.2
8 61.8 4.7
9 63.0 6.6
10 64.2 8.7
11 64.8 10.8
Noon. |} 65.2 12.7
1 65.8 13.6
2 66.3 14.1
3 66.5 14.2
4 66.1 14.2
5 66.7 12.7
6 67.3 8.5
7 | 66.3 71
8 65.7 6.3
9 64.9 5.9
10 64.4 5.3
11 63.8 5.1 |

Computed Dew Point.

Dry Bulb above Dew

DAAAAAAW A
OH OrPWwWwahy ©

He
oe
EN ido)

18.4

Point,

Mean Blastic force of
Vapour,

Inches.

0.516

515
513
004:
A493
A85
486
481
489
A85
A76
476

462
462
AG
467
A61
486
046
034
.536
527
527
018

pour in a cubic foot

Mean Weight of Va-
of air.

5.71

70
68
.60
48
09
AL
36
Ad
39
.20
18

.00
4.99
ogy)
5.03
4.96
5.24
94,
82
87
78
79
12

Additional Weight of
Vapour required for

complete saturation.

Troy grs./Troy grs.

AP rfl

Mean degree of Hu-
midity, complete satu-
ration being unity.

All the Hygrometrical elements are computed by the Greenwich Constants.
From the lst January 1863, the Greenwich New Factors have been used for

computing Dew-point.

|

Meteorological Observations. Ixi

Abstract of the Results of the Hourly Meteorological Observations
taken at the Surveyor General’s Office, Calcutta,
in the month of Kebruary, 1863.

Solar Radiation, Weather, &c.

wu gi o
SB a ee
o-3 |ead Uae
.| 2 |© & S| Prevailing direction General Aspect of the Sky.
= ie si © of the Wind.
al s~ lgweed
ae eit Ata ea a
Co) Inches
1 Sa ne Sunday.
2) 135.0 | ,,,. | Variable. Cloudless; also foggy between 8 &9
P. M.
3) 135.0 , |S: W. & W. Cloudless.
4) 137.0 ao | We Gs Sb We Cloudless ; also foggy after 9 P. M.
5) 140.2 nn | dNle Wie Ga Se Wie Cloudless.
6) 137.0 a5 Se Wo 63 So Cloudless till 7 Pp. mu. Scatd. clouds
afterwards; also drizzled between
8 and 9 P. M.
7| 185.0 S.W.&S Scatd. -i till 2 p. mu. cloudless after-
wards; also drizzling between 8 & 9
P. M.
Sie Sunday.
9! 138.5 N.W.& W.&N. | Cloudless.
10; 1383.0 HE. &N. W. Cloudless till 2 Pp. u. cloudy afterwards ;
also drizzling at 8 & 10 p. M.
11 a 0.96 | H. &N. Cloudy: also incessantly drizzling the
whole day. 7
12) 134.5 N. &N. H. & W. Cloudy till 7 a. m. Seatd. 91 till 4 P. m.
cloudless afterwards; also foggy at
Midnight
13!) 133.0 N. &N. W. Cloudless till 10 a. m. Scatd. “i & %i
till 3 Pp. m. cloudless afterwards ; also
slightly foggy at 9 P. M.
14 H.&S8.&8. H. Cloudless till 44. um. cloudy till 6 Pp. m.
cloudless afterwards.
15 ah ne Sunday.
16) 129.0 | 0.24 |N. EH. & 8. Cloudy till 11 a. m. Scatd. “i till 6
p. M. cloudy afterwards; also rain-
ing at 4a. um. & between 6 & 7 A. M.
17; 134.0 ane | dNlo 3 dic Scatd. clouds till 1 p. m. cloudless after-
wards ; also foggy between 4.& 7 a. M.
18} 136.9 EH. & S. EH. Cloudless.
19| 136.5 S.&8S. EH. &H, Cloudless.
20) 134.4 N. &E. Cloudless.
21; 134.0 N. Cloudless.
22 sot AS Sunday
23) 130.0 set W. Cloudless.
24, 1384.8 | ... | W.&S8. Cloudless.
25) 140.0] ., N. W. & W.&S. W. | Cloudless.
26; 1387.8) .. W.&S. Cloudless.
27; 140.0 sos | Bo Wo a MAY Cloudless.
28) 132.0 sey onesie Cloudless.

Ni Cirri, -i Cirro strati, \i Cumuli, ~i Cumulo strati, \-i Nimbi,—i Strati,

“wy i Cirro cumuli,

bet Meteorological Observations.

Abstract of the Results of the Hourly Meteorological Observations
taken at the Surveyor General’s Office, Calcutta,
in the month of February, 1863.

Montuty REsutts.

Inches

Mean height of the Barometer for the month, .. se e. 29.940
Max. height of the Barometer occurred at 10 A. M. on the 24th, ee 30.097
Min. height of the Barometer occurred at 4 P. M. on the 4th, e. 29.812
Extreme range of the Barometer during the month, 50 e» 0.285
Mean of the Daily Max. Pressures, .. oe se -- 30.029
Ditto ditto Min. ditto, .. 90 oc co) Shstelll
Mean daily range of the Barometer during the month, .. ss 0.139

Co)

Mean Dry Bulb Thermometer for the month, .. ce “Bd 71.6
Max. Temperature occurred at 3 Pp. M. on the 28th, se ee 87.8
Min. Temperature occurred at 6 A. M. on the 23rd, oe oe 59.4:
Extreme range of the Temperature during the month, .. oe 28.4
Mean of the daily Max. Temperature, 50 ee eo 81.1
Ditto ditto Min. ditto, .. 50 ee 50 63.4
Mean daily range of the Temperature during the month, .. ee 17.7
Mean Wet Bulb Thermometer for the month, .. O0 Sc 64.0
Mean Dry Bulb Thermometer above Mean Wet Bulb Thermometer, .. 7.6
Computed Mean Dew-point for the month, .. ee ee 57.9

Mean Dry Bulb Thermometer above computed Mean Dew-point, ae 13.7

. Inches
Mean Elastic force of Vapour for the month, .. ee ee =: 0.488

Troy grains

Mean Weight of Vapour for the month, ee ee 30 5.34
Additional Weight of Vapour required for complete saturation, 20 3.06
Mean degree of humidity for the month, complete saturation being unity, 0.64

Inches
Rained 5 days, Max. fall of rain during 24 hours, ae ee 0.96
Total amount of rain during the month, oe ee ee 1.20

Prevailing direction of the Wind, .. ee “ee W.&N. & BE.

Meteorological Observations. ]xiit

Abstract of the Results of the Hourly Meteorological Observations
taken at the Surveyor General's Office, Calcutta,
in the month of February, 1863.

eo

Montuty Resvuts.

Table showing the number of days on which at a given hour any particular wind
blew, together with the number of days on which at the same hour,

when any particular wind was blowing, it rained.

ur, 5 5 5 S| .| 6 Sh -leh ./S/-
. z/Als elsd|=] (Sil s| | sfElspels| 2
Nu lz, jt] Be [2 fos |e |S. choi (ee ce le |e 1S |e (e
No. of days
Midnight. 4 5| 1 Ale {ol ate 2 2
1 4 4) 1 4 4, 6 2
2 4 4| 1 P4) | 4) 75 2 1
3 A 4| 1 4 4 5 3
4 3 Al 1 P 4) 1] 2) 1 4 3 4
5 5 2 12) | 2) 16 3 4
6 5 AW GT ah Ok I Sy 3
7 6 2 2) | 1) 173) | 3) £3 4
8 | By) 4 3| 1 AG 3] 3
9 3| 13 Pa) abe |) a 3] 16 2
10 4) 15 Zales test 4 5
11 2] | 4 Allee?) aaa 1; 16 4
Noon, 2 4 By a) Pay || al 1 6 4| [1
1 4 1 4| 1} 1) f 2) 9 2 3 Y/
2 A 3 3) 1 2) Fi) 4 4) | 3
3 3) 1 2) 1) 3) F 2 3 6 4
4 3 1 4| 1} 3} 2 5 5 1
5 2 2 5 Tt) aL 5 5| | 2 1
6 4 1 4) | 2) 71 5 5| | 2
7 4| 1) 1 3 wa || 5 4| | 2
8 4| 101 3| 1] 2 3 5 A) 42
9 4 1 3 2 3] 11 6 4) | 1
10 4 1 BH Llc | | zt 5 Ae \y a
11 4 1 3 || al 5 4) | 1

|
|

Meteorological Observations. Ixv

Abstract of the Results of the Hourly Meteorological Observations
taken at the Surveyor General's Office, Calcutta,
in the month of March, 1863.

Latitude 22° 33’ 1” North. Longitude 88° 20’ 34” East,
Feet.
Height of the Cistern of the Standard Barometer above the Sea-level, 18.11.
Daily Means, &c. of the Observations and of the Hygrometrical elements

dependent thereon.

Range of the Barometer

Range of the Tempera
during the day.

ture during the day.

J

Thermometer.

the Barometer
at 32° Faht.

Max. | Min. | Dif, Max. | Min. | Diff.

Mean Height of

Mean Dry Bulb

Inches. | Inches. | Inches. | Inches.
Sunday.

°
°
°
°

3
=
Q
1
2 |29.800 | 29.885 | 29.726 0.159 79.7 89.6 71.6 | 18.0
3 762 832 .700 132 80.9 91.1 73.8 |) 17.3
4 795 .876 746 .130 81.3 91.3 74.8 | 16.5
5
6
v4
8
9

844: 923 791 182 81.4 91.4: 75.8 | 15.6
832 -909 174A: 135 81.6 91.6 75.0 | 16.6
831 903 782 21 81.0 91.8 74.8 | 17.0
Sunday.
876 94:7 823 124 80.8 91.8 72.0 | 19.8
10 .866 954: 794 160 81.4 91.8 74.0 | 17.8
11 793 .882 722 160 81.5 91.3 73.8 | 17.5
12 754 831 702 0129 81.6 94.0 71.8 | 22.2
13 739 811 683 128 81.7 93.0 75.0 | 18.0

14 814 .889 fol 138 81.9 90.6 76.2 | 14.4
15 | Sunday.

16 872 955 .818 137 80.7 87.2 75.8 | 11.4
17 823 898 759 139 80.7 92.4 72.8 | 19.6

18 .865 937 -809 128 79.3 87.6 71.2 | 16.4
19 917 | 30,017 847 170 81.9 92.2 73.4 | 18.8
20 896 | 29.976 828 148 83.0 93.4: 74.2 | 19.2

21 896 975 837 138 83.5 93.4 74,0 | 19.4
22 | Sunday.

23 .863 948 801 147 86.8 96.0 77.8 | 18.2
24, 846 .930 791 139 86.3 97.8 76.8 | 21.0
25 839 .906 .788 118 87.6 98.4: 77.0 | 21.4
26 845 921 775 146 85.6 96.4: 75.4 | 210
27 805 .887 731 156 85.7 96.9 76.4 | 20.5
28 769 854 2696 158 85.8 97.6 75.6 | 22.0
29 | Sunday.

30 771 848 .697 151 86,4: 98.0 80.0 | 18.0

31 761 848 .676 172 87.0 99.0 79.8 | 19.2
The Mean height of the Barometer, as likewise the Mean Dry and Wet Bulb

Thermometers are derived from the twenty-four hourly Observations made during
the day.

Ixvi

Meteorological Observations.

Abstract of the Results of the Hourly Meteorological Observations
taken at the Surveyor General's Office, Calcutta,
on the month of March, 1863.
Daily Means, &c. of the Observations and of the Hygrometrical elements
dependent thereon.— (Continued).

E i 2/22 | 23
5 ; ; A BeOS | 22
EI 43 =| eS Bw 1 ox el =
ei 2 = o = ° re & 5s 4
2 a fe E & Soy (see) =) 2
Z 2 E q : 2& (SBS/ 53
6 ° © re Bie |i 2) So
Q Q n 20 Ss aa e
o S ro 2 Se Os la Fe 22 2
eS es = 2 Se As FO |g=8| P22
2 Ey 3 os S Sn, mi) 7 255

3 ao 5 a, ‘3 ce = ===
= 5 A fae 8 an Se o-- |S 8a) 63.5
A = a iS) a | 2 A < i=

o 0 ra) Inches. | T. gr.| T. gr

1 | Sunday.

2 71.4 8.3 65.6 14.1 0.630 6.80 | 3.92 | 0.63

3 73.9 7.0 69.0 11.9 “704 7.57 53 .68

4 747 6.6 70.1 11.2 2129 85 3} 70

5 74.2 7.2 69,2 12.2 .708 62 65 68

6 74.4 7.2 69.4 12.2 713 ‘67 | 67 | .68

7 71.2 9.8 64.3 16.7 603 6.49 | 4.65 58

8 | Sunday.

9 73.5 7.3 68.4 12.4 .690 7.44 | 3.63 67
10 74.6 6.8 69.8 11.6 722 76 ol 69
11 75.6 5.9 Web, 10.0 .763 8.21 10 13
12 70.8 10.8 63.2 18.4 582 6.26 | 5.08 55
13 75.6 6.1 7A3 10.4 .758 SHINS || Spel 72
14 73.4 8.5 67.4 14.5 668 Ca ART 63
15 | Sunday.

16 73.2 7.5 67.9 12.8 679 31 | 3.73 .66
17 71.2 9.5 64.5 16.2 607 6.54 | 4.50 09
18 68.9 10.4: 61.6 Wa 502 5.95 64 56
19 69.7 12.2 61.2 20.7 044 .84 | 5.60 51
20 74.0 9.0 67.7 15.3 674: 7.24 | 4.58 61
21 69.7 13.8 60,0 23.5 023 5.99 | 6.41 AT
22 | Sunday.

23 Tell 14.7 63.3 23.5 584 6.20 | 7.01 47
24, 72.8 3.5 63.3 23.0 584 21 | 6.81 48
25 72.1 15.5 62:8 24.8 OTA 10 | 7.42 45
26 70.2 15.4: 59.4 26.2 513 5.47 29 AB
27 72.5 13.1 63.4 22.3 086 6.24 | 6.56 49
28 72.5 13.3 63.2 22.6 582, 19 64 48
29 | Sunday.

30 Da 6.7 75.0 11.4 854 9.11 | 3.95 .70

31 79.5 7.5 75.0 12.0 804 09 | 4.20 68

All the Hygrometrical elements are computea by the Greenwich Constants.
From the 1st January 1863, the Greenwich New Factors have been used

for computing Dew-point.

Meteorological Observations. Ixvil

Abstract of the Results of the Hourly Meteorological Observations
taken at the Surveyor Generals Office, Calcutta,
in the month of March, 1863.

Hourly Means, &c. of the Observations and of the Hygrometrical elements
dependent thereon.

x) 8 _ | Range of the Barometer for = 5 Senos Mt Uehasect =
Ses each hour during the Qo ae cachy hoe
e & oS Ea b 5 wes
our. as BS 2, fa g month,
=) oe o
f+ | Max. | Min. | Dif. | 246 | Max. | Min. | Dim
= =
Inches. | Inches. | Inches. | Inches. fo) fo) fo) fa)
Mid- a
night. 29.833 | 29.906 | 29.731 0.175 (8.1 81.8 75.0 6.3
1 823 897 .718 79 77 A 81.4 73.6 7.8
2 813 .888 .716 172 76.7 81.0 734 76
3 .800 881 -708 178 76.3 80.8 73.2 7.6
4 797 877 705 ays) 76.0 80.4 72.4 8.0
5 .805 .891 716 175 75.4 80.0 71.2 8.8
6 .832 918 | 732 .186 Bal 80.0 71.2 8.8
7 .851 0957 746 211 75.4 80.2 71.6 8.6
8 .882 .992 787 .205 78.5 82.8 75,2 1.6
9 .898 | 30.004 797 .207 81.5 87.8 75.8 | 12.0
10 .903 014: 811 .203 84.6 90.2 80.6 9.6
11 .892 017 «798 .219 87.4 92.2 83.8 8.4
Noon. .867 | 29.992 772 .220 89.8 95.0 85.0 | 10.0
1 2836 .953 742 211 91.5 97.0 86.2 | 10.8
2 .807 .925 701 224 92.7 98.6 87.2 | 11.4
3 .783 .885 687 198 93.1 99.0 86.6 | 12.4
4 771 874 681 193 92.7 98.8 85.5 | 13.3
5 771 .858 .688 oL70 89.9 96.4 83.8 | 126
6 772 .853 .676 77 87.1 94,2 81.9 | 12.3
7 -785 .859 .698 161 84.5 89.4 80.8 8.6
8 .806 .881 724 157 82.5 86.8 78.6 8.2
9 823 .898 754 144 81.0 86.8 77.6 9.2
10 .830 .913 748 .165 79.9 86.6 76.4 | 10.2
11 831 915 740 175 78.9 84.0 75.0 9.0

The Mean Height of the Barometer, as likewise the Mean Dry and Wet Bulb

Thermometers are derived from the Observations made at the several hours
during the month.

Ixviil Meteorological Observations.

Abstract of the Results of the Hourly Meteorological Observations
taken at the Surveyor General's Office, Calcutta,
in the month of March, 1868.

Hourly Means, &c. of the Observations and of the Hygrometrical elements
dependent thereon.—( Continued).

Baie (ee oS le cl eae
a ae 3 & “5 |sea | es
He) 2 > ° 4h) (es +=
= 5 i i) Ome oe , (ood os
Hour.| © a A B ie e's eo 2 (3°s
@ 2 2 3 fel Se ees eae, bp 5
Be |e) | ie lee | Se 6 soe eee
ge RO) MS | pa | Boe 28 Sere ae
= a iS) a =) = 4 =
0 0) () Oo Inches. |Troy grs.|Troy grs.
Mid- ss : =
night. (2.7 5.4 68.9 9.2 | 0.701 7.60 2.62 0.74:
1 72.4 5.0 68.9 8.5 -701 .60 41 76
Z 718 4.9 68.4: 8.3 -690 50 .30 17
3 72.0 4.3 69.0 7.3 «704 .65 04: 19
4: 71.8 4.2 8.9 foal .701 63 U7 .80
5 71.7 3.7 69.1 63 706 .69 74 82
6 71.0 4.1 68.1 7.0 684. 44. .90 .80
7 71.1 4.3 68.1 Tek .684: 44 $5) of)
8 72.0 6.5 67.4 Iileil .668 23 3.12 -70
9 72.4 9.1 66 0 15.5 .638 6.85 4,46 61
10 73.2 11.4 65.2 19.4 .621 .65 5.74 .o4
11 734 14.0 65.0 22.4 617 57 6.88 49
Noon.| 74.1 | 15.7 64.7 | 25.1 611 AT 7.95 A5
1 74.3 17.2 64.0 27.5 | .597 28 8.87 42
2 74.7 | 18.0 63.9 | 28.8 2595 25 9.43 40
3 74.3 18.8 63.0 | 30.1 078 .08 78 38
4 74.7 18.0 63.9 | 28.8 595 .25 43 40
5 74.6 15.3 65.4 24.5 .626 61 7.85 4G
6 TA.9 12.2 67.6 19.5 .672 7.14 6.19 204
7 7A 2 10.3 67 0 17.5 .659 04 5.31 57
8 73.8 8.7 67.7 14.8 674 2A 4,40 .62
9 73.5 7.5 68.2 12.8 .686 08 3.76 .66
10 73.1 6.8 68.3 11.6 .688 AZ .o6 .69
11 73.0 5.9 68.9 10.0 “701 .09 2.88 3
|

All the Hygrometrical elements are computed by the Greenwich Constants.
From the Ist January 1863, the Greenwich New Factors have been used
for computing Dew-point.

Meteorological Observations.

xix

Abstract of the Results of the Hourly Meteorological Observations
taken at the Surveyor General's Office, Calcutta,
in the month of March, 1863.
Solar Radiation, Weather, &c.

Ba |@e
‘So-g |8O.3
Relea & © © S| Prevailing direction
= 4S 52 8 of the Wind.
Al & |swe
fo) Inches
1 Be Sunday.
2} 140.8 Ss. &S. W.
8} 188.5 S.
4) 139.0 ele
5] 189.4 ns S.
6} 137.0 8S. &S. W.
7| 142.5 8. &58. W.
Sis: Sunday.
9} 140.0 obo S. W. &S.
10) 187.5 Gases Nhs
11} 187.4 roe AL SS
12} 138.0 son |) Se
13} 140.0 Sah aS
14; 135.3 5 So We 3 Se
B= a0 . | Sunday.
16 a 5.& W.&S. W.
17| 187.5 S.&W.&N. W.
18 N. W.&S. W.
19} 133.0 S. GH. &N.
20} 133.5 W.&S.W.&S.
ai] 135.3 S. & N.
22, abe Sunday.
23) 137.8 Se Sa Wands: Wee
24) 140.4 S. W. & W.
25|- 137.0 N.W.&N.& 8. W
26} 136.0 IN. & N. W.
27| 144.2 N.&S. W.

General Aspect of the Sky.

Cloudless.

Cloudless till 2 a. mM. cloudy till 8 a. uM.
cloudless afterwards.

Cloudless till 6 a. w. Seatd. clouds till
10 a. u. cloudless afterwards.

Cloudy till 8 a. mu. cloudless afterwards.

Flying clouds till 7 a. m. cloudless
afterwards.

Cloudless.

Cloudless.

Cloudless till 4 4. m. cloudy till 9 a. M.
cloudless afterwards; also foggy be-
tween Midnight & 4 a. M.

Flying clouds till 4 a. m. cloudless
afterwards; also foggy between 5
& 7 A. M.

Cloudless.

Cloudless till1 p. m. Scatd. “i till 6 ~
p. M. cloudless afterwards.

Cloudless.

Cloudy till 6 Pp. M.
wards.

Cloudless till 4 a. m. cloudy till 9 a. mu.
Scatd. i till 7 p. m. cloudless after-
wards.

Cloudless till 6 a. u. cloudy till 6 P. M.
Seatd. i afterwards.

Cloudy till9 a.m. Scatd. i till 4 P. u.
cloudless afterwards.

Cloudless till 3 Pp. mM.
wards.

Scatd. clouds till 3 a. Mm. Scatd. i till
5p. M.; Scatd. “i afterwards.

cloudless after-

cloudy after-

Cloudy till 6 a. Mm. Scatd. \-i till Noon ;
cloudless afterwards.
Cloudless.

.| Cloudless.

Cloudless.
Cloudiess.

~

Ni Cirri, i Cirro strati, i Cumuli, +i Cumulo strati, “i Nimbi, —i Strati

“i Cirro cumuli,

lxx Meteorological Observations.

Abstract of the Results of the Hourly Meteorological Observations
taken at the Surveyor General's Office, Calcutta,
in the month of March, 1863.

Solar Radiation, Weather, &e.

eS oS

ERS ISS Hoes

oe BS Qe

| 2:3 |2 8 | Prevailing direction General Aspect of the Sky.
Se | Bae of the Wind.
Al & ga ©
2 Inches.
28) 138.0 bt S. & N. & W. Cloudless.
29 Be ... | Sunday.
30} 189.5 Hee” het Cloudy till 8 a. m. cloudless after-
wards.

31 140.0 a Ss. Cloudless till 4 a. m. Seatd. clouds till

9 a, M. cloudless afterwards.

\

Meteorological Observations. Ixxi

Abstract of the Results of the Hourly Meteorological Observations
taken at the Surveyor General’s Office, Calcutta,
in the month of March, 1863.

Monrarty REsuLts.

Inches
Mean height of the Barometer for the month, b6 ie 29.826
Max. height of the Barometer occurred at 11 a. M.on the 19th, .. 30.017
Min. height of the Barometer occurred at 6 P. M. on the 31st, oe 29.676
Extreme range of the Barometer during the month, De 30 0.3841
Mean of the daily Max. Pressures, 90 os st 29.905
Ditto ditto Min. ditto, ae 90 ae 29.763
Mean daily range of the Barometer during the month, .. 50 0.142
0)
Mean Dry Bulb Thermometer for the month, 50 ee 82.9
Max. Temperature occurred at 3 Pp. M. on the 31st, oe eo 99.0
Min. Temperature occurred at 5 & 6 A. M. on the 18th, .. se 71.2
Liztreme range of the Temperature during the mouth, .. 50 27.8
Mean of the daily Max. Temperature, oe aie D0 93.3
Ditto ditto Min. ditto, Ae 66 we 75.0
Mean daily range of the Temperature during the month, ae 18.3
Co)
Mean Wet Bulb Thermometer for the month, 50 50 73.1
Mean Dry Bulb Thermometer above Mean Wet Bulb Thermometey,.. 9.8
Computed Mean Dew-point for the month, 60 an 66.2
Mean Dry Bulb Thermometer above computed Mean Dew-point, .. 16.7
Inches
Mean Elastic force of Vapour for the month,.. 06 es 0.642
Troy grains
Mean Weight of Vapour for the month, oe 50 oe 6.88
Additional Weight of Vapour required for complete saturation, a5 A. 91
Mean degree of humidity for the month, complete saturation being unity, 0.58
Inches
Rained No. days, Max. fall of rain during 24 hours, .. oc Nil.
Total amount of rain during the month, .. ake ee Nil-

Prevailing direction of the Wind, ee oe 8. &S. W.

xxii Meteorological Observations.

Abstract of the Results of the Hourly Meteorological Observations
taken at the Surveyor General's Office, Calcutta,
in the month of March, 1863.

Monraty REsvtts.

Table showing the number of days on which at a given hour any particular wind
blew, together with the number of days on which at the same hour,

when any particular wind was blowing, it rained.

Hour.

Rain on.
Ss

Rain on.
Calm.
Rain on
Missed.

Rain on.
Rain on.
Ss. W

Rain on.

Midnight. |

He

KOM ONTHOUR WD &
ToT WONT Owe BB
HS OO HS et et

Hm bo OO BDH! eH

ft et

Zz
°
iS)
3

KOUuoON DOP & De
Hee

HH

DI hw wwhoHOnNa

Ee pee

ft he

He OUOUOUOTS or TB GO DO OO
bt kt Ft DO DO DOB CO HS OD OD

bob bp bh be
et

a

hows
=

Meteorological Observations. |xxiil

Abstract of the Results of the Hourly Meteorological Observations
taken at the Surveyor General's Office, Calcutta,
in the month of April, 1863.
Latitude 22° 33’ 1” North. Longitude 88° 20’ 34” East.

Feet.
Height of the Cistern of the Standard Barometer above the Sea-level, 18.11.

Daily Means, &c. of the Observations and of the Hygrometrical elements

dependent thereon.

© se)
2S 3 Range of the Barometet ea Range of the Tempera.
“Ep Bs iS during the day. pa E ture during the day.
one De ||
Daa ees a
; epane. = © t “pes
g és 2x Max. Min. Diff. Se Max. | Min. | Diff.
a oll | =
Inches. | Inches. | Inches. | Inches. Cy) 0 0 Gy)
1 | 29.748 | 29.817 | 29.661 0.156 85.0 94.6 78.6 | 16.0
2 “711 792 .611 181 §3.8 93.8 76.8 | 17.0
3 648 720 039 181 84.7 94.6 75.6 | 19.0
A 588 651 .006 145 86.0 95.2 77.2 | 18.0
5 |} Sunday.
6 595 673 .507 166 87.3 99.8 79.A | 20.4
7 578 645 .506 39 87.1 97.2 81.0 | 16.2
8 .688 776 604: 172 83.1 92.6 69.8 | 22.8
9 767 832 “714 118 84.0 92.8 Gass |) UO
10 776 842 “715 127 85.0 91.8 79.4 | 12.4
il 731 £793 .630 163 84.5 92.8 Gi.) Vaz
12 | Sunday.
13 .683 751 .608 143 83.4: 92.0 74.4 | 17.6
14 2 .800 649 silisiil 84.5 91.2 79.4 | 11.8
15 760 .837 .667 .L70 84.7 93.0 74.6 | 18.4
16 731 .802 .662 140 80.8 90.4: 72:8 | 17.6
17 .698 770 613 157 83.5 93.0 76.8 | 16.2
18 124: 800 .665 185 64.0 92.8 77.2| 15.6
19 | Sunday.
20 741 821 684: 137 82.7 92.7 74.2 | 18.5
21 773 .849 701 148 84.8 95.0 76.4 | 18.6
22 759 .830 694 136 85.2 94.8 78.4 | 16.4
23 £755 .823 .681 142 85.3 94.8 78.2 | 16.6
24, “721 “193 .640 153 85.9 94.8 79.8 | 15.0
25 702 786 593 193 83.1 90.4 75.0 | 15.4
26 | Sunday.
27 716 .788 634 154 84.5 95.6 75.2 | 20.4
28 .636 -766 70 .196 86.5 95.2 77.8 | 17.4
29 .654: .733 523 210 84.2 94.5 76.0 | 18.5
30 645 .706 097 109 80.2 87.2 TAA | 13.1

The Mean height of the Barometer, as likewise the Mean Dry and Wet Bulb

Thermometers are derived from the twenty-four hourly Observations made during
the day.

lixiv Meteorological Observations.

Abstract of the Results of the Hourly Meteorological Observations
taken at the Surveyor General's Office, Calcutta,

in the month of April, 1863.

Daily Means, &c. of the Observations and of the Hygrometrical elements

dependent thereon.— (Continued).

)
é
a 3
i> o
See
a
aQ
ay oo]
Pi | 2
F 2 ea
S| be P
A = a
o tr)
1 77.5 7.5
2 75.3 8.5
3 gol 7.6
4 78.9 7.1
5 | Sunday.
6 76.8 10.5
7 79.3 7.8
8 76.8 6.3
9 78.0 6.0
10 78.8 6.2
11 78.4 6.1
12 | Sunday.
13 76.8 6.6
14 78.7 5.8
15 78.5 6.2
16 75.4 5.4
17 2) 5-6
18 aoe 4.9
19 | Sunday.
20 76.6 6.1
21 77.7 Cpl
22 78.1 7.1
23 78.3 7.0
24 78.4 7.5
25 75.8 7.3
26 | Sunday.

27 77.2 7.3
28 76.5 10.0
29 77.0 7.2
30 74.6 5.6

Computed Dew Point.

Dry Bulb above Dew
Point.

a)
Wo
@

14.5
12.9
12.1

16.8
12.5
10.7
10.2
10.5
10.4

11.2
O)
10.5
9.2
9.5
8.3

10.4
12.1
12.1
11.9
12.8
12.4

12.4
16.0
12.2

9.5

of

Mean BHlastic force

Inches.

Mean Weight of Vapour
in a Cubic foot of air.

a
et)
wn

pour required for com-

Additional Weight of Va-
plete saturation.

complete saturation be-

Mean degree of Humidity,
ing unity.

AS
AAAD
OA st

All the Hygrometvical elements are computea by the Greenwich Constants.
From the Ist January, 1863, the Greenwich New Factors haye been used

for computing Dew-point.

Meteorological Observations. Ixxv

Abstract of the Results of the Hourly Meteorological Observations
taken at the Surveyor General's Office, Calcutta,
in the month of April, 1863.

Hourly Means, &c. of the Observations and of the Hygrometrical elements

dependent thereon,

© 8 Range of the Barometer for = 3 Pa ag SIIB
fy A : 8 ture for each hour
ssa each hour during the ro “0
6 Ss rote ae during the
Hour.| & =~ ae month.
mas AE
Ss) gw SS : ; =e : :
S.o4 Max. Min. Diff. a Max. | Min. | Diff.
= =
Inches. | Inches. | Inches. | Inches. (0) O (a) o
Mid- ey fe 9 b
night. 29.717 | 29.798 | 29.579 0.219 19.3 82.4 74,4, 8.0
1 704 786 B71 -215 79.3 82.9 TAA 8.5
2 -695 776 566 -| .210 78.8 82.0 74.2 7.8
3 688 13 561 212 78.5 81.6 74.0 7.6
4 684 782 ool .231 78.7 81.4 74.3 TA
5 715 793 -606 187 78.2 80.8 73.0 7.8
6 -716 804 089 215 78.3 81.0 72.8 8.2
7 733 820 2099 .225 79.2 82.2 74.2 8.0
8 «764 838 .607 231 82.4 86.2 76.8 9.4
9 175 842 .620 222 85.2 88.8 "7.0 | 11.8
10 -769 849 645 204 87.7 90.8 78.8 | 12.0
11 756 ool .625 .206 90.0 93.6 78.6 | 15.0
Noon. 738 815 .099 .216 91.5 95.6 81.6 ; 14.0
1 -708 781 .580 201 92.7 97.0 83.8 | 138.2
2 .680 761 2006 -205 93.1 97.6 85.4 | 12.2
3 .655 734 023 211 93.0 99.2 86.6 | 12.6
4 .6384 720 507 213 91.5 99.8 86.8 | 13.0
5 .635 719 .006 213 89.4 96.7 85.2 | 11.5
6 644 745 .506 239 86.1 92.0 69.8 | 22.2
oo .666 788 5Y45) .263 84,1 89.6 72,4 | 17.2
8 684 763 533 .230 82.5 89.0 74,4 | 14.6
9 -709 .832 543 -289 81.8 86.6 74.2 | 12.4
10 “721 .823 O78 .250 80.9 84.0 75.6 8.4
11 721 818 594 224 79.9 83.6 74.6 9.0

The Mean Height of the Barometer, as likewise the Mean Dry and Wet Bulb
Thermometers are derived from the Observations made at the several hours
during the month,

Ixxvi Meteorological Observations.

Abstract of the Results of the Hourly Meteorological Observations

taken at the Surveyor General's Office, Calcutta,

im the month of April, 1868.

Hourly Means, &e. of the Observations and of the Hygrometrical elements

dependent thereon.—( Continued).

2 “5 3 EB eS TS ee ee aaa,
A Si erie os) ee el ee see
a pa 2 ey) Ese a2
CP) o (ie) ap op . 2
= 5 é 3 hl d deeb | oe) Soe
Hour. 8859 q | QA 2 oe eS mes = — 2 ° 5
See ie Bl | Sele 2. ae el SS ea
Be oe |) SEO} ee || cea |e Sele cree eres
Sg > 2 >o | €5 | 288 Siselaee 3
S Bees a = = a =
oct | = oh Ere |
|
0 0 0 ro) Inches. |Troy grs.|Troy grs.
Mid- is ic i 2 2
sane, | eee 3.9 72.7 6.6 | 0.792 8.56 2.03 |. 0.81
ill 75A 3.9 73.47 6.6 792 56 03 S81
2 75.4 3.4 73.0 5.8 Sol 65 1.79 83
3 753 3.2 73.1 5.4 803 70 .65 84
4, 75.8 POM 7S 4.9 822 89 52 85
5 75.5 PEE NG 4.6 817 84 41 86
6 95.7 2.6 73.9 4.4, 824, 94 34 1ST,
af 76.3 2.9 74.3 | 4.9 835 9.03 53 86
8 "7.9 4.5 74.7 Ten 846 08 2.53 |) 78
9 ry 6.5 Haya |, aL 830 8.87 3.74 70
10 79.6 8.1 ee | DBO 846 99 4.57 .66
il 80.2 9.8 743 | 1507 835 83 5.67 61
Noon.{ 80.5 | 11.0 73.9 | 17.6 824. 69 6.46 57
iL 80.0 | 12.7 72.4 | 20.8 785 26 7.42, 53
2 SOM) ENO 72.3 | 20.8 783 22 64 52
3 Stoel 72.4 | 20.6 785 24 57 52
A OS | 129 72.0 | 19.5 776 16 6.99 bd
5 TSC \eLOr7, Desmalal 783 29 5.96 5S
6 774, 8.7 71.3 | 14.8 758 08 4.87 62
7 76.6 7.5 71.3 | 12.8 758 ll 10 .66
8 76.2 6.3 Paes | NOL 771 26 3.38 aa
9 76.2 DOME Z2Ie 9.5 783 41 2.99 74
10 75.7 5.2 721 | 88 778 38 rie .76
11 75.5 4,4. OAM 7A 785 46 32 79

Allthe Hygrometrical elements are computed by the Greenwich Constants.
From the Ist January, 1868, the Greenwich New Factors have been used

for Computing Dew-point.

Meteorological Observations.

Ixxvil

Abstract of the Results of the Hourly Meteorological Observations

| Date.

oOo 7; Go Ff

10

11

14

15

16

17

18

taken at the Surveyor General's Office, Calcutta,

on the month of April, 1863.

Solar Radiation, Weather, &c.
>) >)

Max. Solar
radiation.

130.0

Rain Gauge
5 feet above
Ground.

Inches

0.39

Prevailing direction
of the Wind.

Sunday.
8. &S8. HE. & W.

Ss.
8.

8. &S8. EH.

Sunday.
Ss. &S. W.

8. &58. W.

General Aspect of the Sky.

————— ——{

Cloudless till 3 a. um. Scatd. clouds after-
wards ; also slightly drizzling at5P. M.

Cloudy till 64. m. Scatd. \—i & i till 2
p.m. cloudy till 7 p. m. cloudless after-
wards ; also slightly drizzling at7 P.M.

Cloudless till 5 ep. m. Seatd. “i after-
wards.

Cloudless till 3 Pp. M.
afterwards.

Seatd. clouds

Scatd. \-i till9 a. m. cloudless after-
wards.

Cloudy till 6 a. m. Scatd. i till 10
A. M. cloudless afterwards.

Cloudless till 6 4. uM. Scatd. “i till 4
p. M. cloudy afterwards; also thun-
dering, lightning, hailing & raining
at 6 P. M.

Scatd. -i till 5 Pp. m. cloudy till9 Pp, m.
cloudless afterwards; also slightly
drizzling between 8 & 9 p. M.

Cloudless till 3 a. wm. Seatd. “i & i
till 4p. mM. cloudy till 9 Pp. mw. cloud-
less afterwards.

Cloudless till 2 a.m. Scatd. —i& i till
6v.M. cloudy afterwards; also flashes
of lightning between 7 & 9 p. mu.

Cloudless till 7 a. um. Scatd. clouds till
4p, M. cloudy afterwards ; also thun-
der & lightning between 6 & 9 P. ui.

Seatd. clouds till 6 a. m. Scatd. “i till
3 Pp, Mm. cloudy afterwards ; also rain-
ing between 4 & 5 A. M.

Cloudy till 8 a. m. Scatd. Vi & i till 5
p,M. cloudy afterwards; also thunder-
ing, lightning & raining at10 &11 Pp. uw.

Cloudy till 9a.M. Scatd.—i till 4p. m.
cloudless afterwards.

Scatd. “i till 4 Pp. m. cloudy after-
wards; also thundering & lightning
between 6 &10 P. M.; also raining at
7a.mM. &6P. M.

Scatd. clouds.

Ixxvill

Meteorological Observations.

Abstract of the Results of the Hourly Meteorological Observations
taken at the Surveyor General’s Office, Calcutta,
in the month of April, 1863.

|

a vy
fe aligy one
ae |6e=

Ses is aS

a So = an a

A| = mod

o Inches

19 i 0.78

20 135.0

21} 138.0

22) 134.0

23) 182.0

24) 181.2

25| 183.0

26 ee

27| 187.0

28| 130.0

29| 129.6

30| 127.0 | 0.39

Solar Radiation, Weather, &c.

Prevailing direction
of the Wind.

Sunday.
.&S8. HE
_E. &S.
.&S8. W.

8. & 8. H.

Sunday.
S.

General Aspect of the Sky.

Cloudy till 7 a.m. Scatd. 11 & \i till
7 p. M. cloudless afterwards.

Cloudless.

Cloudless.

Cloudless.

Scatd. i & i till 3 p. mu. cloudy after-
wards; also thundering & drizzling
at 4 P. M.

Cloudy till Noon, Scatd. \i& Ui til 8
P. M. cloudless afterwards.

Cloudless till 1 p. um. Scatd. 11 till 5
Pp. M. cloudless afterwards.

Cloudless till 4 ©. um. Scatd. “i after-
wards.

Scatd. 11 & i till 3 p. mu. cloudy after-
wards.

Cloudy till 10 a.m. cloudless afterwards;
also raining at Midnight, 1 a. Mm. &
Noon.

Ni Cirri, “i Cirro strati, °i Cumuli, %i Cumulo strati, “-i Nimb}, —i Strati,

‘ni Cirro onmennh,

Meteorological Observations. Ixxix

Abstract of the Results of the Hourly Meteorological Observations
taken at the Surveyor General's Office, Calcutta,
in the month of April, 1863.

Monruty Resuvrs.

Inches
Mean height of the Barometer for the month, 30 ac 29.705
Max. height of the Barometer occurred at 10 a. M. on the 21st, .. 29.849
Min. height of the Barometer occurred at 5&6 Pp. M. onthe 4th & 7th, 29.506
Extreme range of the Barometer during the month, 50 ae 0.343
Mean of the daily Max. Pressures, 20 s0 co 29.777
Ditto ditto Min. ditto, 56 a0 no 29.622
Mean daily range of the Barometer during the month, .. 56 0.155
()
Mean Dry Bulb Thermometer for the month, sie ee 84.4:
Max. Temperature occurred at 4 Pp. mM. on the 6th, 40 oe 99.8
Min. Temperature occurred at 6 p. mM. on the 8th, on se 69.8
Extreme range of the Temperature during the month, .. ate 30.0
Mean of the daily Max. Temperature, sie O° ate 93.6
Ditto ditto Min. ditto, : ae 50 50 76.6
Mean daily range of the Temperature during the month, ba 17.0
0
Mean Wet Bulb Thermometer for the month, ; a 77 A
Mean Dry Bulb Thermometer above Mean Wet Bulb iPhortncictor: 7.0
Computed Mean Dew-point for the month, oe ee 72.5
Mean Dry Bulb Thermometer above computed Mean Dew-point, .. 11.9
Inches
Mean Elastic force of Vapour for the month,.. ue es 0.787
Troy grains
Mean Weight of Vapour for the month, Sc ole o. 8.42
Additional Weight of Vapour required for complete saturation, ee 3.89
Mean degree of humidity for the month, complete saturation being unity, 0.68
Inches
Rained 10 days, Max. fall of rain during 24 hours, .. 30 0.78
Yotal amount of rain during the month, .. oe a 2.43

Prevailing direction of the Wind, ac oe Ac S.

]xxx Meteorological Observations.

Abstract of the Results of the Hourly Meteorological Observations _
taken at the Surveyor General's Office, Calcutta,
in the month of April, 1863.

Monruuy Resvurts.

Table showing the number of days on which at a given hour any particular wind
blew, together with the number of days on which at the same hour,

when any particular wind was blowing, it rained.

Hour. Si oe g = s B Sh alist
2\} | 2 S © en tee ic cf [ots
= $e | S = = z Cal
21S -s = & SIS |= i = a
= 21S Ha x S 5 x =as t
jet jeg | BE. ie pS. Ej tS. fet of [oa} W. eho la he

|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
:

°
S
» =n
a
zx
4
n

Midnight.
1

HH
ra
(op)
ew

jt
je
—
ee

bo OURO BB ou IB

BOW nMNTS Oe &

BE OB B00 00 MD OrOoUs O1st
=
(op)

ee

Noon.

[el
ee

pa

a
Or
WHE HEH
i

moWwWN WW wee bb
=
ie}
NRE HE bb

KOvOnouret
WwW bo eS

—~
pa
Or

Ee be a
OBO <1.
ELS) Mop Won) © Ob bo
—
EE eh a CO
ie im
LPL LOS LL I ELE OSE FEE IN RE IT TT PT

Meteorological Observations. Ixxxi

Abstract of the Results of the Hourly Meteorological Observations
taken at the Surveyor General's Office, Calcutta,

in the month of May, 1863.

Latitude 22° 3371” North. Longitude 88° 20’ 34” Bast.

Feet.

Height of the Cistern of the Standard Barometer above the Sea-level, 18.11

Daily Means, &c. of the Observations and of the Hygrometrical elements

dependent thereon.

35
» oO =
eo ES
tse
Date. ie a
Sissies
a
Inches.
1 29.647
2 .643
3 Sunday.
4 .670
5 .689
6 704
7 722
8 631
9 .624
10 | Sunday.
11 654:
12 631
13 657
14 664
15 .656
16 677
17 Sunday.
18 .630
19 .601
20 bol
21 BTA
22 614:
23 .656
24 |) Sunday.
25 .666
26 615
27 574
23 53D
29 A99
30 ATO
31 | Sunday.

Range of the Barometer

during the day.

e

Inches.
29.712
706

714
743
757
798
708
683

717
720
724

715
736

122
.675
.620
691
707

122
672
654
.600
.060
023

127 |

145

Min.

Inches.
29.558
D483

.601
622
.640
.699
.009

074

575
049
.099
97
.083
.606

551
.o22
A455
13
O17
504

982
023
A491
450
AL 4
373

Diff,

Inches.

0.174
163

113
121
ollatzy

139 |

153
109

142
71
oll AS)
130
132

.130

mat
153
165
178
.190
181

140
149
163
.150
146
.150

Mean Dry Bulb
Thermometer.

Range of the Tempera-
ture during the day.

Max. Min. | Diff.

93.2 820 | 11.2
93.6 82.2 | 11.4
92.6 76.7

The Mean Height of the Barometer, as likewise the Mean Dry and Wet Bulb
Thermometers ave derived from the twenty-four hourly Observations made during

the day.

Ixxxu Meteorological Observations.

Abstract of the Results of the Hourly Meteorological Observations
taken at the Surveyor General's Office, Calcutta,
in the month of May, 1863.

Daily Means, &c. of the Observations and of the Hygrometrical elements
dependent thereon.—(Continued).

is is = ee ile sais
© : a3 x q S sl
| ram oO is =) ) Dien <8 22
Fee a alae Se eee eee
2 ow es om ww O = = o| “2 a=
A 8 5 = 2 SCS oS | 22.2
Dyavias |poahy alee = a 5 5 ees ees) 2S
2 Es 15 2. oe) = ae Zl S
2 2 2 = = | Cae. S| a Ss
Ss o = 2 Bas aad eo a
g = 3 a= ° = leer >
Hoo ES a. iS iy aS le eo il ae
| 88 S Fes (MSS ae eee ese
| & A Oo A a = s =
0) Oo) Bee beew Iba@aes, || Au eae, || AN ere
1 79.0 6.9 G42) 11.7 0.832 8.87 4.00 0.69
2 81.0 6.4 U0 | UO 916 9.75 3.70 73
3 Sunday. é
4 74.8 4.6 71.6 7.8 766 8.27 | 2.35 78
5 adel 44, 74.0 7.5 827 -90 AL 79
6 74.4: 3.2 72.2 5.4: 781 46 1.61 84
ao 76.5 A.5 73.3 lel 809 70 2.44 78
8 77.7 3.1 75.5 5.3 868 9.37 1.70 8d
9 78.8 4.9 75.4 8.3 865 .28 219 oil ti
10 | Sunday. ’
il 81.2 5.8 Uae 9.3 931 92 3.37 15
12 80.1 6.6 76.1 | 10.6 885 AZ 76 (2
13 77.9 7A 72.7 } 12.6 792 | 8.45 4.19 67
14 mol 6.7 74.4 | 11.4 .838 95 3.88 70
15 80.0 7.6 75.4 | 12.2 865 9.20 4.32 68
16 80.0 6.5 76.1 | 10.4 835 44: 3.66 |>—.72
17 | Sunday.
18 80.1 7.7 75.5 | 12.3 868 23 4.37 63
19 79.4 7.0 74.5 | 11.9 840 8.96 10 .69
20 80.1 6.7 TSI || OSL 885 9.42 3.79 71
21 78.3 5.6 TAA 9.5 838 8.97 16 WES
22 Gow 6.0 | 74.9 | 10.2 851 9.09 48 2
23 75.9 7.3 | 73.8 | 12.4 .822 8.76 4.23 .67
24 Sunday. |
!
25 80.5 6.6 76.5 | 10.6 -896 9.54 3.79 12
26 81.6 6.6 77.6 | 10.6 928 85 Mil 72
27 82.6 7.4 C82 es 946 | 10.00 4.50 69
28 81.9 8.1 77.0 | 13.0 .910 S65) |) sif/ .66
29 80.2 10.3 74.0 | 16.5 827 8.73 5.99 09
30 80.9 105 | 746) 16.8 843 89 | 6.21 ayy)
31 Sunday. | |
|
| |

All the Hygrometrical elements are computed by the Greenwich Constants.
From the ist January, 1563, the Greenwich New Factors have been used for
Computing Dew-point.

Meteorological Observations. Ixxxiil

Abstract of the Results of the Hourly Meteorological Observations
taken at the Surveyor General's Office, Calcutta,
in the month of May, 1863.

Hourly Means, &c. of the Observations and of the Hygrometrical elements

dependent thereon.

lone | Range of the Barometer = ® Range of the Temperature
=] 4 a for each hour during | (Q g for each hour during
H om the month. rae) the month.
our, = & a as | a I
, 9 | = 2 |
See | Max. | Min. | Dif. | S& | Max. | Min. Diff.
= | | =
| |
Inches. | Inches.| Inches.) Inches. 0 Q | ty) 0
ele 722 {29.509 | 0.218, 808 | 86.2| 75
night 29.635 29.722 | 29.509 ; : 2 .O 11.2
1 630 mdiludh 491 .226 | 80.7 86.0 75.0 11.0
2 617 709 A485 .224 | 80.6 85.2 74.6 10.6
3 .612 707 481 .226 80.4 85.2 74.4 10.8
4 .610 -708 | .489 219 | 80.9 85.2 74.2 11.0
5 627 “foo || AQT 244) 80.2 | 85.2) 74.0 11.2
6 643 747 495 .252 | 80.3 85.6 74.2 11,4
Z 657 157 508 249 | 81.8 87.4: 75.6 11.8
8 674 “784 | 523 .261 | 85.0 90.6 80.4 10.2
¢) 683 785 023 .262 | 87.3 92.6 80.0 12.6
10 .682 798 | .521 Di |) {)8) 95.4 84.4 11.0
11 .669 782 O11 Pa || Bil 97.8 78.9 18.9
Noon. 649 762 495 267 | 92.2 99.8 77.2 22.6
1 .622 738 A462 276 | 93.1 | 101.4 75.4 26.0
2 597 698 | .434: .264 | 92.9 | 102.4 76.6 25.8
3 576 681 406 2D | 92.7 | 1036 75.8 27.8
4, 509 676 | .373 .303 91.6 ; 104.0 74.8 29.2
5 002 661 376 285 | 90.2 99.6 75.0 24.6
6 565 .669 81 .288 | 87.6 95.0 74.9 20.1
7 592 683 397 .286 | 85.3 94.1 74.6 19.5
8 .623 .707 | 446 26] 83.6 | 88.4 74.6 13.8
9 637 723 A470 258 82.8 | 87.0 7A.8 12.2
10 .639 728 483 245 82.5 | 86.4 75.0 11.4
11 643, 728 ATA 254 | 81.9 | 86.6 74.6 12.0

“tithe Mean Height of the Barometer, as likewise the Mean Dry and Wet Bulb
Thermometers ave derived from the Observations made at the several hours

during the month.

lxxxiv

Abstract of the

Hourly Means,

taken

Hour.

2
ae

KOU OnNnanbwhbre

fed ed

Meteorological Observations.

Results of the Hourly Meteorological Observations
at the Surveyor General’s Office, Calcutta,
inthe month of May, 1863.

&c. of the Observations and of the Hygrometrical elements
dependent thereon.—( Continued.)

lo) [S)
fi fe ey i -
ones é FE 3 S
cent pel aie |e

= 2 "S ey) ae
9 5 = S_¢| Ae
oe ei See Teaver | ass)
a 8 a 5 reo | oe

= a) S) a) =

ft) 0 t) ta) Inches.
77.0 3.8 | 74.3 6.5 | 0.835
76.8 3.9 | 74,1 6.6 830
76.9 Si GAs 3 835
vidal SPH ALS 5.8 | .849
77.8 3.1 | 75.6 5.3 871
"7A 2.8 | 75.4 4.8 | .865
97.5 ASN bs 4.8 | .868
"8.6 3.2 | 76.4 5.4 | .898
80.1 A9 | 76.7 8.3 | .902
808 6.5 | 76.9 | 10.4 | .908
81.7 Sota 7ren vitliset lt We QOe
82.0 9.5 | 76.3 | 15.2 | .890
SUS MOA L7EGae i) LEG.) Saal
82.0 Gs Peon Aes) || 862
81.4 11.5 | 745 |184 | .840
Sia AGH ade IP ASG; 1880.
80.9 TOL Cle easy apa 840
80.9 93 | 753 | 149 | .862
79.6 8.0°)| | 74l8) | 198 |) .849
78.7 GBH) 7A | TED .830
77.9 BT |) pee 9.7 | .824
77.9 4.9 | 74.5 813) |) 4840
73.2 4.3 | 75.2 PAM Piet)
777 AQ GAs 71 849

pour in a Cubic foot

Mean Weight of Va-
of air.

Troy grs.|Troy gyrs.

8.99

94,
9.01
15
09
4
37
62
64
.66
57
40

Vapour required for
complete saturation.

Additional Weight of

2.08

Mean degree of Hu-
midity, complete satu-
ration being unity,

66

All the Hygrometrical elements are computed by the Greenwich Constants.

From the Ist January, 1863, the Greenwich New Factors have been used for
Computing Dew-point.

Meteorological Observations. Ixxxv

Abstract of the Results of the Hourly Meteorological Observations
taken at the Surveyor General's Office, Calcutta,
in the month of May, 1863.

Solar Radiation, Weather, Xc.

a Sole |
a Seed
3) 2s eens | Prevailing direction General Aspect of the Sky.
£2) 43 |822) ofthe Wind.
oa Es} =
al = jee] MS)
(0) Inches |
1) 135.0 S. & W. Cloudless.
2) 123.0 S.&S. BE. Cloudless till 6 p. m. cloudy afterwards.
3 A Sunday.
4 0.32 )E.&8.&8.E. | Seatd. -i& %i till Noon; cloudy after-
wards ; also raining at 2 P. M.
5| 180.0 N. EH. & S. H. Scatd. clouds till 7 Pp. m. cloudless after-
‘ wards; also slightly drizzling between
8 &9A. M. ;
6 0.22 | HE. Cloudless till 4a. m. cloudy afterwards ;
also drizzling at 11 a. um. & Noon &
from 3 to 5 P. M.
i ee H.& 8. E.& 8. Scatd. clouds till 6 P. m. cloudless after-
wards.
8 1.25 | 8. Cloudy ; and thundering from 10 a. mM.
tol Pp. mw. and at 8 & 9p. mM. also
raining between 8 & 9 and10 & 11
A. M. and drizzling from 9 to11 P. mM.
9} 130.0 S. Cloudy till 9 a. m. Scatd. \-i after-
wards,

LO Sunday.

11} 125.8 Cloudless till 3 a. m. Scatd. clouds till
2 p. mM. cloudless afterwards,

12; 130.0 S.&S8. H. Cloudless till 3.4. mM. Scatd. “i till 5

p. M. cloudy afterwards.

13) 127.0 8. & H. Cloudy till 4 a. mu. Scatd. 11 & “i till
2 p.m. cloudless till 8 Pp. um. cloudy
afterwards ; also drizzling at 4 a. M.
10 Gil P.M.

14; 132.0 8. &8. W. Scatd. clouds till 10 a. mM. Scatd. -i &
i afterwards,

15} 181.0 am s. Cloudy till5 a. m. Scatd, i till 11
A. M. Scatd, “i till 7 Pp. m. cloudy &
lightning afterwards; also slightly
drizzling between 9 & 10 P. M.

16; 131.0 8. &S. H. Cloudless till 7 a. mM. Scatd. clouds till
8 pe. mu. cloudless afterwards; also
slightly drizzling between 2 & 3 P. mM,

17 Bes Sunday.

18} 126.4 8. Cloudless till 7 a. mu. Scatd. 1 till 3
p. M. cloudy afterwards, also slightly
drizzling at 9 P. M.

19; 130.4 S.&S8. H. Cloudy till 6 a. mM. Seatd. "i & \i till
6 p. Mm. cloudless afterwards.

Ixxxvi

Meteorological Observations.

Abstract of the Results of the Hourly Meteorological Observations

taken at the Surveyor General's Office, Calcutta,

im the month of May, 1863.

Solar Radiation, Weather, &c,

I
2g
omc)
| 2s
Al am
oO
20; 132.0
PANE Nese
22; 124.0
23| 180.5
24).
25) 134.0
26, 184.0
27%| 180.4
28) 1382.0
29| 142.0
30) 135.0
31

Lent
B
C
pu

| eal
1
ore

Rain Gauge
5 feet above

Ground.

0.14

Prevailing direction
of the Wind.

8. H. &S.

ae i.
._H.&S8.& HE
H.&S.
Sunday.

S. & Calm.

S.&S8. H. &S8. W.

8.
8. & E.

E.&S.&8. i.
8S. EH. &8.

Sunday.

General Aspect of the Sky.

=e

Clondless till 8 a. Mm. Scatd. “i & 71
till 6 Pp. mM. cloudy with thunder and
lightning afterwards ; also raining at
7&8P. M.

Cloudy ; also drizzling at 11 P. Mu.

Cloudless till 6 a. m. Sceatd, i till 3
p.*M. cloudless till 6 Pe. mM. cloudy
afterwards; also very slightly
drizzling at 8 P. M.

Scatd. clouds till 3 Pp. M. Seatd. “i
afterwards.

Cloudless till 7 a. mM. Scatd. “i & 11
till 5 p. m. cloudy afterwards; also
raining between 7 & 8 P. M.

Cloudy till 5 a. Mm. Scatd. —i till Noon ;
Scatd. %i afterwards.

Scatd. clouds.

Scatd. i & i till 6 p. m. cloudless
afterwards.

Cloudy till 7 a. um. Scatd. -i& “i till
4p. um. cloudy afterwards.

Seatd. -itill 2 p. m. cloudy afterwards ;
also slightly drizzling at 3 P. M.

\i Cirri, +i Cirro strati, 9i Cumuli, ~i Cumulo strati, -i Nimbi,—i Strati
\ i Cirro cumuli.

Meteorological Observations. Ixxxvif

Abstract of the Results of the Hourly Meteorological Observations
taken at the Surveyor General's Office, Calcutta,
in the month of May, 1863.

Monruty Resurs.

Inches
Mean height of the Barometer for the month, .. 56 -- 29.625
Max. height of the Barometer occurred at 10 4. M. on the 7th, «- 29.798
Min. height of the Barometer occurred at 4 P. mM. on the 30th, -- 29.373
Extreme range of the Barometer during the month, sis e- 0.425
Mean of the Daily Max. Pressures, . ae 56 -- 29.694;
Ditto ditto Min. ditto, .. us ae -- 29.546
Mean daily range of the Barometer during the month, .. -- 0.148
: oO
Mean Dry Bulb Thermometer for the month, .. fe oe 85.8
Max. Temperature occurred at 4 P. M. on the 29th, 60 -- 104.0
Min. Temperature occurred at 5 A.M. on the 7th, 56 e. 74.0
Extreme range of the Temperature during the month, ae oe 30.0
Mean of the daily Max. Temperature, oe ve oo 94.5
Ditto ditto Min. ditto, .. ae as as 78.8
Mean daily range of the Temperature during the month, .. ce 15.7
Mean Wet Bulb Thermometer for the month, .. sie se 79.3
Mean Dry Bulb Thermometer above Mean Wet Bulb Thermometer, .. 6.5
Computed Mean Dew-point for the month, as 56 74.7
Mean Dry Bulb Thermometer above computed Mean Dew-point, aie 11.1
Inches
Mean Hlastic force of Vapour for the month, .. ae e- 0.846

Troy grains

Mean Weight of Vapour for the month, ae ste ac 9.03
Additional Weight of Vapour required for complete saturation, ste 3.80
Mean degree of humidity for the month, complete saturation being unity, 0.70

Inches
Rained 13 days, Max. fall of rain during 24 hours, Ais ie 1.55
Total amount of rain during the month, a6 Da be 4.20

Prevailing direction of the Wind, .. ee ae 8.58. H.

Ixxxvill Meteorological Observations.

Abstract of the Results of the Hourly Meteorological Observations
taken at the Surveyor General's Office, Calcutta,
in the month of May, 1863.

Monruzny Resuuts.

Table showing the number of days on which at a given hour any particular wind
blew, together with the number of days on which at the same hour,
when any particular wind was blowing, it rained.

Hour. |
Sales SHAS] POS ened | abe SS PS ES
elas elale! (sje le] | siElslsle|2
NJ2(Z\2| E. [2 lola ls. elo SIE |e [aie 1S |e |S
No. of days.
Midnight. 6 6 1 1 3
1 5 6 1 il 2 1
2 6 6 1 1 1
3 6 5 1 1 2
4 4) 1) 3 1 il 1 5
5 3 5 1 3 1 2
6 1 5 5 3 i il
7 2 4. 3 if! 2
8 5 4 3
9 11 3 3 1! 5
10 1 3} | 3 4,
11 1 1 Ay 1416) Li 2 2
Noon. 2 6} 1412 4 2
il 1 5 4, 3
9 1 5 6 1 2) 1
3 2) 1, 7 1j 4 i 1
A Tyo 2 8 3 1 2
5 1 il 3 i 1
6 i 3 5 1
7 2) Wy 1 4 4
8 9) 21 4, 5 1) 1} 1 1
9 1 1 6 3} 2 2
10 My} fal FAaS 3 2
11 1 1 7/1) 3) | 211 1

Meteorological Observations. Ixxxix

Abstract of the Results of the Hourly Meteorological Observations
taken at the Surveyor General's Office, Calcutta,
in the month of June, 1863.
Latitude 22° 33’ 1” North. Longitude 88° 20’ 34” East.
Feet.
Height of the Cistern of the Standard Barometer above the Sea-level, 18.11.
Daily Means, &c. of the Observations and of the Hygrometrical elements

dependent thereon.

So 12) 22
eos Range of the Barometer = 2 Range of the Tempera-
= 5 & during the day. a: ture during the day.
ag As
of sce Be mer
£ Sa Sl Max. Min. Diff. es Max. | Min. | Diff.
a = =
Inches. | Inches. | Inches. | Inches. 0) co) | © 0
1 | 29.506 | 29.561 | 29.446 0115 89.8 97.4 82.8 | 14.6
2 41 601 A459 142 89.8 98.6 80.8 | 17.8
3 004 O61 428 133 88.1 96.9 78.8 | 18.1
4, 470 523 398 125 89,5 96.7 84.4 | 12.3
5 501 £087 AD5BL .086 90.2 97.2 85.6 | 11.6
6 .590 688 -| .518 170 90.3 97.8 77.0 | 20.8
i Sunday.
8 649 695 .583 112 84.6 89.6 79.6 | 10.0
9 659 738 .602 136 83.0 86.8 78.0 8.8
10 .629 105 559 146 85.5 90.9 81.4 9.5
11 565 .606 499 107 82.2 91.4, 77.8 | 13.6
12 538 594. ATA 120 80.9 84.9 77.8 7.1
13 049 596 004; .092 81.8 86.4 79.8 6.6
14 | Sunday.
15 567 .627 .525 102 82.6 87.2 79.8 7A
16 .619 .665 500 lls 82.5 86.2 80.4: 5.8
17 597 .656 027 129 84.2 90.4: 80.0 | 10.4
18 508 593 435 118 83.3 88.6 80.2 8.4
19 420 A87 347 140 83.5 89.4 80.5 8.9
20 326 .406 .268 138 82.4 85.8 80.2 5,6
21 =| Sunday.
22 482 598 446 112 81.7 85.4 78.8 6.6
23 .536 079 A82 .097 82.0 85.0 79.4 5.6
24 491 502 A417 135 80.1 83.2 78.0 5.2
25 306 450 .268 182 83 4 88.8 79.4 9.4:
26 264 315 199 116 82.4 86.7 79.0 Fe
27 289 410 2189 221 81.6 86.0 78.4 7.6
28 | Sunday.
29 026 578 482 096 84.7 88.8 80.6 8.2
30 512 509 440 119 85.1 93.0 78.6 | 14.4

The Mean height of the Barometer, as likewise the Dry and Wet Bulb
Thermometer Means are derived from the hourly Observations made during
the day.

xé

Meteorological Observations.

Abstract of the Results of the Hourly Meteorologtcal Observations
taken at the Surveyor General’s Office, Calcutta,

in the month of June, 1863.

Daily Means, &c. of the Observations and of the Hygrometrical elements

dependent thereon.— (Continued).

}
=
a
<a
=|
EI
(aa)
©
2
; <3
ee) (ie 3
A =
o
1 82.2
2 82.1
3 81.3
4 83.3
5 83.4
6 82.5
7 | Sunday.
8 80.1
9 78.8
10 81.2
11 78.6
12 78.0
13 79.1
14 | Sunday.
15 79.2
16 79.0
17 79.6
18 79.9
19 79.9
20 “9d
21 | Sunday.
22 78.7
23 79.4
24 77.6
25 79.6
26 79.6
27 78.3
28 =| Sunday.
29 80.2
30 80.7

Dry Bulb above Wet.

NNW EES WED DENIS ©
ToOrAwnn oe MMe BS or)

go Co
Oe

9. €9 f=
2 Dib OD

go
roe)

G9 bo © bo 19
[Uo ole ok) Wop en)

4.5
4.4

Computed Dew Point.

Dew

above

Dry Bulb
Point.

of

Mean Elastic force

Mean Weight of Vapour
in a Cubic foot of air.

Additional Weight of Va-

pour required for com-

plete saturation.

complete saturation be-

Mean degree of Humidity,
ing unity.

All the Hygrometrical elements are computed by the Greenwich Constants.
From the lst January, 1863, the Greenwich New Factors have been used

for computing Dew-point.

Meteorological Observations. X¢Cl

Abstract of the Results of the Hourly Meteorological Observations
taken at the Surveyor Generals Office, Calcutta,
in the month of June, 1863.

Hourly Means, &c. of the Observations and of the Hygrometrical elements

dependent thereon.

© 5 _ | Range of the Barometer for = Fs Range of mney lem neta
2 Ou : s rm) ture for each hour
ses each hour during the po :
6 Ss g during the
signe | al month. pe month.
our. | oS 3 As
fs} @ SO i | : :
sak Max Min Diff. Se Max. | Min. | Diff.
= =
Inches. | Inches. | Inches. | Inches. (0) (0) o o
Mid- a a
night, 29.514 | 29.659 | 29.272 0.387 81.7 86.9 78.2 8.7
1 517 .659 238 421 81.6 868 78.0 8.8
2 506 652 .220 432 81.4 86.8 77.8 90
3 511 .656 -264 892 81.0 86.5 78.0 8.5
4 499 642 189 453 81.1 86.0 78.4 7.6
5 498 .650 196 454 81.0 85.8 78.4 74
6 512 .659 211 448 81.3 86.2 78.2 | 8.0
7 527 727 .240 487 82.2 87.0 | 78.6 | 8.4
8 540 £738 .261 AGT 84.3 90.0 79.2 | 108
9 546 184 .283 451 85.8 92.2 79.2-| 13.0
10 .046 720 .291 429 87,4 94.6 78.0 | 16.6
11 537 712 276 436 88.4 95.8 78.0 | 17.8
Noon 523 -690 279 415 88.2 96.6 78.3 | 18.3
1 003 687 .250 0432 88.0 97.8 79.1 | 18.7
2 A484 | .655 248 A407 87.6 98.6 80.9 | 17.7
3 469 .625 226 .399 87.6 97.4 79.4 | 18.0
4 456 624. 213 411 87.5 97.4: 78.9 | 18.5
5 .456 621 .199 oA22 86.7 96.3 78.8 | 17.5
6 464 625 215 410 85.7 94.6 77.8 | 16.8
id A84, .636 246 .390 84.5 90.8 78.0 | 12.8
8 508 .650 .256 3894 83.7 89.0 78.0 | 11.0
9 524 .688 273 415 83.0 88.2 78.0 | 10.2
10 524 .692 .295 .397 82.4: 87.8 78.2 9.6
11 ol .691 .288 403 81.9 87.4 77.0 | 10,4:

The Mean Height of the Barometer, as likewise the Dry and Wet Bulb
Thermometer Means are derived from the Observations made at the several hours
during the month.

Xeti Meteorological Observations.

Abstract of the Results of the Hourly Meteorological Observations
taken at the Surveyor General's Office, Calcutta,
im the month of June, 1§63.

Hourly Means, &c. of the Observations and of the Hygrometrical elements
dependent thereon.—( Continued).

5 3 = es e Boe Sees
a a e = 3 Pirie pee eae
& o Aa o SS TS “Ep a = aie
eS} > z > © aS 6
B 5 x 3 ot 2 re IS = © oo
Hour |e | ie = 5 2 Susie =a) |S nee
~— oOo me) ts aa || o a |) << s
ee |g. | 2a) se see |b (ore eee
ae) 2 B |me| -e | 233 |S 2 eles 28
5 5 Porch bine pa, | S6 | Sa |(SrStisaa s
= OT NS) a a = 4 a
eens | ss le
Oo) ) oO fo) Inches. [Troy grs.|Troy grs.
ee 7 5 7 64 | 0.86
night. 78.8 2.9 16.8 4.5 0.905 9.73 ith -
1 78.8 2.8 76.8 4.8 .905 hes 61 86
2 48.7 2a \ 768 4.6 .905 We 4 .86
3 78.5 2.5 76.7 , 4.3 .902 72 42 87
4: 78.6 2.5 76.8 | 4.3 .905 7D A2 87
5 786 | M2a |, 7639) | ALT 2968 78 36 88
6 HRVB M200 77-0). ||) Acs 2910 81 43 87
7 79.4 2.8 774 |) 4.8 .922 coe 63 .86
8 805 | 9818 | 77:8) | 65%| 1934 .99 2.29 81
9 81.0 4.8 77.6 8.2 .928 Ail 92 Lf
10 81.6 58 | 781 | 98 | .943 | 10.04 3.41 fe
11 Bie VES |) 77a | 1NO) 922 | 9.79 4.05 yi
Noon.| 81.3 CO) 717eor a eo, ZONE ME .03 Ga
1 81.3 Go VIS LOO Ne) EOI 76 3.92 Hl
2 81.1 Grp Tey al Oa CONG 75 Th 72,
3 81.2 64 | 77.4 | 10.2] . .922 S81 71 73
4 81.4 6.1 ane, 9.8 931 .90 59 73
5 80.9 5.8 "74 | 928 Ig22il 83 135 75
6 80.6 sl hk) Me tSbrl .910 7A .09 76
i 80.2 APB Tea Zest. EO leminnen +28 2.54 79
8 BOO! | Sel) eid Ors 922 | .89 18 82
9 79.5 3.5 CHL: | OO) 910 | 77 .05 83
fo. |) i792 || 301) ‘zion, 54). lovom). 79th 182 84
11 78.7 3.2 76.5 5.4 896 | .65 aly) .85

Allthe Hygromerrical elements are computed by the Greenwich Constants.
From the 1st January, 1863, the Greenwich New Factors have been used
for Computing Dew-point.

Meteorological

Observations. xelll

Abstract of the Results of the Hourly Meteorological Observations
taken at the Surveyor General's Office, Calcutta,
in the month of June, 1868.

Solar Radiation,

Weather, &c.

| Date.

10

13

radiation.

Max. Solar

115.2

5 feetabove

; Rain Gauge
Ground.

Inches.

Wel)
0.22
0.37

0.40
1.28

0.22

Prevailing direction

of the Wind.

8. &S. E.

Sunday.
S.H.&8.

S.&W.&S. E.

S. & Calm.

S.W.&S. &S8. H.
Variable.
S.&S. i.

Sunday.
8. H. & 8.

Ss. H. & EH,

General Aspect of the Sky.

a NS

Cloudy till 10 a. mu. Scatd. clouds till 5
p. M. cloudless afterwards.

Cloudy till 9 a. Mm. Scatd. clouds till 7
p. M. cloudy with thunder and light-
ning afterwards; also slghtly
drizzling at 11 P, M.

Cloudy till 6 a.m. Scatd. Yi & i after-
wards ; also slightly drizzling at Mid-
night.

Seatd. \-itill Noon; cloudless till 4:
p. M. Flying clouds afterwards.

Cloudy (high wind throughout.)

Cloudy till 7 a. m. Scatd. clouds till 7
p. M. cloudy afterwards ; also raining
at 8 & ll p. um, and lightning at 8 &
9 P.M.

Cloudless till 4.4. m. cloudy afterwards ;
also thundering at Noon & lightning
between 8 & 10 Pp. mM. & raining be-
tween 10 & 11 a. uw. & drizzling at
10 P. M.

Scatd. i till 4a. mu. cloudy till6 Pp. .
Scatd. i & i afterwards also light-
ning at 11 p. wu. & drizzling between
10 & lla. mM.

Cloudy till 7 a.m. Scatd. -i& 71 till
1 p. m. cloudy afterwards ; also thun-
der & lightning at la.mM. & 3 P.M.
& drizzling at 7 & 8 P. M.

Cloudy ; also occasionally raining.

Cloudy ; also raining at 3 & 44. M,

Cloudless till 5 a. m. cloudy afterwards ;

* also drizzling at Noon 1 & 3 Pp. M.

Cloudy ; also raining at 2.4, m. Noon
& 1p, M.

Cloudy till 7 p. m. cloudless afterwards ;
also raining at 10 a, mM, & between
11 & Noon.

Cloudless till 5 a. mu. Seatd. i till 9
A. M. Seatd. 91 till 8 ep. u. cloudless
afterwards also raining between 5 &
6 P.M.

XC1V

Meteorological Observations.

Abstract of the Results of the Hourly Meteorological Observations
taken at the Surveyor General's Office, Calcutta,
in the month of June, 1863.

Solar Radiation, Weather, &c.

wa [Bs
SV eS
O-a Sl
DS GS as
‘ = ne
S| 43 [335
3 os Soy 4
Al = MoO
(0) Tnches

20; 0.13
Silla 1.07
22 3.19
23 0.32
24 0.37
25| 120.0

26 0.42
27 0.18
38 ee 0.38
29| 192.7 |...

30} 115.0 | 0.54

Prevailing direction
of the Wind.

N.
N.

Yn
.&
.&

8. & W.

N.&N. EH.

N, H. & N.
S.H.&8. GN. EH.
Sunday.

S.

Ss. &N. W.

General Aspect of the Sky.

Cloudless till 5 a. mu. cloudy till 6 P. mu,
Scatd. clouds afterwards ; also rain-
ing between Noon & 1 vp. mM. & thun-
dering at 1 P. M.

Cloudy ; also raining at4a. M.2& 5 P.M.

Cloudy ; also occasionally drizzling.

Cloudy ; also raining between 5 & 8
p.M. &lightning & thundering at6 P. M.

Cloudy ; also drizzling at 5 a. u. Noon,
& from 7 to 9 p. mM. & thundering at
8 P. M.

Cloudy ; also drizzling constantly from
Midnight to 1 Pp. mu.

Cloudy ; also slightly drizzling between
8 &9a.muM. &11 a. mu. & Noon,

Cloudy ; also drizzling constantly.

Cloudy ; also drizzling from 1 to 8 P. uM.

Scatd. i & i; also drizzling between
11 & Noon.

Cloudy till7 a.m. Scatd. -i till 1 p. a:
cloudy afterwards & thundering at
3p. M. also raining at 64.M.5 &7 P.M.

Ni Cirri, i Cirro strati, \i Cumuli, ~i Cumulo strati, “i Nimbi, —i Strati,

wi Cirro cumuli,

Meteorological Observations. Xev

Abstract of the Results of the Hourly Meteorological Observations
taken at the Surveyor General's Office, Calcutta,
in the month of June, 18638.

Montuity REsUtLts.

Inches
Mean height of the Barometer for the month, ee oe 29.507
Max. height of the Barometer occurred at 8 A. M. on the 9th, ne 29.738
Min. height of the Barometer occurred at 4 a. M. on the 27th, ee 29.189
Extreme range of the Barometer during the month, ote es 0.549
Mean of the daily Max. Pressures, os ee 56 29.569
Ditto ditto Min. ditto, 00 a0 S06 29.442
Mean daily range of the Barometer during the month, .. ate 0.127
to)
Mean Dry Bulb Thermometer for the month, ee ee 84.4
Max. Temperature occurred at 2 Pp. M. on the 2nd, ae 50 98.6
Min. Temperature occurred at 11 p. M. on the 6th, a3 ate 77.0
Lixtreme range of the Temperature during themonth, .. 90 21.6
Mean of the daily Max. Temperature, se se 06 90.0
Ditto ditto Min. ditto, 60 OO 00 79.9
Mean daily range of the Temperature during the month, ae 10.1
fy)
Mean Wet Bulb Thermometer for the month, Be pis 80.0
Mean Dry Bulb Thermometer above Mean Wet Bulb Thermometer, .. 4.4:
Computed Mean Dew-point for the month, ee 76.9
Mean Dry Bulb Thermometer above computed Mean toe “point, .. 7.5
Inches
Mean Elastic force of Vapour for the month,.. 90 50 0.908
Troy grains
Mean Weight of Vapour for the month, sé AS a 9.70
Additional Weight of Vapour required for complete saturation, sie 2.61
Mean degree of humidity for the month, complete saturation being unity, 0.79
Inches
Rained 26 days, Max. fall of rain during 24 hours, .. ae 3.19
Total amount of rain during the month, .. ste a6 12.93
Prevailing direction of the Wind, oe ee ae, See

xevl Meteorological Observations.

Abstract of the Results of the Hourly Meteorological Observations
taken at the Surveyor General's Office, Calcutta,
in the month of June, 1863.

Montuny REsuts.

Table showing the number of days on which at a given hour any particular wind
blew, together with the number of days on which at the same hour,

when any particular wind was blowing, it rained.

Hour. :| : : = ies : : =| =
S| js 5 S Pe ales Sh: |o9 (ets
aie] ls s] |s = ele |sis|sie

Niciz al E. 2|S.BSts. (1a |2lW-lels leiclels
I No. of days

Midnight. | 2 Tie 5 12) 1 1 1) J} 1) Js

eo el To 6 12) 7 1 4

3) \| aia) a hal 8 g 2) 1 1 4} |

So) Ca EL Lt Sorat ses 1 3] f 2

4 Sipe pe eye evil oil eae aky eal 1 1 2

i sya 2 AG Pele hfe 5

6 |f3i [3 5 a a 6.1) 2 ay

7 fal | 4 4) | 6 6 3 1

Sane? elie 6) ft 4 8} 1) 3 1

9 SUP SBA PSS ne) 10 2 Sia

10 «fil if3 Bl a 6 4 4) 2

Lee | 2 A a 6) 17 PANG} 1)

Noon. 21721) bee Ay PA Ul 9 Siee4 eee sieit ft Tl

1 | Aled (ay Pai) s 2 CP allbah |) 2a

a9 $2) | 2) 1) 4! af ..4) 1p an) a} 2 1

EACH 21) 4) 7 4 91) 4) af 21 2

Aca 4/1) 2 1 9 If 5 4) ij 1 1

5 taped era ey aay ale. Bh 214

Coopers iio feriteay Maer biea! Fe toll nea a alles

pene) (ealllen fa pet) Mises HIV Vcura veel mat vey 2) “teal

gs Fal fala slap 5) ap isa 11

9 Fi) | 2 2) Ih Ale Dh 3) 2 2|

10 im 1| A Wi Hal 55 11 2 1 1| 1

ll Pa} fl 4| 3] 5] 10 2 2 1 2
|

Meteorological Observations. XCVIi

Abstract of the Results of the Hourly Meteorological Observations
taken at the Surveyor General's Office, Calcutta,
in the month of July, 1863.

Latitude 22° 33’ 1” North. Longitude 88° 20’ 34” Rast.

Feet.
Height of the Cistern of the Standard Barometer above the Sea-level, 18.11

Daily Means, &c. of the Observations and of the Hygrometrical elements

dependent thereon.

Oo 3 : ou
bow Range of the Barometer a 3 Range of the Tempera-
io 5 3 during the day. Rei ture during the day.
© le = 4
Date. | ™© Ea a 5 l
634 | Max. | Min. | Dif. | 2&8 | Max. | Min, | Dif.
a a
Inches. |! Inches. | Inches. | Inches. 0 0 0 0
1 29.472 | 29.533 | 29.399 0.134 82.8 87.0 80.0 | 7.0
2 AB ATS 364 LIL 83.9 88.7 80.0 | 8.7
3 410 456 343 113 85.0 91.3 80.4 ! 10.9
4 462 004 407 127 82.1 84.1 80.0 | 4.1
5 | Sunday.
6 519 567 AT2 095 83.3 86.9 81.4] 5.5
7 565 643 O11 132 83.2 88.6 80.2 | 8.4
8 612 .670 509 eT a S220) Si) |) SLB) || Dar
9 .622 679 574 105 83.5 88:8 19:9) | 89
10 645 .688 .600 .088 83.8 88.4 80.0 | 8.4
VW .620 665 .048 117 83.9 89.8 80.4 | 9.4:
12 | Sunday.
13 580 627 515 112) 85.1 SO ty Sli) Seo
14 574: 615 .o13 102 84.4 89.5 80.4 | 9.1
15 530 592 ATA: | 118 82.9 89.3 81.0 | 8.3
16 A495 543 443 .100 82.7 87.1 80.4 | 6.7
17 AGL 502 402 100 82.6 85.7 79.9 | 5.8
18 .396 464: 312 152 82.7 88.9 80.2 | 8.3
19 | Sunday.
20 528 589 ABA 105 83.3 87.5 79.2 | 83
21 575 622 528 O94 83.3 87.6 80.2 | 7.4
22 594. 641 043 .098 84.2 89.7 80.8 | 8.9 -
23 .569 617 496 121) 83.5 89.7 81.0 | 8.7
24 529 585 AGL 124 84.7 89.9 80.9 | 9.0
25 501 .000 410 140 85.9 92.4 81.6 | 10.8
26 | Sunday.
27 5A O15 368 147 82.2 87.2 79.0 | 8.2
98 463 512 ALS .097 83.5 88.7 80.6 | 8.1
29 ATS 013 24) 089) 81.7 85.5 79.0 | 6.5
30 .436 488 371 cll zl 82.7 86.8 78.8 | 8.0
3l .505 564 456 L108 83.5 87.6 80.3 | 7.3

The Mean Height of the Barometer, as likewise the Dry and Wet Bulb Ther-
mometer Means are derived from the hourly Observations made during the day.

Xevill Meteorological Observations.

Abstract of the Results of the Hourly Meteorological Observations
taken at the Surveyor General's Office, Calcutta,
in the month of July, 1863.

Daily Means, &c. of the Observations and of the Hygrometrical elements
dependent thereon.— (Continued).

of

g z = Smee es
o y ° o a x
| = BO Ae alas) i eee eu
ES Fd Bignell oe ee eee eaten
ae : Bip) ae al. 22) eS eee
Daten 2 A = = a5 \26 | solgaies
~~ ow 33 a Ey) a) «4. oe
oo 5 3 Ss eS Ss | Se] bos
So a 2 Bus HBS|/ eo |S2"] 328
g a So Ne te mess So = =
do Qa 5 aoa f=} 56 f sis
5 A be 3 bay Bi Sereteales Wenreyl| ce, 25)
= a) Oo a = = s =
ft) (0) i Milisintty Ibnelnes; || At, ge, || AU, aie.
iL 79.4 3.4: 77.0 5.8 0.910 9.77 1.98 0.83
2 80.6 3.3 78.3 5.6 949 | 10.16 OY 84
3 80.8 4.2 77.9 7.1 937 02 2.51 80
4 79.8 2.3 78.2 3.9 946 AT 1.34 88
5 | Sunday.
6 79.6 3.7 77.0 6.3 910 SH) 2.16 82
7 79.1 4.1 76.2 7.0 887 52 Eo 80
8 78.8 4.1 75.9 7.0 879 44 35 .80
9 79.4 4.1 76.5 7.0 896 61 39 .80
10 79.6 4.2 76.7 fol 902 66 AA, -80
il 79.8 4.1 76.9 7.0 908 12 AL 80
12 Sunday.
13 80.8 4.3 77.8 7.3 934: 99 58 80
14 80.3 41 77A 7.0 922 87 4A .80
15 79.8 3.1 77.6 5.3 928 97 1.82 85
16 79.8 2.9 77.8 49 .934 | 10.03 .69 .86
17 79.4 3.2 77.2 5.4 916 9.85 83 84
18 79.7 3.0 77.6 Sel 928 97 15 85
19 Sunday.
20 79.3 4.0 76.5 6.8 .896 61 2.32 81
21 79.9 3.4 77.5 5.8 925 92 OL 83
22 80.2 4.0 77 A: 6.8 922 87 37 81
23 80.0 3.5 77.5 6.0 925 92 .08 83
24 80.8 3.9 78.1 6.6 .943 | 10.08 34 81
25 80.7 4.8 77.3 8.2 .919 9.82 .90 Bir
26 Sunday.
27 79.2 3.0 ies 5.1 913 82 1.72 85
28 79.9 3.6 774A: 6.1 922 89 2.11 82
29 78.9 2.8 76.9 4.8 .908 76 1.61 86
30 79.5 3.2 77.3 5.4 lS .88 84 84
31 79.2 4.3 76.2 7.3 887 02 2.48 79

All the Hygrometrical elements are computed by the Greenwich Constants.
From the Ist January, 1863, the Greenwich New Factors have been used for
computing Dew-points.

Meteorological Observations. xclx

Abstract of the Results of the Hourly Meteorological Observations
taken at the Surveyor General's Office, Calcutta,
in the month of July, 1863.

Hourly Means, &c. of the Observations and of the Hygrometrical elements

dependent thereon.

CS 2 u | Range of the Barometer = o Range of the Temperature
age for each hour during AS for each hour during
H = 2 the month. © bo the month.
Ti | fasts a
=| @ oO : 4 a 2 :
sa | Max. Min. Diff. Sian iMlaxe Min. Diff.
= =
Inches. | Inches.| Inches.| Inches. ° 0 0 0
wae 5 (29.422 2 81.6
night. 29.5384 \29.665 | 29.422 | 0.243 F 83.0 80.4. 2.6
1 526 645 .398 247 81.3 82.8 80.0 2.8
2 519 636 | .391 245 81.1 82.7 79.8 2.9
3 509 .623 389 .234 | 80.9 82.5 79.6 2.9
4 013 621 .385 .236 80.8 82.4 79.6 2.8
5 .009 631 398 .233 80.6 82.3 78.8 Ge
6 528 651 408 243 80.6 82.2 79.0 3.2
7 Ad .665 423 242 81.3 83.2 79.8 3.4
8 .500 .668 430 .2388 | 82.9 85.4: 79.0 6.4
9 .560 .683 437 246 | 84.0 86.7 79.5 7.2
10 .560 .687 429 .258 | 85.2 88.0 80.3 Wer
il 004 .688 420 .268 86,0 89.0 81.4 7.6
Noon. .538 .679 .395 284 | 87.1 91.1 83.0 8.1
1 519 .655 370 289 86.6 91.3 82.0 9.3
2 A97 .631 349 .282 86.7 91.3 82.8 8.5
3 480 616 329 .287 | 86.8 92.4 81.0 11.4
4 465 .609 316 .393 85.8 89.5 81.1 8.4
5 AG4 .609 12 .285 85.0 | 87.8 81.6 6.2
6 470 .609 824 .285 84.3 87.4 82.2 5.2
7 AGA .625 304 271 83.4 85.6 81.4 4.2
8 514 641 381 .260 82.9 85.2 81.2 4.0
9 533 .660 400 .260 82.6 85.0 80.4: 4.6
10 046 .670 A2ZL .249 82.2 84.7 80.4 4,3
11 043 678 A422 256 81.9 | 84.5 80.4: 41

The Mean Height of the Barometer, as likewise the Dry and Wet Bulb Ther-
mometer Means are derived from the Observations made at the several hours
during the month.

Meteorological Observations.

Abstract of the Results of the Hourly Meteorological Observations
taken at the Surveyor General's Office, Caleutta,
in the month of July, 1868.

Hourly Means, &c. of the Observations and of the Hygrometrical elements

dependent thereon.—( Continued.)

ae es cee
EI S &
faa) a .
ox ° is
Hour. = 3 3 a
g 2 3
Bc) yh a fan
Se anes 5
= fa 3)
C0) C0) 0)
78) 26) la are
night,
1 79.0 2.3 77.4:
2 78.9 DD 77 A
B} 78.7 2.2 772
4 78.6 2.2 Doak
5 784 2.2 76.9
6 78.6 2.0 V7.2
7 78.9 2.4: 77.2
8 79.5 3.4 77.1
9 79.9 Al 77.0
10 80.2 5.0 76.7
1 80.7 5.3 77.0
Noon. 81.2 5.9 lett
1 81.0 5.6 77.6
2 81.0 Az 77.6
3 80.9 5.9 77 A
4, 80.9 4.9 ine
5 80.7 A3 TEL:
6 80.3 4.0 77.5
7 80.1 3.3 4778
8 79.8 3.0L 77.6
9 79.5 Biol eos
10 79.3 29 77.3
V1 79.2 2.7 773
J

Dry Bulb above Dew

Point,

oO

Wow wwe CCC
ONOOHEBVWY IYO &

9.4
9.0
9.1
9.4
8.3
7.3
6.8
5.6
5.38
5.3
4.9
4.6

Mean Elastic force of
Vapour.

Inches.

0.916

922
922
916
913
.908
.916
916
913
910
-902
.910

931
-928
928
922
925
931
925
934
928
919
919
919

pour in a Cubie foot

Mean Weight of Va-
of air.

Troy grs.|Troy grs

9.87

complete saturation.

a a 5 aS

Additional Weight of
Vapour required for

LAT

Mean degree of Hu-
midity, complete satu-
ration being unity.

|

All the Hygrometrical elements are computed by the Greenwich Constants.
From the 1st January, 1868, the Greenwich New Factors have been used for

computing Dew-points.

Meteorological Observations. Gl

Abstract of the Results of the Hourly Meteorological Observations
taken at the Surveyor General's Office, Calcutta,
in the month of July, 1863.

ao op &
ee lee
Ne |S ss
2) ne) |e 8.9
(0) Inches
1 1.44
2} 117.0 | 0.44
3; 125.0 | 1.20
4 0.10
5
6 ;
q
8| 116.0 | 0.18
9| 113.2] 0.14
10 0.30
11; 114.0
12 ane os
13 uae Be
14) 115.0
15) 121.0] 1.14
16 aS 0.50
17 oot oot
18 on 0.46

Solar Radiation, Weather, &c.

Prevailing direction
of the Wind.

W.&S8.&S8. W.

s.

8. & H.

Ss.

Sunday.
8.

8.08. H.

S.&58. W.

General Aspect of the Sky.

Cloudy ; also raining at Midnicht, at
9&10a. mM. andat8 &9p.mM.

Scatd. “i till 7 a. m. cloudy after-
wards; also raining between 10 & 11
A.M. and 3 & 4 Pp. M. and at 11 Pp. m.

Cloudy till 9 a. w.; Scatd. “i and %i
till 4p. m. cloudy afterwards; also
raining between 3 & 4 P. M, and
from 6 to 10 P. M.

Cloudy; also drizzling from 11 a m. to
2 P.M.

Cloudy till 7 p. m. cloudless after-
wards; also slightly drizzling be-
tween | and 2 P. m.

Cloudly till 1 Pp. mM, Scatd. oi and “i

5S. &S. W.

atterwards ; also slightly drizzling at
7&9 A.M.

Cloudless till 8 a. mw. Seatd. -i and
itill8 p.m, cloudless afterwards ;
also drizzling between 1 & 3 Pp. M.

Scatd. i till Noon, cloudy afterwards;
also raining at 1 Pp. M.

Cloudless tili 5 a. mw. Scatd. “i & ni
till 7 P. M., cloudless afterwards ;
also raining between Noon and 1p. m.
and between 1 & 2 Pp. mu.

Cloudless till 4a. mM. Seatd. “i & 91
till 7 Pp. M. cloudless afterwards ;
also very slightly drizzling between
noon and 1 P. mM.

Cloudless till 4a. m. cloudy till’7 Pp, mu,
cloudless afterwards.

Cloudless till 4.4, m. cloudy afterwards
also drizzling at 4,6 & 8 p. u,

Cloudless till 4 a. m. cloudy after-
wards ; also raining from 1 to 4 Pp. mu.

Scatd. i till 4 a. m. cloudy after-
wards ; also drizzling after intervals.

Cloudy till 8 P. mu. cloudless after-
wards.

Cloudy ; also drizzling after intervals.

ell

Meteorological Observations.

Abstract of the Results of the Hourly Meteorological Observations

taken at the Surveyor General's Office, Calcutta,

in the month of July, 1863.

Solar Radiation, Weather, &e,

u Cee
Se jee
2 se G29
.| @& | § &} Prevailing direction General Aspect of the Sky.
£| «es |. 8| ofthe Wind.
3S | ae
QA) Sa |ewd
) Inches

13 uh 0.30 | Sunday.

20) 129.9 8. &8. E. Cloudy till 5 a. um. Scatd. 11 & “i till
7 vp. M., cloudless afterwards; also
drizzled at 1 G11 a. M.

aN ecb 0.31 8.08. E. Cloudless till 4 a. mM. Scatd. clouds
afterwards; also raining between
11 and Noon.

22} 120.0 | 0.24 | H. Scatd. clouds; also raining between
11 and noon, between 4&5 FP, M.

! and between 5 & 6 P. M.

23) 120.0 S.H.&8. &H. Cloudless till 8 a. Mm. Scatd. “-i1& 91
till Noon, cloudy till 6 Pp. . cloudless
afterwards; also drizzling between
1&2 Pp. Mm. and at OP. m.

24 0.99 | 8. &S. E. Cloudy till 7 pv. . cloudless afterwards ;
also raining at 1] a. mM. andat 4&5
P. M.

25) 115.8 8. E. &S8. Cloudless till5 a.m. Scatd. “i & i
afterwards,

20 |e ... | Sunday.

Zann 1.96 | EH. Cloudy ; also incessantly raining from
3 to 104. mM. and drizzling at4& 5
P. M.

28} 116.0 8.&8.H Scatd. clouds till 4p. um. cloudy after-
wards; also slightly drizzling at
1 P. M.

28 ae 1.22 |S. H. &8. Cloudy ; also constantly raining.

30\ 110.0} 0.80) H.&S Cloudy; also constantly drizzling the
whole day.

31 8. &8. W. Cloudy; also drizzling between 8 & 9

\n i Cirro cumuli.

124 Dil,

\i Cirri, i Cirro strati, oi Cumuli, +i Cumulo strati, -i Nimbi,—i Strati,

Meteorological Observations. cli

Abstract of the Results of the Hourly Meteorological Observations
taken at the Surveyor General’s Office, Calcutta,
in the month of July, 1863.

Montuty Resvrts.

Inches
Mean height of the Barometer for the month, .. ee se tu 2oLoLO
Max. height of the Barometer occurred at 11 a.m. on the 10th, -- 29.688
Min. height of the Barometer occurred at 5 Pp. M. on the 18th, «. 29.312
Hixtreme range of the Barometer during the month, Be -- 0.376
Mean of the Daily Max. Pressures, .. oe 50 .- 29.572
Ditto ditto Min. ditto, .. O0 are «. 29.459
Mean daily range of the Barometer during the month, .. e- 0.118
oO
Mean Dry Bulb Thermometer for the month, .. es ee 83.4,
Max. Temperature occurred at 3 P. M. on the 25th, se oe 92.4
Min. Temperature occurred at 5 a. M. on the 30th, ae ee 78.8
Lixtreme range of the Temperature during the month, .. oe 13.6
Mean of the daily Max. Temperature, OC es a 88.3
Ditto ditto Min. ditto, .. Be es ate 80.2
Mean daily range of the Temperature during the month, .. es 8.1
Mean Wet Bulb Thermometer for the month, .. as a0 79.8
Mean Dry Bulb Thermometer above Mean Wet Bulb Thermometer, .. 3.6
Computed Mean Dew-point for the month, .. ae we 77.3
Mean Dry Bulb Thermometer above computed Mean Dew-point, 66 6.1
Inches
Mean Elastic force of Vapour for the month, .. oe ee 0.919
Troy grains
Mean Weight of Vapour for the month, we 00 © ae 9.86
Additional Weight of Vapour required for complete saturation, sis 2.10
Mean degree of humidity for the month, complete saturation being unity, 0.82
Inches
Rained 25 days, Max. fall of rain during 24 hours, eo ee 1.96
Total amount of rain during the month, ce oe no dll 24

- Prevailing direction of the Wind, .. oe o 8.08. H,.& HX.

civ Meteorological Observations.

Abstract of the Results of the Hourly Meteorological Observations
taken at the Surveyor General’s Office, Calcutta,
in the month of July, 1863.

Montuty ReEsvxts.

Table showing the number of days on which at a given hour any particular wind
blew, together with the number of days on which at the same hour,

when any particular wind was blowing, it rained.

Hour.
S| .|6 S| 1S] (St-1S] (ep -|St ./éle
else fale] |SlE le] | slPlslsl el?
NJ3l2 1/3) B. lelnle|s.clailalelalaleis sie
No. of days
Midnight. 4) | 2| 112 ae ve
1 4\ 1] 5) his] 1 1 hag ui
2 4) 1) 6) 1f15 2
3 5) 1) 7| Lei i
4 5) 1} 6| 413 1 2
5 5 ly 4) fi 1 2| 1 4
6 1 6) 1j 5) 112 1 2) 1
i 1 6) 24 4 12 1 3) 1
8 1 iL 4) 14 6) Wii} 1 2 2
9 Bit Al 6| 1} 3 10) 3} 3 2
10 1 3) 1 7) Wd 10) 1, 3) 1] 2
11 7| 2) 5; 2h 8) 3 3 i al
Noon. 2 7\ If 7] Li 8| 23 3) 1
1 1 2) 1 2 5] 1 7) 41 6] If 41 1
2 2 2 7| 1f 7 Ly 6) 3] 2) 11
3 1) Ij 1 1 8) 1710 6| 2
A, 3] 1) 4) 1/12] 3) 8) 2
5 2) 2) 2) F116) 1) 7) 3
6 3) 11 3 16) 4) 4 1
7 6| 11 2| fas] Js} fa
8 6) ly 3 16} 31 1) 1 ]
9 6) li 3 16) 1) 1) 1 1
10 5 33) } fei} | ab 1
11 4 4, 16} 1} 1 iy) al at

|
|

Meteorological Observations. I

Abstract of the Results of the Hourly Meteorological Observations
taken at the Surveyor General's Office, Calcutta,
im the month of August, 1863.

Latitude 22° 33’ 1’ North. Longitude 88° 20’ 34” East,
Feet.

Height of the Cistern of the Standard Barometer above the Sea-level, 18.11.
Daily Means, &c. of the Observations and of the Hygrometrical elements

dependent thereon.

oo ey RH
re 2 2 Range of the Barometer 3 2 Range of the Tempera-
a= — p o A
ies 2 ey during the day. ee ture during the day.
aa As
4 ao | = o
2 Sreiic Max. Min. Diff. Sa Max. | Min. | Diff.
= é
Bos S
Inches. | Inches. | Inches. | Inches, 0) ty) t) Oo
1 |29.559 | 29.601 | 29.524 0.077 83.4 89.6 8C.0 9.6
2 | Sunday.
3 490 5A6 A384 nih? 81.5 84.7 | 78.4) 6.3
4, A483 .o21 443 .078 81.8 83.8 80.0 3.8
5 534 BTA 490 .084: 82.4 86.8 78.8 8.0
6 548 .089 498 O91 82.7 85.4 79.8 5.6
q 529 064 465 .099 84.3 90.2 80.0 | 10.2
8 528 578 464, 114 85.4 90.8 | 82.2) 8.1
9 | Sunday.
10 A487 531 402 129 83.7 89 6 81.0 86
11 A458 515 .388 127 82.7 86.5 | 80.2] 6.3
12 A442 .490 992 .098 82.9 87.3 81.0 6.3
13 482 553 436 + ily 83.1 87.8 80.0 7.8
14 023 575 A59 116 84.0 89.6 80.0 96
15 498 .990 ALT 133 84.9 90.6 80.8 9.8
16 | Sunday.

17 407 467 .800 117 81.4: 85.2 79.8 5A

18 .000 591 A439 152 80.5 84.4: 78.2 6.2
19 .093 64:7 .050 .097 82.1 87.4 79.6 7.8
20 601 648 099 109 84.5 88.8 81.6 7.2
21 064 .603 B01 102 84.1 86.8 81.9 4.9
22 049 .596 AQL 105 81.5 85.8 78,2 7.6
23 | Sunday.
24 631 .699 .563 136 82.4: 82.8 79.7 9.1
25 .665 713 .618 .095 80.7 86.2 75.4 | 10.8
26 .678 -728 641 087 81.4 84.3 78.0 6.3
217 704 746 .659 .087 81.4 86.8 78.8 8.0
28 678 fase) 098 137 83.2 88.6 78.6 | 10.0
29 649 707 587 -120 83.2 87.8 80.8 7.0
30 | Sunday.

31 634 | .687 577 110 §2.8 87.0 81.3 5.7

The Mean Height of the Barometer, as likewise the Dry and Wet Bulb
Thermometer Meaus are derived from the hourly Observations made during
the day.

i

Meteorological Observations.

Abstract of the Results of the Hourly Meteorological Observations
taken at the Surveyor General's Office, Calcutta,
in the month of August, 1863.

Daily Means, &c. of the Observations and of the Hygrometrical elements

dependent thereon.—(Continued).

}
:
a
isa)
eS
3
fa)
©
Bs
é a3
=) Mes
A =
0
1 79.4:
2 | Sunday.
3 78.7
4 79.2
5 79.3
6 Sea
7 80.5
8 80.7
9 | Sunday.
10 80.1
11 79.4:
12 79.5
13 80.0
14 80.3
15 80.8
16 | Sunday.
17 79.0
18 78.5
19 79.7
20 80.9
21 80.6
22 78.7
23 | Sunday.
24 79.4:
25 78.0
26 78.7
27 79.0
28 80.3
29 80.7

30 | Sunday.

31 80.3

Dry Bulb above Wet.

Bo
°

G0 99 wo OP
WDWOrD®

bo bo bo bo bo 99
(2) Tito eh iS ian)

2.5

Computed Dew Point.

I
Do
D

SITTIN IT
YSIS SU Gb
RoOORBRY

TUN
NINNNNN
cNOHeE SD

~T
au
(e)

77.1
78.0
78.4
78.1
76.7

77.3
76.1
76.8
77.3
78.3
78.9

78.5

TI AAAAD
OWwWWwWOare

4.3

ey
lo)

Elastic force

Vapour,

Mean

Inches.

oS
(e2)
Te)
(Je)

902 |
92209
913
928
934
.922

928
.913
.913
934
931
937

919
.913
940
952
.943
902,

owls)
885
.905
919
.949
967

955

Mean Weight of Vapour
in a Cubic foot of air.

27

1h eae,
63

Additional Weight of Va-

pour required for com-

plete saturation.

48

complete saturation be-

Mean degree of Humidity,
ing unity.

87

All the Hygrometrical elements are computed by the Greenwich Constants.
From the Ist January, 1863, the Greenwich New Factors haye been used

for computing Dew-point.

Meteorological Observations. TW

Abstract of the Results of the Hourly Meteorological Observations
taken at the Surveyor General's Office, Calcutta,
in the month of August, 1863.

Hourly Means, &c. of the Observations and of the Hygrometrical elements

dependent thereon.

6 8 _ | Range of the Barometer for = 5 Betce 2 eng pone
a s a each hour during the ao Eee hour
oO g during the
H O'S monte Eye month
our. | mS o Ag .
=| 29 ; : fal ; :
gon Max. Min. Diff. ac Max. | Min. | Diff.
= a
Inches. | Inches. | Inches. | Inches. 0) Co) Co) Oo
Mid- 5) :
might, 29.565 | 29.715. | 29.415 0.300 81.3 83.6 79.2 4.4:
1 551 “712 387 2325 81.0 82.8 78.4) 4A
2 41 -706 362 a 44 80.9 83.0 78.6 4.4;
3 .536 688 2354 304 80.7 83.2 78.4 4.8
4. 540 679 A424 255. 80.7 82.8 78.0 4.8
5 535 688 300 338. 80.5 82.3 75.4 6.9
6 553 .698 .366 302 80.6 82.2 76.0 6.2
7 567 123 382 841 80.9 82.6 76.0 6.6
8 590 (29 458 271 82.2 84,4: 76.7 7.7
9 594 741 407 334 83.2 86.2 17.2 9.0
10 594 746 418 328 84.2 87.2 78.4: 8.8
11 589 £743 423 .320 85.0 88.8 79.4 9.4
Noon 578 730 24 -306 85.6 89.6 79.8 9.8
1 -560 WAL 432 287 85.7 89.6 80.6 9.0
2 537 .697 A401 296 85.3 90.3 79.8 | 10.5
3 518 674. 396 278 85.1 90.6 80.6 | 10.0
4 504 .659 378 281 84.9 90.0 80.3 9.7
5 oll 669 392 277 84.5 88.2 81.2 7.0
6 .518 694, .a90 304 83.5 86.8 80.6 6.2
7 539 681 A418 263 82.6 85.6 78.2 WA
8 500 691 439 202, 82.2 85.0 78.4 6.6
9 571 -719 54: 265 $2.1 84.8 79.0 5.8
10 .083 124, 464) .260 81.9 84.0 78.8 52
il 581 21 454, 267 81.6 84.6 73.8 5.8

The Mean Height of the Barometer, as likewise the Dry and Wet Bulb
Thermometer Means are derived from the Observations made at the several hours
during the month,

iv Meteorological Observations.

Abstract of the Results of the Hourly Meteorological Observations
taken at the Surveyor General's Office, Calcutta,
in the month of August, 1863.

Hourly Means, &c. of the Observations and of the Hygrometrical elements
dependent thereon,—( Continued).

4 re) < E oO Li) Se cw 1 ' © 409
Sled eee (a eS ace came ae ae
a Ss (a S os oO a5 ES 23
2 2 Se nce Pe) a cuossrs
3 ° o § Bic 5G gS SB Bee
Hours |e sues ro A s i th Fz |3 S
OF fae Sau aye yee cs (Bet el (oi) alee
BS 3 = Be As SCS loo8 Sis fH is
9 au a. es) as a Se SS Bos) ciel Se
& 4 i g Pa | So Sac SPE Sas
a a iS a = a < =
0 o 0 ro) Inches. !Troy grs./Troy grs.
Mid- ! 5) 5
night. [Sul 2.2 77.6 3.7 | 0.928 9.99 1.25 0.89
1 78.9 2.1 717A 3.6 922, 93 21 .89
2 78.8 2.1 77.3 3.6 919 90 .20 89
3 78.7 2,0 77.3 3.4: 919 92 12 -90
4: 78,8 1.9 77.5 3.2 925 98 .06 90
3) 78.5 2.0 77.1 3.4: 918 .86 12 90
6 78.6 2.0 77.2 3.4: 916 89 12 90
7 78.9 2.0 77.5 3.4 925 98 12 .90
8 79,3 2.9 77.3 4.9 919 88 66 86
9 79,7 3.5 77,2 6.0 916 83 2.06 83
10 80.3 3.9 77.6 6.6 928 23 | dl 81
11 80.6 4.4: 17.5 7.5 925 88 65 79
Noon.| 80,6 5.0 Wf 8.5 913 74 3.02 76
1 80.9 4.8 77.5 8.2 925 88 2.92, PERS
2 80,6 4.7 77.3 8.0 919 82 82 18
3 80.7 4,4: 77.6 7.5 928 1 .66 378
4. 80.7 4.2 77.8 Cell 934. 99 50 80
5 80,5 4.0 77.7 6.8 9381 96 39 81
6 80.3 3,2 78.1 5.4 943 | 10,12 1.88 84
7 79.9 27 78.0 4.6 940 .09 59 86
8 79.7 2.5 eo 4.3 937 .08 6 87
9 79.6 2,5 77.8 4.3 | 934 05 AG 87
10 79.4 2,5 77.6 4.3 928 9.99 45 87
11 79.2 2.4) 77,9 4.1 925 96 38 88

All the Bygrometrical elements are computed by the Greenwich Constants.
From the 1st January, 1863, the Greenwich New Factors haye been used
for Computing Dew-point.

Meteorological Observations. Vv

Abstract of the Results of the Hourly Meteorological Observations
taken at the Surveyor General's Office, Calcutta,
in the month of August, 1863.

Solar Radiation, Weather, &c.

ee ie z
SQijseo. a
ow SOc CH
M.S |O S 2| Prevailing direction | ~ General Aspect of the Sky.
$\ 48 |8.8¢| ofthe Wind. ©
a| SS] |er = ‘
alae jase a
© lInches tb
1) 131.0) 0.14 |S. W.&S. H. .| Cloudy ; also drizzling from 4:to 8 P. M.;
and also at 11 P.M.
Vali are ey Sunday. ee
3 1.90 | W. &S. W. x| Cloudy ; also incessantly raming from
1 a. um. to Noon.
4 8. &S8. W. 3| Cloudy also slightly drizzling between
8 &10 4. M. and at3 & 4 Pp. uM.
Bilge 0.76 |S. & H. *| Cloudy till 7 p. m. cloudless afterwards ;
also raining from 1 to 3 A, M. and
between 10 and 11 A. mu.
6 0.08 |S. & S. H. +) Cloudless till 5 a. M.; cloudy till 6 p. mu.
cloudless afterwards; also drizzling
occasionally from 6 a. M. to 1 P. M.
"| 1260 8. H. &S. 1 | Cloudless till 4:4. m. cloudy afterwards ;
also slightly drizzling at 8 A, M.
Noon, and 9 P. M.
8] 1238.2 8. &S8. H. 1 | Cloudy till110 a. um. Scatd. i till 7 P. m.;
cloudless afterwards.
Ohi ei. 0.86 | Sunday. 1

10! 119.0 S. E. 3 | Cloudy; also very slightly drizzling
after intervals.

11 0.17 | H.&S. EH. 24) Cloudless till 6 a. m. cloudy afterwards ;
and thundering at 2 Pp. M.; also drizz-
ling at Noon & between 1 & 2 P. M.

12 0.50 | H. & N. H. 34| Cloudy ; and thundering at 1 Pp. m.; also
raining between 10 & 11 a. u.; & at
1&5p.M.

13] 115.0| 0.50 | H. 2 | Cloudless till 5 a. m.; cloudy till 4 p. mu.
cloudless afterwards; & thundering
at Noon, also raining between 10 &
11a.M.andat3 &4 P.M.

14) 122.4 H.&S. H. 12) Cloudless till 6 a. mM. Seatd. “i till 11
A. M. Scatd. clouds till 8 p. u. cloud-
less afterwards ; also thundering at
Noon.

15] 124.0| 0.09 | H. 4. | Cloudless till 5 a. wm. Scatd. 71 till 7

y Pp. M. cloudless afterwards; also
drizzling between 3 & 4a. u. & 11
& Noon &8 & 6p. mM.

16 aN) Sunday. 24

17 1.43 | S. 34| Cloudy ; also raining after intervals.

18 1.93 |S. & 8. HE. 2 | Cloudy till=8 pe. m.; cloudless after-

wards; also incessantly raining from
1 a. m. to Noon.

V1

Meteorological Observations.

Abstract of the Results of the Hourly Meteorological Observations
taken at the Surveyor General's Office, Calcutta,
in the month of August, 1863.

Solar Radiation, Weather, &c.

Pe nlisol=
a8 |2 3.
De oes
oO 72 a2 5
2| 28 [228
A) =~ |swod
o |Inches
19 0.30
20) 122.0
21
QO ese 3.50
PA re 0.24:
FAN pao 0.41
26) . 0.12
|
Oe 0.19
28| 128.0

29... | 0-74

30] os wer
GLI). —Ge0 0.24

Prevailing direction
of the Wind.

8. & W.

W.&S.

Sunday.
S. E. & Calm.

S.H. &8.
8. &8. EH.

WA

Sunday.
8. & H.

i

General Aspect of the Sky.

| Cloudless till 3 a. u. cloudy till 7 P. m.;

cloudless afterwards, also raining at
A. 5, 7,9) & 1A A, Mt.

Cloudless till 5 a. m. Seatd. “i & “i till
1 p.m. cloudy afterwards; with thun-
der at 6 p. um. also slightly drizzling
at 7 P, M.

Cloudy ; with thunder & lightning at
Midnight ; also drizzling at 1 a. M.
and from 9 Pp. M. toll P mM.

Cloudy ; also constantly drizzling and
raining.

Cloudy; also raining from 2 P. M. to
4 P. M.

| Cloudy ; also raining from 5 to 10 A.M.
+! Cloudy, also drizzling between 5 & 6

A.M. at9 &104. mM. & between 2 &
3 P. M.

Scatd. i till 8 a. u. cloudy till7 P. Mm.
Scatd. \-i afterwards; also drizzling
from 11 A. uM. to 8 P. M.

Scatd. clouds.

8) Scatd. i till 7 a. m. cloudy till 7 Pp. M.

cloudless afterwards; also raining
between 10 &114.mM.at1,3&4P. mM.

Cloudy, also drizzling at 7 a. M. and
from 1 to 3 P. M.

\i Cirri, “i Cirro strati, \i Cumuli, ~i Cumulo strati, “-i Nimb?, —i Strati,

“i Cirro cumuli.

Meteorological Observations.

Vil

Abstract of the Results of the Hourly Meteorological Observations

taken at the Surveyor General's Office, Calcutta,
in the month of August, 1863.

Montuty Resuvrs.

Inches
Mean height of the Barometer for the month, o6 oe 29.555
Max. height of the Barometer occurred at 10 a. mM. on the 27th, 29.746
Min. height of the Barometer occurred at 5 a. M. onthe 17th, 50 29.350
EHatreme range of the Barometer during the month, bo 0.396
Mean of the daily Max. Pressures, O10 29.606
Ditto ditto Min. ditto, ss 29.497
Mean daily range of the Barometer during the month, .. 0.109
0)
Mean Dry Bulb Thermometer for the month, oC 60 82.8
Max. Temperature occurred at 3 Pp. M. on the 15th, ie oo 90.6
Min. Temperature occurred at 5 A. M. on the 25th, se 50 75.4
Extreme range of the Temperature during themouth, .. c 15.2
Mean of the daily Max. Temperature, 60 oe 87.3
Ditto ditto Min. ditto, a Ae f 79.8
Mean daily range of the Temperature during the month, oe 7.5
Oo)
Mean Wet Bulb Thermometer for the month, ce Ay 79.7
Mean Dry Bulb Thermometer above Mean Wet Bulb Thermometer,. . 3.1
Computed Mean Dew-point for the month, os ee 97.5
Mean Dry Bulb Thermometer above computed Mean Dew-point, 5.3
Inches
Mean Elastic force of Vapour for the month,.. 60 ae 0.925
Troy grains
Mean Weight of Vapour for the month, ae Bt oe 9.94,
Additional Weight of Vapour required for complete saturation, ae 1.81
Mean degree of humidity for the month, complete saturation being unity, 0.85
Inches
Rained 24 days, Max. fall of rain during 24 hours, .. 66 3.50
Total amount of rain during the month, .. 4c 14,10
Prevailing direction of the Wind, es a S.&58. H. & H.

Vill Meteorological Observations.

Abstract of the Results of the Hourly Meteorological Observations
taken at the Surveyor General's Office, Calcutta,
in the month of August, 1863.

Montuty Resvu.ts.

Table showing the number of days on which at a given hour any particular wind
blew, together with the number of days on which at the same hour,

when any particular wind was blowing, it rained.

Hour. plas : : 5 : By fea ee
f .|° 5 5 Was Sf (ols
jane & £ s|E ls SRS) ate
Iz elE. Sis. B/E] 8. Bla lol w re eae
Bue i as ACG oer aa [ee A FA) a of
f | No. of days
Midnight. By 2 10 1 3
1 Ears [anrats) 9 31 2 1 ue
2 6) 17 sj il 8) 1b’ 2 1 fl] §
3 f | 5} 1) 68 Sia 2 1 fi} FL
4 f | Aa “A a) 1 fl] W 4
5 i a a BE Dl B 1 hil] §3
Galina | BP oh 6 103) 3 2 ;
a 4 fe SSH ea) ENE pan cHVAOY he Sy 083 2 i
8 P CEE esr us) GU | 9)83 5 1
9 A sii 2) 1! si 3] 2 6 :
10 H 11 ANE Pec JUV Add (Meee yf a a3 5
11 | | 2 6 3) 1 7 qj 4 6
Noon. | 1 3 BME SL AE TNE Ay a 3
1 i eT ATH GSP GAR a A
2 POT AY ROCHE GE PA A ay 2
3 eA ESS al (SH al Wey he 3
Me Pau Cy yes yeral LOA GE ears} 2
Aue PU ART el 12 2 1| 2
6 l1 il PAV Mss) Abie al 3|
Fieony }1 3 Gi cl ela Ca 2 2)
8 11 4, 6) 1j 11 1 1| | 2
9 : 11 A 6 10] 2) 1 1 2) FL
10 i 1 3 7 1@} By a Il 1 2 il
11 H fal 3 bah al) jh MataMy thy] al 1 | 2

Meteorological Observations. ix

Abstract of the Results of the Hourly Meteorological Observations
taken at the Surveyor General's Office, Caleutta,
in the month of September, 1863.
Latitude 22° 33’ 1” North. Longitude 88° 20’ 34” Kast.
Height of the Cistern of the Standard Barometer above the Sea nh
Daily Means, &c. of the Observations and of the Hygrometrical elements

dependent thereon.

cone ue
2 3 ae) Range of the Barometer a = |Range of the Tempera-
“ap 5 2 during the day. me ture during the day.
om GS)
Date. | 7 ae S| =
soc? : : Se i
eas Max. Min. Diff. Si Max. | Min, | Diff.
Inches. | Inches. | Inches. | Inches. 0) ) 0) 0)
1 29.606 | 29.662 | 29.530 0.132 §3.3 87.5 80.2 | 7.3
2 .625 682, 572, 110 82.9 86.0 80.6 | 5.4
3 677 736 624, 112 83.8 89.0 78.8 | 10.2
4 .669 750 .583 167 84.7 90.6 80.8 | 9.8
5) 648, .690 593. .097 82.2 88.6 78.4 | 10.2
6 | Sunday.
7 691 754: .619 135 83 5 89.6 213098
8 704) 169 632 137 84.3 90.3 80.2 | 10.1
9 677 746 .598 148 83.5 88.5 806 | 7.9
10 .638 «702 064: 138 82.9 86.6 80.2 | 6.4
1l 652 113 587 126 82.3 87.5 80.0 | 7.5
12 693 758 648 110 80.9 $9.2 79.0 | 6.2
13 | Sunday.
14 .616 701 536 165 $1.7 85.1 77.8 | 7.3
15 546 096 482 114 83.7 88.4: 80.2 | 8.2
16 44 .590 482 .L08 83.5 87.8 80.6 | 7.2
17 597 .653 552 LOL 83.0 86.8 80.4 | 6.4
18 .671 PAS) 611 118 83.1 87,2 80.6 | 6.6
19 107 778 .655 123 83.3 88.7 80.0 | 8.7
20 | Sunday.
21 .640 694 557 137 81.9 89.3 78.7 | 10.6
22 .619 674, 554: 120 80.8 86.6 78.4 | 8.2
23 .626 .669 998 11 80.3 82.2 78.3 | 3.9
24, .616 .666 590 .116 80.0 82.7 78.8 | 3.9
25 .607 670 500 120 80.1 82.6 79.0 | 3.6
26 .659 732 599 133 83.3 83.5 79.5 | 9.0
27 =| Sunday.
28 .686 750 618 132 84.4 89.0 80.2 | 8.8
29 .657 718 092 .126 84.6 88,8 81.6 | 7.2
30 648 698 599 099 82.7 85.3 78.0 | 7.3

The Mean Height of the Barometer, as likewise the Dry and Wet Bulb Ther-
mometer Means are derived from the hourly Observations made during the day.

x Meteorological Observations.

Abstract of the Results of the Hourly Meteorological Observations
taken at the Surveyor General’s Office, Calcutta,
in the month of September, 1863.

Daily Means, &c. of the Observations and of the Hygrometrical elements
dependent thereon.—(Continued).

be Co Blalle io ans 20 Peele
Nis Hens E la o Se eS 52
e | be S = SES SB 6 aS <
| ie ey 3 - 2 Otel || TS
= leery x i BS al aS) a6] ue oe
E} (ene ess E Re) Aes | Se =
faa} S o a 2 ota Oo 2 Sil orm =
Date: 3 2 A a Ss |ees| eee
° 3 = 2 Ss ae Sa] wok
me D 2 = oO — o o
a = 2 ciel linicaleSabClme Reve cece) =
a 3 fata} a aos a 3 o 22 ee}
Bs Sh ie aS ae (222 | 222
= 8 p 5 Pe | oF ®-= sae! ots
hayes fa Oo fa Weer | = Ss =
ty) a) Om alee Ibnolaess!| ‘AU, fae, || AL, aa.
1 80.1 B20 77.91) 15.41) | 701937 || 0.06 | SF a iao.8e
2 79.8 33. W716 | 53 £928) 99:97 Bp e82 85
3 79.8 4.0) 77.0! 68 | .910 75 | 2.35 81
A 80 2 ALS ee TeOM ne TET .910 518 69 78
5 78.9 3.3 | 76.6 | -5.6 899 165 \SO 84
6 Sunday. ) | }
|
7 TIS) OBEN O63 1916 | Pee3 iil Basin eee
Be s0ise i) 20 765) 68 .925 90 38 S81
9 79.9 BO reel Gull 922 | 89 Stil .82
10 79.6 331 77.31 5.6 919 86 | 1.93 84
11 794) 29) 474) 4.9 922, 91 67 .86
12 78.9 2.0) 977.5 | + 3.4 925 .98 12 .90
13 Sunday.
i ) | |
14 | 79.6 Qe ee She 36 943 | 10.14 23 89
15 80.5 BD AB) ||. el 949 18 89 84
16 80.6 PS) |) IME) | ANS) 958 28 Pp 86
7 Ne SOME 29 nl eT Sele 49% {ods 12 70 86
is | 80.0 Bal Ws) 3B 934 .03 83 85
49 80.1 3.2K 77.9 Ves A .937 .06 87 84
20 | Sunday. | | |
) | |
21 | 789 3.0! 768) 5.1 905 | 9.73 fh 85
22 78.3 2.55) 76.51) 4.3 .896 67 .40 1S7,
DS Ney AG Tan he Teil ae ALG: 1873. || 4 50 .86
24 77.9 21) | 7644). 3.6 893 | 64 silts .89
25 78.3 1.311) 77,08)" 9 3.1 910 83 OL 91
26 |. 79.6 BAN EON PL G.8) 1 rer OOF ST 7 alee 82
27 Sunday. | |
28) Wei SOGMME iS Spiny 7. Om nGis: .937 | 10.02 29 S81
29 81.1 3.5 | 78.6 6.0 958 .26 13 .83
BO) Gs BOM? 812 Ana SiGe ee 4a ‘58, eee30) elena 88
| |
| | |

All the Hygrometrical elements are computed by the Greenwich Constants.

From the Ist January, 1863, the Greenwich New Factors have been used for
computing Dew-points.

Meteorological Observations. xi

Abstract of the Results of the Hourly Meteorological Observations
taken at the Surveyor General's Office, Calcutta,
in the month of September, 1868.

Hourly Means, &c. of the Observations and of the Hygrometrical elements

dependent thereon.

3 =; | Range of the Barometer = © Range of the Temperature
age for each hour during meg for each hour during
Hour = 2 Aine ROOM Pb 3 the month.
il eee | ee | |
so? A ; 5
S42 | Max. Min. Diff, Sc | Max. Min. Diff.
= 2 |
Inches. | Inches.| Inches.) Inches. (0) 0 o 0
Mid 45 an low ge | 819
night. 29.654 \29.721 {29.558 | 0.163 2 83.0 79.0 4.0» -
1 64:4 714 502 162 81.0 82.8 | 78.8 | 4.0
2 .633 rial 539 172 80.7 82.6 78.8 | gy
3 621 702 .O38L 7h 80.6 82.4 78.2 4.2,
4 .620 .687 522 165 80.3 81.8 | 77.8 4.0
5 629 “701 920 181 80.2 82.8 | 78.4 4A
6 644 722, .030 92 80.2 82.8 | 78.3 4.5
7 .660 743 .539 204 80.9 83.4 | 79 4, 4.0
8 .683 758 713 185 82.9 84.5 | 79.9 4.6
9 .695 178 .590 188 83.8 85.8 | 80.6 5.2
10 .698 772 583 189 85.0 | 87.6 80.4: 7.2
il .685 «754 O16 L178 86.0 | 88.4 | 80.8 | 7.6
Noon. .667 735 61 LTA 86.2 89.3 80.7 8.6
1 .638 .720 528 192 85.4 89.6 79.1 10.5
2 614 .688 .006 182 85.1 90.6 78.7 11.9
3 094 | 683 482 201 84.9 90.3 78.4 11.9
A, .082 .676 A82 194 84.8 89.5 79.6 9.9
5 .590 .663 A88 175 83.6 87.4 79.9 We
6 .602 .669 482 187 82.9 86.2 79.4 6.8
7 .623. .689 084 155 82.4: 85.4 79.6 5.8
8 647 .708 | 002 .156.| 82.0 | 84.8 79.2 5.6
9 664 729 .565 164 81.8 84.2 794 4.8
10 .670 129 570 | 159 81.4 83.8. 786 5.2
11 664: 727 562 | .165 81.2) 83.6 78.0 5.6

The Mean Height of the Barometer, as likewise the Dry and Wet Bulb Ther-
mometer Means are derived from the Observations made at the several hours
during the month.

xi. Meteorological Observations.

Abstract of the Results of the Hourly Meteorological Observations
taken at the Surveyor General's Office, Calcutta,
in the month of Septexber, 1863.

Hourly Means, &c. of the Observations and of the Hygrometrical elements
dependent thereon.—( Continued.)

2 | 2) | ee EL Se ee eee
2 iS Ble 2 _ 2 ee| Bae
2 ee hee s S62 | EE |og2
os S © ° ° 2s Seige
Hour. a 3 a 2 ae ro = 5 a = a oo
3 2 3 to Whe oS a Oh Secs
=) 3 = Bech Fl oi) eS 2) Sees
aha lag ere | 2a | 2 ss. | eoectampoegs
= 3s Pe 5 Pa B= | Son | SS sesrce-
a a) S A = Sao es 28
wie |_
ft) 0 ) ) Inches. |Troy grs.|Troy grs.
aa 791 | 21 | ye | 36 | 0928 |! 9.99 | 122 | 089
rie FOO | AO | nas I Baw Ses" | ton 18 90
2 78.8 1.9 77.5 3.2 925 9.98 .06 .90
3 78.7 1.9 77 A 3.2 922 .95 .06 90
A 78.6 17 77 A, 29 922 95 0.96 91
5 786 1.6 17.5 27 925 98 90 92
6 78.6 1.6 77.5 2.7 925 | 98 .90 92
by | 79.1 1.8 77.8 Salt 934 10.07 1.03 91
8 79.9 3.0 77.8 5.1 934 .03 76 85
9 80.3 35 77.8 6.0 934. 01 2.09 83
10 80.6 4A 77.5 7.5 925 9.88 65 79
11 80.7 5.3 77.0 | 9.0 910 71 3.20 VE
Noon. | 80.7 5.5 76.8 | 9.4 .905 65 34 74,
1 80.4: 5.0 76.9 8.5 .908 68 00 .76
2 80.2 4.9 76.8 8.3 205 67 2.90 77
3 80.3 4.6 77.1. 7.8 913 76 73 78
A 80.3 4.5 771 747 913 76 70 78
5 79.9 3.7 We | BS 919 86 17 82
6 79.8 3.1 77.6 5.3 928 97 1.82 85
7 79.7 2.7 77.8 | 4.6 .934 | 10.03 58 .86
8 79.5 2.5 7747 | A3 931 02 AB 87
9 79,4 2.4 77a Ae AG 931 02 38 88
20 79.1 23 17.5 3.9 925 9.96 31 88
1 79.1 21 77.6 3.6 928 .99 22 189

All the Hygrometrical elements are computed by the Greenwich Constants.
From the 1st January, 1863, the Greenwich New Factors have been used for
computing Dew-points.

Meteorological Observations. Xl

Abstract of the Results of the Hourly Meteorological Observations
taken at the Surveyor General's Office, Calcutta,
in the month of September, 1863.

Solar Radiation, Weather, &e.

| Date.

14

Max. Solar
radiation.

fo)

127.8

135.5
120.0

130.0

135.5
129.5

135.0

Rain Gauge
5 feet above
Ground.

Inches.

0.19

0.10

0.30

0.55

0.42
0.10

Prevailing direction
of the Wind.

8. &8. H.
8. H. &H.&S.

Sunday.
8. &S. H.

EH. & 8. H.&S8.
8.&8. H. & H.

H.&S.,
8. H. G&S.

S. EH.
Sunday.
S.

S.
S.—H.&8.W.& Calm

Ss.
H. & 8. H.

S| M, P. of W.

ns

lcs bole

General Aspect of the Sky.

Scatd. “i till 4.4. m.; cloudy till 6
Pp. M.; cloudless afterwards.

Cloudy till 5 a. m.; Scatd. i till 10
A. M.; cloudy till 4 Pp. mM. Scatd. ~i
afterwards ; also raining between
Noon &1 P. u.

Scatd. -i& %i till 2 p.m. cloudy after-
wards ; also raining between 4 & 5
A. M.

Cloudy till 2 4. um. Scatd. “i & i till
2p.M.; Scatd. clouds afterwards.
Scatd. clouds till 8 a. m.; cloudy till
3 Pp. M.; cloudless afterwards; also
raining between 1 and 2 P. M. and at

3 P. M.

Cloudless tili 7 a.m. Scatd. “i & OF
till 2 Pp. M., ; cloudy afterwards ; also
occasionlly raining from 2 to 7 P. M.

Cloudless till 5 a. Mm. Scatd. “i and
i till 6 p. u, cloudless afterwards.

Cloudless till 6 A. mM. Scatd. ~-i & 14
till 5 Pp. um. cloudless afterwards ; also
raining at 2 & 3 P. M.

Cloudlegs till 5 a. m. cloudy till 6 P. M.
cloudless afterwards; also very slight-
ly drizzling between noon & | P. M.

Cloudless till 2 a. m. cloudy after-
wards; also drizzling at 6 A. M.

| Cloudy ; also constantly drizzling.

Cloudy till 4 Pp. m.; cloudless after-
wards; also drizzling from midnight
to 4 A, M.

Cloudy till 5 Pp. m. cloudless afterwards.

Cloudy ; also raining at 5 A. M. and be-
tween 9 & 10 A. M.; and thundering
and lightning between 10 & 11 Pp. m.

;| Cloudy ; also raining at 3.4. uM. & from

4p. M, to 6 P. M.

Cloudy till 6 Pp. m.; cloudless after-
wards ; also drizzling between 11 &
noon, at 2 P.M. & between 3 & 4 P. M.

——————————

XIV

Meteorological Observetions.

Abstract of the Results of the Hourly Meteorological Observations
taken at the Surveyor Generals Office, Calcutta,
in the month of September, 1863.

Solar Radiation, Weather, &e,

y (22

za (25

S39 |eedg

.| 22 |© & €} Prevailing direction
2/ Hig |.6 82] of the Wind.
als s Be 10 O
o _|Inches.

19) 130.0| 0.88 |S. H. & N. W.
20 neces ... ( Sunday.
21) 134.9] 1.10 |S. EH.
22ien 0.74 |S. & N. E.
23 N. H. & H.
24, 0.40 |H. &N. EGS. H.
25 0.44 | HK, & §. EH.
26| 130.2 8. EH. &S&.
QA ose 0.61 | Sunday.
28| 133.5 H. & 8. H.
29) 127.2) ... | H. & Variable.
30} see 2.12 |N. W.G&S. H.

to = | M. P. of W.

© bho bw bo

General Aspect of the Sky.

Cloudless till 7 a. m.; Scatd. clouds
afterwards; also raining between
noon and 1 p.M.; at5 Pp. M, and
between 8 and 9 Pp. M.

Cloudy ; also raining from 1 to 3 P. M.
Scatd. “i till 7 a. u.; cloudy after-
wards; also raining from 2 to7 P.M.

#| Cloudy; also drizzling at 3 A. M, and

at 2 &3°P. M. j

Cloudy ; also drizzling constantly.

Cloudy ; also drizzling nearly the whole
day.

Scatd. clouds till 7 a. m.; Scatd. -i&
oi till 4 Pp. u. cloudless afterwards.

Scatd. 11 & i.

Cloudy; also slightly drizzling at 8 P. M.

Cloudy ; also rainmg between 11 and
noon, and from 4 to 10 P. M.

Ni Cirri, “i Cirro strati, ©i Cumuli, %i Cumulo strati, \-i Nimbi,—i Strat,
\ i Cirro cumuli.

Meteorological Observations. XV

Abstract of the Results of the Hourly Meteorological Observations
taken at the Surveyor General's Office, Calcutta,
in the month of September, 1863.

Monvuny Rursupts.

Inches

Mean height of the Barometer for the month, .. oo -- 29.643
Max. height of the Barometer occurred at 9 a. M. on tho 19th, ao. 207s
Min. height of the Barometer occurred at 3 & 4 P.M. on the 16th, .. 29.482
Hatreme range of the Barometer during the month, 50 -. 0.296
Mean of the Daily Max. Pressures, .. a ce -- 29.703
Ditto ditto Min. ditto, .. S60 a0 so) ABS 7/9)
Mean daily range of the Barometer during the month, .. o- «=-: 0.1 24

)

Mean Dry Bulb Thermometer for the month, .. a oe 82.7
Max. Temperature occurred at 2 P. M. on the 4th, ee oe 90.6
Min. Temperature occurred at 4 a. M. on the 14th, 60 o< 77.8
Extreme range of the Temperature during the month, so oe 12.8
Mean of the daily Max. Temperature, 40 ee oo 87.2
Ditto ditto Min. ditto, .. ae 50 bo 79.6
Mean daily range of the Temperature during the month, .. ee 7.6
Mean Wet Bulb Thermometer for the month, .. ae Ac 79.6
Mean Dry Bulb Thermometer above Mean Wet Bulb Thermometer, .. 3.1
Computed Mean Dew-point for the month, .. 2 as 77 A
Mean Dry Bulb Thermometer above computed Mean Dew-point, 00 5.3
Inches

Mean Elastic force of Vapour for the month, .. ale) es |) 0,922

Troy grains

Mean Weight of Vapour for the month, dc ee a6 9.91
Additional Weight of Vapour required for complete saturation, te 1.81
Mean degree of humidity for the month, complete saturation being unity, 0.85

Inches
Rained 23 days, Max. fall of rain during 24 hours, oe ee 2.12
Total amount of rain during the month, Oc oe -- 10.33

Prevailing direction of the Wind, .. ee oe NWS. H&E.

ra Meteorological Observations.

Abstract of the Results of the Hourly Meteorological Observations
taken at the Surveyor General's Office, Calcutta,
on the month of September, 1863.

Monruty Resvtts.
Table showing the number of days on which at a given hour any particular wind

blew, together with the number of days on which at the same hour,

when any particular wind was blowing, it rained.

Hour.
ns Sl (61 |si-lel |St-let rd
lSle| letalel |S lel jeez lala
sre oi .| 3 | ii) os | sy a ee “=
[22 Je) Be |= 3 |e IS. tf ea S|
No. of days
Midnight. } 3) 1} 5) 11 6) ploj i
1 | 3 5| 17 6} fio| 1
2 13 4 118} Ho} 1
3 13/1] 3/117) J 9) 2 4
A | 2 3} 19! Isl 4
5 | 3 4, | 8| 348 1 2
6 1 2 3| fll) 119 1
uf | 2 Al | 9| | 9 1 al
8 | 2 6 116) fio) {1 Up
9 10, | 4| #10] 1) 1 1}
10 11} 2] 4) #9) 1 TE || aL
11 | 1 9) 1] 6 1) 6) 4 2 Jia
Noon. 1 3 4| j10) 1) 4 A 1) 1
1 tl 7| 218 386) 7 2) 1 »
2 | 9| 4) 8) 44 5] 1) 2 aU
3 fai 1) 6) 3) 8 47 7) pay pa Pay f.
A | 2 A| 1 9) 3f 7| 1) 2 apf aul ea
5 Wak 3\ 1) 9, {10| 4) 2
6 A| 110) 11 9] 2] 2) fl
7 11 A| 1] 7| 1f10| 2] 1 1| | 2
8 5| | 8} fio Tal 2
9 1 4| 2) 6) [10 1} 1} 2) | 1
10 1 4| 11 8| 11 9} 71 np Veal
iil 1 4| | 9, 1) 8} G1 Tie jail

Meteorological Observations. XVil

Abstract of the Results of the Hourly Meteorological Observations
taken at the Surveyor General’s Office, Calcutta,
in the month of October, 1863.

Latitude 22° 33’ 1” North. Longitude 88° 20’ 34” East.
Feet.

Height of the Cistern of the Standard Barometer above the Sea-level, 18.11.
Daily Means, &c. of the Observations and of the Hygrometrical elements

dependent thereon,

oo Pounce
2 o 8 Range of the Barometer So Range of the Tempera-
ae : 2 during the day. Pa I ture during the day.
ONE ro
Ta As
° go” < ©
g B asl & Max. Min. Diff. sa Max. | Min. | Diff.
3
ie les a
Inches. | Inches. | Inches. | Inches. 0 0 0 0
1 | 29.646 | 29.713 | 29.588 0.125 81.1 86.1 76.8 9.3
2 .668 .725 .602 123 81.8 86.1 79.2 6.9
3 678 729 617 112 81.6 88.0 79.0 9.0
4 | Sunday.
5 621 673 0549 124 80.0 82.4 78.6 3.8
6 .662 730 605 125 79.9 84.5 78.0 6.5
7 751 807 «702 105 81.5 86.0 77.4 8.6
8 .828 .895 .766 129 82.2 88.0 77.4 | 10.6
9 844 923 791 132 82.5 88.5 78.2 | 10.3
10 841 917 173 144 83.1 88.2 77.8 | 10.4
11 - | Sunday.
12 841 915 .803 112 84.2 90.0 79.1 | 10.9
13 858 917 “797 .120 85.1 90.4 80.4 | 10.0
14 842 917 .783 134 85.2 90.3 81.6 8.7
15 .849 911 791 .120 84.7 89.8 80.8 9.0
16 874 946 822 124 84.2 89.6 80.0 9.6
17 834 .907 174 133 80.1 84.2 77.2 7.0
18 | Sunday.
19 922 .981 868 113 81.1 86.8 76.2 | 10.6
20 948 | 30.003 .904 .099 789 83.6 74.4 9.2
21 949 .029 .892 137 79.3 85.9 74.0 | 11.9
22 .908 | 29,976 .839 137 79.4 86.6 73.2 | 18.4
23 895 981 .830 151 79.3 86.6 72.2 | 14.4
24 876 945 .832 113 79.8 86.9 72.4 | 14.5
25 | Sunday.
26 797 872 723 149 79.8 86.6 74.2 | 12.4
27 739 -796 .667 129 81.2 88.0 75.4 | 12.6
28 767 .820 722 .098 80.3 84.6 78.6 6.0
29 813 870 “749 121 81.0 86.6 76.8 9.8
_ 380 -860 .928 812 116 79.9 84.7 76.0 8.7
31 -862 -931 804 127 77.9 83.4 73.2 | 10.2

The Mean Height of the Barometer, as likewise the Dry and Wet Bulb

mo Means are derived from the hourly Observations made during
the day.

XVii Meteorological Observations.

Abstract of the Results of the Hourly Meteorological Observations
taken at the Surveyor Generai’s Office, Calcutta,
in the month of October, 1863.

Daily Means, &c. of the Observations and of the Hygrometrical elements

dependent thereon.—(Continued).

_ i S/uesls yileae
Ss “ ° A i ae re, OS = &
a ~~ = O° re om s| 2
= 2 Sawa S| ee se ieee
= o ae 5 rf eee De s ce 2
f: 5 . 2 | 25 |BHE| 32
3 c es £ 4 ce = are Zoe
St 2 2 Sos As SO |g5a| o8s
5 eI = eae 5 S20, C=8
S ye Q ey = gS ae |S 2c! = 2 eo
2 3 b 5 a Se o-5 |S ac] $3.8
an) = A S) fa) a = < =)
o oO O re) Inches. | T. gr.| T. gr.
1 78.1 3.0 76.0 5.1 0.882 9.50 | 1.67 | 0.85
2 79.3 2.5 77.5 4.3 925 96 | 44] .87
3 78.9 2.7 77.0 4.6 .910 .79 oD) 86
4 | Sunday.
5 78.0 2.0 76.6 8.4 899 Lill 10 .9C
6 78.0 1.9 "6.7 3.2 .902 74: .04 90
7 78.4 3.1 76.2 5.3 887 .56 AS 85
8 78.0 4,2 75.1 71 .857 21 2.33 .80
9 78.0 A.5 74.8 ad 849 oA BB I) ois)
10 78.1 5.0 74.6 8.5 843 03 83 -76
11 | Sunday.
12 79.5 4.7 76.2 8.0 | .887 51 73 |b 48
13 80.4: 4.7 Well 8.0 913 76 OL 78
14; 80.6 4.6 77 A 7.8 922 85 -76 18
15 79.8 4.9 76.4. 8.3 .893 .56 .86 Vid,
16 78.1 6.1 73.8 10.4 822 8.80 | 3.44 72
17 76.8 3.3 TAB 5.6 .840 SHO alerl7/ 84
18 | Sunday.
19 75.1 6.0 70.9 10.2 -748 8.07 | 3.10 72,
20 73.1 5.8 69.0 9:9 704 7.60 | 2.87 73
21 73.0 6.3 68.6 10.7 .695 .50 | 3.09 pA
22 72.9 6.5 68.3 11.1 .688 43 19 .70
23 71.8 7.5 65.5 | 12.8 648 00 D9 .66
24, 73.0 6.8 68.2 11.6 .686 40 130 .69
25 | Sunday.
26 74,4, 5.4 70.6 9.2 TAL 8.00 | 2.75 TA
27 76.2 5.0 T2207 8.5 192 DZ .69 76
28 77.4, 2.9 75.4 4.9 .865 9.34 | 1.57 86
29 76.1 4.9 RO 8.3 £792 8.54 2.60 WAC
30 73.7 6.2 69.4 10.5 713 7.69 | 3.09 pifah
31 69.6 8.3 63.8 14.1 093 6.42 TA .63
|

All the Hygrometrical elements are computed by the Greenwich Constants.
From the Ist January, 1863, the Greenwich New Factors have been used
for computing Dew-point.

Meteorological Observations.

Abstract of the Results of the Hourly Meteorological Observations

taken at the Surveyor General's Office, Calcutta,

in the month of October, 1863.

XIX

Hourly Means, &c. of the Observations and of the Hygrometrical elements

dependent thereon,

month.

Range of the Barometer for
each hour during the

5
2 @ 8
asa
30 6
[80 oS
Hour. = a A
Fi 2 oa Max.
=
Inches. | Inches.
Mid-
nlehe 29.819 | 29.949
1 -803 942
2 795 -928
3 791 926
4 .785 934
5 786 -920
6 820 .965
Yi, .839 982
8 .862 | 30.015
9 875 .029
10 .875 027
11 6858 | 29.998

Noon. 834 -980

1 800 .956
2 781 .935
3 765 .919
4 766 904
5 -768 922
6 779 928
7 197 950
8 815 961
9 .830 961
10 .836 963
11 826 956

The Mean Height of the Barometer, as likewise the Dry and Wet Bulb
Thermometer Means are derived from the Observations made at the several hours

‘during the month,

Min.

Inches.

29.638

617
609
596
.088
-596
.608
633
.661
.660
673

651

627
.606
579
003
049
063
.586
.610
0699
645
651
-646

Diff.

Inches.

0.311

825
.319
-330
346
24
857
349
304
.369
04
347

03503
.300
.360
-366
35)
359
842
2340
326
.316
312
010

Mean Dry Bulb
- Thermometer.

Range of the Tempera-

ture for each hour

during the
month.

Max. | Min. | Diff.
(a) oO oO
82.6 75.0 7.6
82.4, 74.2 8.2
82.8 744 8.4
82.4 74.4, 8.0
82.2 72.6 9.6
82.0 (2.2 9.8
81.6 72,4 9.2
82.6 72.4! 10.2
84.6 76.3 8.3
86.4 77.6 8.8
87.4 79.4 8.0
88.4 79.0 9.4
89.6 79.9 9.7
90.3 80.4 9.9
90.4 78.8 | 11.6
90.1 79.0 | 111
90.3 79.4 | 10.9
88.8 79.8 9.0
87.0 78.8 8.2
86.3 77.4 8.9
84.8 76.2 8.6
84.4 75.0 9.4
83.8 74.2, 9.6
83.2 | 75.71 75

.

XX Meteorological Observations.

Abstract of the Results of the Hourly Meteorological Observations
taken at the Surveyor General's Office, Calcutta,
in the month of October, 1863.

Hourly Means, &c. of the Observations and of the Hygrometrical elements

dependent thereon.—( Continued ).

FA 3

a S

2 >

=} lo}

Hour.| Su 3
Bee pea

$4 ie

Ss a

0 0

Mid-

ene 76.2 2.7
1 75.9 2.6
2 75.8 2.4
3 75.5 2.5
4, 74.6 2.6
5 75.6 2.3
6 74.9 2.3
7 75.4 2.6
8 76.2 4.1
9 76.5 5.3
10 76.7 6.4
11 77.0 73

Noon. 77.3 8.0
1 77.3 8.2
2 77.4 8.0
3 77.6 8.2
4 77.5 7.9
5 77.2 6.7
6 77.5 5.1
7 77.2 4.3
8 76.9 3.9
9 76.8 3.4

10 76.4 3.0
11 76.6 2.9

Computed Dew Point.

°

74.1
74.1
73.7
72.8
74.0
73.3
73.6
73.3
72.8
72.2
71.9

len
71.6
71.8
71.9
72.0
72.5
73.9
74.2
74.2
74.4
74.1
74.6

Dry Bulb above Dew
Point.

Mean Elastic force
of Vapour.

|
|

Inches.

0.835

-830
-830
846
795
827
-809
817
-809
795
781
173

768
766
771
773
776
787
824
832
832
838
.830
843

in a Cubic

foot of air.

Mean Weight of Va-
pour

Troy grs.|Troy grs.

9.03

.00
00
8.89
64
97
SOE
.86
72
59
36
28

19
16
21
24
28
44,
85
.96
96
9.04
8.96
9.11

Additional Weight of

required
for complete satu-

ration.

Vapour

1.44

30
25
30
ool

complete
being

saturation

unity.

Mean degree of Hu-
midity,

All the Hygrometrical elements are computed by the Greenwich Constants.
From the 1st January, 1863, the Greenwich New Factors haye been used

for computing Dew-point.

Meteorological Observations.

XX1

Abstract of the Results of the Hourly Meteorological Observations
taken at the Surveyor General's Office, Calcutta,
in the month of October, 1863.

Solar Radiation, Weather, &c.

2 Oo Dd
aS | to >
88 |e Oc
as 623

: Axo} wm
=) He ee ©
Als [gud

° \Inches

1| 180.0} 0.15

2) 128.5) 0.18

83) 1382.0] 0.58

4, : 5a

5 0.52

6| 127.0} 0.87

Gees 0.10

8| 139.8 ate

9) 143.0
10) 144.0
Te se,

12] 144.0] ,
13) 139.7
14] 137.2
15) 143.0] ...
16) 144.0
AVA one
aS) ae ane
19, 140.5| ...

Prevailing direction

of the Wind.

S.H. &H. G&S.

8. H. & H.

N.& N. EH. &S. EH.

Sunday.
H. & 8. H.
S. HE. & BH.

S.&GH. G&S. EH,

8.
S.&S. W.
S.W.&S8.

Sunday.

S. W. & variable.

N. E. & W.
N. EH. &S.

W.&S8.

S. GN. EH.
S.

Sunday.
N.H.&S. E.

| M. P. of W.

General Aspect of the Sky.

Cloudy till 10 a. um. Scatd. 1i & i till
6 pv. M. cloudless afterwards; also
drizzling incessantly from 1 to10 a.M.

Cloudless till 6 a. M. Scatd. i till 11
A. M. cloudy till 6 p.m. Scatd. “i
afterwards ; also drizzling from Noon
to 3 P. M.

Scatd. “itill 7 a. m. Scatd. 71 till
Noon. cloudy till 8 P. m. cloudless
afterwards; also drizzling at 1,3 &
5 ep. M. & thundering at 1 & 2 P. M.

Cloudy till 7 e. m. cloudless afterwards ;
also drizzling from 5 to 114. uM. &
at 5 P. M.

Cloudy ; also raining at 8 &9a.u. &
from 1 to 4 P. M.

Cloudy till 6 a, Mm. Scatd. 11 & i till
6 p. m. cloudless afterwards; also
raining at 2&3 A. M.

Cloudless till 4 a. mM, Scatd. “i & Ni
till 6 p. mM. cloudless afterwards.

Cloudless till 8 a. m. Seatd. i till 6
Pp. M. cloudless afterwards.

Cloudless till 7 a. Mm. Seatd. i till 4
p. M. cloudless afterwards,

Cloudless till 5 a. m. Scatd. i & Gi
till9 a. M. Scatd. “i till 5 Pp. um, cloud-
less afterwards.

Cloudless till 8 a. um. Scatd. “i & i
till 4 Pp. um. cloudless afterwards.

Cloudless till 4 a. m. Scatd. “i till 10
A. M. cloudy till 2 Pp. Mm. Scatd. -i &
i till 6 e. Mm. cloudless afterwards.

Scatd. “i & i till3 Pp. m. cloudless
afterwards.

Cloudless.

Cloudy till 6 p. u. cloudless afterwards ;
also drizzling from 8 to 11 4. mu,

Cloudless till 10 a.m. Scatd. “<i& i
till 5 Pp. M. cloudless afterwards.

XXU

Meteorological Observations.

Abstract of the Results of the Hourly Meteorological Observations
taken at the Surveyor General's Office, Calcutta,
in the month of October, 1863.

Solar Radiation, Weather, &c.

He ope
ae |e 2.
Ne |b = a

Ala [sod
o |Inches

20| 124.0

21| 139.0

22) 143.0

23) 142.0)...

24) 144.0

PAD ieee

26) 189.7

27! 136.0

28) 129.0{ 1.08

29) 185.4

80) 135.2

Bil) TAXI Ga

Prevailing direction
of the Wind.

N.&N. W.
N. &N. HE.

N. &N. W.
N.W.&N.&N. HE.

N. &N. E.

Sunday.
N. & N. H. & calm.

N. & H.&N. 4H.

W.&S.

| M. P. of W.

General Aspect of the Sky.

—

Cloudless till 10 a, ut. Seatd. clouds till
3 p. M. cloudless afterwards.

Seatd. i& -itill9 a. uw. Scatd. “i &
i till § Pp. m. cloudless afterwards.

3| Cloudless.
4! Cloudless till 6 Pp. u. Scatd. \i & i

afterwards.
Cloudless till 1 Pp. mu. Scatd. clouds till
5 p. mo. cloudless afterwards.

Cloudless till 8 a. um. Scatd. 7i till 5
Pp. M. cloudless afterwards.

Scatd. clouds till 3 Pp. m. cloudy after-
wards; also slightly drizzling at 7
P.M.

Scatd. clouds till 11 a. mu. cloudy till
5p. mM. Scatd. 1 afterwards; also
raining at 2 & 3 P. M.

Seatd. “i till 3 a. um. Seatd. clouds till
1p. uM. Scatd. \i till 8 P. mu. cloudless
afterwards. ;

Cloudless till 8 a. wm. Seatd. clouds till
7 p. Mm. cloudless afterwards.

Scatd. 1 till 2 Pp, mM. cloudless after-
wards,

\i Cirri, “i Cirro strati, \i Cumuli, ~i Cumulo strati, “-i Nimbi, —i Strati,

“i Cirro cumuli.

Meteorological Observations. XXill

Abstract of the Results of the Hourly Meteorological Observations
taken at the Surveyor General's Office, Calcutta,
in the month of October, 1863.

Montuty Rrsuuts.

Inches
Mean height of the Barometer for the month, ete ate 29.814
Max. height of the Barometer occurred at 9 a. M. on the 21st, ae 30.029
Min. height of the Barometer occurred at 4 Pp. M. on the 5th, se 29,049
Extreme range of the Barometer during the month, o6 06 0.480
Mean of the daily Max. Pressures, 60 80 go 29.880
Ditto ditto Min. ditto, 56 50 ee 29.756
Mean daily range of the Barometer during the month, .. 3 0.124
0
Mean Dry Bulb Thermometer for the month, 50 ac 81.3
Max. Temperature occurred at 2 P. M. on the 13th, 00 Oo 90.4
Min. Temperature occurred at 5 a. M. on the 23rd, Me aa 79 9
Betreme range of the Temperature during themonth, .. b6 18.2
Mean of the daily Max. Temperature, die 6c ac 86.8
Ditto ditto Min. ditto, ee AS Se 77.0
Mean daily range of the Temperature during the month, ie 9.8
)
Mean Wet Bulb Thermometer for the month, os oc 76.5
Mean Dry Bulb Thermometer above Mean Wet Bulb Thermometer,. . 4.8
Computed Mean Dew-point for the month, fakes ob 73.1
Mean Dry Bulb Thermometer above computed Mean Deck “point, .. 8.2
Inches
Mean Elastic force of Vapour for the month,.. ae oe 0.803
Troy grains
Mean Weight of Vapour for the month, ws oe oe 8.65
Additional Weight of Vapour required for complete saturation, ne 2.59
Mean degree of humidity for the month, complete saturation being unity, 0.77
Inches
Rained 9 days, Mas. fall of rain during 24 liours, Je eh) 1.08
Total amount of rain during the month, .. a bo 3.48

Prevailing direction of the Wind, ee oe N. & 8.

XXIV Meteorological Observations.

Abstract of the Results of the Hourly Meteorological Observations
taken at the Surveyor General's Office, Calcutta,
in the month of October, 1863.

Monruiuy Resvuts.

Table showing the number of days on which at a given hour any particular wind
blew, together with the number of days on which at the same hour,

when any particular wind was blowing, it rained.

Hour. | |: : I : : i : aa
| |S] Je 5 5 5 5 el . /s1./613
el ee & £ SLE |s 2) |e}£| 4/2
WNisizia E lcis B/SiS. Sia lalw. lela leisialS
| 1
No. of days
Midnight. | 5) | 2 6 2 5 1 2| J 2) | 2
1 i5| | 2 Gia s 5 1 2 2 1
2 15) 13 Ap Bl 3 5 1 1 1 2
3 5) | 3 4| 2) 92 A 1 2 1 2 3
4 16) | 2 Saas 3 1 2 2 5
5 oN 2 B) aipas 6 it 2 1 A
6 Solas Sa) a 6 1 2 2
7 Psi | 4 5] 1] 4 4 i il
8 1 6 5 4| 2) 5,1) 4 1 1 1
9 6| | 8 Ball 2 FA al ls gavak By i
10 16] [6 A) 1 4 Sal 22
11 8 | 4 Salas 2 Vea a 1
Noon. | 4) | 8 8 4) 1 1 2
1 15) 18 Baye Sih 3 3 2| 1
2 f7| 16 il 3) il 2 4| if 3
3 h G6) 1: 5 1 4| 1{ 2 Bi Tl Si a} Zz
4 f 6) | 4 2 2 Bh Silane 3 3 1
5 i 9) 1) 3 mM ah ral 4 2 3 3 1
6 9} | 2 2 2 4 2 2 3 1
7 t 8! 1] 2 2 2 5 1 2 4 1
8 ic} | 3 1) 2 6 1 2 5 1|
9 16) | 2 3) 1 6 il 2 5 1
10 P 4) | 2 A il 6 1 2 5 1 dl
11 F 5] | 2 4, 1| 6 1 2 4 1 1

Meteorological Observations.

XXV.

Abstract of the Results of the Hourly Meteorological Observations
taken at the Surveyor General’s Office, Calcutta,
in the month of November, 1863.

Latitude 22° 3371” North. Longitude 88° 20’ 34” East.

Feet.
_ Height of the Cistern of the Standard Barometer above the Sea-level, 18.11

Daily Means, &c. of the Observations and of the Hygrometrical elements

35

ze

or

2 de,

Date. coe ey

SS Ss

a

Inches.
1 | Sunday.
2 29.845
3 866
4 851
5 822
6 824
@ 847
8 | Sunday.
9 862
10 .909
11 964
12 978
13 968
14 .966
15 | Sunday.
16 929
17 930
18 973
19 30.019
20 024
21 .000
22 | Sunday.
23 047
24, .035
25 .019
26 29.989
27 974.
28 30.041
29 | Sunday.

30 040

dependent thereon.

Range of the Barometer
during the day.

Max.

Inches.

29.921
934
925
893
892
910

923
969
30.018
055
015
037

29.995
30.008
.046
.083
LOL
078

122
113
.095
074
.036
L109

110

Min.

Inches.

29.784:
804
786
770
178
802

816
861
912
.920
921
916

.870 |
.880
.899
961
.970
935

996
.983
951
920
.930
970

989

Diff.

Inches.

0.137
130
139
123
114
108

107
108
106
135
094
121

125
128
147
122
131
143

126
130
144)
154
106
139

125

Mean Dry Bulb
Thermometer.

68.5

Range of the Tempera-
ture during the day.

Max,

77A:

Min.

61.6

Diff.

15.8

The Mean Height of the Barometer, as likewise the Dry and Wet Bulb Ther-
mometer Means are derived from the hourly Observations made curing the day.

XXV1 Meteorological Observations.

Abstract of the Results of the Hourly Meteorological Observations
taken at the Surveyor General's Office, Calcutta,
in the month of November, 1863.

Daily Means, &c. of the Observations and of the Hygrometrical elements
dependent thereon.—( Continued).

: VE Bs 2a Bae
ee s 3 is] ® Beng ee a2
& : 9 Ci) Seuss i | BS
S fo o So a seo Ss a &
2 © iB - a O = Oo) & Oe
2 ee meets se) 2S
Date. a 5 A S a So Or ana) toes
ny fo a us a, |. Ss |B2S) 2a 2
= £ @ || B50) de Sake Seen em ume
= 3 s 3 (<a ° S rat yom tl =
a a Bs ig & | oe Soo | eSeenleeaes
o 4 Pe g Ay Se 6a Poe eeces
= a to) A = = S =
0 Co) ty) fe) Inches.| T. er. | T. gr

1 Sunday.

2 70.6 6.6 66.0 | 11.2 0.638 6.92 3.03 0.79

3 71.2 7.4 66.0 | 12.6 638 90 AS 67

4 70.8 7.1 65.8 | 12.1 634 87 29 .68

5 69.5 7.2 64.5 | 12.2 .607 .60 .20 67

6 68.5 8.1 62.8 | 13.8 574 20 04 64

q 68.9 7.0 64.0 | 11.9 597 49 .08 .68

8 | Sunday.

9 69.5 7.1 64.5 | 12.1 607 60 17 68
10 70.4 7.5 65.1 | 12.8 619 afl 45 66
11 72.4 4.3 69.4 7.3 713 7.75 2.05 79
12 72. 3.4 70.4 5.8 .736 8.00 1.66 .83
13 73.2 3.2 71.0 5.4 “751 17 55 84
14 73.5 4.5 70.3 7.7 £734 7.95 2.24, 78
15 | Sunday.

16 74.9 47 71.6 8.0 766 8.27 A2 ste
17 71.4 6.4 66.9 | 10.9 .657 7.12 3.01 70
18 66.9 7A 61.7 | 126 554 6.03 .09 66
19 64.7 8.0 58.38 | 14.4 494, 5.40 .28 62
20 64.2 6.7 58.8 | 12.1 503 ol 2.72 67
21 66.0 6.6 60.7 | 11.9 0386 86 .80 .68
22 Sunday.

23 67.2 6.1 62.3 | 11.0 565 6.17 67 70
24 66.4 6.7 61.0 | 12.1 541 5.91 88 67
25 66.9 5.8 62.3 | 10.4 565 6.18 50 afi
26 67.4 5.9 62.7 | 10.6 572 25 59 afi
27 68.1 5.3 63.9 9.5 595 50 37 73
28 63.7 7.5 67.7 | 18.5 485 5.31 99 64
29 Sunday.

30 61.9 6.6 56.6 | 11.9 467 15 50 67

All the Hygrometrical elements are computed by the Greenwich Constants.
From the Ist January, 1863, the Greenwich New Factors haye been used for
computing Dew-points.

Meteorological Observations. - XXVil

Abstract of the Results of the Hourly Meteorological Observations
taken at the Surveyor General’s Office, Calcutta,
in the month of November, 1863.

Hourly Means, &c. of the Observations and of the Hygrometrical elements

dependent thereon.

xo £ .; | Range of the Barometer ss Range of the Temperature
age for each hour during pg for each hour during
Hair = 2 the month. bo the month.
“| mag AE
ao? f 5 S S i i
e248 Max. Min. Diff, Se | Max. Min. Diff.
= =
Inches. | Inches.| Inches.| Inches. 0) o oO 0
Mid {99.946 |'30.045 [29.8907 | 0238 | 722| 77.71 62
muolte py. es . 4.4 ; 2.9 14.8
1 937 037 .800 237 71.6 76.9 62.8 14.1
2 931 029 791 .238 71.0 76.0 62.8 13.2
3 913 023 -790 .238 71.2 75.6 65.7 9.9
4 921 021 -794 227 69.5 75.4 62.9 12.5
5 .940 .032 815 217 69.7 75.4 62.0 13.4
6 957 .046 .827 219 69.1 75.4 61.6 13.8
vf 977 077 .839 .238 69.4 75.2 62.2 13.0
8 997 110 .860 .250 72.6 17.8 64.5 13.3
9 | 30.013 116 .888 .228 75.0 80.0 66.6 13.4
10 .015 122 892 .230 771 81.8 70.2 11.6
11 | 29.995 104 .855 249 79,1 83.3 72.6 10.7
Noon. .969 .070 837 .233 80.8 85.7 75.2 10.5
1 .933 04.2 .809 .233 81.9 85.2 76.4 8.8
2 .912 021 -780 241 82.2 85.8 76.6 9.2
3 .900. 014 deraAl £243 82.1 86.3 75.9 10.4
4 .894 |29.996 .770 .226 80.8 85.3 75.2 10.1
5 .908 |30.020 175 245 78.6 84.0 73.8 10.2
6 .917 .028 79 |, .249 76.9 81.8 71.6 10.2
vi 935 .050 | * 785 .265 75.8 81.2 70.2 11.0
8 .950 .068 | 794, 274 74,7 80.6 68.0 12.6
9 .960. 079 .806 273 73.9 79.8 66.8 13.0
10 .965 .087 .820 .267 73.3 78.8 66.0 12.8
11 .958 .082 .828 204 72,7 78.2 65.5 12.7

The Mean Height of the Barometer, as likewise the Dry and Wet Bulb Ther-
mometer Means are derived from the Observations made at the several hours
during the month.

Xxviil Meteorological Observations.

Abstract of the Results of the Hourly Meteorological Observations
taken at the Surveyor General's Office, Calcutta,

in the month of November, 1863.

Huurly Means, &c. of the Observations and of the Hygrometrical elements

dependent thereon.—( Continued.)

Q we) wey iad c= 62 Gane

BA Diels 4 Al wleSad eam See

ero eae) dneSh avalh Siero} see

7 ie) Fe 2) oO os oS

Hour. = 3 3 a S ein O a S a

g 2 3 2, as 3S BAGO

zo 3 = Se adeh lO) ni hae eed uses

& 8 ca a As eles a Bos i) ts SA

as Ee z pau | Se | 52 | Ses

ees ay a) = Seite

0 0 t) o Inches. |Troy grs./Troy grs.

ani GSH wi) AtEA iy G4) vk 7-4 I OlBION IE 67a. | Vaeo
ei 1 67.8 3.8 64.8 6.8 613 73 .67
2 67.4 3.6 64.5 6.5 .607 .67 08
3 67.6 3.6 64.7 6.5 611 -70 .60
4 66.0 35) 63.2 6.3 582 Al 47
5 66.3 3.4 63.6 6.1 .090 49 A4
Bl) BON seelves so) asl, bss A3 35
Vi 66.1 3.3 63.5 5.9 .588 47 .09
8 67.7 4.9 63.8 8.8 093 AQ ON]
9 68.3 6.7 63.6 11.4 -590 43 .88
10 69.0 8.1 63.3 13.8 584 soo 3.59
11 69.7 9.4 63.1 16.0 .580 .26 4,27
Noon. 70.3 10.5 62.9 | 17.9 576 .20 87
1 70.7 11.2 62.9 19.0 576 19 5.25
2 70.8 11.4 62.8 19.4 DTA 7 at
3 | vor |114| 627 |i94 |. 572 15 36
4, 70.8 10.0 63.8 17.0 .593 .09 4.68
5 70.8 7.8 65 3 113133 623 .75 3.63
6 471.0 5.9 66.9 10.0 657 713 2.73
| 70.3 5.5 66.4 9.4 646 04: .50
8 69.9 4.8 66.5 8.2 648 07 16
9 69.3 4.6 66.1 78 .640 6.99 «O02
20 68.8 4.5 65.2 8.1 621 .80 .04
TW 68.5 4,2 65.1 7.6 619 78 1.90

|

Mean degree of Hu-
midity, complete satu-
ration being unity.

All the Hygrometrical elements are computed by the Greenwich Constants.
From the Ist January, 1863, the Greenwich New Factors have been used for

eomputing Dew-points.

Meteorological Observations.

XX1X

Abstract of the Results of the Hourly Meteorological Observations
taken at the Surveyor General's Office, Calcutta,
in the month of November, 1863.

Solar Radiation, Weather, &c.

Max. Solar
radiation.
Rain Gauge
5 feet above
Ground.

| Date.

© {Inches

So © TSMS Owe
eH re
bo &
lop) S)
i ~)

HY
—

Ps

0.22

Prevailing direction

of the Wind.

s
ok
=s

AAAAAAL

A Ze
Ss
Q
g

_&S. KH,

S.H.&N.&N. EH,

N. H. & H.
K.

Sunday.
8. W.&N.

N. W. & W.
N.&N. W. & W.

Variable.
W.&N.W.&N.
W.

Sunday.

Sunday.

N.H.&N.W. GN.

ENN | M. P. of W.

Ale

KBeNwNbde bb

General Aspect of the Sky.

Cloudless.

Cloudless.

Cloudless.

Cloudless.

Cloudless.

Cloudless till9 a. u.; Scatd, clouds
afterwards.

‘Cloudless.

Cloudless till 9 a. mM. cloudy after-

wards.

Cloudless till 5 a, mM. cloudy afters
wards; also raining at2&3p.mM. &
drizzling at 6 & 7 Pp. M.

Cloudy ; also very slightly drizzling at
9a. M.

Cloudy ; also drizzling occasionally.

Cloudy till Noon ; Scatd. i till 7 Pp. M.
cloudless afterwards.

Scatd. “i till 11 a. m.; Scatd. i till
4p. M. cloudless afterwards.

Cloudless,

Cloudless ; also slightly foggy from §
to 10 Pp. M.

Cloudless.

Cloudless.

Cloudless till 2p, mu. Scatd. “i till 7
v, M, cloudless afterwards.

Cloudless till 11 a.m. Seatd. 91 till’ 3
Pp. M. cloudless afterwards.

Cloudless.

Cloudless.

Cloudless.

Cloudless.

Scatd, \—i tiJ1 10 4. m, cloudless after-
wards.

Cloudless.

Ni Cirri, \-i Cirro strati, %i Cumuli, ~i Cumulo strati, \-i Nimbi,—i Strati,

\ i Cirro cumuli,

XXX Meteorological Observations.

Abstract of the Results of the Hourly Meteorological Observations

taken at the Surveyor General's Office, Calcutta,
in the month of November, 1863.

Monruuiy Resurrs.

Mean height of the Barometer for the month, .. oe ae
Max. height of the Barometer occurred at 10 A. M. on the 23rd, ee
Min. height of the Barometer occurred at 4 P. M. on the 5th, ee
Extreme range of the Barometer during the month, ee es
Mean of the Daily Max. Pressures, .. oe ee ee

Ditto ditto Min. ditto, .. on 50 on
Mean daily range of the Barometer during the month, .. es
Mean Dry Bulb Thermometer for the month, .. co ee
Max. Temperature occurred at 3 P. M. on the 3rd, ee es
Min. Temperature occurred at 6 a. M. on the 30th, *o os
Extreme range of the Temperature during the month, ee ee
Mean of the daily Max. Temperature, ee ee oe

Ditto ditto Min. ditto, .. 50 aie
Mean daily range of the Temperature during she month, .. ee
Mean Wet Bulb Thermometer for the month, .. ae

Mean Dry Bulb Thermometer above Mean Wet Bulb Tie ee
Computed Mean Dew-point for the month, .. ee ee
Mean Dry Bulb Thermometer above computed Mean Dew-point, as

Mean Elastic force of Vapour for the month, .. ee ee

Inches
29.948
30.122
29.770

0.352
30.018
29.893

0.125

Co)
75.2
86.3
61.6
24.7
82.8
68.9
13.9
68.9

6.3
64.5
10.7

Inches
0.607

Troy grains

Mean Weight of Vapour for the month, ee ee ac

Additional Weight of Vapour required for complete saturation, Me
Mean degree of humidity for the month, complete saturation being unity,

Rained 3 days, Max. fall of rain during 24 hours, se ee
Total amount of rain during the month, ae ne se

Prevailing direction of the Wind, .. co eo ee

6.61
2.76
0.71

Inches
1.04
1.26
N.

Meteorological Observations. XXX1

Abstract of the Results of the Hourly Meteorological Observations
taken at the Surveyor General's Office, Calcutta,
in the month of November, 1863.

Montruny Resutrts.
Vable showing the number of days on which at a given hour any particular wind

blew, together with the number of days on which at the same hour,

when any particular wind was blowing, it rained.

Hour.
! e 4 Ss | 5 a ¢ a].
5) } S) Oo} -10 Onc|o o|s
lei| c alale| |siEle| |e lstslal2
[a ls| BE. lalale|s. clailele lala leis |S ie
! No. of days
Midnight. 12 1 2 A
1 1 2 1 2 5
2 WON all al 2 5 1
3 POW Slay 2 2 3
A | 2 1 ] 3 5
5 13 my al 1) | 2 2 A
6 13 Ty || al 1| fa 4
bi | 4 1 Th GF 5
8 13 4, 1 1 1 1
9 dh aD) Ba Ty) al 2 1
10 15 2) | 2 1 3
11 A 2) | 2 2\ | 3
Noon. | 7 2 1 2 1 2
1 15] 2 1 2} Jl 3
2 4| 2| 1} 1) 17 2) 71 3| [1
3 al 2) | 2) 1)1 1 2| 13
A 13 a |B 2 3) 13 1
5 12 2\ 1 1 Te 183 2| 1 2
6 a) 3 1 1 4 3
7 } 1 3 1 1) 73) [5
8 1 3 1 1 3| 45
9 1 3 1 3) 15| |1
10 1 2| 11 1 AW Ad
11 1 2) | 1 1 3) | 4 Pal -| 1

i > Ya ; :
Oe.

ee:

yy
id

ase

ee ae

ee ee ee

eee

AA aN a Ym Se ARR TE I cd eo 8 er REE SI PM Tg ERNE TG CR a moe pn

i

atiietetaien atimmetaanaenss

ES

ot Se ee

en a ee eer kt i =

sob Say Sen ie ie fee

ee ae Sune Hed dig
ashlar) ins Bainasvcon 8

Meteorological Observations.

XXXL

Abstract of the Results of the Hourly Meteorological Observations
taken at the Surveyor General's Office, Calcutta,
in the month of December, 1863.

Latitude 22° 33’ 1” North. Longitude 88° 20’ 34” Hast.

Feet.
Height of the Cistern of the Standard Barometer above the Sea-level, 18.11

Daily Means, &c. of the Observations and of the Hygrometrical elements

a4

Date. x fa s
Ss a

a

Inches.

» 1 30.024,
2 .063
3 .050
4 .016
3) 028
6 | Sunday.
al 29.970
8 .996
9 30.035
10 024
11 29.994
12 30.035
13 | Sunday.
14 046
15 043
16 024:
17 .002
18 .052
19 .076
» 20 | Sunday.
21 .065
22 021
23 034:
24 .062
25 054
26 044
27 =| Sunday.
28 .060
29 028
30 O14
31 29.997

dependent thereon.

Range of the Barometer
during the day.

Max.

Inches.
30.092
136
.140
.092
118

045
052
110
100
.051
118

117
115
.092
.065
124
153

-140
-099
108
.139
141
119

.136
.095
-082
O77

Min.

Inches.
29.966
30.011
29.980

950
971

914,
952
.968
995
943
976

997
.988
963
934
973
30.015

29.998
953
.976

30.006

29.987
.996

30.016
29,975
948
928

Diff,

Inches.

0.126
125
160
142
147

131
-100
142
145
108
142

120
127
129
131
151
183

142
146
132
133
154
123

120
120
134:
149

Mean Dry Bulb
Thermometer.

os)
a O)
OU

66.9
66.0
66.2
67.1

67.3
67.9
67.8
68.0
69.6
68.3

65.4
65.2
64,7
65.5
66.5
66.5

66.1
67.6
69.3
66.8
65.1
65.0

65.6
66.6
67.1
65.8

Range of the Tempera-
ture during the day.

Max.

0)
75.3
77.2
76.0
76.7
76.9

76.6
77.4
77.2
77.8
USUI
78.4

75.4
75.8
75.5
75.6
76.2
76,2

76.6
78.8
78.0
75.2
75.2
76.4

75.4
76.5
77.0
75.8

Min.

57.2
57.4
56.4
56.6
57.8
57.4

57.4
58.4
62.6
59.4
57.6
56.8

56.8
59.4
61.0
57.2

Diff.

17.0
18.2
17.6
18.2
17.9
17.4

18.2
18.4:
19.1
19.0
18.4;
18.8

19.2
20.4
15.4
15.8
17.6
19.6

18.6
Wf aL
16.0
18.6

The Mean Height of the Barometer, as likewise the Dry and Wet Bulb Ther.
mometer Means are derived from the hourly Observations made during the day.

XXXIV Meteorological Observations.

Abstract of the Results of the Hourly Meteorological Observations
taken at the Surveyor General's Office, Calcutta,
in the month of December, 1863.

Daily Means, &c. of the Observations and of the Hygrometrical elements
dependent thereon.— (Continued).

p E % eapeneee ey (2: 2
o ° 2 Oo os = =
5 Bulls bee Me PR aso ees | 2h
Bi Senatcdomimer ll (se eee ieee
2 5 B - SVMs S| ss 2
: Se Ver er ee eee
Dame, | ae 2 fal 3 3S 29 | 2-52) Seay
@ a a a 2 Sy: 2 = ele aa =
=o = 2 Bye = Saupe =, i) oS
Panes 3 3 faye cS) S Shao I So
=) ec a a as a= BZp| abs
® A ap I gon la eanelltes nian PU ce:
= a O a a = e 2
Cy) Oo) o ty) IGavelavess |) WS eres |) AL, exe
1 61.0 6.5 59.8 | 11.7 0.4.55 5.03 2.39 | 0.68
2 60.4 6.5 55.2 | 11:7 445 4,93 335) -68
3 59.5 6.5 64.3 | 11.7 1432 Bui 29 .68
A 59.6 6.6 543; 11.9 A382 a 33 67
5 61.1 6.0 56.3 | 10.8 462 5.11 21 70
6 | Sunday.
7 61.3 6.0 56.5 | 10.8 465 14 23 -70
8 62.0 5.9 57.3 | 10.6 478 27 24 .70
9 62.2 5.6 57.7 | 10.1 485 30 13 i2
10 62.1 5.9 57.4 | 10.6 480 29 24 .70
11 63.2 6.4 58.1 | 11.5 AQT 40 .o0 .68
12 61.6 6.7 06.2 | 12.1 461 08 02 67
13 Sunday.
14 59.0 6.4 53.9 | 11.5 426 4.73 22 68
15 59.3 5.9 54.6 | 10.6 A387 85 .06 70
16 59.0 5.7 54.4 | 10.3 A834 82 1.98 affil
17 60.1 5.4 55.8 9.7 4:55 5.05 .93 12
18 60.9 5.6 56.4 | 10.1 464 14 2.05 2
19 60.0 6.5 64.8 | 11.7 440 4.86 oo .68
20 Sunday.
21 60.2 5.9 55.5 | 10.6 450 99 sill .70
22 62.0 5.6 87.5 | 10.1 481 5.32 12 12
23 63.5 5.8 58.9 | 10.4 504 06 27 atl:
2A 60.5 6.3 55.5 | 11.3 2450 4,99 27 .69
25 59.3 5.8 54.7 | 10.4 |. .438 87 -02 ofl
26 59.2 5.8 54.6 | 10.4 437 86 OL oak
27 Sunday.
28 59.5 6.1 54.6 | 11.0 437 85 15 .69
29 61.1 5.5 56.7 39 469 5.18 03 72
30 62.0 5.1 57.9 9.2 .488 09 1.93 74
31 59.3 6.5 54.1 | 11.7 429 4.76 2.28 -68

All the Hygrometrical elements are computed by the Greenwich Constants.
From the lst January, 1863, the Greenwich New Factors have been used for
computing Dew-points.

Meteorological Observations. KXXV

Abstract of the Results of the Hourly Meteorological Observations
taken at the Surveyor General's Office, Calcutta,
in the month of December, 1863.

Hourly Means, &c. of the Observations and of the Hygrometrical elements
dependent thereon.

ro £ ; | Range of the Barometer 5 9 Range of the Temperature
=ag2 for each hour during co for each hour during
Ligue > g Fa the month. fas) the month.
"| mas as
ao Oe) i=] 2
S42 | Max. Min. Diff. Sey | Max. Min. Diff.
= =
Inches. | Inches.| Inches.| Inches. (0) o oO oO
Mid- f 9 y
night. 30.035 30.097 |29.948 | 0.149 62.4 65.8 59.4, 6.4
1 027 .096 .939 Pa VA 61.8 65.2 58.8 6.4
2 O19 O81 .936 145 61.1 64.8 58.4 6.4
3 014 073 954 | .119 60.4 64.0 57.8 6.2
4, ,005 .067 934 MS3) 59.9 63.4: 57.6 5.8
5 .OL5 .055 .945 110 59.5 62.7 56.8 5.9
6 .035 .092 .965 127 59.0 62.7 56.4 6.3
di .054 100 991 109 58.9 62.8 56.4 6.4
8 .080. .125 |30.014 11 62.8 65.8 59.0 6.8
9 .099 140 045 .095 65.6 69.8 62.4: 7 A
10 .105 wl53 045 .108 68.5 72.4, 66.0 6.4
11 088 129 .030 .099 71.6) 75.0 68.8 6.2
Noon .060 108 |29.999 | .109 73.9 77.3 71.4 5.9
Opa 064 .968 .096 75.5 78.5 73.0 5
2 |29.998 .040 939 LOL 76.5 79.7 74.0 yr |
3 -981 | .030 OZ LOE 76.3 78.6 74.8 3.8
4, 975 .030 914 116 74.8 77.2 73.2 4.0
5 .983 044: .923 121 72.3 75.0 69.6 5.4
6 .993 .058 937 121 69.8 72.2 68.2 4.0
7 |30.011 .076 .960 116 67.7 71.0 66.0 5.0
8 .027 -089 | 975 114 66.4 69.4 64.6 4.8
9 .039 104, .979 125 65.2 68.6 63.4: 5.2
10 046 113 .986 AMA 64.1 | 67.9 62.3 5.6
11 .040 104)] .983)"} 121 |, 63.4 )) 67.2 61.3 5.9

The Mean Height of the Barometer, as likewise the Dry and Wet Bulb Ther-.
mometer Means are derived from the Observations made at the several hours
during the month.

XXXVI

Meteorological Observations.

Abstract of the Results of the Hourly Meteorological Observations
taken at the Surveyor General's Office, Calcutta,
in the month of December, 1863.

Hourly Means, &c. of the Observations and of the Hygrometrical elements

oe
a 5
oO
2 ie 5
Hour. = 2 3S
5 =
[=]
Sa | a
25 |p
a as)
(0) 10}
Mid- | 592 | 3.2
night,
1 58.8 3.0
2 58.2 2.9
3 57.5 2.9
A, 57.1 2.8
5 56.7 2.8
6 56.3 2.7
Uf 56.1 2.8
8 58.3 4.5
9 59.8 5.8
10 61.6 6.9
11 63.0 8.6
Woon 63.5 10.4

HOOnDNTAmswhyrH
fon)
ce
is
fon)

fod ba

Computed Dew Point.

Dry Bulb above Dew
Point,

oO

AANA NNN D

g
fon)

Mean Ilastic force of
Vapour.

Inches.

0.462

A459
452
AAT
A37
A431
426
422
431
A445
459
459

AGL
455
452
449
452
478
AQ
501
A494
486
A78
A472

dependent thereon.—(Continued.)

pour in a Cubic foot

Mean Weight of Va-
of air.

Troy grs.|Troy grs.

5.17

14
.06
4.94.

Vapour required for
complete saturation.

Additional Weight of

Mean degree of Hu-
midity, complete satu-
ration being unity.

All the Hygrometrical elements are computed by the Greenwich Constants.
From the lst January, 1863, the Greenwich New Factors have been used for

computing Dew-points.

Meteorological Observations.

XXXVI1

Abstract of the Results of the Hourly Meteorological Observations
taken at the Surveyor General's Office, Calcutta,
in the month of December, 1863.

Solar Radiation, Weather, &c.

ad [Ss
‘o-3 |e acd
.| 2.3 | & 8 | Prevailing direction
2/4 = 4 i & of the Wind.
ae eee
o |Inches
1) 122.0
2| 136.0 N.
3| 139.0 N.& N. W
4) 136.2 N. & N.W.
DeesorO) (ge. WN.
Gli... Sunday.
7| 139.0 W.& N. W
8} 137.5} ... | N.W.& EH.
9, 136.5 N.&N. W
10! 138.0| ... | N. W.
11) 137.0 8. W.&N.
12) 138.6 N. W. & W.
TS. Sunday.
14) 135.0 N.
15} 135.0 N.&N. W.
16] 135.5) ... | N. &N. W.
17| 135.0; ... |N.&N.W.
18) 137.2 N,
19) 135.8) . N.
20)\aeee Sunday
21| 138.0 NIN
7) USSR ere isle al ih
23) 134.0] .. N.&W.&S
24) 135.0 co || NG
25| 136.0 N.
26) 189.0 7 | N. GN. Wi
27 Sunday

_ = | M. P. of W.

ay

rant)

tole

a

loo bole

Ble

tlH leo

BIE bolH Dole tele fat et

tole BIH tH ble

[co Aloo

lc Blce Ble tole lee

ve

-| Cloudless till 6 A. mM.

General Aspect of the Sky.

Scatd. clouds till 9 a,u., Scatd. i &i
till 6 Pp. mu. cloudless afterwards.

Scatd, “i till 3

vy. M. Scatd. “i till6 pe. mu. cloud-
less afterwards,

Cloudless till 8 a. mu. Seatd. “i till
Noon ; cloudless afterwards also foggy
at 9 P. M.

Cloudless.

Cloudless.

Cloudless.

Cloudless.

Cloudless.

Cloudless.

Cloudless till6 a. mu. Scatd. “i & “i
till 6 P. Mu. cloudless afterwards.

Cloudless till 8 a. mM. Scatd, “a & “i
till 6 p. M. cloudless afterwards.

Cloudlessg.

Cloudless.

Cloudless.

Cloudless ; also slightly fogey from 9
to ll P. Mm.

Cloudless.

-| Cloudless; also slightly fogey at 9 &

10 Pp. M.

Cloudless; also fogey from 8 to 11
P. M.

Cloudless.

Cloudless.

Cloudless.

Cloudless.

Cloudless.

Ni Cirri, <i Cirro strati, 91 Cumuli, ~i Cumulo strati, “-i Nimbi,—i Strati
d 2 >) ] e)

W/W i Cirro cumuli,

XXXVIil Meteorological Observations.

Abstract of the Results of the Hourly Meteorological Observations
taken at the Surveyor General's Office, Calcutta,
in the month of December, 1863.

Solar Radiation, Weather, &c,

Ba |@s =
5.9 |sOrcg 3
_| 2 |S © &| Prevailing direction | © General Aspect of the Sky.
S| xa |e 3o of the Wind. pu
SB] Fs | aR ;
Alas lao a
o |Inches Ib
28] 128.0} ... | N.& W. z| Scatd, \—i till 3 Pp. m. cloudy till8 P. um.
cloudless afterwards also foggy be-
tween 9 & 11 P. M.
29) 124.8; ... |W. &N.&S. W. +| Scatd. \i & \—i till 4p. m. cloudless
afterwards.
30) 184.0) ... | N. +! Cloudless.
31] 187.0} ... | N.& W. GN. E. 4| Cloudless; also slightly foggy at11
Pp, M.

Meteorological Observations. XXXIX

Abstract of the Results of the Hourly Meteorological Observations
taken at the Surveyor General's Office, Calcutta,
in the month of December, 1863.

Monruty Resurts.

Inches

Mean height of the Barometer for the month, .. ae -. 930.032
Max. height of the Barometer occurred at 10 a. mM. on the 19th, ee 90.153
Min. height of the Barometer occurred at 4: P. M. on the 7th, e- 29.914
Hatreme range of the Barometer during the month, So og O88)
Mean of the Daily Max. Pressures, .. oe se -- 980.106
Ditto ditto Min. ditto, .. OC be co) AOE
Mean daily range of the Barometer during the month, .. e- 0,184

()

Mean Dry Bulb Thermometer for the month, .. ee ee 66.7
Max. Temperature occurred at 2 Pp. m. on the 11th, ste O¢ 79.7
Min. Temperature occurred at 6 & 7 a. M. on the 16th, .. o« 56.4
Hatreme range of the Temperature during the mouth, bo ae 23.3
Mean of the daily Max. Temperature, te ve a 76.6
Ditto ditto Min. ditto, .. te 56 we 58.7
Mean daily range of the Temperature during the month, .. ee 17.9
Inches

Mean Wet Bulb Thermometer for the month, .. ate 50 60.7
Mean Dry Bulb Thermometer above Mean Wet Bulb Thermometer, .. 6.0
Computed Mean Dew-point forthe month, .. ee eo 55.9

Mean Dry Bulb Thermometer above computed Mean Dew-point, oe 10.8
Mean Elastic force of Vapour forthe month, .. ee ee =: 46

———————

Troy grains

Mean Weight of Vapour for the month, ee ee ee 5.05
Additional Weight of Vapour required for complete saturation, se 2.18
Mean degree of humidity for the month, complete saturation being unity, 0.70

Inches
Rained No. days, Max. fall of rain during 24 hours, ee ee Nil.
Total amount of rain during the month, oe se oe Nil.

Prevailing direction of the Wind, .. 5c 5c . N.&NW

x] Meteorological Observations.

Abstract of the Results of the Hourly Meteorological Observations
taken at the Surveyor General's Office, Calcutta,
in the month of December, 1863.

Monruiy Resvuts.
Table showing the number of days on which at a given hour any particular wind

blew, together with the number of days on which at the same hour,

when any particular wind was blowing, it rained.

Hour.
) (s! 18] (8h-/81 leh |éy [ele
igi |e elaje] (siE/s| |siElsis|a\2
NJ2)2|8| E. |elolels.iclaleleleleleiS isle
No. of days
Midnight. WA || a i} 2) 74 2
1 18} | 1 1 1) }2 4
2 tS eel 1 dbp fez 4
3 iy) | a 1 Lea A, f
A aA 1; | 1) 73 3 2
5 13 1 11 Jl 73 i 7
6 19) | 1} | 2) 12 2 1
if Ay | tal 1 1; 13! 73 1 |
8 (20 3 1 2 1
9 16) | 4 2 2| 42 1
10 14) | 4 3 2 3 1
il 14, 13 3 il il 1 4
Noon. 16) 4 2 1 1 4, 1 2
i 14) 4 2 TL 4 6
2 US| eed: 1 1 1 5
3 15| Jl 1 1 Ti tis’
4 14) 71 il 2); 19
5 Sy) 1 4 9
6 13 5 8 1
| 13 1 5| 18
8 13 1 5| 18
9 14, 1 5| 47]
10 13 i b) 7| 1
11 13 Waa heat Al | 7| 2

INDEX If.

GHOGRAPHY, ZOOLOGY, ETHNOLOGY, BOTANY, &c.

Aerolite near Dacca, fall of, aA a $2
Ammonites from the Spiti Valley, —... Heh 126
Analysis of the mineral water of Pai, .
Anderson, Dr. T., Flora of Behar and the mountain Parasnath,
Assam, progress of Trigonometrical Survey in,
Bandicota Rat,
Behar, Flora of
Blanford, H. F., On the Gerard collection of Spiti fossils i in the
‘\eintic Society’ s Museum,
————- W. T., Contributions to Indian Malacology, No. TAY,
Blyth, H., A Menno on the Rats and Mice of India, ah
Bombay Presidency, Trigonometrical Survey of,
Burma, Land shells from,...
Cetacea of the Chinese seas,
Coast series, Triangulation of, bee ue tap
Curator’s Report on Zoology, ae Lie We.
Earthquake at Nimar, Hee a ay
Flint Implements,
Flora of Behar and the Mountain Parasnath,
of the Peshawur Valley,
Fossiis from the Spiti Valley,
Gasteropoda, Indian Terrestrial, Notes on the distribution of, .
— New species from SaaaA,
Goorhagurh Meridional Series, Trigonometrical Survey of,
Jenis fatuus, note on the,...
Tidus Series, Progress of the Trigonometrical Survey of, A
Jurassic flogetlle from Spiti Valley, ae vas 124
Kashmir, Progress of Trigonometrical Survey in, ... a
Khoomee tribes, Notes on,
Khyens, Notes on,
Koladyne (Upper) tribes of,
Kookies—Vide Tipper alls,
Koos, Notes on the, ah Ai ca
Laos described, aus ike aes 390
Land Mollusca, of Ava, a Be
Ditto India,
Malacology, Indian, No. IV., Contributions to,
Meteorological tables for Caleutta, i. see Appendix,
Meteorites presented to the Society, .
Montgomerie, Captain, On the Exploration of Countries be-
yond the Briteh frontier,
Mroo Khyen tribes, BR ee
Mus, Memoir on Indian species of, ... “ise 327

Page
445
seq.
386
189
117
333
189

ul Index.

Museum, Zoological, Report on the accessions to, ..
Nimar, Earthquake at,
Observations, eames, and Ther mometric, i
O’Donel, J. H. Hsq., Notes on the Tribes of the Eastern
iMhvoret nee sah as 400,
Pai, Me eouns of a visit to the hot springs of,
iPrrawneihn, Flora of, ae
Peshawur Valley Flora,
Geographical features, 300
Geology, a oe oe -
Climate and temperature, ... 546
Plants collected in Behar and on Parasnath, Catalogue Olsen eee
in and near the Peshawur Valley, ee Ole
the distribution of the Indian species of, ...
Rahoon Meridional Series, Trigonometrical Survey of,
Rats and Mice of India, Memoir on the, ve Pes
Report of the Curator, Zoological Department, ... 73,
Reynolds, H. J. Esq., Notes on the tribes of the HasternFrontier,
Schomburgk, Sir Robert H., Kt., F. R. S., A visit to the
Principal city of the Laos,
Stevenson, Captaim J. F., Account of a visit to the hot springs
of Pai in the Tavoy digas, a
Stewart, Dr. J. L., On the Peshawur Valley Flora,
Swinhoe, R. Hsq., ‘On the Cetacea of the Chinese seas,

Tables of indian species of Helicide and Cyclostomide, 362
Theobald, W. Esq., Jr., On the distribution of Indian terrestrial
Gasteropoda, 68,

Note on the Phenomenon known as Tenis fatuus,
Tipperahs, A short account of the, ... oe es
Tribes of the Eastern Frontier, Notes on the, ... 400, 404,
Trigonometrical Survey Report,

Tween, A. Hsq., Memo. of the Analysis of the water from the
Spring near Pai,
Walker, Major J. 'T., Report on the Trigonometrical Survey

operations,...
Xiengmai, the principal City of the Lacs or Shan states, Ac-
count of a Visit to, ... ee fo 387

INDEX II.

seq.

NEW GENERA AND SPECIES DESCRIBED IN THE

ZOOLOGICAL AND BOTANICAL MEMOIRS.
The fossil species in Italies.
MAMMALS.

Legegada Jerdoni, Blyth, ...
Phaiomys, Blyth,
Ph, leucurus, Blyth,

350
89
ab

Index.

BIRDS.

Dendrocitta Bayleyi, Tytler,
Euryzona Canning), Tytler,
Hematornis Eleimi, Tytler,
Mulleripicus Feddeni, Blanford,
Parus Beavani, Blvth,

Picus Blanfordi, Blyth,
Pomatorhinus pileatus, Blyth,
Propasser frontalis, Blyth,
——— Murrayi, Blyth,
Pyrrhula erythaca, Blyth,
Rhodophila, Jerdon,

R. melanoleuca, Jerdon,

Turnix Blanfordii, Blyth,...

REPTILES.

Emys nuchalis, Blyth, ...
Hydrosaurus sealer jus, Blyth,
Phrynocephalus Theobaldi, Bl; yth,
Lestudo platynotus, Blyth,
Tripidonotus Tytieri, Blyth,

CEPHALOPODA.

Ammonites acucinctus, Strachey,
A Gerardi, Blanford,
A. guttatus, Strachey,
We. Hyphasis, Blanford,
A, octagonus, Strachey,
A. ' Spitiensis, Blanford,
A, strigilis, Blanford,
Ceratites Himalayanus, Blntord,

GASTEROPODA.

Alyezeus Avee, Blanford, ...

A. Richthoteni, Bianford,...

A. Vuleani, Blan’ ord,

Cyclophorus hispidulus, Blanford,
Diplommatina Puppensis, Blanford,

D. exilis, Blanford, :
Hypselostoma [Biemeorennrten, Blanford,
Spiraculum, Pearson, emend.

Sp- Avanum, Blanford,

Turritella montium, Blanford,

CONCHIFERA.

Cyprina ? trigonalis, Blanford,
Monotis concentricus, Blanford,
Mytilus mytiloidea, Blanford,

Page

45S
458

459
79

455

319
134

135
136
137

iV Index.

INDEX III.

HISTORY, LITERATURE, PHILOLOGY, ARCH HOLOGY.

The Roman figures refer the paging of the Supplement.

Abbott, Lieut.-Col. J., on the site of Aornos, bit 13,
Anhichhatra, identification of, 3 ay Es
Ajatasatru, XXIII. and XXIV.,

Antiquities of the Peshawur District,... x
Aornos, On the identification of, Boe sate 13,
Aphsar, inscription at, XX XVIIL.,

Arakan, List of the kings of, zee
Arrian’s Account of Aornos, a8 Mele 14,
Bactro-Pali Inscriptions, notes on,

Bahai hill, architectural remains at,

Baibhar Mt., XXL., :

_Bakhra, remains at, LIL, se

Bakror, Ruins of a large brick tope at, ele

Balddity AN DNOXOX | OXONONOLSLTE

Bana, orks of,

Barabar hill, XX XTX. seq. Ss
Baragaon, ruins at, XX VIT. seq. ; tanks at, eX ue
Bayley, H. C., on the true reading of the name of Huvishka, ke
Behar, Ruins of the old city of, XOXONOV ES ee ish
Benares, Bhuddhist establishment at, XCIV., ... So:
Besarh, remains at, LIT. seq. ; ae =e
Bhanumati a Bengali romance, Be ee
Bhau Daji, Dr., On Ancient Sanskrit ‘Numerals, At 70}
Ghitari, remains at, XCI. seq. Be oes
Bhoja Raja of Dhér and his homonyms,

Buddha, Account of the Obsequies of, LX XVIII, 2

Buddha ( feolossal Fie. of) near Kauwi-dol hill, x00,

Buddha Gaya, Antiquities of, VI. Sed. ‘

Buddha image at Bangkok,

Buddhist topes at Xiene omal, : le 389,
Burroughs, Major, On “Broughs or Paecht’s Houses in Ork-
ney, note, 906

Cashmir Ghar, Account of the contents of,

Chaukandi caver CVII.

Coin, punch marked, found at Lauriya Navandearh, TXOVEE:

Closing, found near Mer sul, memorandum on,

Court, General, On site of Aornos,

Court, Gensel, Account of the Cashmere Ghar cave,

Cunningham, Major- General A., Archeological Survey Report
for 1861- 62., JEUNE

Wether on the identification of some ancient sites,

SS Letter on the proceedings of Indian Archeologi-
cal Survey. il.) LL.

Remarks on an Inscription from Taxila,

Page
4.O9
19

441

161

139

Index.

Cunningham, His version of the Taxila Inscription considered,

Memo. on the Hlephant Statues exhumed in the

Delhi Palace, a: Sat Soe ot

Curtius, inaccuracy of, ... ;

his account of Aornos,

Dhamek, deserivtion of the tower of, XOVIIL ;

Dharawat Hills, LI., ve as Dh

Dhar, Bhoja Rajah of, ee es te 92

Diodsnae account of Aornos, ts

Dowson, Professor J., Letter on the Taxila Tnscription,

——s sug gestion of an Emendation of Professor Hall’s
translation oe the Grants of Kong) Hastin,

Elliot’s Mohammedan Historians, Report on the publication of,

Fa-Hian’s account of the “hill of the Isolated ay XQVETL:

Flint Implements, il bs

Gaya, Antiquities of, Tan,

Ghosrawa, remains at, XXXVIL,

Gidhadwar Cave, XVIUIL. seq.

Giryek, ruins at, XVI. seq.

Gopi’s Cave, XLVI.,

Gushan era, date of the!

Hall, Professor Fitz- Edw ard, Excavations carried on at Sarnath
umder, CXVI.

on grants of King Hastin,

Hathiyadah, pillar and statue at, XC. a6 PE

Hody’s (Rajah,) Castle, ... Bk 380 16,

Huvishka, on the name of, :

Indo- Scythians, date of the overthrow of Greck power, by,

Inscriptions at Khalsi, i

from Aitpur,...

——— ,, Mount Abu,

——--———.,, Sarun, ..
—_——__,, Gwalior,
——_—_——._,,_ _Pehewa,

——— ,, Madhukarghar,
——— ,, Nagpur,

——_——._,, Sattara,
—_———— ,, Bhera Ghat, Schore and 1d Oodeypan ue
————— ,, Taxila, ener on,.. 139,
— ,, Note on the above, ... 15],
—_— Manikyala, 144; Hidda, 13, 144, 152; Wardak,
144, 158 ; Onin 145 ; ; Panjtar, me ‘ 145,
—— is Sraenih sas
———_— _,, Ona vase from Peshawur, Seige ae Ue 172,
eee Peon sae

—- ,, From Kajraha and Nagpur i in Central India,..

Jagatsingha, scene of his discovery identified by Colonel
Cunningham, CV.

J agdispur, Buddha at, XXVIII.

vi Index.

Jamrid, Slab found near,...

Jarasandha’s throne, DOE,

Kahaon, remains at, LX XXVI. seq. ...

Karna Chopar Cave, XLI., XLII; ; Tnseriptions i in XLII.
Kasia, Remains at, XX

[anny dol hill, RKENOTINE

Kesariya, anon at, ti re a Soe
Khalsi, Tnseription aD a ae oat
Khukhundo, remains at, LXXXI. seq. BH see
Kings of seston, ida 5:

Kittoe, Major, Excavations at Sdrnath, CXIV.
Kosam or Kosambi, pillar and fortress ah
Kurkihar, remains at, XIV. seq.

Lauriya Ara Raj, WCUOE

Literary Intelligence, Correspondence, “ke. ; ies 18,
Jioewenthal, Rev. [., On Peshawur Antiquities, pp
Mahabun, the ion of, sad eo Ase

Matha Kuar mound, LX XIII.

Nagarjtini hills and eaves, XLIII. XLVI.

Nalanda, see Baragaon,

Naogram, remains near,

Vemeels, on ancient Sanele d Sid ie

Orkney Tekin’, tumuli or rsaornendls 4 i the, a note,

Padaraona, remains at, LXX. Phe ye aes

Pehewa R acoril

Peshawur Dee Antiquities of he.

Phayre, Lieut. Yognial PCa Bes Remarks on an Inser iption
from Pagan,

— Memo. on coins ound near “Mer oul,

Punawa, XIII.

Rajendr alala Mitra, Babu, On Bhoja Raja of Dhar and his
homonyms, ! 91,

on the Taxila Inscription, | : 151,

on two Sanscrit Inscriptions from Central Tndia,..

Rajoir, Antiquities of, XX. seq.

Roberts, Miss, account of the ruins ae Shaniih. CIX.

Sahet Mahet or Sravasti, the site of,

Saint Martin’s Opinion as to the regions called Utama in Teoma
Thsang’s time,

Sarnath, ieuddier remains ath, KOVAL

Son Baander Cave, X XI. XXIV.

Sprenger, Dr. A., Literary Intelligence,

Sravactl ‘Sige of, ae

Strabo’s eeorrret of Aornos, ae

Surajkund and its Fair, XIII.

Takhti Bai hill,

Teiffenthaler, nonce of Bho; jas,

Thomas, E. Esq, , Excavations carried at Sarnath, “under, OXVI.

Tickell, Lieut.-Col. S. R., List of the kings of Arakan, :

age
13

Index. Vil

Page

Titartwa, Inscription and ruins of, XX XVIII. Ase
Tod, Col., List of Bhoja ro Ane we ae nO
tana, a a oe een Ie

Vaisah, LIT. . ny eee
Weber, Dr. A., “On the Kaushitaki Upanishad, tat Oo
— On Chhandogya Upanishad ‘Translation, ... moe sty

Whitney, Professor, Letter on the publication of the Pratisa-
khyas, &e., yale
Wilson, Professor, on the date of the Bhoja Rajah, Oi
Wnenligen plain, notes on the mounds of the, ar 1
Zeda, Inscription found at, Uae i Aue 5

INDEX IV.
GENERAL.

Asiatic Society Annual Report of, ... 21
-—— Proceedings of, ute 21, 65, 173, 288, 43 1
Correspondence with Auxiliar y (Clomummnsies at fGiiore! 5a PASS)
Lahore Committee, Correspondence with, 1b.
library, Asiatic Society’s, os 70, 185, ae 312, 317, 446
Members of the Asiatic Society, List of, 54:
Speke, Captain, Ba US)

Statement of Receipts and Disbursements for 1862, 37 seq.

ee a a a a a a a a a ae a aN

‘
1a

oy
valine:

par ie

tl

|

AMNH LIBRARY

ees
eee

fa

ENC Ie